|
|
UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
FORM 20-F
(Mark One)
¨ REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR (g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
OR
x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2018
OR
¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
OR
o SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
Commission file number: 001-10306
THE ROYAL BANK OF SCOTLAND GROUP plc
(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)
United Kingdom
(Jurisdiction of incorporation)
RBS Gogarburn, PO Box 1000, Edinburgh EH12 1HQ, United Kingdom
(Address of principal executive offices)
Aileen Taylor, Chief Governance Officer and Board Counsel, Tel: +44 (0) 131 626 4099, Fax: +44 (0) 131 626 3081
PO Box 1000, Gogarburn, Edinburgh EH12 1HQ
(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)
Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
|
|
Name of each exchange on which |
Title of each class |
|
registered |
|
|
|
American Depositary Shares, each representing 2 ordinary shares, nominal value £1 per share |
|
New York Stock Exchange* |
Ordinary shares, nominal value £1 per share |
|
|
American Depositary Shares Series U each representing one Non-Cumulative Dollar Preference Share, Series U |
|
New York Stock Exchange* |
Dollar Perpetual Regulatory Tier 1 Securities |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
5.625% Senior Notes due 2020 |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
6.125% Senior Notes due 2021 |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
6.125% Subordinated Tier 2 Notes due 2022 |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
6.000% Subordinated Tier 2 Notes due 2023 |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
6.100% Subordinated Tier 2 Notes due 2023 |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
3.875% Senior Notes due 2023 |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
3.498% Fixed Rate / Floating Rate Senior Notes due 2023 |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
4.519% Fixed Rate / Floating Rate Senior Notes due 2024 |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
5.076% Fixed Rate / Floating Rate Senior Notes due 2030 |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
Senior Floating Rate Notes due 2023 |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
Senior Floating Rate Notes due 2024 |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
5.125% Subordinated Tier 2 Notes due 2024 |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
4.892% Fixed Rate / Floating Rate Senior Notes due 2029 |
|
New York Stock Exchange |
Leveraged CPI Linked Securities due January 13, 2020 |
|
NYSE MKT |
* Not for trading, but only in connection with the registration of American Depositary Shares representing such ordinary shares or non-cumulative dollar preference shares, as applicable, pursuant to the requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission.
Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:
None
Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act:
Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Additional Tier 1 Capital Notes callable 2020 Irish Stock Exchange
Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Additional Tier 1 Capital Notes callable 2021 Irish Stock Exchange
Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Additional Tier 1 Capital Notes callable 2025 Irish Stock Exchange
Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuers classes of capital or common stock as of December 31, 2018, the close of the period covered by the annual report:
(Title of each class) |
|
(Number of outstanding shares) |
Ordinary shares of £1 each 11% cumulative preference shares 5½% cumulative preference shares Non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series U |
|
12,048,605,298 500,000 400,000 10,130 |
Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.
x Yes o No
If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
o Yes x No
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.
x Yes o No
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).
x Yes o No
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or an emerging growth company. See the definitions of large accelerated filer, accelerated filer, and emerging growth company in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.
x Large accelerated filer |
o Accelerated filer |
o Non-accelerated filer |
o Emerging growth company |
If an emerging growth company that prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. o
The term new or revised financial accounting standard refers to any update issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board to its Accounting Standards Codification after April 5, 2012.
Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:
o U.S. GAAP
x International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board
o Other
If Other has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow.
o Item 17 o Item 18
If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).
o Yes x No
SEC Form 20-F cross reference guide
Item
|
|
Item Caption |
|
Pages |
PART I |
|
|
|
|
1 |
|
Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers |
|
Not applicable |
2 |
|
Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable |
|
Not applicable |
3 |
|
Key Information Selected financial data Capitalisation and indebtedness Reasons for the offer and use of proceeds Risk factors |
|
38-45, 180-185, 251-262 Not applicable Not applicable 31-33, 265-275 |
4 |
|
Information on the Company History and development of the Company Business overview Organisational structure Property, plant and equipment |
|
7-10, 30, 36, 97-99, 113, 186-187, 197, 223, 232, 286 1-37, 40, 97-99, 104-119, 198, 277 25, 34, 36-37, 117, Exhibit 8.1 13-14, 34, 187, 229 |
4a |
|
Unresolved Staff Comments |
|
Not applicable |
5 |
|
Operating and Financial Review and Prospects Operating results Liquidity and capital resources Research and development, patents, licences etc Trend information Off-balance sheet arrangements Tabular disclosure of contractual obligations |
|
1-30, 36-58, 163-176 5-11, 21-33, 167-168, 192-202, 239 30, 38-39, 109-122, 165, 180-185, 207-209, 218-222, 225-226, 241 Not applicable 1-34, 36-37 114, 123, 233-239 119-122, 229, 233 |
6 |
|
Directors, Senior Management and Employees Directors and senior management Compensation Board practices Employees Share ownership |
|
35, 59-60, 99 80-94, 199-203, 240 35, 59-73, 99 16-18, 97-98, 183 81-91, 186, 194 |
7 |
|
Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions Major shareholders Related party transactions Interests of experts and counsel |
|
99, 276, 279 240 Not applicable |
8 |
|
Financial Information Consolidated statements and other financial information Significant changes |
|
36-58, 180-186 2, 8, 36, 61, |
9 |
|
The Offer and Listing Offer and listing details Plan of distribution Markets Selling shareholders Dilution Expenses of the issue |
|
99, 227-228, 281 Not applicable 95-96, 281-282 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable |
10 |
|
Additional information Share capital Memorandum and articles of association Material contracts Exchange controls Taxation Dividends and paying agents Statement of experts Documents on display Subsidiary information |
|
Not applicable 285-292 279 285 283-285 Not applicable Not applicable 292 Not applicable |
11 |
|
Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk |
|
107, 112, 117, 123-171. 163-172, 207-220, 251-262 |
12 |
|
Description of Securities other than Equity Securities |
|
264 |
PART II |
|
|
|
|
13 |
|
Defaults, Dividend Arrearages and Delinquencies |
|
Not applicable |
14 |
|
Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds |
|
Not applicable |
15 |
|
Controls and Procedures |
|
31, 33, 35, 66-72, 95, 178-179, Exhibits 12.1 and 12.2 |
16 |
|
[Reserved] |
|
|
16a |
|
Audit Committee financial expert |
|
66 |
16b |
|
Code of ethics |
|
18-20, 97-98, 276 |
16c |
|
Principal Accountant Fees and services |
|
68, 203 |
16d |
|
Exemptions from the Listing Standards |
|
Not applicable |
16e |
|
Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchasers |
|
Not applicable |
16f |
|
Change in Registrants Certifying Accountant |
|
Not applicable |
16g |
|
Corporate Governance |
|
35, 59-64, 98-100 |
16h |
|
Mine Safety Disclosure |
|
Not applicable |
|
|
|
|
|
PART III |
|
|
|
|
17 |
|
Financial Statements |
|
Not applicable |
18 |
|
Financial Statements |
|
178-249 |
19 |
|
Exhibits |
|
294-295 |
Forward-looking statements
Cautionary statement regarding forward-looking statements
Certain sections in this document contain forward-looking statements as that term is defined in the United States Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, such as statements that include the words expect, estimate, project, anticipate, commit, believe, should, intend, plan, could, probability, risk, Value-at-Risk (VaR), target, goal, objective, may, endeavour, outlook, optimistic, prospects and similar expressions or variations on these expressions.
In particular, this document includes forward-looking statements relating, but not limited to: future profitability and performance, including financial performance targets such as return on tangible equity; cost savings and targets, including cost:income ratios; litigation and government and regulatory investigations, including the timing and financial and other impacts thereof; the implementation of the Alternative Remedies Package; the continuation of the Groups balance sheet reduction programme, including the reduction of risk-weighted assets (RWAs) and the timing thereof; capital and strategic plans and targets; capital, liquidity and leverage ratios and requirements, including CET1 Ratio, RWA equivalents (RWAe), Pillar 2 and other regulatory buffer requirements, minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities, and other funding plans; funding and credit risk profile; capitalisation; portfolios; net interest margin; customer loan and income growth; the level and extent of future impairments and write-downs, including with respect to goodwill; restructuring and remediation costs and charges; the Groups exposure to political risk, economic risk, climate change risk, operational risk, conduct risk, cyber and IT risk and credit rating risk and to various types of market risks, including interest rate risk, foreign exchange rate risk and commodity and equity price risk; customer experience including our Net Promotor Score (NPS); employee engagement and gender balance in leadership positions.
Limitations inherent to forward-looking statements
These statements are based on current plans, estimates, targets and projections, and are subject to significant inherent risks, uncertainties and other factors, both external and relating to the Groups strategy or operations, which may result in the Group being unable to achieve the current targets, predictions, expectations and other anticipated outcomes expressed or implied by such forward-looking statements. In addition, certain of these disclosures are dependent on choices relying on key model characteristics and assumptions and are subject to various limitations, including assumptions and estimates made by management. By their nature, certain of these disclosures are only estimates and, as a result, actual future gains and losses could differ materially from those that have been estimated. Accordingly, undue reliance should not be placed on these statements. Forward-looking statements speak only as of the date we make them and we expressly disclaim any obligation or undertaking to release publicly any updates or revisions to any forward-looking statements contained herein to reflect any change in the Groups expectations with regard thereto or any change in events, conditions or circumstances on which any such statement is based.
Important factors that could affect the actual outcome of the forward-looking statements
We caution you that a large number of important factors could adversely affect our results or our ability to implement our strategy, cause us to fail to meet our targets, predictions, expectations and other anticipated outcomes or affect the accuracy of forward-looking statements we describe in this document, including in the risk factors and other uncertainties set out in the document and other risk factors and uncertainties discussed in this document. These include the significant risks for the Group presented by: operational and IT resilience risk (including in respect of: the Group being subject to cyberattacks; operational risks inherent in the Groups business; the Groups operations being highly dependent on its IT systems; the Group relying on attracting, retaining and developing senior management and skilled personnel and maintaining good employee relations; the Groups risk management framework; and reputational risk), economic and political risk (including in respect of: the uncertainties surrounding the UKs withdrawal from the European Union; increased political and economic risks and uncertainty in the UK and global markets; climate change and the transition to a low carbon economy; HM Treasurys ownership of RBSG and the possibility that it may exert a significant degree of influence over the Group; continued low interest rates and changes in foreign currency exchange rates), financial resilience risk (including in respect of: the Groups ability to meet targets and make discretionary capital distributions to shareholders; the highly competitive markets in which the Group operates; deterioration in borrower and counterparty credit quality; the ability of the Group to meet prudential regulatory requirements for capital and MREL, or to manage its capital effectively; the ability of the Group to access adequate sources of liquidity and funding; changes in the credit ratings of RBSG, any of its subsidiaries or any of its respective debt securities; the Groups ability to meet requirements of regulatory stress tests; possible losses or the requirement to maintain higher levels of capital as a result of limitations or failure of various models; sensitivity of the Groups financial statements to underlying accounting policies, judgements, assumptions and estimates; changes in applicable accounting policies or rules; the value or effectiveness of any credit protection purchased by the Group; the level and extent of future impairments and write-downs, including with respect to goodwill; and the application of UK statutory stabilisation or resolution powers) and legal, regulatory and conduct risk (including in respect of: the Groups businesses being subject to substantial regulation and oversight; legal, regulatory and governmental actions and investigations; the replacement of LIBOR, EURIBOR and other benchmark rates; heightened regulatory and governmental scrutiny (including by competition authorities); implementation of the Alternative Remedies Package and the costs related thereto; and changes in tax legislation).
The forward-looking statements contained in this document speak only as at the date hereof, and the Group does not assume or undertake any obligation or responsibility to update any forward-looking statement to reflect events or circumstances after the date hereof or to reflect the occurrence of unanticipated events.
The information, statements and opinions contained in this document do not constitute a public offer under any applicable legislation or an offer to sell or solicit of any offer to buy any securities or financial instruments or any advice or recommendation with respect to such securities or other financial instruments.
Presentation of information
In this document, and unless specified otherwise, the term company or RBSG means The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc, RBS, RBS Group or the Group means the company and its subsidiaries, the Royal Bank or RBS plc means The Royal Bank of Scotland plc; NWH Ltd means NatWest Holdings Limited; and NatWest means National Westminster Bank Plc.
The company publishes its financial statements in pounds sterling (£ or sterling). The abbreviations £m and £bn represent millions and thousands of millions of pounds sterling, respectively, and references to pence represent pence in the United Kingdom (UK). Reference to dollars or $ are to United States of America (US) dollars. The abbreviations $m and $bn represent millions and thousands of millions of dollars, respectively, and references to cents represent cents in the US. The abbreviation represents the euro, and the abbreviations m and bn represent millions and thousands of millions of euros, respectively.
Any information contained on websites linked or reports referenced in this annual report on Form 20-F is for information only and shall not be deemed to be incorporated by reference herein.
Non-GAAP financial information
RBS prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB which constitutes a body of generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). This document contains a number of non-GAAP (or non-IFRS) financial measures. A non-GAAP financial measure is defined as one that measures historical or future financial performance, financial position or cash flows but which excludes or includes amounts that would not be so adjusted in the most comparable GAAP measure.
The non-GAAP financial measures used in this document generally exclude certain items which management believe are not representative of the underlying performance of the business and which distort period-on-period comparison. These measures are used internally by management, in conjunction with IFRS financial measures, to measure performance and make decisions regarding the future direction of the business. Management believes these non-GAAP financial measures, when provided in combination with reported IFRS results, provide helpful supplementary information for investors. These non-GAAP financial measures are not a substitute for, and should be read in conjunction with, reported IFRS financial measures.
The main non-GAAP measures used in this document include:
· Performance, funding and credit metrics such as return on tangible equity, and related RWA equivalents incorporating the effect of capital deductions (RWAes), total assets excluding derivatives (funded assets), net interest margin (NIM) adjusted for items designated at fair value through profit or loss (non-statutory NIM), operating expenses analysis, and cost:income ratio and loan:deposit ratio. These are internal metrics used to measure business performance; and
· Personal & Business Banking (PBB) franchise results, combining the reportable segments of UK Personal & Business Banking (UK PBB) and Ulster Bank RoI, and Commercial & Private Banking (CPB) franchise results, combining the reportable segments of Commercial Banking and Private Banking, which are presented to provide investors with a summary of the Groups business performance.
· The Commercial Banking, Private Banking, RBS International and NatWest Markets operating segment period on period comparison is impacted by a number of business transfers executed in preparation for ring-fencing. Commentary on the movements in the period for these segments has been adjusted for these items and reconciliation notes are provided.
· The Group also presents a pro forma CET1 ratio which is on an adjusted basis. This has not been prepared in accordance with Regulation S-X and should be read in conjunction with the notes provided, as well as the section Forward-looking statements on page 1 of this document.
Key operating indicators
This document includes a number of operational metrics which management believes may be helpful to investors in understanding the Groups business, including the Groups position against its own targets. These metrics include performance, funding and credit metrics such as return on tangible equity and related RWA equivalents incorporating the effect of capital deductions (RWAes), total assets excluding derivatives (funded assets) and net interest margin (NIM) adjusted for items designated at fair value through profit or loss (non-statutory NIM), cost:income ratio, and loan:deposit ratio. These are internal metrics used to measure business performance.
Capital and liquidity measures
Certain liquidity and capital measures and ratios are presented in this document as management believes they are helpful for investors understanding of the liquidity and capital profile of the business and the Groups position against its own targets and applicable regulatory requirements. Some of these measures are used by management for risk management purposes and may not be required to be disclosed by a government, governmental authority or self-regulatory organisation. As a result, the basis of calculation of these measures may not be the same as that used by the Groups peers. These capital and liquidity measures and ratios include: the liquidity coverage ratio, stressed outflow coverage and net stable funding ratio.
Recent developments
Update on NatWest Markets transfer scheme
In anticipation of the UK's departure from the European Union on 29 March 2019, the RBS Group has been making its Dutch subsidiary, NatWest Markets N.V., operationally ready to serve NatWest Markets Plc customers who are incorporated or located in the European Economic Area (EEA). On 22 February 2019 the Court of Session in Scotland approved the RBS Group's petition for an order under Part VII of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 for the replication of master trade documentation for non-UK EEA customers and the transfer of certain existing transactions of EEA customers from NatWest Markets Plc to NatWest Markets N.V. (the Scheme). The effective dates of the Scheme will now be as follows:
(i) 22 March 2019 - for Phase 1 of the Scheme, where master documentation with NatWest Markets Plc will be replicated with NatWest Markets N.V.; and
(ii) a date between 23 March and 31 December 2019 - for Phase 2 of the Scheme, which will transfer certain existing transactions for some EEA customers (as at the Phase 2 Effective Date) from NatWest Markets Plc to NatWest Markets N.V. The flexibility of Phase 2 is designed to take advantage of any transitional period or other possible outcomes of the Brexit negotiations. NatWest Markets Plc and NatWest Markets N.V. will provide non-UK EEA customers with ten business days notice.
We are a financial services company, providing a wide range of products and services to personal, commercial, large corporate and institutional customers.
Our purpose is to serve customers well. We are building a safe, simple and customer-focused bank. To do so we are doing business in a way that aligns with our values and considers the longer-term impacts of our decisions and actions. Underpinning that ambition is our blueprint for lasting success.
Assurance
The scope of work performed by the Groups independent auditor as part of their review of other information included in the 2018 Annual Report and Accounts is described in the Independent auditors report to the members of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc on pages 178 to 179. In addition, The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc appointed Ernst & Young LLP to provide limited independent assurance over selected sustainability content marked with (*) within the Strategic Report, as at and for the period ended 31 December 2018. The assurance engagement was planned and performed in accordance with the International Standard for Assurance Engagements (ISAE) 3000 Revised, Assurance Engagements Other Than Audits or Reviews of Historical Financial Information. An opinion was issued and is available on rbs.com. This opinion includes details of the scope, respective responsibilities, work performed, limitations and conclusions.
Further information on environmental, social, employee and human rights matters is available on the Sustainable Banking webpages on rbs.com.
Why go online?
Many shareholders are now benefitting from more accessible information and helping the environment too. If you havent already tried it, visit our online Annual Report.
rbs.com/annualreport
Strategic Report |
| |
|
| |
|
| |
An overview of our business performance, including our external operating environment and how we are building a more sustainable bank. |
|
2018 highlights |
5 |
|
Chairmans statement |
7 |
|
Chief Executives review |
9 |
|
Our operating environment |
11 |
|
Building a more sustainable bank |
15 |
|
Our business performance |
25 |
|
Our investment case and outlook |
29 |
|
Risk overview |
31 |
|
Governance at a glance |
35 |
Business Review
The financial performance of our business and our operating segments. | |
|
|
Governance
A detailed review of our corporate governance and remuneration, including the Report of the directors and annual report on remuneration. | |
|
|
Capital and risk management
Disclosures on our capital, liquidity and funding position and a detailed overview of the management of key risks relating to our business operations. | |
|
|
Financial Statements
Our audited financial statements and related notes, including our Independent auditors report. | |
|
|
Risk Factors
A description of certain risk factors that could adversely affect our future results, financial condition and prospects and cause them to be materially different. |
Approval of Strategic Report
The Strategic Report for the year ended 31 December 2018 set out on pages 4 to 36 was approved by the Board of directors on 14 February 2019.
By order of the Board.
Company Secretary
Aileen Taylor
14 February 2019
Chairman |
Executive directors |
Non-executive directors |
2018 Highlights
How we have performed on Our Priorities
Note:
(1) Based on end-point Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR) Tier 1 capital and leverage exposure under the CRR Delegated Act.
(2) Return on tangible equity is calculated using profit for the period attributable to ordinary shareholders.
In 2018 the bank delivered a good financial performance, despite an uncertain economic outlook and a highly competitive environment. Paying a dividend for the first time in a decade showed continued progress in building a stronger, safer bank that is capable of delivering improving returns for shareholders.
A pre-tax operating profit of £3.4 billion and an attributable profit of £1.6 billion represent a more consistent financial performance, following a return to profitability in 2017. We achieved that improvement through stable income generation - despite the low interest rate environment as well as by reducing operating costs and de-risking the balance sheet further.
With the bank financially stronger and the largest legacy issues resolved, the Board and Management Team are focused on delivering a more consistent and improved level of customer service across all areas. Customers expectations of all service providers are high and the range of competitors in the market using diverse delivery mechanisms is as wide as it has ever been.
Shareholder returns and privatisation
Our stronger financial position has enabled us to provide clarity on how we intend to return excess capital to shareholders. We believe that to sustain a sound bank of this kind we need a strong capital base. We paid our first ordinary dividend in a decade of 2 pence per share at our 2018 interim results. We are pleased to announce that, subject to shareholder approval being obtained at the 2019 Annual General Meeting, we will pay a final dividend of 3.5 pence per share and a special dividend of 7.5 pence per share. Together this will mean over £1.6 billion in capital returns to shareholders for the Financial Year 2018. We expect to maintain ordinary dividends of around 40% of attributable profit.
The bank received approval from shareholders on 6 February to buyback shares - equivalent to 4.99% of the Groups issued share capital - from HM Treasury. Any buyback of these shares will be at the discretion of HM Treasury, however this approval provides another mechanism to return excess capital to shareholders in an efficient way.
The journey towards a return to private ownership continues and further progress was made in 2018. In June, the government undertook a further sell down of its majority stake in the bank, selling 925 million shares, raising total proceeds of £2.5 billion, and reducing its stake to 62.3%. In addition, the Chancellor indicated in the Autumn Budget that the UK government plans fully to exit its ownership of RBS by 2024.
Brexit and the economy
The Brexit process continues and we have planned for a range of scenarios associated with exiting the European Union. We have put in place plans that will enable us to continue to serve our customers in continental Europe. We have our Dutch Banking entity in Amsterdam and we are in the final stages of seeking approval for two branches in Frankfurt, which we expect to be operationally ready if required, to support among other things the continued clearing of euro payments. These actions are prudent given the uncertainty and will allow us to serve our large corporate customers in Western Europe while we wait for clarity on the terms of the deal.
In the UK, we are seeing large corporate customers delay investment decisions until they have more detail on the outcome of the Brexit process. As one of the largest commercial lenders in the UK we recognise our responsibility to provide support at a highly uncertain time.
As a predominantly UK and RoI focused bank, our performance and lending growth will broadly reflect those economies. UK economic growth remained behind its long term average in 2018. While the inflationary pressure induced by sterlings depreciation post the EU referendum subsided, consumer confidence remains muted. It remains to be seen what fiscal and monetary policy levers the Bank of England will pull in the event of an economic downturn, but lower interest rates for longer would affect the banks ability to deliver significant income growth.
Progress on resolving our legacy issues
The bank resolved its remaining major legacy issues in 2018. We settled the US Department of Justice investigations into our historic (pre-2007) activities in the US RMBS market in August 2018. While settling this long-running issue was welcome, the £3.6 billion settlement was a stark reminder of how in the past this bank failed to put the interests of customers first.
We have seen good progress on the revised scheme to satisfy our remaining State Aid obligations. In 2017, Her Majestys Treasury agreed with the European Commission a two part scheme comprising of a Capability & Innovation Fund, and an incentivised transfer of some of our Small and Medium sized Enterprise customers who were due to move to Williams & Glyn. We welcome the progress that the independent body Banking Competition Remedies Ltd has made and are operationally ready to fully support the switching scheme and impacted customers at its launch.
Ring-fence regulation
In 2018, we continued to reshape the bank in response to UK ring-fencing legislation. This involved transferring 4.5 million customers between different legal entities. In July, we reached a key milestone when the Scottish Court approved the banks request to transfer the customers who were affected by a change in legal entity. We also introduced some significant changes to the way our Boards operate to comply with regulatory requirements. We met the PRA deadline on 1 January 2019 and are fully ring-fence compliant. This has been a complex project and I am pleased it has been undertaken with minimal impact on customers.
Building a more sustainable bank and community engagement
We are aware of our responsibilities to the communities we serve, given the central role we play in the economy. In 2018 we provided £30.4 billion in gross new lending to UK homeowners and supported over £100 billion of lending to UK businesses, as we helped our customer continue to grow.
Our volunteering and fundraising partnerships continue to make a difference for the communities we serve. In 2018, our employees supported a wide variety of charities raising £4.4 million through their giving and fundraising efforts. Our flagship financial education programme, MoneySense, met its annual targets. Since 2015, we have reached 1.8 million young people and RBS employees have supported 59,000 in-school workshops.
Last year, we witnessed a growing focus on climate change from regulators and investors. In 2017, the bank publicly committed its support of the Financial Stability Boards Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) - a voluntary set of guidelines encouraging consistent climate-related disclosures in annual reporting. We have now committed a further £10 billion to the Sustainable Energy sector by 2020. This will include continued financing of low carbon generation as well as energy efficiency projects, such as in the real estate sector, and alternative fuelled vehicles.
Shareholders
We have continued to engage actively with our shareholders. A resolution to establish a formal Shareholder Committee was requisitioned by a group of shareholders at our AGM in 2018. It did not receive approval, in part, we believe, because we have made efforts to engage with shareholders large and small. Our investor relations efforts are highly rated. Our Sustainable Banking Committee has met a wide range of stakeholders for a number of years. Last year we held retail shareholder events in Glasgow and Birmingham. The events gave shareholders the opportunity to meet with our Board and ask questions on performance and strategy. Feedback was positive and we plan to hold more events in 2019.
Diversity and inclusion
In 2014, we set ourselves a target to have at least 30% of roles in the three most senior levels of each of our businesses filled by women by 2020. In 2018, on aggregate across the bank, this representation stands at 37%. We also are aspiring to achieve full gender balance at all levels of our business by 2030.
We are focused on becoming a more ethnically diverse organisation, to reflect the communities in which we operate. We introduced formal UK targets in 2017 to improve the proportion of non-white colleagues in our top 4 leadership layers, to at least 14% by 2025, and are already making good progress against this, with 8% representation.
Board changes
We were pleased to welcome Patrick Flynn to the Board on 1 June 2018. Patricks appointment further strengthens our overall board composition and supports succession planning. Brendan Nelson will step down as Chairman of the Group Audit Committee with effect from 31 March 2019 at which time Patrick will assume the role of Chairman of the Group Audit Committee. Brendan has indicated that he will not stand for re-election at the 2019 Annual General Meeting. Id like to thank Brendan for his significant contribution since joining the Board as a Non-Executive Director in 2010. The Board and the wider organisation have benefited from his extensive knowledge and experience and his presence will be greatly missed.
Penny Hughes resigned as a non- executive director on 30 May and Ewen Stevenson resigned as Chief Financial Officer and Director on 30 September. I would like to thank Penny and Ewen for all their hard work and dedication to RBS.
As a result of Ewens resignation we appointed Katie Murray as Chief Financial Officer, effective from 1 January 2019. Katie brings nearly 30 years of finance and accounting experience in capital management, investor relations and financial planning to the role. She has already contributed significantly to RBS over the last three years.
Conclusion
Overall, the Board is pleased with the banks performance in 2018 during a period of significant uncertainty in the macroeconomic environment. We dealt with our last major outstanding legacy issue, reduced our cost base, delivered lending growth in a tough operating environment and paid our first dividend in a decade. We still have more work to do to reach our 2020 ambitions, but we continue to make good progress on improving returns for shareholders and delivering better service for customers.
2018 was a year of strong progress on our strategy - we settled our remaining major legacy issues, paid our first dividend in ten years and delivered another full year bottom line profit. However, while our financial performance is more assured, we know that a significant gap remains to achieving our ambition to be the best bank for customers. We are fully focused on closing this gap.
Today we are reporting a pre-tax operating profit of £3.4 billion and a bottom line attributable profit of £1.6 billion for 2018. In addition, we are pleased to propose a full year ordinary dividend of 3.5 pence per share, and a special dividend of 7.5 pence per share. These are in addition to the ordinary dividend we paid at our interim results. Together, we will have returned £1.6 billion to shareholders, and around £1 billion to the UK taxpayer in dividends. We also have shareholder approval to participate in a directed buyback should the government seek to dispose of a portion of its shares.
The UK economy faces a heightened level of uncertainty related to the ongoing Brexit negotiations. We have continued to support our customers, providing £30.4 billion in gross new UK mortgage lending in 2018, and Commercial Banking made or renewed commitments of around £30 billion of term lending facilities to mainly UK businesses. Our Commercial and Business Banking businesses supported total lending of more than £100 billion in 2018.
We have also committed an additional £2 billion to our Growth Fund to support British business, taking the total fund to £3 billion. This fund is helping businesses manage their supply chains in what is a very uncertain time. These actions help maintain our position as the largest supporter of UK business.
A good financial performance in uncertain economic conditions
Our financial performance is good, given the uncertain economic outlook. In 2018, we continued to take costs out of the business and reduced operating expenses by £278 million. This means that we have now reduced operating costs by more than £4 billion in five years.
Our long-term target remains to reach a cost to income ratio of below 50%, however we note that as an industry we are required to carry additional costs to deal with Brexit and the ongoing operational obligations of ring- fencing. Given the continued low rate environment and highly competitive mortgage market, coupled with the uncertainty in the economy, income remains under pressure. We continue to focus on cost reduction to ensure we are preparing our business for the future and to meet our customers and shareholders needs.
In 2019, we are committing to reducing our operating costs by c.£300 million. Our consistent delivery on cost targets in recent years gives me the confidence we will achieve this.
Our strategic plan has served us well and we will continue to focus on our five key priorities, as set out below, as we strive to become the UK and Republic of Irelands best bank for customers.
Strength and Sustainability
The banks financial strength is much improved. Our Common Equity Tier 1 ratio has increased from 8.6% at the end of 2013 to 16.2% at the end of 2018. This progress helped us to obtain a clear pass in the 2018 Bank of England stress test - a very important milestone. Alongside our financial strength we have continued to build greater resilience into our systems, helping to protect our customers who are at greater risk of fraud and scams more than ever before. We are the first and only UK bank to partner with National Trading Standards on their Friends Against Scams initiative. More than 31,000 colleagues completed the training in 2018 and we have committed to training a million customers by 2020.
Customer Experience
While our financial performance is more assured, we know that a significant gap remains to achieving our ambition to be the best bank for customers. We are very aware that we need to deliver
better service, more consistently. The Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) results, which now provide the public with a ranking of banks performance for customers, bring this into sharp focus. With the large major legacy issues behind us, we are putting all of our focus into improving our customer experience.
We are investing in innovation, with £1 billion committed to invest in 2019 aimed at improving legacy systems and delivering better solutions for customers. We continue to develop our mobile app which for NatWest now scores +41 for customer advocacy.
Our Commercial Bank, the UKs largest supporter of business, remains ahead of the rest of the market for customer advocacy and in Coutts we have a market leading private banking brand.
Customers want and need to do their banking quickly and safely. When we help them to do this, and combine it with expert advice, we see advocacy scores increase. That is how we are focusing the business, and we are confident the changes we are making will deliver a consistently higher quality of service.
Simplifying the Bank
We are a simpler bank, but we cant yet call ourselves simple to deal with. While we are now more efficient with a lower cost base, as we have shrunk in size, many of our processes are still too difficult for our customers to deal with, and are frustrating for our colleagues as they try to serve our customers.
Whether it is booking travel, watching a film or shopping online, customers now expect a fast and reliable service. Banking is no different from any other customer focused industry, and we are responding to those changes in customer behaviour.
Our first digital lending journey for Commercial Banking customers is now live. The new platform allows existing customers to apply digitally for secured and unsecured loans up to £750,000, subject to eligibility criteria. Customers are able to complete their loan application in a matter of minutes, and usually get a decision in principle within 24 hours. We have simplified and streamlined the customer experience, giving our customers a rapid response, all the while supported by the vast industry knowledge and insight of our Relationship Managers.
We are also embracing artificial intelligence (AI), which is helping us lower our cost base and deliver a 24/7 customer experience . Take Cora for instance our AI Chat Bot which we launched in partnership with IBM Watson - she now handles an average of 83,000 queries a week. Given the success in the personal business, we have recently rolled out Cora to Commercial Banking.
Supporting sustainable growth
Supporting our customers ambitions is a key part of our role in society. We have focused on growing lending in our target markets. Gross mortgage lending in UK Personal and Business Banking increased £1.5 billion in 2018, and we helped around 45,000 customers buy their first home. Our support doesnt only extend to lending, we now have 12 NatWest accelerators. These hubs make up the UKs largest fully-funded business accelerator network, capable of supporting up to 1,000 entrepreneurs.
NatWest Markets continued to support large corporate customers with a range of financing needs in 2018. Our FX team was voted number one for customer satisfaction in the 2017 Greenwich Associates FX Survey and we helped clients raise £312 billion on the debt capital markets.
Employee engagement
The turnaround of the bank would not have been possible without the hard work and determination of our colleagues. Over the last four years we have seen a significant reduction in the number of roles across the bank, as a result of divestment and restructuring aligned to our strategy. Despite this activity, colleague engagement is at its highest level since we started measuring in 2002. The independent Banking Standards Board report on culture also showed improvements in every category. Of course, there is always more we can do, and we have set stretching targets as we strive to become a more diverse and inclusive organisation.
Innovating and investing to improve customer service
We have taken a dual approach to innovation by transforming our core banking services and delivering new products and services outside of traditional banking. In 2018, we continued to invest in our existing infrastructure, improving system resilience and migrating to latest in cloud technologies. Last year we experienced 19 Criticality 1 Incidents, compared to 318 four years ago.
Our customers continued to migrate to our mobile app during 2018. In UK PBB we now have 6.4 million regular mobile customers, 16% higher than 2017.
Today close to three quarters of active current account customers in UK PBB are regular digital users. Sales through our digital channels in UK PBB are up 19% on last year and now represent almost half of all product sales. Four years ago this figure would have been 26%.
At the same time we are trying new things outside our core banking services. We are piloting Bó and Mettle as two standalone digital banks. Bó is our digital personal bank targeted at helping people to manage their money better. Mettle is our digital bank for business customers.
We are learning a lot from these innovations and applying our findings back into the core bank.
These innovations complement the wider eco-systems that we want to build around key customer experiences be it buying a home, or running a business. Building or acquiring complementary services to the core banking services we already offer in these areas will allow us to deepen our relationships with customers, and ultimately grow revenue.
2019, a year of focusing forward
In 2019, we will focus forward, into a rapidly changing market. We have set annual goals for 2019 based around our five priorities in order to keep up momentum on the delivery of our strategic plan. There are two areas in particular that we need to focus on customer experience and simplifying the bank. This year we aim to spend £1 billion on upgrading legacy infrastructure, improving systems, processes and delivering new innovations which will improve our customers experience. We will simplify the bank further in 2019, given this we have set a operating cost reduction target of c.£300 million for 2019, and continue to strive for a sub 50% cost to income ratio.
We have made good progress on making RBS a much simpler, safer and more customer focused bank. From a position of capital strength, we will aim to improve returns for you, our shareholders.
Our operating environment
Key economic indicators
UK GDP grew by 1.4% in 2018, down from a 1.8% rise in 2017. Weaker business investment has been a contributing factor. Between Q3 2018 and Q4 2018, business investment fell by 1.4%, the fourth consecutive quarterly decline, meaning investment was 3.7% lower in Q4 2018 compared with a year previously. Business borrowing increased slightly towards the end of 2018, with loans to non-financial companies up 2.6% in the year to December 2018, compared with 2.1% at the end of 2017. However, within that, it was larger firms who were primarily responsible for the growth in lending (up 4% in the year to December 2018). In comparison, SMEs loan growth was 0.1% year on year. Annual inflation hovered just above the Monetary Policy Committees target in December 2018, at 2.1%.
The labour market remained strong with employment rising further to a new record 32.5 million in the three months to November 2018 compared to 32.2 million for the three months to November 2017. This helped push unemployment down to 4.0% in the three months of November 2018, compared to 4.4% at the end of 2017. Pay growth rose to 3.4% in the three months to November 2018 and vacancies reached new highs. The Bank of Englands mounting concerns that the pace of activity is exceeding the potential growth rate of the UK economy prompted a rise in the Bank Rate to 0.75% in August 2018, the second increase since November 2017. However, the Bank of England signalled it expects UK economic growth to slow again in 2019 and therefore envisages any further tightening to be gradual and limited, contingent on the nature of the UKs withdrawal from the EU.
Key influences in our operating environment
The environment in which we operate influences our ability to serve customers and create value for the long term.
Every year we assess the importance and materiality of external influences both in terms of their relevance to our stakeholders (including customers, investors, policy makers, bank representatives and topic specialists) and their potential commercial impact on the bank.
In 2018 the key influences review involved interviews with internal and external stakeholders and a cross-bank workshop.
The results help evaluate our performance in the context of wider societal issues, inform the banks future strategy and stakeholder engagement.
For more on our key influences process refer to the Sustainable Banking pages on rbs.com
Understanding the key influences in our operating environment
Shorter term considerations
UK productivity & economic growth
The UK economy continued to grow in 2018, albeit below its long-term trend. RBSs performance is strongly tied to the economic performance of the UK economy. With the short and long-term outlook for the UK and global economy remaining uncertain, RBS recognises its role in supporting productivity and economic growth.
Political landscape
Political risks continue to evolve with uncertainties related to Brexit.
Generating sustained returns
To generate sustained returns to its stakeholders, RBS needs to have a robust business model with a well- managed cost base that adapts and responds to changing socio-economic and environmental factors.
Technology & innovation
Digital maturity is seen as critical to the future success of RBS as the banking sector goes through a period of rapid technological change. Together with digital innovation and ongoing efforts to reduce costs, there is potential for significant disruption to traditional banking business models.
Changing customer expectations
Customers lives are following less predictable paths. RBS needs to continue helping customers with new ways to bank while meeting personalised service expectations and catering to a broad range of lifestyles and differing levels of digital and financial understanding.
Competition
Regulators continue to encourage competition in the banking sector, with January 2018 seeing the arrival of Open Banking and Payment Services Directive 2 (PSD2). To respond to growing competitive pressures, RBS will need to continue to improve the banks products and services in order to increase market share.
Reputation & trust
A significant level of trust is required to ensure RBS is sustainable for the long term. Continued efforts to restore trust and safeguard reputation remain a key focus area.
Conduct & litigation
Although RBS has resolved the majority of legacy conduct issues and litigation costs are falling, the focus remains on putting in place and maintaining measures to prevent future issues related to conduct.
Cyber security
With the increasing possibility of significant scale attacks resulting in data breaches and ultimately, damaging consumer trust, RBS must continue to build on a multi-layered approach to cyber security and continue to take part in industry-wide initiatives to monitor and anticipate developments.
Operational resilience
2018 has seen heightened media coverage on the operational competency of UK banks, including data breaches and technology failures. To provide continuity of service for customers with minimal disruption, RBS must continue to monitor and assess a diverse array of threats, both external and internal, as well as developing, strengthening or adapting existing control capability to be able to absorb and adapt to such disruptions.
Banking regulation
RBS continues to operate in an increasingly complex regulatory environment. Regulatory and legislative focus is broadening from banking regulation to include non-banking specific regulation, for example relating to artificial intelligence and climate change.
Longer term considerations
Inclusion & diversity
Building a more inclusive RBS is essential for our customers and colleagues. We will only achieve our ambition to be number one for customer service, trust and advocacy if we understand the needs of all of our people and our customers.
Culture, engagement & wellbeing
A healthy culture and engagement are critical drivers for overall performance and wellbeing, underpinning the banks long-term success.
Skills, capabilities & reward
RBS faces competition for skilled people. Recruiting, developing and retaining talent remains a key priority.
Climate and sustainable finance
As the scientific evidence on climate change becomes even clearer, RBS needs to further embed climate risk in its existing risk management framework and proactively assist its customers and clients with the transition to a low carbon economy.
Financial capability
Against a backdrop of increased focus on debt, fraud and customers in vulnerable situations, RBS has a key role to play in supporting customers to use our various banking channels and manage money well on a day to day basis, through significant life events and during periods of financial difficulty.
Social inequality & financial exclusion
Squeezed incomes, the gig economy and rising cost of living means many UK consumers find themselves in precarious financial situations. Access to mainstream financial services coupled with a lack of digital footprint and skills remains a concern across a number of stakeholders.
Housing
Housing is a major expense for most people and in many parts of the UK there are concerns about the affordability, standard and availability of housing. RBS is a major mortgage provider and also lends to the housing and construction sectors.
Where to find out more
Creating a Healthy Culture
Building a healthy culture is one of our core priorities. We have clear cultural goals to reinforce Our Values and set ourselves cultural priorities each year, regularly engaging our management. We gather feedback from our colleagues through our listening strategy, and through metrics and key performance indicators to assess our progress and respond accordingly.
We do this along with feedback from regulators and industry bodies.
Almost 60,000, 80%, of our colleagues completed our most recent opinion survey, the highest participation in the last five years. The results were the most positive we have seen since we started measuring engagement in 2002 and showed we are changing the culture of the bank for the better. Key measures of engagement, leadership and our culture have improved significantly, and we are now above the global financial services norm in all of our comparable survey categories. The results are encouraging, and show that our hard work is paying off. However, we recognise that we have more to do to continue to nurture this culture, and we encourage colleagues to tell us what they think via the bi-annual colleague survey and our regular comments boards. When colleagues wish to report concerns relating to wrong doing or misconduct one of the ways in which they can do this is by raising their concerns via Speak Up, our whistleblowing service.
Our opinion survey has shown the highest ever score when asking colleagues if they feel safe to speak up, as well as understanding the process of how they do that. In 2018, 480 cases were raised compared to 290 in 2017.
Performance and Reward
Our approach to performance management provides clarity for our employees about how their contribution links to our ambition and all our employees have goals set across a balanced scorecard of measures. Further progress has been made in making sure employees are paid fairly for the work they do and are supported by simple and transparent pay structures. We simplified our Value Account construct, making it easier for our employees to understand the value of their fixed pay and to bring it more in line with industry best practices. We are confident that we pay our employees fairly. We keep our HR policies and processes under review to ensure we do so. In the UK, our rates of pay continue to exceed the Living Wage and we ensure people performing the same roles are paid fairly and consistently. More information on our remuneration policies can be found in the 2018 Directors Remuneration Report in the 2018 Annual Report and Accounts.
Developing Skills and Capabilities
We have launched the NextGen talent development programme for high potential colleagues at managerial level, helping them become the future leaders we need. The learning opportunities available through the programme align to the banks Critical People Capabilities. There are five people capabilities that we have identified that will help build the right knowledge, skills and behaviours and help the bank to be successful now and in the future. We have developed a Capability Checker to support our colleagues in identifying the capabilities most relevant to their current and future roles, aligning learning to those capabilities.
Our Female Development Programmes focus on supporting women to reach their full potential and manage their careers effectively. They support our aspiration to be fully gender balanced by 2030.
Sales Excellence is our complete bank-wide sales programme.
It teaches the tools and techniques that enable those in sales roles to be the best at ethical, needs-based selling. It covers both core and advanced techniques that help to uncover the full financial needs and goals of customers and present compelling options on the ways we can help. Over 60% of the appropriate colleagues have already completed a Sales Knowledge Assessment level 1 and training for all front line sales colleagues, sales specialists and sales leaders is underway.
Health and Wellbeing
As a strong component of making RBS a great place to work, wellbeing initiatives have successfully delivered against three pillars; Physical, Mental and Social with the final fourth pillar, Financial Wellbeing well established and continuing to build momentum.
Our internal wellbeing index has increased by 3% taking us 1% above other high performing norm companies. We continue to embrace the rapid acceleration of digital wellbeing by offering our colleagues online and on-site wellbeing tools and resources. This year weve seen over 20,000 onsite health checks completed across a number of our keyhubs. We continue to support the Time to Change pledge and this year launched our new wellbeing campaign Live Well, Being You. Our month long wellbeing campaign in May 2018 focused on each of our four pillars with a specific focus on Mental Health Awareness Week and World Mental Health Day in October 2018. In 2018 we again supported our colleagues through change and have fully utilised the services of our Employee Assistance Programme.
2018 Gender profile (*)
Grade |
#Women |
#Men |
%Women |
CEO 1 |
7 |
9 |
44 |
CEO 2 |
37 |
72 |
34 |
CEO 3 |
243 |
412 |
37 |
CEO 4 |
1438 |
1760 |
45 |
Target population (CEO 3 and above) |
287 |
493 |
37 |
Note: We report to reflect our organisational (CEO) levels. This method more accurately describes our gender balance at leadership/pipeline levels. As well as being more reflective of our organisational structure, this enables comparison to be made externally.
|
Male |
Female |
Executive Employees |
76 (75%) |
26 (25%) |
Directors of Subsidiaries |
220 (80%) |
54 (20%) |
There were 376 senior managers (in accordance with the definition contained within the relevant Companies Act legislation), which comprises our executive population and individuals who are directors of our subsidiaries.
Human rights and Modern Slavery Act
At RBS we are committed to our responsibilities to respect and uphold human rights across our business and sphere of influence. The Modern Slavery Act 2015 (MSA) forms part of our approach to human rights.
Our second statement is available on our corporate website alongside our Human Rights Position Statement. Our approach covers our customers, our people and our suppliers.
Our Customers
Our relationship with our customers is governed by a wide range of risk considerations, including our Anti-Money Laundering (AML) and Environmental, Social, and Ethical (ESE) risk assessments on current and new customers, to consider whether any of their activities carry human rights infringements.
Our People
All of our people are legally recruited subject to local jurisdiction and in the UK must meet 1998 Immigration Act requirements.
The bank also has policies and processes such as Our Code, the Yes Check and Speak Up and is an early adopter of the Living Wage to support the banks position on Modern Slavery.
Our Suppliers
In 2018 we updated and enhanced our Sustainable Procurement Code, now referred to as the Supplier Code of Conduct (SCoC) (available on rbs.com). The SCoC continues to be a contractual requirement - we expect our suppliers to uphold the same values and commitments we have made on social and environmental impacts.
Our Values
Doing the right thing
■ We do the right thing.
■ We take risk seriously and manage it prudently.
■ We prize fairness and diversity and exercise judgement with thought and integrity.
Thinking long term
■ We know we succeed only when our customers and communities succeed.
■ We do business in an open, direct and sustainable way.
Working together
■ We care for each other and work best as one team.
■ We bring the best of ourselves to work and support one another to realise our potential.
Serving customers
■ We exist to serve customers.
■ We earn their trust by focusing on their needs and delivering excellent service.
Measuring Customer Advocacy
We track customer advocacy for our key brands using the net-promoter score (NPS), a commonly used metric in banking and other industries across the world. This is measured through independent customer surveys in which customers are asked how likely they would be to recommend their bank to a friend or colleague, on a scale of 0-10, with a score of 10 being extremely likely and 0 being extremely unlikely.
Our Performance
We are aware that there is a significant gap to achieving our ambition to be No. 1 for customer service, trust and advocacy. Colleagues across the bank are fully focused on delivering a more consistent service which is right first time. In addition, our digital innovations continue to attract strong customer advocacy, proof that when we get the product and service proposition right, our NPS improves.
Latest Scores
Our brands are our main connection with customers. Each takes a clear and differentiated position with the aim of helping us strengthen our relationship with them. For this reason we measure customer advocacy by brand.
Personal Banking
Improvements in customer service have been offset by branch closures which have reduced customer advocacy.
This has been most keenly felt for the Royal Bank of Scotland whose reputation continues to be impacted by legacy issues.
NatWest and Royal Bank of Scotland data sourced from Ipsos MORI FRS using 6 month rolling data. Latest base sizes: 3,111 for NatWest (England & Wales); 421 for Royal Bank of Scotland (Scotland). Based on the question: How likely is it that you would recommend (brand) to a relative, friend or colleague in the next 12 months for current account banking? Base: Claimed main banked current account customers. Ulster Bank data sourced from Coyne Research using 12 month rolling data. Question: Please indicate to what extent you would be likely to recommend (brand) to your friends or family using a scale of 0 to 10 where 0 is not at all likely and 10 is extremely likely. Latest base sizes: 274 Northern Ireland; 297 Republic of Ireland.
Business Banking
Business Banking continues to be affected by operating model charges. Our Business Banking customers have also been heavily impacted by branch closures.
Source: Charterhouse Research Business Banking Survey, YE Q4 2018. Based on interviews with businesses with an annual turnover up to £2 million. Latest base sizes: 1134 for NatWest (England & Wales), 455 for Royal Bank of Scotland (Scotland). Question: How likely would you be to recommend (bank). Base: Claimed main bank. Data weighted by region and turnover to be representative of businesses in Great Britain.
Commercial Banking
Our Commercial Banking NPS has fallen recently, however it remains ahead of the rest of the market. Our NatWest and Royal Bank of Scotland brands are ahead of the rest of their respective markets.
Source: Charterhouse Research Business Banking Survey, YE Q4 2018. Based on interviews with businesses with an annual turnover over £2 million. Latest base sizes: 558 for NatWest (England & Wales), 103 for Royal Bank of Scotland (Scotland). Question: How likely would you be to recommend (bank). Base: Claimed main bank.
Data weighted by region and turnover to be representative of businesses in Great Britain.
Trust
We measure Trust by asking customers how much do you trust the bank to do the right thing? Scores for NatWest have fluctuated during 2018 and, over the last five years, have improved in line with the market. Trust in the Royal Bank of Scotland has also improved over the last five years, but legacy issues are still in customers memories and it remains the least trusted bank in the sector.
Source: Populus. Latest quarters data. Measured as a net % of those that trust RBS/NatWest to do the right thing, less those that do not. Latest base sizes: 891 for NatWest (England & Wales), 215 for Royal Bank of Scotland (Scotland).
How we create value
Our long term success is dependent on serving our customers well and generating value for society through our products, services and facilities.
UK Personal & Business Banking
We are focused on serving customers brilliantly. This means treating customers fairly, offering them flexibility in how they choose to bank with us and offering extra help to vulnerable customers and those in financial difficulty. It also means keeping their funds safe and secure, improving financial capability, and supporting them in the moments that matter.
Despite a highly uncertain economic outlook, and a continued low interest rate environment, we delivered an operating profit of £2,458 million in 2018 as we delivered an operating expense reduction of £347 million in 2018, or 9% compared with 2017.
Gross new mortgage lending in 2018 was £30.4 billion, giving a market share of 11.3% and supporting stock share of around 10%. In achieving this, the business has maintained a prudent approach to risk and pricing, in a very competitive market.
We were the first bank to launch a paperless mortgage process with customers continuing to embrace the simplicity and ease of our market leading innovation. Approximately half of all mortgage applications in Q4 2018 were paperless. As a proactive bank we are using automation and technology to simplify and streamline our key customer journeys. We are also continuing to invest in roles such as Community Banker and TechXperts to help customers get the most from our award-winning digital services including our mobile banking app which now has 6.4 million regular users and was awarded Best Banking App at the British Banking Awards in 2018.
We have the third largest branch network across the UK. 99.7% of the UK population live within 15 minutes of a branch, a mobile-van stop or a Post Office location and our fleet of 41 mobile vans serve more than 600 communities each week. We are also proud to have the most professional workforce of any bank in the UK, with over 13,000 colleagues achieving their Professional Banker Certificate.
Ulster Bank RoI
We are focused on our strategic ambition to become the number one bank in the Republic of Ireland for customer service, trust and advocacy. We have continued to deliver on growth in new lending, building lasting relationships with customers and on digital and technological innovation that creates benefits for customers and operational efficiency.
Operating profit was £12 million (15 million) compared with a loss of £132 million (151 million) in 2017. Total income was £610 million (689 million) compared with £604 million (689 million) in 2017, and operating expenses decreased by £93 million, or 13.8% ( 115 million, or 14.9% in euro terms). Net loans reduced by £0.7 million (1.0 billion) principally reflecting the successful sale of a portfolio of non-performing loans of £0.5 million (0.6 billion) which contributed to a reduction in the non-performing loan ratio from 16.7% in 2017 to 11.3% in 2018.
The Help for what matters initiative and First Five mortgage campaign continued to support lending growth in 2018. New mortgage lending increased by 14% to £1.02 million, or 13% to 1.13 billion in euro terms, compared to 2017, supported by a positive uptake on the market leading two, four and seven year fixed rate products.
We have continued to strengthen our digital proposition in 2018 through enhancements to digital and mobile customer offerings. 69% of our active personal current account customers are choosing to bank with us through digital channels. We introduced a faster, more convenient and secure digital application experience for customers applying for current accounts and personal loans and made further enhancements to the mobile app during the year. Mobile payments and transfers increased 36% on prior year, reflecting the continued customer migration from physical to digital channels.
Commercial Banking
In our position as the largest UK commercial bank(1), with professional relationship management at our core and a strong regional network, we provide deep sector and business insight to help UK businesses and the UK economy succeed. This commitment and support has generated market-leading customer advocacy. In 2018, within total utilised lending of around £90 billion, we either made or renewed commitments for around £30 billion of term lending facilities, of which £18 billion utilised as at 31 December 2018, to our mainly UK-based customers. Additionally at Q3 2018, we provided a further £2 billion of growth funding to help British businesses prepare for the Brexit transition, bringing the total commitment to £3 billion.
Operating profit(2) was £1,358 million compared with £944 million in 2017. Total income(2) was £3,374 million (2017 £3,238million) and operating expenses(2) decreased by £132 million, or 6.6%, reflecting continued operating model simplification and efficiencies.
In the year, we made £10.5 billion RWA reductions through active capital management activity, leading also to lower impairment loss rates.
Customer banking preferences continue to evolve and we are working hard to anticipate and respond. Approximately 85% of customers now interact with us digitally and we have developed solutions they value. We successfully launched our Bankline Mobile in the Apple app store, while our lending journey now enables customers to apply digitally for loans of up to £750,000 through a self-service application process.
This is the largest value offered by a UK commercial bank, giving customers rapid, digital access to funding decisions, with around 50% of loan applications given a decision in principle in under 24 hours.
Notes:
(1) Market share includes personal bank accounts used as business accounts; includes NatWest, RBS & W&G; Source Charterhouse Business Banking Survey, Q4 2018. Commercial £2m+ in GB. Sample size 3,075; sample size excluding dont knows: NatWest (598); Royal Bank of Scotland (271). Question: How likely would you be to recommend (bank). Base: Claimed main bank. Data weighted by region and turnover to be representative of businesses in Great Britain.
(2) Comparisons with prior periods are impacted by transfers in preparation for ring-fencing. The net impact of these transfers on 2017 operating profit would have been to reduce income by £246 million, operating expenses by £10 million and impairments by £72 million. The variances in the commentary have been adjusted for the impact of these transfers.
Private Banking
Through the Coutts and Adam & Company brands, our business provides private banking and wealth management services to UK connected high net worth clients with domestic and international needs. Coutts is recognised as one of the leading private banks, wealth and investment managers in the UK with a 325 year history. A strategy of providing a personal approach to private banking and wealth management, combined with outstanding brand recognition, drove strong customer volumes in 2018.
Operating profit was £303 million compared with £152 million in 2017. Total income(1) was £775 million (2017 £702 million) and operating expenses(1) decreased by £66 million, or 12.1%, as we continued to focus on front-to-back simplification and the digitalisation of key processes. Net lending growth was £0.9 billion, or 6.7%, compared with 2017. Assets under management have decreased by £1.0 billion, or 4.8%, reflecting negative market movements partially offset by new business inflows of £0.6 billion.
We continue to shift from a physical to a digital client offering as we deliver more innovative solutions. Approximately 60% of clients bank with us digitally, and 94% of clients positively rate our Coutts24 telephony service. We also recently launched Coutts Connect, a social platform which allows clients to network and build working relationships between one another.
We gained further external recognition for our investment management performance having won two Gold awards at the Portfolio Advisor Wealth Manager (PAM) awards in 2018.
Note:
(1) Comparisons with prior periods are impacted by the transfers in preparation for ring-fencing.
The net impact of the transfers on 2017 would have been to increase income by £24 million and increase operating expenses by £15 million. The net impact on the 2017 balance sheet would have been to reduce net loans to customers by £0.1 billion and assets under management by £0.7 billion. The variances in the commentary have been adjusted for the impact of these transfers.
RBS International
We are one of the largest banks operating in the Channel Islands, Isle of Man and Gibraltar and in 2017 established new wholesale branches in Luxembourg and London. In line with the wider Group we are focused on serving customers well and becoming a bank that is simpler and easier to deal with.
During 2018, we repositioned our balance sheet so that excess funds were no longer up streamed to RBS. Instead some funds have been deployed into funding customer assets in our new London branch which looks after long-standing alternative investment fund customers who could not remain inside the UK ring- fence. We have also established a liquidity portfolio across central and correspondent banks and sovereign bond holdings.
These changes preserve value for the banking group, provide continuity for our customers and support compliance with incoming Basel III Liquidity Coverage Ratio rules.
Operating profit was £336 million compared with £304 million in 2017. Total income(1) was £594 million (2017 £540 million), the increase largely driven by deposit margin benefits. Operating expenses (1) increased by £27 million, or 11.6%, primarily due to £39 million higher back-office costs associated with becoming a non ring- fenced bank. Net loans to customers were £13.2 billion and gross new mortgage lending in 2018 was £0.3 billion compared with £0.5 billion in 2017.
Our mobile app has been further developed to include new functionality, allowing customers to manage their finances more effectively and we have 23% more users compared with 2017 with NPS at +59.
71% of wholesale customer payments are now processed using our newly introduced international banking platform, making the payments process simpler for customers.
We transformed our retail branches in each of our jurisdictions to include self service automation terminals giving customers more options in how they bank with us and in 2018 we helped our customers buy over 1000 new homes.
2018 was a very successful year for community investment activities across all of our jurisdictions due to the commitment and generosity of our colleagues who supported our Do Good Feel Good Campaign.
Note:
(1) Comparisons with prior periods are impacted by the transfers in relation to ring-fencing. The net impact of the transfers on 2017 would have increased income by £151 million and increase operating expenses by £14 million. The net impact on the 2017 balance sheet would have been to increase net loans to customers by £4.5 billion. The variances in the commentary have been adjusted for the impact of these transfers.
NatWest Markets
We continue to put customers at the centre of the way we do business and have focused on the core products and markets where we have a strong track record, longstanding relationships and market leading positions.
An operating loss of £70 million compared with a loss of £977 million in 2017. Total income(1) increased by £288 million, or 25.0%, primarily reflecting lower disposal losses in the legacy business and a £165 million indemnity insurance recovery, partially offset by lower income in the core business. The reduction in the core business was driven by challenging fixed income, currencies and commodities (FICC) market conditions in Q4 2018, together with turbulence in European bond markets earlier in the year.
Operating expenses decreased by £595 million, or 27.1%. This reflects reductions in other expenses(1) across both the core and legacy businesses, down £313 million to £1,213 million, lower strategic costs, down £198 million to £238 million, and reduced litigation and conduct costs, down £84 million to £153 million.
NatWest Markets is increasingly using technology to enhance the way it provides innovative financial solutions to its customers and partners. For example, FXmicropay makes it simpler for businesses operating globally to accept payments in multiple currencies, reducing costs and increasing revenues for our customers. Our success in harnessing technology has been recognised with the award for Best in Service Globally among Corporates for Algorithmic trading in the 2018 Euromoney FX Survey.
Awards and rankings
· Sterling Bond House of the Year 2018 (Source:International Financing Review (IFR))
· #1 for Overall Service Quality for UK Corporate (Source: 2017 Greenwich Associates FX Survey)
· Tied #1 for Rates* Service Quality UK FIs (* Government Bonds and Interest Rate Derivative Investors) (Source: Greenwich Associates, European Fixed Income 2018 Rates).
Notes:
(1) Comparisons with 2017 are impacted by the transfer of business activities in preparation for ring-fencing. The net impact of the transfers would have been to increase total income by £104 million in 2017 and reduce operating expenses by £2 million in 2017. The commentary has been adjusted for the impact of these transfers.
(2) The NatWest Markets operating segment should not be assumed to be the same as the NatWest Markets Plc legal entity or group.
Notes:
(1) The targets, expectations and trends discussed in this section represent RBSG managements current expectations and are subject to change, including as a result of the factors described in the Risk Factors section on pages 265 to 278 of the 2018 Annual Report on Form 20-F. These statements constitute forward-looking statements; refer to Forward-looking statements in this document.
(2) Return on tangible equity is calculated using profit for the period attributable to ordinary shareholders.
(3) c.14% at the end of 2021, previous target stated as >13%.
Outlook(1)
RBS, like all companies, continues to deal with a range of significant risks and uncertainties in the external economic, political and regulatory environment. Our central economic forecast, which supports our corporate plan, is in line with consensus as at the end of December 2018 and shows average UK GDP growth of around 1.0-2.0% from 2019 to 2023 and continued low interest rates. Given the current uncertainties we will continue to actively monitor and react to market conditions.
2019 Outlook
As part of our continued cost savings plans, we expect to incur aggregate strategic costs of around £2.5 billion across 2018 and 2019, with £1.0 billion of this having been incurred during 2018. We plan to reduce operating expenses, excluding strategic costs and conduct and litigation costs, by £300 million in 2019 compared with 2018, excluding one-off items.
2018 saw a continuation of the period of benign economic conditions with low defaults and strong cash recoveries.
However, the potential impact on the real economy of ongoing political uncertainties and geopolitical tensions could affect our credit loss outcome. As a result, impairments are expected to increase in 2019 but remain below our through-the-cycle loss rate assumption of 30-40 basis points.
The threat from single name and sector driven events remains.
We expect to end 2019 with risk weighted assets (RWAs) of around £185 190 billion as the RWAs associated with Alawwal Bank are expected to reduce by around £5 billion, subject to regulatory approvals relating to the merger and our shareholding.
RBS Group (RBSG) capital and funding plans focus on issuing £3-5 billion of MREL-compliant instruments and around £1 billion of Tier 2 instruments. We do not plan to issue AT1 in 2019.
As in prior years, we will continue to target other funding sources to diversify our funding structure, including senior secured issuance of £2-3 billion from NatWest Bank. NatWest Markets Plc, as a standalone bank, plans to issue £3-5 billion of term senior unsecured instruments.
Medium term outlook
While we remain comfortable with our 2020 target of a return on tangible equity of more than 12%, we recognise our 2020 target of a cost:income ratio of less than 50% is increasingly challenging for the business to achieve with the risk being to the downside. This reflects the ongoing economic and political uncertainty and the additional ongoing costs associated with ring- fencing and Brexit.
Our previous guidance on RWAs beyond 2020 was an estimated 10% increase in 2021 relating to Basel 3 amendments, in addition to RWA inflation as a result of IFRS 16, which requires lease obligations to be brought on balance sheet, of £1.3 billion in 2019 and Bank of England mortgage floors of £10.5 billion in 2020. We now expect the overall impact of Basel 3 amendments to be in the range of 5-10% and phased across 2021 to 2023, with the details still subject to significant regulatory uncertainty.
RBS Group capital distributions
We propose a 3.5 pence final ordinary dividend and a 7.5 pence special dividend for the 2018 financial year, while maintaining a CET1 ratio of 16.2% as at 31 December 2018.
Pro-forma for the introduction of IFRS16 - Leases, the CET1 ratio was 16.0%, with the c.20 basis points reduction reflecting a £1.3 billion increase in RWAs and £0.3 billion charge against reserves.
We expect to maintain ordinary dividends of around 40% of attributable profit. We have updated our medium term guidance of CET1 to be approximately 14% at the end of 2021.
We have shareholder and regulatory approval to carry out directed buybacks of the UK government stake in RBS, but recognise that any exercise of this authority would be dependant upon HMTs intentions and is limited to 4.99% of issued share capital in any 12 month period. As a reminder, we have also committed to make further pre tax contributions to the pension scheme of up to £1.5 billion in aggregate from 1 January 2020 linked to future distributions to RBS shareholders.
NatWest Markets (NWM)
The NWM franchise includes NWM Plc and NWM N.V., both of which are currently direct subsidiaries of RBSG. RBS has previously announced its intention for NWM N.V. to become a subsidiary of NWM Plc following the completion of the sale of the consortium holding in Alawwal. As such, NWM Plcs financial reporting does not currently include NWM N.V.
NWM Plc is regulated and discloses capital ratios and RWAs on a standalone bank basis and is targeting by 2020 a CET1 ratio of circa 15%, MREL ratio of at least 30% and a leverage ratio of at least 4%.
We plan to transfer our Western Europe corporate business into NWM N.V. from the ring-fenced bank, in addition to the NWM business that is expected to be part of a FSMA Part VII Transfer Scheme from NWM Plc to NWM N.V., subject to court approval and as announced on 6 December 2018. NWM Plc legal entity RWAs are expected to be around £35 billion, NWM N.V. RWAs are expected to be around £8 billion with the consolidated NWM franchise position, excluding RWAs related to intercompany positions, expected to be around £39 billion by 2020.
Note:
(1) The targets, expectations and trends discussed in this section represent RBSG managements current expectations and are subject to change, including as a result of the factors described in the Risk Factors section on pages 265 to 278 of the 2018 Annual Report on Form 20-F. These statements constitute forward-looking statements; refer to Forward-looking statements in this document.
Risk overview
Prudent risk management is central to the successful delivery of the RBS strategy.
RBS operates an integrated framework that facilitates effective risk management. The framework which is centred around the embedding of a strong risk culture ensures that the tools are in place to identify and manage both internal and external threats, including top and emerging risks. Risk appetite, which defines the level and types of risk RBS is willing to accept, is set in line with overall strategy and approved by the RBS Group board.
An emphasis on prudent risk management has a key role in positioning RBS to prepare for, and respond to, developments in the wider competitive, economic and regulatory environment.
All RBS employees share ownership of the way risk is managed.
Progress in 2018
RBS continued to reduce risk and strengthen both the balance sheet and the capital position in 2018. While continuing progress against the Groups strategic objectives, there was also a significant focus on a number of key themes. These included wider economic uncertainty relating to the UKs exit from the European Union, the accelerating evolution of the technological landscape and regulatory change.
The final settlement with the US Department of Justice (DoJ) in relation to the RBS Groups issuance and underwriting of US Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities (RMBS) during the period 2005 to 2007 brought to an end a major legacy issue, leading to further improvement of the risk profile.
In October 2018, the Federal Reserve Board terminated a Cease & Desist Order originally imposed in December 2013 in relation to historical compliance with Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) economic sanctions regulations.
The termination recognised RBSs multi-year programme to establish a robust, sustainable OFAC Sanctions compliance framework. In March 2018, the Federal Reserve Board also terminated a Cease & Desist Order originally imposed in July 2011 in relation to RBSs US operations.
A memorandum of understanding with the Trustees of the Group Pension Fund, to align the scheme with the UKs ring-fencing rules and the £2 billion contribution made in October 2018 significantly reduced the Groups exposure to pension risk. The contribution to the scheme which could be followed by up to a further £1.5 billion of dividend- linked contributions facilitated a reduction in the risk profile of the fund, principally the sale of approximately £6 billion of quoted equity exposure and the purchase of further interest rate and inflation hedging.
RBS continued to make progress towards its aim of making risk simply part of the way colleagues work and think. In 2018 the risk culture action plan focused on building clarity, developing capability and embedding a standardised risk culture assessment and reporting approach.
There was a continuing emphasis on refining risk appetite during the year. Significant work was done to enhance the approach at both Group and subsidiary levels in advance of compliance with the UKs ring-fencing rules. Limits and triggers for material risks were reviewed and refined as part of the continuous improvement of the risk appetite framework. Limits and triggers were also set for material subsidiaries.
From an operational risk perspective, throughout 2018 there was a continued focus on the control environment, ensuring that RBS maintains a safe and secure approach to doing business.
Oversight of the Groups transformation to meet the evolving needs of customers as well as to address the changing economic, regulatory and technology landscapes was further enhanced in order to effectively align with the innovation agenda.
Continuity of service for customers also remained a key area of focus. A number of activities aimed at minimising the impact of disruptive events such as system outages on overall service were undertaken.
These included preventative measures, control improvements and work to calibrate limits or triggers for the most critical processes. RBS continues to monitor and assess a diverse array of threats both external and internal as well as developing, strengthening or adapting existing control capability to protect continuity of service.
Brexit
RBS maintained a consistent focus on risks arising as a result of uncertainties related to the UKs planned exit from the European Union. Oversight of planning for regulatory and legislative impacts as well as economic impacts remained a critical part of forward- looking risk management throughout the year. This included stress testing and scenario modelling as well as capital planning. In view of continued uncertainty, RBS is implementing plans to ensure continuity of service for its customers in the event of an immediate loss of access to the European Single Market. This includes finalising a third-country licence for the Frankfurt branch of its National Westminster Bank subsidiary to allow for continued clearing of euro- denominated payments.
While the longer-term effects on the operating environment of the UKs exit are difficult to predict, consideration has also been given to the potential second and third order effects on the Group and its customers, including planning for the results of periodic financial volatility and slower economic growth.
Cyber Security
RBS has a multi-layered defence approach to cyber security and continues to invest in its defences as the external threat evolves. In 2018, RBS continued to take part in industry-wide initiatives to monitor and anticipate developments, identify vulnerabilities and share best practice.
Financial crime
The financial crime threat continues to evolve in line with changes in technology, the economy and wider society. As risks relating to money laundering, terrorist financing, tax evasion, sanctions, bribery and corruption develop, understanding and responding to them appropriately remains a key area of focus.
In 2018, RBS continued its journey of improvement in relation to the policies, processes and systems used to combat financial crime. RBS also maintained an emphasis on ensuring proportionate, risk-focused customer due diligence standards were in place, particularly for higher-risk customer segments. In addition, improvements to the financial crime control environment remained a key focus in accordance with the evolving nature of the risk.
RBS is committed to ensuring it acts responsibly and ethically, both when pursuing its own business opportunities and when awarding business. Consequently it has embedded appropriate policies, mandatory procedures and controls to ensure its employees, and any other parties it does business with, understand these obligations and abide by them, whenever they act for RBS. Anti-bribery and corruption (ABC) training is mandatory for all staff on an annual basis, with targeted training appropriate for certain roles. RBS considers ABC risk in its business processes including, but not limited to, corporate donations, charitable sponsorships, political activities and commercial sponsorships. Where appropriate, there is a requirement for ABC contract clauses in written agreements.
Climate risk
The impact of multiple risks relating to climate change continues to be assessed. This includes physical risks such as those resulting from extreme weather events and a more unstable climate as well as economic and regulatory risks.
In addition, RBS continues to focus on risks arising as a result of government undertakings to limit carbon emissions, which will require adjustments in all sectors of the economy. Though the nature and timing of these transitional risks remain uncertain, RBS classifies climate risk as an emerging threat and is integrating it into core risk management.
RBS supports the recommendations of the Financial Stability Boards Task Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosures and has established a climate risk working group.
LIBOR transition
The UK regulators have reiterated the intention to move from LIBOR to alternative interest-rate benchmarks by the end of 2021. A significant number of transactions across the industry reference LIBOR and, as a result, the transition will be a major undertaking. RBS is conducting risk assessments of the likely impact across each of its franchises and the Risk function will continue to provide oversight as the programme develops.
The factors discussed on page 33 and elsewhere in this report should not be regarded as a complete and comprehensive statement of all potential risks and uncertainties facing RBS. Refer to the Risk Factors section on page 265 to 278.
Top and Emerging Risks(1)
RBS employs a continuous process for identifying and managing its top and emerging risks. These are risks that could have a significant negative impact on RBSs ability to operate or meet its strategic objectives.
Operational and IT resilience |
Risk |
Mitigation |
- RBSs information technology systems are complex, making recovery from failure challenging. - RBSs information technology systems are critical to the services it provides, with any outages experienced in the banking sector widely publicised. Cyber attacks continue to evolve in frequency, sophistication and severity. There is a risk that a cyber attack damages RBSs ability to do business and/or compromises data security. - RBS faces increased operational risk as it makes changes to its structure and operations to reduce its cost base. - There is a risk that RBS lacks sufficient capability or capacity at a senior level to deliver, or adapt to, change. - Losses may arise from changes in the RBS business model due to ring-fencing or such as the restructuring of NatWest Markets in light of ring fencing and Brexit. - A breach in data privacy, either within RBS or in a third-party organisation, may lead to negative impacts. There is a risk that RBSs data strategy is not adequate for the evolving landscape. - There is a risk that the actions of a third-party supplier could negatively affect RBSs reputation or profitability.
|
- A major investment programme has improved systems resilience. As RBS continues to simplify and modernise infrastructure and applications, system sustainability has improved. - A major security programme has delivered control enhancements to mitigate the risk of cyber attack. RBS continues to invest in its defences. RBS monitors people risk closely and has plans in place to support retention of key roles, with wider programmes supporting engagement and training. - RBS continues to implement change in line with its project plans while assessing the implementation risks and mitigating where possible.
| |
Economic and political risk |
Risk |
Mitigation |
- RBS remains vulnerable to changes and uncertainty in the economic, political and legal environment. Scenarios that could have a potentially material negative effect on RBS include the impact of the UKs exit from the European Union; changes in UK government and UK government policy; a second Scottish independence referendum; a UK recession (including significant falls in house prices); global financial volatility, a protracted period of low interest rates in the UK, vulnerabilities in emerging market economies resulting in contagion in RBSs core markets, a Eurozone crisis or major geopolitical instability. - Accelerating climate change may lead to faster-than-anticipated climate-related impacts on RBS and the wider economy.
|
- RBS has implemented plans to prepare for an immediate loss of access to the European Single Market on 29 March 2019 (a hard Brexit). - RBS uses a range of complementary approaches to inform strategic planning and risk mitigation relating to a range of economic and political risks. These include robust risk assessment and dynamic portfolio management in accordance with the risk appetite framework, the setting of prudent lending criteria and, for specific market risks, structural hedging. Stress testing and scenario planning is also used extensively. - RBS is working to embed climate risk into its risk framework, and adapting its operation and business strategy to mitigate the risks of both climate change and the transition to a low carbon economy.
| |
Financial resilience |
Risk |
Mitigation |
- RBSs target markets are highly competitive, which poses challenges in terms of achieving some strategic objectives. Moreover, changes in technology, customer behaviour and business models in these markets have accelerated. |
- RBS continues to innovate including the development of a number of digital initiatives designed to meet evolving customer needs and monitor the competitive environment as well as associated regulatory, technological and strategic developments in order to make adjustments as appropriate.
| |
Legal regulatory and conduct risk |
Risk |
Mitigation |
- RBS expects government and regulatory intervention in the financial services industry to remain high for the foreseeable future, and also subject to increasing regulation in new areas such as financial risks relating to climate change and artificial intelligence. - RBS has for a number of years been involved in conduct-related reviews and redress projects, including a review of certain historical customer connections in its former Global Restructuring Group (GRG). RBS is likely to remain engaged in the management of GRG-related complaints until at least the end of 2020. - Implementation of the Alternative Remedies Package (regarding the business previously described as Williams & Glyn) brings a range of risks for RBS including significant costs, loss of customers/deposits and associated execution risks. - The impacts of past business conduct resulting in future litigation and conduct charges could be substantial. RBS is involved in a number of investigations, including: ongoing class action litigation, investigations into foreign exchange trading and rate-setting activities, continuing LIBOR-related litigation and investigations, into the treatment of small and medium-sized business customers in financial difficulty, anti-money laundering, sanctions, mis-selling (including mis-selling of payment protection insurance products). Settlements may result in additional financial penalties, non-monetary penalties or other consequences, which may be material. - The transition from LIBOR and other IBOR rates to alternative risk-free rates may lead to heightened legal, business and conduct risks. |
- RBS considers and incorporates the implications of proposed or potential regulatory activities in its strategic and financial plans. - RBS has dedicated resources in place to manage claims and complaints relating to GRG. - RBS has invested significant resources to meet the terms of the Alternative Remedies Package and manage the associated risks. - Building a healthy culture is a core priority. RBS continues to focus on creating a solid platform for behavioural and cultural change. - In addition, RBS continues to strengthen its control environment and the journey of improvement remains an ongoing area of focus. - A programme to determine the scale and scope of the impacts relating to the transition to alternative risk-free rates is underway. Activity to manage the transition will take place within RBSs control framework and in line with expected standards of conduct. |
Note:
(1) The factors discussed in this section and elsewhere in this document should not be regarded as complete and comprehensive statement of all potential risks and uncertainties facing RBS. Please refer to the section Risk Factors on pages 265 to 278.
Climate related financial disclosures
Climate change presents both risks and opportunities to our business across our customers, operations and suppliers.
The Board has governance oversight on climate via the Sustainable Banking Committee. From 2019 this will be shared with the Board Risk Committee. A Climate Change Working Group (CCWG) has been established with the accountable executive being the Chief Risk Officer. The CCWG is responsible for addressing climate- related regulation, risks, opportunities, metrics and analysis. Membership includes senior representatives from Risk, Sustainable Banking, Corporate Governance, Regulatory Affairs and Legal. Frontline business representatives will join in 2019. The Sustainable Energy Forum (SEF) also co-ordinates products and services that help business and corporate customers to transition to a low carbon economy.
As part of our developing strategy to address climate change, we are helping to accelerate the transition to a low carbon economy by supporting our customers and integrating climate change into core business decision making. To support this, RBS is currently undertaking climate scenario analysis across our main lending portfolio. Two scenarios are being considered: a Business as Usual 3.7°C rise and a Paris Agreement 2°C rise. The time frames used for analysis are aligned to RBS strategy: short 0-2 years, medium 3-5 years and long 6-30 years. Both physical and transitional risks are being incorporated. The results of the analysis will inform future strategy and focus areas for more in-depth climate scenario analysis.
Climate risk management covers both physical and transitional risks. RBS employs a continuous process for identifying and managing top and emerging risks (refer to page 33), including climate-related risks. The nature and timing of the far-reaching commercial, technological and regulatory changes the low carbon transition will bring are currently uncertain, for our customers and business. The impact of such changes may be disruptive, especially if such changes do not occur in an orderly or timely manner or are ineffective in reducing emissions sufficiently. Whilst these risks are significant and growing, they are not inconsistent with our strategy to be a leading UK-focused banking service provider to personal and business customers. To help manage climate related risks around individual lending decisions, we use sector-specific Environmental, Social and Ethical risk policies (refer to rbs. com). The Power Generation, Mining and Metals, Oil & Gas and Forestry, Fisheries and Agribusiness policies were updated in 2018 in relation to climate-related risks. To help us manage operational risks, we joined RE100, committing to purchase 100% global renewable energy by 2020.
RBS uses a range of metrics and targets to assess our climate-related financial impacts, including operational emissions figures, (refer to the table below (*) and rbs.com), volumes of sustainable energy sector financing, and proportion of lending associated with high carbon or high climate risk sectors. Our greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions are independently verified each year by an external auditor. As at 31 December 2018, our exposure to the Power and Oil & Gas sectors remains at 1.2% of our total lending exposures. The PRA report Transition in Thinking highlighted the energy, transport, property (domestic
and non-domestic) and agriculture sectors as having particular exposure to climate risks and opportunities and these equated to approximately 44% of total RBS exposures in 2018(*). These were calculated using Exposure at Default (EAD).
We were recognised by InfraDeals as the leading lender to the UK renewables sector by number of transactions over the past ten years (2008- 2018). Between 2014 and 2018 we reduced our operational greenhouse gas emissions (Scopes 1, 2 and 3 Business Travel) by 49%, exceeding our Science Based Target of 45% by 2020.
Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Emissions |
2014 |
2017 |
2018 |
|
|
|
|
Location-based CO2e emissions (Scope 1, 2 & business travel) (tonnes) |
496,249 |
312,731 |
252,340 |
Scope 1* CO2e emissions (tonnes) |
30,695 |
25,578 |
29,959 |
Scope 2** Market-based*** CO2e emissions (tonnes) |
377,337 |
69,391 |
57,735 |
Scope 2 Location-based CO2e emissions (tonnes) |
360,201 |
219,979 |
166,179 |
Scope 3**** CO2e emissions from business travel (tonnes) |
105,352 |
67,174 |
56,203 |
Location-based CO2e emissions per FTE (Scope 1, 2 & business travel) (tonnes) |
5.07 |
4.08 |
3.56 |
Total energy use (GWh) |
862 |
693 |
619 |
We have reported on all emission sources required under the Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report and Directors Reports) Regulations 2013. To our knowledge there are no material omissions. Independent limited assurance of total reported emissions in tonnes of CO2e, (Scope 1*, 2** and 3*** location based emissions) has been provided by Ernst & Young LLP. Our reporting year runs from October 2017 to September 2018. *Scope 1: Emissions from fluorinated gas loss and fuel combustion in RBS premises/vehicles. **Scope 2: Emissions from electricity, district heating and district cooling used in RBS premises. *** market-based emissions have been calculated using the GHG Protocol guidelines. ****Scope 3: Emissions associated with business travel (air, rail and road) by RBS employees.
These emissions are calculated using The Greenhouse Gas Protocol Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard revised edition (2004). The emissions reporting boundary is defined as all entities and facilities either owned or under operational control. Emissions factors used are from UK Government Emissions Conversion Factors for Greenhouse Gas Company Reporting (BEIS,2018), CO2 Emissions from Fuel Combustion (IEA,2017) or from relevant local authorities as required. For more information please see our website (https://www.rbs.com/rbs/sustainability/ responsible-business/).
Governance at a glance
Our Board
The Board has thirteen directors comprising the Chairman, two executive directors and ten independent non-executive directors, one of whom is the Senior Independent Director. Biographies for each director can be found on pages 59 and 60.
The Board is collectively responsible for the long-term success of RBS and delivery of sustainable shareholder value. Its role is to provide leadership of RBS within a framework of prudent and effective controls which enables risks to be assessed and managed.
In 2018, the Board and committee evaluation process was conducted externally by Independent Board Evaluation.
Our Board commitees
In order to provide effective oversight and leadership, the Board has established a number of Board committees with particular responsibilities. The work of the Board committees is discussed in their individual reports. The terms of reference for each of these committees is available on rbs.com.
The full Governance report is on pages 59 to 100 of the 2018 Annual Report on Form 20-F.
Group Audit Committee
Assists the Board in discharging its responsibilities for monitoring the quality of the financial statements of RBS. It reviews the accounting policies, financial reporting and regulatory compliance practices of RBS and RBSs systems and standards of internal controls, and monitors the work of internal audit and external audit.
Group Board Risk Committee Provides oversight and advice to the Board on current and potential future risk exposures of RBS and future risk strategy. It reviews RBSs compliance with approved risk appetite and oversees the operation of the RBS Policy Framework and submissions to regulators.
Group Sustainable Banking Committee
Provides support to the Board in overseeing actions being taken by management to run a sustainable long term business, with specific focus on culture, people, customer, brand and environmental social and ethical issues.
Group Performance and Remuneration Committee Responsible for approving remuneration policy and reviewing the effectiveness of its implementation. It also considers senior executive remuneration and makes recommendations to the Board on the remuneration of executive directors.
Group Nominations and Governance Committee
Assists the Board in the selection and appointment of directors. It reviews the structure, size and composition of the Board, and the membership and chairmanship of Board committees. It considers succession planning taking into account the skills and expertise which will be needed on the Board in the future. Its remit also includes governance oversight.
Technology and Innovation Committee
Assists the Board in overseeing and monitoring the execution of RBSs strategic direction in relation to technology and innovation.
Group Executive Committee
The Board is supported by the Group Executive Committee, comprising the executive directors and the Group Chief Risk Officer. It supports the Chief Executive in managing RBSs businesses. It is responsible for managing strategic, financial, capital, risk and operational issues affecting RBS. It reviews and debates relevant items before consideration by the Board.
UK Corporate Governance Code
Throughout the year ended 31 December 2018, RBS has complied with all of the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code issued by the Financial Reporting Council dated April 2016 except in relation to provision (D.2.2) that the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee should have delegated responsibility for setting remuneration for the Chairman and executive directors. RBS considers that this is a matter which should rightly be reserved for the Board.
|
Page |
Presentation of information |
36 |
Financial summary |
38 |
Segment performance |
46 |
Presentation of information
In the Report and Accounts, unless specified otherwise, the terms company and RBSG mean The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc, RBS, RBS Group and the Group mean the company and its subsidiaries; the Royal Bank and RBS plc mean The Royal Bank of Scotland plc; NWH Ltd means NatWest Holdings Limited; NatWest means National Westminster Bank Plc and NWM Plc means NatWest Markets Plc.
The company publishes its financial statements in pounds sterling (£ or sterling). The abbreviations £m and £bn represent millions and thousands of millions of pounds sterling, respectively, and references to pence represent pence in the United Kingdom (UK). Reference to dollars or $ are to United States of America (US) dollars. The abbreviations $m and $bn represent millions and thousands of millions of dollars, respectively, and references to cents represent cents in the US. The abbreviation represents the euro, and the abbreviations m and bn represent millions and thousands of millions of euros, respectively.
Segmental reporting
RBS continues to deliver on its plan to build a strong, simple and fair bank for both customers and shareholders.
Reportable operating segments
The reportable operating segments are as follows. For full business descriptions see Note 4 on page 195.
Franchise |
Reportable operating segment |
Personal & Business Banking (PBB) |
UK Personal & Business Banking (UK PBB) |
Ulster Bank RoI | |
Commercial & Private Banking (CPB) |
Commercial Banking |
Private Banking | |
Other reportable segments |
RBS International (RBSI) |
NatWest Markets | |
Central items & other |
Allocation of central items
RBS allocates all central costs relating to Services and Functions to the business using appropriate drivers, these are reported as indirect costs in the segmental income statements. Assets (and risk-weighted assets) held centrally, mainly relating to RBS Treasury, are allocated to the business using appropriate drivers.
Key operating indicators
RBS prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB and as adopted by the European Union, which constitutes a body of generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). This document contains a number of adjusted or alternative performance measures, also known as non-GAAP financial measures. These measures exclude certain items which management believe are not representative of the underlying performance of the business and which distort period-on-period comparison. These measures include:
· Performance, funding and credit metrics such as return on tangible equity, and related RWA equivalents incorporating the effect of capital deductions (RWAes), total assets excluding derivatives (funded assets) and net interest margin (NIM) adjusted for items designated as fair value through profit or loss (non-statutory NIM), cost:income ratio, loan:deposit ratio and impairment provision ratios. These are internal metrics used to measure business performance.
· Personal & Business Banking franchise, combining the reportable segments of UK Personal & Business Banking (UK PBB) and Ulster Bank RoI and Commercial & Private Banking (CPB) franchise, combining the reportable segments of Commercial Banking and Private Banking.
RBS Group ring-fencing
The UK ring-fencing legislation requires the separation of essential banking services from investment banking services from 1 January 2019. RBS Group has placed the majority of the UK and Western European banking business in ring-fenced banking entities under an intermediate holding company, NatWest Holdings. NatWest Markets Plc (NWM Plc) and RBS International (RBSI) are separate banks outside the ring-fence, both subsidiaries of RBSG. Key activities in 2018 included:
· NatWest Group Holdings Corporation (NWGH) which owns NatWest Markets Securities Inc. (NWMSI) was transferred to NWM Plc (formerly RBS plc). NWGH was previously a direct subsidiary of NatWest.
· The majority of NWM Plcs (formerly RBS plc) PBB and CPB business, and certain parts of Central items and the NatWest Markets segment to be a part of the ring-fenced bank, were transferred to subsidiaries of NatWest Holdings. The second phase of ring-fencing which related to the transfer, of certain markets products from NatWest to NWM Plc, was completed in the third quarter of 2018.
· On 29 June 2018, the Court of Session in Scotland approved the reduction of capital and the cancellation of the share premium account and capital redemption reserve (together the capital reduction) of NWM Plc. As part of the capital reduction, NatWest Holdings transferred to RBSG with effect from 2 July 2018, thereby creating the legal separation of those RBS Group entities that will be within the ring-fenced sub-group from those held outside the ring-fence.
· NatWest Markets N.V. (formerly Royal Bank of Scotland N.V.), the Groups banking entity in the Netherlands, continues to implement its plan to be operationally ready to serve European Economic Area (EEA) customers [when the UK leaves the European Union on 29 March 2019], in the event that there is a loss of access to the EU Single Market. In October 2018 approval was received from the Dutch regulator (DNB) for the repurposing of the existing NatWest Markets N.V. banking licence. NatWest Markets N.V. is expected to become a subsidiary of NWM Plc in 2019 subject to regulatory approval.
Business review
Competition
Personal & Business Banking (comprising UK PBB and Ulster Bank RoI)
In the personal and small business banking business, the Bank competes with a range of providers including UK banks and building societies, major retailers and life assurance companies, as well as the UK subsidiaries of major international banks. In the mortgage market, the Bank competes with UK banks, building societies and specialist lenders. Increasingly, the ambitions of non-traditional players in the UK market are gaining credibility, with new entrants active and seeking to build their platforms either through organic growth or in some cases by acquiring businesses made available through the restructuring of incumbents. Entrants with new business models such as peer-to-peer lending platforms, while currently small, continue to grow rapidly and are emerging as significant competitors. Such competitors often target specific elements of the value chain, providing specialised services to particular customer segments.
RBS distributes life assurance products to banking customers in competition with independent advisors and life assurance companies.
In Ireland, Ulster Bank competes in retail and commercial banking with the major Irish banks and building societies, and with other UK and international banks and building societies active in the market.
In the UK credit card market large retailers and specialist card issuers are active in addition to the UK banks. In addition to physical distribution channels, providers compete through direct marketing activity and digital channels.
In an environment in which central banks have maintained very low interest rates for an unusually long period or introduced negative rates, competitive dynamics have changed in some of the principal markets in which we operate. In this environment an ability to attract and manage funding remains a critical competitive advantage. Other key competitive factors in this market segment include cost management, growing digital sales focus, branch network re-shaping, and product simplification. Cost management remains a key focus in the market, as banks seek to simplify their organisational and IT architectures while at the same time investing to ensure that they can meet customers evolving channel preferences. Customers have increasingly focused on the use of internet and mobile as sales and service channels for certain types of products. Therefore, competitive position and performance in the sector increasingly depends on the possession of user-friendly, diverse and efficient online solutions.
Although conveniently located branches are still important, RBS faces competitive pressure to adjust its branch formats to meet changing customer expectations and to manage its branch footprint as over-the-counter transaction volumes decline. In terms of product offering, the industry trend is to limit the number of products and present the product structure and costs in a clear and transparent manner.
Commercial & Private Banking (comprising Commercial Banking, Private Banking and RBS International)
Competition for corporate and institutional customers in the UK is from UK banks, from specialised global and regional investment banks and from large foreign universal banks that offer combined investment and commercial banking capabilities as well as from new entrants and non-bank challengers. In asset finance and invoice finance, the bank competes with banks and specialist finance providers, both captive and non-captive. In the small business banking market, the bank competes with other UK banks, specialist finance providers and building societies. In all of these areas, entrants with new technology-based business model are also showing rapid growth. RBS International competes with other UK and international banks to offer offshore banking services as well as domestic banking services in the Channel Islands, Gibraltar and the Isle of Man. Coutts and Adam & Company compete as private banks with UK clearing and private banks, asset managers and with international private banks. Competition in wealth management remains strong as banks maintain their focus on competing for affluent and high net worth customers.
NatWest Markets
NatWest Markets (formerly CIB) focuses on the needs of large corporates operating in the UK and Western Europe as well as global financial institution customers. NatWest Markets provides financing and risk management for these customers, and trades with financial institutions and counterparties for distribution and market making. There are sales and trading operations in London, the US and Singapore and offices in a select number of countries. NatWest Markets therefore competes with large domestic banks, major international banks and a number of investment banks that offer such products in these regions.
The Banks product proposition is built around our core strengths: supporting customers across currencies, rates and financing. Key competitive factors in this market include the ability to develop automation across flow products as well as delivering value-adding bespoke solutions for our customers.
With an evolving regulatory landscape and continued pressure on margins, competition in this market remains strong. Many market participants are also revising their strategy in order to ensure they deliver sustainable returns.
Business review
Financial summary
RBSs financial statements are prepared in accordance with IFRS. Selected data under IFRS for each of the last five years is presented below.
Summary consolidated income statement |
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
2015 |
2014 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Net interest income |
8,656 |
8,987 |
8,708 |
8,767 |
9,258 |
Non-interest income |
4,746 |
4,146 |
3,882 |
4,156 |
5,892 |
Total income |
13,402 |
13,133 |
12,590 |
12,923 |
15,150 |
Operating expenses |
(9,645) |
(10,401) |
(16,194) |
(16,353) |
(13,859) |
Profit/(loss) before impairment (losses)/releases |
3,757 |
2,732 |
(3,604) |
(3,430) |
1,291 |
Impairment (losses)/releases |
(398) |
(493) |
(478) |
727 |
1,352 |
Operating profit/(loss) before tax |
3,359 |
2,239 |
(4,082) |
(2,703) |
2,643 |
Tax charge |
(1,275) |
(824) |
(1,166) |
(23) |
(1,909) |
Profit/(loss) from continuing operations |
2,084 |
1,415 |
(5,248) |
(2,726) |
734 |
Profit/(loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax |
|
|
|
1,541 |
(3,445) |
Profit/(loss) for the year |
2,084 |
1,415 |
(5,248) |
(1,185) |
(2,711) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Attributable to: |
|
|
|
|
|
Ordinary shareholders |
1,622 |
752 |
(6,955) |
(1,979) |
(3,470) |
Preference shareholders |
182 |
234 |
260 |
297 |
330 |
Dividend access share |
|
|
1,193 |
|
320 |
Paid-in equity holders |
288 |
394 |
244 |
88 |
49 |
Non-controlling interests |
(8) |
35 |
10 |
409 |
60 |
|
2,084 |
1,415 |
(5,248) |
(1,185) |
(2,711) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notable items within total income |
2018 |
2017 |
|
|
|
£m |
£m |
|
|
| |
IFRS volatility in Central items & other |
(59) |
2 |
|
|
|
Insurance indemnity |
357 |
|
|
|
|
Of which: |
|
|
|
|
|
NatWest Markets |
165 |
|
|
|
|
Central items & other |
192 |
|
|
|
|
UK PBB debt sale gain |
61 |
185 |
|
|
|
FX losses in Central items & other |
(46) |
(183) |
|
|
|
Commercial Banking fair value and disposal gain |
169 |
6 |
|
|
|
NatWest Markets legacy business disposal losses |
(86) |
(712) |
|
|
|
Own credit adjustment |
92 |
(69) |
|
|
|
Loss on redemption of own debt |
|
(7) |
|
|
|
Strategic disposals |
|
347 |
|
|
|
|
488 |
(431) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Performance key metrics and ratios |
2018 |
2017 |
|
|
|
Return on tangible equity (%) |
4.8 |
2.2 |
|
|
|
Net interest margin (%) (1) |
1.98 |
2.13 |
|
|
|
Average interest earning assets (£m) |
436,957 |
422,337 |
|
|
|
Cost:income ratio (%) |
71.7 |
79.0 |
|
|
|
Earning per share (pence) - basic |
13.5p |
6.3p |
|
|
|
Note:
(1) Net interest margin is net interest income of the banking business as a percentage of interest earning assets (IEA) of the banking business.
Business review
Financial summary continued |
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
2015 |
2014 |
Summary consolidated balance sheet |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Cash and balances at central banks |
88,897 |
98,337 |
74,250 |
79,404 |
74,872 |
Trading assets |
75,119 |
85,991 |
86,660 |
103,972 |
150,005 |
Derivatives |
133,349 |
160,843 |
246,981 |
262,514 |
353,590 |
Settlement balances |
2,928 |
2,517 |
5,526 |
4,116 |
4,667 |
Loans to banks and customers - amortised cost |
318,036 |
321,633 |
320,016 |
297,020 |
325,954 |
Other financial assets |
59,485 |
51,929 |
48,637 |
47,004 |
38,298 |
Other assets |
16,421 |
16,806 |
16,586 |
21,378 |
103,633 |
Total assets |
694,235 |
738,056 |
798,656 |
815,408 |
1,051,019 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Deposits |
384,211 |
391,712 |
357,173 |
338,326 |
346,172 |
Trading liabilities |
72,350 |
81,982 |
84,536 |
92,299 |
130,920 |
Settlement balances, derivatives, and other financial liabilities |
182,230 |
200,398 |
267,257 |
288,023 |
402,829 |
Other liabilities |
8,954 |
14,871 |
40,286 |
42,613 |
112,389 |
Owners equity |
45,736 |
48,330 |
48,609 |
53,431 |
55,763 |
Non-controlling interests |
754 |
763 |
795 |
716 |
2,946 |
Total liabilities and equity |
694,235 |
738,056 |
798,656 |
815,408 |
1,051,019 |
Other financial data |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Share information |
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
2015 |
2014 |
Dividend payout ratio (%) |
14.9 |
|
|
|
|
Basic and diluted earnings/(loss) per ordinary share from |
|
|
|
|
|
continuing operations - pence (1) |
13.5 |
6.3 |
(59.5) |
(27.7) |
0.5 |
Share price per ordinary share at year end - £ |
2.17 |
2.78 |
2.25 |
3.02 |
3.94 |
Market capitalisation at year end - £bn |
26.1 |
33.3 |
26.6 |
35.1 |
45.2 |
Net asset value per ordinary share - £ |
3.86 |
4.10 |
4.18 |
4.66 |
5.12 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Capital ratios |
|
|
|
|
|
Return on average total assets (2) |
0.2% |
0.1% |
(0.8%) |
(0.2%) |
(0.3%) |
Return on average total equity (3) |
3.7% |
2.0% |
(10.2%) |
(2.9%) |
(4.6%) |
Return on average ordinary shareholders equity (4) |
4.0% |
1.9% |
(15.3%) |
(4.0%) |
(6.5%) |
Average total equity as a percentage of average total assets |
7.2% |
7.0% |
6.2% |
6.0% |
5.8% |
Risk asset ratio - Tier 1 (5) |
19.2% |
19.7% |
17.7% |
19.1% |
13.2% |
Risk asset ratio - Total (5) |
23.4% |
23.9% |
22.9% |
24.7% |
17.1% |
Notes:
(1) Basic fully diluted earnings per ordinary share in 2018 is 13.4p. There was no diluted impact in any other year.
(2) Return on average total assets represents profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary shareholders as a percentage of average total assets.
(3) Return on average total equity represents profit/(loss) attributable to equity owners expressed as a percentage of average shareholder funds.
(4) Return on average ordinary shareholders equity represents profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary shareholders expressed as a percentage of average ordinary shareholders equity.
(5) 2018, 2017, 2016, 2015 and 2014 are calculated on a PRA transitional basis.
Business review
Financial summary continued
Segmental summary income statements
|
PBB |
|
CPB |
|
|
|
| ||
|
UK |
Ulster Bank |
|
Commercial |
Private |
RBS |
NatWest |
Central items |
Total |
|
PBB |
RoI |
|
Banking |
Banking |
International |
Markets |
& other |
RBS |
2018 |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Net interest income |
5,098 |
444 |
|
2,040 |
518 |
466 |
112 |
(22) |
8,656 |
Non-interest income |
1,184 |
166 |
|
1,334 |
257 |
128 |
1,330 |
347 |
4,746 |
Total income |
6,282 |
610 |
|
3,374 |
775 |
594 |
1,442 |
325 |
13,402 |
Other expenses |
(2,991) |
(490) |
|
(1,725) |
(456) |
(260) |
(1,213) |
(224) |
(7,359) |
Strategic costs |
(275) |
(22) |
|
(106) |
(21) |
(9) |
(238) |
(333) |
(1,004) |
Litigation and conduct costs |
(216) |
(71) |
|
(41) |
(1) |
9 |
(153) |
(809) |
(1,282) |
Operating expenses |
(3,482) |
(583) |
|
(1,872) |
(478) |
(260) |
(1,604) |
(1,366) |
(9,645) |
Impairment (losses)/releases |
(342) |
(15) |
|
(144) |
6 |
2 |
92 |
3 |
(398) |
Operating profit/(loss) |
2,458 |
12 |
|
1,358 |
303 |
336 |
(70) |
(1,038) |
3,359 |
Return on equity (1) |
24.3% |
0.5% |
|
10.2% |
15.4% |
24.4% |
(2.0%) |
nm |
4.8% |
Cost:income ratio (2) |
55.4% |
95.6% |
|
53.8% |
61.7% |
43.8% |
111.2% |
nm |
71.7% |
Third party customer asset rate (3) |
3.40% |
2.41% |
|
2.87% |
2.89% |
2.15% |
nm |
nm |
nm |
Third party customer funding rate |
(0.30%) |
(0.20%) |
|
(0.36%) |
(0.25%) |
(0.09%) |
nm |
nm |
nm |
Average interest earning assets |
183,577 |
24,834 |
|
122,382 |
20,547 |
27,266 |
27,851 |
30,500 |
436,957 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net interest income |
5,130 |
421 |
|
2,286 |
464 |
325 |
203 |
158 |
8,987 |
Non-interest income |
1,347 |
183 |
|
1,198 |
214 |
64 |
847 |
293 |
4,146 |
Total income |
6,477 |
604 |
|
3,484 |
678 |
389 |
1,050 |
451 |
13,133 |
Other expenses |
(3,158) |
(451) |
|
(1,814) |
(445) |
(202) |
(1,528) |
47 |
(7,551) |
Strategic costs |
(461) |
(56) |
|
(167) |
(45) |
(9) |
(436) |
(391) |
(1,565) |
Litigation and conduct costs |
(210) |
(169) |
|
(33) |
(39) |
(8) |
(237) |
(589) |
(1,285) |
Operating expenses |
(3,829) |
(676) |
|
(2,014) |
(529) |
(219) |
(2,201) |
(933) |
(10,401) |
Impairment (losses)/releases |
(235) |
(60) |
|
(362) |
(6) |
(3) |
174 |
(1) |
(493) |
Operating profit/(loss) |
2,413 |
(132) |
|
1,108 |
143 |
167 |
(977) |
(483) |
2,239 |
Return on equity (1) |
23.7% |
(5.0%) |
|
6.6% |
6.4% |
11.2% |
(9.0%) |
nm |
2.2% |
Cost:income ratio (2) |
59.1% |
111.9% |
|
56.0% |
78.0% |
56.3% |
nm |
nm |
79.0% |
Third party customer asset rate (3) |
3.47% |
2.38% |
|
2.73% |
2.71% |
2.71% |
nm |
nm |
nm |
Third party customer funding rate |
(0.16%) |
(0.31%) |
|
(0.15%) |
(0.09%) |
(0.02%) |
nm |
nm |
nm |
Average interest earning assets |
179,453 |
25,214 |
|
131,177 |
18,799 |
23,930 |
31,231 |
12,533 |
422,337 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2016 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net interest income |
4,945 |
409 |
|
2,143 |
449 |
303 |
343 |
116 |
8,708 |
Non-interest income |
1,182 |
167 |
|
1,272 |
208 |
71 |
869 |
113 |
3,882 |
Total income |
6,127 |
576 |
|
3,415 |
657 |
374 |
1,212 |
229 |
12,590 |
Other expenses |
(3,398) |
(457) |
|
(1,936) |
(511) |
(169) |
(2,084) |
335 |
(8,220) |
Strategic costs |
(244) |
(40) |
|
(108) |
(37) |
(5) |
(190) |
(1,482) |
(2,106) |
Litigation and conduct costs |
(634) |
(172) |
|
(423) |
(1) |
|
(550) |
(4,088) |
(5,868) |
Operating expenses |
(4,276) |
(669) |
|
(2,467) |
(549) |
(174) |
(2,824) |
(5,235) |
(16,194) |
Impairment (losses)/releases |
(125) |
113 |
|
(206) |
3 |
(10) |
(253) |
|
(478) |
Operating profit/(loss) |
1,726 |
20 |
|
742 |
111 |
190 |
(1,865) |
(5,006) |
(4,082) |
Return on equity (1) |
16.2% |
0.7% |
|
4.1% |
5.6% |
13.8% |
(12.5%) |
nm |
(17.9%) |
Cost:income ratio (2) |
69.8% |
116.1% |
|
71.0% |
83.6% |
46.5% |
nm |
nm |
129.0% |
Third party customer asset rate (3) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
nm |
nm |
nm |
Third party customer funding rate |
|
|
|
|
|
|
nm |
nm |
nm |
Average interest earning assets |
166,778 |
25,193 |
|
121,677 |
16,887 |
22,254 |
37,856 |
8,953 |
399,598 |
Notes:
(1) RBSs CET 1 target is approximately 14% but for the purposes of computing segmental return on equity (ROE), to better reflect the differential drivers of capital usage, segmental operating profit after tax and adjusted for preference share dividends is divided by average notional equity allocated at different rates of 14% (Ulster Bank RoI), 11% (Commercial Banking), 13.5% (Private Banking - 14% prior to Q1 2018), 16% (RBS International - 12% prior to November 2017) and 15% for all other segments, of the monthly average of segmental risk-weighted assets incorporating the effect of capital deductions (RWAes). Return on equity is calculated using profit for the period attributable to ordinary shareholders.
(2) Operating lease depreciation included in income £121 million (2017 - £142 million; 2016 - £141 million).
(3) Ulster Bank Ireland DAC manages its funding and liquidity requirements locally. Its liquid asset portfolios and non-customer related funding sources are included within its net interest margin, but excluded from its third party asset and liability rates.
Business review
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
Income |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Interest receivable (1,2) |
11,049 |
11,034 |
11,258 |
Interest payable (1,2) |
(2,393) |
(2,047) |
(2,550) |
Net interest income |
8,656 |
8,987 |
8,708 |
|
|
|
|
Net fees and commissions |
2,357 |
2,455 |
2,535 |
Income from trading activities |
1,507 |
634 |
974 |
of which: Own credit adjustments |
92 |
(69) |
154 |
Other non-interest income |
882 |
1,057 |
373 |
Non interest income |
4,746 |
4,146 |
3,882 |
Total income |
13,402 |
13,133 |
12,590 |
Notes:
(1) Negative interest on net loans to customers is classed as interest payable and on customer deposits is classed as interest receivable.
(2) Interest receivable and interest payable on trading assets and liabilities are included in income from trading activities.
2018 compared with 2017
· Total income increased by £269 million, or 2.0%. Excluding notable items, income decreased by £650 million, or 4.8%, primarily reflecting lower NatWest Markets income and reduced net interest income. Excluding notable items, NatWest Markets and Central items, income was stable. Notable items are detailed on page 38.
· Net interest income decreased by £331 million, or 3.7%, driven by margin pressure, active capital management in Commercial Banking, a reduction in the NatWest Markets legacy business and one-off Central items(1) in 2017.
· Net interest margin was 15 basis points lower than 2017, or 13 basis points lower excluding one-off items(1) reflecting an 8 basis points reduction relating to increased liquidity, 3 basis points from competitive pressures and 2 basis points from mix impacts.
· Structural hedges of £159 billion generated £0.9 billion of incremental net interest income for the year, compared with £1.5 billion of incremental net interest income on a balance of £149 billion in 2017.
· Non-interest income increased by £600 million, or 14.5%. Excluding notable items, non-interest income decreased by £381 million principally due to lower core NatWest Markets income driven by challenging fixed income, currencies and commodities (FICC) market conditions in Q4 2018, together with turbulence in European bond markets earlier in the year.
2017 compared with 2016
· Net interest income of £8,987 million increased by £279 million compared with 2016. The movement was principally driven by higher mortgage volumes in UK PBB, up £185 million or 3.7%, and deposit re-pricing benefits in Commercial Banking, up £143 million or 6.7%, partially offset by planned balance sheet reductions in NatWest Markets.
· The net interest margin (NIM) was 2.13% for 2017, 5 basis points lower than 2016 reflecting increased liquidity, mix impacts and competitive pressures on margin.
· Structural hedges of £129 billion generated a benefit of £1.3 billion through net interest income for the year.
· Non-interest income of £4,146 million increased by £264 million, or 6.8%, compared with 2016, primarily reflecting a £185 million debt sale gain in UK PBB and a £183 million increase in strategic disposals gains, partially offset by an own credit adjustment loss of £69 million compared with a gain of £180 million in 2016.
· Net fees and commissions decreased by £80 million, or 3.2%, compared with 2016 reflecting a £48 million reduction in UK PBB, driven by increased cash back payments as the Reward proposition continued to grow with customer accounts 26% higher than 2016, and lower income in NatWest Markets.
· Income from trading activities, excluding own credit adjustments, decreased by £117 million, or 14.3%, compared with 2016 primarily reflecting lower income in NatWest Markets, down £247 million, or 29.8%, driven by increased losses in the legacy business. A gain of £2 million for volatile items under IFRS in 2017 compared with a charge of £510 million in 2016. This movement was broadly offset by FX losses of £183 million in 2017, compared with FX gains of £446 million in 2016, following the strengthening of sterling against the US dollar.
Note:
(1) One-off items in 2017 include central interest releases of £30 million and £44 million relating to Capital resolution.
Business review
Financial summary continued |
Statutory analysis (1,2) |
|
Non-statutory analysis | ||||
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
Operating expenses |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Staff expenses |
4,122 |
4,676 |
5,124 |
|
3,649 |
3,923 |
4,482 |
Premises and equipment |
1,383 |
1,565 |
1,388 |
|
1,241 |
1,218 |
1,297 |
Other administrative expenses |
3,372 |
3,323 |
8,745 |
|
1,787 |
1,710 |
1,619 |
Strategic costs (1) |
|
|
|
|
1,004 |
1,565 |
2,106 |
Litigation and conduct costs (2) |
|
|
|
|
1,282 |
1,285 |
5,868 |
Administrative expenses |
8,877 |
9,564 |
15,257 |
|
8,963 |
9,701 |
15,372 |
Depreciation and amortisation |
731 |
808 |
778 |
|
645 |
684 |
705 |
Write down of other intangible assets |
37 |
29 |
159 |
|
37 |
16 |
117 |
Operating expenses |
9,645 |
10,401 |
16,194 |
|
9,645 |
10,401 |
16,194 |
Notes:
(1) On a statutory, or GAAP, basis, strategic costs are included within staff, premises and equipment, and other administrative expenses.
(2) On a statutory, or GAAP, basis, litigation and conduct costs are included within other administrative expenses.
2018 compared with 2017
· Operating expenses decreased by £756 million, or 7.3%, primarily reflecting £561 million lower strategic costs and a £192 million reduction in other expenses, with litigation and conduct costs remaining broadly stable despite the US Department of Justice charge in the year. Excluding £86 million of one-off VAT releases in 2017, other expenses decreased by £278 million, or 3.6%, and FTEs reduced by 5.8%.
· Strategic costs of £1,004 million included: a £195 million direct charge in NatWest Markets relating to both the wind-down of the legacy business and ongoing development of the core business infrastructure; £177 million in respect of implementing ring-fencing requirements; £171 million of technology costs; a £133 million charge relating to the reduction in our property portfolio; a £76 million net settlement relating to the International Private Bank pension scheme; with the remaining charge largely relating to restructuring costs to achieve cost efficiencies across front and back office operations.
· Litigation and conduct costs of £1,282 million largely comprises the £1,040 million charge relating to the settlement with the Department of Justice and a £200 million charge relating to Payment Protection Insurance, partially offset by a £241 million provision release relating to a RMBS litigation indemnity.
· The cost:income ratio of 71.7% is elevated due to the inclusion of the net RMBS related conduct charge. Excluding this item the cost:income ratio, including strategic costs, would be 65.7%.
2017 compared with 2016
· Total operating expenses of £10,401 million were £5,793 million, or 35.8%, lower than 2016 reflecting a £4,583 million reduction in litigation and conduct costs, a £541 million reduction in restructuring costs, and a £669 million, or 8.1%, reduction in other operating expenses. Excluding VAT recoveries of £86 million (2016 - £227 million), other operating expenses have reduced by £810 million for the year, ahead of our £750 million targeted reduction, with approximately 45% of the total cost reduction delivered across PBB (comprising the reportable segments UK PBB and Ulster Bank RoI), CPB (comprising the reportable segments Commercial Banking and Private Banking, RBSI and the NatWest Markets core business, adjusting for transfers (1).
· Excluding staff restructuring costs in 2017 and 2016 of £753 million and £642 million respectively, staff costs of £3,923 million were £559 million, or 12.5%, lower than 2016 underpinned by a 6,600, or 8.5%, reduction in FTEs.
· Restructuring costs of £1,565 million included: a £303 million charge relating to the reduction in the property portfolio; a £319 million charge in NatWest Markets principally relating to the run-down and closure of the legacy business; £221 million relating to the business previously described as Williams & Glyn; £194 million in respect of implementing ring-fencing requirements; and a £73 million net settlement relating to the RBS Netherlands pension scheme.
· Litigation and conduct costs of £1,285 million included: additional charges in respect of settlement with Federal Housing Finance Agency (FHFA) and the California State Attorney General and additional RMBS related provisions in the US; a further provision in relation to settling the 2008 rights issue shareholder litigation; an additional £175 million PPI provision; and a £169 million provision in Ulster Bank RoI for customer remediation and project costs relating to tracker mortgages and other legacy business issues.
Note:
(1) Refer to footnotes on pages 27 and 28.
Business review
Financial summary continued |
2018 |
2017 |
Impairments |
£m |
£m |
Loans - amortised cost (1) |
319,800 |
321,633 |
ECL provisions (2) |
3,368 |
3,814 |
|
|
|
Impairment losses |
|
|
ECL charge (3,4) |
398 |
493 |
ECL loss rate - annualised (basis points) |
12.45 |
15.33 |
Amounts written off |
1,494 |
1,210 |
Notes:
(1) The table above summarises loans and related credit impairment measures on an IFRS 9 basis at 31 December 2018 and on an IAS 39 basis at 31 December 2017.
(2) 2018 ECL provisions in the above table are provisions on loan assets only. Other ECL provisions not included, relate to cash, debt securities and contingent liabilities, and amount to £28 million, of which £5 million was FVOCI.
(3) 2018 ECL charge balance in the above table included a £3 million charge relating to other financial assets, of which a £1 million charge related to assets at FVOCI; and a £31 million release related to contingent liabilities.
(4) 2017 comprises loan impairment losses of £530 million and releases on securities of £37 million.
2018 compared with 2017
· A net impairment loss of £398 million, 13 basis points of gross customer loans, decreased by £95 million, or 19.3%, compared with 2017 primarily reflecting lower single name charges in Commercial Banking, partially offset by fewer provision releases in UK PBB and NatWest Markets.
· In addition, we took an additional £101 million charge in Q3 2018 reflecting the more uncertain economic outlook and a net £60 million impairment charge in Ulster Bank RoI principally in relation to ongoing sales from our loan book to further reduce the level of non performing loans. Underlying credit conditions remained benign during 2018.
Business review
Tax
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Tax charge |
(1,275) |
(824) |
(1,166) |
UK corporation tax rate |
19.00% |
19.25% |
20.00% |
2018 compared with 2017
· The tax charge for the year ended 31 December 2018 is higher than the UK statutory tax rate reflecting the impact of the banking surcharge, non-deductible bank levy and conduct charges for which no tax relief has been recognised. These factors have been offset partially by adjustments in respect of prior years.
2017 compared with 2016
· The tax charge for the year ended 31 December 2017 is higher than the UK statutory tax rate reflecting the impact of the banking surcharge, non-deductible bank levy and conduct charges for which no tax relief has been recognised, a reduction in the carrying value and impact of UK tax rate changes on deferred tax balances. These factors have been offset partially by the release of tax provisions that reflect the reduction of exposures in countries where RBS is ceasing operations.
Business review
Financial summary continued
Summary consolidated balance sheet as at 31 December 2018
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and balances at central banks |
|
88,897 |
|
98,337 |
|
74,250 |
Trading assets |
|
75,119 |
|
85,991 |
|
86,660 |
Derivatives |
|
133,349 |
|
160,843 |
|
246,981 |
Loans to banks - amortised cost |
|
12,947 |
|
11,517 |
|
12,238 |
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
|
305,089 |
|
310,116 |
|
307,778 |
Settlement balances |
|
2,928 |
|
2,517 |
|
5,526 |
Other financial assets |
|
59,485 |
|
51,929 |
|
48,637 |
Other assets |
|
16,421 |
|
16,806 |
|
16,586 |
Total assets |
|
694,235 |
|
738,056 |
|
798,656 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
|
23,297 |
|
30,396 |
|
13,675 |
Customer deposits |
|
360,914 |
|
361,316 |
|
343,498 |
Trading liabilities |
|
72,350 |
|
81,982 |
|
84,536 |
Derivatives |
|
128,897 |
|
154,506 |
|
236,475 |
Other financial liabilities |
|
42,798 |
|
33,170 |
|
30,782 |
Subordinated liabilities |
|
10,535 |
|
12,722 |
|
19,419 |
Other liabilities |
|
8,954 |
|
14,871 |
|
20,867 |
Total liabilities |
|
647,745 |
|
688,963 |
|
749,252 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total equity |
|
46,490 |
|
49,093 |
|
49,404 |
Total liabilities and equity |
|
694,235 |
|
738,056 |
|
798,656 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Tangible net asset value per ordinary share (1) |
|
287 |
p |
288 |
p |
294p |
Note:
(1) Tangible net asset value per ordinary share represents tangible equity divided by the number of ordinary shares in issue
From 1 January 2018, the Group adopted IFRS 9 Financial Instruments. IFRS 9 changed the balance sheet classification categories from IAS 39. Refer to Note 33 for full details of the impact of IFRS 9 on the Groups balance sheet.
· Total assets of £694.2 billion as at 31 December 2018 were down £43.8 billion, 5.9%, compared with 31 December 2017. This was primarily driven by reductions in trading assets and derivatives reflecting the wind-down of the legacy business and management of the leverage exposure.
· Cash and balances at central banks decreased by £9.4 billion, 9.6%, to £88.9 billion representing liquidity management, the payment of the settlement with the US Department of Justice and the pension contribution in the year.
· Trading assets decreased by £10.9 billion, 12.6%, to £75.1 billion and trading liabilities decreased by £9.6 billion, 11.7%, to £72.4 billion mainly due to the wind-down of the legacy business in NatWest Markets.
· Movements in the value of derivative assets, down £27.5 billion, 17.1%, to £133.3 billion, and liabilities, down £25.6 billion, 16.6% to £128.9 billion, due to trading volumes and valuations in NatWest Markets.
· Loans to customers - amortised cost, decreased by £5.0 billion, 1.6%, to £305.1 billion including £2.2 billion in Commercial Banking due to active capital management, activity and approximately £0.7 billion, in Ulster Bank RoI, primarily in relation to the sale of a portfolio of non-performing loans.
· Other financial assets includes debt securities, equity shares and other loans and increased by £7.6 billion, 14.6%, to £59.5 billion, primarily reflecting increases in the liquidity portfolio driven by increased customer surplus within in the ring-fenced banks, reduced funding requirement and net term issuance in NatWest Markets.
· Other assets includes property, plant & equipment, deferred tax, assets of disposal groups, accruals, deferred income and pension scheme surpluses and decreased by £0.4 billion, 2.3% to £16.4 billion.
· Bank deposits decreased by £7.1 billion, 23.4%, to £23.3 billion, with decreases relating to funding management including a £5 billion payment in relation to the Bank of England Term Funding Scheme participation.
· Customer deposits decreased by £0.4 billion, 0.1% to £360.9 billion with increases in UK PBB, Ulster Bank RoI and Private Banking offset by decreases in Commercial Banking and RBS International.
· Other financial liabilities included customer deposits at fair value through profit and loss and debt securities and increased by £9.6 billion, 29.0%, to £42.8 billion primarily including issuances in the year of covered bonds and MREL in the year.
· Subordinated liabilities decreased by £2.2 billion, 17.2% to £10.5 billion, primarily as a result of redemptions of £2.0 billion reflecting on-going liability management activities.
· Other liabilities included deferred awards, deferred income, notes in circulation and accruals and decreased by £5.9 billion, 39.8% to £9.0 billion mainly due to the reduction in provisions in the year, primarily in relation to the settlement with the US Department of Justice.
· Owners equity decreased by £2.6 billion, 5.4%, to £45.7 billion, primarily driven by preference share redemptions and the pension contribution in the year offset by the £2.1 billion profit for the year.
Cash flow
Refer to page 185 for the consolidated cash flow statement.
Business review
Segment performance
UK Personal & Business Banking
Income statement |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m | |
Net interest income |
|
5,098 |
|
5,130 |
|
4,945 |
Non-interest income |
|
1,184 |
|
1,347 |
|
1,182 |
Total income |
|
6,282 |
|
6,477 |
|
6,127 |
Other costs |
|
(2,991) |
|
(3,158) |
|
(3,398) |
Strategic costs |
|
(275) |
|
(461) |
|
(244) |
Litigation and conduct costs |
|
(216) |
|
(210) |
|
(634) |
Operating expenses |
|
(3,482) |
|
(3,829) |
|
(4,276) |
Impairment losses |
|
(342) |
|
(235) |
|
(125) |
Operating profit |
|
2,458 |
|
2,413 |
|
1,726 |
Performance ratios |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Return on equity (1) |
|
24.3% |
|
23.7% |
|
16.2% |
Net interest margin |
|
2.78% |
|
2.86% |
|
2.97% |
Cost:income ratio |
|
55.4% |
|
59.1% |
|
69.8% |
Note:
(1) Return on equity is based on segmental operating profit after tax adjusted for preference dividends divided by average notional equity based on 15% of the monthly average of segmental RWAes, assuming 28% tax rate.
Capital and balance sheet |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn | |
Loans to customers (amortised cost) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- personal advances |
|
7.6 |
|
7.1 |
|
6.9 |
- mortgages |
|
138.3 |
|
136.8 |
|
128.0 |
- cards |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.2 |
- business banking |
|
6.8 |
|
6.8 |
|
6.3 |
- commercial |
|
7.0 |
|
8.3 |
|
8.8 |
Total loans to customers (amortised cost) |
|
163.7 |
|
163.0 |
|
154.2 |
Loan impairment provisions |
|
(1.4 |
) |
(1.3 |
) |
(1.5) |
Net loans to customers |
|
162.3 |
|
161.7 |
|
152.7 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total assets |
|
194.2 |
|
190.6 |
|
181.4 |
Customer deposits |
|
184.1 |
|
180.4 |
|
169.6 |
Risk-weighted assets |
|
45.1 |
|
43.0 |
|
42.3 |
Business review
Segment performance continued
2018 compared with 2017
· UK PBB now has 6.4 million regular mobile app users, 16% higher than 2017, with 72% of our active current account customers being regular digital users. Total digital sales increased by 19% representing 45% of all sales. 61% of mortgage switching is now done digitally, compared with 51% in 2017. 57% of personal unsecured loans sales are via the digital channel, with digital volumes 31% higher. In business banking, 91% of current accounts and 68% of loans under £50,000 were originated digitally.
· Total income was £195 million, or 3.0%, lower reflecting £124 million lower debt sale gains and a £33 million transfer of the Collective Investment Funds business to Private Banking in Q4 2017. Excluding these items, income was £38 million, or 0.6%, lower, including a £28 million reduction in overdraft fees following changes implemented in H2 2017, which included increasing the number of customer alerts. Net interest income of £5,098 million decreased by 0.6% as balance growth and deposit margin benefits were offset by lower mortgage new business margins, with net interest margin down by 8 basis points to 2.78%.
· Operating expenses decreased by £347 million, or 9.1%. Excluding strategic, litigation and conduct costs, operating expenses were £167 million, or 5.3%, lower driven by reduced back-office operations costs and lower headcount reflecting continued operating efficiencies, partially offset by increased technology investment spend as we continue to build our digital capability.
· Impairments were £107 million higher driven by fewer provision releases and lower recoveries following debt sales in prior years, as well as increased provisioning requirements under IFRS 9. The underlying default rate remained broadly stable with asset growth also accounting for an element of the uplift.
· Net loans to customers increased by 0.4% to £162.3 billion. The business has maintained a prudent approach to risk and pricing in a very competitive market, with gross new mortgage lending in 2018 at £30.4 billion, 1.9% lower than 2017. Mortgage market share was maintained at 11.3% supporting a stock share of around 10%. Momentum continued in personal advances and business banking, increasing by 7.0% and 0.4% respectively.
· Customer deposits increased by £3.7 billion, or 2.1%, as growth continued across current accounts and savings.
· RWAs increased by £2.1 billion, or 4.9%, principally due to modelling changes on mortgages and unsecured loans.
2017 compared with 2016
· Operating profit was £2,413 million compared with £1,726 million in 2016. The increase was driven by higher income, lower litigation and conduct charges and lower other operating expenses, partially offset by higher restructuring costs, largely relating to the reduction in our property portfolio and costs associated with the business previously described as Williams & Glyn(1), and higher impairments. Return on equity increased to 23.7% from 16.2% in 2016.
· Total income of £6,477 million was £350 million, or 5.7%, higher than 2016, principally reflecting strong balance growth, savings re-pricing benefits and a £185 million debt sale gain. Net interest margin declined by 11 basis points to 2.86% driven by lower mortgage margins, asset mix and reduced current account hedge yield, partially offset by savings re-pricing benefits from actions taken in 2016 and following the Q4 2017 base rate increase.
· Operating expenses decreased £447 million, or 10.5%, to £3,829 million. Excluding litigation and conduct costs, and restructuring costs, other operating expenses decreased by £240 million, or 7.1%, to £3,158 million compared with 2016 driven by a £59 million, or 7.1%, reduction in staff costs, with headcount down 8.3%, and a £181 million reduction in operational costs following process and productivity improvements in service operations and re-integration benefits in respect of the business previously described as Williams & Glyn(1). Cost:income ratio improved to 59.1% in 2017 compared with 69.8% in 2016.
· The net impairment charge of £235 million, or 14 basis points of gross customer loans, reflected continued benign credit conditions. 2017 had lower recoveries partly as a result of the debt sales undertaken, compared with 2016. Defaults remained at very low levels across all portfolios compared to historic trends, although slightly higher than in 2016.
· Net loans and advances increased by £9.0 billion, or 5.9%, to £161.7 billion as UK PBB continued to deliver support for both personal and business banking customers. Gross new mortgage lending in 2017 was £31.0 billion with market share of new mortgages at approximately 12%, resulting in stock share of approximately 10% at 31 December 2017 compared with 9.7% at 31 December 2016. Positive momentum continued across business banking lending, with net balances up 3.0% compared with 31 December 2016, adjusting for transfers(2).
· Customer deposits increased by £10.8 billion, or 6.4%, to £180.4 billion, driven by strong personal current account and business deposit growth.
· UK PBB includes commercial income from the business previously described as Williams & Glyn(1) of approximately £417 million, gross loans and advances of £8.3 billion and deposits of £14.3 billion. An estimated £70 million of the commercial income, £1.7 billion of gross loans and advances and £1.8 billion of deposits relates to mid-corporate customers not subject to the European Commission alternative remedies package. 120,000 of the remaining approximately 220,000 customers will be subject to the remedies package.
Notes:
(1) The business previously described as Williams & Glyn was integrated in to the reportable operating segment UK PBB in Q4 2017 and prior year comparatives re-presented.
(2) UK PBB Collective Investment Funds (CIFL) business was transferred to Private Banking on 1 October 2017. CIFL Business transfer included total income of £33 million and total expenses of £9 million. Comparatives were not re-presented. Transfers also included £0.4 billion loans and advances transferred from Commercial Banking to UK PBB during 2017 to better align Business banking customers. Comparatives were not re-presented.
Business review
Ulster Bank RoI
Income statement |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
m |
|
m |
|
m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m | |
Net interest income |
|
502 |
|
480 |
|
501 |
|
444 |
|
421 |
|
409 |
Non-interest income |
|
187 |
|
209 |
|
100 |
|
166 |
|
183 |
|
167 |
Total income |
|
689 |
|
689 |
|
704 |
|
610 |
|
604 |
|
576 |
Other costs |
|
(553) |
|
(516) |
|
(559) |
|
(490) |
|
(451) |
|
(457) |
Strategic costs |
|
(25) |
|
(64) |
|
(48) |
|
(22) |
|
(56) |
|
(40) |
Litigation and conduct costs |
|
(79) |
|
(192) |
|
(211) |
|
(71) |
|
(169) |
|
(172) |
Operating expenses |
|
(657) |
|
(772) |
|
(818) |
|
(583) |
|
(676) |
|
(669) |
Impairment losses |
|
(17) |
|
(68) |
|
138 |
|
(15) |
|
(60) |
|
113 |
Operating profit/(loss) |
|
15 |
|
(151) |
|
24 |
|
12 |
|
(132) |
|
20 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Average exchange rate - /£ |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1.130 |
|
1.142 |
|
1.224 |
Performance ratios |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Return on equity (1) |
|
0.5% |
|
(5.0%) |
|
0.7% |
|
0.5% |
|
(5.0%) |
|
0.7% |
Net interest margin |
|
1.79% |
|
1.67% |
|
1.62% |
|
1.79% |
|
1.67% |
|
1.62% |
Cost:income ratio |
|
95.6% |
|
111.9% |
|
116.1% |
|
95.6% |
|
111.9% |
|
116.1% |
Note:
(1) Return on equity is based on segmental operating profit after tax adjusted for preference share dividends divided by average notional equity (based on 14% of the monthly average of segmental risk-weighted assets incorporating the effect of capital deductions (RWAes)), assuming a nil tax rate.
Capital and balance sheet |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
bn |
|
bn |
|
bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn | |
Loans to customers (amortised cost) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- mortgages |
|
16.0 |
|
17.3 |
|
17.9 |
|
14.4 |
|
15.4 |
|
15.3 |
- other lending |
|
5.9 |
|
6.0 |
|
5.6 |
|
5.2 |
|
5.2 |
|
4.8 |
Total loans to customers (amortised cost) |
|
21.9 |
|
23.3 |
|
23.5 |
|
19.6 |
|
20.6 |
|
20.1 |
Loan impairment provisions |
|
(0.9) |
|
(1.3) |
|
(1.4) |
|
(0.8) |
|
(1.1) |
|
(1.2) |
Net loans to customers |
|
21.0 |
|
22.0 |
|
22.1 |
|
18.8 |
|
19.5 |
|
18.9 |
Total assets |
|
28.1 |
|
27.7 |
|
28.2 |
|
25.2 |
|
24.6 |
|
24.1 |
Funded assets |
|
28.1 |
|
27.6 |
|
28.0 |
|
25.2 |
|
24.5 |
|
24.0 |
Customer deposits |
|
20.1 |
|
19.1 |
|
17.7 |
|
18.0 |
|
16.9 |
|
15.2 |
Risk-weighted assets |
|
16.4 |
|
20.2 |
|
21.1 |
|
14.7 |
|
18.0 |
|
18.1 |
Spot exchange rate - /£ |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1.117 |
|
1.127 |
|
1.168 |
Business review
Segment performance continued
2018 compared with 2017
· Ulster Bank RoI continued to strengthen its digital proposition in 2018 through enhancements to digital and mobile customer offerings. 69% of our active personal current account customers are choosing to bank with us through digital channels. A faster, more convenient and secure digital application experience was introduced for customers who are applying for current accounts and personal loans and further enhancements were made to the mobile app during the year. Mobile payments and transfers increased 36% compared with 2017, reflecting the continued customer migration from physical to digital channels.
· Total income was in line with 2017. Net interest income increased by £23 million, or 5.5% (22 million, or 4.6% in euro terms), supporting a 12 basis point increase in net interest margin, primarily driven by an improving asset mix, lower cost of deposits and a one-off funding benefit in 2018, partially offset by a reduction in income on free funds. Non-interest income decreased by £17 million, or 9.3% (22 million, or 10.5% in euro terms), principally due to a lower number of non-recurring benefits and a reduction in fee income.
· Operating expenses decreased by £93 million, or 13.8% (115 million, or 14.9% in euro terms), principally due to a £98 million (113 million) reduction in litigation and conduct costs and £34 million (39 million) lower strategic costs. 2018 included a £71 million (79 million) conduct and litigation provision for customer remediation and project costs associated with legacy business issues. Other expenses increased by £39 million (37 million) primarily reflecting: the investment made into strengthening the risk, compliance and control environment; increased bank levies and regulatory fees; and higher spend on technology and innovation.
· A net impairment charge of £15 million (17 million) reflects a charge associated with a non-performing loan sale partially offset by observable improvements in the performance of the loan portfolio.
· Net loans to customers reduced by £0.7 billion, or 3.6% (1.0 billion, or 4.5% in euro terms), principally reflecting the sale of a portfolio of non-performing loans of £0.5 billion (0.6 billion) in 2018 and a continued reduction in the tracker mortgage book.
· Customer deposits increased by £1.1 billion, or 6.5% (1.0 billion, or 5.2% in euro terms), supporting a reduction in the loan:deposit ratio to 105% from 115%.
· RWAs reduced by £3.3 billion, or 18.3% (3.8 billion, or 18.8% in euro terms), principally reflecting the impact of the non-performing loan sale and an improvement in credit metrics.
2017 compared with 2016
· An operating loss of £132 million (151 million) compared with a £20 million (24 million) profit in 2016 primarily reflecting a £173 million (206 million) increase in impairment losses, largely relating to a change in the non performing loan strategy to allow for further portfolio sales.
· Total income of £604 million (689 million) was £28 million, or 4.9% higher than in 2016 (15 million, or 2.1% lower in euro terms). Adjusted income(1) of £607 million (693 million) was £34 million, or 5.9% higher than 2016 (8 million, or 1.1%, lower than 2016 in euro terms), primarily reflecting a £46 million (53 million) reduction in income on free funds, partially offset by one off items, higher lending income and reduced funding costs. Net interest margin of 1.67% was 5 basis points higher than 2016 reflecting a combination of improved deposit and loan margins, one-off income adjustments and successful deleveraging measures in 2016 which have reduced the concentration of low yielding loans.
· Operating expenses were £676 million, an increase of £7 million, or 1.0% compared with 2016 (a decrease of 46 million, or 5.6% to 772 million in euro terms). Excluding restructuring, and litigation and conduct costs, other operating expenses(1) decreased £6 million or 1.3% to £451 million; in euro terms other operating expenses of 516 million were 43 million, or 7.7%, lower than 2016. This was primarily due to continued progress in the delivery of cost saving initiatives, as evidenced by a 12.9% reduction in headcount, and lower pension costs. Cost:income ratio was 111.9% compared with 116.1% in 2016.
· A litigation and conduct provision of £169 million (192 million) related to customer remediation and project costs associated with legacy business issues.
· A net impairment loss of £60 million (68 million) compared with a £113 million (138 million) release in 2016. The movement was driven by a provision relating to a change in the non performing loan strategy to allow for further portfolio sales, gains associated with asset disposals in 2016 and refinements to the mortgage provision models in 2017. REILs were £3.3 billion, 5.7% lower than 2016 (3.7 billion, 9.8% in euro terms) reflecting credit quality improvements.
· Ulster Bank RoI gross new lending was £2.3 billion in 2017, up 7.2% compared with 2016 (2.6 billion, up 3.4% in euro terms).
· RWAs remained stable at £18.0 billion, compared with £18.1 billion in 2016. In euro terms, RWAs of 20.2 billion reduced by 0.9 billion, or 4.3%, compared with 2016.
Note:
(1) Excludes: Income - own credit adjustments of £3 million debit (2016 - £3 million credit); Costs - restructuring costs of £56 million (2016 - £40 million) and litigation and conduct costs of £169 million (2016 - £172 million).
Business review
Segment performance continued
Commercial Banking
Income statement |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m | |
Net interest income |
|
2,040 |
|
2,286 |
|
2,143 |
Non-interest income |
|
1,334 |
|
1,198 |
|
1,272 |
Total income |
|
3,374 |
|
3,484 |
|
3,415 |
Other costs |
|
(1,725 |
) |
(1,814 |
) |
(1,936) |
Strategic costs |
|
(106 |
) |
(167 |
) |
(108) |
Litigation and conduct costs |
|
(41 |
) |
(33 |
) |
(423) |
Operating expenses |
|
(1,872 |
) |
(2,014 |
) |
(2,467) |
Impairment losses |
|
(144 |
) |
(362 |
) |
(206) |
Operating profit |
|
1,358 |
|
1,108 |
|
742 |
Performance ratios |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Return on equity (1) |
|
10.2% |
|
6.6% |
|
4.1% |
Net interest margin |
|
1.67% |
|
1.74% |
|
1.76% |
Cost:income ratio |
|
53.8% |
|
56.0% |
|
71.0% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Capital and balance sheet |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn | |
Loans to customers (amortised cost) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- SME & mid-corporates |
|
30.0 |
|
30.7 |
|
32.2 |
- large corporates |
|
18.3 |
|
21.5 |
|
22.9 |
- real estate |
|
20.7 |
|
22.9 |
|
24.8 |
- specialised business |
|
18.0 |
|
19.7 |
|
20.5 |
- other |
|
2.0 |
|
3.3 |
|
0.4 |
Total loans to customers (amortised cost) |
|
89.0 |
|
98.1 |
|
100.8 |
Loan impairment provisions |
|
(1.0 |
) |
(1.2 |
) |
(0.8) |
Net loans to customers (amortised cost) |
|
88.0 |
|
96.9 |
|
100.0 |
Total assets |
|
143.2 |
|
149.5 |
|
150.5 |
Customer deposits (excluding repos) |
|
95.6 |
|
98.0 |
|
97.8 |
Loan:deposit ratio (excluding repos) |
|
92.0% |
|
99.0% |
|
102.0% |
Risk-weighted assets |
|
67.6 |
|
71.8 |
|
78.5 |
Notes:
(1) Return on equity is based on segmental operating profit after tax adjusted for preference dividends divided by average notional equity based on 11% of the monthly average of segmental RWAe, assuming 28% tax rate.
(2) Comparisons with prior periods are impacted by preparations for ring-fencing, including the transfer of shipping and other activities from NatWest Markets, the transfer of whole business securitisations and Relevant Financial Institutions and other activities to NatWest Markets and the transfer of the funds and trustee depositary business to RBS International. The net impact of transfers on 2017 would have been to reduce income by £246 million, operating expenses by £10 million, impairments by £72 million, net loans to customers by £5.3 billion, customer deposits by £1.2 billion and RWAs by £2.2 billion. There is an additional £1.4 billion reduction in 2017 net loans to customers as a result of 2018 asset reclassifications under IFRS9. The variances in the commentary below have been adjusted for the impact of these items excluding net interest margin.
Business review
Segment performance continued
2018 compared with 2017 (comparisons adjusted for transfers)
· Approximately 85% of customers now interact with Commercial Banking digitally and we have developed solutions they value. We successfully launched the Bankline mobile app in the Apple app store, whilst our lending journey now enables customers to apply digitally for loans of up to £750,000 through a self-service application process. This is the largest value offered by a UK commercial bank, giving customers rapid, digital access to funding decisions, with approximately 50% of loan applications given a decision in principle in under 24 hours.
· Total income increased by £136 million, or 4.2%, reflecting asset disposal and fair value gains of £169 million, compared with a £64 million loss in 2017, partially offset by lower lending. Net interest margin decreased by 7 basis points to 1.67% primarily reflecting reclassification of net interest income to non-interest income under IFRS 9, the impact of transfers and asset margin compression, partially offset by higher funding benefits from deposit balances.
· Operating expenses decreased by £132 million, or 6.6%. Excluding strategic, litigation and conduct costs, operating expenses were £79 million, or 4.4%, lower reflecting continued operating model simplification.
· Impairments decreased by £146 million, or 50.3%, mainly reflecting lower single name charges.
· Net loans to customers decreased by £2.2 billion, or 2.4%, principally driven by significant active capital management reductions, with underlying lending growth of £3.5 billion, or 3.8%. At Q3 2018, we announced an additional £2 billion of growth funding to help British businesses prepare for the Brexit transition, bringing the total commitment to £3 billion.
· Customer deposits decreased by £1.2 billion, or 1.2%, supporting a broadly stable loan:deposit ratio of 92%.
· RWAs decreased by £2.0 billion, or 2.9%, driven by £10.5 billion of gross RWA reductions associated with active capital management, partially offset by model updates of £2.9 billion, underlying business growth and partial reinvestment of gross RWA reductions through refinancing to existing clients under our revised pricing framework.
2017 compared with 2016
· Operating profit of £1,108 million compared with £742 million in 2016, primarily reflecting a reduction in litigation and conduct costs. Excluding litigation and conduct costs, and restructuring costs, operating profit of £1,308 million, was £35 million, or 2.7%, higher than 2016, reflecting lower other operating expenses and higher income, partially offset by higher impairments. Return on equity was 250 basis points higher than 2016 at 6.6%. Adjusted return on equity(1) remained broadly stable at 8.2%.
· Total income increased by £69 million, or 2.0%, to £3,484 million primarily reflecting increased volumes in targeted segments and re-pricing benefits on deposits. Net interest margin decreased by 2 basis points as active re-pricing of assets and deposits has been more than offset by wider asset margin pressure in a low rate environment.
· Operating expenses decreased by £453 million to £2,014 million. Excluding litigation and conduct costs, and restructuring costs, other operating expenses of £1,814 million, were £122 million, or 6.3%, lower than 2016, reflecting operating model simplification and productivity improvements, including a 16.4% reduction in front office headcount, and a £25 million intangible asset write-down in 2016. The cost:income ratio improved to 56.0% compared with 71.0% in 2016.
· Net impairment losses of £362 million were £156 million higher than 2016, reflecting a small number of single name impairments.
· Net loans and advances decreased by £3.1 billion to £96.9 billion. Adjusting for transfers(2) of £1.8 billion, net loans and advances decreased by £4.9 billion to £96.9 billion, compared with 2016, as growth in targeted segments has been more than offset by active capital management of the lending book.
· RWAs decreased by £6.7 billion to £71.8 billion. Adjusting for transfers(2) of £1.5 billion, RWAs decreased by £8.2 billion, or 10.4%, to £71.8 billion compared with 2016 reflecting active capital management of the lending book, achieving £12.5 billion of gross RWA reductions.
Notes:
(1) Excluding restructuring costs, and litigation and conduct costs.
(2) Shipping and other activities, which were formerly in Capital Resolution, were transferred from NatWest Markets on 1 October 2017, including net loans and advances to customers of £2.6 billion and RWAs of £2.1 billion. Commercial Banking transferred whole business securitisations and relevant financial institutions (RFI) to NatWest Markets during December 2017, including net loans and advances to customers of £0.8 billion and RWAs of £0.6 billion. Comparatives were not re-presented for these transfers.
Business review
Segment performance continued
Private Banking
Income statement |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m | |
Net interest income |
|
518 |
|
464 |
|
449 |
Non-interest income |
|
257 |
|
214 |
|
208 |
Total income |
|
775 |
|
678 |
|
657 |
Other costs |
|
(456) |
|
(445) |
|
(511) |
Strategic costs |
|
(21) |
|
(45) |
|
(37) |
Litigation and conduct costs |
|
(1) |
|
(39) |
|
(1) |
Operating expenses |
|
(478) |
|
(529) |
|
(549) |
Impairment releases/(losses) |
|
6 |
|
(6) |
|
3 |
Operating profit |
|
303 |
|
143 |
|
111 |
Performance ratios |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Return on equity (1) |
|
15.4% |
|
6.4% |
|
5.6% |
Net interest margin |
|
2.52% |
|
2.47% |
|
2.66% |
Cost:income ratio |
|
61.7% |
|
78.0% |
|
83.6% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Capital and balance sheet |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn | |
Loans to customers (amortised cost) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- personal |
|
2.0 |
|
2.3 |
|
2.3 |
- mortgages |
|
8.9 |
|
8.2 |
|
7.0 |
- other |
|
3.4 |
|
3.0 |
|
2.9 |
Total Net loans to customers (amortised cost) |
|
14.3 |
|
13.5 |
|
12.2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total assets |
|
22.0 |
|
20.3 |
|
18.6 |
Assets under management (2) |
|
19.8 |
|
21.5 |
|
17.0 |
Customer deposits |
|
28.4 |
|
26.9 |
|
26.6 |
Loan:deposit ratio |
|
50% |
|
50% |
|
46% |
Risk-weighted assets |
|
9.4 |
|
9.1 |
|
8.6 |
Notes:
(1) Return on equity is based on segmental operating profit after tax adjusted for preference dividends divided by average notional equity based on 13.5% (14% prior to Q1 2018) of the monthly average of segmental RWAes, assuming 28% tax rate.
(2) Comprises assets under management, assets under custody and investment cash.
(3) Comparisons with prior periods are impacted by the transfer of the Collective Investment Fund business from UK PBB and by the transfers of Coutts Crown Dependency and the International Client Group Jersey to RBS International. The net impact of the transfers on 2017 would have been to increase income by £24 million and operating expenses by £15 million and reduce net loans to customers by £0.1 billion, customer deposits by £0.5 billion and assets under management by £0.7 billion. The variances in the commentary below have been adjusted for the impact of these transfers excluding net interest margin.
Business review
Segment performance continued
2018 compared with 2017 (comparisons adjusted for transfers)
· Approximately 60% of clients bank with us digitally and 94% of clients positively rate our Coutts24 telephony service. Private Banking also recently launched Coutts Connect, a social platform which allows clients to network and build working relationships with one another.
· Total income increased by £73 million, or 10.4%, largely due to increased lending, higher funding benefits from deposit balances and higher investment income. Net interest margin increased by 5 basis points as higher deposit income was partially offset by asset margin pressure.
· Operating expenses decreased by £66 million, or 12.1%. Excluding strategic, litigation and conduct costs, operating expenses decreased by £4 million, or 0.8% driven by operating model efficiencies.
· A net impairment release of £6 million largely reflects a £9m release in Q4 2018 due to data quality improvements.
· Net loans to customers increased by £0.9 billion, or 6.7%, primarily in mortgages.
· Customer deposits increased by £2.0 billion, or 7.6%, mainly due to higher personal client account balances.
· Assets under management decreased by £1.0 billion, or 4.8%, reflecting market movements partially offset by new business inflows of £0.6 billion.
· Private Banking manages a further £6.7 billion of assets under management on behalf of RBS Group which sit outside of Private Banking. Total assets under management overseen by Private Banking have decreased by 5.7% to £26.5 billion as a result of market movements partially offset by net new business.
· RWAs increased by £0.3 billion, or 3.3%, relative to 6.7% growth in net loans to customers.
2017 compared with 2016
· Operating profit increased by £32 million, or 28.8%, to £143 million compared with 2016 and return on equity increased from 5.6% to 6.4%. Excluding litigation and conduct costs, and restructuring costs, adjusted operating profit of £227 million was £78 million, or 52.3%, higher than 2016 primarily reflecting lower other operating expenses and higher income. Adjusted return on equity(1) increased to 11.3% from 7.8% in 2016.
· Total income increased by £21 million to £678 million. Adjusting for transfers(2) of £9 million, total income increased by £12 million to £678 million due to increased lending volumes and an £8 million gain on a property sale, partially offset by ongoing margin pressure. Net interest margin fell 19 basis points to 2.47% reflecting the competitive market and low rate environment.
· Operating expenses decreased by £20 million to £529 million. Excluding litigation and conduct costs, and restructuring costs, adjusted operating expenses of £445 million decreased by £66 million, or 12.9%, compared with 2016 largely reflecting management actions to reduce costs, including an 11.8% reduction in front office headcount. The cost:income ratio improved to 78.0% from 83.6% in 2016.
· Net loans and advances of £13.5 billion were £1.3 billion, or 10.7%, higher than 2016 principally driven by growth in mortgages.
· Assets under management were £4.5 billion higher than 2016 at £21.5 billion. Adjusting for transfers(2) of £2.1 billion, assets under management were £2.4 billion, or 14.4%, higher than 2016 at £21.5 billion, reflecting both organic growth and favourable market conditions.
· RWAs of £9.1 billion were £0.5 billion, or 5.8%, higher than 2016 primarily due to increased mortgage lending.
Notes:
(1) Excluding restructuring costs, litigation and conduct costs and write down of goodwill.
(2) The UK PBB Collective Investment Funds (CIFL) business was transferred from UK PBB on 1 October 2017, including total income in Q4 2017 of £11 million and assets under management of £3.3 billion. Private Banking transferred Coutts Crown Dependencies (CCD) to RBS International during Q4 2017, including total income of £2 million and assets under management of £1.2 billion. Comparatives were not re-presented for these transfers.
Business review
Segment performance continued
RBS International
Income statement |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m | |
Net interest income |
|
466 |
|
325 |
|
303 |
Non-interest income |
|
128 |
|
64 |
|
71 |
Total income |
|
594 |
|
389 |
|
374 |
Other costs |
|
(260) |
|
(202) |
|
(169) |
Strategic costs |
|
(9) |
|
(9) |
|
(5) |
Litigation and conduct costs |
|
9 |
|
(8) |
|
|
Operating expenses |
|
(260) |
|
(219) |
|
(174) |
Impairment releases/(losses) |
|
2 |
|
(3) |
|
(10) |
Operating profit |
|
336 |
|
167 |
|
190 |
Performance ratios |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Return on equity (1) |
|
24.4% |
|
11.2% |
|
13.8% |
Net interest margin |
|
1.71% |
|
1.36% |
|
1.36% |
Cost:income ratio |
|
43.8% |
|
56.3% |
|
46.5% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Capital and balance sheet |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn | |
Loans to customers (amortised cost) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- corporate |
|
10.2 |
|
5.7 |
|
6.2 |
- mortgages |
|
2.7 |
|
2.7 |
|
2.6 |
- other |
|
0.4 |
|
0.3 |
|
|
Total Net loans to customers (amortised cost) |
|
13.3 |
|
8.7 |
|
8.8 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total assets |
|
28.4 |
|
25.9 |
|
23.4 |
Customer deposits |
|
27.5 |
|
28.9 |
|
25.1 |
Risk-weighted assets |
|
6.9 |
|
5.1 |
|
9.5 |
Notes:
(1) Return on equity is based on segmental operating profit after tax adjusted for preference dividends divided by average notional equity based on 16% (12% prior to November 2017) of the monthly average of segmental RWAes
(2) Comparisons with prior periods are impacted by the transfer of the funds and trustee depositary business from Commercial Banking and by the transfer of Coutts Crown Dependency and the International Client Group from Private Banking. The net impact of the transfers on 2017 would have been to increase income by £151 million and operating expenses by £14 million, net loans to customers by £4.5 billion, customer deposits by £1.7 billion and RWAs by £1.9 billion. The variances in the commentary below have been adjusted for the impact of these transfers excluding net interest margin.
Business review
Segment performance continued
2018 compared with 2017 (comparisons adjusted for transfers)
· The RBS International mobile app has been further developed to include new functionality, allowing customers to manage their finances more effectively and has 67 thousand users, an increase of 23% from 2017. 71% of wholesale customer payments are now processed using our newly introduced international banking platform, making the payments process simpler for customers.
· Total income increased by £54 million, or 10.0%, largely driven by deposit margin benefits. Institutional Banking contributed 62% to income in 2018, with Local Banking contributing 32% and Depositary Services 6%. Net interest margin increased by 35 basis points primarily driven by the impact of transfers and a change in product mix.
· Operating expenses increased by £27 million, or 11.6%, due to £39 million higher back-office costs associated with becoming a non ring-fenced bank and £5 million of remediation costs, partially offset by lower conduct and litigation costs.
· Impairments decreased by £5 million reflecting a number of small releases and improvements in underlying lending quality.
· Net loans to customers remained broadly stable at £13.3 billion and are split: £9.2 billion within Institutional Banking, of which £2.2 billion relates to real estate exposures; and £4.1 billion in Local Banking, of which £2.7 billion relates to mortgages.
· Customer deposits decreased by £3.1 billion reflecting a large inflow of short term placements in Institutional Banking in 2017. Customer deposits represent RBS Internationals primary funding source and are split: £18.1 billion Institutional Banking and £9.4 billion Local Banking.
· RWAs decreased by £0.1 billion, or 1.4%, with model updates offset by business movements.
· During 2018, we repositioned our balance sheet so that excess funds previously placed with RBS Group are now deployed into funding customer assets in our new London branch. We have also established a liquidity portfolio across central and correspondent banks and sovereign bond holdings. These changes provide continuity for our customers and support compliance with incoming Basel III Liquidity Coverage Ratio rules.
2017 compared with 2016
· Operating profit of £167 million decreased by £23 million, or 12.1%, compared with 2016 and return on equity decreased to 11.2% from 13.8%, reflecting increased operational costs associated with the creation of a bank outside the ring-fence, partially offset by higher income. Adjusted return on equity(1) decreased to 12.6% from 14.2% in 2016 .
· Total income increased by £15 million, or 4.0%, to £389 million driven by increased average lending balances in 2017 and re-pricing benefits on the deposit book.
· Net loans and advances were broadly stable compared with 2016 and customer deposits increased by £3.8 billion to £28.9 billion primarily reflecting increased short term placements in the Funds sector.
· RWAs of £5.1 billion reduced by £4.4 billion, or 46.3%, compared with 2016, reflecting the benefit of receiving the Advanced Internal Rating Based Waiver on the wholesale corporate book in November 2017, in advance of becoming a bank outside the ring-fence.
· From 1st Jan 2018 RBS International will include the funds and trustee depositary business transferred from Commercial Banking, which generated around £150 million of income and £60 million of costs in 2017.
Note:
(1) Excluding restructuring costs.
Business review
Segment performance continued
NatWest Markets
Income statement |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m | |
Net interest income |
|
112 |
|
203 |
|
343 |
Non-interest income |
|
1,330 |
|
847 |
|
869 |
Total income |
|
1,442 |
|
1,050 |
|
1,212 |
Other costs |
|
(1,213) |
|
(1,528) |
|
(2,084) |
Strategic costs |
|
(238) |
|
(436) |
|
(190) |
Litigation and conduct costs |
|
(153) |
|
(237) |
|
(550) |
Operating expenses |
|
(1,604) |
|
(2,201) |
|
(2,824) |
Impairment releases |
|
92 |
|
174 |
|
(253) |
Operating loss |
|
(70) |
|
(977) |
|
(1,865) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Analysis of income by product |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rates |
|
662 |
|
959 |
|
807 |
Currencies |
|
432 |
|
496 |
|
581 |
Financing |
|
382 |
|
456 |
|
344 |
Revenue share paid to other segments |
|
(217) |
|
(246) |
|
(211) |
Core income excluding OCA |
|
1,259 |
|
1,665 |
|
1,521 |
Legacy |
|
91 |
|
(549) |
|
(496) |
Own credit adjustments |
|
92 |
|
(66) |
|
187 |
Total income |
|
1,442 |
|
1,050 |
|
1,212 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Performance ratios |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Return on equity (2) |
|
(2.0%) |
|
(9.0%) |
|
(12.5%) |
Net interest margin |
|
0.40% |
|
0.65% |
|
0.91% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Capital and balance sheet |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn | |
Net loans to customers (amortised cost) |
|
8.4 |
|
9.7 |
|
13.1 |
Total assets |
|
244.5 |
|
277.9 |
|
372.5 |
Funded assets |
|
111.4 |
|
118.7 |
|
128.5 |
Customer deposits |
|
2.6 |
|
3.3 |
|
5.1 |
Risk-weighted assets |
|
44.9 |
|
52.9 |
|
69.7 |
Notes:
(1) The NatWest Markets operating segment should not be assumed to be the same as the NatWest Markets Plc legal entity or group.
(2) Return on equity is based on segmental operating profit after tax adjusted for preference dividends divided by average notional equity (based on 15% of the monthly average of segmental risk-weighted assets incorporating the effect of capital deductions (RWAes)), assuming 28% tax rate.
(3) Comparisons with prior periods are impacted by the transfer of shipping and other activities to Commercial Banking and the transfer of whole business securitisations and Relevant Financial Institutions from Commercial Banking in preparation for ring-fencing. The net impact of the transfers on 2017 would have been to increase income by £104 million, reduce operating expenses by £2 million, reduce the net release of impairments by £72 million and increase funded assets by £1.3 billion and RWAs by £0.4 billion. The variances in the full year commentary below have been adjusted for the impact of these transfers.
Business review
Segment performance continued
2018 compared with 2017 (comparisons adjusted for transfers)
· NatWest Markets continues to focus on customer service and is increasingly using technology to enhance the way it provides innovative financial solutions to its customers and partners. For example, FXmicropay makes it simpler for businesses operating globally to accept payments in multiple currencies, reducing costs and increasing revenues for our customers. Our success in harnessing technology has been recognised with two awards: Best in Service Globally among Corporates for Algorithmic trading in the 2018 Euromoney FX Survey and Best Order Management award in the Profit & Loss 2018 Digital FX Awards.
· Total income increased by £288 million, or 25.0%, primarily reflecting lower disposal losses in the legacy business and a £165 million indemnity insurance recovery, partially offset by lower income in the core business. The reduction in the core business was driven by challenging fixed income, currencies and commodities (FICC) market conditions in Q4 2018, together with turbulence in European bond markets earlier in the year.
· Operating expenses decreased by £595 million, or 27.1%. This reflects reductions in other expenses across both the core and legacy businesses, down £313 million to £1,213 million, lower strategic costs, down £198 million to £238 million, and reduced litigation and conduct costs, down £84 million to £153 million.
· The net impairment release decreased by £10 million to £92 million reflecting a lower level of legacy releases.
· Funded assets decreased by £8.6 billion, or 7.2%, reflecting the wind down of the legacy business.
· RWAs decreased by £8.4 billion to £44.9 billion, including RWAs for Alawwal bank of £5.9 billion. The decrease was driven by the legacy business, down £7.1 billion, in addition to reductions in the core business.
2017 compared with 2016
· An operating loss of £977 million compared with £1,865 million in 2016. The core business operating profit increased by £427 million to £41 million reflecting lower litigation and conduct costs and higher income, partially offset by increased restructuring costs reflecting back office restructuring activity. Adjusted operating loss(1) of £264 million, compared with £1,231 million in 2016, reflecting lower adjusted costs(1) and a net impairment release of £174 million in 2017, compared with a charge of £253 million in 2016.
· Total income of £1,050 million compared with £1,212 million in 2016. In the core business, total income increased by £42 million, or 2.7%, to £1,616 million, whereas adjusted income(1) increased by £144 million, or 9.5%, to £1,665 million, principally driven by Rates as the business navigated markets well despite a lower level of customer activity than in 2016, which benefited from favourable market conditions following the EU referendum.
· Operating expenses of £2,201 million were £623 million, or 22.1%, lower than 2016, whereas adjusted operating expenses(1) of £1,528 million were £556 million, or 26.7%, lower than 2016. In the legacy business, operating expenses decreased by £238 million, or 27.5%, to £627 million, whereas adjusted operating expenses decreased significantly reflecting a 77.7% reduction in headcount as the business moved towards closure. In the core business, operating expenses decreased by £383 million, 19.5%, to £1,577 million as the business continues to drive cost reductions, where as adjusted operating expenses were £1,268 million compared to £1,320 million in 2016.
· RWAs decreased by £15.3 billion, adjusting for transfers(2), to £52.9 billion primarily reflecting reductions in the legacy business. In the core business RWAs decreased by £3.1 billion to £32.3 billion reflecting lower counterparty credit risk through mitigation activities and business initiatives. At the end of 2017 the legacy business within NatWest Markets had RWAs of £14.0 billion, excluding RBSs stake in Alawwal Bank, a reduction of £10.9 billion, adjusting for transfers, over the course of the year.
· Total assets fell by £94.6 billion to £277.9 billion, funded assets fell to £118.7 billion, a reduction of £7.3 billion, adjusting for transfers(2), mainly reflecting disposal activity.
Notes:
(1) Excludes: Income - own credit adjustments of £66 million debit (2016 - £187 million credit), strategic disposals of £26 million credit (2016 - £81 million debit). Costs - restructuring costs of £436 million (2016 - £190 million) and litigation and conduct costs of £237 million (2016 - £550 million).
(2) Shipping and other activities, which were formerly in Capital Resolution, were transferred to Commercial Banking on 1 October 2017, including total funded assets of £3.3 billion, net loans and advances to customers of £2.6 billion, and RWAs of £2.1 billion. Whole business securitisations and relevant financial institutions (RFI) were transferred from Commercial Banking during December 2017, including net loans and advances to customers of £0.8 billion, and RWAs of £0.6 billion. Comparatives were not re-presented for these transfers.
Business review
Segment performance continued
Central items & other
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m | |
Central items not allocated |
|
(1,038) |
|
(483) |
|
(5,006) |
Funding and operating costs have been allocated to operating segments based on direct service usage, the requirement for market funding and other appropriate drivers where services span more than one segment. Residual unallocated items relate to volatile corporate items that do not naturally reside within a segment.
2018 compared with 2017
· Central items not allocated represented a charge of £1,038 million in 2018, largely comprises the £1,040 million charge relating to the civil settlement with the US Department of Justice and £333 million of strategic costs, partially offset by a £241 million provision release relating to an RMBS litigation indemnity and indemnity insurance recoveries of £192 million.
2017 compared with 2016
Central items not allocated represented a charge of £483 million in 2017, compared with a £5,006 million charge in 2016, and included litigation and conduct costs of £589 million, compared with £4,088 million in 2016. Treasury funding costs were a charge of £58 million, compared with a charge of £94 million in 2016. Restructuring costs in the year included £94 million relating to the former Williams & Glyn business, compared with £1,399 million in 2016. In addition to a VAT recovery of £86 million, compared with £227 million in 2016, a £156 million gain on the sale of Vocalink and a £135 million gain in relation to the sale of EuroClear(1).
Note:
(1) The total gain in relation to the sale of Euroclear was £161 million, of which £135 million central items and £26 million NatWest Markets.
Our Board
Key |
|
Group audit committee |
|
Re |
|
Group performance and remuneration committee |
A |
|
Group Executive committee |
|
Ri |
|
Group Board risk committee |
E |
|
GRG Board Oversight Committee |
|
S |
|
Group Sustainable banking committee |
G |
|
Group nominations and governance committee |
|
T |
|
Technology and innovation committee |
N |
|
|
|
Underlined |
|
Committee Chairman |
1 Howard Davies
Appointed: 14 July 2015 (Board),
1 September 2015 (Chairman)
Experience: Howard was chair of the UK Airports Commission between 2012 and 2015; Director of the London School of Economics and Political Science from 2003 until May 2011; Chairman of the UK Financial Services Authority from 1997 to 2003; and Deputy Governor of the Bank of England from 1995 to 1997.
He is also Professor of Practice at the Paris Institute of Political Science (Sciences Po) and author of several books on financial subjects.
External appointment(s): Independent director of Prudential plc and chair of the Risk Committee; Member of the Regulatory and Compliance Advisory Board of Millennium Management LLC; Chair of the International Advisory Council of the China Securities Regulatory Commission; and Member of the International Advisory Council of the China Banking Regulatory Commission.
2 Ross McEwan
Appointed: 1 October 2013
Experience: Ross has more than 25 years experience in the finance, insurance and investment industries. He became Chief Executive of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group in October 2013 and between August 2012 and September 2013, was Chief Executive Officer for UK Retail, joining from Commonwealth Bank of Australia where he was Group Executive for Retail Banking Services for five years. Prior to this, Ross was Executive General Manager with responsibility for the branch network, contact centres and third party mortgage brokers. Prior to Commonwealth Bank of Australia, he was Managing Director of First NZ Capital Securities. He was also Chief Executive of National Mutual Life Association of Australasia Ltd/AXA New Zealand Ltd.
External appointments: None.
3 Katie Murray
Appointed: 1 January 2019
Experience: Katie joined RBS as Director of Finance in November 2015 and was appointed as Deputy Chief Financial Officer in March 2017. Katie has worked in Finance and Accounting for nearly 30 years with experience in capital management, investor relations, financial planning and all areas of financial services. Katie was previously the Group Finance Director for Old Mutual Emerging Markets, based in Johannesburg from 2011 to 2015, having held various roles in Old Mutual from 2002. Prior to this Katie worked at KPMG for 13 years. Katie is a Chartered Accountant having trained in Scotland and is a member of The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland.
External appointments: None.
Independent non-executive directors
4 Frank Dangeard
Appointed 16 May 2016
Experience: Frank assumed the role of Chairman, NatWest Markets Plc on 30 April 2018. Previously, Frank served as a non-executive director of Crédit Agricole CIB, EDF, Home Credit, Orange, Sonaecom SGPS, and as Deputy Chairman and acting Chairman of Telenor ASA. During his executive career he held various roles at Thomson S.A., including Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, and was Deputy Chief Executive Officer of France Telecom. Prior to that he was Chairman of SG Warburg France and Managing Director of SG Warburg.
Frank is a graduate of HEC and IEP in Paris and of the Harvard Law School in the US.
External appointments: Non-executive director of the Symantec Corporation and Arqiva.
5 Alison Davis
Appointed 1 August 2011
Experience: Previously, Alison served as a director of City National Bank, First Data Corporation, Xoom, Presidio Bank and Diamond foods, and as a non-executive director and chair of the board of LECG Corporation. She has also worked at McKinsey & Company; AT Kearney; as Chief Financial Officer at Barclays Global Investors (now BlackRock); and as managing partner of Belvedere Capital, a private equity firm focused on buy-outs in the financial services sector.
Alison is a graduate of Cambridge University and Stanford Business School.
External appointments: Non-executive director, and member of the audit committee of Fiserv Inc; and non-executive director and chair of the audit committee of Ooma Inc.
6 Patrick Flynn
Appointed 1 June 2018
Experience: Patrick Flynn was the Chief Financial Officer and a member of the Executive Board of ING Group (Netherlands largest financial services group) from April 2009 to May 2017. Prior to that, he was Chief Financial Officer of HSBC Insurance from 2007 to 2009 and prior to that, from 2002 to 2007, was Chief Financial Officer of HSBC South America based in Brazil where he was responsible for HSBCs banking and insurance operations.
Patrick is a Chartered Accountant; a Fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants Ireland; and a member of the Association of Corporate Treasurers in the UK.
External appointments: None.
Our Board
7 Morten Friis
Appointed 10 April 2014
Experience: Previously, Morten had a 34 year financial services career. He held various roles at Royal Bank of Canada and its subsidiaries including Associate Director at Orion Royal Bank; Vice President, Business Banking; and Vice President, Financial Institutions. In 1997, he was appointed as Senior Vice President, Group Risk Management and served as the Chief Credit Officer, then Chief Risk Officer, from 2004 to 2014. He was also previously a Director of RBC Bank (USA); Westbury Life Insurance Company; RBC Life Insurance Company; and RBC Dexia Investor Services Trust Company.
External appointments: Member of the Board of Directors of The Canadian Institute for Advanced Research; member of the Board of Directors of the Harvard Business School Club of Toronto; and non-executive director of Jackson National Life Insurance Company.
8 Robert Gillespie
Appointed 2 December 2013
Experience: Robert had a long career in investment banking, specialising in corporate advisory work. He was Director General of the Takeover Panel from 2010 until 2013 and prior to that held a number of senior management positions at UBS including being global head of investment banking from 1999 until 2005, chief executive of UBS for EMEA from 2004 to 06 and Vice Chairman of UBS Investment Bank from 2005 to 2008. He commenced his career at Price Waterhouse where he qualified as a Chartered Accountant and in 1981 joined S.G. Warburg which subsequently became part of UBS.
External appointments: Independent board director at Ashurst LLP; chairman of the Boat Race Company Limited; director of Social Finance Limited; and professor of practice, Durham University Business School.
9 Brendan Nelson
Appointed 1 April 2010
Experience: Brendan is a non-executive director of NatWest Markets Plc and chair of its audit committee. Previously Brendan was global chairman, financial services for KPMG. He held senior leadership roles within KPMG, including as a member of the KPMG UK board from 1999 to 2006 and as vice-chairman from 2006 until his retirement in 2010. He was Chairman of the Audit Committee of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland from 2005 to 2008 and President of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland 2013/14.
External appointments: Non-executive director and Chairman of the audit committee and member of the remuneration, nominations & governance committee and chairmans committees of BP plc; and member of the Financial Reporting Review Panel.
10 Baroness Noakes, DBE
Appointed 1 August 2011
Experience: Baroness Noakes is an experienced director on UK listed company boards with extensive and varied political and public sector experience. A qualified chartered accountant, she previously headed KPMGs European and International Government practices and has been President of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales. She was appointed to the House of Lords in 2000 and has served on the Conservative front bench in various roles including as shadow Treasury minister between 2003 and May 2010. Baroness Noakes previously held non-executive roles on the Court of the Bank of England, Hanson, ICI, Severn Trent, Carpetright, John Laing and SThree.
External appointments: Member of the House of Lords Select Committee on the European Union and its sub-committee on the internal market.
11 Mike Rogers
Appointed 28 January 2016
Experience: Mike was previously Chief Executive of Liverpool Victoria Group for 10 years. Mike has extensive experience in retail banking and financial services. He joined Barclays in 1986 where he undertook a variety of roles in the UK and overseas across business banking, wealth management and retail banking and was Managing Director of Small Business, Premier Banking and UK Retail Banking.
External appointments: Non-executive Chairman of Aegon UK; Director of Experian plc; and Chairman of its Remuneration Committee.
12 Mark Seligman
Appointed 1 April 2017; Senior Independent Director since 1 January 2018
Experience: Mark, is a former senior investment banker with broad financial services knowledge, has substantial FTSE 100 Board experience gained in various industry sectors, including as a Committee Chair and Senior Independent Director. During his executive career, he held various senior roles at Credit Suisse/BZW (including Deputy Chairman, CSFB Europe and Chairman, UK Investment Banking, CSFB); and previously SG Warburg (ultimately as Managing Director, Head of Advisory). He has also previously served as a non-executive Director of BG Group plc and as Deputy Chairman of G4S plc.
External appointments: Senior Independent Director of Kingfisher plc and non-Executive Director and Chairman of the audit committee of Smiths Group plc.
13 Dr Lena Wilson, CBE
Appointed 1 January 2018
Experience: Lena is an experienced CEO with an international career, who spent a significant proportion of her executive career with Scottish Enterprise, latterly as Chief Executive from 2009 until 2017. Prior to that, Lena held the role of Senior Investment Advisor to The World Bank in Washington DC. She is a visiting Professor at the University of Strathclyde and has previously served as a member of Scotlands Financial Services Advisory Board and as Chair of Scotlands Energy Jobs Taskforce. In June 2015 she received a CBE for services to economic development in Scotland. Lena is Chair of the Colleague Advisory Panel established by RBS during 2018.
External appointments: Non-Executive Director of Intertek Group plc and member of its audit and nomination committees, and non-Executive Director of Scottish Power Renewables Limited. Visiting Professor, University of Strathclyde Business School. Advisory Board member of MCR Pathways.
Chief Governance & Regulatory Officer and Board Counsel; Company Secretary
14 Aileen Taylor
Appointed 1 May 2010
Experience: A qualified solicitor, Aileen joined RBS in 2000. She was appointed Group Secretary in 2010 and extended her remit further in 2015, becoming Chief Governance Officer and Board Counsel. In 2017 she also assumed responsibility for Regulatory Affairs. Prior to that Aileen held various legal, secretariat and risk roles including Head of External Risk (Retail), Head of Regulatory Risk (Retail Direct) and Head of Legal and Compliance (Direct Line Financial Services).
Aileen is a fellow of the Chartered Institute of Bankers in Scotland and a member of the European Corporate Governance Council and the GC 100. She is also a member of the FCAs Listing Authority Advisory Panel.
Corporate governance
|
Page |
Our Board |
59 |
Corporate governance |
61 |
Report of the Group Nominations and Governance Committee |
65 |
Report of the Group Audit Committee |
66 |
Report of the Group Board Risk Committee |
69 |
Report of the Group Sustainable Banking Committee |
72 |
Report of the Technology and Innovation Committee |
73 |
Directors Remuneration report |
74 |
Compliance report |
95 |
Report of the directors |
97 |
Statement of directors responsibilities |
100 |
Chairmans introduction
Dear Shareholder,
I am pleased to present the corporate governance report. During 2018 the Board considered a range of key strategic, financial, regulatory and risk matters, including:
· Future strategy, including RBSs purpose and long term future, technology and innovation
· Banking structural reform
· Dividend policy and declaration of an interim dividend
· US Department of Justice: US RMBS investigation - final settlement
· Group Pension Fund: MoU on structural changes and additional related funding contribution
· Risks associated with the transition of LIBOR and other IBOR rates to alternative risk free rates
· Building a healthy culture
· Implications of Brexit
The Board also dedicated time to engagement with employees, shareholders, customers and other stakeholders, as set out in more detail on page 63.
Ring-Fencing Governance
We also introduced some significant changes to the way our board operates. In Q1 the Board approved a new board and committee operating model in order to align with UK ring-fencing requirements effective from 1 January 2019. The transition towards the new model began in May 2018 and I am pleased to report that the revised operating rhythm is now embedded. Under the new arrangements, the RBSG Board has adopted a revised remit aligned primarily to the legal and regulatory obligations of a listed holding company. This includes: strategy; significant acquisitions and disposals; budget and financial results; risk appetite; regulatory submissions; board and committee appointments; executive pay and performance; culture; and shareholder relations.
NatWest Holdings Limited (NWH Ltd) is now the holding company for our ring-fenced operations. NWH Ltd shares a common board membership with NatWest, the Royal Bank and Ulster Bank Limited (together, the NWH Ltd sub-group) and the four boards meet concurrently.
Under the new model, the NWH Ltd board is the designated forum for matters relating specifically to our ring-fenced operations, with a strong focus on the customer-facing businesses operating within the NWH Ltd sub-group. It receives regular business reviews and updates from franchise and function CEOs and also considers NWH Ltd strategy; risk profile; customer, innovation and people issues; regulatory submissions; financial results; budget; and board and committee appointments as they relate to the NWH Ltd sub-group.
An integral part of our ring-fencing governance arrangements is the appointment of Double Independent Non-Executive Directors or DINEDs to the NWH Ltd sub-group boards and board committees.
The DINEDs are independent in two respects: (i) independent of management as non-executives; and (ii) independent of the rest of the Group by virtue of their NWH Ltd sub-group only directorships. They play a critical role in our ring-fencing governance structure, with an enhanced role in managing any conflicts which may arise between the interests of NWH Ltd and RBSG. The DINEDs attend RBSG Board meetings in an observer capacity.
On 30 April 2018 Yasmin Jetha stood down as a director of RBSG allowing her to assume DINED status. A further 3 DINEDs were appointed to the NWH Ltd sub-group boards with effect from 1 May: Francesca Barnes, Graham Beale and Ian Cormack. On 3 December Alison Rose-Slade was appointed as Deputy CEO, NatWest Holdings, and as a director of the NWH Ltd sub-group boards.
RBSs principal subsidiary entities outside the ring-fence, including NatWest Markets Plc, operate separate board and committee meeting cycles. In April 2018 Frank Dangeard stood down from the NWH Ltd sub-group boards and assumed the role of Chairman of NatWest Markets Plc.
Other Board changes
Penny Hughes resigned as a non-executive director on 30 May 2018, and Ewen Stevenson resigned as Chief Financial Officer and director on 30 September 2018. I would like to thank Penny and Ewen for all their hard work and dedication to RBS during their time with us.
On 1 June 2018, we were pleased to welcome Patrick Flynn to the Board. Patricks appointment further strengthens our overall board composition and supports succession planning.
We were also delighted to announce the appointment of Katie Murray as Executive Director and Chief Financial Officer (CFO) with effect from 1 January 2019. Katies appointment followed a successful period as interim CFO.
In addition, Brendan Nelson will step down as Chairman of the Group Audit Committee with effect from close of business on 31 March 2019, and as a non-executive director with effect from the end of the 2019 Annual General Meeting. Patrick Flynn will assume the role of Chairman of the Group Audit Committee with effect from close of business on 31 March 2019.
2018 UK Corporate Governance Code and Statutory Reporting Changes
In July 2018 the Financial Reporting Council published the 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code (the 2018 Code), which applies to accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2019. Having conducted a comprehensive impact analysis we believe we are well placed to report on our application of the new 2018 Codes principles in our 2019 report. We have also noted the new statutory reporting requirements (as set out in the Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) Regulations 2018) that apply to the company for accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2019. We will make the relevant disclosures in our 2019 Annual Report on Form 20-F although we have opted for early disclosure on certain remuneration reporting requirements which can be found in the Directors Remuneration Report on page 74.
In conclusion, I and my fellow directors are committed to observing high standards of corporate governance, integrity and professionalism. Our statement of compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code) can be found on page 95.
Howard Davies
Chairman of the Board
14 February 2019
The Board
The Board has thirteen directors comprising the Chairman, two executive directors and ten independent non-executive directors, one of whom is the Senior Independent Director.
Biographies for each director and details of the Board committees they are members of can be found on pages 59 and 60. The Board considers that the Chairman was independent on appointment and that all non-executive directors are independent for the purposes of the Code.
Roles and responsibilities
The Board
The Board is collectively responsible for the long-term success of RBS and delivery of sustainable shareholder value. The terms of reference include a formal schedule of matters specifically reserved for the Boards decision and are reviewed at least annually. They are available on rbs.com. During 2018 an internal review confirmed that the Board had fulfilled its remit as set out in its terms of reference.
Board Committees
In order to provide effective oversight and leadership, the Board has established a number of Board committees with particular responsibilities. Refer to page 35 of the Strategic Report for more details. The terms of reference are available on rbs.com.
Corporate governance
Executive Management
The Board and the CEO are supported by the Executive Committee (ExCo), which is responsible for overseeing all aspects of the Groups operations. ExCos membership comprises the executive directors and the Group Chief Risk Officer; who are also members of the wider executive management team. Biographies of the executive management team can be found on rbs.com.
Chairman and Chief Executive
The role of Chairman is distinct and separate from that of the Chief Executive and there is a clear division of responsibilities with the Chairman leading the Board and the Chief Executive managing business day to day. Details of the key responsibilities of the Chairman and the Chief Executive are available on rbs.com.
Senior Independent Director
Throughout 2018 Mark Seligman, as Senior Independent Director, acted as a sounding board for the Chairman and as an intermediary for other directors when necessary. He was also available to shareholders to discuss any concerns they may have had, as appropriate.
Non-executive directors
Along with the Chairman and executive directors, the non-executive directors are responsible for ensuring the Board fulfils its responsibilities under its terms of reference.
The non-executive directors combine broad business and commercial experience with independent and objective judgement and they provide independent challenge to the executive directors and the leadership team.
The balance between non-executive and executive directors enables the Board to provide clear and effective leadership across RBSs business activities. The standard terms and conditions of appointment of non-executive directors are available on rbs.com.
Company Secretary
The Company Secretary, Aileen Taylor, works closely with the Chairman to ensure effective functioning of the Board and appropriate alignment and information flows between the Board and its committees.
As Chief Corporate Governance and Regulatory Officer & Board Counsel, Aileen advises the Board and individual directors on a broad range of strategic, governance, legal and regulatory issues. Aileen also facilitates Board induction and directors professional development.
Conflicts of interest
The Directors Conflicts of Interest policy sets out procedures to ensure that the Boards management of conflicts of interest and its powers for authorising certain conflicts are operating effectively.
Each director is required to notify the Board of any actual or potential situational or transactional conflict of interest and to update the Board with any changes to the facts and circumstances surrounding such conflicts.
Situational conflicts can be authorised by the Board in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and the companys Articles of Association. The Board considers each request for authorisation on a case by case basis and has the power to impose conditions or limitations on any authorisation granted as part of the process.
Details of all directors conflicts of interest are recorded in a register which is maintained by the Company Secretary and reviewed annually by the Board.
Board and Committee meetings
The table below shows Board and Committee meeting attendance during 2018.
In addition to scheduled meetings, additional meetings of the Board and its Committees were held on an ad hoc basis to deal with time-critical matters. There were nine ad hoc Board meetings, six ad hoc N&G meetings, four ad hoc RemCo meetings, six ad hoc BRC meetings and 1 ad hoc GAC meeting. The Chairman and the non-executive directors meet at least once per year without executive directors present.
Board and committee membership and attendance 2018
|
Board |
Group |
Group |
Group |
Group |
Group |
Technology |
Howard Davies |
9/9 |
4/4 |
|
|
|
|
|
Ross McEwan |
9/9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Frank Dangeard 1 |
9/9 |
|
|
4/4 |
3/3 |
|
6/6 |
Alison Davis 2 |
9/9 |
|
|
|
6/7 |
6/6 |
6/6 |
Patrick Flynn 3 |
5/5 |
|
3/3 |
5/5 |
|
|
4/4 |
Morten Friis |
9/9 |
|
7/7 |
9/9 |
|
|
|
Robert Gillespie 4 |
9/9 |
4/4 |
|
5/5 |
7/7 |
6/6 |
|
Brendan Nelson |
9/9 |
4/4 |
7/7 |
9/9 |
|
|
|
Baroness Noakes5 |
9/9 |
3/4 |
7/7 |
9/9 |
|
|
|
Mike Rogers 6,7 |
8/9 |
|
|
|
7/7 |
5/6 |
|
Mark Seligman 8 |
9/9 |
3/4 |
|
|
7/7 |
|
|
Lena Wilson 9,10 |
8/9 |
|
|
|
|
6/6 |
4/4 |
Former Directors |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Yasmin Jetha 11 |
3/3 |
|
|
|
|
2/2 |
1/1 |
Penny Hughes 12 |
4/4 |
1/1 |
|
4/4 |
|
2/2 |
|
Ewen Stevenson13 |
7/7 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes:
(1) Frank Dangeard was appointed to RemCo, and stood down from BRC, on 1 June 2018.
(2) Alison Davis did not attend the February RemCo meeting due to a scheduling clash with a pre-existing commitment.
(3) Patrick Flynn was appointed to the Board, GAC, BRC and TIC on 1 June 2018.
(4) Robert Gillespie was appointed to BRC on 1 June 2018.
(5) Baroness Noakes did not attend the December N&G meeting due to a scheduling clash with a pre-existing commitment.
(6) Mike Rogers assumed the role of SBC Chairman on 30 May 2018.
(7) Mike Rogers did not attend the March Board and SBC meetings due to a scheduling clash with a pre-existing commitment.
(8) Mark Seligman was not able to attend the December N&G meeting due to a private commitment.
(9) Lena Wilson did not attend the August Board meeting due to a scheduling clash with a pre-existing commitment.
(10) Lena Wilson was appointed to the TIC on 1 June 2018.
(11) Yasmin Jetha resigned from the Board on 30 April 2018.
(12) Penny Hughes resigned from the Board on 30 May 2018.
(13) Ewen Stevenson resigned from the Board on 30 September 2018.
(14) Sandy Crombie resigned from the Board on 1 January 2018.
Board Oversight Committees
GRG Board Oversight Committee
The GRG Board Oversight Committee was established in 2015 in relation to the Financial Conduct Authority review of the treatment of SME customers and continued to meet during 2018. The Committee oversees and provides advice to the Board in relation to the review, the external independent review of GRG instigated by the Group and other matters generally related to GRG.
UBI DAC Board Oversight Committee
A Board Oversight Committee was established in September 2017 in order to provide oversight of required enhancements to the governance and risk management practices within Ulster Bank Ireland DAC (UBI DAC), reporting to the Board, as appropriate. The journey of improvement remains a continued area of focus within UBI DAC. The Committee was disbanded in October 2018.
2019 Board Committee Changes
Mark Seligman was appointed to the Group Audit Committee on 1 January 2019.
Corporate governance
How the Board operated in 2018
At each scheduled Board meeting the directors receive reports from the Chairman, Board Committee Chairmen, Chief Executive, Chief Financial Officer, and other members of the executive management team, as appropriate.
Other senior executives attended Board meetings throughout the year to present reports to the Board. This provides the Board with an opportunity to engage directly with management on key issues and supports succession planning.
In addition to its scheduled meetings, the Board also met with the executive management team in June for the annual Board strategy offsite, which included particular focus on RBSs purpose and long-term future, technology and innovation. In October the Board held a focused and forward-looking discussion on culture, in support of the Boards critical role in leading the development of RBSs culture, values and standards.
Board engagement with stakeholders
The board maintained its stakeholder focus through a range of activities involving employees, shareholders, customers and others.
At a Meet the Board event for employees in May we announced the creation of our new Colleague Advisory Panel. In creating the Panel we are complying early with one of the key features of the new UK Corporate Governance Code 2018. Further information about the Panel can be found in the Strategic Report on page 15 and the Report of the directors on page 98.
We held dedicated events for retail shareholders in Glasgow and Birmingham, which provided an opportunity for shareholders to meet board members and ask questions. Further details on our relations with investors can be found on page 64.
In September the Board met in Manchester, and spent time with local businesses, customers and staff, including branch visits.
Our annual event for subsidiary non-executive directors took place in November, enabling attendees to focus on topics of mutual interest, including stakeholder engagement, culture and purpose. A Board reception was also held in Edinburgh, providing a further opportunity for some directors to meet and spend time with customers and other stakeholders and influencers.
Non-executive directors are also welcome to attend the stakeholder engagement sessions run by the Sustainable Banking Committee (further details of which are on page 72).
Board effectiveness
Skills and experience of the Board
The Board is structured to ensure that the directors provide RBS with the appropriate balance of skills, experience and knowledge as well as independence. Given the nature of RBSs businesses, experience of banking and financial services is clearly of benefit, and we have a number of directors with substantial experience in that area. In addition, our directors have relevant experience of government and regulatory matters; mergers & acquisitions; corporate restructuring; stakeholder management; technology, digital and innovation; finance and accountancy; risk; and change management.
Board committees also comprise directors with a variety of skills and experience so that no undue reliance is placed on any individual.
Induction and professional development
Each new director receives a formal induction on joining the Board, which is co-ordinated by the Company Secretary and tailored to suit the requirements of the individual concerned. This includes visits to RBSs major businesses and functions and meetings with directors and senior management. Meetings with external auditors, counsel and stakeholders are also arranged as appropriate.
The directors have access to a wide range of briefing and training sessions and other professional development opportunities. Internal training relevant to the business of RBS is also provided. Directors undertake the training they consider necessary to assist them in carrying out their duties and responsibilities as directors. Directors may also request individual in-depth briefings from time to time on areas of particular interest.
During 2018, bespoke training was arranged for the directors on a range of subjects to enhance their knowledge, including:
· Banking structural reform;
· Conflicts of interest;
· Competition law;
· Cyber security;
· The balance sheet; and
· EU General Data Protection Regulation.
In addition, all directors have access to an online resources portal, Diligent, through which they receive their board and committee papers. Diligent also contains internal policy information, corporate governance updates and external briefing notes on topical subjects, to support directors professional development and competence.
The Company Secretary maintains continuing professional development logs. These are reviewed regularly between the Chairman and each director individually, to assist in identifying future training and development opportunities that are specific to the individual directors requirements.
Information
All directors receive accurate, timely and clear information on all relevant matters and have access to the advice and services of the Company Secretary. In addition, all directors are able, if necessary, to obtain independent professional advice at the companys expense.
Time commitment
It is anticipated that non-executive directors will allocate sufficient time to RBS to discharge their responsibilities effectively and will devote such time as is necessary to fulfil their role. Directors have been briefed on the limits on the number of other directorships that they can hold under the requirements of the fourth Capital Requirements Directive.
Each director is required to advise RBS as early as possible and to seek the agreement of the Board before accepting additional commitments that might affect the time the director is able to devote to his or her role as a non-executive director of RBS. The Board monitors the other commitments of the Chairman and directors and is satisfied that they are able to allocate sufficient time to enable them to discharge their duties and responsibilities effectively. The time commitment required of our non-executive directors continues to be significant.
Election and re-election of directors
In accordance with the provisions of the Code, all directors stand for election or re-election by shareholders at the companys AGM. In accordance with the UK Listing Rules, the election or re-election of independent directors also requires approval by a majority of independent shareholders.
Under the Board Appointment Policy all non-executive directors appointed since 1 January 2017 are appointed for an initial 3 year term, subject to annual re-election at the AGM. Following assessment by the Group Nominations & Governance Committee they may then be appointed for a further 3 year term, and subsequent 12 month terms up to a maximum of nine years.
Corporate governance
Performance evaluation
In accordance with the Code, an external evaluation of the Board, its Committees and individual directors takes place every 3 years. An internal evaluation takes place in the intervening years.
Progress following the 2017 evaluation
A number of actions were progressed during 2018 in response to the findings of the 2017 internal performance evaluation, overseen by the Group Nominations and Governance Committee.
These included:
· a focus on longer-term issues during strategy discussions, including RBSs purpose;
· a dedicated Board discussion on culture, led by the Chairman;
· continued opportunities for the Board to meet RBSs customers, for example during the Manchester board visit;
· additional Board focus on executive succession planning; and
· enhancing the quality of information the Board receives through revised formats for regular reporting.
2018 Performance evaluation
During September and October the 2018 Board and Committee evaluation was externally facilitated by Independent Board Evaluation (IBE). IBE was selected following a competitive tender process and the Board is satisfied that IBE have no other connection with RBS.
IBE undertook a formal and rigorous evaluation by:
· holding 1:1 interviews with directors, senior management and external advisers;
· discussing the key themes and recommendations for action with the Chairman and Committee Chairmen; and
· presenting Board and Committee effectiveness reports.
This was the first performance evaluation undertaken since the introduction of our ring-fencing governance arrangements. It considered the effectiveness of both the RBSG and NWH Ltd Boards, but was predominantly focused on RBSG. The relatively early stage nature of the feedback was acknowledged, given the Boards were transitioning to the new operating model during the review period.
Key findings and recommendations
The 2018 Board evaluation findings and recommendations included the following:
· the Board is committed and hard-working, with a strong Chairman in position and a good working relationship with the CEO;
· Board members are clear on their roles and accountability to shareholders and wider stakeholders;
· The Board should strive to role model the culture and values of the organisation and balance holding management to account with encouragement and support;
· the Board has reached an inflexion point, and there is now a clear need to focus on the longer term and forward-looking growth strategy;
· there is scope to improve the quality of Board papers and review the length/number of Board and Committee meetings;
· Board composition and succession planning should continue to be a priority; and in particular consideration should be given to reducing the Boards size; and
· the induction programme had proved a positive experience for new non-executive directors, and a small number of improvements were suggested.
Actions
An action plan has been developed in response to the 2018 Board evaluation report, and its implementation will be overseen by the Group Nominations and Governance Committee during 2019. The plan includes measures to:
· agree key objectives, drive a focused board agenda for 2019, and prioritise board time accordingly (including between RBSG and NWH Ltd);
· support a healthy Boardroom culture, focused on the development of effective working relationships between the directors and senior management;
· improve the quality of Board papers and presentations;
· proactively review Board and committee composition and succession plans; and
· further enhance the NED induction programme.
Individual director and Chairman effectiveness reviews
The Chairman met each director individually to discuss their own performance and continuing professional development and also shared peer feedback provided to IBE as part of the evaluation process. Separately, the Senior Independent Director sought feedback on the Chairmans performance from the non-executive directors, executive directors, DINEDs, and key external stakeholders and discussed it with the Chairman.
Relations with investors
The Chairman is responsible for ensuring effective communication with shareholders.
Shareholders are given the opportunity to ask questions at the AGM and any General Meetings held or can submit written questions in advance.
Communication with the companys largest institutional shareholders is undertaken as part of the Investor Relations programme:
· The Chairman, Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer undertake an extensive annual programme of meetings with the companys largest institutional shareholders;
· the Senior Independent Director is available if any shareholder has concerns that they feel are not being addressed through the normal channels; and
· the Chairman of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee consults with major shareholders in respect of the Groups remuneration policy.
Report of the Group Nominations and Governance Committee
Letter from Howard Davies
Chairman of the Group Nominations and Governance Committee
Dear Shareholder,
As Chairman of the Board and Chairman of the Group Nominations and Governance Committee I am pleased to present our report on the Committees activity during 2018.
Role and responsibilities
The Committee is responsible for reviewing the structure, size and composition of the Board, and membership and chairmanship of Board Committees and recommends appointments to the Board. In addition, the Committee monitors the Groups governance arrangements to ensure that best corporate governance standards and practices are upheld and considers developments relating to banking reform and analogous issues affecting the Group. The Committee makes recommendations to the Board in respect of any consequential amendments to the Groups operating model.
The terms of reference of the Committee are reviewed annually, approved by the Board and are available at rbs.com.
Principal activity during 2018
As highlighted in the Boards 2017 effectiveness review, the Committee acknowledges the tenure of a number of current Board directors and therefore made succession planning a priority in 2018. Ring-fencing also gave rise to a requirement to recruit additional non-executive directors to the boards of our material regulated subsidiaries, which the Committee has overseen.
In addition to recruitment, the Committee has overseen the process to reach agreement with the PRA in respect of a governance model that is compatible with ring-fencing legislation. The Committee has also spent time considering the Groups arrangements in respect of legal entity governance. This has included overseeing work aimed at continuing to enhance the Groups subsidiary governance framework. As part of this work, the Group has proposed the appointment of individuals to act as its representative on the boards of a number of material regulated subsidiaries. The aim of these appointments is to strengthen oversight and enhance communication between the subsidiary boards and the Group.
Membership and meetings
Penny Hughes stepped down from the Committee with effect from 30 May 2018, meaning that for most of 2018 the Committee comprised the Chairman of the Board and four independent non-executive directors. Graham Beale also attends meetings of the Committee in an observer capacity, following his appointment as Senior Independent Director of NatWest Holdings Limited.
The Committee holds at least four scheduled meetings per year and also meets on an ad hoc basis as required. In 2018, there were ten meetings. Individual attendance by directors at these meetings is shown in the table on page 62.
Board and Committee membership
Both Spencer Stuart and Hay Korn Ferry have been engaged during the year to support the search for new executive and non-executive directors. Spencer Stuart and Hay Korn Ferry are also members of the retained executive search panel of suppliers (managed by RBS Executive Search) and provide leadership advisory and senior executive search and assessment services to the Human Resources function within RBS. During 2018, the Committee considered a number of potential candidates. In June 2018, Patrick Flynn was appointed to the Board as a non-executive director and at the same time was appointed to the Boards Risk, Audit and Technology and Innovation Committees. The Committee also oversaw the search for a successor to Ewen Stevenson who stepped down from the Board on 30 September 2018. On 1 January 2019, Katie Murray joined the Board as executive director and Chief Financial Officer.
Tenure of non-executive directors
The tenure of non-executive directors as at 31 December 2018 is set out below.
0 3 years |
42% |
3 6 years |
33% |
6+ years |
25% |
|
100% |
Performance evaluation
The 2018 review of the effectiveness of the Board and its senior Committees was facilitated by Independent Board Evaluation, a specialist board evaluation consultancy. The Committee has considered and discussed the outcomes of the evaluation and accepts the findings. Overall the review concluded that the Committee operated effectively with no material recommendations being identified for action. The Committee will continue to ensure that the full Board is appropriately sighted on the work of the Committee
The outcomes of the evaluation have been reported to the Board and the Committee will track progress during the year.
Boardroom Inclusion Policy
The Board operates a Boardroom Inclusion Policy which reflects the most recent industry targets and is aligned to the RBS Inclusion Policy and Principles applying to the wider bank. This policy provides a framework to ensure that the Board attracts, motivates and retains the best talent and avoids limiting potential caused by bias, prejudice or discrimination. The policy currently applies to the most senior RBS boards: The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (RBSG), NatWest Holdings Limited, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, National Westminster Bank Plc and Ulster Bank Limited. A copy of the Boardroom Inclusion Policy is available on rbs.com>about us.
Objectives and targets
The Boardroom Inclusion Policys objectives ensure that the Board, and any Committee to which it delegates nominations responsibilities, follows an inclusive process when making nomination decisions. That includes ensuring that the nomination process is based on the principles of fairness, respect and inclusion, that all nominations and appointments are made on the basis of individual competence, skills and expertise measured against identified objective criteria and that searches for Board candidates are conducted with due regard to the benefits of diversity and inclusion.
The Boardroom Inclusion Policy contains a number of measurable objectives, targets and ambitions reflecting the ongoing commitment of the Board to inclusion progress. The Board aims to meet the highest industry standards and recommendations wherever possible. That includes, but is not limited to, aspiring to meet the targets set by the Hampton-Alexander Report: FTSE100 Women Leaders (33% female representation on the boards) and the Parker Report: Beyond 1 by 21 (at least one director from an ethnic minority background on the boards) by 2020/2021. The policy supports our bank-wide ambition to aim for a 50/50 gender balance across all levels of the organisation by 2030.
Monitoring and reporting
The Boards performance against these targets varied throughout 2018 as the Group made a number of changes to its board governance structure in order to comply with ring-fencing legislation. These changes included a number of appointments to the board of NatWest Holdings Limited, the holding company of the ring-fenced sub-group. The boards of RBSG and NatWest Holdings Limited meet consecutively and share a largely common membership. When considered together, the director population across both boards currently meets the Parker target and exceeds the Hampton-Alexander target with a female representation of 39%.
Notwithstanding the largely common membership between the two boards, RBS remains committed to ensuring that the RBSG board meets the targets on a standalone basis. Following Katie Murrays appointment on 1 January 2019, the RBSG board composition currently includes 31% female representation, rising from 25% at 31 December 2018. The RBSG board also remains committed to meeting the Parker Target by 2020/2021.
Inclusion and diversity progress, including information about the appointment process, will continue to be reported in the Group Nominations and Governance Committees report in the RBS Annual Report on Form 20-F. The balance of skills, experience, independence, knowledge and diversity on the Board, and how the Board operates together as a unit is reviewed annually as part of the Board evaluation. Where appropriate, findings from the evaluation will be considered in the search, nomination and appointment process. Further details on RBSs approach to diversity can be found on pages 17 and 98.
Howard Davies
Chairman of the Group Nominations and Governance Committee
14 February 2019
Report of the Group Audit Committee
Letter from Brendan Nelson
Chairman of the Group Audit Committee
Dear Shareholder,
This report outlines the key areas of focus of the Group Audit Committee (GAC) and explains how it fulfilled its responsibilities during 2018.
The GAC has responsibility for monitoring and reviewing RBSs financial reports and disclosures, its accounting policies and practices and standards of internal control. The GACs responsibilities are set out in more detail in its terms of reference which are reviewed annually and are available on rbs.com.
The Committees primary focus is the integrity and quality of RBSs financial statements. During the year we scrutinised the quarterly, interim and full year results announcements and supporting documentation, and this document.
Detailed reports from management on the key assumptions and accounting judgements behind RBSs financial results, IFRS 9 expected credit losses and the conclusions of the External Auditor and other management reports, enabled the Committee to scrutinise disclosures in the financial statements and the underlying judgements and estimates were appropriate.
Further detail on the most material issues considered by the Committee is provided in the report below.
The effectiveness of RBSs standards of internal control, in particular controls relating to financial management, reporting and accounting issues, was another key focus of the Committee.
The Committees primary focus is the integrity and quality of RBSs financial statements
RBS, in common with other large banks, was required to deliver ring-fencing by the beginning of 2019. Throughout 2018 the Committee received regular updates on the ring-fencing programme including, in particular, its impact on financial reporting for RBS and its subsidiaries.
During 2018 RBS resolved significant legacy issues, in particular the settlement of the US Department of Justices investigation into Residential Mortgage Backed Securities. The GAC was closely engaged to ensure this was appropriately disclosed and provided for. Similarly, the GAC kept existing provisions for liabilities under close review throughout the year.
2018 also saw significant developments in relation to Brexit. Whilst Brexit was largely discussed at Board level, given its potential strategic impact, the Committee considered the potential impact on the economic environment and, subsequently on RBSs financial results.
In my role as GAC Chairman I also act as RBSs Whistleblowing Champion. As such, I carry responsibility for ensuring and overseeing the integrity, independence and effectiveness of the firms whistleblowing arrangements. RBSs whistleblowing framework and procedures promote a culture where individuals feel comfortable raising concerns and challenging poor practice and behaviour. During 2018, the FCA completed its review of the whistleblowing arrangements of RBS and other firms. I am pleased to report that the FCAs review concluded that RBSs arrangements were well developed and cited several examples of good practice.
Looking forward to 2019, the GAC will continue its focus on financial reporting; accounting policies and internal controls, ensuring robust scrutiny of RBSs financial reports and disclosures.
As you will have seen earlier in the report, I retire as a director of the Group at the forthcoming AGM and after 9 years as Chairman of the GAC I will be succeeded by Patrick Flynn who has been a valuable member of the GAC since June 2018.
Brendan Nelson
Chairman of the Group Audit Committee
14 February 2019
Membership
Full biographical details of the GAC members are set out on pages 59 and 60. With effect from 1 January 2019 Mark Seligman was also appointed to the GAC. The members are all independent non-executive directors and each sit on other Board Committees (as shown on pages 59 and 60) in addition to the GAC. This cross committee membership helps facilitate effective governance, ensures agendas are aligned and avoids overlap of responsibilities.
The members of GAC are selected with a view to the expertise and experience of the GAC as a whole and with proper regard to the key issues and challenges facing RBS.
The Board is satisfied that all GAC members have recent and relevant financial experience and are independent as defined in the SEC rules under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the Exchange Act) and related guidance. The Board has further determined that Brendan Nelson, GAC Chairman, Baroness Noakes, Patrick Flynn and Mark Seligman are all financial experts for the purposes of compliance with the Exchange Act Rules and the requirements of the New York Stock Exchange, and that they have competence in accounting and auditing as required under the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules.
Regular attendees at GAC meetings included: the RBS Chairman; Chief Executive; Chief Financial Officer; Deputy Chief Financial Officer; Chief Accountant; Chief Legal Officer and General Counsel; and the Internal and External Auditors. The GAC also met privately with the external auditors and separately with Internal Audit management.
Meetings and visits
The GAC held seven scheduled meetings in 2018, four of which were held shortly prior to submission of the quarterly financial statements to the Board. During 2018 all members attended the meetings scheduled during their term as Committee members.
In conjunction with the BRC, the GAC took part in an annual programme of visits to control functions in order to maintain a thorough understanding of their priorities and operational structure. This programme comprised two visits to Risk; two visits to Internal Audit and a visit to Finance. In addition, the GAC and BRC visited RBSs operations in India where they met with RBS India Executive Committee members, the local internal and external audit teams and HR team, as well as key employee groups. During the visit the GAC and BRC received updates on the RBS India business units, the top risks in the Indian business and plans for their remediation, the people plan and Technology strategy for India.
Performance evaluations
The performance of the GAC was evaluated by an external party in 2018. The evaluation concluded that the GAC operated effectively during 2018. The Committee was described as thorough and diligent in tackling its agenda. Some recommendations for improvement were identified mainly on length of meetings and paper submissions. The Board and the GAC have considered and discussed the outcomes of the evaluation and will track progress on the recommendations during 2019.
Evaluations of the External Auditor and Internal Audit function are conducted each year. The 2018 Internal Audit evaluation was conducted by KPMG who assessed Internal Audit against the Institute of Internal Audit International Standards and also against relevant regulatory guidance. The overall findings were positive and recommendations for improvement are being progressed by Internal Audit and overseen by the GAC. The 2018 evaluation of the External Auditor was conducted internally. It concluded that the external auditor was operating effectively. Some recommendations for continuous improvement were identified and are being implemented by the External Auditor.
Report of the Group Audit Committee
Matter |
Context of discussion |
How the Committee addressed the matter |
Accounting judgements |
The GAC focused on a number of accounting judgements and reporting issues in the preparation of the Groups financial results throughout 2018.
The Committee then recommended the quarterly, interim and full year results announcements and the Annual Report on Form 20-F, together with supporting documentation (including Pillar 3 reports, financial supplements and investor presentations) to the Board for approval. |
Provisions and disclosures The GAC debated the level and appropriateness of significant provisions for regulatory, litigation and conduct issues including; provisions for the US RMBS investigations; Payment Protection Insurance claims; the FCAs investigation into RBSs former Global Restructuring Group; and items relating to the Central Bank of Irelands review of Irish Tracker mortgages. During 2018 RBS recognised £2,014 million of litigation and conduct provisions. The GAC also carefully reviewed the quality and transparency of RBSs financial and risk disclosures. Expected Credit Loss Judgements in relation to credit impairments and the impact of macro-economic risks on the credit environment were discussed throughout the year. GAC focused on the methodology applied to provisions under IFRS 9. In particular the GAC considered the potential impact of Brexit and related negotiations on the economic environment and agreed an additional £100 million impairment charge in this respect in Q3 2018. The Committee was satisfied that the overall loan impairment provisions and underlying assumptions and methodologies adopted by RBS were reasonable and applied consistently. Valuation methodologies The GAC considered valuation methodologies and assumptions for financial instruments carried at fair value and scrutinized judgements made by management in relation to the carrying value of intangible assets. Managements assessment of the adequacy of internal controls over financial reporting The GAC noted that control improvements were required in relation to the translation of the Expected Credit Loss data under IFRS 9 and FX Reserves in discontinued operations in NatWest Markets plc. The Committee noted the action being taken by management to address these. There were no Material Weaknesses reported in relation to RBS Group at the year-end. Viability statement and the going concern basis of accounting GAC considered evidence of RBSs capital, liquidity and funding position and considered the process to support the assessment of principal risks. The GAC reviewed the companys prospects in light of its current position and the identified principal risks. The GAC reviewed RBSs viability and going concern statements on behalf of the Board. (Refer to the Report of the directors for further information). Fair balanced & understandable The GAC oversaw the review process which supports the GAC and Board in concluding that the disclosures in this document, taken as a whole, were fair, balanced and understandable and provided the information necessary for shareholders to assess the companys position and performance, business model and strategy. The process included: central co-ordination of this document by the Finance function; review of this document by the Executive Disclosure Committee prior to consideration by the GAC; and a management certification process. The External Auditor also considered the fair balanced and understandable statement as part of the audit process. |
Systems of internal control |
GAC is particularly interested in the systems of internal control relating to financial management, reporting and accounting issues. A number of reports were received by GAC throughout the year in this regard and the effectiveness of RBSs internal control systems, including any significant failings or weaknesses were evaluated. |
Control Environment Certification The GAC received bi-annual updates on control environment ratings of RBSs franchises, functions and material subsidiaries and managements plans to address areas of weakness. Managements plans to address certain control issues are covered in more detail in the report of the Group Board Risk Committee on page 69. Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 The GAC considered RBSs compliance with the requirements of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and was satisfied in this respect. No Material Weaknesses were reported in RBS Group at the year-end. The GAC provided oversight of the drive to continue to improve SOX processes and received a number of updates in this regard. The GAC are monitoring enhancements in controls in relation to: reporting of credit exposures specifically under the newly implemented IFRS9 accounting standard and the processes around the accounting for foreign currency reserves. Legal Reports Quarterly reports on the material current and emerging legal risks and developments affecting RBS enabled the GAC to assess the related disclosures in RBSs financial statements. Notifiable Event Process The GAC considered semi-annual reports on control breaches, captured by RBSs notifiable event process. All Board directors were alerted to the most significant breaches. Whistleblowing The GAC received updates on the volume of whistleblowing reports, any discernible trends and staff awareness of the processes. GAC also monitored the effectiveness of whistleblowing procedures. The GAC Chairman acts as RBSs Whistleblowing Champion, in line with PRA and FCA regulations and meets regularly with RBSs whistleblowing team. Complaints Updates were provided to the GAC on customer complaints. GAC focusses in particular on any fraud related complaints, the process for managing executive complaints and complaints relating to accounting, internal accounting controls or auditing matters. Taxation The GAC received an update on RBSs tax position including the impact of ring-fencing on tax governance, material tax risks and disputes, compliance with RBSs tax obligations and the main projects and external developments impacting RBSs tax position. Annual Risk and Control Report The GAC also reviewed RBSs disclosure on internal control matters in conjunction with the related guidance from the Financial Reporting Council. |
Report of the Group Audit Committee
Matter |
Context of discussion |
How the Committee addressed the matter |
Internal audit |
The Committee has responsibility for overseeing the Internal Audit function. In addition to considering quarterly opinions from Internal Audit, GAC is required to monitor the functions effectiveness and confirm its independence and was fully satisfied in this regard.
|
Opinions Quarterly opinion reports updated GAC on Internal Audits view of the risk and control environment and risk and control awareness of each business and function, and the risks which could impact RBS achieving its targets. Internal Audit also outlined material and emerging concerns identified through their audit work. In addition, Internal Audit reported on items including Pillar 3 reporting and the whistleblowing process. Annual Plan and Budget GAC considered and approved Internal Audits plan for 2018. Updates and anticipated changes to the plan were provided to the GAC periodically. The GAC also considered Internal Audits budget. The Committee was satisfied that Internal Audit had adequate budget and resources to deliver the plan. Internal Audit Charter and Independence Updates to Internal Audits charter reflecting changes to RBSs legal entity structure were noted by the GAC. The GAC also noted the Chief Audit Executives independence statement. Visits Together with the BRC, GAC participated in two visits to Internal Audit during 2018. A variety of issues impacting the Internal Audit function were discussed, including: resourcing and structure; succession planning; quality assurance; the future of internal audit; and the 2019 Audit Plan. Performance The Chief Audit Executive continued to report to the GAC Chairman, with a secondary reporting line to the Chief Executive for administrative purposes. The GAC assessed the annual performance (including risk performance) of the function and Chief Audit Executive. Evaluation The 2018 annual review of the effectiveness of Internal Audit was undertaken externally by KPMG. The evaluation assessed the function against the Institute of Internal Auditor International Standards and found that it Generally Conforms to the requirements, and is in line with peer organisations. There were some areas where the function Partially Conforms to a limited number of requirements, but none were considered to be significant and in most cases, steps were already being taken to address these. |
External audit |
Ernst & Young LLP (EY) has been RBSs external auditor since 2016. The GAC has responsibility for monitoring EYs independence and objectivity, the effectiveness of the audit process and for reviewing RBSs financial relationship with the External Auditor and fixing remuneration.
|
Audit Partner Jonathan Bourne has been EYs lead audit partner for RBS since 2016. Mr Bourne attended each meeting of the GAC in 2018. External Audit Reports EY reported to the GAC each quarter on their audit work and related conclusions, including the appropriateness of judgements made by management and their compliance with international financial reporting standards. The GAC also reviewed EYs annual management letter. Audit Plan and fees The GAC considered updates on EYs 2018 plan and approved the 2018 audit fees including the fee for the 2018 interim results. The GAC was authorised by shareholders at the last Annual General Meeting to fix the remuneration of the external auditors. Annual Evaluation An internal evaluation was carried out at the GACs request to assess the independence and objectivity of the External Auditor and the effectiveness of the audit process during 2018. GAC members, attendees, the Franchise and Functional Finance Directors and key members of the Finance team were consulted as part of the evaluation. The evaluation assessed the external auditors mindset and culture, skills, character and knowledge, quality control and judgement. The evaluation found that the External Auditor was operating effectively. A number of recommendations for continuous improvement were identified which are being implemented by the External Auditor. Following the evaluation the GAC recommended that the Board seek the reappointment of EY as external auditor at the next annual general meeting. CASS Opinions During 2018 the external auditor presented the results of its assurance procedures on compliance with the FCAs Client Asset Rules for RBSs regulated legal entities for the year ended 31 December 2017. The GAC also considered the CASS Audit plan for 2018, the findings of which will be reported to the GAC once the audit is complete. External Auditor Report to the PRA GAC considered EYs 2018 written report to the PRA under supervisory statement SS1/16. The report responded to specific questions posed by the PRA, most of which concerned the interpretation of the IFRS 9 accounting rules by RBS. GAC also discussed the questions received from the PRA in relation to the report required for 2019. |
Audit & non-audit services |
RBS has a policy in relation to the engagement of the external auditors to perform audit and non-audit services (the policy). GAC reviews the policy annually to ensure it remains fit for purpose. All audit and non-audit services are pre-approved by the Committee to safeguard the external auditors independence and objectivity. |
Under the policy, audit related services and permitted non-audit service engagements may be approved by the Director of Finance up to certain financial thresholds. Engagements in excess of these limits require the approval of the GAC chairman. The Director of Finance may also approve the provision of services by the external auditor to non-consolidated subsidiaries of RBS within an annual cap and approve engagements with the external auditor where RBS has limited or no influence in the selection process. Where the fee for a non-audit service engagement is expected to exceed £100,000, a competitive tender process must be held and approval of the full GAC is required. All such approvals are reported to the GAC each quarter.
During 2018, approval was granted under the policy for the external auditors to undertake significant engagements in relation to a gap assessment in relation to IFRS 9 reporting infrastructure and to provide assurance over LIBOR submissions. The decision to approve EY was made in the first case as a result of EYs existing knowledge of RBS systems which allowed work to commence quickly and in the second case, following a tender process. In each case the GAC was satisfied that the engagement did not impact the external auditors independence.
Further details of the non-audit services that are prohibited and permitted under the policy can be found on rbs.com. Information on fees paid in respect of audit and non-audit services carried out by the External Auditor can be found in Note 6 to the consolidated accounts. |
Report of the Group Board Risk Committee
Letter from Baroness Noakes
Chairman of the Group Board Risk Committee
Dear Shareholder,
I am pleased to present my report setting out how the Group Board Risk Committee (the Committee or BRC) discharged its responsibilities in 2018.
The BRC has responsibility for overseeing the management of risks that could impact RBSs businesses and operations. The Committee also monitors risk profile, risk appetite and the promotion of a culture of risk awareness within the organisation. The BRCs responsibilities are set out in more detail in its terms of reference which are reviewed annually by the Committee and are available on RBSs website: rbs.com.
RBSs risk profile improved materially in 2018, with progress made in relation to pensions, the settlement of the US Department of Justices investigation into Residential Mortgage Backed Securities and, ring-fencing implementation.
RBS, in common with other large banks, was required to deliver both ring-fencing and key parts of its resolution plans by the beginning of 2019. The ring-fencing programme was a key focus for the Committee throughout the year and detailed progress reports were scrutinised at each meeting.
After the successful legal restructuring of the RBS Group on 30 April 2018, RBS began to operate under a transitional governance structure and BRC continued to oversee the subsequent stages of the ring-fencing implementation work
RBSs risk profile improved materially in 2018
A large part of the Group BRCs work is the review of reports and regulatory submissions on behalf of the Board and recommending them for approval. Where this is the case, the Report below is annotated with an asterix (*).
Other key areas of focus in 2018 included: risk profile and reporting, stress testing, risk appetite, and recovery and resolution. Further detail on each of these key topics is provided on the pages that follow. Brexit risks, while considered by the BRC from time to time, were largely discussed at Board level given the potential strategic impact.
Now that the majority of legacy issues have been addressed and ring-fencing delivered, RBS is increasingly looking to the future and I anticipate that BRC will spend progressively more time overseeing aspects of innovation and technology. Operational resilience, cyber security and a satisfactory control environment are, however, key to ensuring that RBS can continue to provide excellent service to its customers and these areas will be monitored closely by the BRC in the year ahead.
Baroness Noakes
Chairman of the Group Board Risk Committee
14 February 2019
Membership
The Board Risk Committee is comprised of five independent non-executive directors. The details of the members and their skills and experience are set out on pages 59 and 60. Brendan Nelson is chairman of the Group Audit Committee of which Baroness Noakes and Morten Friis are also members.
Robert Gillespie is chairman of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee. This common membership across Committees helps to ensure effective governance across the committees.
Regular attendees at meetings include: the RBS Chairman, Chief Executive, Chief Financial Officer, Chief Risk Officer, Chief Legal Officer and General Counsel, Chief Audit Executive, and the External Auditor. External advice is sought by the Committee where appropriate.
Meetings and visits
All members attended the nine scheduled meetings held in 2018 during the period in which they were Committee members. In addition, six ad hoc meetings were arranged to consider: Banks Executive Committee (ExCo) risk and conduct performance, ExCo risk & control objectives, risk and conduct management performance of Franchises and Functions, the year-end remuneration process, the results of various phases of internal and external stress tests; and the capital plans required for the Ring-fencing Transfer Scheme.
In 2018, members of the Committee undertook a programme of visits across various locations in conjunction with members of the Group Audit Committee, including a visit to India. The purpose and scope of this programme is discussed in detail in the Report of the Group Audit Committee on pages 66 to 68.
The Committee also held an in-depth session on risk reporting and held a teach-in on capital and liquidity.
Performance Evaluation
The annual review of the effectiveness of the Board and its senior Committees, including the Board Risk Committee, was conducted externally in 2018 by independent Board Evaluation. Overall the review concluded that the BRC continued to operate effectively. The Committee was described as very capable with robust, well-established processes. The review also made a number of recommendations including reducing the length of meetings and level of detail considered by the Committee and transitioning to a more strategic mode over time. The Committee has considered and discussed the outcomes of this evaluation and accepts the findings.
The outcomes of the evaluation have been reported to the Board and the Committee will track progress on the recommendations during 2019.
Report of the Group Board Risk Committee
Key matters considered by the Committee in 2018
Matter |
Context of discussion |
How the Committee addressed the matter |
Risk profile and reporting |
A proportion of every BRC meeting was spent reviewing risk reports, assessing the most material risk exposures relative to strategy and risk appetite and scrutinising managements recommendations to monitor and control such exposures. |
Risk Management Reports Top and emerging risks were presented in quarterly Risk Management Reports, supplemented by shorter reports from the Chief Risk Officer at intervening meetings. Key topics discussed included the macro-economic and UK credit environments, cyber security and the implications for RBS of Brexit, geopolitical tensions and trade issues. Reports on legal and regulatory developments, including RBSs General Data Protection Regulation compliance programme and significant litigation risks were also frequently considered. Updates from Management and Subsidiary Risk Committees Updates were received from the Executive Risk Committee and Technical Executive Risk Forum (before it was disbanded in June 2018), as the BRC relies on the effective executive oversight of risk. In addition, quarterly reports were received from the chairmen of the risk committees of the franchises and material regulated subsidiaries. Emerging Risks Emerging risks likely to impact RBS over the next decade were considered at each meeting and in more detail mid-year. The Committee noted three key areas of change: new technology, competitive challenge and the geopolitical landscape.
|
Structural reform including ring-fencing implementation |
The BRC oversaw the delivery of the separation of RBSs core banking business from activities that are required to be outside the ring-fence which involved many complex activities. BRC also monitors the development of plans which would allow RBS to be dealt with effectively in the event of financial failure. |
Ring-fencing / Operational Continuity in Resolution (OCiR) BRC considered the key execution risks of the ring-fencing programme and oversaw the preparations for the successful implementation of the two ring-fencing transfer schemes which were implemented during the year. Regular updates were received from management on progress against plan and on their level of confidence in relation to RBSs readiness for operating in a ring-fencing compliant state by 1 January 2019. Plans supporting the provision of Board attestations to the PRA in relation to ring-fencing and OCiR compliance were also reviewed. Separate joint sessions with the Group Audit Committee were held to monitor plans for operational readiness in the risk, finance and treasury functions, including the development of legal entity specific management information. Assurance - The outputs of integrated assurance work undertaken by Risk, Internal Audit and KPMG (appointed to provide independent assurance on defined aspects of ring-fencing implementation) were received by the Committee. Recovery and Resolution BRC continued to monitor the other elements of Resolution Planning (outside of OCiR) in light of intensifying regulatory requirements. The Committee noted improved engagement across RBS and from regulators during the period and monitored progress on Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL). BRC also examined a Solvent Wind Down report* for NatWest Markets separately and the Committee reviewed the draft 2018 Recovery plan before submission to the regulator*.
|
Stress testing |
BRC devoted considerable time to stress testing including the European Banking Authority (EBA) and Bank of England stress tests in addition to its own internal stress tests. BRC subjected the outputs of the tests to a high degree of scrutiny and challenge.
|
ICAAPs and Budget Stress Tests - In Q1, the BRC considered the results of the 2017 ICAAPs and ILAAs and the Reverse Stress tests for the RBS Group, NWH Ltd and NWM Plc, in addition to feedback from the Bank of England in relation to its 2017 stress test. The scope of the stress testing scenarios and legal entity analysis for RBSs 2018 Budget stress test and 2018 ICAAP and the actions being undertaken to de-risk these deliverables were considered in Q3. Bank of England and EBA Stress Test During the year the Committee provided challenge and scrutiny in relation to the scenarios and traded risk factor expansions before considering the key assumptions and judgements deployed by management in the Bank of England and EBA stress tests. A detailed review of the outputs of the tests was carried out prior to submission to the regulator*.
|
Report of the Group Board Risk Committee
Matter |
Context of discussion |
How the Committee addressed the matter |
Risk appetite |
Risk appetite continued to be a key focus of the Committee, in particular the way in which the frameworks and risk appetite statements would operate after structural reform. |
Frameworks - BRC reviewed the overarching Risk Management Framework; the Risk Appetite Framework; the Risk Appetite Governance Framework and discussed how the frameworks would relate to legal entities after ring-fencing*. Proposed risk appetite statements for strategic risks for the Groups main subsidiaries and franchises were also appraised by the Committee. Board Risk Measures (BRMs) and Material Risk Appetite The Committee scrutinised a review of the qualitative statements of appetite for material risks and material high level measures, challenging the rationale for some of the proposed measures*. The Committee also reviewed escalated breaches of risk appetite and the action taken by management in response*. |
Control environment |
A number of programmes impacting RBSs control environment were ongoing in 2018. BRC maintained oversight of these programmes and of existing internal controls for the management of risk. |
Transformation - The execution risks of the bank-wide transformation programme and impact on the control environment were kept under review at regular intervals throughout the year, including specific updates on Open Banking and the project to build a new digital bank. BRC also considered a 2020 refresh of the transformation portfolio and requested that risk metrics be refreshed and recalibrated. Control Environment Certification - Bi-annual reports on the control environment ratings of the franchises and functions were reviewed by the Committee. Where significant control weaknesses were identified BRC sought managements assurance that measures were in place to ensure that the businesses could continue to operate safely. BRC also monitored the programme to remediate customer due diligence as well as plans to build robust processes for the future on a quarterly basis. Risk Culture An assessment of risk culture was considered, including managements plans to increase the intensity of executive review. |
Bank-wide risks |
BRC received regular updates on key risks to RBS and monitored the safeguards in place to minimise the impact of such risks and ensure continuity of service to customers.
|
Operational resilience and Cyber Security BRC requested updates on information and cyber security. BRC also considered data management and the potential risks inherent in distributed ledger technology, Cloud computing and Artificial Intelligence. Credit and Market risk - Updates were received in relation to upcoming non-traded market risk regulations; trading book settlement risk; and the most material decisions of the Executive Credit Group. BRC also requested a review of the UK Retail sector. Pension risk - Following agreement being reached with RBSs pension trustees, the Committee received an update on pension risk appetite and measurement. Separately, a review of the pension risk of RBSs large corporate portfolio was undertaken and reported to the Committee. Model risk management The work to strengthen and validate models, including those used in stress testing, and improve supporting governance was a continuing focus. Conduct and compliance risk The BRC received updates on the development of the RBS Group Compliance and Conduct Risk Framework*. Financial crime The annual Group Money Laundering Reporting Officers Report* was reviewed by the Committee and the Committee received an overview of RBSs approach to crypto-assets. The BRC also kept under review the plans to improve and remediate customer due diligence. Capital and Liquidity These are important areas for risk management and regulatory requirements are intensifying. In addition to reviewing the Group, NWH Ltd and NWM Plc ICAAPs and ILAAPs* in Q1, BRC held focused sessions on RBSs approach to liquidity and funding management and on capital. These sessions focused in particular on the capital requirements of the Group and its material subsidiaries. Data Management and GDPR Updates were received on the work undertaken to address the risks related to data management and to deliver compliance with GDPR. LIBOR Programme BRC reviewed the risks associated with the transition of LIBOR and other IBOR rates to alternative risk free rates and a submission to regulators setting out the preparations and actions being taken under the programme*. |
Accountability and remuneration |
BRC continued to provide oversight over the risk dimension of performance and remuneration arrangements, working closely with the Performance and Remuneration Committee. |
Accountability The BRC regularly considered accountability recommendations in respect of significant material events, on-going investigations and high earners. The risk and control objectives of members and attendees of RBSs Executive Committee were also reviewed, with additional focus on underlying objectives for the Chief Risk Officer. Remuneration The BRC reviewed the performance conditions for RBSs Long-Term Incentive Plans and assessment of proposed vesting levels to ensure risk management and conduct performance was fairly reflected in vesting outcomes. The BRC also made recommendations to the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee on reflecting risk performance in the bonus calculation. Further detail on how risk is taken into account in remuneration decisions can be found in the Report of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee on pages 74 to 90. |
Report of the Group Sustainable Banking Committee
Letter from Mike Rogers
Chairman of the Group Sustainable Banking Committee
Engagement sessions continue to provide a valuable opportunity for the Board to listen to the external perspective.
Dear Shareholder,
I am delighted to present my first report as Chairman of the Group Sustainable Banking Committee (the Committee or SBC).
SBC has continued to play a forward-looking and strategic role on behalf of the Board, focusing on its priority areas of culture; customers; people; brand & communications; and environmental, social and ethical (ESE) issues.
2018 Highlights
I can report that good progress was made in 2018 with some particular areas to highlight set out below.
· Culture and people remain two areas where the Committee focuses its efforts via a regular culture update as well as spotlights on wellbeing, inclusion and how we are supporting colleagues to develop skills and capabilities needed for the future.
· The Committee has prioritised customer matters, having received updates from the customer facing franchises, including digital and mobile strategy, customer journey management and business banking.
· The Committee recognises the importance of customer service so time has been dedicated to understanding the actions needed to be taken by management to improve RBSs position in the customer service rankings published by the Competition and Markets Authority. This was with a keen focus on managements longer term ambition.
· The Committee has considered the Environmental strategy, with a focus on activity relating to colleagues and suppliers as well as being updated on the approach to climate change.
· New areas of interest for 2018 included RBSs reputation and relationships with the media.
· The Committee received a spotlight on suppliers which included how RBS ensures it works with suppliers that share the same values as well as understanding the quality of supplier relationships. This was complemented by obtaining the internal audit perspective.
· The Committee supported management in developing a sustainable banking dashboard which provides a consolidated view on performance in respect of key priorities.
Stakeholder engagement
The Committee has continued with its stakeholder engagement programme and during 2018 met with 16 external stakeholders over four sessions. Topics were:
· Sustainable credit;
· Ethics of artificial intelligence;
· Purpose; and
· Transparency.
The sessions continue to provide a valuable opportunity for Board members and senior management to listen to the external perspective.
During the year the Committee also undertook visits to our Private Banking and Premier Banking businesses along with visiting the Digital Studio in Bristol and the London Entrepreneurial Accelerator Hub. The purpose of these visits is to provide Board members with customer and entrepreneur insights and interaction.
The Committees programme of stakeholder engagement was enhanced by hosting a lunch with some of the members of the recently formed Colleague Advisory Panel, with the key themes of the discussion being shared with the Board. Further information about the Panel can be found in the Strategic Report on page 15.
Membership, Meetings and Escalation
The structure of the Committee was amended part way through the year in preparation for ring-fencing. More information on ring-fencing governance can be found on page 61 of the Governance Report.
A Sustainable Banking Committee of NatWest Holdings Limited (NWH Ltd SBC) was established, with its focus on customer and people matters within the ring-fenced bank.
Authority is delegated to Group SBC by Group Board and a regular report of the Committees activities is provided to the Group Board. The terms of reference are available on rbs.com and these are reviewed annually and approved by the Group Board.
Group SBC began the year with six independent non-executive directors, with that changing to four independent non-executive directors due to changes in the structure of the Committee as referenced above. More details of membership and attendance at meetings can be found on page 62 of the Governance Report.
Performance evaluation
The annual review of the effectiveness of the Group Board and its senior Committees, including Group SBC, was conducted externally in 2018. Group SBC has considered the outcomes of this evaluation and accepts the findings. Overall the feedback on the Committee was positive, although it was recognised that there was an opportunity to be clearer and simpler on remit.
The outcomes of the evaluation have been reported to the Group Board and the Committee will follow up during the year through the development of the pillars of sustainable banking as described below.
Conclusion
I want to take the opportunity to thank the Committee members and attendees for their continued contribution and support in 2018.
I would also like to record my thanks to Penny Hughes, my predecessor, as Chairman of the Committee who stood down at the AGM in May 2018. Penny was a champion for sustainable banking and stakeholder engagement and I look forward to building further on the progress made under her direction.
In preparation for 2019, the Committee has spent time considering its remit and how best to continue to have a long-term and strategic focus. In future, the Committees work will be structured under four pillars of: Customers and Brands; People and Culture; the Competitive Environment; and Society and Environment.
I am energised to continue to lead the Committees work during 2019 and look forward to reporting on progress of the sustainable banking agenda next year.
Mike Rogers
Chairman of the Group Sustainable Banking Committee
14 February 2019
Report of the Technology and Innovation Committee
Letter from Alison Davis
Chairman of the Technology and Innovation Committee
In this digital era, technology and innovation is fundamental to the banks strategy and customers
Dear Shareholder,
I am pleased to present the first report of the Technology and Innovation Committee (the Committee or TIC).
Role and responsibilities
TIC was established in September 2017 in order to support the Board in overseeing and monitoring RBSs strategic direction in relation to technology and innovation. Technology and innovation is transforming banking and it was agreed that a Board Committee should be established to allow the Board to dedicate sufficient time to this area of critical importance to our strategy and our customers.
Authority is delegated to TIC by the Board and a regular report of the Committees activities is provided to the Board. The terms of reference are available on rbs.com and these are reviewed annually and approved by the Group Board.
Board Committee structures were reviewed in preparation for ring-fencing and the TIC has remained a Group-level Committee, given the strategic nature of its remit.
Membership and meetings
I have chaired the Committee since it was established, at which time, Frank Dangeard and Yasmin Jetha became the first members.
In June 2018, following review of the Committees membership in preparation for ring-fencing, Patrick Flynn and Lena Wilson were appointed as members of the Committee. Frank Dangeard continued as a member while Yasmin Jetha stood down and became a standing attendee following her appointment as a Double Independent Non-executive Director.
I am confident that the mix of relevant skills, knowledge and commercial experience contributed by the Committees members has greatly enhanced the quality of our discussions.
The Committee is supported by management and the Chief Executive, Chief Administrative Officer, Chief Risk Officer, Chief Financial Officer, CEO Special Projects, Director of Innovation and Director of Strategy and Corporate Development are all standing attendees.
The Committee held six meetings during 2018. Details of meeting attendance can be found at page 62 of the Governance Report.
Principal activity during 2018
We know that the nature of banking services and the way they are provided is changing and the Committee agendas are therefore focused across three key themes:
· Digitising the core the Committee considered how the Group is using new technology to improve the core business, including how it enhances the customer value proposition and reduces the cost base. Each of the franchises and functions were invited to present an update on steps being taken to digitise their area. The Committee has also considered data strategy; GDPR; cyber security; technology modernisation; and the core infrastructure under this theme.
· New revenue streams the Committee considered new initiatives that could generate revenue streams, challenge disruption and deliver innovative digital propositions for customers.
· Innovation strategy, culture and capability the Committee discussed how managements consideration of the future innovation strategy, culture and capability of the organisation is developing. Open Banking, the innovation budget and quantum computing were also discussed.
Given the focus of the Committee, it is important that it spends time considering external perspectives to ensure that it keeps abreast of emerging technology and innovation trends and can identify key threats resulting from new business models, technologies, processes, products and concepts. During the year, the Committee invited a number of speakers to meetings to provide an external perspective and insight.
Performance evaluation
The annual review of the effectiveness of the Board and its Committees, including the TIC, was conducted externally in 2018. Overall, the review concluded that the Committee operated effectively. It included observations regarding the remit of the Committee and the focus of the agenda which will be taken into account in 2019. The outcomes of the evaluation have been reported to the Board.
Conclusion
I am delighted to chair the TIC, which supports the Board in an area so crucial to the future of the organisation. RBS needs to remain relevant to customers in a changing world and the Committee will continue to support the Board in considering how we can use technology and innovation to advance the bank for our customers and shareholders. I want to take the opportunity to thank the Committee members and attendees for their contribution, enthusiasm and support in 2018.
Alison Davis
Chairman of the Technology and Innovation Committee
14 February 2019
Directors Remuneration Report
|
Page |
Annual statement from the Committee Chairman |
74 |
Remuneration at a glance |
75 |
Directors Remuneration Policy |
77 |
Annual Report on Remuneration |
81 |
Other Remuneration Disclosures |
91 |
Letter from Robert Gillespie
Chairman of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee
Capital strength has been a key performance measure and I am delighted that progress in this area has enabled RBS to resume dividend payments.
Dear Shareholder,
This is my second report as Chairman of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee (the Committee) and it has proved to be another busy year. We have established additional remuneration committees for a number of RBS subsidiaries as part of our governance arrangements for ring-fencing. This will provide additional oversight of remuneration across our key legal entities before proposals are considered by the Committee.
In addition, the Committee spent time considering the latest updates to reporting regulations and the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code). We remain strong supporters of reforms aimed at improving the effectiveness, transparency and fairness of pay structures.
Broader pay considerations
Colleague engagement In preparation for the new Code, we have taken steps to supplement our existing channels for colleagues to be heard at Board level. We have established a Colleague Advisory Panel to provide direct engagement with Board members. Amongst other strategic topics, this forum will be used to discuss executive remuneration and how it aligns with the wider company pay policy.
We believe that having an engaged and inclusive workforce is a key element of a successful business. This is why it is one of the areas included in the performance assessment for executive directors. The latest opinion survey shows engagement is at its highest level since we started measuring it and inclusion is our highest scoring category. We are now above the Global Financial Services (GFS) norms in all comparable survey categories.
Fairness and simplicity We continue to make good progress. The number of employees at RBS who believe they are paid fairly rose during the year and is significantly above the GFS norm. In the UK, our rates of pay continue to exceed the Living Wage. Over the last four years we have made improvements to starting salaries and faster progression for those on lower levels of pay.
We have also removed variable pay for a significant number of these employees and increased their fixed pay. This provides more certainty and allows employees to concentrate on customers needs. As a result of these changes, 56% of employees across the Group are rewarded through fixed pay only.
We are confident we pay our employees fairly and our policies and processes are kept under review to ensure we continue to do so.
On pensions, action was taken during the year to significantly address the deficit in the main defined benefit pension scheme. Employees are provided with a range of flexible, market-leading benefits and wellbeing support. Over 23,000 employees have chosen to participate in share plans, which provide direct alignment with the companys success and shareholders interests.
Transparency Ahead of new reporting regulations coming into force next year, we have included the Chief Executive to employee pay ratios in this report along with broader disclosures on employee remuneration. Gender and ethnicity pay gap information can be found in the Strategic Report section, as well as the steps we are taking to address the position.
Executive director pay policy
Turning to executive pay, the Directors Remuneration Policy was approved by shareholders at the 2017 AGM. No changes are being made to the policy at this time. Variable pay is delivered entirely in shares as long-term incentive (LTI) awards with no annual bonus. The Chief Executives management team receive a similar remuneration construct.
The policy is based around a restrained pay position, with lower levels of LTI awards, reasonable performance expectations and significant shareholdings. Shares must be retained for the long-term, both during and after employment. I believe this creates a simple way of aligning executive directors interests with shareholders.
Executive director changes during 2018
Ewen Stevenson resigned as Chief Financial Officer (CFO) during the year. In line with policy, he continued to receive fixed pay until his departure date and all outstanding LTI awards were forfeited. No payment was made in lieu of notice.
After a successful period as interim CFO, Katie Murray was appointed to the Board as CFO from 1 January 2019. Katies pay has been set at a competitive level within the approved remuneration policy. The pension rate is 10% of salary. This is in line with the rate applicable to the wider RBS workforce and recognises emerging best practice.
Performance and pay decisions
The latest results demonstrate the business is building on its return to profitability in 2017 with a clear plan to deliver sustainable returns for shareholders. Income has risen and our core tier 1 capital ratio remains strong, exceeding our long-term target.
Remuneration structures are designed to support our strategic aims, one of which is building a safe and sustainable business. Capital strength has been one of the key performance measures for executive directors and I am delighted that progress in this area has enabled RBS to resume paying dividends to our ordinary shareholders.
Ross McEwan will be granted an LTI award in early 2019, following an assessment of performance over 2018. The assessment determined that overall performance had been strong, particularly in relation to capital and people measures, but the Committee applied a modest downwards adjustment of around 6% to the maximum grant as customer performance was not at the desired level.
Performance has also been assessed for the LTI award granted to the Chief Executive in 2016, following the end of the performance period in 2018. The award will vest at 27.5% reflecting improvements in capital strength and employee engagement, but with no vesting in areas where performance did not meet targets, such as total shareholder return. No discretion was exercised in determining the outcome. Full details of the assessments against the objectives and the award levels can be found in this report.
In terms of pay decisions for our broader employees, the bonus pool for 2018 is £335 million, which is around 2% lower than 2017. The size of the bonus pool in recent years reflects our transition to a smaller and simpler bank, staffed by highly capable and engaged people. Immediate cash bonuses continue to be limited to £2,000.
Looking ahead
One of the main priorities for the Committee during 2019 will be preparing the executive directors remuneration policy for its renewal at the 2020 AGM. The new Code requirements and engagement with our stakeholders will be part of that process. The Committee will also look at how it can enhance its existing role in considering wider workforce remuneration.
I would like to thank my fellow Committee members for their guidance and constructive challenge during the year and I look forward to considering how we can continue to develop remuneration practices at RBS for the benefit of all our stakeholders.
Robert Gillespie
Chairman of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee
14 February 2019
Directors Remuneration Report at a glance
The at a glance section summarises the key features of the executive directors remuneration policy and arrangements for 2018 and 2019.
Summary of the remuneration policy for executive directors approved at the 2017 AGM
Alignment with strategy of building a strong, simple and fair bank |
Alignment via shares between executives and shareholders |
Alignment with the growing external consensus on executive pay | |
Built around a restrained pay position for executives, with variable pay delivered entirely in LTI awards.
Performance assessed on factors that executive directors would reasonably be expected to achieve, encouraging safe and secure growth.
Quantum and structure of pay appropriate for a smaller, safer bank.
|
Aligns executives with shareholders predominantly through holding shares, both during and after employment.
The maximum value of LTI award is smaller and we have significantly increased the value of shares that executive directors need to hold.
LTI awards will be adjusted for underperformance or risk failings and are released over eight years with malus and clawback for a long-term view of performance. |
Reduced complexity and quantum, in line with the Executive Remuneration Working Group and Government announcements on executive pay.
Reflects emerging investor guidelines with their common themes of restraint, meaningful shareholdings and flexibility of pay design.
Continues to provide transparency between performance and reward, with performance measured against pre-set objectives and disclosed each year. | |
|
|
| |
Summary of pay construct |
Chief Executive |
Chief Financial Officer (from 2019) | |
Fixed pay |
Base salary
|
£1,000,000
|
£750,000
|
Fixed Share Allowance
|
100% of salary
|
100% of salary
| |
Pension
|
35% of salary
|
10% of salary
| |
Maximum LTI award (delivered in shares)
|
175% of salary
|
200% of salary
| |
Vesting period and conditions |
· Pre-grant and pre-vest performance assessments along with risk and stakeholder underpins. · Vests in equal amounts between years three to seven after grant. · 12 months retention period following each vesting. · Malus and clawback provisions apply. · No pro-rating of LTI awards will apply in agreed good leaver circumstances. | ||
Expected average vesting |
80% of maximum over time. |
| |
Shareholding requirement |
400% of salary |
250% of salary |
Summary of 2018 performance assessments for the Chief Executive
2018 highlights |
Performance assessment for |
Performance assessment for |
· Operating profit before tax of £3,359 million and CET1 ratio remains strong at 16.2%, exceeding our long-term target. · The major legacy issues have now been resolved and 2018 saw the payment of the first dividend in 10 years. · Arrangements for ring-fencing have been implemented on time. · Employee engagement is at its highest level yet and there have been continued improvements in culture and inclusion scores. · Customer service results, however, are not consistently where they need to be to achieve our long-term ambition.
|
Performance assessed against pre-set objectives for 2016 2018, covering: · Economic Profit 0% vesting. · Total Shareholder Return 0% vesting. · Safe & Secure Bank 12.5% vesting. · Customers & People 15% vesting.
The performance assessment resulted in a total vesting percentage of 27.5% due to progress in capital strength, customer trust scores and employee engagement. The other elements did not meet the required performance levels for vesting. Full details can be found in the annual report on remuneration. |
Performance assessed against pre-set objectives for 2018, covering core areas of: · Finance & Business capital and RoTE targets met, ring-fencing structure in place. · Risk & Operations risk culture target met, control environment not met in full. · Customers Net Promoter Score was mixed, some but not all segments on target. · People & Culture engagement, culture and diversity performance all meeting targets.
While overall performance was strong, the Committee concluded that a reduction of around 6% to the maximum grant would be appropriate for the Chief Executive to recognise that some areas were not fully at the desired level. A further assessment will take place prior to any vesting taking place. Full details can be found in the annual report on remuneration. |
Directors Remuneration Report at a glance
Executive directors who have left/joined during the year
Ewen Stevenson
Ewen Stevenson stepped down from the Board on 30 September 2018 and left RBS on 30 November 2018. He did not receive any payment in lieu of notice and all outstanding LTI awards were forfeited on his final date of employment.
Katie Murray
Katie Murray was appointed to the Board as Chief Financial Officer with effect from 1 January 2019. Benchmarking was undertaken for the role and the Committee agreed a remuneration package that was considered to be positioned appropriately compared to peers both in terms of fixed pay and projected total compensation. Remuneration includes a base salary at £750,000 per annum and a fixed share allowance of £750,000 per annum. Pension funding has been set at 10% of salary. This rate of 10% is the same as the pension rate applicable to the vast majority of RBS employees and recognises emerging best practice under the UK Corporate Governance Code and investor guidelines.
Any variable pay awards for performance year 2019 onwards (to be made in early 2020) will be delivered as LTI awards, with a maximum award of 200% of salary. For performance year 2018, a period prior to appointment to the Board, variable pay will continue to be awarded in line with arrangements in place at that time.
Remuneration outcomes for executive directors in 2018
Ross McEwan |
|
Ewen Stevenson (as at 30 September 2018) (1) |
|
|
|
|
(1) Ewen Stevenson also received fixed pay of £317,708 in 2018 for the period after stepping down from the Board until he left RBS on 30 November 2018.
Shareholding requirements
Ross McEwan |
|
Ewen Stevenson (as at 30 September 2018) |
|
|
|
|
Timing of payments for 2019 awards to Ross McEwan
Variable pay awarded to Katie Murray in 2019 for performance year 2018, a period prior to appointment to the Board, will be subject to deferral over seven years and retention periods in line with regulatory requirements.
Directors Remuneration Policy
Key features of the remuneration policy for executive directors
The Directors Remuneration Policy was approved by shareholders at the AGM on 11 May 2017. The policy will apply until the 2020 AGM unless changes are required which mandate a revised policy be submitted to shareholders for approval. There are no changes requiring shareholder approval at this time. The table below summarises the key features of the policy for executive directors. In the event of any conflict the approved policy, which can be found under the Board and Governance section of rbs.com, takes precedence over the information set out below.
Element of pay |
Operation |
Maximum potential value |
Salary To provide a competitive level of fixed cash remuneration and aid recruitment and retention of high performing individuals.
|
Paid monthly in cash and reviewed annually.
The rates for 2019 are: · Chief Executive £1,000,000 · Chief Financial Officer £750,000
|
Future salary increases will not normally be greater than the average salary increase for RBS employees over the period. Other than in exceptional circumstances, the salary will not increase by more than 15% over the course of this policy. |
Fixed share allowance To provide fixed pay that reflects the skills and experience required and responsibilities for the role.
|
A fixed allowance paid entirely in shares. The shares vest immediately subject to any deductions for tax and are released in equal tranches over a three year retention period. |
An award of shares with an annual value of up to 100% of salary at the time of award. |
Benefits To provide a range of flexible and market competitive benefits that are valued and assist individuals in carrying out their duties effectively.
|
Executive directors can select from a range of standard benefits including: company car; private medical cover; life assurance; and critical illness insurance.
Executive directors are also entitled to travel assistance in connection with company business including the use of a car and driver. RBS will meet the cost of any tax on the benefit.
Further benefits including relocation costs may be offered in line with market practice. RBS may also put in place certain security arrangements for executive directors.
|
Set level of funding for standard benefits (currently £26,250) which is subject to review.
The total value of benefits provided is disclosed each year in the annual report on remuneration.
|
Pension To encourage planning for retirement and long-term savings. |
Provision of a monthly cash pension allowance based on a percentage of salary. Opportunity to use the cash to participate in a defined contribution pension scheme.
· Chief Executive 35% of salary · Chief Financial Officer 10% of salary
|
While the 2017 policy allows for pension funding of 35% of salary for existing executive directors and up to 25% of salary for new executive directors, a rate of 10% was agreed on the appointment of the new Chief Financial Officer to align with the UK Corporate Governance Code. The 10% rate is in line with the wider workforce. |
Variable pay award (long-term incentive) To support a culture where individuals are rewarded for the delivery of sustained performance, taking into account RBSs strategic objectives.
Delivery in shares with the ability to apply malus adjustments and clawback further supports longer-term alignment with shareholders interests. |
LTI awards are subject to: · a one year pre-grant performance period; · a pre-vest performance assessment at the end of a three year period, with vesting taking place from years three to seven after grant; · malus prior to vesting and clawback which applies for seven (and potentially up to ten) years from the date of award; and · a 12 month post-vesting retention period.
Performance will be assessed in the areas of Finance, Risk & Operations, Customers and People & Culture to determine whether the executive has achieved what would reasonably have been expected in the circumstances. Risk & Control and Stakeholder Perception underpins will also apply.
|
The maximum award for current directors at the time of grant is capped at: · Chief Executive - 175% of salary. · Chief Financial Officer - 200% of salary.
Prior performance will be taken into account when determining the value of the award at the time of grant.
The vesting level of the award can vary between 0% and 100% of the original number of shares granted, dependent on the delivery of sustained performance. |
Shareholding requirements To ensure executive directors build and continue to hold a significant shareholding over the long-term. |
Unvested shares from LTI awards will count on a net of tax basis towards meeting the shareholding requirement once the pre-vest performance assessment has taken place. When the applicable retention period has passed, the executive directors can dispose of up to 25% of the net of tax shares received until the shareholding requirement is met.
|
· Chief Executive - 400% of salary. · Chief Financial Officer - 250% of salary.
|
Directors Remuneration Policy
Remuneration for the Chairman and non-executive directors
Element of pay |
Operation |
Maximum potential value |
Fees To reflect the required skills, experience and time commitment. |
Fees are paid monthly in cash and reviewed regularly. Additional fees may be paid for new Board Committees provided these are not greater than fees payable for the existing Board Committees.
No variable pay is provided so that the Chairman and non-executive directors can maintain appropriate independence.
|
The rates for the year ahead are set out in the annual report on remuneration.
Other than in exceptional circumstances, fees will not increase by more than 15% over the course of the policy. |
Benefits To provide a level of benefits in line with market practice.
|
Reimbursement of reasonable out-of-pocket expenses. The Chairman and non-executive directors are entitled to travel assistance in connection with company business including the use of a car and driver. RBS will meet the cost of any tax due on the benefit. Other benefits may be offered in line with market practice.
The Chairman receives private medical cover. |
The value of the private medical cover provided to the Chairman and any other benefits will be in line with market rates and disclosed in the annual report on remuneration. |
Other policy elements
Provision |
Operation |
Recruitment policy |
The policy on the recruitment of new directors aims to be competitive and to structure pay in line with the framework applicable to current directors, recognising that some adjustment to quantum within that framework may be necessary to secure the preferred candidate. A buy-out policy exists to replace awards forfeited or payments foregone which is in line with regulatory requirements. The Committee will minimise buy-outs wherever possible and ensure they are no more generous than, and on substantially similar terms to, the original awards or payments they are replacing.
|
Notice and termination provisions |
Executive directors As set out in executive directors service contracts, RBS or the executive director is required to give 12 months notice to the other party to terminate the employment. There is discretion for RBS to make a payment in lieu of notice (based on salary only) which is released in monthly instalments. The executive director must take all reasonable steps to find alternative work and any remaining instalments will be reduced as appropriate to offset income from any such work.
Chairman and non-executive directors The Chairman and the non-executive directors do not have service contracts, they have letters of appointment. They do not have notice periods and no compensation would be paid in the event of termination of appointment, other than standard payments payable for the period served up to the termination date.
On an annual basis, all directors stand for election or re-election by shareholders at the companys AGM. Non-executive directors appointed prior to 2017 do not have a set term as the letter of appointment operates on a rolling basis. From 2017 onwards, new non-executive directors have been appointed for an initial term of three years, commencing from the first election by shareholders. At the end of this period, further terms may be agreed, subject to an overall maximum tenure of nine years. The non-executive directors with terms of appointment that will currently expire unless otherwise renewed at the end of three years are: Mark Seligman (2020 AGM), Dr Lena Wilson (2021 AGM) and Patrick Flynn (2022 AGM).
|
Legacy arrangements |
RBS can continue to honour any previous commitments or arrangements entered into with current or former directors that may have different terms, including terms agreed prior to appointment as an executive director.
|
Treatment of outstanding employee share plan awards on termination |
On termination, share awards will be treated in accordance with the relevant plan rules as approved by shareholders. Under the remuneration policy approved by shareholders at the 2017 AGM, LTI awards made in 2018 onwards will not be subject to pro rating for time in good leaver circumstances, for the reasons set out below.
RBS is unusual in having no annual bonus, and bonus awards would typically not be subject to pro rating for time. In addition, regulatory requirements can effectively prevent LTI awards being granted in the year of joining. The combination of these factors means executives at RBS could potentially receive no variable pay award either for the year of joining or in the final year of employment. This is not consistent with our aim of creating significant alignment with shareholders.
Removal of pro rating enables executive directors to receive an appropriate level of variable pay for the period that they work and helps to ensure executives are motivated up to the point of departure and beyond. It creates higher levels of shareholding for up to eight years post departure meaning executives can be held accountable for, and are financially exposed to, the long-term consequences of their actions.
Individuals will only qualify for good leaver treatment if they leave due to ill-health, injury, disability, death, retirement (as agreed with RBS), redundancy, the employing company ceasing to be a member of RBS, transfer of the employing business, or any other reason if, and to the extent, the Committee decides in any particular case. If good leaver treatment does not apply then LTI awards will be forfeited on leaving.
|
Directors Remuneration Policy
Approach to the new UK Corporate Governance Code (the new Code)
Ahead of its formal application in 2019, detailed analysis of the new Code was undertaken in 2018 with findings presented to the Committee. The majority of the changes are in line with existing practice at RBS. A summary of the main provisions is set out below. The Committee will continue to monitor and reflect on best practice for these new requirements.
Area |
Description of provision |
RBS position |
Workforce remuneration and alignment with culture
|
Remuneration Committee to review workforce remuneration and related policies, and the alignment of incentives and rewards with culture, taking these into account when setting the policy for executive director remuneration.
|
The Committee already considers papers on the broader employee proposition, for example, the group-wide remuneration and deferral policy, annual pay outcomes including diversity information, and the annual Sharesave offer for employees.
The Financial Reporting Councils (FRC) guidance asks Remuneration Committees to consider How do workforce incentives support our culture and encourage the desired behaviours? The removal of sales incentives for front-line employees in recent years is a good example where desired culture and remuneration proposals have been considered together at RBS.
The Committee will review relevant culture developments and consider the potential impact on remuneration policy. The aim is to assist the Board in its responsibility to monitor how well culture is being embedded across the organisation and the role that remuneration plays in that.
|
Post-employment shareholding requirements |
Remuneration Committees should develop a formal policy for post-employment shareholding requirements encompassing both unvested and vested shares.
|
Under the current policy, executive directors automatically retain a significant number of shares after they leave. Shares from fixed share allowances continue to be held for at least three years regardless of the reason for leaving and LTI awards held by good leavers will continue to be released up to eight years post departure.
The Committee will consider whether a more formal post-employment shareholding requirement should be introduced when the new directors remuneration policy is due to be submitted to shareholders at the 2020 AGM.
|
Pension contribution rates |
The pension contribution rates for executive directors should be aligned with those available to the workforce.
|
The FRC guidance recognises that it may not be appropriate to reduce the pension provision for existing directors. However, good practice is for the rates to move over time to be aligned with those of the wider workforce.
As noted earlier in this report, RBS has already taken steps in this area with the pension rate for the new Chief Financial Officer set at 10% of salary, rather than the 25% of salary allowed for under the policy for new executive directors. The rate at 10% is the same as that applicable to the majority of the wider workforce. The position for the Chief Executive will be reviewed as part of the renewal of the directors remuneration policy at the 2020 AGM.
|
Factors in determining executive director policy |
Remuneration Committees should address the following criteria when determining executive director policy: clarity; simplicity; risk; predictability; proportionality; and alignment to culture.
|
The Committee already takes many of these factors into account when determining executive director policy. The current policy was designed around themes of simplicity, alignment with company strategy and culture, and ensuring rewards are supported by sustainable, risk-adjusted long-term performance.
In terms of predictability, it is worth noting that variable pay at RBS is already constrained by the 1:1 regulatory cap on grant. The new long-term incentive construct is based around lower awards levels with more predictable outcomes. In addition, there are discretionary underpins which provide scope to adjust outcomes for significant risk, stakeholder or reputational matters not already captured in the performance assessment.
|
Engagement with colleagues
|
Remuneration Committee to report on its work including engagement with colleagues on executive remuneration. |
In 2018, we established a Colleague Advisory Panel, chaired by a designated non-executive director. The aim of the Panel is to provide direct engagement between colleagues and Board members. The Panel includes colleagues who volunteered to be involved, existing representatives from trade union bodies and works councils, our colleague-led networks and junior management teams.
Along with a broad range of strategic topics, the Panel will also be used to discuss executive remuneration and how it aligns with the wider company pay policy. Further information on the Panel can be found in the Strategic Report and the Report of the directors.
|
Discretion and use of malus and clawback |
Remuneration schemes and policies should enable the use of discretion to override formulaic outcomes and include provisions to withhold or recover payments. |
There is broad discretion under RBS remuneration arrangements and the Committee has used discretion in the past to apply downwards adjustment to the formulaic outcome of LTI vestings.
The remuneration policy and share plan rules contain malus and clawback provisions to adjust or recover awards where appropriate. Details of the process and the circumstances in which RBS can apply malus and clawback are set out on page 92. |
Directors Remuneration Report
Wider workforce remuneration policy
Consistent with our executive remuneration principles, the aim is to deliver a simple and transparent pay policy which promotes the long-term success of RBS. The policy supports a culture where individuals are rewarded for delivering sustained performance in line with risk appetite and for demonstrating the right conduct and behaviours.
Employees are provided with salary and pension funding and certain roles are eligible for benefit funding and variable pay awards. Further details on the policy and remuneration levels for 2018 including pay ratios can be found later in this report.
Making RBS a great place to work
RBS is committed to providing four key things: a fulfilling job; fair pay; excellent training and a good leader.
Fulfilling job
The aim is for every colleague to have a clear and fulfilling job that connects to our purpose. Each colleague is set clear goals and objectives that reflect RBSs overall strategy. Progress is reviewed throughout the year.
Wellbeing is essential for people to bring the best of themselves to work. A range of measures are provided to support good physical, mental, social and financial health. There is also an Employee Assistance Programme where employees can access confidential advice, support and short-term counselling.
Flexible working is offered where this is possible and appropriate. This allows colleagues to explore working patterns with their line manager and select a more flexible approach to work that meets their current needs.
Inclusion and diversity is another key element of creating a great place to work and also understanding the needs of our customers. RBS supports a variety of colleague-led groups that help influence strategy and employees also undertake unconscious bias training and mandatory annual inclusion training.
The inclusion category in our colleague opinion survey is the highest scoring category. Targets are in place to improve the proportion of women and ethnic minority leaders across all business areas and RBS is on track to meet these aspirations. Inclusion targets are also part of the measures that impact executive remuneration.
In June 2018, RBS was awarded the Employer of the Year award at the Women in Finance Awards.
Fair Pay
RBS is committed to providing a fair wage for the role performed and also being very clear on how pay works. Employees are provided with flexibility in terms of how they wish to receive pay to suit their personal circumstances.
Fairness is built around a number of themes. A full pay review is undertaken each year for all salary ranges. Pay is compared against the external market so that pay and benefits are competitive. RBS is a fully accredited Living Wage Employer in the UK and our rates of pay continue to exceed the Living Wage Foundation Benchmarks.
RBS has also implemented a more transparent approach by moving more employees to published salary ranges. Improvements have been made to starting salaries with faster progression to the rate for the job. Investment in pay levels in recent years has focused mostly on junior employees, while not increasing fixed pay for executive directors.
RBS has also removed front-line incentives and variable pay for large numbers of employees, with an increase to fixed pay instead. This provides greater certainty for these employees and allows them to focus fully on providing the best service for customers.
We are confident that we pay our employees fairly and keep our HR policies and processes under review to ensure we do so.
Flexible benefits are provided allowing employees to change pension contributions and choose from a range of protection, healthcare and lifestyle options. Employees in the UK and Republic of Ireland can also participate in employee share plans and over 23,000 currently do so.
The number of employees at RBS who believe they are paid fairly increased during 2018 and is significantly above the Global Financial Services Norm.
Excellent training
RBS offers a number of ways for colleagues to learn and develop. This includes technical training, continuing professional development and further education qualifications on the job. Support is also provided for personal development. This helps employees serve customers well and also assists colleagues with their career aspirations.
RBS remains committed to embedding a strong service mindset through Service Excellence training which sits at the heart of achieving our ambition to be number 1 for customer service, trust and advocacy.
RBS continues to work closely with the Chartered Banker Institute and Chartered Banker Professional Standards Board to improve professional standards across the industry.
A Good Leader
RBS is continuing to develop great leaders and supporting the development of talent across the Group. Part of this commitment is delivering and embedding our flagship leadership programme Determined to lead (Dtl). It teaches the skills to lead, manage and coach people so they make positive behaviour changes and improve their performance. By the end of 2018, around 11,000 leaders had completed their Dtl training.
Gender and ethnicity pay gaps
The latest gender and ethnicity pay gap reporting for RBS can be found in the Our Colleagues section of the Strategic Report contained herein.
Listening to colleagues
In 2018 a more frequent approach to listening to our workforce was developed. This provides more opportunities to improve by assessing colleague sentiment and feedback, and checking progress in making RBS a great place to work.
Our colleague opinion survey provides everyone with the opportunity to have a say on what it feels like to work at RBS. Feedback in terms of engagement and leadership has a direct impact on executive pay. A survey by the Banking Standards Board, an independent body, is also used to help raise standards of behaviour and competence across the UK banking sector.
Regular engagement takes place with colleagues and representative bodies throughout the year. Board members visit business areas to hear directly from colleagues and there are regular townhall meetings and online forums to facilitate question and answer sessions with senior executives.
In 2018, a new Colleague Advisory Panel was established to enhance the colleague voice at Board level and a meet the Board event took place for the first time following the AGM.
Annual Report on Remuneration
The sections audited by the companys auditors, Ernst and Young LLP, are as indicated.
Single total figure of remuneration for executive directors for 2018 (audited)
|
Ross McEwan |
|
Ewen Stevenson (5) | ||
|
2018 £000 |
2017 £000 |
|
2018 £000 |
2017 £000 |
Salary |
1,000 |
1,000 |
|
600 |
800 |
Fixed share allowance (1) |
1,000 |
1,000 |
|
600 |
800 |
Benefits (2) |
117 |
113 |
|
20 |
26 |
Pension (3) |
350 |
350 |
|
210 |
280 |
Total fixed remuneration |
2,467 |
2,463 |
|
1,430 |
1,906 |
Annual bonus |
n/a |
n/a |
|
n/a |
n/a |
Long-term incentive award (4) |
1,111 |
1,024 |
|
- |
1,418 |
Total remuneration |
3,578 |
3,487 |
|
1,430 |
3,324 |
Notes:
(1) The value of the fixed share allowance is based on 100% of salary and, as part of fixed remuneration, it is not subject to any performance conditions.
(2) Includes standard benefit funding of £26,250 with the remainder for Ross McEwan in 2018 being travel assistance in connection with company business (£72,220), relocation expenses (£15,493) consisting of a flight allowance and assistance with tax return preparation, and home security arrangements (£2,676).
(3) The executive directors receive a monthly cash allowance to help fund pension arrangements but do not participate in the companys defined benefit pension schemes. The executive directors can choose to participate in the companys defined contribution pension arrangements.
(4) The 2018 value relates to an LTI award granted in 2016. Performance has been assessed over the three year period to 31 December 2018 as set out below resulting in 487,285 shares due to vest in two equal tranches in March 2020 and March 2021. No discretion was exercised by the Committee as a result of share price appreciation or depreciation over the performance period. The estimated value above is £11,013 higher than the value of 487,285 shares at the time of grant, as a result of the share price rising from £2.2574 to £2.28 over the period.
(5) Reflects remuneration paid to Ewen Stevenson for the period to 30 September 2018, the date he stepped down from the Board.
2016 LTI award final assessment of performance measures (audited)
An assessment of performance of each relevant element was provided by internal control functions and PwC assessed relative Total Shareholder Return (TSR) performance against a peer group of comparator banks.
Performance Measures |
Performance for |
Vesting at |
Performance for |
Actual Performance |
Vesting |
Weighted | |
Economic Profit (25%) |
(£200 million) |
25% |
£800 million |
(£1,275 million) |
0% |
0% | |
Relative TSR (25%) |
TSR at median |
20% |
TSR at upper quartile |
Below lower quartile |
0% |
0% | |
Safe & Secure Bank (25%)
CET1 ratio (12.5%) Cost:income ratio (12.5%)
|
Vesting between 0% - 100%* CET1 ratio target: 13% or above
Cost:income ratio target: 57% or below |
CET1 ratio: 16.2%
Cost:income ratio: 72% |
100% |
50% |
12.5% | ||
0% | |||||||
Customers & People (25%)
Split across advocacy, trust and employee engagement
Net Promoter Score (NPS) (7.5%) Net Trust Score (NTS) (5%) Engagement Index (EI) (12.5%) |
Vesting between 0% - 100%* NPS target: Gap to number 1 of 2.3
NTS target: NatWest 63, RBS 50
EI target: 1 point above Global Financial Services (GFS) norm
|
NPS Gap to number 1 of 18.7
NTS: NatWest 64, RBS 25
EI: 4 points above GFS norm
|
0% |
60% |
15% | ||
50% | |||||||
100% | |||||||
Final vesting outcome |
27.5% |
* Vesting in the Safe & Secure and Customers & People categories can be qualified by Committee discretion taking into account changes in circumstances over the period, the margin by which individual targets have been missed or exceeded, and any other relevant factors.
Economic Profit was defined as profit after tax and preference share charges less tangible net asset value multiplied by the cost of equity. The companies in the relative TSR group for this award were: Barclays, Lloyds, HSBC, Standard Chartered, BBVA, BNP Paribas, Crédit Agricole, Santander, Société Générale, Unicredit, ING, Intesa San Paolo and Nordea Bank.
Final outcome and discretionary underpin
If the Committee considers that the vesting outcome calibrated in line with the performance conditions above does not reflect underlying financial results, or if the Committee is not satisfied that conduct and risk management during the performance period has been effective, then the terms of the award allow for an underpin to be used to reduce the vesting.
In making its final judgement, the Committee considered the overall context of performance, noting significant improvements in capital strength and employee engagement over the period and the Trust score for NatWest also meeting the target. Relative TSR, the cost:income ratio and customer performance were not at the required level. The Committee also considered the potential impact of the US Department of Justice charge on the Economic Profit outcome. Input was also received from the Board Risk Committee on risk performance. Taking all circumstances into account, the Committee determined that no further adjustment was necessary under the discretionary underpin.
Annual Report on Remuneration
2016 LTI vesting amounts included in the total remuneration table (audited)
LTI awards were granted in March 2016. The award held by Ewen Stevenson lapsed on 30 November 2018, his final date of employment. The performance period ended on 31 December 2018 and the performance conditions have been assessed as set out on the previous page. While performance has been assessed, the shares will not vest until March 2020 and March 2021 and remain subject to employment conditions.
Ross McEwan
| ||||
Performance category |
% vesting |
Maximum shares (1) |
Shares due to vest |
Estimated value (2) |
Economic Profit |
0% |
442,987 |
|
£1,111,010 |
Relative TSR |
0% |
442,987 |
| |
Safe & Secure Bank |
50% |
442,987 |
221,493 | |
Customers & People |
60% |
442,987 |
265,792 | |
Maximum shares for performance assessment (1) |
1,771,948 |
| ||
Outcome following performance assessment (27.5% vesting) |
487,285 |
Notes:
(1) The maximum number of shares for the performance assessment is calculated in line with the underlying award structure, however the actual number of shares received will never exceed the number of shares capped under the approved policy and the regulatory maximum at the time of grant. Each performance category can vest up to 100% of salary at grant as shown above. For the 2016 award, the number of shares capped at grant was 1,187,207 and therefore the vesting outcome falls within the cap.
(2) Based on a RBS share price of £2.28, the average over the three month period from October to December 2018.
2017 LTI awards to executive directors current assessment
The table represents an early indication of the potential vesting outcome as at 31 December 2018. Details of the final performance assessment against targets at the end of the three year period and any use of discretion will be disclosed in the 2019 remuneration report. The Committee may consider the proximity of legacy items to the executive directors when assessing the vesting level.
Performance category |
Measure |
Weighting |
Target |
2017 LTI award | |
Economic Profit |
Economic Profit (total Bank) |
25% |
Targets set based on spot economic profit in FY2019 with vesting range from 25% up to 100% for performance ahead of Strategic Plan |
Broadly tracking in range for vesting | |
Relative TSR |
Relative Total Shareholder Return |
25% |
Relative TSR performance between median and upper quartile against comparator group results in vesting between 20% and 100%. |
Currently upper quartile, which would result in full vesting | |
Safe & Secure Bank |
Cost:income ratio |
12.5% |
C:I ratio significant progress to 56% |
Vesting under the Safe & Secure and Customers & People categories will be qualified by Committee discretion taking into account the margin by which targets have been missed or exceeded and any other relevant factors
|
C:I ratio is broadly in range for vesting |
CET1 ratio |
12.5% |
CET1 ratio target of >= 13% |
CET1 ratio is in range for full vesting | ||
Customers & People |
Advocacy |
7.5% |
Significant progress to Number 1 in our chosen segments for customer advocacy and trust (further details below). |
Some segments on track but overall behind target range | |
Trust |
5% |
Trust broadly in range for some vesting | |||
Employee Engagement |
12.5% |
1 point above Global Financial Services Norm. |
Engagement tracking above target for full vesting |
Note:
(1) There are six chosen customer segments for advocacy and five customer segments for Trust. Customer advocacy is measured by Net Promoter Score and Trust is measured by the percentage of customers that trust RBS to do the right thing. Chosen segments reflect RBSs key products, service channels and customer groups. There are targets for each segment and full details will be disclosed in the 2019 report prior to any vesting. LTI awards granted in 2018 onwards have been made under the new remuneration construct. See overleaf for further details.
LTI awards granted during 2018 (audited)
|
Grant date |
Face value of |
Number of |
% vesting at |
Performance Requirements |
Ross McEwan |
7 March 2018 |
1,575 |
592,328 |
Between 0% - 100% with no set minimum vesting |
The awards were subject to a pre-grant performance assessment and a further assessment will take place at the end of three years. Full details can be found in the 2017 Report and Accounts and the performance assessment framework is also set out overleaf. |
Ewen Stevenson |
7 March 2018 |
1,440 |
541,557 |
Note:
(1) Awards were granted as conditional share awards. The number of shares was calculated in line with the approved policy with the maximum potential award being 175% of salary for the Chief Executive and 200% of salary for the Chief Financial Officer. The award price of £2.659 was based on the average share price over five business days prior to grant. The award levels reflected a reduction of 10% to the maximum award following the pre-grant assessment of performance over 2017. Ewen Stevensons award was forfeited on 30 November 2018, his final date of employment. For Ross McEwan, subject to the pre-vest assessment, the award will be eligible to vest in equal amounts between years 2021 and 2025. Malus provisions will apply up until vest and clawback provisions will also apply for a period of at least seven years from the date of grant. Further details on malus and clawback can be found on page 92.
Annual Report on Remuneration
Performance assessment framework for LTI awards granted from 2018 onwards
For each of the core performance areas, the Committee will consider whether the executive director has achieved what would reasonably have been expected over the relevant period. The Committee will follow a robust process to review performance against pre-set objectives relevant to RBSs strategic aims, but will apply its judgement without reference to formulaic targets and weightings. Performance will be assessed taking into account circumstances applying over the period. Risk & Control and Stakeholder Perception underpins will also apply under which the Committee, with input from the Board Risk Committee and Sustainable Banking Committee, can consider if there are any other factors that would lead to a downwards adjustment.
The majority of the performance variation will normally take place under the pre-grant assessment, with a further assessment prior to any vesting taking place. Overall, the achievement of reasonable or target performance expectations will deliver full or nearly full payout of the LTI awards, as long as executives deliver good, sustainable performance. This approach reflects the significantly reduced level of awards compared to the previous policy, creating more predictable outcomes and encouraging safe and secure growth within risk appetite. Each year, the performance factors will be determined in light of RBSs priorities for that year.
Pre-grant assessment for LTI awards to be made in 2019
Core area |
Objectives for Performance Year 2018 |
Pre-grant assessment |
Financial & Business Delivery |
Reasonable performance against RoTE budget with a target of -1%.
CET1 ratio of 13% or more.
Delivery of ring-fencing requirements to meet the 1 January 2019 implementation deadline, ensuring timely remediation of issues throughout. |
Good financial performance for 2018. RoTE at 4.8% exceeded the target.
CET1 ratio of 16.2%, above the target.
Ring-fencing structure delivered as planned with all key activities completed in order to ensure compliance. Reporting on activities will be provided to the PRA. |
Risk & Control |
Improve the control environment. Franchise/Function control environment to be rated 2 within appetite and achievement of self declared forecasted control environment ratings by the end of 2018.
Material progress towards our desired risk culture. Positive progress towards 2 (systematic) with strong tone from the top and effective action plans in place. Achieve Proactive Risk Culture rating as a minimum with no deterioration from 2017 assessment. |
While improvements had been made, a number of franchises and functions had still to attain the desired control environment ratings. This part of the objective was therefore not considered to have been met in full.
Risk Culture target met, with overall assessment as Positive progress towards 2 (systematic) with strong tone from the top and effective plans in place. With one exception, all areas had achieved the required Proactive Risk Culture rating.
|
Customers & Stakeholder |
Achieve planned progress towards becoming number 1 for customer service, trust and advocacy by 2020 in chosen customer segments and brands. |
Net Promoter Score performance was mixed during 2018, with three of the six customer segments on target. While the digital strategy was delivering positive customer advocacy, it was recognised that progress was not consistent enough. |
People & Culture |
Year-on-year improvement in engagement and leadership indices, with a one point increase in each. |
Engagement score increased by three points and the leadership score increased by two points since 2017, exceeding the targets. |
Year-on-year improvement in Culture index, with a target of a one point increase. |
The Culture index had continued to improve with a three point increase since 2017, exceeding the target. | |
Progress towards target of at least 30% women in senior roles by 2020 in each franchise and function. |
Satisfactory progress had been made. As at Q3, there had been a 7% increase since the targets were introduced at the end of 2014 and six of the business areas were already at or above the 30% target. | |
Progress towards 2025 target of number of Black Asian Minority Ethnic (BAME)/non-white UK employees in the top four layers of RBS, of at least 14% (UK only). |
Improvements made during the year. As at Q3, eight business areas had met their 2018 target and a further three business areas had already reached the longer term 14% target. |
Outcome of the pre-grant assessment
The Committee also received advice from the Board Risk Committee and the Sustainable Banking Committee in making its final assessment. After considering all the factors above, the Committee determined that good progress had been made with strong performance particularly in relation to capital and people scores. 2018 was seen as a milestone year with a number of important legacy issues resolved, the resumption of dividends and arrangements in place for ring-fencing. Overall, the Committee considered that a 6% reduction was appropriate as customer and risk performance was not fully at the desired level. The resulting award level for the Chief Executive is set out below. As the Chief Financial Officer was appointed from 1 January 2019, the first LTI award will be granted in 2020, following an assessment of performance over 2019.
|
maximum LTI award level |
2019 LTI award level |
Ross McEwan |
£1,750,000 |
£1,650,000 |
Annual Report on Remuneration
Pre-vest assessment for 2019 LTI awards
In addition to the pre-grant assessment detailed on the previous page, a further assessment of performance will take place at the end of three years, prior to vesting. It is intended to be a look-back at the performance year for which the LTI award was granted to consider whether anything has come to light which might call into question the original award. Once the vesting amount has been approved, employment conditions as well as malus and clawback will continue to apply.
The pre-vest assessment allows the Committee to make a balanced assessment of performance in the round rather than relying on formulaic adjustments. Adjustments will be made if there have been failures of risk management and in the event of underperformance.
Factors considered in assessing pre-vest performance
Four core questions will be considered as part of the pre-vest assessment under the themes of Finance; Customers; People; and Risk & Control.
When assessing the performance of the year for which the award was made, knowing what we know now, and taking into account all circumstances, has RBS:
· Remained safe and secure, taking into account our financial results and capital position?
· Been a good bank for customers taking into account our customer and advocacy performance?
· Operated in an environment in which risk is seen as part of the way we work and think?
· Operated in a way that reflects our stated values?
Evidence used to support the Committees assessment of these questions will include whether there has been: a material fall in share price, net promoter scores, employee engagement or culture scores; a breach of minimum capital ratio; or a material deterioration in the risk culture or profile.
In addition, the Committee will consider the potential application of Risk & Control and Stakeholder Perception underpins following advice from the Board Risk Committee and Sustainable Banking Committee. This provides scope to consider significant risk, stakeholder or reputational matters not already captured in the performance assessment. The underpins allow the Committee to consider events arising during the period between grant and the end of year three.
In determining the final vesting level of the award, the Committee will consider both individual and collective performance which means that there may be different vesting levels by participant.
Performance Goals for 2019 (for the pre-grant assessment of LTI awards to be made in 2020)
The table below forms the basis of the pre-grant assessment for LTI awards to be made in early 2020. Further details on the 2019 goals and targets and the assessment of performance against these will be set out in the 2019 Directors Remuneration Report.
Core area |
Performance Goals for 2019 |
Measures for assessing pre-grant performance for 2020 LTI awards |
Financial & Business Delivery |
Run a safe and secure bank.
|
Achieve planned RoTE targets for Group and NatWest Holdings (NWH Ltd).
|
Achieve CET1 ratio targets for Group and NWH Ltd, with appropriate repatriation of capital to the Group.
| ||
Risk & Control |
Improve or maintain control environment.
|
Group and NWH Ltd achievement/maintenance and embedding of desired control environment rating.
|
Compliance with ring-fencing rules.
|
Compliance with the minimum controls for the effective management of compliance with ring-fencing rules.
| |
Material progress towards our desired risk culture target where risk is simply part of the way we work and think.
|
Positive progress on risk culture rating for Group and NWH Ltd with strong tone from the top and effective action plans in place.
| |
Customer & Stakeholder |
Increase customer advocacy for our brands and chosen customer segments.
|
Achievement of targets for brands against Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) rankings and Net Promoter Scores (NPS).
|
Build a strong internal customer service.
|
Achievement of Group and NWH Ltd targets for internal NPS and Core Service Behaviour scores.
| |
People & Culture |
Provide clarity, build capability and
|
Based on employee engagement and leadership scores for Group and NWH Ltd.
|
Build up and strengthen a healthy culture.
|
Based on the Banking Standards Board assessment and achieving the culture target for Group and NWH Ltd.
| |
Improve diversity across our leaders to create a more mature, inclusive culture.
|
Progress on the number of women in senior roles across the top three layers of the Bank.
| |
Progress on the number of BAME/non-white UK employees in the top four layers of RBS.
|
For the Chief Financial Officer, performance will be assessed in line with the framework and measures above and the performance of the Finance function will also be taken into account.
Annual Report on Remuneration
Payments for loss of office (audited)
Ewen Stevenson resigned as Chief Financial Officer on 29 May 2018. He stepped down from the Board on 30 September 2018 and ceased to be an employee of RBS on 30 November 2018. Taking into account a range of business factors, it was agreed that Mr Stevenson could be released early from his 12 month notice period. No payment was made in lieu of notice.
In line with his contractual arrangements, Mr Stevenson continued to receive standard payments in respect of his fixed pay for the period up to his final date of employment. Payments for the period from 30 September to 30 November 2018 comprised salary (£133,333), fixed share allowance (£133,333), pension funding (£46,667) and benefit funding (£4,375), a total of (£317,708) before tax.
No other remuneration payment was made in connection with his departure and all outstanding long-term incentive awards were forfeited on his final date of employment.
Payments to past directors (audited)
Payments made to Ewen Stevenson during the year are set out above and in the total remuneration paid to executive directors table earlier in this report. There are no other payments to past directors to disclose for 2018.
Total remuneration for the Chairman and non-executive directors for 2018
As part of the implementation of ring-fencing arrangements during 2018, a number of additional Boards and Board Committees were established for key legal entities. The increase in governance structures results in additional responsibilities and time commitment, particularly for non-executive directors serving on the Group Board Risk Committee and Group Audit Committee.
Taking into account that fees for these committees had remained unchanged since 2014 and market practice by peers, the Chairman and the executive directors agreed it would be appropriate to raise the fees for the Chairman of the Group Board Risk Committee and Group Audit Committee from £60,000 to £68,000, and for members of the Group Board Risk Committee and Group Audit Committee from £30,000 to £34,000. The changes are within the 15% limit for fee increases under the directors remuneration policy and took effect from 1 October 2018.
For RBSG Board directors who also serve on the boards and committees of NatWest Holdings Limited, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, National Westminster Bank Plc and Ulster Bank Limited, the fees below reflect membership of all five boards and their respective board committees.
Where appropriate, RBSG Board directors also received fees in respect of membership of other subsidiary company boards and committees including NatWest Markets Plc, the value of which is included in the table below. In terms of other changes during the year, the NatWest Markets Working Group was replaced by the NatWest Markets Plc Board from 1 May 2018 and the UBIDAC Board Oversight Committee was stood down at the end of October 2018.
Lena Wilson was appointed as Chair of the Colleague Advisory Panel during 2018. This is considered a key role that will enhance our existing engagement mechanisms and strengthen the colleague voice at Board level. The Panel will also meet the new requirements for workforce engagement under the UK Corporate Governance Code.
After considering the time commitment, number of meetings and responsibilities for this role, including providing regular updates to the Board, it was agreed that fees of £15,000 per annum should be paid to the Chair of the Panel with effect from 1 November 2018. The fees are equivalent to that paid to a member of our Board Oversight Committees.
Total single figure of remuneration for the Chairman and non-executive directors during 2018 (audited) |
|
| |||||||||||||||
|
Fees |
Benefits |
Total | ||||||||||||||
Chairman (composite fee) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2018 |
2017 |
2018 |
2017 |
2018 |
2017 | |
Howard Davies (1) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
750 |
750 |
11 |
11 |
761 |
761 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fees |
Benefits |
Total | |||
Non-executive |
Board |
Group |
GAC |
Group |
Group |
Group |
TIC |
SID |
GRG |
UBI DAC |
Other |
2018 |
2017 |
2018 |
|
2018 |
|
Frank Dangeard (3) |
60 |
|
|
10 |
12 |
|
22 |
|
|
|
148 |
252 |
135 |
4 |
3 |
256 |
138 |
Alison Davis |
80 |
|
|
30 |
|
30 |
60 |
|
|
|
|
200 |
167 |
26 |
30 |
226 |
197 |
Patrick Flynn (4) |
46 |
|
19 |
|
19 |
|
17 |
|
|
|
|
101 |
|
9 |
|
110 |
|
Morten Friis |
80 |
|
31 |
|
31 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
142 |
148 |
50 |
42 |
192 |
190 |
Robert Gillespie |
80 |
15 |
|
60 |
19 |
30 |
|
|
15 |
|
|
219 |
197 |
8 |
11 |
227 |
208 |
Penny Hughes (4) |
33 |
7 |
|
|
12 |
25 |
|
|
6 |
|
|
83 |
187 |
3 |
11 |
86 |
198 |
Yasmin Jetha (4) |
27 |
|
|
|
|
10 |
10 |
|
|
|
|
47 |
65 |
|
2 |
47 |
67 |
Brendan Nelson (3) |
80 |
15 |
62 |
|
31 |
|
|
|
30 |
13 |
53 |
284 |
216 |
31 |
23 |
315 |
239 |
Baroness Noakes |
80 |
15 |
31 |
|
62 |
|
|
|
15 |
13 |
|
216 |
196 |
18 |
16 |
234 |
212 |
Mike Rogers |
80 |
|
|
30 |
|
48 |
|
|
|
|
|
158 |
137 |
12 |
16 |
170 |
153 |
Mark Seligman |
80 |
15 |
|
30 |
|
|
|
30 |
3 |
13 |
|
171 |
68 |
5 |
4 |
176 |
72 |
Lena Wilson (3) |
80 |
|
|
|
|
28 |
17 |
|
|
|
3 |
128 |
|
20 |
|
148 |
|
Notes:
(1) The benefits column for Howard Davies includes private medical cover.
(2) Non-executive directors are reimbursed expenses incurred in connection with travel and attendance at Board meetings. HMRC deems these expenses as taxable where the meetings take place at the companys main offices and RBS settles the tax on behalf of the non-executive directors.
(3) Under the Other column, Frank Dangeard received fees as Chairman of the NatWest Markets Working Group and from 1 October 2018 received a composite fee as Chairman of the NatWest Markets Plc (NWM Plc) Board. Brendan Nelson received fees as a member of the Board and Audit Committee of NWM Plc from the end of April 2018. Lena Wilson joined the Board on 1 January 2018 and received fees as Chair of the Colleague Advisory Panel from 1 November 2018.
(4) Penny Hughes stepped down from the Board on 30 May 2018. Yasmin Jethas fees are until 30 April 2018, the date she stepped down from the RBSG Board but she continues to receive fees as a member of the boards of NatWest Holdings Limited. Patrick Flynn joined the Board on 1 June 2018.
Key to table: |
|
|
|
Group N&G |
Group Nominations and Governance Committee |
TIC |
Technology and Innovation Committee |
GAC |
Group Audit Committee |
SID |
Senior Independent Director |
Group RemCo |
Group Performance and Remuneration Committee |
GRG BOC |
Board Oversight Committee for the GRG business areas |
Group BRC |
Board Risk Committee |
UBI DAC BOC |
Board Oversight Committee for the Ulster Bank Ireland business |
Group SBC |
Sustainable Banking Committee |
|
|
Annual Report on Remuneration
Implementation of remuneration policy in 2019
Details of remuneration to be awarded in 2019 to executive directors are set out below. The salary, benefits, pension and fixed share allowance for the Chief Executive are unchanged from 2018 and arrangements for the Chief Financial Officer are in line with those announced on appointment. The LTI pre-grant assessment has been completed and the Committee recommended to the Board who approved that an LTI award of £1,650,000 would be granted to the Chief Executive in March 2019. Details of the pre-grant assessment are set out on page 83.
Executive directors remuneration to be awarded in 2019
|
Salary |
Standard benefits |
Pension (% of salary) |
Fixed share allowance |
LTI award following pre-grant assessment over 2018 |
Ross McEwan |
£1,000,000 |
£26,250 (2) |
£350,000 (35%) |
£1,000,000 |
£1,650,000 |
Katie Murray |
£750,000 |
£26,250 |
£75,000 (10%) |
£750,000 |
(3) |
Notes:
(1) Fixed share allowance payable broadly in arrears, currently in two instalments per year, with shares released in equal tranches over a three year period.
(2) Amount shown relates to standard benefit funding. Executive directors are also entitled to travel assistance and security arrangements and the Chief Executive receives a flight allowance and assistance with tax returns as part of his relocation arrangements. The value of benefits received will be disclosed each year.
(3) The first LTI award will be made to Katie Murray in her capacity as an executive director in 2020, following a pre-grant assessment of performance over 2019. For performance year 2018, a period prior to appointment to the Board, variable pay will continue to be awarded in line with arrangements in place at that time.
Chairman and non-executive directors annual fees for 2019
Fees for RBSG Board (1) |
Rates from 1 January 2019 | |
Chairman (composite fee) |
|
£750,000 |
Non-executive director basic fee |
|
£80,000 |
Senior Independent Director |
|
£30,000 |
|
|
|
Fees for RBSG Board Committees (1) |
Member |
Chairman |
Group Board Risk Committee |
£34,000 |
£68,000 |
Group Audit Committee |
£34,000 |
£68,000 |
Group Performance and Remuneration Committee |
£30,000 |
£60,000 |
Group Sustainable Banking Committee |
£30,000 |
£60,000 |
Technology and Innovation Committee |
£30,000 |
£60,000 |
GRG Board Oversight Committee |
£15,000 |
£30,000 |
Group Nominations and Governance Committee |
£15,000 |
|
|
|
|
Other fees for RBSG Board directors |
|
|
Chairman of NatWest Markets Plc (composite fee to cover all boards and committees) |
|
£260,000 |
Chairman of the Colleague Advisory Panel |
|
£15,000 |
Note:
(1) No additional fees are payable where the director is also a member of the boards and respective board committees of NatWest Holdings Limited, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, National Westminster Bank Plc and Ulster Bank Limited. Where appropriate, directors receive additional fees in respect of membership of other subsidiary company boards and committees including NatWest Markets Plc. The value of fees received will be disclosed in this report each year.
Other external directorships
Agreement from the Board must be sought before directors accept any additional roles outside of RBS. Procedures are in place to make sure that regulatory limits on the number of directorships held are complied with. The Board would also consider whether it was appropriate for executive directors to retain any remuneration receivable in respect of any external directorships, taking into account the nature of the appointment. Neither of the executive directors hold a non-executive director role at any other company at this time. Details of the directorships held by other directors can be found in the biographies section of the corporate governance report.
Directors interests in RBS shares and shareholding requirements (audited)
The shareholding requirement is to hold shares to the value of 400% of salary for the Chief Executive and 250% of salary for the Chief Financial Officer. Unvested shares from LTI awards count on a net of tax basis towards meeting the shareholding requirement once the pre-vest performance assessment has taken place, at the end of the three year period. Once the respective retention periods have passed, directors can only sell up to 25% of the shares received until the requirement is met. There are no shareholding requirements for non-executive directors.
Annual Report on Remuneration
Shareholding requirements (audited)
Ross McEwan
|
|
Ewen Stevenson (as at 30 September 2018)
|
|
Notes:
(1) Ross McEwan holds 142,925 shares from his 2015 and 2016 fixed share allowances that are included in the shares held below but these have been excluded from the shareholding requirements calculation as he will transfer these shares to charity at the end of the retention period.
(2) Value is based on the share price of £2.17 as at 31 December 2018 for Ross McEwan and £2.50 as at 30 September 2018 for Ewen Stevenson, the date he stepped down from the Board. In both cases the shareholding requirement was exceeded. During the year the share price ranged from £2.03 to £3.02.
Share interests held by directors (audited)
|
Ross |
Ewen |
Howard |
Frank |
Alison |
Patrick |
Morten |
Robert |
Penny |
Yasmin |
Brendan |
Baroness |
Mike |
Mark |
Lena |
Shares held (1) |
2,302,031 |
1,182,272 |
80,000 |
5,000 |
20,000 |
|
20,000 |
25,000 |
562 |
20,000 |
12,001 |
41,000 |
20,000 |
20,000 |
6,000 |
% of issued share capital |
0.0191 |
0.0098 |
0.0007 |
|
0.0002 |
|
0.0002 |
0.0002 |
|
0.0002 |
0.0001 |
0.0003 |
0.0002 |
0.0002 |
|
LTI awards subject to service (2) |
371,098 |
513,890 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
LTI awards subject to performance (3) |
2,968,335 |
2,448,749 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes:
(1) Shares owned beneficially as at 31 December 2018 or date of stepping down from the Board if earlier. The interests shown above include shares held by persons closely associated with the directors. As at 14 February 2019, there were no changes to the shares held shown above. Katie Murray joined the Board on 1 January 2019 and held 34,282 shares as at 14 February 2019.
(2) Performance assessment has taken place but awards are still subject to deferral periods and employment conditions before vesting. These awards count on a net of tax basis towards meeting the shareholding requirement. In Ewen Stevensons case, the award was forfeited on his final date of employment.
(3) Still subject to performance assessment. All LTI awards held by Ewen Stevenson were forfeited on 30 November 2018, his final date of employment.
(4) Interest is 10,000 American Depositary Receipts representing 20,000 ordinary shares.
Breakdown of all shares and share interests held by the Chief Executive as at 31 December 2018
Shares owned outright |
Shares subject to conditions |
Total | |||
shares purchased |
shares from vested |
shares from fixed share |
unvested LTI award from 2015 - |
unvested LTI awards from 2016 |
the vesting dates for |
299,458 |
1,442,951 |
559,622 |
371,098 |
2,968,335 |
5,641,464 |
Directors interests under the companys share plans (audited)
Long-term incentive awards
|
Year of award |
Awards held at |
Awards |
Award price |
Awards lapsed |
Awards |
Awards held at |
|
Expected vesting dates |
Ross McEwan |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2015 |
417,486 |
|
3.74 |
46,388 |
|
371,098 |
(1) |
06.03.19 06.03.20 |
|
2016 |
1,187,207 |
|
2.26 |
|
|
1,187,207 |
(2) |
08.03.20 08.03.21 |
|
2017 |
1,188,800 |
|
2.41 |
|
|
1,188,800 |
|
07.03.21 07.03.24 |
|
2018 |
|
592,328 |
2.66 |
|
|
592,328 |
|
07.03.21 07.03.25 |
|
|
2,793,493 |
592,328 |
|
46,388 |
|
3,339,433 |
|
|
Ewen Stevenson (3) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2015 |
578,128 |
|
3.74 |
64,238 |
513,890 |
|
|
|
|
2016 |
952,424 |
|
2.26 |
|
952,424 |
|
|
|
|
2017 |
954,768 |
|
2.41 |
|
954,768 |
|
|
|
|
2018 |
|
541,557 |
2.66 |
|
541,557 |
|
|
|
|
|
2,485,320 |
541,557 |
|
64,238 |
2,962,639 |
|
|
|
Notes:
(1) The performance period ended on 31 December 2017 resulting in the lapse of 46,388 shares due to the performance conditions not being met in full. The remaining 371,098 shares will vest in two equal amounts in 2019 and 2020, subject to continued employment conditions.
(2) The performance period ended on 31 December 2018 as set out earlier in this report. Following the assessment in January 2019, it was agreed that 487,285 shares would vest in 2020 and 2021, subject to continued employment conditions. The remaining shares will be lapsed and reflected in the 2019 report.
(3) Ewen Stevenson ceased to be an employee on 30 November 2018, at which point all outstanding awards were forfeited.
Annual Report on Remuneration
Total Shareholder Return (TSR) performance
The graph below shows the performance of RBS over the past ten years in terms of TSR compared with that of the companies comprising the FTSE 100 Index. This index has been selected because it represents a cross-section of leading UK companies. The TSR for FTSE UK banks for the same period has been added for comparison. Source: Datastream
Chief Executive pay over the same period
|
|
2009 |
|
2010 |
|
2011 |
|
2012 |
|
2013 (1) |
|
2014 |
|
2015 |
|
2016 |
|
2017 |
|
2018 |
Total remuneration (£000s) (1) |
|
1,647 |
|
3,687 |
|
1,646 |
|
1,646 |
|
1,235 (SH) |
|
1,878 |
|
3,492 |
|
3,702 |
|
3,487 |
|
3,578 |
Annual bonus against max. opportunity |
|
0% |
|
85% |
|
0% |
|
0% |
|
0% |
|
n/a |
|
n/a |
|
n/a |
|
n/a |
|
n/a |
LTI vesting rates against max. opportunity (2) |
|
0% |
|
0% |
|
0% |
|
0% |
|
0% |
|
73% |
|
62% |
|
56% |
|
89% |
|
41% |
Notes:
(1) 2013 remuneration includes Stephen Hester (SH) as Chief Executive for the period to 30 September and Ross McEwan (RM) for October to December 2013.
(2) The maximum opportunity is set according to the approved policy and, for LTI awards granted in 2015 and onwards, the regulatory cap.
Relative importance of spend on pay
The table below shows a comparison of remuneration expenditure against other distributions and charges. These items have been included as they reflect the key stakeholders for RBS and the major categories of distributions and charges made by RBS.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
Change |
Remuneration paid to all employees (1) |
|
3,628 |
|
3,945 |
|
(8.0%) |
Distributions to holders of ordinary shares (2) |
|
241 |
|
|
|
|
Distributions to holders of preference shares and paid-in equity |
|
470 |
|
628 |
|
(25.2%) |
Taxation and other charges recognised in the income statement: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Social security, Bank levy and Corporation tax |
|
1,062 |
|
1,100 |
|
(3.5%) |
- Irrecoverable VAT and other indirect taxes incurred by RBS (3) |
|
616 |
|
533 |
|
15.6% |
Notes:
(1) Remuneration paid to all employees represents total staff expenses per Note 3 to the Financial Statements, exclusive of social security and other staff costs. As the contents of other staff costs per Note 3 is different to prior years, the 2017 balance has been re-presented for consistency.
(2) In 2018 RBS paid an interim dividend of 2.0p per ordinary share. In addition, the company announced that the directors have recommended a final dividend of 3.5p per ordinary share, and a further special dividend of 7.5p per ordinary share, which are both subject to shareholders approval at the Annual General Meeting on 25 April 2019.
(3) Input VAT and other indirect taxes not recoverable by RBS due to it being partially exempt.
Annual Report on Remuneration
Change in Chief Executive pay compared with employees
The table below shows the percentage change in remuneration for the Chief Executive between 2017 and 2018 compared with the percentage change in the average remuneration of RBS employees based in the UK. In each case, remuneration is based on salary, benefits and annual bonus. The Chief Executive also receives a fixed share allowance as part of his fixed pay and this remained unchanged over the period.
|
|
Salary |
|
Benefits |
|
Annual Bonus |
|
|
2017 to 2018 change |
|
2017 to 2018 change |
|
2017 to 2018 change |
Chief Executive (1) |
|
0% |
|
0% |
|
n/a |
UK employees (2) |
|
17% |
|
-51% |
|
8% |
Notes:
(1) Executive directors are not eligible for an annual bonus but receive variable pay in LTI awards. Standard benefit funding for executive directors remained unchanged between 2017 and 2018. The benefits for the Chief Executive excludes other benefits such as travel assistance in connection with company business and relocation benefits, the value of which is disclosed each year in the total remuneration table.
(2) The data represents full year average salary costs of the UK based employee population. This is considered to be the most representative comparator group as it covers the majority of employees and the Chief Executive is based in the UK. The changes in salary and benefits for employees have largely been driven by a simplification and rebalancing of fixed pay arrangements. There was no material change to total remuneration as a result of these changes. The percentage reduction in benefits is not equal to the percentage uplift in salary because the underlying values are different and salary makes up a larger proportion of total remuneration.
CEO to employee pay ratios
We are including the table below ahead of new reporting requirements formally applying next year. The ratios compare the total remuneration of the Chief Executive, as set out in this report, against the remuneration of the median UK employee as well as employees at the lower and upper quartiles. The disclosure will build up over time to cover a rolling 10-year period.
A significant proportion of the Chief Executives pay is delivered in LTI awards, where awards are linked to the companys performance and share price movements over the longer-term. Therefore, the ratios will depend significantly on LTI outcomes and may fluctuate from one year to the next. None of the three employees identified at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentiles this year received LTI awards. The table also includes ratios covering salary only so that a further comparison is possible as well as the remuneration values for the identified employees. The steps that RBS takes to ensure employees are paid fairly are set out earlier in this report.
|
|
Pay ratios |
Remuneration values | ||||||||||||||
Financial Year |
|
Methodology |
|
P25 |
|
P50 |
|
P75 |
Calculation |
|
Chief |
|
Y25 |
|
Y50 |
|
Y75 |
2018 |
|
A (see notes) |
|
143:1 |
|
97:1 |
|
56:1 |
total remuneration |
|
£3,577,649 |
|
£24,946 |
|
£36,727 |
|
£63,825 |
|
salary only |
|
44:1 |
|
30:1 |
|
19:1 |
salary only |
|
£1,000,000 |
|
£22,526 |
|
£33,146 |
|
£51,302 |
Notes:
(1) The employees at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentiles (lower, median and upper quartile) were determined as at 31 December 2018 based on full-time equivalent remuneration for all UK employees other than for variable pay where the actual amount to be paid has been used.
(2) Option A methodology was selected as this is considered the most statistically accurate method under the reporting regulations. UK employees receive a pension funding allowance set as a percentage of salary. Some employees, but not the Chief Executive, continue to participate in the defined benefit pension scheme, under which it would be possible to recognise a higher value. For simplicity and consistency with our regulatory disclosures, the pension funding allowance value has been included in the calculation for all employees.
(3) The data for the three individuals identified has been considered and fairly reflects pay at the relevant quartiles amongst the UK employee population. Each of the three individuals was a full-time employee during the year and none received an exceptional award which would otherwise inflate their pay figures.
Summary of remuneration levels for employees in 2018
49,875 employees earned total remuneration up to £50,000 |
11,508 employees earned total remuneration between £50,000 and £100,000 |
4,924 employees earned total remuneration between £100,000 and £250,000 |
932 employees earned total remuneration over £250,000 |
Remuneration of the eight highest paid senior executives below Board (1)
|
|
Executive 1 |
|
Executive 2 |
|
Executive 3 |
|
Executive 4 |
|
Executive 5 |
|
Executive 6 |
|
Executive 7 |
|
Executive 8 |
|
|
£000 |
|
£000 |
|
£000 |
|
£000 |
|
£000 |
|
£000 |
|
£000 |
|
£000 |
Salary |
|
800 |
|
800 |
|
141 |
|
792 |
|
650 |
|
600 |
|
450 |
|
444 |
Fixed allowance (cash) |
|
475 |
|
400 |
|
71 |
|
396 |
|
325 |
|
300 |
|
113 |
|
111 |
Fixed allowance (shares) |
|
475 |
|
400 |
|
71 |
|
396 |
|
325 |
|
300 |
|
113 |
|
111 |
Annual bonus |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
LTI awards (2) |
|
714 |
|
714 |
|
|
|
460 |
|
460 |
|
410 |
|
246 |
|
47 |
Buyout award (3) |
|
|
|
|
|
1,962 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total remuneration |
|
2,464 |
|
2,314 |
|
2,245 |
|
2,044 |
|
1,760 |
|
1,610 |
|
922 |
|
713 |
Notes:
(1) Remuneration for 2018 for eight members of the Chief Executives executive management team.
(2) The value of the LTI awards reflects awards that were granted in 2016 and performance-assessed at the end of 2018. An estimated value is shown above based on the average share price between October and December 2018, consistent with the method used for executive directors in this report.
(3) The buyout includes awards granted in replacement of awards forfeited on leaving a previous employer and also an award in respect of lost variable pay opportunity for 2018.
Annual Report on Remuneration
Consideration of matters relating to directors remuneration
Membership of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee
All members of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee (the Committee) are independent non-executive directors. Robert Gillespie served as Chairman of the Committee and Alison Davis, Mike Rogers and Mark Seligman were members of the Committee throughout 2018. Frank Dangeard joined the Committee with effect from 1 June 2018.
The Committee held seven scheduled meetings in 2018 and a further four ad hoc meetings. Details of attendance can be found in the Our Board section of the governance report.
The role and responsibilities of the Committee
The Committee is responsible for:
· approving the remuneration policy for all employees and reviewing the effectiveness of its implementation;
· reviewing performance and making recommendations to the Board on arrangements for executive directors;
· approving performance and remuneration arrangements for a defined in scope population capturing members and attendees of the Group Executive Committee, and the direct reports of the Chief Executive including heads of key legal entities, control function heads and the company secretary. The Committee also approves arrangements where employees earn total compensation which exceeds an amount determined by the Committee, currently £1 million; and
· setting the remuneration framework and principles for employees identified as Material Risk Takers falling within the scope of UK regulatory requirements.
In mitigating potential conflicts of interest, directors are not involved in decisions regarding their own remuneration and remuneration advisers are appointed by the Committee rather than management.
The terms of reference of the Committee are reviewed annually and available on rbs.com.
Summary of the principal activity of the Committee in 2018
The tasks that the Committee undertook during the year included reviewing and, where appropriate, approving:
First half of 2018
· 2017 performance reviews and remuneration arrangements for the Committees in scope population.
· 2018 performance objectives for the in scope population.
· Variable pay allocations and the 2017 Directors Remuneration Report.
· Vesting levels for LTI awards granted in 2015 and the interim assessment of 2016/17 LTI awards.
· Remuneration governance arrangements for ring-fencing.
· Regulatory updates and submissions.
· Fixed and variable pay spend across all RBS employees, including analysis by employee level, geography and diversity.
· The Group-wide remuneration policy principles.
· Service provided by external advisers.
· The bonus pool methodology.
Second half of 2018
· Half-year and year-end performance reviews for the in scope population.
· The implications of the UK Corporate Governance Code changes and new pay ratio disclosures.
· Year end planning and external stakeholder engagement plan.
· Managements assurance of the implementation of the Group-wide remuneration policy.
· Fixed pay proposals across RBS for the annual cycle.
· The 2018 employee Sharesave offer.
· The draft Directors Remuneration Report for 2018.
· 2018 variable pay proposals.
Performance evaluation
The Committee has considered the findings of the annual review of the effectiveness of the Committee. This year the evaluation process was conducted externally by Independent Board Evaluation.
The Committee was felt to be fulfilling its remit in an effective way and is trusted by the Group Board to handle this potentially sensitive issue well. The Committee was encouraged to take a broad view of its agenda and to communicate as freely as possible with the Board so that remuneration decisions are seen to be taken in a strategic context. Actions were agreed as part of the evaluation and progress will be tracked and reported to the Committee during 2019.
Advisers to the Committee
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) was first appointed as remuneration adviser by the Committee in 2010, following a review of potential advisers and the services provided. An annual review of the quality of advice and the associated level of fees was undertaken during 2018, following which the Committee agreed to retain the services of PwC. The Committee will continue to review the performance of its advisers each year. PwC is a signatory to the voluntary code of conduct in relation to remuneration consulting in the UK.
As well as receiving advice from PwC, the Committee took account at meetings of the views of the Chairman; the Chief Executive; the Chief Financial Officer; the Chief HR Officer; the Director of Reward, Pension & Benefits; the Company Secretary; and the Chief Risk Officer. The Committee also received input from the Board Risk Committee, the Group Audit Committee and the Sustainable Banking Committee.
PwC also provides professional services in the ordinary course of business including assurance, advisory, tax and legal advice to RBS subsidiaries. There are processes in place to ensure the advice received by the Committee is independent of any support provided to management.
In relation to the fees paid to PwC for advising the Committee, a fixed fee structure has operated since October 2017 to cover standard services with any exceptional items charged on a time/cost basis. The fees for 2018 in relation to directors remuneration amounted to £128,625 excluding VAT (2017 - £170,476).
Statement of shareholder voting
The tables below set out the voting by shareholders on the resolutions to approve the Directors Remuneration Policy at the 2017 AGM and the Annual Report on Remuneration at the 2018 AGM.
Directors Remuneration Policy 2017
Vote |
|
No of shares |
|
Percentage |
For |
|
42,143,861,332 |
|
96.33% |
Against |
|
1,603,968,780 |
|
3.67% |
Withheld |
|
40,411,396 |
|
|
Annual Report on Remuneration 2018
Vote |
|
No of shares |
|
Percentage |
For |
|
44,384,841,256 |
|
99.18% |
Against |
|
366,523,976 |
|
0.82% |
Withheld |
|
38,493,640 |
|
|
Shareholder dilution
The company meets its employee share plan obligations through a combination of new issue shares and market purchase shares. In line with the Investment Associations Principles of Remuneration, RBSs employee share plans contain monitored limits that govern the number of shares that may be issued to satisfy share plan awards.
Robert Gillespie
Chairman of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee
14 February 2019
Other Remuneration Disclosures
This section contains a number of disclosures which are required in accordance with Article 450 of the Capital Requirements Regulation. This section should be read in conjunction with the Directors Remuneration Report starting on page 74.
Remuneration policy for all employees
The remuneration policy supports the business strategy and is designed to promote the long-term success of RBS. It aims to reward employees for delivering good performance provided this is achieved in a manner consistent with RBS values and within acceptable risk parameters. The remuneration policy applies the same principles to all employees, including Material Risk Takers (MRTs), with some minor adjustments to the policy where necessary to comply with local regulatory requirements. The key elements of the policy are set out below.
Base salary
The purpose is to provide a competitive level of fixed cash remuneration.
Operation
Base salaries are reviewed annually and should reflect the talents, skills and competencies that the individual brings to the business.
Role-based allowance
The purpose is to provide fixed pay that reflects the skills and experience required for the role.
Operation
Role-based allowances are fixed allowances which form an element of the employees overall fixed remuneration for regulatory purposes and are based on the role the individual performs.
They are delivered in cash and/or shares depending on the level of the allowance and the seniority of the recipient. Shares are subject to an appropriate retention period, not less than six months.
Benefits and pension
The purpose is to provide a range of flexible and competitive benefits.
Operation
In most jurisdictions, employee benefits or a cash equivalent are provided from a flexible benefits account.
Pension funding forms part of fixed remuneration and RBS does not as a rule award discretionary pension benefits.
Annual bonus
The purpose is to support a culture where employees recognise the importance of serving customers well and are rewarded for superior performance.
Operation
The annual bonus pool is based on a balanced scorecard of measures including Customer, People, Financial & Business Delivery, and Risk & Control measures. Allocation from the pool depends on performance of the franchise or function and the individual.
Individual performance assessment is supported by a structured performance management framework. This is designed to assess performance against longer term business requirements across a range of financial and non-financial metrics as well as an evaluation of adherence to internal controls and risk management. A balanced scorecard is used to align with the business strategy. Each individual will have defined measures of success appropriate to their role.
Risk and conduct performance is also taken into account. Control functions are assessed independently of the business units that they oversee, with the objectives and remuneration being set according to the priorities of the control area, not the targets of the businesses they support. The Group Chief Risk Officer and the Chief Audit Executive have the authority to escalate matters to Board level if management do not respond appropriately.
Independent control functions exist for key legal entities outside the ring-fence (NatWest Markets Plc and RBS International), with dual solid reporting lines into both the legal entity Chief Executive Officer and the Group Control Function Head.
For awards made in respect of the 2018 performance year, immediate cash awards continue to be limited to a maximum of £2,000. In line with regulatory requirements, a significant proportion of annual bonus awards for our more senior employees is deferred and includes partial delivery in shares.
The deferral period varies from three years for standard MRTs, rising to five years for individuals identified as Risk Manager MRTs and seven years for Senior Managers under the UKs Senior Managers Regime. All awards are subject to malus and clawback provisions. For MRTs, a minimum of 50% of any annual bonus is delivered in shares and a twelve month retention period will apply post vesting in line with regulatory requirements
Long-term incentive awards
The purpose is to: support a culture where good performance against a full range of measures will be rewarded; encourage the creation of value over the long-term; and align rewards with the returns to shareholders.
Operation
RBS provides certain employees in senior roles with long-term incentive awards. For awards made in respect of the 2018 performance year, the population receiving long-term incentive awards will be limited to executive directors and certain members of the Groups senior executive committees.
Awards will be subject to pre-grant and pre-vest performance assessments that consider progress against Customer, People, Financial & Business Delivery, and Risk & Control measures, aligned with RBSs strategic aims. Vesting will take place over a three to seven year period following grant.
The number of shares that vest under the award may vary between 0% -100% depending on the performance achieved. Awards are subject to malus and clawback provisions and a twelve month retention period applies post vesting.
Shareholding requirements
The requirements promote long-term alignment between senior executives and shareholders.
Operation
Executive directors and certain senior executives are required to build up and hold a shareholding equivalent to a percentage of salary. There is a restriction on the number of shares that individuals can sell until the requirement is met.
Other share plans
The purpose is to offer employees in certain jurisdictions the opportunity to acquire shares.
Operation
Employees in certain countries are eligible to contribute to share plans which are not subject to performance conditions.
Other Remuneration Disclosures
Criteria for identifying MRTs
The European Banking Authority has issued criteria for identifying MRT roles, those staff whose activities have a material influence over RBSs performance or risk profile. The criteria are both qualitative (based on the nature of the role) and quantitative (for example those who exceed the stipulated total remuneration threshold).
The qualitative criteria can be summarised as: staff within the management body; senior management; other staff with key functional or managerial responsibilities; and staff who individually, or as part of a Committee, have authority to approve new business products or to commit to credit risk exposures and market risk transactions above certain levels. The quantitative criteria are: individuals earning 500,000 or more in the previous year; individuals in the top 0.3% of earners in the previous year; and individuals who earned more than the lowest paid identified staff per certain qualitative criteria. In addition to the qualitative and quantitative criteria, RBS has applied its own minimum standards to identify roles that are considered to have a material influence over its risk profile.
Personal hedging strategies
In accordance with UK regulatory requirements and internal dealing rules that apply to employees, the conditions attached to discretionary share-based awards prohibit the use of any personal hedging strategies to lessen the impact of a reduction in value of such awards. These conditions are explicitly acknowledged and accepted by employees when any share-based awards are granted.
Risk in our remuneration process
RBSs approach to remuneration and related policies promotes effective risk management through a clear distinction between fixed remuneration, which reflects the role undertaken by an individual, and variable remuneration, which is directly linked and reflective of performance and can be risk-adjusted. Fixed pay is set at an appropriate level to avoid incentives that are adverse to sound risk management, and at a level which would allow RBS to pay zero variable pay.
Focus on risk is achieved through clear risk input into objectives, performance reviews, the determination of variable pay pools, and incentive plan design as well as the application of malus and clawback. The Committee is supported by the Group Board Risk Committee (BRC) and the RBS Risk function.
A robust process is used to assess risk performance. A range of measures are considered, specifically capital, liquidity and funding risk, credit risk, market risk, pension risk, compliance & conduct risk, financial crime, operational risk, business risk and reputational risk. Consideration is also given to overall risk culture. RBSs remuneration arrangements are in accordance with regulatory requirements and the steps we take to ensure appropriate and thorough risk adjustment are also fully disclosed and discussed with the PRA and the FCA.
Variable pay determination
For the 2018 performance year, RBS operated a robust multi-step process, which is control function led, to assess performance and the appropriate bonus pool by franchise and function. At multiple points throughout the process, reference is made to Group-wide business performance (from both affordability and appropriateness perspectives) and the need to distinguish between go-forward and resolution activities.
The process considers a balanced scorecard of performance assessments at the level of each franchise or function, across financial, customer and people measures. Risk and conduct assessments at the same level are then undertaken to ensure that performance achieved without appropriate consideration of risk, risk culture and conduct controls, is not inappropriately rewarded.
BRC reviews any material risk and conduct events and, if appropriate, an underpin may be applied to the individual business and function bonus pools or to the overall bonus pool. BRC may recommend a reduction of a bonus pool if it considers that risk and conduct performance is unacceptable or that the impact of poor risk management has yet to be fully reflected in the respective inputs.
Following further review against overall performance and conduct, the Chief Executive will make a final recommendation to the Committee, informed by all the previous steps in the process and his strategic view of the business. The Committee will then make an independent decision on the final bonus pool taking all of these earlier steps into account.
The assessment process for LTI awards to executive directors and other recipients is founded on the balanced scorecard approach used for the multi-step bonus pool process, reflecting a consistent risk management performance assessment.
Remuneration and culture
RBS continues to assess conduct and its impact on remuneration as part of the annual Group-wide bonus pool process and also via the accountability review framework. RBS has continued to simplify its approach to reward and removed incentives for employees where this could drive unintended behaviours. The Committee will continue to review workforce remuneration and the alignment of incentives and reward with culture.
The governance of culture is clearly laid out with Senior Management Function roles having clearly defined accountabilities. The Board and Sustainable Banking Committee also play key roles in building our cultural priorities. Clear measurement frameworks are in place to measure progress.
Accountability review process and malus/clawback
The accountability review process was introduced in 2012 to identify any material risk management, control and general policy breach failures, and to ensure accountability for those events. This allows RBS to respond in instances where new information would change the variable pay decisions made in previous years and/or the decisions to be made in the current year.
Under the accountability review process RBS can apply:
· Malus - to reduce (to zero if appropriate) the amount of any unvested variable pay awards prior to payment;
· Clawback - to recover awards that have already vested; and
· In-year bonus reductions - to adjust variable pay that would have otherwise been awarded for the current year.
Any variable pay awarded to MRTs from 1 January 2015 onwards is subject to clawback for seven years from the date of grant. For awards made in respect of the 2016 performance year onwards, this period has been extended to ten years for executive directors and other Senior Managers under the Senior Managers Regime where there are outstanding internal or regulatory investigations at the end of the normal seven year clawback period.
Circumstances in which RBS may apply malus, clawback or in-year bonus reduction include:
· the individual being culpable, responsible or ultimately accountable for conduct which results in significant financial losses for RBS;
· the individual failing to meet appropriate standards of fitness and propriety;
· reasonable evidence of an individuals misbehaviour or material error;
· RBS or the individuals relevant business unit suffering a material failure of risk management; and
· for malus and in-year bonus reduction only, circumstances where there has been a material downturn in financial performance.
The above list of circumstances is not exhaustive and RBS may consider any further circumstances that it feels appropriate.
During 2018 a number of issues and events were considered under the accountability review framework. The outcomes covered a range of actions including: reduction and forfeiture of unvested awards through malus; dismissal with forfeiture of unvested awards; and suspension of awards pending further investigation.
Other Remuneration Disclosures
Remuneration of MRTs
The quantitative disclosures below are made in accordance with Article 450 of the EU Capital Requirements Regulation in relation to 588 employees who have been identified as MRTs.
1. Number of MRTs by business area
Number of beneficiaries |
|
Senior |
|
Other |
|
Total |
Executive Directors |
|
2 |
|
|
|
2 |
Non-Executive Directors |
|
|
|
13 |
|
13 |
PBB |
|
1 |
|
55 |
|
56 |
CPB |
|
1 |
|
75 |
|
76 |
RBSI |
|
1 |
|
23 |
|
24 |
NatWest Markets |
|
1 |
|
228 |
|
229 |
Corporate Functions |
|
7 |
|
136 |
|
143 |
Control Functions |
|
0 |
|
15 |
|
15 |
Other Business Areas |
|
1 |
|
29 |
|
30 |
Total |
|
14 |
|
574 |
|
588 |
2. Aggregate remuneration expenditure
Aggregate remuneration expenditure in respect of 2018 performance was as follows:
Aggregate remuneration |
|
Senior |
|
Other |
|
Total |
Number of beneficiaries |
|
14 |
|
574 |
|
588 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Executive Directors |
|
5.77 |
|
|
|
5.77 |
Non-Executive Directors |
|
|
|
2.95 |
|
2.95 |
PBB |
|
2.54 |
|
18.82 |
|
21.36 |
CPB |
|
3.39 |
|
33.24 |
|
36.63 |
RBSI |
|
1.22 |
|
5.08 |
|
6.30 |
NatWest Markets |
|
3.56 |
|
152.36 |
|
155.92 |
Corporate Functions |
|
12.01 |
|
48.18 |
|
60.19 |
Control Functions |
|
|
|
4.81 |
|
4.81 |
Other Business Areas |
|
2.65 |
|
14.66 |
|
17.31 |
Total |
|
31.14 |
|
280.10 |
|
311.24 |
3. Amounts and form of fixed and variable remuneration
Fixed remuneration consisted of salaries, allowances, pension and benefit funding.
Fixed remuneration |
|
Senior |
|
Other |
|
Total |
Number of beneficiaries |
|
14 |
|
574 |
|
588 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Executive Directors |
|
4.12 |
|
|
|
4.12 |
Non-Executive Directors |
|
|
|
2.95 |
|
2.95 |
PBB |
|
1.44 |
|
13.27 |
|
14.71 |
CPB |
|
1.89 |
|
20.52 |
|
22.41 |
RBSI |
|
0.66 |
|
3.63 |
|
4.29 |
NatWest Markets |
|
2.06 |
|
96.29 |
|
98.35 |
Corporate Functions |
|
6.94 |
|
32.35 |
|
39.29 |
Control Functions |
|
|
|
3.26 |
|
3.26 |
Other Business Areas |
|
1.55 |
|
10.13 |
|
11.68 |
Total |
|
18.66 |
|
182.40 |
|
201.06 |
Variable remuneration awarded for 2018 performance
Variable remuneration consisted of a combination of annual bonus and long-term incentive awards, deferred over a three to seven year period in accordance with regulatory requirements. Under the RBS bonus deferral structure, immediate cash awards are limited to £2,000 per employee.
Long-term incentive awards vest subject to the extent to which performance conditions are met and can result in zero payment.
Annual bonus |
|
Senior |
|
Other |
|
Total |
Number of beneficiaries |
|
3 |
|
469 |
|
472 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Executive Directors |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Non-Executive Directors |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PBB |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash remuneration |
|
|
|
0.09 |
|
0.09 |
Deferred bonds |
|
|
|
1.90 |
|
1.90 |
Deferred shares |
|
|
|
3.56 |
|
3.56 |
|
|
|
|
5.55 |
|
5.55 |
CPB |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash remuneration |
|
|
|
0.11 |
|
0.11 |
Deferred bonds |
|
|
|
2.78 |
|
2.78 |
Deferred shares |
|
|
|
9.83 |
|
9.83 |
|
|
|
|
12.72 |
|
12.72 |
RBSI |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash remuneration |
|
|
|
0.05 |
|
0.05 |
Deferred bonds |
|
0.06 |
|
0.79 |
|
0.85 |
Deferred shares |
|
0.50 |
|
0.62 |
|
1.12 |
|
|
0.56 |
|
1.46 |
|
2.02 |
NatWest Markets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash remuneration |
|
|
|
0.39 |
|
0.39 |
Deferred bonds |
|
|
|
9.65 |
|
9.65 |
Deferred shares |
|
|
|
46.03 |
|
46.03 |
|
|
|
|
56.07 |
|
56.07 |
Corporate Functions |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash remuneration |
|
|
|
0.24 |
|
0.24 |
Deferred bonds |
|
0.06 |
|
5.36 |
|
5.42 |
Deferred shares |
|
1.44 |
|
10.23 |
|
11.67 |
|
|
1.50 |
|
15.83 |
|
17.33 |
Control Functions |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash remuneration |
|
|
|
0.02 |
|
0.02 |
Deferred bonds |
|
|
|
0.45 |
|
0.45 |
Deferred shares |
|
|
|
1.08 |
|
1.08 |
|
|
|
|
1.55 |
|
1.55 |
Other Business Areas |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash remuneration |
|
|
|
0.05 |
|
0.05 |
Deferred bonds |
|
|
|
1.18 |
|
1.18 |
Deferred shares |
|
|
|
3.30 |
|
3.30 |
|
|
|
|
4.53 |
|
4.53 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total |
|
2.06 |
|
97.71 |
|
99.77 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Long-term incentives |
|
Senior |
|
Other |
|
Total |
Number of beneficiaries |
|
9 |
|
|
|
9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Executive Directors |
|
1.65 |
|
|
|
1.65 |
Non-Executive Directors |
|
|
|
|
|
|
PBB |
|
1.10 |
|
|
|
1.10 |
CPB |
|
1.50 |
|
|
|
1.50 |
RBSI |
|
|
|
|
|
|
NatWest Markets |
|
1.50 |
|
|
|
1.50 |
Corporate Functions |
|
3.58 |
|
|
|
3.58 |
Control Functions |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other Business Areas |
|
1.10 |
|
|
|
1.10 |
Total |
|
10.43 |
|
|
|
10.43 |
4. Outstanding deferred remuneration through 2018
The table below includes deferred remuneration awarded or paid out in 2018 in respect of prior performance years. Deferred remuneration reduced during the year relates to long-term incentives lapsed when performance conditions are not met, long-term incentives and deferred awards forfeited on leaving and malus adjustments of prior year deferred awards and long-term incentives.
Category of deferred |
|
Senior |
|
Other |
|
Total |
Unvested from prior year |
|
44.59 |
|
137.10 |
|
181.69 |
Awarded during year |
|
11.73 |
|
108.16 |
|
119.89 |
Paid out |
|
1.76 |
|
81.99 |
|
83.75 |
Reduced from prior years |
|
14.39 |
|
14.77 |
|
29.16 |
Unvested at year end |
|
40.17 |
|
148.51 |
|
188.68 |
5. Guaranteed Awards (including Sign-on awards) and Severance Payments
RBS does not offer Sign-on awards. Guaranteed awards may only be granted to new hires in exceptional circumstances in compensation for awards foregone in their previous company and are limited to the first year of service. Three new hire guarantees were made in respect of the 2018 performance year.
Severance payments and / or arrangements can be made to employees who leave RBS in certain situations, including redundancy. Such payments are calculated by a pre-determined formula set out within the relevant social plans, policies, agreements or local laws. Where local laws permit, there is a cap on the maximum amount that can be awarded.
No severance payments were made during the year in excess of contractual payments, local policies, standards or statutory amounts, other than payments to three individuals of £215,869, £81,923 and 502,877 each made in commercial settlement of potential legal proceedings related to the termination of employment.
Where required, remuneration is constrained within the limit of variable to fixed remuneration in accordance with EBA rules.
Definitions
PBB Personal & Business Banking
CPB Commercial & Private Banking
RBSI RBS International
Other Remuneration Disclosures
6. Ratio between fixed and variable remuneration
The variable component of total remuneration for MRTs at RBS shall not exceed 100% of the fixed component. The average ratio between fixed and variable remuneration for 2018 is approximately 1 to 0.62. The majority of MRTs are based in the UK.
Ratio of fixed to variable |
|
Senior |
|
Other |
|
Total |
Number of beneficiaries |
|
12 |
|
469 |
|
481 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ratio |
|
ratio |
|
ratio |
Executive Directors |
|
1:0.69 |
|
|
|
1:0.69 |
Non-Executive Directors |
|
|
|
1:0 |
|
1:0 |
PBB |
|
1:0.77 |
|
1:0.47 |
|
1:0.50 |
CPB |
|
1:0.80 |
|
1:0.69 |
|
1:0.70 |
RBSI |
|
1:0.85 |
|
1:0.42 |
|
1:0.49 |
NatWest Markets |
|
1:0.73 |
|
1:0.65 |
|
1:0.65 |
Corporate Functions |
|
1:0.89 |
|
1:0.53 |
|
1:0.58 |
Control Functions |
|
1:0 |
|
1:0.52 |
|
1:0.52 |
Other Business Areas |
|
1:0.71 |
|
1:0.52 |
|
1:0.65 |
Consolidated |
|
1:0.80 |
|
1:0.60 |
|
1:0.62 |
7. Discount Rate
Under CRD IV regulations, a notional discount is available which allows variable pay to be awarded at a level that would otherwise exceed the 1:1 ratio, provided that at least 25% of variable pay is delivered in instruments (shares) and deferred over five years or more. The discount rate was not used for remuneration awarded in respect of the 2018 performance year.
Total remuneration by band for all employees earning >1 million
million |
|
Number of employees |
1.0 - 1.5 |
|
45 |
1.5 - 2.0 |
|
23 |
2.0 - 2.5 |
|
5 |
2.5 - 3.0 |
|
2 |
3.0 - 3.5 |
|
1 |
3.5 - 4.0 |
|
0 |
4.0 - 4.5 |
|
1 |
4.5 - 5.0 |
|
1 |
Total |
|
78 |
Notes:
(1) Total remuneration in the table above includes fixed pay, pension and benefit funding and variable pay.
(2) Executive directors are included. The table is based on an exchange rate where applicable of 1.13 to £1 as at 31 December 2018.
Employees who earned total remuneration of over 1 million in 2018 represent just 0.1% of our employees. This number reduces to 67 employees if we exclude pension and benefit funding. These employees include those who manage major businesses and functions with responsibility for significant assets, earnings or areas of strategic activity and can be grouped as follows:
· The Chief Executives responsible for each area and their direct reports.
· Employees managing large businesses within a franchise.
· Income generators responsible for high levels of income including those involved in managing trading activity and supporting clients with more complex financial transactions, including financial restructuring.
· Those responsible for managing our balance sheet and liquidity and funding positions across the business.
Compliance report
Statement of compliance
RBS is committed to high standards of corporate governance, business integrity and professionalism in all its activities.
Throughout the year ended 31 December 2018, RBS has complied with all of the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code issued by the Financial Reporting Council dated April 2016 (the Code) except in relation to provision (D.2.2) that the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee should have delegated responsibility for setting remuneration for the Chairman and executive directors. RBS considers that this is a matter which should rightly be reserved for the Board and this is an approach RBS has adopted for a number of years. Remuneration for the executive directors is first considered by the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee which then makes recommendations to the Board for consideration. This approach allows all non-executive directors, and not just those who are members of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee, to participate in decisions on the executive directors and the Chairmans remuneration and also allows the executive directors to input to the decision on the Chairmans remuneration. The Board believes this approach is very much in line with the spirit of the Code and no director is involved in decisions regarding his or her own remuneration. We do not anticipate any changes to our approach on this aspect of the Code. Information on how RBS has applied the main principles of the Code can be found in the Corporate governance report on pages 50 to 105. A copy of the Code can be found at www.frc.org.uk.
RBS has also implemented the recommendations arising from the Walker Review and complied in all material respects with the Financial Reporting Council Guidance on Audit Committees issued in September 2012 and April 2016.
Under the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, specific standards of corporate governance and business and financial disclosures and controls apply to companies with securities registered in the US. RBS complies with all applicable sections of the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, subject to a number of exceptions available to foreign private issuers.
Internal control
Management of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc is responsible for the system of internal controls that is designed to maintain effective and efficient operations, compliant with applicable laws and regulations. The system of internal controls is designed to manage, or mitigate, risk to an acceptable residual level rather than eliminate it entirely. Systems of internal control can only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance against material misstatement, fraud or loss.
Managements report on internal control over financial reporting
Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting for RBS.
RBSs internal control over financial reporting is a component of an overall system of internal control and is designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the preparation, reliability and fair presentation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and includes:
· Policies and procedures that relate to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, fairly and accurately reflect the transactions and disposition of assets.
· Controls providing reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit the preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS, and that receipts and expenditures are being made only as authorised by management.
· Controls providing reasonable assurance regarding the prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use or disposition of assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.
Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. In addition, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions or because the degree of compliance with policies or procedures may deteriorate.
Management assessed the effectiveness of RBSs internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2018 based on the criteria set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission in the 2013 publication of Internal Control - Integrated Framework.
Based on its assessment, management believes that, as of 31 December 2018, RBSs internal control over financial reporting is effective.
The effectiveness of RBSs internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2018 has been audited by Ernst & Young LLP, RBSs independent registered public accounting firm. The report of the independent registered public accounting firm to the directors of the Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc expresses an unqualified opinion on RBSs internal control over financial reporting as of the 31 December 2018.
Disclosure controls and procedures
Management, including RBSs Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer, have conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness and design of RBSs disclosure controls and procedures (as such term is defined in the Exchange Act Rule 13a-15(e)). Based on this evaluation, RBSs Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer concluded that RBSs disclosure controls and procedures were effective as of the end of the period covered by this annual report.
Changes in internal control
There was no change in RBSs internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by this report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, RBSs internal control over financial reporting.
The New York Stock Exchange
As a foreign private issuer with American Depository Shares representing ordinary shares, preference shares and debt securities listed on the New York Stock Exchange (the NYSE), RBS is not required to comply with all of the NYSE standards applicable to US domestic companies (the NYSE Standards) provided that it follows home country practice in lieu of the NYSE Standards and discloses any significant ways in which its corporate governance practices differ from the NYSE Standards. RBS is also required to provide an Annual Written Affirmation to the NYSE of its compliance with the mandatory applicable NYSE Standards.
The Group Audit Committee fully complies with the mandatory provisions of the NYSE Standards (including by reference to the rules of the Exchange Act) that relate to the composition, responsibilities and operation of audit committees. In April 2018 RBS submitted its required annual written affirmation to the NYSE, and in June 2018 it submitted an interim written affirmation, both confirming RBSs full compliance with those and other applicable provisions. More detailed information about the Group Audit Committee and its work during 2018 is set out in the Group Audit Committee report on pages 67 to 69.
RBS has reviewed its corporate governance arrangements and is satisfied that these are consistent with the NYSE Standards, subject to the following departures: (i) NYSE Standards require the majority of the Board to be independent. The NYSE Standards contain different tests from the Code for determining whether a director is independent. RBS follows the Codes requirements in determining the independence of its directors and currently has 9 independent non-executive directors, one of whom is the senior independent director. (ii) The NYSE Standards require non-management directors to hold regular sessions without management present and that independent directors meet at least once a year. The Code requires the Chairman to hold meetings with non-executive directors without the executives present and non-executive directors are to meet without
Compliance report
the Chairman present at least once a year to appraise the Chairmans performance and RBS complies with the requirements of the Code. (iii) The NYSE Standards require that the nominating/corporate governance committee of a listed company be composed entirely of independent directors.
The Chairman of the Board is also the Chairman of the Group Nominations and Governance Committee, which is permitted under the Code (since the Chairman was considered independent on appointment). The terms of reference of the Group Nominations and Governance Committee differ in certain limited respects from the requirements set out in the NYSE Standards, including because the Group Nominations and Governance Committee does not have responsibility for overseeing the evaluation of management. (iv) The NYSE standards require that the compensation committee of a listed company be composed of entirely of independent directors.
Although the members of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee are deemed independent in compliance with the provisions of the Code, the Board has not assessed the independence of the members of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee and the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee has not assessed the independence of any compensation consultant, legal counsel or other adviser, in each case, in accordance with the independence tests prescribed by the NYSE Standards.
The NYSE Standards require that the compensation committee must have direct responsibility to review and approve the Chief Executives remuneration.
As stated at the start of this Compliance Report, in the case of RBS, the Board, rather than the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee, reserves the authority to make the final determination of the remuneration of the Chief Executive. (v) The NYSE Standards require listed companies to adopt and disclose corporate governance guidelines.
Throughout the year ended 31 December 2018, RBS has complied with all of the provisions of the Code (subject to the exception described above) and the Code does not require RBS to disclose the full range of corporate governance guidelines with which it complies. (vi) The NYSE Standards require listed companies to adopt and disclose a code of business conduct and ethics for directors, officers and employees, and promptly disclose any waivers of the code for directors or executive officers. RBS has adopted a code of conduct which is supplemented by a number of key policies and guidance dealing with matters including , among others, anti-bribery and corruption, anti-money laundering, sanctions, confidentiality, inside information, health, safety and environment, conflicts of interest, market conduct and management records. This code of conduct applies to all officers and employees and is fully aligned to the PRA and FCA Conduct Rules which apply to all directors. The Code of Conduct is available to view on RBSs website at rbs.com.
This Compliance report forms part of the Corporate governance report and the Report of the directors.
Report of the directors
The directors present their report together with the audited accounts for the year ended 31 December 2018.
Other information incorporated into this report by reference can be found at:
|
|
Page/Note |
Strategic Report |
|
4 |
Sustainability |
|
15 |
Climate change |
|
34 |
Business review |
|
36 |
RBS Group ring-fencing |
|
36 |
Board of directors and secretary |
|
59 |
Corporate governance |
|
61 |
Segmental analysis |
|
Note 4 |
Share Capital and other equity |
|
Note 22 |
Post balance sheet events |
|
Note 35 |
Risk factors |
|
265 |
Group structure
During 2018 in preparation for ring-fencing a number of changes were made to the Group structure. Following these changes the company owns three main subsidiaries, NatWest Holdings Limited (the parent of the ring-fenced group which includes, National Westminster Bank Plc, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc and Ulster Bank Ireland DAC), NatWest Markets Plc (the investment bank) and The Royal Bank of Scotland International (Holdings) Limited (the parent of The Royal Bank of Scotland International Limited).
Further details of the principal subsidiary undertakings are shown in Note 6.
Following placing and open offers in December 2008 and in April 2009, HM Treasury (HMT) owned approximately 70.3% of the enlarged ordinary share capital of the company. In December 2009, the company issued a further £25.5 billion of new capital to HMT in the form of B shares. HMT sold 630 million of its holding of the companys ordinary shares in August 2015. In October 2015 HMT converted its entire holding of 51 billion B shares into 5.1 billion new ordinary shares of £1 each in the company. HMT sold a further 925 million of its holding of the companys ordinary shares in June 2018.
At 31 December 2018, HMTs holding in the companys ordinary shares was 62.3%.
NatWest Markets N.V. (formerly Royal Bank of Scotland N.V. renamed in 2018)
NatWest Markets N.V. (NWM N.V.), the RBS Groups banking entity in the Netherlands, continues to implement its plan to be operationally ready to serve our European Economic Area customers when the UK leaves the European Union on 29 March 2019, in the event that there is a loss of access to the EU Single Market. NWM N.V. is expected to become a subsidiary of NatWest Markets Plc, subject to regulatory approvals.
Activities
RBS is engaged principally in providing a wide range of banking and other financial services. Further details of the organisational structure and business overview of RBS, including the products and services provided by each of its operating segments and the markets in which they operate are contained in the Business review. Details of the strategy for delivering the companys objectives can be found in the Strategic Report.
Results and dividends
The profit attributable to the ordinary shareholders of the Group for the year ended 31 December 2018 amounted to £1,622 million compared with a profit of £752 million for the year ended 31 December 2017, as set out in the consolidated income statement on page 180.
In 2018 RBS paid an interim dividend of £241 million, or 2.0p per ordinary share. In addition, the company announced that the directors have recommended a final dividend of 3.5p per ordinary share, and a further special dividend of 7.5p per ordinary share.
The final and special dividends recommended by directors are subject to shareholders approval at the Annual General Meeting on 25 April 2019. If approved, payment will be made on 30 April 2019 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 22 March 2019. The ex-dividend date will be 21 March 2019. No dividend was paid in 2017.
In the context of prior macro-prudential policy discussions, previously RBS partially neutralised the impact on Core Tier 1 capital of coupon and dividend payments in relation to hybrid capital instruments through equity issuances of ordinary shares, this policy was cancelled in 2018. Approximately £300 million was raised each year in 2016 and 2017 through the issue of new ordinary shares, and during 2018 £136 million was raised.
Employees
As at 31 December 2018, RBS employed 67,000 people (full-time equivalent basis, including temporary workers). Details of related costs are included in Note 3 on the consolidated accounts.
Creating a healthy culture
Building a healthy culture that embodies Our Values is a core priority for RBS.
Our Values, which guide the way RBS identifies the right people to serve customers well, and how it manages, engages and rewards colleagues, are at the heart of Our Code (the bank-wide Code of Conduct).
Engaging colleagues
Engaging colleagues is crucial to achieving RBSs ambition. Every year colleagues are asked to share their thoughts on what its like to work for RBS via a colleague opinion survey. The results from the 2018 survey are the most positive ever reported since engagement started to be measured in 2002. All key measures have improved and RBS is now above the global financial norms in all comparable survey categories. The continued strengthening of the culture in RBS was also echoed in this years improved Banking Standards Board assessment which provided further proof of progress across a range of measures.
Rewarding employees
RBSs approach to performance management provides clarity for employees about how their contribution links to RBSs ambition.
RBS has made further progress on making sure employees are paid fairly for the work they do with simple and transparent pay structures, and in the UK RBSs rates continue to exceed the Living Wage. More information can be found on page 74 of this document.
Developing colleagues
RBS offers a wide range of additional learning opportunities. In 2018 the NextGen talent development programme was launched for high potential colleagues at managerial level, helping them become the future leaders RBS will need.
RBS also has a range of Female Development Programmes supporting women to reach their full potential, and helping RBS to become fully gender balanced by 2030.
2018 also saw Sales Excellence, the RBS bank-wide sales programme, get underway, teaching the tools and techniques that enable those in sales roles to be the best at ethical, needs-based selling. More information can be found on page 16 of the Strategic Report included herein.
Youth Employment
In 2018, RBS welcomed 516 people across the Graduate and Apprenticeship schemes as well as around 150 Interns into internship programmes.
Health and wellbeing of colleagues
As a strong component of making RBS a great place to work, wellbeing has successfully delivered against three pillars physical, mental, and social; and in 2018 built momentum on the fourth pillar, financial wellbeing. Further details can be found on page 17 of the Strategic Report included herein.
Report of the directors
Employee consultation
RBS recognises employee representatives such as trade unions and work councils in a number of businesses and countries, and management regularly discuss developments and updates on the progress of its strategic plans with the European Employee Council (EEC). RBS has ongoing engagement and discussion with those bodies, given the scale of change taking place across RBS.
Colleague Voice
In response to changes which have been made to the UK Corporate Governance Code, RBS has established a Colleague Advisory Panel (the Panel) which is chaired by Lena Wilson, Non-executive Director. The purpose of the Panel is to promote greater colleague voice in the boardroom and provide an additional way for the Board to engage directly with colleagues. The Panel consists of existing employee representatives (e.g. Unite, Financial Services Union (FSU), EEC, Employee Led Networks, Junior Management/Colleague Focus Groups and colleagues who have volunteered to be involved). Colleagues from locations outside of the UK and Ireland also sit on the Panel to ensure a broad, diverse range of views. In total, there are approximately 20 colleagues (or their representatives) who attend each Panel meeting. The Panel does not duplicate existing methods to inform and consult, in particular with employee representatives, focusing instead on broader strategic issues facing RBS. The design of the Panel has been built around having two-way dialogue with clear outputs from the sessions and follow-up to ensure it is viewed as a valuable addition to existing colleague voice methods. More detail can be found on the Panel on page 15 of the Strategic Report.
Inclusion
Building a more inclusive RBS is essential for customers and colleagues. The ambition to be number one for customer service, trust and advocacy will only be achieved by understanding the needs of all colleagues and customers.
RBSs inclusion guidelines apply to all colleagues globally and cover being LGBT Innovative, Gender Balanced, Disability Smart, Ethnically Diverse, all leading to Inclusive Culture. Detailed information can be found on page 17 of the Strategic Report included herein.
RBS has been recognised for work on Equality, Diversity and Inclusion in 2018 by retaining a position in the Times Top 50 Employers for Women; being recognised again as a Top 10 Employer for Working Families; being rated as an Exemplary Level Employer by Carer Positive Scotland; being named a Stonewall Global Diversity Champion; being Platinum Ranked by Business in the Community for both Gender and Ethnicity work; and being upgraded to Gold Rated Disability Standard for the
Business Disability Forum. RBS was also proud to be named Employer of the Year by Women in Finance 2018.
Going concern
RBSs business activities and financial position, the factors likely to affect its future development and performance and its objectives and policies in managing the financial risks to which it is exposed and its capital are discussed in the Business review. The risk factors which could materially affect RBSs future results are set out on pages 265 to 278. RBSs regulatory capital resources and significant developments in 2018 and anticipated future developments are detailed in the Capital, liquidity and funding section on pages 109 to 122. This section also describes RBSs funding and liquidity profile, including changes in key metrics and the build up of liquidity reserves.
Having reviewed RBSs forecasts, projections and other relevant evidence, the directors have a reasonable expectation that RBS and the company will continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future. Accordingly, the financial statements of RBS and of the company have been prepared on a going concern basis.
UK Finance disclosure code
RBSs 2018 financial statements have been prepared in compliance with the principles set out in the Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure published by the British Bankers Association in 2010 and adopted by UK Finance. The Code sets out five disclosure principles together with supporting guidance. The principles are that RBS and other major UK banks will provide high quality, meaningful and decision-useful disclosures; review and enhance their financial instrument disclosures for key areas of interest to market participants; assess the applicability and relevance of good practice recommendations to their disclosures, acknowledging the importance of such guidance; seek to enhance the comparability of financial statement disclosures across the UK banking sector; and clearly differentiate in their annual reports between information that is audited and information that is unaudited.
Enhanced Disclosure Task Force (EDTF) and Disclosures on Expected Credit Losses (DECL) Taskforce recommendations
The EDTF, established by the Financial Stability Board, published its report Enhancing the Risk Disclosures of Banks in October 2012, with an update in November 2015 covering IFRS 9 expected credit losses (ECL). In November 2018, the DECL Taskforce, jointly established by the Financial Conduct Authority, Financial Reporting Council and the Prudential Regulatory Authority, published its phase 1 report, further articulating EDTF (2015) recommendations. RBSs 2018 Annual Report on Form 20-F and Pillar 3 Report reflect EDTF and have regard to DECL Taskforce recommendations.
Authority to repurchase shares
At the Annual General Meeting in 2018 shareholders authorised the company to make market purchases of up to 1,199,376,674 ordinary shares. The directors have not exercised this authority to date. Shareholders will be asked to renew this authorisation at the Annual General Meeting in 2019.
On 6 February 2019 RBS held a General Meeting and shareholders approved a special resolution to give authority for the Company to make off-market purchases of up to 4.99 per cent of the Companys ordinary share capital in issuance from HM Treasury (or its nominee) at such times as the Directors may determine is appropriate. Full details of the proposal are set out in the Circular and Notice of General Meeting available on www.rbs.com. Shareholders will be asked to renew this authorisation at the Annual General Meeting in 2019.
Additional information
Where not provided elsewhere in the Report of the directors, the following additional information is required to be disclosed by Part 6 of Schedule 7 to the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008.
The rights and obligations attached to the companys ordinary shares and preference shares are set out in our Articles of Association, copies of which can be obtained from Companies House in the UK or can be found at rbs.com/about/board-and-governance. Non-cumulative preference share details are set out in Note 22 of the consolidated accounts.
The cumulative preference shares represent less than 0.008% of the total voting rights of the company, the remainder being represented by the ordinary shares.
On a show of hands at a General Meeting of the company, every holder of ordinary shares and cumulative preference shares, present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote, shall have one vote. On a poll, every holder of ordinary shares or cumulative preference shares present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote, shall have four votes for every share held. The notices of Annual General Meetings and General Meetings specify the deadlines for exercising voting rights and appointing a proxy or proxies to vote in relation to resolutions to be passed at the meeting.
Report of the directors
There are no restrictions on the transfer of ordinary shares in the company other than certain restrictions which may from time to time be imposed by laws and regulations (for example, insider trading laws). At the 2018 Annual General Meeting, shareholders gave authority to directors to offer a scrip dividend alternative on any dividend paid up to the conclusion of the Annual General Meeting in 2021.
Pursuant to the UK Listing Rules, certain employees of the company require the approval of the company to deal in the companys shares.
The rules governing the powers of directors, including in relation to issuing or buying back shares and their appointment, are set out in our Articles of Association. It will be proposed at the 2019 Annual General Meeting that the directors authorities to allot shares under the Companies Act 2006 (the Companies Act) be renewed. The Articles of Association may only be amended by a special resolution at a general meeting of shareholders.
The company is not aware of any agreements between shareholders that may result in restrictions on the transfer of securities and/or voting rights. There are no persons holding securities carrying special rights with regard to control of the company. A number of the companys employee share plans include restrictions on transfers of shares while shares are subject to the plans. Note 3 sets out a summary of the plans.
Under the rules of certain employee share plans, voting rights are exercised by the Trustees of the plan on receipt of participants instructions. If a participant does not submit an instruction to the Trustee no vote is registered.
For shares held in the Companys other Employee Share Trusts, the voting rights are exercisable by the Trustees. However, in accordance with investor protection guidelines, the Trustees abstain from voting. The Trustees would take independent advice before accepting any offer in respect of their shareholdings for the company in a takeover bid situation. The Trustees have chosen to waive their entitlement to the dividend on shares held by the Trusts. The total amount of dividends waived during the year ended 31 December 2018 was £0.2 million.
A change of control of the company following a takeover bid may cause a number of agreements to which the company is party to take effect, alter or terminate. All of the companys employee share plans contain provisions relating to a change of control. In the context of the company as a whole, these agreements are not considered to be significant.
Directors
The names and brief biographical details of the current directors are shown on pages 59 and 60.
Howard Davies, Frank Dangeard, Alison Davis, Morten Friis, Robert Gillespie, Ross McEwan, Brendan Nelson, Baroness Noakes, Mike Rogers, Mark Seligman and Lena Wilson all served throughout the year and to the date of signing of the financial statements.
Patrick Flynn was appointed on 1 June 2018 and Katie Murray was appointed on 1 January 2019.
All directors of the company are required to stand for election or re-election annually by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting and, in accordance with the UK Listing Rules, the election or re-election of independent directors requires approval by all shareholders and also by independent shareholders.
Directors interests
The interests of the directors in the shares of the company at 31 December 2018 are shown on page 87. None of the directors held an interest in the loan capital of the company or in the shares or loan capital of any of the subsidiary undertakings of the company, during the period from 1 January 2018 to 14 February 2019.
Directors indemnities
In terms of section 236 of the Companies Act, Qualifying Third Party Indemnity Provisions have been issued by the company to its directors, members of the RBS Executive Committee, individuals authorised by the PRA/FCA, certain directors and/or officers of RBS subsidiaries and all trustees of RBS pension schemes.
Controlling shareholder
In accordance with the UK Listing Rules, the company has entered into an agreement with HM Treasury (the Controlling Shareholder) which is intended to ensure that the Controlling Shareholder complies with the independence provisions set out in the UK Listing Rules. The company has complied with the independence provisions in the relationship agreement and as far as the company is aware the independence and procurement provisions in the relationship agreement have been complied with in the period by the controlling shareholder.
Shareholdings
The table below shows shareholders that have notified RBS that they hold more than 3% of the total voting rights of the company at 31 December 2018.
Solicitor For The |
|
Number of |
|
% of share |
|
% of total |
Ordinary shares |
|
7,509 |
|
62.3 |
|
62.3 |
As at 14 February 2019, there were no changes to the shareholdings shown in the table above.
Listing Rule 9.8.4
The information to be disclosed in the Annual Report on Form 20-F under LR 9.8.4, is set out in this Directors report with the exception of details of contracts of significance under LR 9.8.4 (10) and (11) given in Additional Information on page 279.
Political donations
At the Annual General Meeting in 2018, shareholders gave authority under Part 14 of the Companies Act 2006, for a period of one year, for the company (and its subsidiaries) to make political donations and incur political expenditure up to a maximum aggregate sum of £100,000. This authorisation was taken as a precaution only, as the company has a longstanding policy of not making political donations or incurring political expenditure within the ordinary meaning of those words. During 2018, RBS made no political donations, nor incurred any political expenditure in the UK or EU and it is not proposed that RBSs longstanding policy of not making contributions to any political party be changed. Shareholders will be asked to renew this authorisation at the Annual General Meeting in 2019.
Directors disclosure to auditors
Each of the directors at the date of approval of this report confirms that:
(a) so far as the director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the companys auditors are unaware; and
(b) the director has taken all the steps that he/she ought to have taken as a director to make himself/herself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the companys auditors are aware of that information.
This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of section 418 of the Companies Act.
Auditors
EY LLP are the auditors and have indicated their willingness to continue in office. A resolution to re-appoint EY LLP as the companys auditors will be proposed at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting.
By order of the Board
Aileen Taylor
Company Secretary
14 February 2019
The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
is registered in Scotland No. SC45551
Statement of directors responsibilities
This statement should be read in conjunction with the responsibilities of the auditor set out in their report on pages 178 and 179.
The directors are responsible for the preparation of the Annual Report and Accounts. The directors are required by Article 4 of the IAS Regulation (European Commission Regulation No 1606/2002) to prepare Group accounts, and as permitted by the Companies Act 2006 have elected to prepare company accounts, for each financial year in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union. They are responsible for preparing accounts that present fairly the financial position, financial performance and cash flows of the Group and the company. In preparing those accounts, the directors are required to:
· select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;
· make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent; and
· state whether applicable accounting standards have been followed, subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in the accounts.
The directors are responsible for keeping proper accounting records which disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Group and to enable them to ensure that the Annual Report and Accounts complies with the Companies Act 2006. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Group and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.
The directors confirm that to the best of their knowledge:
· the financial statements, prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole; and
· the Strategic Report and Directors report (incorporating the Business review) include a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face.
In addition, the directors are of the opinion that the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, are fair, balanced and understandable and provide the information necessary for shareholders to assess the companys position and performance, business model and strategy.
By order of the Board
Howard Davies |
Ross McEwan |
Katie Murray |
Chairman |
Chief Executive |
Chief Financial Officer |
14 February 2019
Board of directors
Chairman |
Executive directors |
Non-executive directors |
Howard Davies |
Ross McEwan Katie Murray |
Frank Dangeard Alison Davis Patrick Flynn Morten Friis Robert Gillespie Brendan Nelson Baroness Noakes Mike Rogers Mark Seligman Dr Lena Wilson |
Capital and risk management
|
|
Page |
Presentation of information |
|
101 |
Risk management framework |
|
|
Introduction |
|
101 |
Risk culture |
|
102 |
Risk governance |
|
103 |
Risk appetite |
|
104 |
Risk controls and limits |
|
104 |
Risk identification and measurement |
|
104 |
Risk treatment and mitigation |
|
104 |
Risk assurance |
|
105 |
Model risk |
|
105 |
Stress testing |
|
105 |
Capital, liquidity and funding risk |
|
|
Definitions, sources and key developments |
|
109 |
Capital, liquidity and funding management |
|
110 |
Minimum requirements |
|
111 |
Measurement |
|
112 |
Credit risk |
|
|
Definition, sources and key developments |
|
123 |
Risk governance, appetite and controls |
|
123 |
Risk identification and measurement |
|
123 |
Risk models |
|
124 |
Risk mitigation |
|
124 |
Risk assessment and monitoring |
|
124 |
Banking activities |
|
134 |
Trading activities |
|
158 |
Key IFRS 9 terms and differences |
|
161 |
Market risk |
|
|
Non-traded market risk |
|
163 |
Traded market risk |
|
169 |
Pension risk |
|
172 |
Compliance & conduct risk |
|
172 |
Financial crime |
|
173 |
Operational risk |
|
173 |
Business risk |
|
175 |
Reputational risk |
|
176 |
Presentation of information
Where indicated in the section headers, information in the Capital and risk management section (pages 101 to 176) is within the scope of the Independent auditors report. Where a main section header, presented in bold, is marked as audited all sub sections are also audited.
Risk management framework
Introduction
RBS operates an integrated risk management framework, centred around the embedding of a strong risk culture, which is designed to achieve compliance with prudential and conduct obligations. Each element of the risk management framework functions both individually and as part of a larger continuum. The framework ensures the tools and capability are in place to facilitate risk management and decision-making across the organisation.
RBSs strategy is informed and shaped by an understanding of the risk landscape, including a range of significant risks and uncertainties in the external economic, political and regulatory environment. Identifying these risks and understanding how they affect RBS informs risk appetite and risk management practice.
Risk appetite, which is supported by a robust set of principles, policies and practices, defines our levels of tolerance for a variety of risks. It is a key element of RBSs risk management framework and culture, providing a structured approach to risk-taking within agreed boundaries.
Effective governance, underpinned by the three lines of defence model, is essential to ensure the right decisions are being made by the right people at the right time. Governance includes regular and transparent risk reporting as well as discussion and decision-making at senior management committees, which informs management strategies across the organisation.
RBS aims to have the right tools in place to support effective risk management. Having the appropriate capability, people and infrastructure is central. This is supported by a strong emphasis on systems, training and development to ensure threats are anticipated and managed appropriately within the boundaries determined by the agreed risk appetite.
Measurement, evaluation and transparency are also fundamental elements of the framework, providing robust analysis of the materiality and likelihood of specific threats as well as supporting understanding and communication of the financial and non-financial risks to which RBS is exposed.
RBS has a strong focus on defining the control environment to ensure the effective operation of policies and processes embedded in the customer-facing businesses, thus facilitating the management of the risks they take in the course of their day-to-day activities.
RBS also has a strong focus on continually improving the way risk is managed, particularly in terms of how threats are anticipated or responded to, but also in terms of simplifying or enhancing existing controls, policies and practice.
Essential to this is the ability to scan both the medium and long-term horizon for risks. Stress testing is used to quantify, evaluate and understand the potential impact that changes to risks may have on the financial strength of RBS, including its capital position. In turn, the results of stress tests can be used to inform and shape strategy.
Given the evolving landscape, including the structural reform required by the UKs ring-fencing requirements, in 2018 there was an emphasis on enhancing both the risk culture and risk appetite elements of the framework as well as the interconnectivity between framework components.
Capital and risk management
Risk management framework continued
All RBS employees share ownership of the way risk is managed. The businesses, the control and support functions, and Internal Audit work together to make sure business activities and policies are consistent with risk appetite; following the three lines of defence model. RBS constantly monitors its risk profile against its defined risk appetite and limits, taking action when required to balance risk and return.
The methodology for setting, governing and embedding risk appetite across RBS is being further enhanced with the aim of simplifying current risk appetite processes and increasing alignment with strategic planning and external threat assessments.
Risk culture
A strong risk culture is essential if RBS is to achieve its ambition to build a truly customer-focused bank. RBSs risk culture target is to make risk simply part of the way that employees work and think.
Such a culture must be built on strong risk practices and appropriate risk behaviours must be embedded throughout the organisation.
To achieve this, RBS is focusing on leaders as role models and taking action to build clarity, continuing to develop capability and motivate employees to reach the required standards of risk culture behaviour. This includes: taking personal responsibility for understanding and proactively managing the risks associated with individual roles; respecting risk management and the part it plays in daily work; understanding clearly the risks associated with individual roles; aligning decision-making to RBSs risk appetite; considering risk in all actions and decisions; escalating risks and issues early; taking action to mitigate risks; learning from mistakes and near-misses; challenging others attitudes, ideas and actions; and reporting and communicating risks transparently.
RBSs target risk culture behaviours are embedded in Our Standards and are clearly aligned to the core values of serving customers, working together, doing the right thing and thinking long-term. These act as an effective basis for a strong risk culture because Our Standards are used for performance management, recruitment and development.
A risk culture measurement and reporting approach has been developed, enabling RBS to benchmark both internally and externally. This allows RBS to assess progress in embedding its target risk culture where risk is simply part of the way staff work and think.
Training
Enabling employees to have the capabilities and confidence to manage risk is core to RBSs learning strategy.
RBS offers a wide range of risk learning, both technical and behavioural, across the risk disciplines. This training can be mandatory, role-specific or for personal development.
Code of Conduct
Aligned to RBSs values is the Code of Conduct. The code provides guidance on expected behaviour and sets out the standards of conduct that support the values. It explains the effect of decisions that are taken and describes the principles that must be followed.
These principles cover conduct-related issues as well as wider business activities. They focus on desired outcomes, with practical guidelines to align the values with commercial strategy and actions. The embedding of these principles facilitates sound decision-making and a clear focus on good customer outcomes.
A simple decision-making guide the YES check has been included in the Code of Conduct. It is a simple set of five questions, designed to ensure RBS values guide day-to-day decisions:
· Does what I am doing keep our customers and RBS safe and secure?
· Would customers and colleagues say I am acting with integrity?
· Am I happy with how this would be perceived on the outside?
· Is what I am doing meeting the standards of conduct required?
· In five years time would others see this as a good way to work?
Each of the five questions is a prompt to think about how the situation fits with RBS Groups values. It ensures that employees can think through decisions that do not have a clear answer, and guides their judgements.
If conduct falls short of RBSs required standards, the accountability review process is used to assess how this should be reflected in pay outcomes for those individuals concerned. RBS-wide remuneration policy ensures that the remuneration arrangements for all employees reflect the principles and standards prescribed by the PRA rulebook and the FCA handbook. Any employee falling short of the expected standards would also be subject to internal disciplinary policies and procedures. If appropriate, the relevant authority would be notified.
Capital and risk management
Risk management framework continued
Risk governance
Committee structure
The diagram illustrates RBSs risk committee structure in 2018 and the main purposes of each committee.
Risk management structure
The diagram illustrates RBSs risk management structure in 2018 and key risk management responsibilities.
Notes:
(1) While separate roles, the individual undertaking the RBS Group Chief Executive role also performs the NatWest Holdings Chief Executive role.
(2) The RBS Group Risk function is led by the RBS Group Chief Risk Officer. The RBS Group Chief Risk Officer reports directly to the RBS Group Chief Executive and has a secondary reporting line to the chair of the Group Board Risk Committee as well as a right of access to the committee.
(3) The NatWest Holdings Chief Risk Officer (Chief Risk Officer, Ring-Fenced Bank) reports directly to the RBS Group Chief Risk Officer and the NatWest Holdings Chief Executive, along with a secondary reporting line to the NatWest Holdings Board Risk Committee chair and right of access to the committee including the Deputy Chairman.
(4) The NatWest Holdings Risk function provides risk management services across the RBS Group, including to the RBS Group Chief Risk Officer and where agreed to the NatWest Markets and RBSI Chief Risk Officers. These services are managed, as appropriate, through service level agreements.
(5) The NatWest Holdings Risk function is independent of the NatWest Holdings customer-facing franchises and support functions. It provides oversight of risk management ensuring that risk exposures arising from management and business activities are adequately monitored and controlled. The directors of Financial Risk & Analytics, Compliance & Conduct, Restructuring, Risk Policy & Frameworks and Operational Risk & Services as well as the Chief Financial Crime Officer, Chief Credit Officer, Deputy Chief Risk Officer and Head of Risk Strategy & Transformation report to the NatWest Holdings Chief Risk Officer. The Director of Risk, Ulster Bank Ireland DAC and the Director of Compliance, Ulster Bank Ireland DAC, report to the Ulster Bank Ireland DAC Chief Executive; they also have a reporting line to the NatWest Holdings Chief Risk Officer.
(6) The Chief Risk Officers for NatWest Markets and RBSI have dual reporting lines into the RBS Group Chief Risk Officer and the respective chief executives of their entities. There are additional reporting lines to the NatWest Markets and RBSI Board Risk Committee chairs and a right of access to the committee.
Capital and risk management
Risk management framework continued
Three lines of defence
RBS uses the three lines of defence model to articulate accountabilities and responsibilities for managing risk across the organisation. The three lines of defence model is adopted across the industry to support the embedding of effective risk management and is expressed through a set of principles as outlined below. All roles, regardless of level, sit within one of these three lines.
First line of defence Management and supervision
The first line of defence encompasses most roles within RBS, including those in customer franchises, Technology and Services as well as support functions such as Human Resources, Communications & Marketing and Finance. Responsibilities include:
· Owning, managing and supervising, within a defined risk appetite, the risks which exist in business areas and support functions.
· Ensuring the business has effective mechanisms for identifying, reporting and managing risk and controls.
· Ensuring appropriate controls are in place to mitigate risk, balancing control, customer service and competitive advantage.
· Ensuring that the culture of the business supports balanced risk decisions and compliance with policy, laws and regulations.
Second line of defence Oversight and control
The second line of defence is the Risk function as well as the policy and control elements of Human Resources, Legal and the Finance function. Responsibilities include:
· Leading the articulation, design and development of risk culture and appetite.
· Setting the standard for risk management across the Group.
· Overseeing and challenging the management of risks and controls.
· Analysing the aggregate risk profile and ensuring that risks are being managed within risk appetite.
· Providing expert advice to the first line on risk management, including the application of effective risk and control frameworks and the consideration of risk in decision-making.
· Providing senior executives with relevant management information and reports, and escalating concerns where appropriate.
Third line of defence Internal Audit
Responsibilities include:
· Providing assurance to the Group Audit Committee on the appropriateness of the design and operational effectiveness of governance, risk management and internal controls to monitor and mitigate material risks.
· Engaging with management to provide perspectives, insights and challenge in order to influence the building of a sustainable bank.
· Providing independent assurance to the Financial Conduct Authority, Prudential Regulation Authority, Central Bank of Ireland and other key jurisdictional regulators on specific risks and controls.
Risk appetite
Risk appetite defines the level and types of risk RBS is willing to accept, within risk capacity, in order to achieve strategic objectives and business plans. It links the goals and priorities to risk management in a way that guides and empowers staff to serve customers well and achieve financial targets.
For certain strategic risks, risk capacity defines the maximum level of risk the RBS Group can assume before breaching constraints determined by regulatory capital and liquidity needs, the operational environment, and from a conduct perspective. Articulating risk capacity helps determine where risk appetite should be set, ensuring there is a buffer between internal risk appetite and the Groups ultimate capacity to absorb losses.
Risk appetite framework
The risk appetite framework bolsters effective risk management by promoting sound risk-taking through a structured approach, within agreed boundaries. It also ensures emerging risks and risk-taking activities that would be out of appetite are identified, assessed, escalated and addressed in a timely manner.
To facilitate this, a detailed annual review of the framework is carried out. The review includes:
· Assessing the adequacy of the framework when compared to internal and external expectations.
· Ensuring the framework remains effective as a strong control environment for risk appetite.
· Assessing the level of embedding of risk appetite across the organisation.
The Board approves the risk appetite framework annually.
Establishing risk appetite
Risk appetite is communicated across RBS through risk appetite statements. The risk appetite statements provide clarity on the scale and type of activities that can be undertaken in a manner that is easily conveyed to staff.
Risk appetite statements consist of qualitative statements of appetite supported by risk limits and triggers that operate as a defence against excessive risk-taking. They are established at RBS-wide level for all strategic risks and material risks, and at legal entity, franchise, and function level for all other risks.
The annual process of establishing risk appetite statements is completed alongside the business and financial planning process. This ensures plans and risk appetite are appropriately aligned.
The Board sets risk appetite for the most material risks to help ensure RBS is well placed to meet its priorities and long-term targets even under challenging economic environments. It is the basis on which RBS remains safe and sound while implementing its strategic business objectives.
RBSs risk profile is frequently reviewed and monitored to ensure it remains within appetite and that management focus is concentrated on all strategic risks, material risks and emerging risk issues. Risk profile relative to risk appetite is reported regularly to the Board and senior management.
Risk controls and limits
Risk controls and their associated limits are an integral part of the risk appetite approach and a key part of embedding risk appetite in day-to-day risk management decisions. A clear tolerance for material risk types is set in alignment with business activities.
RBS policies directly support the qualitative aspects of risk appetite, helping to rebuild and maintain stakeholder confidence in RBSs risk control and governance. Its integrated approach is designed to ensure that appropriate controls, aligned to risk appetite, are set for each of the strategic and material risks it faces, with an effective assurance process put in place to monitor and report on performance.
Risk identification and measurement
Risk identification and measurement within the risk management process comprise:
· Regular assessment of the overall risk profile, incorporating market developments and trends, as well as external and internal factors.
· Monitoring of the risks associated with lending and credit exposures.
· Assessment of trading and non-trading portfolios.
· Review of potential risks in new business activities and processes.
· Analysis of potential risks in any complex and unusual business transactions.
The financial and non-financial risks that RBS faces each day are detailed in the Risk Directory. This provides a common risk language to ensure consistent terminology is used across RBS. The Risk Directory is subject to annual review. This ensures that it continues to provide a comprehensive and meaningful list of the inherent risks within the businesses.
Risk treatment and mitigation
Risk treatment and mitigation is an important aspect of ensuring that risk profile remains within risk appetite. Risk mitigation strategies are discussed and agreed with the businesses. When evaluating possible strategies, costs and benefits, residual risks (risks that are retained) and secondary risks (those caused by the risk mitigation actions) are considered. Monitoring and review processes are in place to track results. Early identification and effective management of changes in legislation and regulation are critical to the successful mitigation of conduct risk. The effects of all changes are managed to ensure timely compliance readiness. Changes assessed as having a high or medium-high impact are managed closely.
Capital and risk management
Risk management framework continued
Significant and emerging risks that may affect future results and performance are reviewed and monitored. Action is taken to mitigate potential risks as and when required. In depth analysis is carried out, including the stress testing of exposures relative to the risk.
Risk assurance
Assurance is carried out on targeted credit risk, market risk, compliance and conduct risk and financial crime risk activities to provide assurance to both internal and external stakeholders including the Board, senior management, the customer-facing franchises, Internal Audit and the Groups regulators. Selected key controls are also reviewed. Qualitative reviews are carried out to assess various risk aspects as appropriate, including: the quality of risk portfolios, the accuracy of the Basel model inputs and related probability of default/loss given default classifications, the quality of risk management practices, policy compliance and adherence to risk appetite. This can include testing the Groups credit portfolios and market risk exposures to assist in the early identification of emerging risks, as well as undertaking targeted reviews to examine specific issues.
The adequacy and effectiveness of selected key controls owned and operated by the second line of defence are also tested (with a particular focus on credit risk and market risk controls). Selected controls within the scope of Section 404 of the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act 2002 as well as selected controls supporting risk data aggregation and reporting are also reviewed. Assurance is carried out on Anti-Money Laundering, Sanctions, and Anti-Bribery & Corruption processes and controls. This helps inform whether or not the financial crime control environment is adequate and effective and whether financial crime risk is appropriately identified, managed and mitigated. The Risk Assurance Committee ensures a consistent and fair approach to all aspects of the second-line assurance review activities. The committee also monitors and validates the ongoing programme of reviews and tracks the remediation of the more material review actions.
Model risk
Model risk is the risk that a model is specified incorrectly (not achieving the objective for which it is designed), implemented incorrectly (an error in translating the model specification into the version actually used), or being used incorrectly (correctly specified but applied inappropriately).
RBS uses a variety of models as part of its risk management process and activities. Key examples include the use of model outputs to support risk assessments in the credit approval process, ongoing credit risk management, monitoring and reporting, as well as the calculation of risk-weighted assets. Other examples include the use of models to measure market risk exposures and calculate associated capital requirements, as well as for the valuation of positions. The models used for stress-testing purposes also play a key role in ensuring RBS holds sufficient capital, even in stressed market scenarios.
Key developments in 2018
In April 2018, the PRA set out its expectations on the model risk management practices that should be adopted when using stress test models. RBS has a strong focus on model risk management and, as a result, practices were reviewed and, where appropriate, work to enhance them in line with regulatory expectations continues.
RBS further invested in model risk management during 2018, particularly given business demand and the growing complexity of requirements, such as new regulation and AI. This included the specification of additional IT systems to enhance capability in this area.
Model Risk Governance
Model Risk Governance is responsible for setting policy and providing a governance framework for all of RBSs models and related processes. It is also responsible for defining and monitoring model risk appetite in conjunction with model owners and model users, monitoring the model risk profile and reporting on the model population as well as escalating issues to senior management, through the Model Risk Forum, and the respective franchise and function risk committees.
Model Risk Management
Model Risk Management performs independent model validation for material models. It works with individual businesses and functions to monitor adherence to model risk standards, ensuring that models are developed and implemented appropriately and that their operational environment is fit for purpose.
Model Risk Management performs reviews of relevant risk and pricing models in two instances: (i) for new models or amendments to existing models and (ii) as part of its ongoing programme to assess the performance of these models. Model Risk Management reviews may test and challenge the logic and conceptual soundness of the methodology, or the assumptions underlying a model. Reviews may also test whether or not all appropriate risks have been sufficiently captured as well as checking the accuracy and robustness of calculations. Based on the review and findings from Model Risk Management, RBSs model or risk committees consider whether a model can be approved for use. Models used for regulatory reporting may additionally require regulatory approval before implementation.
Model Risk Management reassesses the appropriateness of approved risk models on a periodic basis. Each periodic review begins with an initial assessment. Based on the initial assessment, an internal model governance committee will decide to re-ratify a model or to carry out additional work. In the initial assessment, Model Risk Management assesses factors such as a change in the size or composition of the portfolio, market changes, the performance of or any amendments to the model and the status of any outstanding issues or scheduled activities carried over from previous reviews. Model Risk Management also monitors the performance of RBSs portfolio of models to ensure they appropriately capture underlying business rationale. For more information relating to market risk models and pricing models, refer to page 171.
Stress testing
Stress testing capital management
Stress testing is a key risk management tool and a fundamental component of RBSs approach to capital management. It is used to quantify, evaluate and understand the potential impact of specified changes to risk factors on the financial strength of RBS, including its capital position. Stress testing includes:
· Scenario testing, which examines the impact of a hypothetical future state to define changes in risk factors.
· Sensitivity testing, which examines the impact of an incremental change to one or more risk factors.
The process for stress testing consists of four broad stages:
Define scenarios |
· Identify RBS-specific vulnerabilities and risks. · Define and calibrate scenarios to examine risks and vulnerabilities. · Formal governance process to agree scenarios. |
Assess impact |
· Translate scenarios into risk drivers. · Assess impact to positions, income and costs. · Impact assessment captures input from across RBS. |
Calculate results and assess implications |
· Aggregate impacts into overall results. · Results form part of risk management process. · Scenario results are used to inform RBSs business and capital plans. |
Develop and agree management actions |
· Scenario results are analysed by subject matter experts and appropriate management actions are then developed. · Scenario results and management actions are reviewed and agreed by senior management through executive committees including Executive Risk Committee, Board Risk Committee and the Board. |
Capital and risk management
Risk management framework continued
Stress testing is used widely across RBS. The diagram below summarises key areas of focus:
Specific areas that involve capital management include:
· Strategic financial and capital planning through assessing the impact of sensitivities and scenarios on the capital plan and capital ratios.
· Risk appetite through gaining a better understanding of the drivers of and the underlying risks associated with risk appetite.
· Risk identification through a better understanding of the risks that could potentially impact RBSs financial strength and capital position.
· Risk mitigation through identifying actions that can be taken to mitigate risks, or could be taken, in the event of adverse changes to the business or economic environment. Risk mitigation is substantially supplemented through RBSs recovery plan.
Reverse stress testing is also carried out. This examines circumstances that can lead to specific, defined outcomes such as business failure. Reverse stress testing allows RBS to examine potential vulnerabilities in its business model more fully.
Capital sufficiency going-concern forward-looking view
With a view to ensuring that RBS and its operating subsidiaries maintain sufficient CET1 capital, going-concern capital requirements are assessed on a forward-looking basis including as part of the annual budgeting process. These assessments consider the resilience of capital adequacy and leverage ratios under a range of hypothetical future states. The assessments incorporate assumptions regarding a range of regulatory and accounting aspects such as IFRS 9, taking account of a number of factors including economic variables and impairments.
In particular, assessments of capital requirements rely on forecasts of:
· Future business performance given expectations of economic and market conditions over the forecast period.
· Future business performance under adverse economic and market conditions over the forecast period. A range of scenarios of different severity may be examined.
The examination of capital requirements under normal economic and market conditions enables RBS to demonstrate how its projected business performance allows it to meet all internal and regulatory capital requirements as they arise over the plan horizon. For example, RBS will assess its ability to issue loss-absorbing debt instruments in sufficient quantity to meet regulatory timelines. The cost of issuance will be factored into business performance metrics.
The examination of capital requirements under adverse economic and market conditions is assessed through stress testing.
The results of stress tests are not only used widely across RBS but also by the regulators to set specific capital buffers. RBS takes part in a number of stress tests run by regulatory authorities to test industry-wide vulnerabilities under crystallising global and domestic systemic risks. In 2018, RBS took part in the Bank of England and European Banking Authority stress tests. Details are set out on page 105.
Under stress testing, IFRS 9 volatility can have a more material impact. This is because the peak-to-trough change in CET1 may be affected by the transitions from Stage 1 to Stage 2 in stress conditions. RBS uses stress and the peak-to-trough movements to help assess the amount of CET1 capital it needs to hold in stress conditions, in accordance with the capital risk appetite framework.
Internal assessment of capital adequacy
An internal assessment of material risks is carried out annually to enable an evaluation of the amount, type and distribution of capital required to cover these risks. This is referred to as the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP). The ICAAP consists of a point-in-time assessment of RBSs exposures and risks at the end of the financial year together with a forward-looking stress capital assessment. The ICAAP is approved by the Board and submitted to the PRA.
The ICAAP is used to form a view of capital adequacy separately to the minimum regulatory requirements. The ICAAP is used by the PRA to make an assessment of RBS-specific capital requirements through the Pillar 2 framework.
Capital allocation
RBS has mechanisms to allocate capital across its legal entities and businesses which aim to optimise the utilisation of capital resources taking into account applicable regulatory requirements, strategic and business objectives and risk appetite. The framework for allocating capital is approved by the Asset & Liability Management Committee.
Governance
Capital management is subject to substantial review and governance. Formal approval of capital management policies is either by the Asset & Liability Management Committee or by the Board on the recommendation of the Board Risk Committee.
The Board approves the capital plans, including those for key legal entities and businesses as well as the results of the stress tests relating to those capital plans.
Stress testing liquidity
Liquidity risk monitoring and contingency planning
In implementing the liquidity risk management framework, a suite of tools is used to monitor, limit and stress test the risks on the balance sheet. Limit frameworks are in place to control the level of liquidity risk, asset and liability mismatches and funding concentrations.
Liquidity risks are reviewed at significant legal entity and business levels daily, with performance reported to the Asset & Liability Management Committee at least monthly. Liquidity Condition Indicators are monitored daily which ensures any build-up of stress is detected early and the response escalated appropriately through recovery planning.
Internal assessment of liquidity
Under the liquidity risk management framework, RBS undertakes the Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process. This includes assessment of net stressed liquidity outflows. RBS considers a range of extreme but plausible stress scenarios on its liquidity position over various time horizons, as outlined below.
Capital and risk management
Risk management framework continued
Type |
Description |
Idiosyncratic scenario |
The market perceives RBS to be suffering from a severe stress event, which results in an immediate assumption of increased credit risk or concerns over solvency. |
Market-wide scenario |
A market stress event affecting all participants in a market through contagion, counterparty failure and other market risks. RBS is affected under this scenario but no more severely than any other participants with equivalent exposure. |
Combined scenario |
This scenario models the combined impact of an idiosyncratic and market stress occurring at once. The combined scenario reflects the contingency that a severe name-specific event occurs at RBS in conjunction with a broader market stress, causing wider damage to the market and financial sector and severely affecting funding markets and assets. |
RBS uses the most severe combination of these to set the internal stress testing scenario. The results of this enable RBS to set its internal liquidity risk appetite, which complements the regulatory liquidity coverage ratio requirement.
Stress testing recovery and resolution planning
The RBS Group Recovery Plan explains how The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (RBSG) and its subsidiaries as a consolidated group would identify and respond to a financial stress event and restore its financial position to remain viable on an ongoing basis.
The Recovery Plan ensures that risks which could delay the implementation of a recovery strategy are highlighted and preparations are made to minimise the impact of these risks. Preparations RBS has taken include:
· developing a series of recovery indicators to provide early warning of potential stress events
· clarifying roles, responsibilities and escalation routes to minimise uncertainty or delay
· developing a recovery playbook to provide a concise description of the actions required during recovery
· detailing a range of options to address different stress conditions
· appointing dedicated option owners to reduce the risk of delay and bandwidth concerns
The Recovery Plan is intended to enable RBS to maintain critical services and products it provides to its customers (its critical economic functions), maintain its important business lines (core business lines) and operate within risk appetite whilst restoring the banks financial condition.
The Recovery Plan is assessed for appropriateness on an ongoing basis and is updated annually, in line with regulatory requirements. It is reviewed and approved by the Board prior to submission to the PRA each year.
Individual Recovery Plans have been prepared for NatWest Holdings Limited, NatWest Markets Plc, RBS International Holdings Limited, Ulster Bank Ireland DAC and NatWest Markets N.V. These plans reflect the structure and operations of the post-ring-fenced group and detail the recovery options, recovery indicators and escalation routes for each entity to manage its own response to a financial stress.
If RBS was assessed by the UK authorities as failing or likely to fail the authorities have a wide range of powers to place RBS into Resolution. The UKs Special Resolution Regime places an obligation on banks to ensure they are resolvable. Resolvability is a measure of how effectively a set of actions could be taken to manage the failure of RBS, through execution of a preferred resolution strategy which the Group is Single Point of Entry Bail-in of the Group Hold Co. The process of resolution is owned and implemented by the Bank of England (as UK Resolution Authority).
RBS has a multi-year programme of work through to 1 January 2022 to ensure impediments to resolvability are removed and the regulatory resolution strategy could be executed.
Stress testing market risk
Non-traded market risk
Non-traded exposures are reported to the PRA on a quarterly basis as part of the Stress Testing Data Framework. The return provides the regulator with an overview of RBSs banking book interest rate exposure, providing detailed product information analysed by interest rate driver and other characteristics including accounting classification, currency and, counterparty type.
Scenario analysis based on hypothetical adverse scenarios is performed on non-traded exposures as part of the industry-wide Bank of England and European Banking Authority stress exercises. In addition, RBS produces its own internal scenario analysis as part of the financial planning cycles.
Non-traded market risk exposures which are not captured under Pillar 1 are capitalised through the ICAAP. The process covers the following risk types: gap risk, basis risk, credit spread risk, pipeline risk, structural foreign exchange risk, prepayment risk and accounting volatility risk. The ICAAP is completed with a combination of value and earnings measures. The total non-traded market risk capital requirement is determined by adding the different charges for each sub risk type. The ICAAP methodology captures at least ten years of historical volatility, produced with 99% confidence level. Methodologies are reviewed by RBS Model Risk and the results are approved by the Technical Asset & Liability Management Committee.
Traded market risk
RBS undertakes daily market risk stress testing to identify vulnerabilities and potential losses in excess of, or not captured in, value-at-risk. The calculated stresses measure the impact of changes in risk factors on the fair values of the trading and fair value through other comprehensive income portfolios.
RBS conducts historical, macroeconomic and vulnerability-based stress testing. Historical stress testing is a measure that is used for internal management. Using the historical simulation framework employed for value-at-risk, the current portfolio is stressed using historical data since 1 January 2005. This methodology simulates the impact of the 99.9 percentile loss that would be incurred by historical risk factor movements over the period, assuming variable holding periods specific to the risk factors and the businesses.
Historical stress tests form part of the market risk limit framework and their results are reported daily to senior management. Macroeconomic stress tests are carried out periodically as part of the bank-wide, cross-risk capital planning process. The scenario narratives are translated into risk factor shocks using historical events and insights by economists, risk managers and the first line.
Market risk stress results are combined with those for other risks into the capital plan presented to the Board. The cross-risk capital planning process is conducted once a year, with a planning horizon of five years. The scenario narratives cover both regulatory scenarios and macroeconomic scenarios identified by RBS.
Vulnerability-based stress testing begins with the analysis of a portfolio and expresses its key vulnerabilities in terms of plausible, vulnerability scenarios under which the portfolio would suffer material losses. These scenarios can be historical, macroeconomic or forward-looking/hypothetical. Vulnerability-based stress testing is used for internal management information and is not subject to limits. However, the results for relevant scenarios are reported to senior management
Capital and risk management
Risk management framework continued
Regulatory stress testing
In 2018, RBS took part in regulatory stress tests conducted by the Bank of England and the European Banking Authority. The scenarios are hypothetical in nature and do not represent forecasts of RBSs future business or profitability. The results of the regulatory stress tests are carefully assessed by RBS and form part of the wider risk management of RBS.
|
Bank of England stress test |
European Banking Authority stress test |
Scenario |
· Designed to assess the resilience of major UK banks to tail risk events. The severity of the test is related to policymakers assessments of risk levels across markets and regions. · The 2018 stress test examined the impact, over five years, of deep simultaneous recessions in the UK and global economies, large falls in asset prices and a separate stress of misconduct costs. The economic scenario in the test was more severe than the global financial crisis.
|
· Designed to evaluate the impact, over three years, of a general macro financial downturn. · A static balance sheet assumption was made across the period of stress and therefore mitigating actions such as balance sheet reduction, business growth and cost savings are not factored into the stress outcomes. |
Results |
· On an IFRS 9 transitional basis, the CET1 ratio reached a low point of 9.6%, significantly above the hurdle rate of 7.3%. · On an IFRS 9 non-transitional basis, the CET1 ratio reached a low point of 9.2%, significantly above the hurdle rate of 6.9%. · On an IFRS 9 transitional basis, the Tier 1 leverage ratio low point was projected to be 5.1% under stress, significantly above the leverage ratio hurdle rate of 3.59%. · On an IFRS 9 non- transitional basis, the Tier 1 leverage ratio low-point was projected to be 4.8% under stress, significantly above the leverage ratio hurdle rate of 3.25%. · The stress was based on an end of 2017 balance sheet starting position. Since then, RBS has taken a number of actions to further improve its capital position stress resilience, including the continued reduction in certain credit portfolios and the resolution of various litigation cases and regulatory investigations.
|
· The 2018 EBA stress test did not contain a pass/fail threshold. · On an IFRS 9 transitional basis, RBSs CET1 ratio under the adverse scenario reached a low point of 9.9% · On an IFRS 9 non-transitional (fully loaded) basis, RBSs CET1 ratio under the adverse scenario reached a low point of 9.48% · On an IFRS 9 transitional basis, RBSs leverage ratio under the adverse scenario reached a low point of 4.83%. · On an IFRS 9 non-transitional (fully loaded) basis the leverage ratio under the adverse scenario reaches a low point of 4.1% · The stress was based on an end of 2017 balance sheet starting position. Since then, RBS has taken a number of actions to further improve its capital position stress resilience, including the continued reduction in certain credit portfolios and the resolution of various litigation cases and regulatory investigations. |
What does this mean?
|
· The 2018 Bank of England and European Banking Authority stress test results demonstrated that good progress has been made in transforming the balance sheet to a safe and sustainable position. |
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk
Definitions
Capital consists of reserves and instruments issued that are available, have a degree of permanency and are capable of absorbing losses. A number of strict conditions set by regulators must be satisfied to be eligible as capital.
Capital adequacy risk is the risk that there is or will be insufficient capital and other loss absorbing debt instruments to operate effectively including meeting minimum regulatory requirements, operating within Board approved risk appetite and supporting its strategic goals.
Liquidity consists of assets that can be readily converted to cash within a short timeframe at a reliable value. Liquidity risk is the risk of being unable to meet financial obligations as and when they fall due.
Funding consists of on-balance sheet liabilities that are used to provide cash to finance assets. Funding risk is the risk of not maintaining a diversified, stable and cost-effective funding base.
Liquidity and funding risks arise in a number of ways, including through the maturity transformation role that banks perform. The risks are dependent on factors such as:
· Maturity profile;
· Composition of sources and uses of funding;
· The quality and size of the liquidity portfolio;
· Wholesale market conditions; and
· Depositor and investor behaviour.
Sources of risk
Capital
The eligibility of instruments and financial resources as regulatory capital is laid down by applicable regulation. Capital is categorised under two tiers (Tier 1 and Tier 2) according to the ability to absorb losses, degree of permanency and the ranking of absorbing losses on either a going or gone concern basis. There are three broad categories of capital across these two tiers:
· CET1 capital. CET1 capital must be perpetual and capable of unrestricted and immediate use to cover risks or losses as soon as these occur. This includes ordinary shares issued and retained earnings.
· Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital. This is the second type of loss absorbing capital and must be capable of absorbing losses on a going concern basis. These instruments are either written down or converted into CET1 capital when a pre-specified CET1 ratio is reached.
· Tier 2 capital. Tier 2 capital is the Groups supplementary capital and provides loss absorption on a gone concern basis. Tier 2 capital absorbs losses after Tier 1 capital. It typically consists of subordinated debt securities with a minimum maturity of five years.
Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL)
In addition to capital, other specific loss absorbing instruments, including senior notes issued by the Group, may be used to cover certain gone concern capital requirements which, in the EU, is referred to as MREL. Gone concern refers to the situation in which resources must be available to enable an orderly resolution, in the event that the Bank of England (BoE) deems that the Group has failed, or is likely to fail.
Liquidity
RBS maintains a prudent approach to the definition of liquidity resources. RBS manages its liquidity to ensure it is always available when and where required, taking into account regulatory, legal and other constraints. Following ring-fencing legislation, liquidity is no longer considered fungible across the Group and the liquidity portfolio has been restructured during 2018 to reflect this. Principal liquidity portfolios are maintained in the UK Domestic Liquidity Sub-Group (UK DoLSub) (primarily in NatWest Bank Plc), UBI DAC, NatWest Markets Plc, RBS International and NWM N.V.. Some disclosures in this section where relevant are presented, on a consolidated basis, for RBS, the UK DoLSub and on a solo basis for NatWest Markets plc.
Liquidity resources are divided into primary and secondary liquidity as follows:
· Primary liquid assets include cash and balances at central banks, Treasury bills and other high quality government and US agency bonds.
· Secondary liquid assets are eligible as collateral for local central bank liquidity facilities. These assets include own-issued securitisations or whole loans that are retained on balance sheet and pre-positioned with a central bank so that they may be converted into additional sources of liquidity at very short notice.
Funding
RBS maintains a diversified set of funding sources, including customer deposits, wholesale deposits and term debt issuance. RBS also retains access to central bank funding facilities.
For further details on capital constituents and the regulatory framework covering capital, liquidity and funding requirements, please refer to the RBS Pillar 3 Report 2018 on page 6. For MREL refer to page 8.
Key developments in 2018
· RBS continued to strengthen and de-risk its capital position; CET1 ratio remains ahead of the c14% target and increased by 30 basis points in the year to 16.2%. The directors have recommended a final dividend of 3.5p per ordinary share, and a further special dividend of 7.5p per ordinary share, which are both subject to shareholders approval at the Annual General Meeting on 25 April 2019.
· IFRS 9 adoption on 1 January 2018 favourably impacted CET1 by 30 basis points. RWAs reduced by £12.2 billion to £188.7 billion primarily driven by the legacy business in NatWest Markets, the impact of capital initiatives in Commercial Banking and the impact of the non-performing loan sale and improvement in credit metrics in Ulster Bank RoI.
· CRR leverage ratio increased to 5.4% (2017 5.3%). UK leverage ratio improved to 6.2% (2017 6.1%) in line with the balance sheet reduction.
· During the year the BOE published indicative data on the minimum amount of loss-absorbing resources for the larger UK banks comprising MREL plus buffers. RBS is expected to require loss-absorbing resources of 22.9% of RWAs by 1 January 2020, rising to 26.5% by 1 January 2022. Total loss absorbing capital, based on RBSs interpretation of the rules and including the benefit of legacy securities, was 30.7% of RWAs at 31 December 2018.
· In 2018, RBSG plc issued approximately £7 billion MREL compliant senior debt bringing the total MREL senior debt issues to approximately £16 billion relative to the end state (1 January 2022) requirements of approximately £24 billion. These funds enabled RBSG plc to invest in £4.8 billion of NatWest Holdings MREL eligible issuance and £5.1 billion NWM plc eligible issuance in December 2018.
· During the year, RBS changed its approach to managing liquidity in preparation for ring-fencing. NatWest Markets left the UK DoLSub and now manages its liquidity on a stand-alone basis.
· The liquidity portfolio increased by £11 billion in 2018 to £198 billion, with primary liquidity increasing by £4 billion to £128 billion. The increase in primary liquidity is driven by increased customer surplus within NatWest Holdings, reduced funding requirement in NatWest Markets and net term issuance, partially offset by settlement of the payment to the US Department of Justice, contribution to the Group pension fund and Term Funding Scheme (TFS) repayment. Increase in secondary liquidity is driven primarily by repayment of TFS, resulting in the return of previously encumbered assets.
· The rise in primary liquidity resulted in higher liquidity coverage ratio (LCR) of 158% (2017 152%). The internal Stressed Outflow coverage ratio decreased to 154% (2017 168%) due to stress methodology changes and higher stressed behavioural outflows over the three month horizon.
· The net stable funding ratio is 141% (2017 139% on estimated comparable basis) above the minimum target of 100%.
· The regulatory agenda continues to rapidly evolve in the UK, Europe and internationally. RBS manages its capital, liquidity and funding to meet both current and future regulatory requirements whilst ensuring that we continue to serve customers well.
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued
Capital management
Capital management ensures that there is sufficient capital and other loss absorbing instruments to operate effectively including meeting minimum regulatory requirements, operating within Board approved risk appetite, maintaining its credit rating and supporting its strategic goals.
Capital management is critical in supporting the businesses and is enacted through an end to end framework across businesses and the legal entities. Capital is managed both on a Group consolidated level, as well as at NatWest Holdings Group, NatWest Markets Plc, NatWest Markets NV, and RBS International levels. In addition, NatWest Holdings banking subsidiaries are also subject to the same principles, processes and management as the Group of which it is a part. Note that although the aforementioned entities are regulated in line with Basel III principles, local implementation of the framework differs across geographies.
Capital planning is integrated into the Groups wider annual budgeting process and is assessed and updated at least monthly. Regular returns are submitted to the PRA which include a two year rolling forward view. Other elements of capital management, including risk appetite and stress testing, are set out on pages 104 and 105.
Produce capital plans
i |
· Capital plans are produced for the Group, its key operating entities and its businesses over a five year planning horizon under expected and stress conditions. Stressed capital plans are produced to support internal stress testing in the ICAAP for regulatory purposes. · Shorter term forecasts are developed frequently in response to actual performance, changes in internal and external business environment and to manage risks and opportunities. |
Assess capital adequacy
i |
· Capital plans are developed to maintain capital of sufficient quantity and quality to support the Groups business, its subsidiaries and strategic plans over the planning horizon within approved risk appetite, as determined via stress testing, and minimum regulatory requirements. · Capital resources and capital requirements are assessed across a defined planning horizon. · Impact assessment captures input from across the Group including from businesses. |
Inform capital actions |
· Capital planning informs potential capital actions including buy backs, redemptions, dividends and new issuance to external investors or via internal transactions. · Decisions on capital actions will be influenced by strategic and regulatory requirements, risk appetite, costs and prevailing market conditions. · As part of capital planning, RBS will monitor its portfolio of external capital securities and assess the optimal blend and most cost effective means of financing. |
Capital planning is one of the tools that the Group uses to monitor and manage capital risk on a going and gone concern basis, including the risk of excessive leverage.
Liquidity risk management
RBS manages its liquidity risk taking into account regulatory, legal and other constraints to ensure sufficient liquidity is available where required to cover liquidity stresses. The principal levels at which liquidity risk is managed are:
· NatWest Holdings Group
· UK DoLSub
· UBI DAC
· NatWest Markets
· NatWest Markets Securities Inc.
· RBS International
· NWM N.V.
The UK DoLSub is PRA regulated and comprises RBSs four licensed deposit taking UK banks: National Westminster Bank Plc, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Coutts & Company and Ulster Bank Limited.
NatWest Markets Plc left the UK DoLSub during 2018 and now manages its own liquidity portfolio, as required by ring-fencing legislation.
RBS categorises its liquidity portfolio, including its locally managed liquidity portfolios, into primary and secondary liquid assets. The size of the liquidity portfolios are determined by referencing RBSs liquidity risk appetite. RBS retains a prudent approach to setting the composition of the liquidity portfolios, which is subject to internal policies applicable to all entities and limits over quality of counterparty, maturity mix and currency mix.
RBS International, NWM N.V. and UBI DAC hold locally managed portfolios that comply with local regulations that may differ from PRA rules.
The liquidity value of the portfolio is determined by taking current market prices and applying a discount or haircut, to give a liquidity value that represents the amount of cash that can be generated by the asset.
Funding risk management
RBS manages funding risk through a comprehensive framework which measures and monitors the funding risk on the balance sheet.
Asset and liability types broadly match. Customer deposits provide more funding than customer loans utilise; repurchase agreements are largely covered by reverse repurchase agreements; derivative assets are broadly netted against derivative liabilities.
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued
Minimum requirements
Capital adequacy ratios
The Group is subject to minimum capital requirements relative to RWAs. The table below summarises the minimum ratios of capital to RWAs that the Group is expected to have to meet once CRR is fully implemented by 1 January 2019. These ratios apply at the consolidated group level. Different minimum capital requirements may apply to individual legal entities or sub-groups.
Minimum requirements |
|
Type |
|
CET1 |
|
Total Tier 1 |
|
Total capital |
System wide |
|
Pillar 1 minimum requirements |
|
4.5% |
|
6.0% |
|
8.0% |
|
|
Capital conservation buffer |
|
2.5% |
|
2.5% |
|
2.5% |
|
|
Countercyclical capital buffer (1) |
|
0.7% |
|
0.7% |
|
0.7% |
|
|
G-SIB buffer (2) |
|
1.0% |
|
1.0% |
|
1.0% |
Bank specific |
|
Pillar 2A(4) |
|
2.0% |
|
2.7% |
|
3.6% |
Total (excluding PRA buffer)(5) |
|
|
|
10.7% |
|
12.9% |
|
15.8% |
Notes:
(1) The countercyclical capital buffer (CCyB) applied to UK designated assets is set by the Financial Policy Committee (FPC). The UK CCyB is currently 1.0% (effective from November 2018). The rate had previously increased from 0.0% to 0.5% (effective June 2018). The Republic of Ireland CCyB is currently 0.0%, the CBI have announced an increase to 1.0% effective July 2019. Foreign exposures may be subject to different CCyB rates depending on the rate set in those jurisdictions. Firm specific CCyB is based on a weighted average at CCyBs applicable to countries in which the Bank has exposures.
(2) Globally systemically important banks (G-SIBs), as designated by the Financial Stability Board (FSB), are subject to an additional capital buffer of between 1% and 3.5%. In November 2018 the FSB announced that RBS is no longer a GSIB. From 1 January 2020, RBS will be released from this global buffer requirement.
(3) The Group will be subject to a systemic risk buffer (SRB) of between 0% and 3%. The SRB will apply from 1 January 2019 and will apply at the ring-fenced bank sub-group level rather than at the consolidated group level. The RFB SRB may require the Group to hold a minimum amount of capital at the consolidated group level beyond the levels set out in the table above.
(4) From 1 January 2015, UK banks have been required to meet at least 56% of its Pillar 2A capital requirement with CET1 capital and with balance with Additional Tier 1 and/or Tier 2 capital. Additional capital requirements under Pillar 2A may be specified by the PRA as a ratio or as an absolute value. The table sets out an implied ratio to cover the full value of Pillar 2A requirements. The PRA has recently determined that the Pillar 2A capital requirement for 2018 remains unchanged.
(5) The Group may be subject to a PRA buffer requirement as set by the PRA. The PRA buffer consists of two components:
- A risk management and governance buffer that is set as a scalar of the Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A requirements. The scalar could range between 10% and 40%.
- A buffer to cover stress risks informed by the results of the BoE concurrent stress testing results.
- The PRA requires that the level of this buffer is not publicly disclosed.
(6) The capital conservation buffer, the countercyclical capital buffer, the G-SIB buffer and systemic risk buffer (where applicable) make up the combined buffer. If the Group fails to meet the combined buffer requirement, it is subject to restrictions on distributions on CET1 instruments, discretionary coupons on AT1 instruments and on payment of variable remuneration or discretionary pension benefits. These restrictions are calculated by reference to the Groups Maximum Distributable Amount (MDA). Where a PRA buffer is applicable, the MDA trigger is below the PRA buffer and MDA restrictions are not automatically triggered if the Group fails to meet its PRA buffer. The MDA is calculated as the amount of interim or year-end profits not yet incorporated into CET1 capital multiplied by a factor ranging from 0 to 0.6 depending on the size of the CET1 shortfall against the combined buffer.
Leverage ratios
The table below summarises the minimum ratios of capital to leverage exposure under the PRA UK leverage framework that the Group must meet. In November 2016, the European Commission published a package of legislative proposals (CRR 2) for the adoption of a legally binding 3% of Tier 1 capital minimum leverage ratio with consideration of a leverage buffer ratio for G-SIBs once a final international agreement had been reached. Different minimum requirements may apply to individual legal entities or sub-groups.
Type |
|
CET1 |
|
Total Tier 1 |
Minimum ratio |
|
2.4375% |
|
3.2500% |
Countercyclical leverage ratio buffer (1) |
|
0.2500% |
|
0.2500% |
Additional leverage ratio buffer |
|
0.3500% |
|
0.3500% |
Total |
|
3.0375% |
|
3.8500% |
Note:
(1) The countercyclical leverage ratio buffer is set at 35% of the Groups CCyB. As noted above the UK CCyB is currently 1.0% (effective from November 2018). The rate had previously increased from 0.0% to 0.5% (effective June 2018). Foreign exposures may be subject to different CCyB rates depending on the rate set in those jurisdictions. On 3 October 2017 the PRA, via revised policy statement (PS21/17), increased the Tier 1 leverage ratio requirement for UK banks by 25 basis points to 3.25% (CET1 requirement of 2.4375%). The PRA minimum leverage ratio requirement is supplemented with a G-SII additional leverage ratio buffer, currently 0.2625% under transitional arrangements (2017 0.175%) increasing to 0.35% from 1 January 2019.
Liquidity and funding ratios
The table below summarises the minimum requirements for key liquidity and funding metrics, under the relevant legislative framework.
Type |
|
From 1 January 2018 |
|
From 1 January 2019 |
Liquidity coverage ratio (LCR) |
|
100% |
|
100% |
Net stable funding ratio (NSFR) (1) |
|
N/A |
|
N/A |
Note:
(1) In November 2016, the European Commission published its proposal for NSFR rules within the EU as part of its CRR2 package of regulatory reforms. CRR2 NSFR is expected to become the regulatory requirement in future within the EU and the UK. RBS has changed its policy on the NSFR to align with its interpretation of the CRR2 proposals with effect from 1 January 2018.
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued
Measurement
Capital, risk-weighted assets and leverage: Key metrics
The table below sets out the key Capital and Leverage ratios.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||
|
|
End-point |
|
PRA transitional |
|
End-point |
|
PRA transitional |
|
|
CRR basis (1) |
|
basis |
|
CRR basis (1) |
|
basis |
Capital |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
CET1 |
|
30.6 |
|
30.6 |
|
32.0 |
|
32.0 |
Tier1 |
|
34.7 |
|
36.2 |
|
36.0 |
|
39.6 |
Total |
|
41.2 |
|
44.2 |
|
42.8 |
|
47.9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RWAs |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Credit risk |
|
137.9 |
|
137.9 |
|
144.7 |
|
144.7 |
Counterparty credit risk |
|
13.6 |
|
13.6 |
|
15.4 |
|
15.4 |
Market risk |
|
14.8 |
|
14.8 |
|
17.0 |
|
17.0 |
Operational risk |
|
22.4 |
|
22.4 |
|
23.8 |
|
23.8 |
Total RWAs |
|
188.7 |
|
188.7 |
|
200.9 |
|
200.9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Capital adequacy ratios |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
CET1 |
|
16.2 |
|
16.2 |
|
15.9 |
|
15.9 |
Tier 1 |
|
18.4 |
|
19.2 |
|
17.9 |
|
19.7 |
Total |
|
21.8 |
|
23.4 |
|
21.3 |
|
23.9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Leverage ratios |
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||
Tier 1 capital (£bn) |
|
34.7 |
|
36.2 |
|
36.0 |
|
39.6 |
CRR leverage exposure (£bn) |
|
644.5 |
|
644.5 |
|
679.1 |
|
679.1 |
CRR leverage ratio (%) |
|
5.4% |
|
5.6% |
|
5.3% |
|
5.8% |
Average Tier 1 capital (£bn) (2) |
|
35.7 |
|
37.9 |
|
36.4 |
|
40.0 |
Average leverage exposure (£bn) (2) |
|
665.2 |
|
665.2 |
|
692.5 |
|
692.5 |
Average leverage ratio (%) (2) |
|
5.4% |
|
5.7% |
|
5.3% |
|
5.8% |
UK leverage ratio |
|
6.2% |
|
6.5% |
|
6.1% |
|
6.7% |
Notes:
(1) CRR as implemented by the Prudential Regulation Authority in the UK, with effect from 1 January 2014. All regulatory adjustments and deductions to CET1 have been applied in full for both bases.
(2) Based on the daily average of on-balance sheet items and three month-end average of off-balance sheet items (2017 three month-end average of both on and off-balance sheet items).
Liquidity key metrics
The table below sets out the key liquidity and related metrics monitored by RBS.
2018 |
|
RBS |
|
UK DoLSub |
Liquidity coverage ratio (1) |
|
158% |
|
153% |
Stressed outflow coverage (2) |
|
154% |
|
147% |
Net stable funding ratio (3) |
|
141% |
|
144% |
2017 |
|
|
|
|
Liquidity coverage ratio (1) |
|
152% |
|
|
Stressed outflow coverage (2) |
|
168% |
|
|
Net stable funding ratio (3) |
|
132% |
|
|
Notes:
(1) On 1 October 2015 the LCR became the PRAs primary regulatory liquidity standard. It is a Pillar 1 metric to which the PRA apply Pillar 2 add-ons. The published LCR excludes Pillar 2 add-ons. RBS calculates the LCR using its own interpretations of the EU LCR Delegated Act, which may change over time and may not be fully comparable with those of other financial institutions.
(2) RBSs stressed outflow coverage (SOC) is an internal measure calculated by reference to liquid assets as a percentage of net stressed contractual and behavioural outflows over three months under the worst of three severe stress scenarios of a market-wide stress, an idiosyncratic stress and a combination of both as per ILAAP. This assessment is performed in accordance with PRA guidance.
(3) In November 2016, the European Commission published its proposal for NSFR rules within the EU as part of its CRR2 package of regulatory reforms. CRR2 NSFR is expected to become the regulatory requirement in future within the EU and the UK. RBS has changed its policy on the NSFR to align with its interpretation of the CRR2 proposals with effect from 1 January 2018. The pro forma CRR2 NSFR at 31 December 2017 under CRR2 proposals is estimated to be 139%.
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued
Capital and leverage: Capital resources (audited)
Capital, RWAs and capital adequacy ratios, on the basis of end-point Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR) and transitional rules, calculated in accordance with PRA definitions, are set out below.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||
|
|
|
|
PRA |
|
PRA |
|
|
|
|
End-point |
|
transitional |
|
End-point |
|
transitional |
|
|
CRR basis |
|
basis |
|
CRR basis |
|
basis |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Shareholders equity (excluding non-controlling interests) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shareholders equity |
|
45,736 |
|
45,736 |
|
48,330 |
|
48,330 |
Preference shares - equity |
|
(496) |
|
(496) |
|
(2,565) |
|
(2,565) |
Other equity instruments |
|
(4,058) |
|
(4,058) |
|
(4,058) |
|
(4,058) |
|
|
41,182 |
|
41,182 |
|
41,707 |
|
41,707 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Regulatory adjustments and deductions |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Own credit |
|
(405) |
|
(405) |
|
(90) |
|
(90) |
Defined benefit pension fund adjustment |
|
(394) |
|
(394) |
|
(287) |
|
(287) |
Cash flow hedging reserve |
|
191 |
|
191 |
|
(227) |
|
(227) |
Deferred tax assets |
|
(740) |
|
(740) |
|
(849) |
|
(849) |
Prudential valuation adjustments |
|
(494) |
|
(494) |
|
(496) |
|
(496) |
Goodwill and other intangible assets |
|
(6,616) |
|
(6,616) |
|
(6,543) |
|
(6,543) |
Expected losses less impairments |
|
(654) |
|
(654) |
|
(1,286) |
|
(1,286) |
Foreseeable ordinary and special dividends |
|
(1,326) |
|
(1,326) |
|
|
|
|
Other regulatory adjustments |
|
(105) |
|
(105) |
|
28 |
|
28 |
|
|
(10,543) |
|
(10,543) |
|
(9,750) |
|
(9,750) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CET1 capital |
|
30,639 |
|
30,639 |
|
31,957 |
|
31,957 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Qualifying instruments and related share premium |
|
4,051 |
|
4,051 |
|
4,041 |
|
4,041 |
Qualifying instruments and related share premium subject to phase out |
|
|
|
1,393 |
|
|
|
3,416 |
Qualifying instruments issued by subsidiaries and held by third parties subject to phase out |
|
|
|
140 |
|
|
|
140 |
AT1 capital |
|
4,051 |
|
5,584 |
|
4,041 |
|
7,597 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Tier 1 capital |
|
34,690 |
|
36,223 |
|
35,998 |
|
39,554 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Qualifying Tier 2 capital |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Qualifying instruments and related share premium |
|
6,301 |
|
6,386 |
|
6,396 |
|
6,501 |
Qualifying instruments issued by subsidiaries and held by third parties |
|
182 |
|
1,565 |
|
369 |
|
1,876 |
Tier 2 capital |
|
6,483 |
|
7,951 |
|
6,765 |
|
8,377 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total regulatory capital |
|
41,173 |
|
44,174 |
|
42,763 |
|
47,931 |
The table below analyses the movement in end-point CRR CET1, AT1 and Tier 2 capital for the year.
|
|
CET1 |
|
AT1 |
|
Tier 2 |
|
Total |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
At 1 January 2018 |
|
31,957 |
|
4,041 |
|
6,765 |
|
42,763 |
Profit for the year |
|
1,381 |
|
|
|
|
|
1,381 |
Own credit |
|
(315) |
|
|
|
|
|
(315) |
Share capital and reserve movements in respect of employee share schemes |
|
77 |
|
|
|
|
|
77 |
Ordinary shares issued |
|
135 |
|
|
|
|
|
135 |
Foreign exchange reserve |
|
308 |
|
|
|
|
|
308 |
FVOCI reserves |
|
88 |
|
|
|
|
|
88 |
Goodwill and intangibles deduction |
|
(73) |
|
|
|
|
|
(73) |
Deferred tax assets |
|
109 |
|
|
|
|
|
109 |
Prudential valuation adjustments |
|
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
2 |
Expected loss less impairment |
|
632 |
|
|
|
|
|
632 |
Pension contribution |
|
(1,476) |
|
|
|
|
|
(1,476) |
Capital instruments issued |
|
|
|
|
|
(89) |
|
(89) |
Net dated subordinated debt/grandfathered instruments |
|
|
|
|
|
(537) |
|
(537) |
Foreign exchange movements |
|
(734) |
|
|
|
334 |
|
(400) |
Foreseeable ordinary and special dividends |
|
(1,326) |
|
|
|
|
|
(1,326) |
Other movements |
|
(126) |
|
10 |
|
10 |
|
(106) |
At 31 December 2018 |
|
30,639 |
|
4,051 |
|
6,483 |
|
41,173 |
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued
Leverage exposure
The leverage exposure is based on the CRR Delegated Act.
|
|
End-point basis(1) | ||
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
Leverage exposure |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
Cash and balances at central banks |
|
88.9 |
|
98.3 |
Trading assets |
|
75.1 |
|
86.0 |
Derivatives |
|
133.3 |
|
160.8 |
Loans |
|
318.0 |
|
321.6 |
Other assets |
|
78.9 |
|
71.4 |
|
|
|
|
|
Total assets |
|
694.2 |
|
738.1 |
|
|
|
|
|
Derivatives |
|
|
|
|
- netting and variation margin |
|
(141.3) |
|
(161.7) |
- potential future exposures |
|
42.1 |
|
49.4 |
Securities financing transactions gross up |
|
2.1 |
|
2.3 |
Undrawn commitments (analysis below) |
|
50.3 |
|
53.1 |
Regulatory deductions and other adjustments |
|
(2.9) |
|
(2.1) |
|
|
|
|
|
CRR Leverage exposure |
|
644.5 |
|
679.1 |
Claims on central banks |
|
(85.0) |
|
(92.0) |
UK leverage exposure |
|
559.5 |
|
587.1 |
Notes:
(1) Based on end-point CRR Tier 1 leverage exposure under the CRR Delegated Act.
(2) The UK leverage ratio excludes central bank claims from the leverage exposure where deposits held are denominated in the same currency and of contractual maturity that is equal or longer than that of the central bank claims.
Weighted undrawn commitments
The table below provides a breakdown of weighted undrawn commitments.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
Unconditionally cancellable credit cards |
|
2.0 |
|
2.1 |
Other unconditionally cancellable items |
|
7.1 |
|
4.7 |
Unconditionally cancellable items (1) |
|
9.1 |
|
6.8 |
|
|
|
|
|
Undrawn commitments <1 year which may not be cancelled |
|
1.7 |
|
1.8 |
Other off-balance sheet items with 20% credit conversion factor (CCF) |
|
0.6 |
|
0.6 |
Items with a 20% CCF |
|
2.3 |
|
2.4 |
|
|
|
|
|
Revolving credit risk facilities |
|
27.1 |
|
27.0 |
Term loans |
|
3.5 |
|
3.6 |
Mortgages |
|
0.2 |
|
|
Other undrawn commitments >1 year which may not be cancelled & off-balance sheet |
|
2.2 |
|
2.1 |
|
|
|
|
|
Items with a 50% CCF |
|
33.0 |
|
32.7 |
Items with a 100% CCF |
|
5.9 |
|
11.2 |
Total |
|
50.3 |
|
53.1 |
Note:
(1) Based on a 10% CCF.
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued
Loss absorbing capital
The following table illustrates the components of estimated loss absorbing capital (LAC) in RBSG plc and operating subsidiaries and includes external issuances only. The table is prepared on a transitional basis, including the benefit of regulatory capital instruments issued from operating companies, to the extent they meet MREL criteria. For further details regarding regulatory requirements in relation to MREL, refer to page 109.
The roll-off profile relating to senior debt and subordinated debt instruments is set out on the next page.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
Balance |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Balance |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Par |
|
sheet |
|
Regulatory |
|
LAC |
|
Par |
|
sheet |
|
Regulatory |
|
LAC |
|
|
value (1) |
|
value |
|
value (2) |
|
value (3) |
|
value (1) |
|
value |
|
value (2) |
|
value (3) |
|
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
CET1 capital (4) |
|
30.6 |
|
30.6 |
|
30.6 |
|
30.6 |
|
32.0 |
|
32.0 |
|
32.0 |
|
32.0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Tier 1 capital: end-point CRR compliant AT1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
of which: RBSG (holdco) |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
of which: RBSG operating subsidiaries (opcos) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Tier 1 capital: end-point CRR non compliant |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
of which: holdco |
|
1.4 |
|
1.6 |
|
1.4 |
|
0.5 |
|
3.5 |
|
3.6 |
|
3.5 |
|
2.6 |
of which: opcos |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
|
1.5 |
|
1.7 |
|
1.5 |
|
0.6 |
|
3.6 |
|
3.7 |
|
3.6 |
|
2.7 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Tier 2 capital: end-point CRR compliant |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
of which: holdco |
|
6.8 |
|
6.7 |
|
6.3 |
|
5.1 |
|
6.5 |
|
6.5 |
|
6.4 |
|
4.9 |
of which: opcos |
|
0.5 |
|
0.5 |
|
0.3 |
|
0.5 |
|
2.3 |
|
2.4 |
|
0.5 |
|
0.5 |
|
|
7.3 |
|
7.2 |
|
6.6 |
|
5.6 |
|
8.8 |
|
8.9 |
|
6.9 |
|
5.4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Tier 2 capital: end-point CRR non compliant |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
of which: holdco |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.3 |
|
0.4 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
of which: opcos |
|
1.9 |
|
2.0 |
|
1.4 |
|
1.6 |
|
2.1 |
|
2.3 |
|
1.5 |
|
2.0 |
|
|
2.0 |
|
2.1 |
|
1.5 |
|
1.7 |
|
2.4 |
|
2.7 |
|
1.6 |
|
2.1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Senior unsecured debt securities issued by: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RBSG holdco |
|
16.8 |
|
16.8 |
|
|
|
15.5 |
|
9.3 |
|
9.2 |
|
|
|
8.3 |
RBS opcos |
|
17.1 |
|
16.9 |
|
|
|
|
|
14.4 |
|
14.7 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
33.9 |
|
33.7 |
|
|
|
15.5 |
|
23.7 |
|
23.9 |
|
|
|
8.3 |
Total |
|
79.3 |
|
79.3 |
|
44.2 |
|
58.0 |
|
74.5 |
|
75.2 |
|
48.1 |
|
54.5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RWAs |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
188.7 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
200.9 |
CRR leverage exposure |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
644.5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
679.1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
LAC as a ratio of RWAs |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
30.7% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
27.1% |
LAC as a ratio of CRR leverage exposure |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
9.0% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.0% |
Notes:
(1) Par value reflects the nominal value of securities issued.
(2) Regulatory capital instruments issued from operating companies are included in the transitional LAC calculation, to the extent they meet the MREL criteria.
(3) LAC value reflects RBSs interpretation of the Bank of Englands approach to setting a minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL), published in June 2018. MREL policy and requirements remain subject to further potential development, as such RBS estimated position remains subject to potential change. Liabilities excluded from LAC include instruments with less than one year remaining to maturity, structured debt, operating company senior debt, and other instruments that do not meet the MREL criteria. Includes Tier 1 and Tier 2 securities prior to incentive to redeem.
(4) Corresponding shareholders equity was £45.7 billion (2017 - £48.3 billion).
(5) Regulatory amounts reported for AT1, Tier 1 and Tier 2 instruments are before grandfathering restrictions imposed by CRR.
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued
Roll-off profile
The following table illustrates the roll-off profile and weighted average spreads of RBSs major wholesale funding programmes.
|
|
As at and |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
for year ended |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Senior debt roll-off profile (1) |
|
31 December |
Roll-off profile |
|
| |||||||||
RBSG |
|
2018 |
|
H1 2019 |
|
H2 2019 |
|
2020 |
|
2021 |
|
2022 & 2023 |
|
2024 & later |
- amount (£m) |
|
16,830 |
|
535 |
|
781 |
|
2 |
|
|
|
7,037 |
|
8,474 |
- weighted average rate spread (bps) |
|
205 |
|
129 |
|
283 |
|
162 |
|
|
|
224 |
|
187 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NWM Plc |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- amount (£m) |
|
16,523 |
|
3,186 |
|
3,239 |
|
4,704 |
|
2,066 |
|
2,022 |
|
1,306 |
- weighted average rate spread (bps) |
|
102 |
|
13 |
|
177 |
|
123 |
|
91 |
|
80 |
|
117 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NatWest Plc |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- amount (£m) |
|
329 |
|
253 |
|
77 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- weighted average rate spread (bps) |
|
7 |
|
4 |
|
15 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Securitisation |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- amount (£m) |
|
1,375 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,375 |
- weighted average rate spread (bps) |
|
418 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
418 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Covered bonds |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- amount (£m) |
|
5,367 |
|
|
|
|
|
3,145 |
|
|
|
|
|
2,222 |
- weighted average rate spread (bps) |
|
122 |
|
|
|
|
|
99 |
|
|
|
|
|
156 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total notes issued (£m) |
|
40,424 |
|
3,974 |
|
4,097 |
|
7,852 |
|
2,066 |
|
9,059 |
|
13,377 |
Weighted average spread |
|
158 |
|
27 |
|
194 |
|
113 |
|
91 |
|
192 |
|
200 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Subordinated debt instruments roll-off profile (2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RBSG (£m) |
|
6,815 |
|
1,003 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4,049 |
|
1,763 |
NWM Plc (£m) |
|
658 |
|
|
|
36 |
|
99 |
|
|
|
450 |
|
73 |
NatWest Plc (£m) |
|
1,159 |
|
727 |
|
|
|
|
|
343 |
|
90 |
|
|
NWM N.V. (£m) |
|
668 |
|
147 |
|
65 |
|
11 |
|
|
|
106 |
|
339 |
UBI DAC (£m) |
|
76 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
76 |
Total (£m) |
|
9,377 |
|
1,876 |
|
101 |
|
110 |
|
343 |
|
4,695 |
|
2,252 |
Notes:
(1) Based on final contractual instrument maturity.
(2) Based on first call date of instrument, however this does not indicate RBSs strategy on capital and funding management. The table above does not include debt accounted Tier 1 instruments although those instruments form part of the total subordinated debt balance.
(3) The weighted average spread reflects the average net funding cost to RBS and is calculated on an indicative basis.
(4) The roll-off table is based on sterling-equivalent balance sheet values.
Risk-weighted assets
The table below analyses the movement in credit risk RWAs on the end-point CRR basis during the year, by key drivers.
|
|
|
|
Counterparty |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Credit risk |
|
credit risk |
|
Market risk |
|
Operational risk |
|
Total RWAs |
|
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
At 1 January 2018 (1) |
|
144.6 |
|
15.4 |
|
17.0 |
|
23.8 |
|
200.8 |
Foreign exchange movement |
|
1.0 |
|
(0.1) |
|
|
|
|
|
0.9 |
Business movements |
|
(11.3) |
|
(0.9) |
|
(1.4) |
|
(1.4) |
|
(15.0) |
Risk parameter changes (2) |
|
(0.9) |
|
(0.1) |
|
|
|
|
|
(1.0) |
Methodology changes |
|
|
|
|
|
(0.2) |
|
|
|
(0.2) |
Model updates |
|
4.5 |
|
|
|
(0.6) |
|
|
|
3.9 |
Other movements |
|
|
|
(0.7) |
|
|
|
|
|
(0.7) |
At 31 December 2018 |
|
137.9 |
|
13.6 |
|
14.8 |
|
22.4 |
|
188.7 |
Notes:
(1) There was a £0.1 billion reduction in RWAs from 31 December 2017 to 1 January 2018 reflecting the day one impact of the adoption of IFRS 9.
(2) Risk parameter changes relate to changes in credit quality metrics of customers and counterparties (such as probability of default and loss given default) as well as IRB model changes relating to counterparty credit risk in line with EBA Pillar 3 Guidelines.
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued
RWAs by segment
The chart below illustrates the concentration of risk-weighted assets by segment.
The table below analyses the movement in end-point CRR RWAs by segment during the year.
|
|
|
|
Ulster |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Central |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bank |
|
Commercial |
|
Private |
|
|
|
NatWest |
|
items |
|
|
|
|
UK PBB |
|
RoI |
|
Banking |
|
Banking |
|
RBSI |
|
Markets |
|
& other |
|
Total |
Total RWAs |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
At 1 January 2018 (1) |
|
43.0 |
|
18.0 |
|
71.8 |
|
9.1 |
|
5.1 |
|
52.9 |
|
0.9 |
|
200.8 |
Foreign exchange movement |
|
|
|
0.1 |
|
0.3 |
|
|
|
|
|
0.4 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.9 |
Business movements |
|
(0.3) |
|
(2.2) |
|
(4.9) |
|
0.3 |
|
0.3 |
|
(8.3) |
|
0.1 |
|
(15.0) |
Risk parameter changes (2) |
|
0.8 |
|
(1.2) |
|
(0.5) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(0.1) |
|
(1.0) |
Methodology changes |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(0.2) |
|
(0.2) |
Model updates |
|
1.7 |
|
|
|
2.9 |
|
|
|
(0.1) |
|
(0.6) |
|
|
|
3.9 |
Other movements |
|
(0.1) |
|
|
|
(2.0) |
|
|
|
1.6 |
|
0.5 |
|
(0.7) |
|
(0.7) |
At 31 December 2018 |
|
45.1 |
|
14.7 |
|
67.6 |
|
9.4 |
|
6.9 |
|
44.9 |
|
0.1 |
|
188.7 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Credit risk |
|
35.8 |
|
13.8 |
|
61.0 |
|
8.3 |
|
6.2 |
|
12.7 |
|
0.1 |
|
137.9 |
Counterparty credit risk |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
13.6 |
|
|
|
13.6 |
Market risk |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
14.8 |
|
|
|
14.8 |
Operational risk |
|
9.3 |
|
0.9 |
|
6.6 |
|
1.1 |
|
0.7 |
|
3.8 |
|
|
|
22.4 |
Total RWAs |
|
45.1 |
|
14.7 |
|
67.6 |
|
9.4 |
|
6.9 |
|
44.9 |
|
0.1 |
|
188.7 |
Notes:
(1) There was a £0.1 billion reduction in RWAs from 31 December 2017 to 1 January 2018 reflecting the day one impact of the adoption of IFRS 9.
(2) Risk parameter changes relate to changes in credit quality metrics of customers and counterparties (such as probability of default and loss given default) as well as IRB model changes relating to counterparty credit risk in line with EBA Pillar 3 Guidelines.
Key points
· RWAs decreased by £12.2 billion (excluding the day one impact of the adoption of IFRS 9) in 2018 primarily driven by the legacy business in NatWest Markets, the impact of capital initiatives in Commercial Banking and Ulster Bank RoI asset sale. These reductions were partially offset by increases in UK PBB and RBSI.
· The decrease in NatWest Markets primarily driven by the legacy business, in addition to reductions in the core business.
· The reduction within Commercial Banking was due to active capital management, partially offset by the impact of model updates and underlying business growth.
· Ulster Bank RoI RWAs reduced principally reflecting the impact of a non-performing loan sale and an improvement in credit metrics.
· RWAs in UK PBB increased mainly due to model updates and movements in risk parameters.
· As part of the preparation for ICB ring-fencing, assets have transferred from UK PBB, Commercial Banking and Treasury into RBSI and NatWest Markets which are shown in other movements. Other movements also reflects NWM Securities Inc. being granted the regulatory waiver to use the AIRB approach to calculate its counterparty credit risk capital requirements.
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued
Liquidity portfolio (audited)
The table below shows the liquidity portfolio by product, liquidity value and carrying value. Liquidity value is lower than carrying value as it is stated after discounts (or haircuts) applied to instruments by the Bank of England and other central banks. Secondary liquidity comprises assets eligible for discount at central Banks but these do not form part of the liquid asset portfolio reported for regulatory LCR purposes or internal stressed outflow coverage purposes.
|
|
Liquidity value | ||||||||
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RBS (1) |
|
UK DoLSub (2) |
|
NWM Plc |
|
RBS |
|
UK DoLSub (2) |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Cash and balances at central banks |
|
83,781 |
|
59,745 |
|
11,005 |
|
93,657 |
|
91,377 |
Central and local government bonds |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AAA rated governments |
|
8,188 |
|
4,386 |
|
615 |
|
3,944 |
|
2,760 |
AA- to AA+ rated governments and US agencies |
|
35,683 |
|
25,845 |
|
5,256 |
|
26,233 |
|
24,084 |
|
|
43,871 |
|
30,231 |
|
5,871 |
|
30,177 |
|
26,844 |
Primary liquidity |
|
127,652 |
|
89,976 |
|
16,876 |
|
123,834 |
|
118,221 |
Secondary liquidity (3) |
|
70,231 |
|
69,642 |
|
344 |
|
62,555 |
|
62,144 |
Total liquidity value |
|
197,882 |
|
159,618 |
|
17,220 |
|
186,389 |
|
180,365 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total carrying value |
|
225,039 |
|
186,340 |
|
17,388 |
|
209,892 |
|
203,733 |
Notes:
(1) RBS includes UK DoLSub, NatWest Markets plc and other significant operating subsidiaries that hold liquidity portfolios. These include RBS International, NWM N.V. and Ulster Bank Ireland DAC who hold managed portfolios that comply with local regulations that may differ from PRA rules.
(2) UK DoLSub comprises RBSs four licensed deposit-taking UK banks within the ring-fenced bank: National Westminster Bank Plc The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Coutts & Co and Ulster Bank Limited. The reduction in the UK DoLSub liquidity balances during 2018 is driven by NatWest Markets and RBS International managing liquidity on a stand-alone basis, with NatWest Markets plc leaving the UK DoLSub during H2 2018 and RBS International building its own liquidity portfolio.
(3) Comprises assets eligible for discounting at the Bank of England and other central banks.
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued
Funding sources (audited)
The table below shows the carrying values of the principal funding sources based on contractual maturity. Balance sheet captions include balances held at all classifications under IFRS 9/IAS 39 but excludes derivative cash collateral.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||||
|
|
Short-term |
|
Long-term |
|
|
|
Short-term |
|
Long-term |
|
|
|
|
less than |
|
more than |
|
|
|
less than |
|
more than |
|
|
|
|
1 year |
|
1 year |
|
Total |
|
1 year |
|
1 year |
|
Total |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Personal and corporate deposits |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Personal (1) |
|
178,293 |
|
1,499 |
|
179,792 |
|
173,314 |
|
1,497 |
|
174,811 |
Corporate (2) |
|
131,575 |
|
142 |
|
131,717 |
|
127,708 |
|
861 |
|
128,569 |
|
|
309,868 |
|
1,641 |
|
311,509 |
|
301,022 |
|
2,358 |
|
303,380 |
Financial institutions deposits |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Banks (3) |
|
6,758 |
|
15,865 |
|
22,623 |
|
7,480 |
|
19,595 |
|
27,075 |
Non-bank financial institutions (NBFI) (4) |
|
46,800 |
|
564 |
|
47,364 |
|
52,284 |
|
1,091 |
|
53,375 |
|
|
53,558 |
|
16,429 |
|
69,987 |
|
59,764 |
|
20,686 |
|
80,450 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Debt securities in issue |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commercial papers (CPs) and certificates of deposits (CDS) |
|
3,157 |
|
|
|
3,157 |
|
4,637 |
|
|
|
4,637 |
Medium-term notes |
|
4,928 |
|
25,596 |
|
30,524 |
|
2,316 |
|
16,902 |
|
19,218 |
Covered bonds |
|
|
|
5,367 |
|
5,367 |
|
987 |
|
5,321 |
|
6,308 |
Securitisations |
|
|
|
1,375 |
|
1,375 |
|
|
|
396 |
|
396 |
|
|
8,085 |
|
32,338 |
|
40,423 |
|
7,940 |
|
22,619 |
|
30,559 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Subordinated liabilities |
|
299 |
|
10,236 |
|
10,535 |
|
2,383 |
|
10,339 |
|
12,722 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Repos (5) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sovereign |
|
405 |
|
|
|
405 |
|
5,243 |
|
|
|
5,243 |
Financial institutions |
|
29,664 |
|
|
|
29,664 |
|
31,891 |
|
|
|
31,891 |
Corporate |
|
291 |
|
|
|
291 |
|
1,287 |
|
|
|
1,287 |
|
|
30,360 |
|
|
|
30,360 |
|
38,421 |
|
|
|
38,421 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total funding |
|
402,170 |
|
60,644 |
|
462,814 |
|
409,530 |
|
56,002 |
|
465,532 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of which: available in resolution (6) |
|
|
|
22,909 |
|
22,909 |
|
|
|
15,840 |
|
15,840 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CET 1 capital |
|
|
|
|
|
30,639 |
|
|
|
|
|
31,957 |
CRR Leverage exposure |
|
|
|
|
|
644,498 |
|
|
|
|
|
679,120 |
Funded assets |
|
|
|
|
|
560,886 |
|
|
|
|
|
577,213 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Funding coverage of CET 1 capital |
|
|
|
|
|
15 |
|
|
|
|
|
15 |
Funding as a % of leverage exposure |
|
|
|
|
|
72% |
|
|
|
|
|
69% |
Funding as a % of funded assets |
|
|
|
|
|
83% |
|
|
|
|
|
81% |
Funding available in resolution as a % of CET1 capital |
|
|
|
|
|
75% |
|
|
|
|
|
50% |
Funding available in resolution as a % of leverage exposure |
|
|
|
|
|
4% |
|
|
|
|
|
2% |
Notes:
(1) |
Includes £206 million (2017 - £190 million) of DFV deposits included in other financial liabilities on the balance sheet. |
(2) |
Includes £428 million (2017 - £691 million) of HFT deposits included in trading liabilities and nil (2017 - £561 million) of DFV deposits included in other financial liabilities on the balance sheet. |
(3) |
Includes £267 million (2017 - £68 million) of HFT deposits included in trading liabilities on the balance sheet. Includes £14.0 billion (2017 - £19.0 billion) relating to Term Funding Scheme participation and £1.8 billion (2017 - £1.8 billion) relating to RBSs participation in central bank financing operations under the European Central Banks Targeted Long-term refinancing operations. |
(4) |
Includes £1,093 million (2017 - £543 million) of HFT deposits included in trading liabilities and £7 million (2017 - £124 million) of DFV deposits included in other financial liabilities on the balance sheet. |
(5) |
Includes held-for-trading repos of £25,645 million (2017 - £28,363 million) and amortised cost repos of £4,715 million (2017 - £10,058 million). |
(6) |
Eligible liabilities (as defined in the Banking Act 2009 as amended from time to time) that meet the eligibility criteria set out in the regulations, rules, policies, guidelines, or statements of the Bank of England including the Statement of Policy published by the Bank of England in June 2018. The balance consist of £16 billion (2017 - £8 billion) under debt securities in issue (senior MREL) and £7 billion (2017 - £8 billion) under subordinated liabilities. |
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued
Contractual maturity (audited)
This table shows the residual maturity of financial instruments, based on contractual date of maturity of RBSs banking activities, including hedging derivatives. Trading activities comprising Mandatory fair value through profit or loss (MFVTPL) assets and held-for-trading (HFT) liabilities have been excluded from the maturity analysis due to their short-term nature and are shown in total in the table below.
|
|
Banking activities |
|
|
|
| ||||||||||||||||
|
|
Less than |
|
|
|
|
|
6 months |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
More than |
|
|
|
Trading |
|
|
|
|
1 month |
|
1-3 months |
|
3-6 months |
|
- 1 year |
|
Subtotal |
|
1-3 years |
|
3-5 years |
|
5 years |
|
Total |
|
activities |
|
Total |
2018 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Central bank balances |
|
88,897 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
88,897 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
88,897 |
|
|
|
88,897 |
Trading assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
75,119 |
|
75,119 |
Derivatives |
|
224 |
|
|
|
|
|
529 |
|
753 |
|
994 |
|
345 |
|
159 |
|
2,251 |
|
131,098 |
|
133,349 |
Settlement balances |
|
2,928 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,928 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,928 |
|
|
|
2,928 |
Loans to banks |
|
11,729 |
|
182 |
|
860 |
|
62 |
|
12,833 |
|
105 |
|
9 |
|
|
|
12,947 |
|
|
|
12,947 |
Loans to customers (1) |
|
35,800 |
|
8,350 |
|
8,626 |
|
17,896 |
|
70,672 |
|
53,500 |
|
41,848 |
|
142,387 |
|
308,407 |
|
|
|
308,407 |
Personal |
|
5,733 |
|
2,475 |
|
3,350 |
|
6,233 |
|
17,791 |
|
21,949 |
|
18,658 |
|
120,728 |
|
179,126 |
|
|
|
179,126 |
Corporate |
|
26,260 |
|
4,499 |
|
4,118 |
|
7,868 |
|
42,745 |
|
27,413 |
|
21,159 |
|
20,417 |
|
111,734 |
|
|
|
111,734 |
NBFI |
|
3,807 |
|
1,376 |
|
1,158 |
|
3,795 |
|
10,136 |
|
4,138 |
|
2,031 |
|
1,242 |
|
17,547 |
|
|
|
17,547 |
Other financial assets |
|
1,252 |
|
3,165 |
|
2,473 |
|
4,754 |
|
11,644 |
|
13,904 |
|
10,630 |
|
21,669 |
|
57,847 |
|
1,638 |
|
59,485 |
Total financial assets |
|
140,830 |
|
11,697 |
|
11,959 |
|
23,241 |
|
187,727 |
|
68,503 |
|
52,832 |
|
164,215 |
|
473,277 |
|
207,855 |
|
681,132 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total financial assets |
|
149,774 |
|
12,333 |
|
11,190 |
|
22,517 |
|
195,814 |
|
64,939 |
|
52,064 |
|
168,380 |
|
481,197 |
|
243,867 |
|
725,064 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
|
4,585 |
|
1,891 |
|
16 |
|
5 |
|
6,497 |
|
13,799 |
|
2,000 |
|
60 |
|
22,356 |
|
|
|
22,356 |
Bank repos |
|
517 |
|
424 |
|
|
|
|
|
941 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
941 |
|
|
|
941 |
Customer repos |
|
3,774 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3,774 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3,774 |
|
|
|
3,774 |
Customer deposits |
|
337,964 |
|
9,310 |
|
4,803 |
|
3,297 |
|
355,374 |
|
1,718 |
|
11 |
|
37 |
|
357,140 |
|
|
|
357,140 |
Personal |
|
170,746 |
|
3,080 |
|
1,835 |
|
2,426 |
|
178,087 |
|
1,499 |
|
|
|
|
|
179,586 |
|
|
|
179,586 |
Corporate |
|
132,994 |
|
3,056 |
|
1,842 |
|
631 |
|
138,523 |
|
83 |
|
1 |
|
35 |
|
138,642 |
|
|
|
138,642 |
NBFI |
|
34,224 |
|
3,174 |
|
1,126 |
|
240 |
|
38,764 |
|
136 |
|
10 |
|
2 |
|
38,912 |
|
|
|
38,912 |
Settlement balances |
|
3,066 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3,066 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3,066 |
|
|
|
3,066 |
Trading liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
72,350 |
|
72,350 |
Derivatives |
|
|
|
181 |
|
306 |
|
|
|
487 |
|
1,062 |
|
416 |
|
978 |
|
2,943 |
|
125,954 |
|
128,897 |
Other financial liabilities |
|
202 |
|
1,386 |
|
2,499 |
|
4,153 |
|
8,240 |
|
9,542 |
|
10,536 |
|
11,414 |
|
39,732 |
|
|
|
39,732 |
CPs and CDs |
|
173 |
|
1,128 |
|
955 |
|
901 |
|
3,157 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3,157 |
|
|
|
3,157 |
Medium-term notes |
|
7 |
|
225 |
|
1,490 |
|
3,149 |
|
4,871 |
|
6,397 |
|
10,536 |
|
7,817 |
|
29,621 |
|
|
|
29,621 |
Covered bonds |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3,145 |
|
|
|
2,222 |
|
5,367 |
|
|
|
5,367 |
Securitisations |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,375 |
|
1,375 |
|
|
|
1,375 |
Customer deposits DFV |
|
22 |
|
33 |
|
54 |
|
103 |
|
212 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
212 |
|
|
|
212 |
Subordinated liabilities |
|
16 |
|
39 |
|
164 |
|
80 |
|
299 |
|
450 |
|
4,534 |
|
5,252 |
|
10,535 |
|
|
|
10,535 |
Other liabilities (2) |
|
2,152 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,152 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,152 |
|
|
|
2,152 |
Total financial liabilities |
|
352,276 |
|
13,231 |
|
7,788 |
|
7,535 |
|
380,830 |
|
26,571 |
|
17,497 |
|
17,741 |
|
442,639 |
|
198,304 |
|
640,943 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total financial liabilities |
|
360,684 |
|
10,564 |
|
8,155 |
|
6,647 |
|
386,050 |
|
16,882 |
|
23,262 |
|
17,167 |
|
443,361 |
|
232,917 |
|
676,278 |
Note:
(1) |
Loans to customers excludes £3,318 million (2017 - £3,814 million) of Impairment provisions. |
(2) |
Represents notes in circulation. |
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued
Funding gap: maturity and segment analysis
The contractual maturity of balance sheet assets and liabilities reflects the maturity transformation role banks perform, lending long-term but mainly obtaining funding through short-term liabilities such as customer deposits. In practice, the behavioural profiles of many liabilities show greater stability and longer maturity than the contractual maturity. This is particularly true of many types of retail and corporate deposits which, despite being repayable on demand or at short notice, have demonstrated very stable characteristics even in periods of acute stress.
In its analysis to assess and manage asset and liability maturity gaps, RBS determines the expected customer behaviour through qualitative and quantitative techniques. These incorporate observed customer behaviours over long periods of time. This analysis is subject to governance through RBS ALCo Technical committee down to a segment level.
The net behavioural funding surplus/(gap) and contractual maturity analysis is set out below.
|
|
Contractual maturity (1) |
|
Behavioural maturity | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
|
Loans to customers |
|
Customer accounts |
|
Net surplus/(gap) |
|
Net surplus/(gap) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
|
Less than |
|
1-5 |
|
Greater than |
|
|
|
Less than |
|
1-5 |
|
Greater than |
|
|
|
Less than |
|
1-5 |
|
Greater than |
|
|
|
Less than |
|
1-5 |
|
Greater than |
|
|
|
|
1 year |
|
years |
|
5 years |
|
Total |
|
1 year |
|
years |
|
5 years |
|
Total |
|
1 year |
|
years |
|
5 years |
|
Total |
|
1 year |
|
years |
|
5 years |
|
Total |
2018 |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
UK PBB |
|
15 |
|
39 |
|
108 |
|
162 |
|
183 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
184 |
|
168 |
|
(38) |
|
(108) |
|
22 |
|
(2) |
|
16 |
|
8 |
|
22 |
UB RoI |
|
2 |
|
6 |
|
11 |
|
19 |
|
18 |
|
|
|
|
|
18 |
|
16 |
|
(6) |
|
(11) |
|
(1) |
|
1 |
|
(3) |
|
1 |
|
(1) |
CB |
|
35 |
|
38 |
|
16 |
|
89 |
|
95 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
96 |
|
60 |
|
(37) |
|
(16) |
|
7 |
|
(1) |
|
20 |
|
(12) |
|
7 |
PB |
|
5 |
|
5 |
|
4 |
|
14 |
|
28 |
|
|
|
|
|
28 |
|
23 |
|
(5) |
|
(4) |
|
14 |
|
2 |
|
1 |
|
11 |
|
14 |
RBSI |
|
6 |
|
5 |
|
3 |
|
14 |
|
28 |
|
|
|
|
|
28 |
|
22 |
|
(5) |
|
(3) |
|
14 |
|
1 |
|
3 |
|
10 |
|
14 |
NWM |
|
17 |
|
3 |
|
1 |
|
21 |
|
13 |
|
|
|
|
|
13 |
|
(4) |
|
(3) |
|
(1) |
|
(8) |
|
(2) |
|
(4) |
|
(2) |
|
(8) |
Centre |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
1 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
1 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
1 |
Total |
|
80 |
|
96 |
|
143 |
|
319 |
|
366 |
|
2 |
|
|
|
368 |
|
286 |
|
(94) |
|
(143) |
|
49 |
|
|
|
33 |
|
16 |
|
49 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total |
|
83 |
|
93 |
|
147 |
|
323 |
|
363 |
|
4 |
|
|
|
367 |
|
280 |
|
(89) |
|
(147) |
|
44 |
|
(6) |
|
24 |
|
26 |
|
44 |
Note:
(1) |
Loans to customers and customer accounts include trading assets and trading liabilities respectively and excludes reverse repos and repos. |
Key points
· The net customer funding surplus has increased by £5billion during 2018 to £49billion driven by £1billion deposit growth and £4billion lending reduction
· Customer deposits and customer loans are broadly matched from a behavioural perspective.
· The net funding surplus in 2018 is concentrated in the longer dated buckets, reflecting the stable characteristics of customer deposits and lending that is behaviourally shorter dated.
Encumbrance (audited)
RBS evaluates the extent to which assets can be financed in a secured form (encumbrance), but certain asset types lend themselves more readily to encumbrance. The typical characteristics that support encumbrance are an ability to pledge those assets to another counterparty or entity through operation of law without necessarily requiring prior notification, homogeneity, predictable and measurable cash flows, and a consistent and uniform underwriting and collection process. Retail assets including residential mortgages, credit card receivables and personal loans display many of these features.
RBS categorises its assets into three broad groups, those that are:
Already encumbered and used to support funding currently in place through own-asset securitisations, covered bonds and securities repurchase agreements.
Pre-positioned with central banks as part of funding schemes and those encumbered under such schemes.
Not currently encumbered. In this category, RBS has in place an enablement programme which seeks to identify assets capable of being encumbered and to identify the actions to facilitate such encumbrance whilst not affecting customer relationships or servicing.
Programmes to manage the use of assets to support funding actively are established within UK DoLSub, UBI DAC and NatWest Markets Plc.
Capital and risk management
Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued
Balance sheet encumbrance (audited)
The table shows the retained encumbered assets of the Group. Derivatives and Reverse Repos are disclosed within the credit risk section on pages 159 and 160.
|
|
Encumbered as a result of transactions with |
|
Pre-positioned |
Unencumbered assets not pre-positioned |
|
| ||||||||||
|
|
counterparties other than central banks |
|
& encumbered |
with central banks |
|
| ||||||||||
|
|
Covered |
|
SFT, |
|
|
|
assets held |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
debts & |
|
Derivatives |
|
|
|
at central |
Readily |
|
Other |
|
Cannot |
|
|
|
|
|
|
securitisations |
|
and similar (2) |
|
Total (3) |
|
banks (4) |
available |
|
available |
|
be used |
|
Total |
|
Total |
2018 |
|
(1) £bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
(5) £bn |
|
(6) £bn |
|
(7) £bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
Cash and balances at central banks |
|
|
|
6.7 |
|
6.7 |
|
|
82.2 |
|
|
|
|
|
82.2 |
|
88.9 |
Trading assets |
|
|
|
49.1 |
|
49.1 |
|
|
|
|
1.3 |
|
24.7 |
|
26.0 |
|
75.1 |
Derivatives |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
133.3 |
|
133.3 |
|
133.3 |
Settlement balances |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.9 |
|
2.9 |
|
2.9 |
Loans to banks - amortised cost |
|
0.4 |
|
1.0 |
|
1.4 |
|
|
6.6 |
|
0.4 |
|
4.5 |
|
11.5 |
|
12.9 |
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- residential mortgages |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- UK |
|
7.1 |
|
|
|
7.1 |
|
110.1 |
20.9 |
|
11.5 |
|
|
|
32.4 |
|
149.6 |
- RoI |
|
2.8 |
|
|
|
2.8 |
|
2.1 |
8.9 |
|
|
|
|
|
8.9 |
|
13.8 |
- credit cards |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.7 |
|
0.3 |
|
|
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
- personal loans |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.8 |
|
2.6 |
|
1.8 |
|
10.2 |
|
10.2 |
- other |
|
2.4 |
|
2.4 |
|
4.8 |
|
4.9 |
2.3 |
|
91.0 |
|
24.5 |
|
117.8 |
|
127.5 |
Other financial assets |
|
|
|
10.4 |
|
10.4 |
|
|
46.0 |
|
0.8 |
|
2.3 |
|
49.1 |
|
59.5 |
Intangible assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6.6 |
|
6.6 |
|
6.6 |
Other assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.3 |
|
7.6 |
|
9.9 |
|
9.9 |
Total assets |
|
12.7 |
|
69.6 |
|
82.3 |
|
117.1 |
176.4 |
|
110.2 |
|
208.2 |
|
494.8 |
|
694.2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total assets |
|
13.7 |
|
69.9 |
|
83.6 |
|
113.1 |
180.0 |
|
118.6 |
|
242.8 |
|
541.4 |
|
738.1 |
Notes:
(1) |
Covered debts and securitisations include securitisations, conduits, covered bonds and secured notes. | |
(2) |
Repos and other secured deposits, cash, coin and nostro balance held with the Bank of England as collateral against deposits and notes in circulation are included here rather than within those positioned at the central bank as they are part of normal banking operations. Securities financing transactions (SFT) include collateral given to secure derivative liabilities. | |
(3) |
Total assets encumbered as a result of transactions with counterparties other than central banks are those that have been pledged to provide security and are therefore not available to secure funding or to meet other collateral needs. | |
(4) |
Assets pre-positioned at the central banks include loans provided as security as part of funding schemes and those encumbered under such schemes. | |
(5) |
Readily available for encumbrance: including assets that have been enabled for use with central banks but not pre-positioned; cash and high quality debt securities that form part of RBSs liquidity portfolio and unencumbered debt securities. | |
(6) |
Other assets that are capable of being encumbered are those assets on the balance sheet that are available for funding and collateral purposes but are not readily realisable in their current form. These assets include loans that could be prepositioned with central banks but have not been subject to internal and external documentation review and diligence work. | |
(7) |
Cannot be used includes: | |
|
(a) |
Derivatives, reverse repurchase agreements and trading related settlement balances. |
|
(b) |
Non-financial assets such as intangibles, prepayments and deferred tax. |
|
(c) |
Loans that cannot be pre-positioned with central banks based on criteria set by the central banks, including those relating to date of origination and level of documentation. |
|
(d) |
Non-recourse invoice financing balances and certain shipping loans whose terms and structure prohibit their use as collateral. |
(8) |
In accordance with market practice, RBS employs securities recognised on the balance sheet, and securities received under reverse repo transactions as collateral for repos. |
Capital and risk management
Credit risk
Definition
Credit risk is the risk that customers fail to meet their contractual obligation to settle outstanding amounts.
The following disclosures in this section are audited:
· Forbearance.
· Impairment, provisioning and write-offs.
· Transition from IAS 39 to IFRS 9.
· Key elements of IFRS 9 impairment provisions:
o Economic loss drivers (excluding economic parameters).
o IFRS 9 credit risk modelling.
o Significant increase in credit risk.
o Asset lifetimes.
· Measurement uncertainty and ECL sensitivity analysis.
· Banking activities (except PDs and additional Stage 2 and Stage 3 analysis).
· Trading activities.
Sources of risk
The principal sources of credit risk for RBS are lending, off-balance sheet products, derivatives and securities financing, and debt securities. RBS is also exposed to settlement risk through foreign exchange, trade finance and payments activities.
Key developments in 2018
· Asset quality (AQ) remained stable with 61% of the loan exposure and other financial assets rated AQ1-AQ4 (1 January 2018 62%) (equating to an indicative investment rating of BBB- or better).
· New mortgage lending declined in 2018 (£32.8 billion compared to £33.9 billion in 2017). The overall personal portfolio increased by £1.7 billion (principally driven by growth of the mortgage portfolio).
· While overall credit quality remained stable in the Wholesale portfolio, risk appetite was tightened in certain sectors where it was considered appropriate based on leading indicator information.
· IFRS 9 Financial Instruments, which covers credit provisions, was implemented with effect from 1 January 2018. In line with expectations, the new accounting standard resulted in an overall increase in provisions compared with the previous accounting standard IAS 39. Further detail is provided later in the report.
· Impairment provisions totalled £3.4 billion at the year end representing coverage on amortised cost loans excluding balances at central banks of 1.1%.
· The ECL charge for the year was £398 million. This reflected the relatively stable external environment.
Risk governance
Credit risk management activities include:
· Defining credit risk appetite for the management of concentration risk and credit policy to establish the key risks in the process of providing credit and the controls that must be in place to mitigate them.
· Approving credit limits for customers.
· Oversight of the first line of defence to ensure that credit risk remains within the risk appetite set by the Board and that credit policy controls are being operated adequately and effectively.
The Chief Credit Officer, Ring-Fenced Bank, chairs the Wholesale and Retail Credit Risk Committees. These committees provide oversight of the aggregated RBS credit risk profile and review, recommend or approve risk appetite limits (depending on their materiality) within the appetite set by the RBS Board.
The Chief Credit Officer, Ring-Fenced Bank, also chairs provisions committees in PBB and CPB. These committees review and approve individually assessed net expected credit losses (ECLs) above agreed approval thresholds and review and approve the adequacy of all portfolio level ECLs in the businesses. Similar provisions committees operate in Ulster Bank RoI, NatWest Markets and RBSI.
Risk appetite
RBSs approach to lending is governed by comprehensive credit risk appetite frameworks. The frameworks are closely monitored and actions are taken to adapt lending criteria as appropriate. Credit risk appetite aligns to the strategic risk appetite set by the Board, which includes capital adequacy, earnings volatility, funding and liquidity, and stakeholder confidence. The credit risk appetite frameworks have been designed to reflect factors (for example, strategic and emerging risks) that influence the ability to operate within risk appetite. Tools such as stress testing and economic capital are used to measure credit risk volatility and develop links between the credit risk appetite frameworks and risk appetite limits. The frameworks are supported by a suite of transaction acceptance standards that set out the risk parameters within which franchises should operate.
The Personal credit risk appetite framework sets limits that measure and control the quality of both existing and new business for each relevant franchise or business segment. The actual performance of each portfolio is tracked relative to these limits and management action is taken where necessary. The limits apply to a range of credit risk-related measures including expected loss at both portfolio and product level, projected credit default rates across products and the loan-to-value (LTV) ratio of the Personal mortgage portfolios.
For Wholesale, the four formal frameworks used and their basis for classification are detailed in the following table.
Framework |
Basis for classification | |
Measure |
Other | |
Single name concentration |
Exposure |
Risk based on loss given default for a given probability of default |
Sector |
Risk based on economic capital and other qualitative factors | |
Country |
Probability of default of a sovereign and average loss given default | |
Product and asset class |
Risk based on heightened risk characteristics |
Risk controls
Credit policy standards are in place for both the Wholesale and Personal portfolios. They are expressed as a set of mandatory controls.
Risk identification and measurement
Credit stewardship
Risks are identified through relationship management and/or credit stewardship of portfolios or customers. Credit risk stewardship takes place throughout the customer relationship, beginning with the initial approval. It includes the application of credit assessment standards, credit risk mitigation and collateral, ensuring that credit documentation is complete and appropriate, carrying out regular portfolio or customer reviews and problem debt identification and management.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk continued
Risk models
The output of credit risk models is used in the credit approval process as well as for ongoing assessment, monitoring and reporting to inform risk appetite decisions. These models are divided into different categories. Where the calculation method is on an individual counterparty or account level, the models used will be probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD), or exposure at default (EAD). The economic capital model is used for credit risk appetite setting.
Asset quality
All credit grades map to an asset quality scale, used for external financial reporting. For Wholesale customers, a master grading scale is used for internal management reporting across portfolios. Accordingly, measures of risk exposure may be aggregated and reported at differing levels of detail depending on stakeholder or business requirements. Performing loans are defined as AQ1-AQ9 (where the PD is less than 100%) and non-performing loans as AQ10 or Stage 3 under IFRS 9 (where the PD is 100%).
Risk mitigation
Risk mitigation techniques, as set out in the appropriate credit policies, are used in the management of credit portfolios across RBS. These techniques mitigate credit concentrations in relation to an individual customer, a borrower group or a collection of related borrowers. Where possible, customer credit balances are netted against obligations. Mitigation tools can include structuring a security interest in a physical or financial asset, the use of credit derivatives including credit default swaps, credit-linked debt instruments and securitisation structures, and the use of guarantees and similar instruments (for example, credit insurance) from related and third parties. Property is used to mitigate credit risk across a number of portfolios, in particular residential mortgage lending and commercial real estate (CRE).
The valuation methodologies for residential mortgage collateral and CRE are detailed below.
Residential mortgages RBS takes collateral in the form of residential property to mitigate the credit risk arising from mortgages. RBS values residential property during the loan underwriting process by either appraising properties individually or valuing them collectively using statistically valid models. RBS updates residential property values quarterly using the relevant residential property index namely:
Region |
Index used |
UK |
Halifax quarterly regional house price index |
Northern Ireland |
UK House Price Index (published by the Land Registry) |
Republic of Ireland |
Central Statistics Office residential property price index |
The current indexed value of the property is a component of the ECL provisioning calculation.
Commercial real estate valuations RBS has a panel of chartered surveying firms that cover the spectrum of geography and property sectors in which RBS takes collateral. Suitable valuers for particular assets are contracted through a single service agreement to ensure consistency of quality and advice. Valuations are commissioned when an asset is taken as security; a material increase in a facility is requested; or a default event is anticipated or has occurred. In the UK, an independent third-party market indexation is applied to update external valuations once they are more than a year old and every three years a formal independent valuation is commissioned.
In the Republic of Ireland, assets are revalued in line with the Central Bank of Ireland threshold requirements, which permits indexation for lower value assets, but demands regular Red Book valuations for distressed higher value assets. The current indexed value of the property is a component of the ECL provisioning calculation.
Counterparty credit risk
In addition to the credit risk management practices set out in this section, RBS mitigates counterparty credit risk arising from both derivatives transactions and repurchase agreements through the use of market standard documentation, enabling netting (for credit risk management only and not for accounting purposes), and through collateralisation.
Amounts owed by RBS to a counterparty are netted against amounts the counterparty owes RBS, in accordance with relevant regulatory and internal policies. Netting is only applied if a netting agreement is in place.
Risk assessment and monitoring
Practices for credit stewardship including credit assessment, approval and monitoring as well as the identification and management of problem debts differ between the Personal and Wholesale portfolios.
Personal
Personal customers are served through a lending approach that entails making a large number of small-value loans. To ensure that these lending decisions are made consistently, RBS analyses internal credit information as well as external data supplied from credit reference agencies (including historical debt servicing behaviour of customers with respect to both RBS and other lenders). RBS then sets its lending rules accordingly, developing different rules for different products.
The process is then largely automated, with each customer receiving an individual credit score that reflects both internal and external behaviours and this score is compared with the lending rules set. For relatively high-value, complex personal loans, including some residential mortgage lending, specialist credit managers make the final lending decisions. These decisions are made within specified delegated authority limits that are issued dependent on the experience of the individual.
Underwriting standards and portfolio performance are monitored on an ongoing basis to ensure they remain adequate in the current market environment and are not weakened materially to sustain growth.
Wholesale
Wholesale customers including corporates, banks and other financial institutions are grouped by industry sectors and geography as well as by product/asset class and are managed on an individual basis. Consideration is given to identifying groups of individual customers with sufficient inter-connectedness to merit assessment as a single risk.
A credit assessment is carried out before credit facilities are made available to customers. The assessment process is dependent on the complexity of the transaction.
For lower risk transactions below specific thresholds, credit decisions can be approved through self-sanctioning within the business. This process is facilitated through an auto-decision making system, which utilises scorecards, strategies and policy rules to provide a recommended credit decision. Such credit decisions must be within the approval authority of the relevant business sanctioner.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk continued
For all other transactions credit is only granted to customers following joint approval by an approver from the business and the credit risk function. The joint business and credit approvers act within a delegated approval authority under the Wholesale Credit Authorities Framework Policy. The level of delegated authority held by approvers is dependent on their experience and expertise with only a small number of senior executives holding the highest approval authority. Both business and credit approvers are accountable for the quality of each decision taken, although the credit risk approver holds ultimate sanctioning authority.
Transaction Acceptance Standards provide detailed transactional lending and risk acceptance metrics and structuring guidance. As such, these standards provide a mechanism to manage risk appetite at the customer/transaction level and are supplementary to the established credit risk appetite.
Credit grades (PD and LGD) are reviewed and if appropriate re-approved annually. The review process assesses borrower performance, including reconfirmation or adjustment of risk parameter estimates; the adequacy of security; compliance with terms and conditions; and refinancing risk.
A key aspect of credit risk stewardship is ensuring that, when signs of customer stress are identified, appropriate debt management actions are applied.
Problem debt management
Personal
Early problem identification
Pre-emptive triggers are in place to help identify customers that may be at risk of being in financial difficulty. These triggers are both internal, using RBS data and external information from credit reference agencies. Pro-active contact is then made with the customer to establish if they require help with managing their finances. By adopting this approach the aim is to prevent a customers financial position deteriorating which may then require intervention from the Collections and Recoveries teams.
Personal customers experiencing financial difficulty are managed by the Collections team. If the Collections team is unable to provide appropriate support after discussing suitable options with the customer, management of that customer moves to the Recoveries team. If at any point in the Collections and Recoveries process, the customer is identified as being potentially vulnerable, the customer will be separated from the regular process and supported by a specialist team to ensure the customer receives appropriate support for their circumstances.
Collections
When a customer exceeds an agreed limit or misses a regular monthly payment the customer is contacted by RBS and requested to remedy the position. If the situation is not regularised then, where appropriate, the Collections team will become more fully involved and the customer will be supported by skilled debt management staff who endeavour to provide customers with bespoke solutions. Solutions include short-term account restructuring, refinance loans and forbearance which can include interest suspension and breathing space. In the event that an affordable/sustainable agreement with a customer cannot be reached, the debt will transition to the Recoveries team. For provisioning purposes, under IFRS 9, exposure to customers managed by the Collections team is categorised as Stage 2 and subject to a lifetime loss assessment.
In the Republic of Ireland, the relationship may pass to a specialist support team prior to any transfer to recoveries, depending on the outcome of customer financial assessment.
Recoveries
The Recoveries team will issue a notice of intention to default to the customer and, if appropriate, a formal demand, while also registering the account with credit reference agencies where appropriate. Following this, the customers debt may then be placed with a third-party debt collection agency, or alternatively a solicitor, in order to agree an affordable repayment plan with the customer. Exposures subject to formal debt recovery are defaulted and categorised as Stage 3 impaired.
Wholesale
Early problem identification
Each segment and sector has defined early warning indicators to identify customers experiencing financial difficulty, and to increase monitoring if needed. Early warning indicators may be internal, such as a customers bank account activity, or external, such as a publicly-listed customers share price. If early warning indicators show a customer is experiencing potential or actual difficulty, or if relationship managers or credit officers identify other signs of financial difficulty they may decide to classify the customer within the Risk of Credit Loss framework.
Risk of Credit Loss framework
The framework focuses on Wholesale customers whose credit profiles have deteriorated since origination. Expert judgement is applied by experienced credit risk officers to classify cases into categories that reflect progressively deteriorating credit risk to RBS. There are two classifications which apply to non-defaulted customers within the framework Heightened Monitoring and Risk of Credit Loss. For the purposes of provisioning, all exposures subject to the framework are categorised as Stage 2 and subject to a lifetime loss assessment. The framework also applies to those customers that have met RBSs default criteria (AQ10 exposures). Defaulted exposures are categorised as Stage 3 impaired for provisioning purposes.
Heightened Monitoring customers are performing customers that have met certain characteristics, which have led to significant credit deterioration. Collectively, characteristics reflect circumstances that may affect the customers ability to meet repayment obligations. Characteristics include trading issues, covenant breaches, material PD downgrades and past due facilities.
Heightened Monitoring customers require pre-emptive actions (outside the customers normal trading patterns) to return or maintain their facilities within RBSs current risk appetite prior to maturity.
Risk of Credit Loss customers are performing customers that have met the criteria for Heightened Monitoring and also pose a risk of credit loss to RBS in the next 12 months (should mitigating action not be taken or not be successful).
Once classified as either Heightened Monitoring or Risk of Credit Loss, a number of mandatory actions are taken in accordance with policies. Actions include a review of the customers credit grade, facility and security documentation and the valuation of security. Depending on the severity of the financial difficulty and the size of the exposure, the customer relationship strategy is reassessed by credit officers, by specialist credit risk or relationship management units in the relevant business, or by Restructuring.
Agreed customer management strategies are regularly monitored by both the business and credit teams. The largest Risk of Credit Loss exposures are regularly reviewed by a Risk of Credit Loss Committee. The committee members are experienced credit, business and restructuring specialists. The purpose of the committee is to review and challenge the strategies undertaken for customers that pose the largest risk of credit loss to RBS.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk continued
Appropriate corrective action is taken when circumstances emerge that may affect the customers ability to service its debt (refer to Heightened Monitoring characteristics). Corrective actions may include granting a customer various types of concessions. Any decision to approve a concession will be a function of specific appetite, the credit quality of the customer, the market environment and the loan structure and security. All customers granted forbearance are classified Heightened Monitoring as a minimum.
Other potential outcomes of the relationship review are to: remove the customer from the Risk of Credit Loss framework, offer additional lending and continue monitoring, transfer the relationship to Restructuring if appropriate, or exit the relationship.
The Risk of Credit Loss framework does not apply to problem debt management for Business Banking customers in UK PBB. These customers are, where necessary, managed by specialist problem debt management teams, depending on the size of exposure or by the Business Banking recoveries team where a loan has been impaired.
Restructuring
For the Wholesale problem debt portfolio, customer relationships are mainly managed by the Restructuring team (excluding customers managed by UK PBB). The purpose of Restructuring is to protect RBSs capital. Where practicable, Restructuring does this by working with corporate and commercial customers to support their turnaround and recovery strategies and enable them to return to mainstream banking. Restructuring will always aim to recover capital in a fair and efficient manner.
Specialists in Restructuring work with customers experiencing financial difficulties and showing signs of financial stress. Throughout Restructurings involvement the mainstream relationship manager will remain an integral part of the customer relationship, unless an exit strategy is deemed appropriate. The objective is to find a mutually acceptable solution, including restructuring of existing facilities, repayment or refinancing.
Where a solvent outcome is not possible, insolvency may be considered as a last resort. However, helping the customer return to financial health and restoring a normal banking relationship is always the preferred outcome.
Forbearance (audited)
Forbearance takes place when a concession is made on the contractual terms of a loan/debt in response to a customers financial difficulties.
The aim of forbearance is to support and restore the customer to financial health while minimising risk. To ensure that forbearance is appropriate for the needs of the customer, minimum standards are applied when assessing, recording, monitoring and reporting forbearance.
A loan/debt may be forborne more than once, generally where a temporary concession has been granted and circumstances warrant another temporary or permanent revision of the loans terms.
In the Personal portfolio, loans are considered forborne until they meet the exit criteria set out by the European Banking Authority. These include being classified as performing for two years since the last forbearance event, making regular repayments and the loan/debt being less than 30 days past due. Exit criteria are not currently applied for Wholesale portfolios.
Types of forbearance
Personal
In the Personal portfolio, forbearance may involve payment concessions and loan rescheduling (including extensions in contractual maturity), capitalisation of arrears and, in the Republic of Ireland only, temporary interest-only conversions. Forbearance is granted principally to customers with mortgages and less frequently to customers with unsecured loans. This includes instances where forbearance may be provided to customers with highly flexible mortgages.
Wholesale
In the Wholesale portfolio, forbearance may involve covenant waivers, amendments to margins, payment concessions and loan rescheduling (including extensions in contractual maturity), capitalisation of arrears, and debt forgiveness or debt-for-equity swaps.
Monitoring of forbearance
Personal
For Personal portfolios, forborne loans are separated and regularly monitored and reported while the forbearance strategy is implemented, until they exit forbearance.
Wholesale
In the Wholesale portfolio, customer PDs and facility LGDs are re-assessed prior to finalising any forbearance arrangement. The ultimate outcome of a forbearance strategy is highly dependent on the cooperation of the borrower and a viable business or repayment outcome. Where forbearance is no longer appropriate, RBS will consider other options such as the enforcement of security, insolvency proceedings or both, although these are options of last resort.
Provisioning for forbearance
Personal
The methodology used for provisioning in respect of Personal forborne loans will differ depending on whether the loans are performing or non-performing and which business is managing them due to local market conditions.
Granting forbearance will only change the arrears status of the loan in specific circumstances, which can include capitalisation of principal and interest in arrears, where the loan may be returned to the performing book if the customer has demonstrated an ability to meet regular payments and is likely to continue to do so.
The loan would remain in forbearance for the defined probation period and be subject to performance criteria. These include making regular repayments and being less than 30 days past due.
Additionally for some forbearance types a loan may be transferred to the performing book if a customer makes payments that reduce loan arrears below 90 days (UK PBB collections function).
For ECL provisioning, all forborne but performing exposures are categorised as Stage 2 and are subject to a lifetime loss provisioning assessment.
For non-performing forborne loans, the Stage 3 loss assessment process is the same as for non-forborne loans with the exception of Ulster Bank RoI, where forborne loans which result in an economic loss form a separate risk pool and are subjected to specific provisioning treatments.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk continued
Wholesale
Provisions for forborne loans are assessed in accordance with normal provisioning policies. The customers financial position and prospects as well as the likely effect of the forbearance, including any concessions granted, and revised PD or LGD gradings are considered in order to establish whether an impairment provision is required.
Wholesale loans granted forbearance are individually assessed in most cases. Performing loans subject to forbearance treatment are categorised as Stage 2 and subject to a lifetime loss assessment.
Forbearance may result in the value of the outstanding debt exceeding the present value of the estimated future cash flows. This difference will lead to a customer being classified as non-performing.
In the case of non-performing forborne loans, an individual loan impairment provision assessment generally takes place prior to forbearance being granted. The amount of the loan impairment provision may change once the terms of the forbearance are known, resulting in an additional provision charge or a release of the provision in the period the forbearance is granted.
The transfer of Wholesale loans from impaired to performing status follows assessment by relationship managers and credit. When no further losses are anticipated and the customer is expected to meet the loans revised terms, any provision is written-off or released and the balance of the loan returned to performing status. This is not dependent on a specified time period and follows the credit risk managers assessment.
Impairment, provisioning and write-offs (audited)
In the overall assessment of credit risk, impairment, provisioning and write-offs are used as key indicators of credit quality.
The new IFRS 9 impairment provisions accounting standard was implemented with effect from 1 January 2018. Set out below is further detail regarding the impact of the transition from IAS 39 to IFRS 9 impairment provisioning, how key credit risk management activities link to IFRS 9 impairment provisioning and the key policy and modelling decisions that have been made in implementing IFRS 9 (refer also to Accounting policy 14 and Note 14 on the consolidated accounts).
Transition from IAS 39 to IFRS 9 (audited)
RBS implemented IFRS 9 with effect from 1 January 2018 with no restatement of comparatives other than the Day One impact on implementation reflected in opening equity.
Cash flows and cash losses are unchanged by the change in impairment framework from IAS 39 to IFRS 9. IFRS 9 has changed the basis of loss calculation to expected loss (forward-looking), as opposed to the incurred loss model under IAS 39, which focused only on losses that had already occurred. There are a number of changes as well as judgements involved in measuring ECL. New elements include:
· Move from incurred loss model to expected loss model, including all performing assets having 12-month ECL on origination £513 million increase in provision partly offset by the IAS 39 latent loss provision of £390 million.
· Determination of significant increase in credit risk this moves a subset of assets from a 12-month ECL (Stage 1) to lifetime ECL (Stage 2) when credit risk has significantly increased since origination £356 million increase in provision.
· Change in scope of impaired assets (Stage 3) £73 million increase in provision primarily reflecting assets that have defaulted but with expectation of full recovery under IAS 39.
· Incorporation of forward-looking information, including multiple economic scenarios (MES). MES are assessed in order to identify non-linearity of losses in the portfolio £64 million increase in provision.
Key differences in moving from IAS 39 to IFRS 9 on impairment loss (audited) |
|
Total |
|
£m | |
31 December 2017 - IAS 39 impairment provision (1) |
|
3,832 |
Removal of IAS 39 latent provision |
|
(390) |
IFRS 9 12 month ECL on Stage 1 and Stage 2 |
|
513 |
Increase in Stage 2 ECL to lifetime (discounted) |
|
356 |
Stage 3 loss estimation (EAD and LGD) |
|
73 |
Impact of MES |
|
64 |
1 January 2018 - IFRS 9 ECL |
|
4,448 |
Note:
(1) |
Includes £3,814 million relating to loans, less £10 million on loans that were carried at fair value and £28 million relating to FVOCI and LAR debt securities. |
Key points
· Overall provisions The overall provisioning requirement under IFRS 9 increased by £616 million a 16% increase relative to IAS 39. The main driver of the increase was the requirement to hold a minimum of 12 months of ECL on performing assets, increasing to lifetime loss for assets that have exhibited a significant increase in credit risk.
· Performing assets Compared with the latent loss provision held under IAS 39 of £390 million, the ECL requirement on performing assets (Stage 1 and Stage 2) more than doubled, increasing by £479 million to £869 million.
· Non-performing assets The IFRS 9 provisioning requirement on non-performing assets in Stage 3 was less affected. The ECL requirement of £3.6 billion was £123 million (4%) higher compared with IAS 39 impaired portfolio provisions of £3.4 billion principally on defaulted assets that did not carry a provision, reflecting the expectation of full recovery under IAS 39.
· UK PBB and Ulster Bank RoI combined The exposures in these two segments are primarily Personal. The ECL provisioning requirement was £2.8 billion, an uplift of £384 million relative to the IAS 39 provision. This was driven by the higher provisioning requirement on performing assets, principally on the UK credit card portfolio where provisions increased by £122 million (31% of the total increase).
· CPB and NatWest Markets The assets are mainly Wholesale. The ECL provisioning requirement was £1.6 billion, an uplift of £222 million relative to IAS 39. The uplift in Stage 3 assets of £83 million was principally driven by assets defaulted but with expectation of full recovery under IAS 39.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk continued
Key elements of IFRS 9 impairment provisions (audited)
IFRS 9 introduced additional complexity into the determination of credit impairment provisioning requirements. However, the building blocks that deliver an ECL calculation already existed in RBS. Existing Basel models were used as a starting point in the construction of IFRS 9 models, which also incorporate term extension and forward-looking information.
Five key areas may materially influence the measurement of credit impairment under IFRS 9 two of these relate to model build and three relate to their application:
· Model build:
o The determination of economic indicators that have most influence on credit loss for each portfolio and the severity of impact (this leverages existing stress testing mechanisms).
o The build of term structures to extend the determination of the risk of loss beyond 12 months that will influence the impact of lifetime loss for assets in Stage 2.
· Model application:
o The assessment of the significant increase in credit risk and the formation of a framework capable of consistent application.
o The determination of asset lifetimes that reflect behavioural characteristics while also representing management actions and processes (using historical data and experience).
o The determination of a base case (or central) economic scenario which has the most material impact (of all forward-looking scenarios) on the measurement of loss (RBS uses consensus forecasts to remove management bias).
Policy elections and simplifications relating to IFRS 9
In addition to the five key areas above, which are relevant from period to period, there was one further significant judgment that was made as a one-off exercise to support the Day One implementation: this was the application of the new IFRS 9 models to the determination of origination date metrics. Since it is not possible to determine the economic forecasts and alternative scenarios going backwards in time it is necessary to use a series of assumptions to enable this process. RBS assumed a flat economic forecast, for all dates historically. There were some other less significant judgments, elections and simplification assumptions that informed the ECL process; these were not seen as critical in determining the appropriate level of impairment but represented choices taken by management across areas of estimation uncertainty. The main examples of these are:
· Models for example in the case of some low default portfolios, Basel parameter estimates have been applied for IFRS 9.
· Non-modelled portfolios certain portfolios have their Basel II capital requirement calculated under the standardised framework for regulatory purposes and do not have systematically modelled PDs, EADs and LGDs. Under IFRS 9, they have bespoke treatments for the identification of significant increase in credit risk and ECL provisions. With respect to the latter, benchmark PDs, EADs and LGDs are used with the benchmarks being reviewed annually for appropriateness. The main non-modelled portfolios are Private Banking, RBSI personal and Lombard.
· Discounting of future losses the ECL calculation is based on expected future cash-flows. These are discounted using the effective interest rate for practical purposes, this is typically applied at a portfolio level rather than being established and operated at an individual asset level.
· Multiple economic scenarios (MES) it is the selection of the central (or base) scenario that is most critical to the ECL calculation, independent of the method used to generate a range of alternative outcomes and their probabilities. Different approaches to model MES around the central scenario have all been found of low significance for the overall ECL impact.
Economic loss drivers
Introduction (audited)
The portfolio segmentation and selection of economic loss drivers for IFRS 9 follow closely the approach already used in stress testing. To enable robust modelling the forecasting models for each portfolio segment (defined by asset class and where relevant industry sector and region) are based on a selected, small number of economic factors, (typically two to four) that best explain the temporal variations in portfolio loss rates. The process to select economic loss drivers involves empirical analysis and expert judgment.
The most material primary economic loss drivers for Personal portfolios include national GDP, unemployment rate, House Price Index, and base rate for UK and Irish portfolios as relevant. In addition to some of these loss drivers, for Wholesale portfolios, world GDP is a primary loss driver.
Central base case economic scenario (audited)
The internal base case scenario is the primary forward-looking economic information driving the calculation of ECL The same base case scenario is used for RBSs financial planning. The key elements of the current economic base case, which includes forecasts over a five year forecast horizon, are summarised as follows:
· United Kingdom The central scenario projects modest growth in the UK economy, in line with the consensus outlook. Brexit related uncertainty results in subdued confidence in the near term, placing it in the lower quartile of advanced economies. Business investment is weak at the start of the forecast, improving only gradually. Consumer spending rises steadily as households benefit from falling inflation and rising wage growth, though it is a modest upturn. The central scenario assumes slower job growth than seen in recent years, meaning unemployment edges up from its current historic lows. House price growth slows, extending the current slowdown, before picking up to low single digit growth in later years. Monetary policy follows the market implied path for Bank of England base rate at the time the scenarios were set, therefore it is assumed only two further base rate increases over the next five years.
· Republic of Ireland The economy is expected to continue on its positive trajectory with growth expected to revert closer to long run averages in the medium term. Job growth is expected to moderate with the unemployment remaining around 5%. Meanwhile house price growth continues to moderate to a low single-digit pace. As always, a small open economy such as RoI remains very sensitive to the global economic environment and expectations can change at short notice.
Use of the central base case in Personal
In Personal the internal base case is directly used as the central scenario for the ECL calculations by feeding the forecasted economic loss drivers into the respective PD and LGD models
Use of the central base case in Wholesale
As in Personal the primary input is the central base case scenario but a further adjustment is applied to explicitly enforce a gradual reversion to long run average credit cycle conditions from the first projected year onwards.
This adjustment process leverages the existing Wholesale credit models framework that utilises Credit Cycle Indices (CCI) to measure the point-in-time default rate conditions in a comprehensive set of region/industry groupings. The CCI are constructed by summarising market data based point-in-time PDs for all publicly listed entities in the respective region/industry grouping on a monthly frequency. Positive CCI values indicate better than average conditions, i.e. low default rates and a CCI value of zero indicates default rate conditions at long run average levels. The CCI can be interpreted as an aggregation of the primary economic loss drivers most relevant for each portfolio segment into a single measure. The central base case scenario forecasts provided at the level of economic loss drivers are fed into the ECL calculations by first translating them into corresponding CCI forecasts for each portfolio segment and subsequently applying the aforementioned mean-reversion adjustment.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk continued
Initially at transition, mean reversion was applied from year five onwards. Since H1 2018, mean reversion is applied from the first year onwards. The earlier application of the mean reversion adjustment was introduced to account for two empirical observations. Firstly historic credit loss rates in Wholesale portfolios show pronounced mean reversion behaviour and secondly, the accuracy of economic forecasts tends to drop significantly for horizons beyond one or two years.
Approach for MES (audited)
The response of portfolio loss rates to changes in economic conditions is typically non-linear and asymmetric. Therefore in order to appropriately take account of the uncertainty in economic forecasts a range of MES are considered when calculating ECL.
· Personal the approach to MES is based on using a set of discrete scenarios. In addition to the central base case a further four bespoke scenarios are taken into account a base case upside and downside and an additional upside and downside. The overall MES ECL is calculated as a probability weighted average across all five scenarios. (Refer to the Probability weightings of scenarios section below).
The ECL impact on the Personal portfolio arising from the application of MES over the single, central base case is relatively low, and following review by the Provisions Committee, overlays were agreed to ensure the expected effect of non-linearity of losses was appropriately recognised. As at 31 December 2018, the value of the overlays was £26 million for UK PBB and £26 million for Ulster Bank RoI.
· Wholesale the approach to MES is a Monte Carlo method that involves simulating a large number of alternative scenarios around the central scenario (adjusted for mean reversion) and averaging the losses and PD values for each individual scenario into unbiased expectations of losses (ECL) and PD.
The simulation of alternative scenarios does not occur on the level of the individual economic loss drivers but operates on the aggregate CCI described earlier. Since the existing Wholesale credit models for PD and LGD were already built within the CCI framework the chosen Monte Carlo method provided a conceptually rigorous but still efficient approach to implement the MES requirement.
The Monte Carlo MES approach increases Wholesale ECL for Stage 1 and Stage 2 by approximately 5% above the single, central scenario outcomes. No additional MES overlay was applied for Wholesale.
For both Personal and Wholesale, the impact from MES is factored in to account level PDs through scalars. These MES-adjusted PDs are used to assess whether a significant increase in credit risk has occurred.
Key economic loss drivers average over the five year planning horizon (2019 to 2023 for 31 December 2018 and 2018 to 2022 for 1 January 2018) in the most relevant planning cycle for the central base case and two upside and downside scenarios used for ECL modelling are set out below.
Economic parameters
|
|
31 December 2018 |
|
1 January 2018 | ||||||||||||||||
UK |
|
Upside 2 |
|
Upside 1 |
|
Base case |
|
Downside 1 |
|
Downside 2 |
|
Upside 2 |
|
Upside 1 |
|
Base case |
|
Downside 1 |
|
Downside 2 |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% | |
GDP - change |
|
2.6 |
|
2.3 |
|
1.7 |
|
1.5 |
|
1.1 |
|
2.2 |
|
1.9 |
|
1.7 |
|
1.5 |
|
1.3 |
Unemployment |
|
3.3 |
|
3.8 |
|
5.0 |
|
5.6 |
|
6.9 |
|
5.0 |
|
5.2 |
|
5.3 |
|
5.4 |
|
5.5 |
House Price Inflation - change |
|
4.3 |
|
3.3 |
|
1.7 |
|
1.1 |
|
(0.5) |
|
4.2 |
|
3.4 |
|
3.1 |
|
2.9 |
|
2.7 |
Bank of England base rate |
|
1.7 |
|
1.3 |
|
1.1 |
|
0.5 |
|
|
|
1.7 |
|
1.2 |
|
0.8 |
|
0.4 |
|
0.2 |
Republic of Ireland |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
GDP - change |
|
4.3 |
|
3.6 |
|
3.0 |
|
3.1 |
|
2.8 |
|
3.6 |
|
3.2 |
|
2.9 |
|
2.6 |
|
2.3 |
Unemployment |
|
4.2 |
|
4.6 |
|
5.2 |
|
6.0 |
|
6.8 |
|
5.0 |
|
5.4 |
|
5.7 |
|
5.9 |
|
6.1 |
House Price Inflation - change |
|
9.2 |
|
6.8 |
|
4.0 |
|
3.2 |
|
0.8 |
|
6.7 |
|
5.4 |
|
4.4 |
|
3.7 |
|
3.0 |
European Central Bank base rate |
|
1.3 |
|
0.8 |
|
0.3 |
|
|
|
|
|
0.6 |
|
0.4 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
|
World GDP - change |
|
3.6 |
|
3.2 |
|
2.7 |
|
2.5 |
|
2.3 |
|
2.9 |
|
2.7 |
|
2.6 |
|
2.5 |
|
2.4 |
Probability weight |
|
12.8 |
|
17.0 |
|
30.0 |
|
25.6 |
|
14.6 |
|
5.0 |
|
15.0 |
|
60.0 |
|
15.0 |
|
5.0 |
Probability weightings of scenarios (audited)
RBSs approach to IFRS 9 MES in Personal involves selecting a suitable set of discrete scenarios to characterise the distribution of risks in the economic outlook and assigning appropriate probability weights to those scenarios. This has the following basic steps:
· Scenario selection for 2018 two upside and two downside scenarios from Moodys inventory of scenarios were chosen. The aim is to obtain downside scenarios that are not as severe as stress tests, so typically have a severity of around one in ten and one in five of approximate likelihood, along with corresponding upsides.
· Severity assessment having selected the most appropriate scenarios their severity is then assessed based on the behaviour of UK GDP by calculating a variety of measures such as average GDP growth deviation from base and peak to trough falls in GDP. These measures are compared against a set of 1,000 model runs and it is established what percentile in the distribution most closely corresponds with each scenario.
· Probability assignment having established the relevant percentile points, probability weights are assigned to ensure that the scenarios produce an unbiased result. If the severity assessment step shows the scenarios to be broadly symmetric, then this will result in a symmetric probability weighting (same probability weight above and below the base case, as was used in the first half of 2018). However if the downsides are not as extreme as the upsides, then more probability weight is allocated to the downsides to ensure the unbiasedness requirement is satisfied (as was the case in the second half of 2018). This adjustment is made purely to restore unbiasedness, not to address any relative skew in the distribution of risks in the economic outlook, which is dealt with through overlays and covered in the section on UK economic uncertainty.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk continued
UK economic uncertainty (audited)
RBSs 2018 results were prepared during the run up to the UK leaving the European Union, a period of elevated uncertainty over the UK economic outlook. RBSs approach to capturing that elevated uncertainty is to apply an overlay to ECL. Information is used from the earnings volatility scenario that is part of the 2018 planning process and credit risk appetite setting. Key elements include an alternative path the economy could take, being characterised as more severe than the Bank of Englands Disruptive Brexit scenario (ACS) but less severe than the Disorderly Brexit scenario and then applying management judgement as to its likelihood. The RBS-wide overlay of £101 million booked in the third quarter of 2018 remained in place at the year end.
IFRS 9 credit risk modelling (audited)
IFRS 9 introduced lifetime ECL for the measurement of credit impairment. This required the development of new models or the enhancement of existing Basel models. IFRS 9 ECLs are calculated using a combination of:
· Probability of default.
· Loss given default.
· Exposure at default.
In addition, lifetime PDs (as at reporting date and at date of initial recognition) are used in the assessment of a significant increase in credit risk (SICR) criteria.
IFRS 9 ECL model design principles
To meet IFRS 9 requirements for ECL estimation, PD, LGD and EAD used in the calculations must be:
· Unbiased material regulatory conservatism has been removed to produce unbiased model estimates.
· Point-in-time recognise current economic conditions.
· Forward-looking incorporated into PD estimates and, where appropriate, EAD and LGD estimates.
· For the life of the loan all models produce a term structure to allow a lifetime calculation for assets in Stage 2 and Stage 3.
IFRS 9 requires that at each reporting date, an entity shall assess whether the credit risk on an account has increased significantly since initial recognition. Part of this assessment requires a comparison to be made between the current lifetime PD (i.e. the current probability of default over the remaining lifetime) with the equivalent lifetime PD as determined at the date of initial recognition.
For assets originated before IFRS 9 was introduced, comparable lifetime origination PDs did not exist. These have been retrospectively created using the relevant model inputs applicable at initial recognition. Due to data availability, two practical measures have been taken:
· Where model inputs were not available at the point of initial recognition the earliest available robust metrics were used. For instance, since Basel II was introduced in 2008, the earliest available and reliable production Basel PDs range from between December 2007 and April 2008 depending on the portfolio.
· Economic conditions at the date of initial recognition have been assumed to remain constant from that point forward.
PD estimates
Personal models
Personal PD models use an Exogenous, Maturity and Vintage (EMV) approach to model default rates by taking into account EMV effects. The EMV approach separates portfolio default risk trends into three components: vintage effects (quality of new business over time), maturity effects (changes in risk relating to time on book) and exogenous effects (changes in risk relating to changes in macro economic conditions). This EMV methodology has been widely adopted across the industry because it enables forward-looking information to be modelled separately by isolating exogenous or macroeconomic effects. Forward-looking information is incorporated by fitting an appropriate macroeconomic model, such as the relevant stress testing model to the exogenous component and utilising forecasts of the relevant macro-economic factors.
Wholesale models
Wholesale PD models use the existing CCI based point-in-time/through-the-cycle framework to convert one-year regulatory PDs into point-in-time estimates that reflect current economic conditions across a comprehensive set of region/industry segments.
One year point-in-time PDs are then extrapolated to multi-year PDs using a conditional transition matrix approach. The conditional transition matrix approach allows the incorporation of forward-looking information, provided in the form of yearly CCI projections, by adjusting the credit state transition probabilities according to projected, forward-looking changes of credit conditions in each region/industry segment.
This results in forward-looking point-in-time PD term structures for each obligor from which the lifetime PD for a specific exposure can be calculated according to the exposures residual contractual maturity.
LGD estimates
The general approach for the IFRS 9 LGD models was to leverage the Basel LGD models with bespoke IFRS 9 adjustments to ensure unbiased estimates, that is, the use of effective interest rate as the discount rate and the removal of downturn calibration, indirect costs, other conservatism and regulatory floors.
Personal
Forward-looking information has only been incorporated for the secured portfolios, where changes in property prices can be readily accommodated. Analysis has indicated minimal impact for the other Personal portfolios. For UBIDAC, a bespoke IFRS 9 LGD model is used, reflecting its specific regional market.
Wholesale
Current and forward-looking economic information is incorporated into the LGD estimates using the existing CCI framework. For low default portfolios (for example, sovereigns) loss data is too scarce to substantiate estimates that vary with systematic conditions. Consequently, for these portfolios, LGD estimates are assumed to be constant throughout the projection horizon.
EAD estimates
Retail
The IFRS 9 Personal modelling approach for EAD is dependent on product type.
· Revolving products use the existing Basel models as a basis, with appropriate adjustments incorporating a term structure based on time to default.
· Amortising products use an amortising schedule, where a formula is used to calculate the expected balance based on remaining terms and interest rates.
· There is no EAD model for Personal loans. Instead, debt flow (i.e. combined PD x EAD) is directly modelled.
Analysis has indicated that there is minimal impact on EAD arising from changes in the economy for all Retail portfolios except mortgages. Therefore, forward-looking information is only incorporated in the mortgage EAD model (through forecast changes in interest rates).
Wholesale
For Wholesale, EAD values are estimated on the basis of credit conversion factor (CCF) models. RBS have observed historic, realised CCF values to vary over time but there is no clear relationship between the temporal changes in CCF and economic conditions. RBS attribute changes in CCFs to changes in exposure management practices.
Therefore RBS does not include forward-looking economic information into projected CCF/EAD. To ensure CCF values reflect most recent exposure management practices, RBS update CCF coefficients in the model frequently (typically annually) using the last five years of observed data.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk continued
Governance and post model adjustments
The IFRS 9 PD, EAD and LGD models are subject to RBSs model monitoring and governance frameworks, which include approving post model adjustments (PMAs) calculated to incorporate the most recent data available and made on a temporary basis ahead of the underlying model parameter changes being implemented. These PMAs totalled approximately £60 million at the year end primarily in respect of PD under-predictions. In addition, as at 31 December 2018, judgemental ECL overlays on the UK PBB mortgage portfolio totalled £30 million, including £15 million in respect of the repayment risk not captured in the models that a proportion of customers on interest only mortgages will not be able to repay the capital element of their loan at end of term. The overlay for interest only mortgages was based on an analysis of recent experience on customer repayments pre and post end of term, and modelling that forward for maturities over the next ten years. These adjustments were over and above those covering economic uncertainty and non-linearity of losses discussed above and are also subject to over-sight and governance by the Provisions Committee.
Significant increase in credit risk (audited)
Exposures that are considered significantly credit deteriorated since initial recognition are classified in Stage 2 and assessed for lifetime ECL measurement (exposures not considered deteriorated carry a 12 month ECL). RBS has adopted a framework to identify deterioration based primarily on movements in probability of default supported by additional backstops. The principles applied are consistent across RBS and align to credit risk management practices.
The framework comprises the following elements:
· IFRS 9 lifetime PD assessment (the primary driver) on modelled portfolios the assessment is based on the relative deterioration in forward-looking lifetime PD and is assessed monthly. To assess whether credit deterioration has occurred, the residual lifetime PD at balance sheet date (which PD is established at date of initial recognition (DOIR)) is compared to the current PD. If the current lifetime PD exceeds the residual origination PD by more than a threshold amount deterioration is assumed to have occurred and the exposure transferred to Stage 2 for a lifetime loss assessment. For Wholesale, a doubling of PD would indicate a significant increase in credit risk subject to a minimum PD uplift of 0.1%. For Personal portfolios, the criteria varies by risk band, with lower risk exposures needing to deteriorate more than higher risk exposures, as outlined in the following table:
Personal |
Risk bandings (based |
PD deterioration |
Risk band A |
<0.762% |
PD@DOIR + 1% |
Risk band B |
<4.306% |
PD@DOIR + 3% |
Risk band C |
>=4.306% |
1.7 x PD@DOIR |
· Qualitative high-risk backstops the PD assessment is complemented with the use of qualitative high-risk backstops to further inform whether significant deterioration in lifetime risk of default has occurred. The qualitative high-risk backstop assessment includes the use of the mandatory 30+ days past due backstop, as prescribed by IFRS 9 guidance, and other features such as forbearance support, Wholesale exposures managed within the Risk of Credit Loss framework, and for Personal, adverse credit bureau results.
· Persistence (Personal and Business Banking only) the persistence rule ensures that accounts which have met the criteria for PD driven deterioration are still considered to be significantly deteriorated for three months thereafter. This additional rule enhances the timeliness of capture in Stage 2. It is a Personal methodology feature and is applied to PD driven deterioration only.
The criteria are based on a significant amount of empirical analysis and seek to meet three key objectives:
· Criteria effectiveness the criteria should be effective in identifying significant credit deterioration and prospective default population.
· Stage 2 stability the criteria should not introduce unnecessary volatility in the Stage 2 population.
· Portfolio analysis the criteria should produce results which are intuitive when reported as part of the wider credit portfolio.
Asset lifetimes (audited)
The choice of initial recognition and asset duration is another critical judgement in determining the quantum of lifetime losses that apply.
· The date of initial recognition reflects the date that a transaction (or account) was first recognised on the balance sheet; the PD recorded at that time provides the baseline used for subsequent determination of SICR.
· For asset duration, the approach applied (in line with IFRS 9 requirements) is:
o Term lending the contractual maturity date, reduced for behavioural trends where appropriate (such as, expected pre-payment and amortisation).
o Revolving facilities for Personal portfolios (except credit cards), asset duration is based on behavioural life and this is normally greater than contractual life (which would typically be overnight). For Wholesale portfolios, asset duration is based on annual counterparty review schedules and will be set to the next review date.
In the case of credit cards, the most significant judgement is to reflect the operational practice of card reissuance and the associated credit assessment as enabling a formal re-origination trigger. As a consequence a capped lifetime approach of up to 36 months is used on credit card balances. If the approach was uncapped the ECL impact is estimated at less than £90 million, compared to £75 million at transition, with the increase primarily reflecting refinements to criteria used to identify a significant increase in credit risk during the year.
The approach reflects RBS practice of a credit-based review of customers prior to credit card issuance and complies with IFRS 9. Benchmarking information indicates that peer UK banks use behavioural approaches in the main for credit card portfolios with average durations between three and ten years. Across Europe durations are shorter and are, in some cases, as low as one year.
Measurement uncertainty and ECL sensitivity analysis (audited)
The recognition and measurement of ECL is highly complex and involves the use of significant judgement and estimation. This includes the formulation and incorporation of multiple forward-looking economic conditions into ECL to meet the measurement objective of IFRS 9. The ECL provision is sensitive to the model inputs and economic assumptions underlying the estimate. Set out below is the impact of some of the material sensitivities considered for 2018 year end reporting. These ECL simulations are separate to the impact arising from MES as described earlier in this disclosure, which impacts are embedded in the reported ECL. Given the current benign environment for impairments the focus is on downsides to the existing ECL provision levels.
The focus of the simulations is on ECL provisioning requirements on performing exposures in Stage 1 and Stage 2. The simulations are run on a stand-alone basis and are independent of each other; the potential ECL uplifts reflect the simulated impact as at the year end balance sheet date. As default is an observed event as at the balance sheet date, Stage 3 provisions are not subject to the same level of measurement uncertainty, and therefore have not been considered in this analysis. The following common scenarios have been applied across the key Personal and Wholesale portfolios:
Capital and risk management
Credit risk continued
· Economic uncertainty simulating the impact arising from the Downside 2 scenario, which is one of the five discrete scenarios used in the methodology for Personal MES. In the simulation RBS have assumed that the economic macro variables associated with the Downside 2 scenario replace the existing base case economic assumptions, giving them a 100% probability weighting for Personal and using the Monte Carlo approach in Wholesale to simulate the impact of MES around the base case economic scenario.
· As reflected in the economic metrics in the following table, the Downside 2 scenario assumes a significant economic downturn in the UK in 2019 running in to 2020 with recovery in the later years. UK GDP turns negative in 2019 compared to the base case assumption of continued growth, unemployment increases and peaks at the end of 2020. House prices fall in both 2019 and 2020 before starting to recover, and interest rates are assumed to be lower for longer. An economic slowdown is also assumed in the Republic of Ireland in 2019 and 2020.
|
|
Base case economic parameters |
|
Downside 2 economic parameters | ||||||||||||||||
|
|
2019 Q4 |
|
2020 Q4 |
|
2021 Q4 |
|
2022 Q4 |
|
2023 Q4 |
|
2019 Q4 |
|
2020 Q4 |
|
2021 Q4 |
|
2022 Q4 |
|
2023 Q4 |
UK |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
GDP (year-on-year) |
|
1.7 |
|
1.5 |
|
1.9 |
|
1.8 |
|
1.8 |
|
(1.2) |
|
1.2 |
|
2.7 |
|
2.0 |
|
2.1 |
Unemployment rate |
|
4.8 |
|
5.0 |
|
5.1 |
|
5.1 |
|
5.1 |
|
6.7 |
|
7.4 |
|
7.3 |
|
6.9 |
|
6.4 |
House Price Inflation (year-on-year) |
|
1.1 |
|
0.7 |
|
1.5 |
|
2.3 |
|
3.4 |
|
(7.0) |
|
(4.5) |
|
1.0 |
|
4.1 |
|
6.3 |
Bank of England rate |
|
1.0 |
|
1.0 |
|
1.3 |
|
1.3 |
|
1.3 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Republic of Ireland |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
GDP (year-on-year) |
|
4.2 |
|
2.9 |
|
2.8 |
|
2.8 |
|
2.5 |
|
0.7 |
|
3.5 |
|
4.4 |
|
4.5 |
|
4.0 |
Unemployment rate |
|
5.2 |
|
5.1 |
|
5.1 |
|
5.2 |
|
5.3 |
|
7.6 |
|
7.7 |
|
6.5 |
|
5.9 |
|
5.7 |
House Price Inflation (year-on-year) |
|
5.8 |
|
2.7 |
|
3.0 |
|
3.4 |
|
3.5 |
|
(6.7) |
|
(5.4) |
|
2.2 |
|
7.2 |
|
8.8 |
European Central Bank rate |
|
|
|
|
|
0.3 |
|
0.5 |
|
0.8 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
World GDP (year-on-year) |
|
2.7 |
|
2.4 |
|
2.9 |
|
2.7 |
|
2.5 |
|
(0.8) |
|
3.1 |
|
4.4 |
|
3.2 |
|
2.8 |
This scenario has been applied to all modelled portfolios in the analysis below, with the simulation impacting both PDs and LGDs. For some portfolios this creates a significant impact on ECL, for others less so but on balance the impact is deemed reasonable. In this simulation, it is assumed the existing modelled relationship between key economic variables and loss drivers holds good.
· Portfolio risk evaluation of the impact of a movement in one of the key metrics, PD, simulating a relative 25% upward shift in PDs.
These common scenarios were complemented with two specific portfolio simulations:
· Wholesale portfolios simulating the impact of PDs moving upwards to the through-the-cycle (TTC) average from their current point-in-time (PIT) estimate. This simulation looks solely at PD movements, potential movements in LGD rates have not been considered. With the current benign economic conditions wholesale IFRS 9 PIT PDs are significantly lower than TTC PD. This scenario shows the increase to ECL by immediately switching to TTC PDs providing an indication of long run average expectations. IFRS 9 PDs have been used so there remains some differences to Basel TTC PDs where conservative assumptions are required, such as caps or floors, not permitted under the IFRS 9 best estimate approach.
· Mortgages House Price Inflation (HPI) is a key economic driver and RBS have simulated a univariate scenario of a 5% decrease in HPI across the main mortgage portfolios. A univariate analysis using only HPI does not allow for the interdependence across the other key primary loss drivers to be reflected in any ECL estimate. The simulated impact is based on 100% probability weighting to demonstrate the sensitivity of HPI on the central base case. The Downside 2 scenario above has house prices falling by a more material amount, and also includes the impact of PD increases which are not captured under the HPI univariate simulation.
RBSs core criterion to identify a significant increase in credit risk is founded on PD deterioration, as discussed above. Under the simulations, PDs increase and result in exposures moving from Stage 1 to Stage 2 contributing to the ECL uplift.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk continued
Economic sensitivity analysis
|
|
Actual position at 31 December 2018 |
|
Common scenarios (3) |
|
|
|
|
|
| ||||||||||||||
|
|
Stage 1 and Stage 2 (1) |
|
Downside 2 |
|
25% PD increase |
|
Discrete scenarios (3) | ||||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
of which in |
|
ECL |
|
|
|
|
|
Exposure in |
|
|
|
|
|
Exposure in |
|
HPI (4)/TTC PD (5) |
|
Exposure in | ||
|
|
Exposure |
|
Stage 2 |
|
provision(2) |
|
Potential ECL uplift |
|
Stage 2 |
|
Potential ECL uplift |
|
Stage 2 |
|
potential ECL uplift |
|
Stage 2 | ||||||
|
|
£bn |
|
% |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
% |
|
% |
|
£m |
|
% |
|
% |
|
£m |
|
% |
|
% |
UK PBB |
|
155.7 |
|
9.1 |
|
589.3 |
|
186.4 |
|
31.6 |
|
11.5 |
|
174.2 |
|
29.6 |
|
10.5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of which: mortgages |
|
137.7 |
|
7.3 |
|
80.9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.5 |
|
6.8 |
|
7.3 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Ulster Bank RoI Personal and business banking |
|
12.8 |
|
11.9 |
|
100.0 |
|
60.5 |
|
60.5 |
|
24.5 |
|
24.4 |
|
24.4 |
|
17.3 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of which: mortgages |
|
12.2 |
|
11.4 |
|
85.5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6.1 |
|
7.2 |
|
11.7 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Wholesale |
|
261.7 |
|
4.1 |
|
333.5 |
|
79.2 |
|
23.8 |
|
8.1 |
|
86.4 |
|
25.9 |
|
5.2 |
|
106.3 |
|
31.9 |
|
7.5 |
Total |
|
430.2 |
|
6.1 |
|
1,022.8 |
|
326.1 |
|
31.9 |
|
9.8 |
|
285.0 |
|
27.9 |
|
7.5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes:
(1) Reflects drawn exposure and ECL for all modelled exposure in scope for IFRS 9; in addition to loans this includes bonds, and cash. For Personal exposures, this includes UK PBB including business banking, and also Ulster Bank RoI personal and business banking, the analysis excludes Personal exposures such as Private Banking and RBSI.
(2) The ECL provision includes the ECL overlay taken in quarter 3 to recognise the elevated economic uncertainty in the UK in the period running up to the UK leaving the European Union.
(3) All simulations are run on a stand-alone basis and are independent of each other, with the potential ECL uplift reflecting the simulated impact at the year end balance sheet date.
(4) HPI is applied to the most material mortgage portfolios only, UK PBB and Ulster Bank RoI.
(5) TTC or long-run average PDs are applied to Wholesale portfolios only, excluding business banking exposures in PBB, the impact on which is included within the PBB portfolio for this analysis.
Key points
· In the downside 2 scenario, the ECL requirement overall was simulated to increase by £326 million on stage 1 and 2 exposures from the current level of £1,023 million. The simulation estimates the balance sheet ECL requirement as at 31 December 2018 and assumes that the economic variables associated with the Downside 2 scenario had been RBSs base case economic assumption at that time.
· For the UK PBB franchise, the simulated ECL uplift observed in the Downside 2 scenario was a little higher than under the 25% PD increase, with similar seen in the percentage of exposures simulated to move to Stage 2.
· In the Downside 2 scenario, the Ulster Bank RoI simulated uplift was more marked than on the other simulations reflecting the weight of mortgage assets in their personal lending portfolio, with the adverse movement in house prices increasing the LGD. A similar affect was observed on the UK PBB mortgage portfolio where the mortgage ECL was simulated to increase by just over 50%, and which impact is included within the overall PBB simulated result. The percentage of exposures simulated to move into Stage 2 in the Downside 2 scenario is notably higher than under the 25% PD increase for the Ulster Bank RoI due to the combined impact of the macro-economic variables utilised for the simulation.
· On the univariate HPI scenario, the impact of a 5% fall in house prices was relatively modest, the simulated impact was similar in both UK PBB and Ulster Bank RoI. The relationship between the required ECL and house price movements is expected to be non-linear should the level of house prices reduce by more material amounts, with the rate of loss accelerating when prices fall by more than 10%. Ulster Bank RoI also observed a modest increase in the percentage of exposures in Stage 2 reflecting small PD movements, whereas the UK PBB simulation was restricted to the LGD effect alone hence the percentage of assets in Stage 2 remained unchanged.
· Wholesale, the TTC PD scenario has the most significant impact on ECL highlighting that reverting to long run average PDs is more severe than a 25% increase in PDs or a switch to a downside scenario. Moving to TTC PDs requires an average PD uplift of almost 40%.
· The TTC PD and 25% PD increase scenarios see a significant ECL uplift in the property portfolio which is not observed under the Downside 2 scenario as under the Downside 2 scenario the Wholesale PDs begin to revert to long run averages (mean reversion) after 12 months so do not fully capture the further deterioration expected in the property portfolio in years 2 and 3.
· Downside 2 scenario results in more corporate exposure moving to Stage 2 than either the TTC PD or 25% PD increase scenarios. The impact is more concentrated on shorter dated exposure, reflecting the year 1 downturn, which has less of an impact on total ECL.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities
All the disclosures in this section are audited with the exception of Stage 2 analysis and Stage 3 vintage analysis.
Introduction
This section covers the credit risk profile of RBSs banking activities. Exposures and credit risk measures presented as of and for year ended 31 December 2018 and at 1 January 2018 are on an IFRS 9 basis. Exposures and credit risk measures as of and for the year ended 31 December 2017 are on an IAS 39 basis.
Refer to Accounting policy 14 and Note 14 on the consolidated accounts for revisions to policies and critical judgements relating to impairment loss determination.
Banking activities include a small number of portfolios that were carried at fair value, the most significant of which was the lender-option/buyer-option portfolio of £0.5 billion (1 January 2018 £2.0 billion). The decrease in the portfolio reflected disposals and valuation changes.
Financial instruments within the scope of the IFRS 9 ECL framework (audited)
Refer to Note 11 on the consolidated accounts for balance sheet analysis of financial assets that are classified as amortised cost (AC) or fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI), the starting point for IFRS 9 ECL framework assessment.
Financial assets
Of the total third party £471 billion AC and FVOCI balance (gross of ECL), £463.9 billion or 98% was within the scope of the IFRS 9 ECL framework and comprised by stage: Stage 1 £430.1 billion; Stage 2 £26.1 billion and Stage 3 £7.7 billion (1 January 2018 £468.8 billion of which Stage 1 £430.5 billion; Stage 2 £27.0 billion and Stage 3 £11.3 billion). Total assets within IFRS 9 ECL scope comprised the following by balance sheet caption and stage:
· Loans: £319.8 billion of which Stage 1 £286.0 billion; Stage 2 £26.1 billion and Stage 3 £7.7 billion (1 January 2018 £321.3 billion of which Stage 1 £283.3 billion; Stage 2 £26.8 billion and Stage 3 £11.2 billion).
· Other financial assets: £144.1 billion of which Stage 1 £144.1 billion; Stage 2 nil and Stage 3 nil (1 January 2018 £147.4 billion of which Stage 1 £147.2 billion; Stage 2 £0.2 billion and Stage 3 nil).
Those assets outside the IFRS 9 ECL framework were as follows:
· Settlement balances, items in the course of collection, cash balances and other non-credit risk assets of £4.9 billion. These were assessed as having no ECL unless there was evidence that they were credit impaired.
· Equity shares of £0.5 billion as not within the IFRS 9 ECL framework by definition.
· Fair value adjustments on loans hedged by interest rate swaps, where the underlying loan was within the IFRS 9 ECL scope £0.9 billion.
· Group-originated securitisations, where ECL was captured on the underlying loans of £0.4 billion.
· Commercial cards which operate in a similar manner to charge cards, with balances repaid monthly via mandated direct debit with the underlying risk of loss captured within the customers linked current account of £0.4 billion.
Contingent liabilities and commitments
In addition to contingent liabilities and commitments disclosed in Note 27 on the consolidated accounts reputationally-committed limits, are also included in the scope of the IFRS 9 ECL framework. These are offset by £3.6 billion out of scope balances primarily related to facilities that, if drawn, would not be classified as AC or FVOCI, or undrawn limits relating to financial assets exclusions. Total contingent liabilities (including financial guarantees) and commitments within IFRS 9 ECL scope of £168.9 billion comprised Stage 1 £161.4 billion; Stage 2 £6.9 billion and Stage 3 £0.6 billion.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Portfolio summary segment analysis (audited)
The table below summarises gross loans and ECL, by segment and stage, within the scope of the IFRS 9 ECL framework.
|
|
|
|
Ulster |
|
Commercial |
|
Private |
|
|
|
|
|
Central items |
|
|
|
|
UK PBB |
|
Bank RoI |
|
Banking |
|
Banking |
|
RBSI |
|
NWM |
|
& other |
|
Total |
31 December 2018 (1) |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Loans - amortised cost |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stage 1 |
|
146,764 |
|
17,822 |
|
79,106 |
|
13,750 |
|
13,383 |
|
8,196 |
|
6,964 |
|
285,985 |
Stage 2 |
|
14,954 |
|
2,080 |
|
7,809 |
|
531 |
|
289 |
|
407 |
|
27 |
|
26,097 |
Stage 3 |
|
2,220 |
|
2,308 |
|
2,136 |
|
225 |
|
101 |
|
728 |
|
|
|
7,718 |
|
|
163,938 |
|
22,210 |
|
89,051 |
|
14,506 |
|
13,773 |
|
9,331 |
|
6,991 |
|
319,800 |
ECL provisions (2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stage 1 |
|
131 |
|
35 |
|
94 |
|
13 |
|
6 |
|
6 |
|
|
|
285 |
Stage 2 |
|
488 |
|
114 |
|
136 |
|
10 |
|
3 |
|
12 |
|
|
|
763 |
Stage 3 |
|
796 |
|
638 |
|
743 |
|
20 |
|
17 |
|
106 |
|
|
|
2,320 |
|
|
1,415 |
|
787 |
|
973 |
|
43 |
|
26 |
|
124 |
|
|
|
3,368 |
ECL provisions coverage (3) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stage 1 (%) |
|
0.09 |
|
0.20 |
|
0.12 |
|
0.09 |
|
0.04 |
|
0.07 |
|
|
|
0.10 |
Stage 2 (%) |
|
3.26 |
|
5.48 |
|
1.74 |
|
1.88 |
|
1.04 |
|
2.95 |
|
|
|
2.92 |
Stage 3 (%) |
|
35.86 |
|
27.64 |
|
34.78 |
|
8.89 |
|
16.83 |
|
14.56 |
|
|
|
30.06 |
|
|
0.86 |
|
3.54 |
|
1.09 |
|
0.30 |
|
0.19 |
|
1.33 |
|
|
|
1.05 |
Impairment losses |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ECL charge (4) |
|
342 |
|
15 |
|
144 |
|
(6 |
) |
(2 |
) |
(92 |
) |
(3 |
) |
398 |
ECL loss rate - annualised (basis points) |
|
20.86 |
|
6.75 |
|
16.17 |
|
(4.14 |
) |
(1.45 |
) |
(98.60 |
) |
(4.29 |
) |
12.45 |
Amounts written-off |
|
557 |
|
372 |
|
460 |
|
7 |
|
9 |
|
89 |
|
|
|
1,494 |
|
|
|
|
Ulster |
|
Commercial |
|
Private |
|
|
|
|
|
Central |
|
|
|
Balances at |
|
|
|
|
UK PBB |
|
Bank RoI |
|
Banking |
|
Banking |
|
RBSI |
|
NWM |
|
& other |
|
Total |
|
central banks |
|
Total |
1 January 2018 (1) |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Financial assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stage 1 |
|
145,650 |
|
19,055 |
|
84,393 |
|
12,755 |
|
7,791 |
|
11,762 |
|
52,523 |
|
333,929 |
|
96,566 |
|
430,495 |
Stage 2 |
|
14,490 |
|
2,347 |
|
8,490 |
|
333 |
|
307 |
|
995 |
|
10 |
|
26,972 |
|
5 |
|
26,977 |
Stage 3 |
|
3,202 |
|
3,669 |
|
3,468 |
|
324 |
|
119 |
|
501 |
|
|
|
11,283 |
|
|
|
11,283 |
|
|
163,342 |
|
25,071 |
|
96,351 |
|
13,412 |
|
8,217 |
|
13,258 |
|
52,533 |
|
372,184 |
|
96,571 |
|
468,755 |
ECL provisions (2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stage 1 |
|
144 |
|
29 |
|
58 |
|
18 |
|
5 |
|
2 |
|
5 |
|
261 |
|
1 |
|
262 |
Stage 2 |
|
352 |
|
106 |
|
106 |
|
9 |
|
5 |
|
42 |
|
1 |
|
621 |
|
|
|
621 |
Stage 3 |
|
1,110 |
|
1,054 |
|
1,156 |
|
27 |
|
28 |
|
190 |
|
|
|
3,565 |
|
|
|
3,565 |
|
|
1,606 |
|
1,189 |
|
1,320 |
|
54 |
|
38 |
|
234 |
|
6 |
|
4,447 |
|
1 |
|
4,448 |
ECL provisions coverage (3) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stage 1 (%) |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
|
|
|
|
0.1 |
|
|
|
0.1 |
Stage 2 (%) |
|
2.4 |
|
4.5 |
|
1.2 |
|
2.7 |
|
1.6 |
|
4.2 |
|
10.0 |
|
2.3 |
|
|
|
2.3 |
Stage 3 (%) |
|
34.7 |
|
28.7 |
|
33.3 |
|
8.3 |
|
23.5 |
|
37.9 |
|
|
|
31.6 |
|
|
|
31.6 |
|
|
1.0 |
|
4.7 |
|
1.4 |
|
0.4 |
|
0.5 |
|
1.8 |
|
|
|
1.2 |
|
|
|
0.9 |
Notes:
(1) The segment analysis tables as at 31 December 2018 include all loans amortised cost within the scope of IFRS 9. The comparative tables at 1 January 2018 include all financial assets within the scope of IFRS 9, including debt securities of £50.4 billion, of which £42.7 billion related to debt securities classified as FVOCI. ECL on these debt securities at 1 January 2018 was £28 million, of which £4 million related to those classified as FVOCI.
(2) ECL provisions are provisions on loan assets only. Other ECL provisions not included, relate to cash, debt securities and contingent liabilities, and amount to £28 million, of which £5 million was FVOCI.
(3) ECL provisions coverage is ECL provisions divided by loans amortised cost.
(4) ECL charge balances in the above table include a £3 million charge related to other financial assets, of which a £1 million charge related to assets at FVOCI; and a £31 million release related to contingent liabilities.
The table below shows gross loans (excluding reverse repos) and related credit metrics by segment on an IAS 39 basis.
|
|
|
|
Ulster |
|
Commercial |
|
Private |
|
|
|
|
|
Central items |
|
|
|
|
UK PBB |
|
Bank RoI |
|
Banking |
|
Banking |
|
RBSI |
|
NWM |
|
& other |
|
Total |
2017 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Gross loans to banks |
|
500 |
|
2,447 |
|
697 |
|
109 |
|
29 |
|
7,490 |
|
4,992 |
|
16,264 |
Gross loans to customers |
|
162,957 |
|
20,623 |
|
98,182 |
|
13,514 |
|
8,743 |
|
22,902 |
|
77 |
|
321,633 |
Risk elements in lending (REIL) |
|
1,975 |
|
3,282 |
|
3,196 |
|
95 |
|
103 |
|
253 |
|
|
|
8,904 |
Provisions |
|
1,280 |
|
1,131 |
|
1,162 |
|
32 |
|
35 |
|
174 |
|
|
|
3,814 |
REIL as a % of gross loans to customers |
|
1.2 |
|
15.9 |
|
3.3 |
|
0.7 |
|
1.2 |
|
1.1 |
|
|
|
2.7 |
Provisions as a % of REIL |
|
65 |
|
34 |
|
36 |
|
34 |
|
34 |
|
69 |
|
|
|
43 |
Provisions as a % of gross loans to customers |
|
0.8 |
|
5.5 |
|
1.2 |
|
0.2 |
|
0.4 |
|
0.8 |
|
|
|
1.2 |
Impairment losses/(releases) |
|
235 |
|
60 |
|
362 |
|
6 |
|
3 |
|
(137 |
) |
1 |
|
530 |
Amounts written-off |
|
572 |
|
124 |
|
335 |
|
4 |
|
6 |
|
167 |
|
2 |
|
1,210 |
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Portfolio summary segment analysis (audited)
Key points
· Total ECL provisions have reduced since transition as a result of reduced provisioning requirements on Stage 3 impaired assets, which reflected ongoing write-offs and debt sales, partially offset by increases in Stage 1 and Stage 2.
· Stage 3 ECL provisions The reductions in the UK PBB business reflected a combination of business-as-usual write-offs and debt sale activity. For Ulster Bank RoI the significant reduction since transition was due to the sale of legacy impaired mortgage portfolio debt. In Commercial Banking and NatWest Markets the reductions were mainly attributable to write-offs.
· Stage 1 and Stage 2 The increase in Stage 1 and Stage 2 ECL was driven by a number of factors. These included an ECL uplift for economic uncertainty, which affected all businesses, model refinements, asset migrations from Stage 3 impaired and portfolio growth.
· Provision coverage remained stable in the Stage 1 population and increased in Stage 2, with the uplift including the effect of methodology refinements. The Stage 3 provision coverage reduced slightly including the effect of debt sales and underlying business as usual movements.
· The impairment charge for the year was £398 million. This reflected the relatively stable external environment.
· The reduction in the Commercial Banking portfolio reflected the transfer of customers to RBSI and NWM as well as the continued exit from legacy assets.
Segmental loans and impairment metrics (audited)
The table below summarises gross loans and ECL provisions, by days past due, by segment and stage, within the scope of the ECL framework.
|
|
Gross loans |
|
ECL provisions (3) | ||||||||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
Stage 2 (2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stage 2 (2) |
|
|
|
| ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| ||||||||
|
|
Stage 1 |
|
<30 DPD |
|
>30 DPD |
|
Total |
|
Stage 3 |
|
Total |
|
Stage 1 |
|
<30 DPD |
|
>30 DPD |
|
Total |
|
Stage 3 |
|
Total |
31 December 2018 (1) |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
UK PBB |
|
146,764 |
|
14,163 |
|
791 |
|
14,954 |
|
2,220 |
|
163,938 |
|
131 |
|
434 |
|
54 |
|
488 |
|
796 |
|
1,415 |
Personal |
|
134,836 |
|
12,520 |
|
725 |
|
13,245 |
|
1,908 |
|
149,989 |
|
101 |
|
382 |
|
48 |
|
430 |
|
597 |
|
1,128 |
Wholesale |
|
11,928 |
|
1,643 |
|
66 |
|
1,709 |
|
312 |
|
13,949 |
|
30 |
|
52 |
|
6 |
|
58 |
|
199 |
|
287 |
Ulster Bank RoI |
|
17,822 |
|
1,968 |
|
112 |
|
2,080 |
|
2,308 |
|
22,210 |
|
35 |
|
103 |
|
11 |
|
114 |
|
638 |
|
787 |
Personal (4) |
|
11,059 |
|
1,353 |
|
105 |
|
1,458 |
|
2,153 |
|
14,670 |
|
13 |
|
73 |
|
11 |
|
84 |
|
530 |
|
627 |
Wholesale |
|
6,763 |
|
615 |
|
7 |
|
622 |
|
155 |
|
7,540 |
|
22 |
|
30 |
|
|
|
30 |
|
108 |
|
160 |
Commercial Banking |
|
79,106 |
|
7,445 |
|
364 |
|
7,809 |
|
2,136 |
|
89,051 |
|
94 |
|
134 |
|
2 |
|
136 |
|
743 |
|
973 |
Private Banking |
|
13,750 |
|
380 |
|
151 |
|
531 |
|
225 |
|
14,506 |
|
13 |
|
5 |
|
5 |
|
10 |
|
20 |
|
43 |
Personal |
|
10,803 |
|
183 |
|
25 |
|
208 |
|
203 |
|
11,214 |
|
5 |
|
3 |
|
|
|
3 |
|
17 |
|
25 |
Wholesale |
|
2,947 |
|
197 |
|
126 |
|
323 |
|
22 |
|
3,292 |
|
8 |
|
2 |
|
5 |
|
7 |
|
3 |
|
18 |
RBS International |
|
13,383 |
|
274 |
|
15 |
|
289 |
|
101 |
|
13,773 |
|
6 |
|
3 |
|
|
|
3 |
|
17 |
|
26 |
NatWest Markets |
|
8,196 |
|
407 |
|
|
|
407 |
|
728 |
|
9,331 |
|
6 |
|
12 |
|
|
|
12 |
|
106 |
|
124 |
Central items & other |
|
6,964 |
|
27 |
|
|
|
27 |
|
|
|
6,991 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total loans excluding balances at central banks |
|
285,985 |
|
24,664 |
|
1,433 |
|
26,097 |
|
7,718 |
|
319,800 |
|
285 |
|
691 |
|
72 |
|
763 |
|
2,320 |
|
3,368 |
Personal |
|
159,553 |
|
14,106 |
|
865 |
|
14,971 |
|
4,351 |
|
178,875 |
|
122 |
|
458 |
|
59 |
|
517 |
|
1,158 |
|
1,797 |
Wholesale |
|
126,432 |
|
10,558 |
|
568 |
|
11,126 |
|
3,367 |
|
140,925 |
|
163 |
|
233 |
|
13 |
|
246 |
|
1,162 |
|
1,571 |
Balances at central banks |
|
87,181 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
87,181 |
|
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2 |
Total loans |
|
373,166 |
|
24,664 |
|
1,433 |
|
26,097 |
|
7,718 |
|
406,981 |
|
287 |
|
691 |
|
72 |
|
763 |
|
2,320 |
|
3,370 |
|
|
Financial assets |
|
ECL provisions (3) | ||||||||||||
|
|
Stage 1 |
|
Stage 2 |
|
Stage 3 |
|
Total |
|
Stage 1 |
|
Stage 2 |
|
Stage 3 |
|
Total |
1 January 2018 (1) |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
UK PBB |
|
145,650 |
|
14,490 |
|
3,202 |
|
163,342 |
|
144 |
|
352 |
|
1,110 |
|
1,606 |
Ulster Bank RoI |
|
19,055 |
|
2,347 |
|
3,669 |
|
25,071 |
|
29 |
|
106 |
|
1,054 |
|
1,189 |
Commercial Banking |
|
84,393 |
|
8,490 |
|
3,468 |
|
96,351 |
|
58 |
|
106 |
|
1,156 |
|
1,320 |
Private Banking |
|
12,755 |
|
333 |
|
324 |
|
13,412 |
|
18 |
|
9 |
|
27 |
|
54 |
RBS International |
|
7,791 |
|
307 |
|
119 |
|
8,217 |
|
5 |
|
5 |
|
28 |
|
38 |
NatWest Markets |
|
11,762 |
|
995 |
|
501 |
|
13,258 |
|
2 |
|
42 |
|
190 |
|
234 |
Central items & other |
|
52,523 |
|
10 |
|
|
|
52,533 |
|
5 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
6 |
Total financial assets excluding balances at central banks |
|
333,929 |
|
26,972 |
|
11,283 |
|
372,184 |
|
261 |
|
621 |
|
3,565 |
|
4,447 |
Balances at central banks |
|
96,566 |
|
5 |
|
|
|
96,571 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
1 |
Total financial assets |
|
430,495 |
|
26,977 |
|
11,283 |
|
468,755 |
|
262 |
|
621 |
|
3,565 |
|
4,448 |
For the notes to this table refer to the following page.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Segmental loans and impairment metrics (audited)
The table below summarises gross loans and ECL provisions coverage, by days past due, by segment and stage, within the scope of the ECL framework.
|
|
ECL provisions coverage |
|
ECL | ||||||||||||||
|
|
|
Stage 2 (2,3) |
|
|
|
|
|
Total |
|
|
|
Amounts | |||||
|
|
Stage 1 |
|
<30 DPD |
|
>30 DPD |
|
Total |
|
Stage 3 |
|
Total |
|
charge |
|
Loss rate |
|
written-off |
31 December 2018 (1) |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
£m |
|
basis points |
|
£m |
UK PBB |
|
0.09 |
|
3.06 |
|
6.83 |
|
3.26 |
|
35.86 |
|
0.86 |
|
342 |
|
20.9 |
|
557 |
Personal |
|
0.07 |
|
3.05 |
|
6.62 |
|
3.25 |
|
31.29 |
|
0.75 |
|
338 |
|
22.5 |
|
420 |
Wholesale |
|
0.25 |
|
3.16 |
|
9.09 |
|
3.39 |
|
63.78 |
|
2.06 |
|
4 |
|
2.9 |
|
137 |
Ulster Bank RoI |
|
0.20 |
|
5.23 |
|
9.82 |
|
5.48 |
|
27.64 |
|
3.54 |
|
15 |
|
6.8 |
|
372 |
Personal (4) |
|
0.12 |
|
5.40 |
|
10.48 |
|
5.76 |
|
24.62 |
|
4.27 |
|
20 |
|
13.6 |
|
343 |
Wholesale |
|
0.33 |
|
4.88 |
|
|
|
4.82 |
|
69.68 |
|
2.12 |
|
(5 |
) |
(6.6 |
) |
29 |
Commercial Banking |
|
0.12 |
|
1.80 |
|
0.55 |
|
1.74 |
|
34.78 |
|
1.09 |
|
144 |
|
16.2 |
|
460 |
Private Banking |
|
0.09 |
|
1.32 |
|
3.31 |
|
1.88 |
|
8.89 |
|
0.30 |
|
(6 |
) |
(4.1 |
) |
7 |
Personal |
|
0.05 |
|
1.64 |
|
|
|
1.44 |
|
8.37 |
|
0.22 |
|
(6 |
) |
(5.4 |
) |
5 |
Wholesale |
|
0.27 |
|
1.02 |
|
3.97 |
|
2.17 |
|
13.64 |
|
0.55 |
|
|
|
|
|
2 |
RBS International |
|
0.04 |
|
1.09 |
|
|
|
1.04 |
|
16.83 |
|
0.19 |
|
(2 |
) |
(1.5 |
) |
9 |
NatWest Markets |
|
0.07 |
|
2.95 |
|
|
|
2.95 |
|
14.56 |
|
1.33 |
|
(92 |
) |
(98.6 |
) |
89 |
Central items and other |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(3 |
) |
(4.3 |
) |
|
Total loans excluding balances at central banks |
|
0.10 |
|
2.80 |
|
5.02 |
|
2.92 |
|
30.06 |
|
1.05 |
|
398 |
|
12.5 |
|
1,494 |
Personal |
|
0.08 |
|
3.25 |
|
6.82 |
|
3.45 |
|
26.61 |
|
1.00 |
|
354 |
|
19.8 |
|
776 |
Wholesale |
|
0.13 |
|
2.21 |
|
2.29 |
|
2.21 |
|
34.51 |
|
1.11 |
|
44 |
|
3.1 |
|
718 |
Total loans |
|
0.08 |
|
2.80 |
|
5.02 |
|
2.92 |
|
30.06 |
|
0.83 |
|
398 |
|
9.8 |
|
1,494 |
|
|
ECL provisions coverage | ||||||||||
|
|
|
Stage 2 (2,3) |
|
|
|
| |||||
|
|
Stage 1 |
|
<30 DPD |
|
>30 DPD |
|
Total |
|
Stage 3 |
|
Total |
1 January 2018 (1) |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
Personal |
|
0.09 |
|
2.54 |
|
4.80 |
|
2.63 |
|
28.46 |
|
1.31 |
- UK mortgages |
|
0.01 |
|
0.56 |
|
1.62 |
|
0.61 |
|
11.23 |
|
0.18 |
- RoI mortgages |
|
0.07 |
|
4.44 |
|
7.09 |
|
4.67 |
|
26.02 |
|
6.18 |
- Credit cards |
|
1.71 |
|
9.11 |
|
27.27 |
|
9.31 |
|
53.57 |
|
5.23 |
- Other |
|
0.80 |
|
7.99 |
|
19.64 |
|
8.30 |
|
59.44 |
|
8.03 |
Wholesale |
|
0.07 |
|
1.88 |
|
2.07 |
|
1.88 |
|
35.51 |
|
1.09 |
- Property |
|
0.07 |
|
1.13 |
|
1.15 |
|
1.13 |
|
32.43 |
|
1.81 |
- Corporate |
|
0.14 |
|
1.90 |
|
2.86 |
|
1.92 |
|
36.50 |
|
1.80 |
- Financial institutions |
|
0.03 |
|
3.57 |
|
|
|
3.38 |
|
65.71 |
|
0.34 |
- Other |
|
0.01 |
|
0.85 |
|
|
|
0.85 |
|
|
|
0.01 |
Total financial assets |
|
0.06 |
|
2.25 |
|
3.75 |
|
2.30 |
|
31.60 |
|
0.95 |
Notes:
(1) The segment analysis tables at 31 December 2018 include all loans amortised cost within the scope of IFRS 9. The comparative tables at 1 January 2018 include all financial assets within the scope of IFRS 9, including debt securities of £50.4 billion, of which £42.7 billion related to debt securities classified as FVOCI. ECL on these debt securities at 1 January 2018 was £28 million, of which £4 million related to those classified as FVOCI.
(2) 30 DPD 30 days past due, the mandatory 30 days past due backstop is prescribed by IFRS 9 for significant increase in credit risk.
(3) ECL provisions on contingent liabilities and commitments are included within the Financial assets section so as not to distort ECL coverage ratios.
(4) 31 December 2018, £3 million of the write offs related to business banking portfolio in Ulster Bank RoI.
Key points
· The UK PBB and Ulster Bank RoI franchises accounted for the vast majority of Personal provisions. In Ulster Bank RoI, Personal provisions were primarily driven by Stage 3 impairments on the legacy mortgage book.
· The Commercial Banking business accounted for the majority of Wholesale exposures. Wholesale provisions in UK PBB reflected exposures to business banking customers and also the commercial businesses in RBS England & Wales/NatWest Scotland.
· On performing exposures (Stage 1 and Stage 2), materially higher ECL provision was held in credit deteriorated Stage 2 exposures than in Stage 1, in line with expectations. This was also reflected in provision coverage levels.
· Also in line with expectations, the majority of Stage 2 exposures were less than 30 days past due, since PD deterioration is the primary driver of credit deterioration.
· The differing cover rates between the Personal and Wholesale portfolios and across the business largely reflected differences in asset mix, including security cover, and the differing impacts of external environment events.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Portfolio summary sector analysis (audited)
The table below summarises financial assets and off-balance sheet exposures gross of ECL and related ECL provisions, impairment and past due by sector, asset quality and geographical region based on the country of operation of the customer.
|
|
Personal |
|
Wholesale |
|
Total | ||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
Credit |
|
Other |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Mortgages (1) |
|
cards |
|
personal |
|
Total |
|
Property |
|
Corporate |
|
FI |
|
Sovereign |
|
Total |
|
|
31 December 2018 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Loans by geography |
|
165,081 |
|
4,216 |
|
9,578 |
|
178,875 |
|
36,707 |
|
72,240 |
|
25,011 |
|
6,967 |
|
140,925 |
|
319,800 |
- UK |
|
150,233 |
|
4,112 |
|
9,117 |
|
163,462 |
|
33,855 |
|
60,657 |
|
11,611 |
|
3,089 |
|
109,212 |
|
272,674 |
- RoI |
|
14,350 |
|
104 |
|
233 |
|
14,687 |
|
1,114 |
|
3,733 |
|
392 |
|
2,497 |
|
7,736 |
|
22,423 |
- Other Europe |
|
102 |
|
|
|
67 |
|
169 |
|
1,395 |
|
3,760 |
|
5,903 |
|
1,088 |
|
12,146 |
|
12,315 |
- RoW |
|
396 |
|
|
|
161 |
|
557 |
|
343 |
|
4,090 |
|
7,105 |
|
293 |
|
11,831 |
|
12,388 |
Loans by asset quality (2,3) |
|
165,081 |
|
4,216 |
|
9,578 |
|
178,875 |
|
36,707 |
|
72,240 |
|
25,011 |
|
6,967 |
|
140,925 |
|
319,800 |
- AQ1-AQ4 |
|
104,989 |
|
35 |
|
1,040 |
|
106,064 |
|
16,133 |
|
22,587 |
|
22,397 |
|
6,802 |
|
67,919 |
|
173,983 |
- AQ5-AQ8 |
|
55,139 |
|
3,990 |
|
7,736 |
|
66,865 |
|
18,815 |
|
47,651 |
|
2,574 |
|
161 |
|
69,201 |
|
136,066 |
- AQ9 |
|
1,287 |
|
69 |
|
239 |
|
1,595 |
|
74 |
|
359 |
|
5 |
|
|
|
438 |
|
2,033 |
- AQ10 |
|
3,666 |
|
122 |
|
563 |
|
4,351 |
|
1,685 |
|
1,643 |
|
35 |
|
4 |
|
3,367 |
|
7,718 |
Loans by stage |
|
165,081 |
|
4,216 |
|
9,578 |
|
178,875 |
|
36,707 |
|
72,240 |
|
25,011 |
|
6,967 |
|
140,925 |
|
319,800 |
- Stage 1 |
|
149,760 |
|
2,851 |
|
6,942 |
|
159,553 |
|
33,145 |
|
61,844 |
|
24,502 |
|
6,941 |
|
126,432 |
|
285,985 |
- Stage 2 |
|
11,655 |
|
1,243 |
|
2,073 |
|
14,971 |
|
1,877 |
|
8,753 |
|
474 |
|
22 |
|
11,126 |
|
26,097 |
- Stage 3 |
|
3,666 |
|
122 |
|
563 |
|
4,351 |
|
1,685 |
|
1,643 |
|
35 |
|
4 |
|
3,367 |
|
7,718 |
Loans - past due analysis (4,5) |
|
165,081 |
|
4,216 |
|
9,578 |
|
178,875 |
|
36,707 |
|
72,240 |
|
25,011 |
|
6,967 |
|
140,925 |
|
319,800 |
- Not past due |
|
160,165 |
|
4,027 |
|
8,749 |
|
172,941 |
|
35,420 |
|
69,782 |
|
24,388 |
|
6,923 |
|
136,513 |
|
309,454 |
- Past due 1-29 days |
|
1,714 |
|
69 |
|
180 |
|
1,963 |
|
270 |
|
1,397 |
|
604 |
|
42 |
|
2,313 |
|
4,276 |
- Past due 30-89 days |
|
1,048 |
|
40 |
|
105 |
|
1,193 |
|
271 |
|
344 |
|
11 |
|
2 |
|
628 |
|
1,821 |
- Past due 90-180 days |
|
632 |
|
29 |
|
69 |
|
730 |
|
56 |
|
83 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
140 |
|
870 |
- Past due >180 days |
|
1,522 |
|
51 |
|
475 |
|
2,048 |
|
690 |
|
634 |
|
7 |
|
|
|
1,331 |
|
3,379 |
Loans - Stage 2 |
|
11,655 |
|
1,243 |
|
2,073 |
|
14,971 |
|
1,877 |
|
8,753 |
|
474 |
|
22 |
|
11,126 |
|
26,097 |
- Not past due |
|
9,788 |
|
1,172 |
|
1,843 |
|
12,803 |
|
1,556 |
|
8,196 |
|
472 |
|
22 |
|
10,246 |
|
23,049 |
- Past due 1-29 days |
|
1,126 |
|
43 |
|
133 |
|
1,302 |
|
68 |
|
244 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
313 |
|
1,615 |
- Past due 30-89 days |
|
741 |
|
28 |
|
97 |
|
866 |
|
253 |
|
313 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
567 |
|
1,433 |
Weighted average life * |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- ECL measurement (years) |
|
8 |
|
2 |
|
3 |
|
5 |
|
3 |
|
3 |
|
4 |
|
3 |
|
3 |
|
4 |
Weighted average 12 months PDs * |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- IFRS 9 (%) |
|
0.32 |
|
4.03 |
|
2.77 |
|
0.54 |
|
0.75 |
|
0.97 |
|
0.14 |
|
0.06 |
|
0.75 |
|
0.62 |
- Basel (%) |
|
0.84 |
|
3.52 |
|
3.50 |
|
1.04 |
|
0.95 |
|
1.43 |
|
0.23 |
|
0.06 |
|
1.01 |
|
1.03 |
ECL provisions by geography |
|
839 |
|
230 |
|
728 |
|
1,797 |
|
588 |
|
941 |
|
41 |
|
1 |
|
1,571 |
|
3,368 |
- UK |
|
237 |
|
227 |
|
707 |
|
1,171 |
|
518 |
|
615 |
|
27 |
|
1 |
|
1,161 |
|
2,332 |
- RoI |
|
602 |
|
3 |
|
21 |
|
626 |
|
43 |
|
125 |
|
2 |
|
|
|
170 |
|
796 |
- Other Europe |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
22 |
|
53 |
|
10 |
|
|
|
85 |
|
85 |
- RoW |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5 |
|
148 |
|
2 |
|
|
|
155 |
|
155 |
ECL provisions by stage |
|
839 |
|
230 |
|
728 |
|
1,797 |
|
588 |
|
941 |
|
41 |
|
1 |
|
1,571 |
|
3,368 |
- Stage 1 |
|
23 |
|
38 |
|
61 |
|
122 |
|
43 |
|
107 |
|
12 |
|
1 |
|
163 |
|
285 |
- Stage 2 |
|
150 |
|
120 |
|
247 |
|
517 |
|
39 |
|
200 |
|
7 |
|
|
|
246 |
|
763 |
- Stage 3 |
|
666 |
|
72 |
|
420 |
|
1,158 |
|
506 |
|
634 |
|
22 |
|
|
|
1,162 |
|
2,320 |
ECL provisions coverage (%) |
|
0.51 |
|
5.46 |
|
7.60 |
|
1.00 |
|
1.60 |
|
1.30 |
|
0.16 |
|
0.01 |
|
1.11 |
|
1.05 |
- Stage 1 (%) |
|
0.02 |
|
1.33 |
|
0.88 |
|
0.08 |
|
0.13 |
|
0.17 |
|
0.05 |
|
0.01 |
|
0.13 |
|
0.10 |
- Stage 2 (%) |
|
1.29 |
|
9.65 |
|
11.92 |
|
3.45 |
|
2.08 |
|
2.28 |
|
1.48 |
|
|
|
2.21 |
|
2.92 |
- Stage 3 (%) |
|
18.17 |
|
59.02 |
|
74.60 |
|
26.61 |
|
30.03 |
|
38.59 |
|
62.86 |
|
|
|
34.51 |
|
30.06 |
ECL charge |
|
57 |
|
87 |
|
210 |
|
354 |
|
30 |
|
13 |
|
3 |
|
(2 |
) |
44 |
|
398 |
- UK |
|
38 |
|
88 |
|
207 |
|
333 |
|
31 |
|
9 |
|
6 |
|
(2 |
) |
44 |
|
377 |
- RoI |
|
19 |
|
(1 |
) |
3 |
|
21 |
|
(1 |
) |
(3 |
) |
(1 |
) |
|
|
(5 |
) |
16 |
- Other Europe |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8 |
|
(2 |
) |
|
|
6 |
|
6 |
- RoW |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(1 |
) |
|
|
|
|
(1 |
) |
(1) |
ECL loss rate (%) |
|
0.03 |
|
2.06 |
|
2.19 |
|
0.20 |
|
0.08 |
|
0.02 |
|
0.01 |
|
(0.03 |
) |
0.03 |
|
0.12 |
Amounts written-off |
|
368 |
|
79 |
|
329 |
|
776 |
|
292 |
|
395 |
|
31 |
|
|
|
718 |
|
1,494 |
* Not within audit scope.
For the notes to this table refer to the following page.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Portfolio summary sector analysis (audited)
|
|
Personal |
|
Wholesale |
|
|
|
|
|
| ||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
Credit |
|
Other |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Mortgages |
|
cards |
|
personal |
|
Total |
|
Property |
|
Corporate |
|
FI |
|
Sovereign |
|
Total |
|
Total |
|
Fixed |
|
Variable |
31 December 2018 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Loans by residual maturity |
|
165,081 |
|
4,216 |
|
9,578 |
|
178,875 |
|
36,707 |
|
72,240 |
|
25,011 |
|
6,967 |
|
140,925 |
|
319,800 |
|
152,557 |
|
167,243 |
- <1yr |
|
11,244 |
|
919 |
|
4,960 |
|
17,123 |
|
9,533 |
|
29,788 |
|
17,602 |
|
6,362 |
|
63,285 |
|
80,408 |
|
20,534 |
|
59,874 |
- 1-5yr |
|
35,184 |
|
3,297 |
|
3,816 |
|
42,297 |
|
18,797 |
|
30,772 |
|
6,167 |
|
245 |
|
55,981 |
|
98,278 |
|
34,250 |
|
64,028 |
- 5yr |
|
118,653 |
|
|
|
802 |
|
119,455 |
|
8,377 |
|
11,680 |
|
1,242 |
|
360 |
|
21,659 |
|
141,114 |
|
97,773 |
|
43,341 |
Other financial assets by asset quality (2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
105 |
|
652 |
|
8,838 |
|
134,546 |
|
144,141 |
|
144,141 |
|
|
|
|
- AQ1-AQ4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
105 |
|
10 |
|
8,110 |
|
134,546 |
|
142,771 |
|
142,771 |
|
|
|
|
- AQ5-AQ8 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
642 |
|
721 |
|
|
|
1,363 |
|
1,363 |
|
|
|
|
- AQ9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4 |
|
|
|
4 |
|
4 |
|
|
|
|
- AQ10 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3 |
|
|
|
3 |
|
3 |
|
|
|
|
Off-balance sheet |
|
13,228 |
|
16,613 |
|
12,229 |
|
42,070 |
|
16,044 |
|
52,730 |
|
28,761 |
|
29,277 |
|
126,812 |
|
168,882 |
|
|
|
|
- Loan commitments |
|
13,228 |
|
16,613 |
|
12,229 |
|
42,070 |
|
15,335 |
|
48,569 |
|
26,684 |
|
29,276 |
|
119,864 |
|
161,934 |
|
|
|
|
- Financial guarantees |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
709 |
|
4,161 |
|
2,077 |
|
1 |
|
6,948 |
|
6,948 |
|
|
|
|
Off-balance sheet by asset quality (2) |
|
13,228 |
|
16,613 |
|
12,229 |
|
42,070 |
|
16,044 |
|
52,730 |
|
28,761 |
|
29,277 |
|
126,812 |
|
168,882 |
|
|
|
|
- AQ1-AQ4 |
|
12,116 |
|
422 |
|
9,103 |
|
21,641 |
|
11,945 |
|
36,134 |
|
27,364 |
|
29,262 |
|
104,705 |
|
126,346 |
|
|
|
|
- AQ5-AQ8 |
|
1,101 |
|
15,900 |
|
3,116 |
|
20,117 |
|
3,928 |
|
16,390 |
|
1,397 |
|
15 |
|
21,730 |
|
41,847 |
|
|
|
|
- AQ9 |
|
1 |
|
8 |
|
10 |
|
19 |
|
6 |
|
46 |
|
|
|
|
|
52 |
|
71 |
|
|
|
|
- AQ10 |
|
10 |
|
283 |
|
|
|
293 |
|
165 |
|
160 |
|
|
|
|
|
325 |
|
618 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total IFRS 9 credit risk exposure by stage |
|
| ||||||||
|
|
Total credit |
|
|
|
Stage 2 (2,3) |
|
|
|
ECL | ||||
|
|
exposure |
|
Stage 1 |
|
<30 DPD |
|
>30 DPD |
|
Total |
|
Stage 3 |
|
provisions |
1 January 2018 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Personal |
|
177,196 |
|
155,843 |
|
14,460 |
|
625 |
|
15,085 |
|
6,268 |
|
2,316 |
UK mortgages |
|
146,556 |
|
134,350 |
|
10,119 |
|
431 |
|
10,550 |
|
1,656 |
|
262 |
RoI mortgages |
|
15,549 |
|
10,674 |
|
1,351 |
|
127 |
|
1,478 |
|
3,397 |
|
961 |
Credit cards |
|
4,247 |
|
3,097 |
|
999 |
|
11 |
|
1,010 |
|
140 |
|
222 |
Other personal (6) |
|
10,844 |
|
7,722 |
|
1,991 |
|
56 |
|
2,047 |
|
1,075 |
|
871 |
Wholesale |
|
194,988 |
|
178,086 |
|
11,500 |
|
387 |
|
11,887 |
|
5,015 |
|
2,131 |
Property |
|
37,877 |
|
33,884 |
|
1,942 |
|
87 |
|
2,029 |
|
1,964 |
|
685 |
Corporate |
|
73,667 |
|
62,253 |
|
8,224 |
|
245 |
|
8,469 |
|
2,945 |
|
1,325 |
Financial institutions |
|
34,064 |
|
32,923 |
|
981 |
|
55 |
|
1,036 |
|
105 |
|
115 |
Sovereign |
|
49,380 |
|
49,026 |
|
353 |
|
|
|
353 |
|
1 |
|
6 |
Total financial assets excluding balances at central banks |
|
372,184 |
|
333,929 |
|
25,960 |
|
1,012 |
|
26,972 |
|
11,283 |
|
4,447 |
Balances at central banks |
|
96,571 |
|
96,566 |
|
5 |
|
|
|
5 |
|
|
|
1 |
Total financial assets |
|
468,755 |
|
430,495 |
|
25,965 |
|
1,012 |
|
26,977 |
|
11,283 |
|
4,448 |
Total contingent liabilities and commitments |
|
146,800 |
|
139,550 |
|
6,388 |
|
113 |
|
6,501 |
|
749 |
|
|
Total exposure |
|
615,555 |
|
570,045 |
|
32,353 |
|
1,125 |
|
33,478 |
|
12,032 |
|
|
Financial assets - asset quality (2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- AQ1-AQ4 |
|
230,773 |
|
223,789 |
|
6,883 |
|
101 |
|
6,984 |
|
|
|
|
- AQ5-AQ8 |
|
128,814 |
|
109,962 |
|
17,449 |
|
660 |
|
18,109 |
|
743 |
|
|
- AQ9 |
|
2,912 |
|
178 |
|
1,628 |
|
251 |
|
1,879 |
|
855 |
|
|
- AQ10 (3) |
|
9,685 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
9,685 |
|
|
Notes:
(1) At 31 December 2018, Mortgages include £0.7 billion secured lending in Private Banking, in line with ECL calculation methodology.
(2) AQ bandings are based on Basel PDs.
(3) At 31 December 2018, AQ10 includes £0.6 billion (31 December 2017 £0.7 billion) RoI mortgages which are not currently considered defaulted for capital calculation purposes for RoI but included in Stage 3.
(4) 30 DPD 30 days past due, the mandatory 30 days past due backstop as prescribed by the IFRS 9 guidance for significant increase in credit risk.
(5) Days past due Personal products: at a high level, for amortising products, the number of days past due is derived from the arrears amount outstanding and the monthly repayment instalment. For credit cards, it is based on payments missed, and for current accounts the number of continual days in excess of borrowing limit. Wholesale products: the number of days past due for all products is the number of continual days in excess of borrowing limit.
(6) At 1 January 2018, mortgages other than UK and RoI were reported within other personal but at 31 December 2018 they are reported separately.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Portfolio summary sector analysis (audited)
Wholesale forbearance
The table below summarises Wholesale forbearance, Heightened Monitoring and Risk of Credit Loss by sector. Personal forbearance is disclosed on page 144.
|
FI |
Property |
Sovereigns |
Other corporate |
Total |
2018 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Forbearance (flow) |
14 |
305 |
|
2,247 |
2,566 |
Forbearance (stock) |
15 |
477 |
|
2,756 |
3,248 |
Heightened Monitoring and Risk of Credit Loss |
100 |
503 |
16 |
4,145 |
4,764 |
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
Forbearance (flow) |
11 |
417 |
|
1,473 |
1,901 |
Forbearance (stock) |
14 |
764 |
|
3,067 |
3,845 |
Heightened Monitoring and Risk of Credit Loss |
144 |
739 |
|
4,183 |
5,066 |
Risk elements in lending |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The table below summarises risk elements in lending by segment on an IAS 39 basis. | ||||||||
|
| |||||||
|
|
Ulster |
|
|
|
|
Central |
|
|
UK |
Bank |
Commercial |
Private |
RBS |
NatWest |
items |
|
|
PBB |
RoI |
Banking |
Banking |
International |
Markets |
& other |
Total |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
At 1 January 2017 |
2,372 |
3,513 |
1,946 |
105 |
109 |
2,264 |
1 |
10,310 |
Inter segment transfers |
|
|
1,384 |
|
|
(1,384) |
|
|
Currency translation and other adjustments |
|
123 |
|
|
5 |
(86) |
1 |
43 |
Additions |
1,227 |
550 |
1,590 |
28 |
62 |
98 |
14 |
3,569 |
Transfers between REIL and potential problem loans |
(152) |
|
10 |
(2) |
7 |
8 |
|
(129) |
Transfer to performing book |
(294) |
(336) |
(283) |
|
(33) |
(12) |
(1) |
(959) |
Repayments and disposals |
(606) |
(444) |
(1,116) |
(32) |
(41) |
(468) |
(13) |
(2,720) |
Amounts written-off |
(572) |
(124) |
(335) |
(4) |
(6) |
(167) |
(2) |
(1,210) |
At 31 December 2017 |
1,975 |
3,282 |
3,196 |
95 |
103 |
253 |
|
8,904 |
|
Provisions |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The table below summarises provisions by segment on an IAS 39 basis. | ||||||||
|
|
Ulster |
|
|
|
|
Central |
|
|
UK |
Bank |
Commercial |
Private |
RBS |
NatWest |
items |
|
|
PBB |
RoI |
Banking |
Banking |
International |
Markets |
& other |
Total |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
At 1 January 2017 |
1,537 |
1,200 |
845 |
31 |
38 |
803 |
1 |
4,455 |
Inter segment transfers |
|
|
293 |
|
|
(293) |
|
|
Currency translation and other adjustments |
|
8 |
(7) |
|
|
(27) |
|
(26) |
Repayments and disposals |
|
|
|
|
|
(5) |
|
(5) |
Amounts written-off |
(572) |
(124) |
(335) |
(4) |
(6) |
(167) |
(2) |
(1,210) |
Recoveries of amounts previously written-off |
117 |
12 |
16 |
|
1 |
10 |
|
156 |
Charges/(releases) to income statement |
235 |
60 |
362 |
6 |
3 |
(137) |
1 |
530 |
Unwind of discount |
(37) |
(25) |
(12) |
(1) |
(1) |
(10) |
|
(86) |
At 31 December 2017 |
1,280 |
1,131 |
1,162 |
32 |
35 |
174 |
|
3,814 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Portfolio summary sector analysis (audited)
Key points
· Geography The majority of exposures in both the Personal and Wholesale portfolios were in the UK and the Republic of Ireland. Other exposures in Europe and the Rest of the World were mainly Wholesale. Mortgages, the vast majority of which are in the UK, accounted for more than half of the total exposure.
· Asset quality Measured against RBSs asset quality scale, 54% of lending exposure was rated in the AQ1-AQ4 bands at 31 December 2018. This equated to an indicative investment rating of BBB- or above. Specifically 59% of Personal and 48% of Wholesale lending exposure were in the AQ1-AQ4 category respectively.
· Loans by stage 90% of exposures were in Stage 1, with 8% in Stage 2 significantly credit deteriorated. Stage 3 assets, which align to AQ10, represented 2% of total exposures. In line with expectations, the Personal portfolio had a higher proportion of unsecured lending assets in Stage 2 than the mortgage portfolio. In the Wholesale portfolio, the proportion of assets in Stage 2 was slightly lower than in Personal overall.
· Loans Past due analysis Stage 2: the vast majority of assets overall were not past due, with the Stage 2 classification driven primarily by changes in lifetime PD. (For further detail, refer to the Significant increase in credit risk section). In mortgages, the majority of assets past due by more than 180 days were in Ulster Bank RoI reflecting the legacy mortgage portfolio and the residual effects from the financial crisis. In other personal, the relatively high rate of exposures past due by more than 90 days reflected the fact that impaired assets can be held on balance sheet with commensurate ECL provision for up to six years after default. Similarly in the Wholesale portfolio, impaired assets can be held on the balance sheet for a significant period of time while restructuring and recovery processes are concluded.
· Weighted average 12 months PDs In Wholesale, Basel PDs, which are based on a through-the-cycle approach, tend to be higher than point-in-time best estimate IFRS 9 PDs, reflecting the current state in the economic cycle, and also an element of conservatism in the regulatory capital framework. In Personal, the Basel PDs, which are point-in-time estimates, tend to be higher also reflecting conservatism, higher in mortgages than other products, and an element of default rate under-prediction in the IFRS 9 PD models. This has been mitigated by ECL overlays of approximately £60 million at the year end, pending model calibrations being implemented. The IFRS 9 PD for credit cards was higher than the Basel equivalent and reflected the relative sensitivity of the IFRS 9 model to forward-looking economic drivers.
· ECL provision by geography In line with exposures by geography, the weight of ECL related to exposures in the UK and the Republic of Ireland. The ECL in RoI was mainly Stage 3 provisions in the legacy Ulster Bank RoI mortgage portfolio.
· ECL provision by stage and coverage The weight of ECL by value was in Stage 3 impaired, with similar seen in both Personal and Wholesale. Provision coverage was progressively higher by stage reflecting the lifetime nature of losses in both Stage 2 and Stage 3. In the Personal portfolio, provision coverage was materially lower in mortgages relative to credit cards and other personal reflecting the secured nature of the facilities. For Wholesale exposures, security and enterprise value mitigated against losses in Stage 3.
· The ECL charge for the year was £398 million. This reflected the relatively stable external environment.
· Other financial assets by asset quality Consisting almost entirely of cash and balances at central banks and debt securities, these assets were mainly within the AQ1-AQ4 category.
· Off-balance sheet exposures by asset quality For Personal exposures, undrawn exposures are reflective of available credit lines in credit cards and current accounts. Additionally, the mortgage portfolio had undrawn exposure, where a formal offer has been made to a customer but has not yet been drawn down. There is also a legacy portfolio of flexible mortgages where a customer has the right and ability to draw down further funds. The asset quality distribution in mortgages is heavily weighted to the highest quality bands AQ1-AQ4, with credit card concentrated in the risk bands AQ5-AQ8. In Wholesale, 83% of undrawn exposure, relating mainly to loan commitments, was in the AQ1-AQ4 category.
· Forbearance Completed forbearance flow in 2018 for Wholesale was £2.6 billion compared to £1.9 billion in 2017. Forbearance granted in the transport sector increased to £493 million from £54 million, mainly driven by a customer which has been restructured and moved to Stage 2 from Stage 3 during the year. Forbearance across the diverse services sector increased from £347 million to £763 million. Of the forbearance that completed during the year, £1.1 billion related to payment concessions (2017 £1.4 billion) and £1.4 billion related to non-payment concessions (2017 £0.5 billion). Forbearance stock reduced by £0.6 billion, from £3.8 billion to £3.2 billion, driven by a decrease in forborne exposure in the energy and resources, property and retail and leisure sectors.
· Heightened Monitoring and Risk of Credit Loss Exposure decreased from £5.1 billion at 31 December 2017, to £4.8 billion at 31 December 2018. There was also a decrease in the number of customers classified as Heightened Monitoring and Risk of Credit Loss during the year. Despite the current economic uncertainty in the UK, the portfolio has remained stable.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued | ||||||||||||
Portfolio summary sector analysis (audited) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |||||
The table below summarises both current and potential exposure by geographical region on an IAS 39 basis. | ||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Wholesale (1) |
|
|
|
Wholesale (1) |
| |||||
|
|
Banks and |
|
|
Current |
|
|
Banks and |
|
|
|
Total |
|
Personal |
other FIs |
Sovereigns (2) |
Other |
exposure |
|
Personal |
other FIs |
Sovereigns (2) |
Other |
Total |
exposure |
2017 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
% |
% |
% |
% |
% |
£m |
UK |
158,965 |
17,992 |
91,161 |
94,896 |
363,014 |
|
33 |
4 |
19 |
20 |
76 |
413,378 |
RoI |
15,319 |
751 |
2,416 |
4,612 |
23,098 |
|
3 |
|
1 |
1 |
5 |
24,502 |
Other Western Europe |
514 |
7,504 |
43,414 |
8,559 |
59,991 |
|
|
2 |
9 |
2 |
13 |
86,866 |
US |
377 |
6,987 |
8,430 |
2,580 |
18,374 |
|
|
1 |
2 |
1 |
4 |
31,497 |
RoW (3) |
1,461 |
4,575 |
2,155 |
3,144 |
11,335 |
|
|
1 |
|
1 |
2 |
14,602 |
|
176,636 |
37,809 |
147,576 |
113,791 |
475,812 |
|
36 |
8 |
31 |
25 |
100 |
570,845 |
Notes:
(1) Includes SME customers managed in UK PBB Business Banking who are assigned a sector under RBSs sector concentration framework.
(2) Includes exposures to central governments, central banks and sub-sovereigns such as local authorities.
(3) Rest of world (RoW) also includes supranationals such as the World Bank and exposure relating to ocean-going vessels which cannot be meaningfully assigned to specific countries from a country risk perspective.
Loan asset quality |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The table below summarises asset quality and impairments by banks and customers on an IAS 39 basis. | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Impairment |
|
|
AQ1-AQ4 |
AQ5-AQ8 |
AQ9 |
AQ10 |
Past due |
Impaired |
provision |
Total |
2017 |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
Banks |
27.7 |
2.6 |
|
|
|
|
|
30.3 |
Customers |
226.8 |
109.6 |
2.8 |
0.7 |
6.4 |
7.4 |
(3.8) |
349.9 |
Loan sector concentration
The table below summarises gross loans to banks and customers (excluding reverse repos) and related credit metrics by sector, on an IAS 39 basis.
|
|
|
|
Credit metrics |
|
| ||
|
|
|
REIL |
Provisions |
Provisions |
Impairment |
| |
|
Gross |
|
|
as a % of |
as a % |
as a % of |
losses/ |
Amounts |
2017 |
loans |
REIL |
Provisions |
gross loans |
of REIL |
gross loans |
(releases) |
written-off |
£m |
£m |
£m |
% |
% |
% |
£m |
£m | |
Central and local government |
4,684 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Finance |
30,832 |
54 |
44 |
0.2 |
81 |
0.1 |
3 |
7 |
Personal - mortgage (1) |
163,010 |
3,876 |
994 |
2.4 |
26 |
0.6 |
50 |
87 |
- unsecured |
14,587 |
937 |
763 |
6.4 |
81 |
5.2 |
235 |
424 |
Property |
33,381 |
1,119 |
283 |
3.4 |
25 |
0.8 |
(82) |
133 |
Construction |
3,798 |
426 |
298 |
11.2 |
70 |
7.8 |
196 |
36 |
Of which: commercial real estate |
24,784 |
1,189 |
293 |
4.8 |
25 |
1.2 |
(76) |
139 |
Manufacturing |
8,862 |
147 |
64 |
1.7 |
44 |
0.7 |
4 |
25 |
Finance leases and instalment credit |
12,019 |
170 |
88 |
1.4 |
52 |
0.7 |
23 |
14 |
Retail, wholesale and repairs |
12,300 |
446 |
193 |
3.6 |
43 |
1.6 |
93 |
81 |
Transport and storage |
4,241 |
700 |
195 |
16.5 |
28 |
4.6 |
(32) |
165 |
Health, education and leisure |
11,337 |
330 |
145 |
2.9 |
44 |
1.3 |
65 |
48 |
Hotels and restaurants |
6,049 |
193 |
80 |
3.2 |
41 |
1.3 |
17 |
46 |
Utilities |
4,172 |
35 |
21 |
0.8 |
60 |
0.5 |
(18) |
13 |
Other |
17,726 |
471 |
256 |
2.7 |
54 |
1.4 |
(10) |
131 |
Latent |
|
|
390 |
|
|
|
(14) |
|
Total customer |
326,998 |
8,904 |
3,814 |
2.7 |
43 |
1.2 |
530 |
1,210 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total banks |
16,264 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note:
(1) Mortgages are reported in sectors other than personal mortgages by certain businesses based on the nature of the relationship with the customer.
Past due analysis |
|
|
|
|
|
The table below summarises loans amortised cost to customers that were past due at the balance sheet date but were not considered impaired. | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
2017 |
Number of days |
|
£m |
|
By sector |
£m |
Past due 1-29 days |
|
3,535 |
|
Personal |
3,731 |
Past due 30-59 days |
|
902 |
|
Property and construction |
667 |
Past due 60-89 days |
|
456 |
|
Financial institution |
24 |
Past due 90 days or more |
|
1,481 |
|
Other corporate |
1,952 |
|
|
6,374 |
|
|
6,374 |
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Credit risk enhancement and mitigation (audited)
The table below summarises exposures of modelled portfolios within the scope of the ECL framework and related credit risk enhancement and mitigation (CREM). Excluded from this analysis are the non modelled portfolios, primarily Private Banking and RBSI mortgage portfolios, which are discussed in the Personal portfolio section, including loan-to-value ratios. Refer to Policy elections and simplifications relating to IFRS 9 section for details on non-modelled portfolios.
|
Gross |
|
Maximum credit risk |
|
CREM by type |
|
CREM coverage |
|
Exposure post CREM | |||||
|
exposure |
ECL |
Total |
Stage 3 |
|
Financial (1) |
Property |
Other (2) |
|
Total |
Stage 3 |
|
Total |
Stage 3 |
2018 |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
|
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
|
£bn |
£bn |
|
£bn |
£bn |
Financial assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and balances at central banks |
87.2 |
|
87.2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
87.2 |
|
Loans - amortised cost (3) |
302.6 |
3.2 |
299.4 |
5.0 |
|
4.1 |
188.1 |
19.7 |
|
211.9 |
4.5 |
|
87.5 |
0.5 |
Personal (4) |
164.6 |
1.7 |
162.9 |
2.9 |
|
|
151.7 |
|
|
151.7 |
2.7 |
|
11.2 |
0.2 |
Wholesale (5) |
138.0 |
1.5 |
136.5 |
2.1 |
|
4.1 |
36.4 |
19.7 |
|
60.2 |
1.8 |
|
76.3 |
0.3 |
Debt securities |
57.0 |
|
57.0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
57.0 |
|
Total financial assets |
446.8 |
3.2 |
443.6 |
5.0 |
|
4.1 |
188.1 |
19.7 |
|
211.9 |
4.5 |
|
231.7 |
0.5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Contingent liabilities and commitments |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Personal (6) |
31.0 |
|
31.0 |
0.3 |
|
|
4.9 |
|
|
4.9 |
|
|
26.1 |
0.3 |
Wholesale |
126.2 |
|
126.2 |
0.3 |
|
0.6 |
5.9 |
6.1 |
|
12.6 |
|
|
113.6 |
0.3 |
Total off balance sheet |
157.2 |
|
157.2 |
0.6 |
|
0.6 |
10.8 |
6.1 |
|
17.5 |
|
|
139.7 |
0.6 |
Total exposure |
604.0 |
3.2 |
600.8 |
5.6 |
|
4.7 |
198.9 |
25.8 |
|
229.4 |
4.5 |
|
371.4 |
1.1 |
Notes:
(1) Financial collateral includes cash and securities collateral.
(2) Other collateral includes guarantees, charges over trade debtors as well as the amount by which credit risk exposure is reduced through netting arrangements, mainly cash management pooling, which give RBS a legal right to set off the financial asset against a financial liability due to the same counterparty.
(3) RBS holds collateral in respect of individual loans amortised cost to banks and customers. This collateral includes mortgages over property (both personal and commercial); charges over business assets such as plant and equipment, inventories and trade debtors; and guarantees of lending from parties other than the borrower. RBS obtains collateral in the form of securities in reverse repurchase agreements. Collateral values are capped at the value of the loan.
(4) On personal, Stage 3 mortgage exposures have relatively limited uncovered exposure reflecting the security held. On unsecured credit cards and other personal borrowing, the residual uncovered amount reflects historical experience of continued cash recovery post default through on-going engagement with customers.
(5) Stage 3 exposures post credit risk enhancement and mitigation in wholesale mainly represent enterprise value and the impact of written down collateral values; an individual assessment to determine ECL will consider multiple scenarios and in some instances allocate a probability weighting to a collateral value in excess of the written down value.
(6) At 31 December 2018, £0.3 billion personal Stage 3 balances primarily relate to loan commitments, the draw down of which is effectively prohibited.
The table below summarises financial asset exposures, both gross and net of offset arrangements, as well as credit mitigation and enhancement.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Exposure | |
|
|
|
|
|
Collateral (1) |
|
|
post credit | ||||
|
Gross |
IFRS |
Carrying |
Balance sheet |
|
|
Real estate and other |
Credit |
|
mitigation and | ||
|
exposure |
offset (5) |
value (6) |
offset (7) |
Cash (2) |
Securities (3) |
Residential (4) |
Commercial (4) |
enhancement (8) |
|
enhancement | |
2017 |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
|
£bn | |
Cash and balances at central banks |
98.4 |
|
98.4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
98.4 | |
Trading assets |
118.6 |
(32.6) |
86.0 |
(0.3) |
|
(32.5) |
|
|
|
|
53.2 | |
Derivatives |
177.9 |
(17.1) |
160.8 |
(128.3) |
(20.3) |
(5.9) |
|
|
(6.3) |
|
| |
Settlement balances |
3.2 |
(0.7) |
2.5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.5 | |
Loans - amortised cost |
334.1 |
(12.5) |
321.6 |
(27.9) |
(0.9) |
(11.2) |
(174.2) |
(45.0) |
(2.1) |
|
60.3 | |
Other financial assets |
52.0 |
|
52.0 |
|
|
|
|
(0.1) |
|
|
51.9 | |
Total third party gross of short positions |
784.2 |
(62.9) |
721.3 |
(156.5) |
(21.2) |
(49.6) |
(174.2) |
(45.1) |
(8.4) |
|
266.3 | |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Short positions |
(28.5) |
|
(28.5) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(28.5) | |
Net of short positions |
755.7 |
(62.9) |
692.8 |
(156.5) |
(21.2) |
(49.6) |
(174.2) |
(45.1) |
(8.4) |
|
237.8 | |
Notes:
(1) RBS holds collateral in respect of individual loans. This collateral includes mortgages over property (both personal and commercial); charges over business assets such as plant, inventories and trade debtors; and guarantees of lending from parties other than the borrower. RBS obtains collateral in the form of securities in reverse repurchase agreements. Cash and securities are received as collateral in respect of derivative transactions.
(2) Includes cash collateral pledged by counterparties based on daily mark-to-market movements of net derivative positions with the counterparty.
(3) Represent the fair value of securities received from counterparties, mainly relating to reverse repo transactions as part of netting arrangements.
(4) Property valuations are capped at the loan value and reflect the application of haircuts in line with regulatory rules to indexed valuations. Commercial collateral includes ships and plan and equipment collateral.
(5) Relates to offset arrangements that comply with IFRS criteria and transactions cleared through and novated to central clearing houses, primarily London Clearing House (LCH) and US Government Securities Clearing Corporation. During 2017 changes in the legal contracts with LCH and CME led to many derivatives cleared through that counterparty being settled to market each day rather than being collateralised as previously. This led to the derecognition of the associated assets and liabilities.
(6) The carrying value on the balance sheet represents the maximum exposure to credit risk by class of financial instrument.
(7) The amount by which credit risk exposure is reduced through arrangements, such as master netting agreements and cash management pooling, which give RBS a legal right to set off the financial asset against a financial liability due to the same counterparty.
(8) Comprises credit derivatives (bought protection) and guarantees against exposures.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Personal portfolio (audited)
Disclosures in the Personal portfolio section include drawn exposure (gross of provisions). Loan-to-value (LTV) ratios are split by stage under IFRS 9 at 31 December 2018 and by performing and non-performing status under IAS 39 at 31 December 2017.
|
2018 |
|
2017 | |||||||||
|
UK |
Ulster |
Private |
|
|
|
UK |
Ulster |
Private |
|
| |
Personal lending |
PBB |
Bank RoI |
Banking |
RBSI |
Total |
|
PBB |
Bank RoI |
Banking |
RBSI |
Total | |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | ||
Mortgages |
138,250 |
14,361 |
9,082 |
2,684 |
164,377 |
|
136,625 |
15,352 |
8,421 |
2,745 |
163,143 | |
Of which: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Owner occupied |
122,642 |
13,105 |
7,953 |
1,781 |
145,481 |
|
118,764 |
13,455 |
7,275 |
1,821 |
141,315 | |
Buy-to-let |
15,608 |
1,256 |
1,129 |
903 |
18,896 |
|
17,861 |
1,897 |
1,146 |
924 |
21,828 | |
Interest only - variable |
8,358 |
188 |
3,871 |
489 |
12,906 |
|
11,245 |
260 |
4,076 |
636 |
16,217 | |
Interest only - fixed |
12,229 |
12 |
3,636 |
187 |
16,064 |
|
12,584 |
8 |
2,866 |
96 |
15,554 | |
Mixed (1) |
6,036 |
68 |
2 |
18 |
6,124 |
|
6,039 |
79 |
2 |
20 |
6,140 | |
Impairment provisions (2) |
212 |
602 |
5 |
16 |
835 |
|
153 |
909 |
7 |
27 |
1,096 | |
Other personal lending (3) |
11,633 |
330 |
1,676 |
55 |
13,694 |
|
11,080 |
348 |
1,701 |
65 |
13,194 | |
Impairment provisions (2) |
909 |
25 |
19 |
1 |
954 |
|
833 |
44 |
19 |
2 |
898 | |
Total personal lending |
149,883 |
14,691 |
10,758 |
2,739 |
178,071 |
|
147,705 |
15,700 |
10,122 |
2,810 |
176,337 | |
Mortgage LTV ratios |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
- Total portfolio |
56% |
62% |
56% |
58% |
57% |
|
56% |
69% |
55% |
58% |
57% | |
- Stage 1 |
56% |
58% |
56% |
57% |
56% |
|
56% |
65% |
55% |
56% |
57% | |
- Stage 2 |
58% |
67% |
58% |
55% |
59% |
| ||||||
- Stage 3 |
55% |
77% |
58% |
99% |
69% |
|
57% |
88% |
59% |
122% |
78% | |
- Buy-to-let |
53% |
64% |
53% |
53% |
54% |
|
54% |
75% |
54% |
50% |
56% | |
- Stage 1 |
53% |
58% |
53% |
52% |
53% |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
- Stage 2 |
57% |
72% |
53% |
57% |
60% |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
- Stage 3 |
58% |
78% |
68% |
75% |
71% |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Gross new mortgage lending |
29,555 |
1,015 |
1,846 |
353 |
32,769 |
|
30,314 |
890 |
2,243 |
481 |
33,928 | |
of which: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Owner occupied |
28,608 |
1,004 |
1,689 |
241 |
31,542 |
|
28,504 |
875 |
1,904 |
319 |
31,602 | |
Weighted average LTV |
69% |
73% |
62% |
68% |
69% |
|
70% |
75% |
63% |
70% |
70% | |
Buy-to-let |
947 |
11 |
157 |
112 |
1,227 |
|
1,810 |
15 |
339 |
162 |
2,326 | |
Weighted average LTV |
61% |
57% |
55% |
61% |
60% |
|
62% |
57% |
56% |
62% |
61% | |
Interest only - variable rate |
43 |
|
697 |
13 |
753 |
|
335 |
6 |
902 |
39 |
1,282 | |
Interest only - fixed rate |
1,189 |
|
764 |
43 |
1,996 |
|
1,835 |
1 |
874 |
48 |
2,758 | |
Mixed (1) |
912 |
1 |
|
|
913 |
|
893 |
|
|
|
893 | |
Mortgage forbearance (4) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Forbearance flow |
446 |
210 |
11 |
|
667 |
|
440 |
201 |
31 |
5 |
677 | |
Forbearance stock |
1,338 |
2,645 |
8 |
|
3,991 |
|
1,384 |
3,893 |
7 |
25 |
5,309 | |
Current |
724 |
1,291 |
6 |
|
2,021 |
|
834 |
1,779 |
6 |
12 |
2,631 | |
1-3 months in arrears |
350 |
261 |
|
|
611 |
|
304 |
466 |
|
2 |
772 | |
> 3 months in arrears |
264 |
1,093 |
2 |
|
1,359 |
|
246 |
1,648 |
1 |
11 |
1,906 | |
Notes:
(1) Includes accounts which have an interest only sub-account and a capital and interest sub-account to provide a more comprehensive view of interest only exposures.
(2) 31 December 2018 data was prepared under IFRS 9. 31 December 2017 data was prepared under IAS 39. For UK PBB this excludes a non-material amount of provisions held on relatively small legacy portfolios.
(3) Excludes loans that are commercial in nature, for example loans guaranteed by a company and commercial real estate lending to Personal customers.
(4) The reduction in RBSI forbearance is due to reclassification.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Key points
· Overall The overall credit risk profile of the Personal portfolio, and its performance against credit risk appetite, remained stable during 2018.
· Total lending Total mortgage lending grew by £1.2 billion with new lending partly offset by redemptions and repayments.
· New mortgage lending was lower than 2017. Existing mortgage stock and new business were closely monitored against agreed risk appetite parameters. These included loan-to-value ratios, buy-to-let concentrations, new-build concentrations and credit quality. Underwriting standards were maintained during the period.
· Owner occupied and buy-to-let Most of the mortgage growth was in the owner-occupied portfolio. New mortgages in the buy-to-let portfolio remained subdued.
· LTVs The mortgage portfolio loan-to-value ratio remained stable. The improvement in Ulster Bank RoI reflected house price recovery and the disposal of a portfolio of mortgages during the year, which also contributed to the reduction in the level of exposures in Stage 3.
· Interest only By value, the proportion of mortgages on interest only and mixed terms (capital and interest only) reduced, driven by fewer buy-to-let mortgages.
· Regional mortgage analysis For UK PBB, 42% of mortgage lending was in Greater London and the South East (31 December 2017 43%). The level of exposure in this region remained broadly unchanged, reflecting lower demand for buy-to-let properties as well as mortgage redemptions. The weighted average loan-to-value for these regions was 52% (31 December 2017 51%) compared to an average of 56%.
· Interest rate profile As at 31 December 2018, 81% of customers in the UK PBB mortgage portfolio were on fixed rates (42% on five-year deals). In addition, 97% of all new mortgage completions in 2018 were fixed rate mortgages (62% of which were five-year mortgages), as customers sought to minimise the impact of potential rate rises.
· Provisions As expected, total ECL including ECL for unsecured lending generally increased under the IFRS 9 methodology compared to provisions calculated under IAS 39. The reduction in Ulster Bank RoI mortgage provisions was driven by a sale of legacy impaired debt.
· Other lending Total unsecured lending grew modestly in 2018, driven by growth in the PBB personal loan portfolio. Overdraft balances have shown a modest decline year-on-year.
· Other lending asset quality Unsecured credit quality remained stable, reflecting active portfolio management. Credit standards and controls were tightened across all three unsecured products to ensure that higher risk customer performance remained within risk appetite.
Personal portfolio (audited)
Mortgage LTV distribution by stage
The table below summarises gross mortgage lending and related ECL by LTV band. Mortgage lending not within the scope of IFRS 9 ECL reflected portfolios carried at fair value.
|
Mortgages |
|
ECL |
|
ECL provisions coverage (2) | |||||||||||
|
|
|
|
Not within |
|
Of which: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK PBB |
|
|
|
IFRS 9 ECL |
|
gross new |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
scope |
Total |
lending |
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
Total (1) |
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
Total | |
2018 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
% |
% |
% |
% |
≤50% |
47,111 |
3,423 |
516 |
153 |
51,203 |
4,779 |
|
2 |
16 |
64 |
82 |
|
|
0.5 |
12.4 |
0.2 |
>50% and ≤70% |
44,037 |
3,632 |
459 |
49 |
48,177 |
8,535 |
|
2 |
23 |
39 |
64 |
|
|
0.6 |
8.5 |
0.1 |
>70% and ≤80% |
20,345 |
1,490 |
135 |
15 |
21,985 |
7,434 |
|
1 |
11 |
11 |
23 |
|
|
0.7 |
8.1 |
0.1 |
>80% and ≤90% |
12,733 |
1,118 |
81 |
12 |
13,944 |
7,524 |
|
2 |
12 |
8 |
22 |
|
|
1.1 |
10.0 |
0.2 |
>90% and ≤100% |
2,343 |
178 |
24 |
7 |
2,552 |
1,104 |
|
1 |
4 |
3 |
8 |
|
|
2.4 |
12.1 |
0.3 |
>100% and ≤110% |
57 |
35 |
8 |
1 |
101 |
|
|
|
2 |
1 |
3 |
|
0.1 |
4.6 |
14.1 |
2.8 |
>110% and ≤130% |
53 |
41 |
9 |
2 |
105 |
|
|
|
2 |
1 |
3 |
|
0.1 |
5.4 |
14.6 |
3.4 |
>130% and ≤150% |
23 |
23 |
6 |
|
52 |
|
|
|
1 |
1 |
2 |
|
0.1 |
6.2 |
13.4 |
4.3 |
>150% |
3 |
9 |
3 |
|
15 |
|
|
|
1 |
1 |
2 |
|
0.1 |
6.2 |
17.3 |
7.2 |
Total with LTVs |
126,705 |
9,949 |
1,241 |
239 |
138,134 |
29,376 |
|
8 |
72 |
129 |
209 |
|
|
0.7 |
10.4 |
0.2 |
Other |
96 |
13 |
4 |
3 |
116 |
179 |
|
|
1 |
2 |
3 |
|
|
4.7 |
53.5 |
2.6 |
Total |
126,801 |
9,962 |
1,245 |
242 |
138,250 |
29,555 |
|
8 |
73 |
131 |
212 |
|
|
0.7 |
10.5 |
0.2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of which: | ||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Non- |
|
gross new |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Performing |
performing |
Total |
lending |
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
≤50% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
50,583 |
527 |
51,110 |
4,593 |
>50% and ≤70% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
47,361 |
505 |
47,866 |
8,310 |
>70% and ≤80% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
20,514 |
150 |
20,664 |
7,709 |
>80% and ≤90% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
13,409 |
87 |
13,496 |
8,239 |
>90% and ≤100% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,559 |
36 |
2,595 |
1,285 |
>100% and ≤110% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
130 |
14 |
144 |
1 |
>110% and ≤130% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
114 |
10 |
124 |
1 |
>130% and ≤150% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
58 |
5 |
63 |
|
>150% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
25 |
8 |
33 |
1 |
Total with LTVs |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
134,753 |
1,342 |
136,095 |
30,139 |
Other |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
512 |
18 |
530 |
175 |
Total |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
135,265 |
1,360 |
136,625 |
30,314 |
For the notes to this table refer to the following page.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Personal portfolio (audited)
Mortgage LTV distribution by stage
|
Mortgages |
|
|
|
ECL provisions |
|
ECL provisions coverage (2) | ||||||||||
Ulster Bank RoI |
|
|
|
Not within |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
IFRS 9 ECL |
Total |
|
|
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
Total |
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
Total | |
2018 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
|
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
% |
% |
% |
% |
≤50% |
3,818 |
374 |
463 |
|
4,655 |
|
|
|
1 |
5 |
40 |
46 |
|
|
1.4 |
8.6 |
1.0 |
>50% and ≤70% |
3,567 |
365 |
459 |
|
4,391 |
|
|
|
2 |
10 |
47 |
59 |
|
|
2.7 |
10.3 |
1.3 |
>70% and ≤80% |
1,564 |
190 |
241 |
|
1,995 |
|
|
|
1 |
11 |
52 |
64 |
|
0.1 |
5.5 |
21.5 |
3.2 |
>80% and ≤90% |
1,059 |
184 |
272 |
|
1,515 |
|
|
|
2 |
15 |
82 |
99 |
|
0.2 |
8.3 |
30.2 |
6.5 |
>90% and ≤100% |
570 |
154 |
261 |
|
985 |
|
|
|
2 |
17 |
99 |
118 |
|
0.4 |
11.1 |
37.7 |
11.9 |
>100% and ≤110% |
197 |
80 |
207 |
|
484 |
|
|
|
2 |
10 |
85 |
97 |
|
0.9 |
12.8 |
41.1 |
20.1 |
>110% and ≤130% |
51 |
35 |
179 |
|
265 |
|
|
|
|
6 |
84 |
90 |
|
0.8 |
16.6 |
47.0 |
34.0 |
>130% and ≤150% |
5 |
5 |
37 |
|
47 |
|
|
|
|
1 |
20 |
21 |
|
0.3 |
19.1 |
54.7 |
45.2 |
>150% |
10 |
1 |
13 |
|
24 |
|
|
|
|
1 |
7 |
8 |
|
2.1 |
27.2 |
58.9 |
33.5 |
Total with LTVs |
10,841 |
1,388 |
2,132 |
|
14,361 |
|
|
|
10 |
76 |
516 |
602 |
|
0.1 |
5.4 |
24.2 |
4.2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Performing |
Non-performing |
Total | |
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
≤50% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3,743 |
|
333 |
4,076 |
>50% and ≤70% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3,600 |
|
382 |
3,982 |
>70% and ≤80% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,858 |
|
233 |
2,091 |
>80% and ≤90% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,420 |
|
273 |
1,693 |
>90% and ≤100% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,070 |
|
309 |
1,379 |
>100% and ≤110% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
814 |
|
317 |
1,131 |
>110% and ≤130% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
378 |
|
414 |
792 |
>130% and ≤150% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
20 |
|
126 |
146 |
>150% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
23 |
|
39 |
62 |
Total with LTVs |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
12,926 |
|
2,426 |
15,352 |
Notes:
(1) |
Excludes a non-material amount of provisions held on relatively small legacy portfolios. |
(2) |
ECL provisions coverage is ECL provisions divided by drawn exposure.
|
Key point
· ECL coverage rates increase through the LTV bands with both UK PBB and Ulster Bank RoI having only limited exposures in the highest LTV bands. The relatively high coverage level in the lowest LTV band for UK PBB included the effect of time-discounting on expected recoveries. Additionally, this also reflected the modelling approach that recognised an element of expected loss on mortgages that are not subject to formal repossession activity.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Personal portfolio (audited)
UK PBB Mortgage LTV distribution by region
|
|
50% |
80% |
100% |
|
|
Weighted |
|
|
|
|
<50% |
<80% |
<100% |
<150% |
>150% |
Total |
average LTV |
Other |
Total |
Total |
2018 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
% |
£m |
£m |
% |
South East |
14,699 |
17,147 |
2,843 |
8 |
|
34,697 |
53 |
27 |
34,724 |
25 |
Greater London |
12,928 |
9,614 |
1,298 |
3 |
|
23,843 |
48 |
19 |
23,862 |
17 |
Scotland |
3,205 |
5,612 |
1,844 |
11 |
|
10,672 |
60 |
8 |
10,680 |
8 |
North West |
4,163 |
7,756 |
1,970 |
6 |
|
13,895 |
59 |
12 |
13,907 |
10 |
South West |
4,231 |
6,843 |
1,292 |
8 |
|
12,374 |
57 |
9 |
12,383 |
9 |
West Midlands |
3,036 |
5,642 |
1,192 |
4 |
|
9,874 |
58 |
7 |
9,881 |
7 |
Rest of the UK |
8,942 |
17,548 |
6,056 |
217 |
16 |
32,779 |
62 |
34 |
32,813 |
24 |
Total |
51,204 |
70,162 |
16,495 |
257 |
16 |
138,134 |
56 |
116 |
138,250 |
100 |
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
South East |
14,606 |
16,908 |
2,729 |
10 |
|
34,253 |
53 |
96 |
34,349 |
25 |
Greater London |
13,592 |
9,900 |
1,322 |
3 |
|
24,817 |
48 |
112 |
24,929 |
18 |
Scotland |
2,850 |
5,341 |
2,423 |
45 |
|
10,659 |
63 |
34 |
10,693 |
8 |
North West |
4,125 |
7,510 |
2,131 |
11 |
|
13,777 |
59 |
63 |
13,840 |
10 |
South West |
4,181 |
6,572 |
1,055 |
9 |
|
11,817 |
56 |
40 |
11,857 |
9 |
West Midlands |
2,578 |
5,264 |
1,503 |
6 |
|
9,351 |
61 |
42 |
9,393 |
7 |
Rest of the UK |
9,175 |
17,037 |
4,929 |
247 |
33 |
31,421 |
60 |
143 |
31,564 |
23 |
Total |
51,107 |
68,532 |
16,092 |
331 |
33 |
136,095 |
56 |
530 |
136,625 |
100 |
Commercial real estate (CRE)
The CRE portfolio comprises exposures to entities involved in the development of, or investment in, commercial and residential properties (including house builders but excluding housing associations, construction and building materials). The sector is reviewed regularly at senior executive committees. Reviews include portfolio credit quality, capital consumption and control frameworks. All disclosures in the CRE section are based on current exposure (gross of provisions and risk transfer). Current exposure is defined as: loans; the amount drawn under a credit facility plus accrued interest; contingent obligations; the issued amount of the guarantee or letter of credit; derivatives - the mark to market value, netted where netting agreements exist and net of legally enforceable collateral.
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||
By geography and sub sector (1) |
UK |
RoI |
Other |
Total |
|
UK |
RoI |
Other |
Total |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Investment |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Residential (2) |
4,426 |
363 |
54 |
4,843 |
|
4,319 |
227 |
39 |
4,585 |
Office (3) |
2,889 |
164 |
651 |
3,704 |
|
3,055 |
235 |
600 |
3,890 |
Retail (4) |
5,168 |
40 |
92 |
5,300 |
|
5,401 |
42 |
132 |
5,575 |
Industrial (5) |
2,270 |
51 |
176 |
2,497 |
|
2,438 |
36 |
14 |
2,488 |
Mixed/other (6) |
3,221 |
180 |
123 |
3,524 |
|
4,609 |
203 |
228 |
5,040 |
|
17,974 |
798 |
1,096 |
19,868 |
|
19,822 |
743 |
1,013 |
21,578 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Development |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Residential (2) |
2,715 |
122 |
124 |
2,961 |
|
3,107 |
145 |
154 |
3,406 |
Office (3) |
192 |
|
|
192 |
|
169 |
|
|
169 |
Retail (4) |
94 |
7 |
1 |
102 |
|
187 |
5 |
2 |
194 |
Industrial (5) |
119 |
2 |
12 |
133 |
|
49 |
|
|
49 |
Mixed/other (6) |
32 |
2 |
|
34 |
|
59 |
3 |
|
62 |
|
3,152 |
133 |
137 |
3,422 |
|
3,571 |
153 |
156 |
3,880 |
Total |
21,126 |
931 |
1,233 |
23,290 |
|
23,393 |
896 |
1,169 |
25,458 |
Notes:
(1) Geographical splits are based on country of collateral risk.
(2) Residential properties including houses, flats and student accommodation.
(3) Office properties including offices in central business districts, regional headquarters and business parks.
(4) Retail properties including high street retail, shopping centres, restaurants, bars and gyms.
(5) Industrial properties including distribution centres, manufacturing and warehouses.
(6) Mixed usage or other properties that do not fall within the other categories above. Mixed generally relates to a mixture of retail/office with residential.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Commercial real estate (CRE)
CRE LTV distribution by stage (audited)
The table below summarises CRE current exposure and related ECL by LTV band.
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||||||||||||
|
Current exposure (gross of provisions) (1,2) |
|
ECL provisions |
|
ECL provisions coverage (4) |
|
|
|
| ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
Not within |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
IFRS 9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Non- |
|
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
scope (3) |
Total |
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
Total |
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
Total |
|
Performing |
performing |
Total |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
% |
% |
% |
% |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
<50% |
8,229 |
245 |
52 |
795 |
9,321 |
|
7 |
4 |
14 |
25 |
|
0.1 |
1.7 |
26.4 |
0.3 |
|
9,622 |
66 |
9,688 |
>50% and <70% |
4,769 |
297 |
78 |
703 |
5,847 |
|
6 |
6 |
14 |
26 |
|
0.1 |
2.0 |
17.8 |
0.5 |
|
6,621 |
119 |
6,740 |
>70% and <80% |
394 |
43 |
33 |
6 |
476 |
|
1 |
1 |
8 |
10 |
|
0.3 |
2.6 |
23.4 |
2.1 |
|
405 |
52 |
457 |
>80% and <90% |
55 |
11 |
24 |
2 |
92 |
|
|
|
5 |
5 |
|
0.3 |
3.4 |
20.9 |
6.1 |
|
158 |
42 |
200 |
>90% and <100% |
31 |
7 |
20 |
1 |
59 |
|
|
|
7 |
7 |
|
0.6 |
5.1 |
34.9 |
12.9 |
|
89 |
31 |
120 |
>100% and <110% |
53 |
4 |
15 |
|
72 |
|
|
|
5 |
5 |
|
0.3 |
4.2 |
34.6 |
7.6 |
|
34 |
21 |
55 |
>110% and <130% |
22 |
3 |
111 |
4 |
140 |
|
|
|
22 |
22 |
|
0.4 |
5.4 |
19.4 |
16.0 |
|
60 |
421 |
481 |
>130% and <150% |
6 |
10 |
10 |
|
26 |
|
|
1 |
4 |
5 |
|
0.9 |
6.3 |
40.6 |
18.1 |
|
44 |
29 |
73 |
>150% |
30 |
6 |
42 |
|
78 |
|
|
1 |
29 |
30 |
|
0.5 |
9.8 |
69.6 |
38.1 |
|
149 |
72 |
221 |
Total with LTVs |
13,589 |
626 |
385 |
1,511 |
16,111 |
|
14 |
13 |
108 |
135 |
|
0.1 |
2.1 |
27.9 |
0.9 |
|
17,182 |
853 |
18,035 |
Total portfolio average LTV% |
45 |
56 |
114 |
48 |
47 |
|
n/a |
n/a |
n/a |
n/a |
|
n/a |
n/a |
n/a |
n/a |
|
48 |
119 |
51 |
Other (5) |
2,655 |
133 |
784 |
185 |
3,757 |
|
4 |
5 |
50 |
59 |
|
0.2 |
4.0 |
6.3 |
1.7 |
|
3,112 |
431 |
3,543 |
Development (6) |
2,865 |
205 |
178 |
174 |
3,422 |
|
11 |
3 |
80 |
94 |
|
0.4 |
1.6 |
44.8 |
2.9 |
|
3,634 |
246 |
3,880 |
Total |
19,109 |
964 |
1,347 |
1,870 |
23,290 |
|
29 |
21 |
238 |
288 |
|
0.2 |
2.3 |
17.6 |
1.3 |
|
23,928 |
1,530 |
25,458 |
Notes:
(1) CRE current exposure comprises gross lending, interest rate hedging derivatives and other assets carried at fair value that are managed as part of the overall CRE portfolio.
(2) The exposure in Stage 3 mainly related to legacy assets.
(3) Includes exposures relating to non-modelled portfolios and other exposures carried at fair value, including derivatives.
(4) ECL provisions coverage is ECL provisions divided by current exposure.
(5) Relates mainly to business banking, rate risk management products and unsecured corporate lending. The low Stage 3 ECL provisions coverage was driven by a single large exposure, which has been written down to the expected recoverable amount.
(6) Relates to the development of commercial and residential properties. LTV is not a meaningful measure for this type of lending activity.
Key points (audited)
· Overall The majority of the CRE portfolio was managed in the UK within Commercial Banking, Private Banking and UK PBB. The remainder was managed in Ulster Bank RoI and NatWest Markets. Business appetite and strategy remain aligned across the segments.
· 2018 trends Growth in the commercial property market slowed during 2018.
· Performance varied widely by sub-sector with strong growth from industrials contrasting with material decline in parts of the retail sector.
· Credit quality The CRE retail portfolio had a low default rate, with a limited number of new defaults. The sub-sector was monitored on a regular basis and credit quality was in line with the wider CRE portfolio.
· Economics Fundamentals such as rental incomes, property values and investor/occupier demand for other commercial sub-sectors appeared more robust, however, all are exposed to some degree to the risk of a disorderly exit from the EU. Conditions for the mainstream residential sector remained resilient, supported by mortgage availability and high levels of employment. However, the higher value end of the market was characterised by low transaction volumes.
· Risk appetite Lending criteria for commercial real estate were at conservative levels, contributing to materially reduced leverage for new origination in London offices and parts of the retail sector.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Flow statements (audited)
The ECL flow statements analyse the key elements that drive the movement of ECL and related income statement over the reporting period. The key themes are:
· The flow statements capture the changes in ECL as well as the changes in related financial assets used in determining ECL. Exposures in this section may therefore differ from those reported in other tables in the credit risk section, principally in relation to exposures in Stage 1 and Stage 2. These differences do not have a material ECL impact.
· Financial assets presented in the flow statements include treasury liquidity portfolios, comprising balances at central banks and debt securities, as well as loans. Both modelled and non-modelled portfolios are included.
· Inter-Group transfers were a feature of the ECL flows during 2018 as a result of ring-fencing related changes. These transfers had no impact at a RBS Group-wide level.
· Stage transfers (for example, exposures moving from Stage 1 to Stage 2) these transfers are a key feature of the ECL movements, with the net re-measurement cost of transitioning to a worse stage being a primary driver of income statement charges for the period (likewise there is an ECL benefit for accounts improving stage).
· Changes in risk parameters captures the reassessment of the ECL within a given stage, including any ECL overlays and residual income statement gains or losses at the point of write-off or accounting write-down.
· Other (P&L only items) includes any subsequent changes in the value of written-down assets (for example, fortuitous recoveries) along with other direct write-off items such as direct recovery costs. Note: other (P&L only items) only affects the income statement and does not impact the balance sheet ECL movements.
· Amounts written-off represent the gross asset written-down against accounts with ECL, including the net asset write-down for debt sale activity.
· There were small amounts of ECL flows from Stage 3 to Stage 1 during the year. This does not however indicate that accounts can return from Stage 3 to Stage 1 directly. On a similar basis, flows from Stage 1 to Stage 3 were observed, however this also included legitimate transfers due to unexpected default events. The small number of write-offs in Stage 1 and 2 reflect the effect of portfolio debt sales and also staging at the start of the analysis period.
· The impact of model changes during 2018 were not material at a RBS Group-wide level or on the portfolios disclosed below.
|
Stage 1 |
|
Stage 2 |
|
Stage 3 |
|
Total | ||||
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
Group total |
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m | |
At 1 January 2018 |
419,038 |
262 |
|
29,637 |
621 |
|
10,595 |
3,565 |
|
459,270 |
4,448 |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
1,820 |
(6) |
|
88 |
17 |
|
50 |
(11) |
|
1,958 |
|
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 |
(18,416) |
(52) |
|
18,416 |
52 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 |
13,723 |
228 |
|
(13,723) |
(228) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers to Stage 3 |
(1,205) |
(3) |
|
(1,837) |
(108) |
|
3,042 |
111 |
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 3 |
1,272 |
16 |
|
1,523 |
163 |
|
(2,795) |
(179) |
|
|
|
Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer |
|
(207) |
|
|
247 |
|
|
447 |
|
|
487 |
Changes in risk parameters (model inputs) |
|
34 |
|
|
74 |
|
|
36 |
|
|
144 |
Other changes in net exposure |
6,312 |
29 |
|
(6,716) |
(32) |
|
(1,633) |
(85) |
|
(2,037) |
(88) |
Other (P&L only items - primarily fortuitous recoveries) |
|
1 |
|
|
3 |
|
|
(149) |
|
|
(145) |
Income statement (releases)/charges |
|
(143) |
|
|
292 |
|
|
249 |
|
|
398 |
Amounts written-off |
(3) |
(3) |
|
(28) |
(28) |
|
(1,463) |
(1,463) |
|
(1,494) |
(1,494) |
Other movements |
|
(1) |
|
|
(6) |
|
|
(94) |
|
|
(101) |
At 31 December 2018 |
422,541 |
297 |
|
27,360 |
772 |
|
7,796 |
2,327 |
|
457,697 |
3,396 |
Net carrying amount |
422,244 |
|
|
26,588 |
|
|
5,469 |
|
|
454,301 |
|
The following flow statements provide insight into the material portfolios underpinning the Group flow statements.
Personal
The following flow statements are at a portfolio level.
UK PBB - mortgages |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
At 1 January 2018 |
124,180 |
11 |
|
10,621 |
64 |
|
1,353 |
157 |
|
136,154 |
232 |
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 |
(4,928) |
(1) |
|
4,928 |
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 |
4,245 |
15 |
|
(4,245) |
(15) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers to Stage 3 |
(61) |
|
|
(327) |
(5) |
|
388 |
5 |
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 3 |
7 |
|
|
235 |
23 |
|
(242) |
(23) |
|
|
|
Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer |
|
(15) |
|
|
11 |
|
|
17 |
|
|
13 |
Changes in risk parameters (model inputs) |
|
|
|
|
4 |
|
|
51 |
|
|
55 |
Other changes in net exposure |
4,228 |
|
|
(970) |
(6) |
|
(257) |
(14) |
|
3,001 |
(20) |
Other (P&L only items) |
|
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
(6) |
|
|
(5) |
Income statement (releases)/charges |
|
(14) |
|
|
9 |
|
|
48 |
|
|
43 |
Amounts written-off |
|
|
|
(1) |
(1) |
|
(26) |
(26) |
|
(27) |
(27) |
Other movements |
|
|
|
|
(2) |
|
|
(35) |
|
|
(37) |
At 31 December 2018 |
127,671 |
10 |
|
10,241 |
74 |
|
1,216 |
132 |
|
139,128 |
216 |
Net carrying amount |
127,661 |
|
|
10,167 |
|
|
1,084 |
|
|
138,912 |
|
Key points
· Overall ECL reduction was primarily driven by business-as-usual write-offs in Stage 3.
· Stage 1 ECL levels remained steady despite portfolio growth during 2018 as a result of modest PD reduction, with Stage 2 ECL showing an increase as a result of some additional forward-looking provisions being taken during the year.
· Transfers from Stage 3 back to the performing book were higher than those in Personal unsecured lending, due to the higher cure activity typically seen in mortgages.
· The increase in Stage 3 ECL changes in risk parameters reflected the monthly assessment of the loss requirement, capturing underlying changes in risk and forward-looking assessments.
· Write-off of any residual shortfall following the sale of a repossessed property typically occurs within five years, although this period can be longer, reflecting the ongoing support for customers who engage constructively with RBS.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Flow statements (audited)
|
Stage 1 |
|
Stage 2 |
|
Stage 3 |
|
Total | ||||
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
UK PBB - credit cards |
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m | |
At 1 January 2018 |
2,841 |
52 |
|
997 |
94 |
|
105 |
75 |
|
3,943 |
221 |
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 |
(739) |
(15) |
|
739 |
15 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 |
763 |
50 |
|
(763) |
(50) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers to Stage 3 |
(42) |
(1) |
|
(88) |
(20) |
|
130 |
21 |
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 3 |
1 |
1 |
|
2 |
1 |
|
(3) |
(2) |
|
|
|
Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer |
|
(38) |
|
|
66 |
|
|
68 |
|
|
96 |
Changes in risk parameters (model inputs) |
|
(15) |
|
|
|
|
|
(4) |
|
|
(19) |
Other changes in net exposure |
(192) |
2 |
|
343 |
17 |
|
(45) |
|
|
106 |
19 |
Other (P&L only items) |
|
3 |
|
|
(1) |
|
|
(11) |
|
|
(9) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income statement (releases)/charges |
|
(48) |
|
|
82 |
|
|
53 |
|
|
87 |
Amounts written-off |
|
|
|
(4) |
(4) |
|
(81) |
(81) |
|
(85) |
(85) |
Other movements |
|
|
|
|
(1) |
|
|
(6) |
|
|
(7) |
At 31 December 2018 |
2,632 |
36 |
|
1,226 |
118 |
|
106 |
71 |
|
3,964 |
225 |
Net carrying amount |
2,596 |
|
|
1,108 |
|
|
35 |
|
|
3,739 |
|
Key points
· Overall ECL increased primarily due to increased levels of Stage 2 inflows in the first half of the year. This was the result of activity to calibrate and refine the criteria used to identify significant increase in credit risk, with underlying performance stable.
· Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 were higher than in other personal portfolios, primarily due to the ECL assessment period being reset when cards are re-issued.
· ECL transfers from Stage 3 back to the performing book were relatively small as expected.
· The amounts in other (P&L only items) mainly reflected cash recoveries after write-off. These benefited the income statement without affecting ECL.
· Amounts written-off primarily represented charge-offs (analogous to write-off) which typically occurs after 12 missed payments, and also 2018 debt sale activity.
UK PBB - other personal unsecured |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
At 1 January 2018 |
4,518 |
46 |
|
1,790 |
164 |
|
705 |
582 |
|
7,013 |
792 |
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 |
(1,452) |
(18) |
|
1,452 |
18 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 |
733 |
42 |
|
(733) |
(42) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers to Stage 3 |
(51) |
(1) |
|
(182) |
(50) |
|
233 |
51 |
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 3 |
2 |
|
|
15 |
4 |
|
(17) |
(4) |
|
|
|
Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer |
|
(34) |
|
|
110 |
|
|
114 |
|
|
190 |
Changes in risk parameters (model inputs) |
|
2 |
|
|
58 |
|
|
(1) |
|
|
59 |
Other changes in net exposure |
1,325 |
19 |
|
(363) |
(11) |
|
(104) |
(7) |
|
858 |
1 |
Other (P&L only items - primarily fortuitous recoveries) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(42) |
|
|
(42) |
Income statement (releases)/charges |
|
(13) |
|
|
157 |
|
|
64 |
|
|
208 |
Amounts written-off |
(2) |
(2) |
|
(9) |
(9) |
|
(322) |
(322) |
|
(333) |
(333) |
Other movements |
|
|
|
|
(3) |
|
|
(19) |
|
|
(22) |
At 31 December 2018 |
5,073 |
54 |
|
1,970 |
239 |
|
495 |
394 |
|
7,538 |
687 |
Net carrying amount |
5,019 |
|
|
1,731 |
|
|
101 |
|
|
6,851 |
|
Key points
· Overall ECL reduction was mainly driven by debt sale activity and business-as-usual write-offs in Stage 3, both reflected in amounts written-off.
· Increases in Stage 2 reflected the underlying performance of recent new business growth maturing. Additionally, the ECL overlay for economic uncertainty contributed to the uplift captured in changes in risk parameters.
· The portfolio continued to experience cash recoveries after write-off, reported in other (P&L only items primarily fortuitous recoveries). This benefited the income statement without affecting ECL.
· Write-off occurs once recovery activity with the customer has been concluded and there are no further recoveries expected, but no later than six years after default.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Flow statements (audited)
|
Stage 1 |
|
Stage 2 |
|
Stage 3 |
|
Total | ||||
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
UK PBB - business banking |
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m | |
At 1 January 2018 |
6,505 |
29 |
|
684 |
29 |
|
268 |
224 |
|
7,457 |
282 |
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 |
(691) |
(4) |
|
691 |
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 |
366 |
12 |
|
(366) |
(12) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers to Stage 3 |
(35) |
(1) |
|
(63) |
(8) |
|
98 |
9 |
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 3 |
2 |
2 |
|
9 |
2 |
|
(11) |
(4) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer |
|
(12) |
|
|
24 |
|
|
43 |
|
|
55 |
Changes in risk parameters (model inputs) |
|
(6) |
|
|
2 |
|
|
(11) |
|
|
(15) |
Other changes in net exposure |
156 |
3 |
|
(57) |
3 |
|
(36) |
(23) |
|
63 |
(17) |
Other (P&L only items) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(31) |
|
|
(31) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income statement (releases)/charges |
|
(15) |
|
|
29 |
|
|
(22) |
|
|
(8) |
Amounts written-off |
|
|
|
(1) |
(1) |
|
(84) |
(84) |
|
(85) |
(85) |
Other movements |
|
(1) |
|
|
|
|
|
(1) |
|
|
(2) |
At 31 December 2018 |
6,303 |
22 |
|
897 |
43 |
|
235 |
153 |
|
7,435 |
218 |
Net carrying amount |
6,281 |
|
|
854 |
|
|
82 |
|
|
7,217 |
|
Key points
· Overall ECL reduction was mainly driven by business-as-usual write-offs in Stage 3.
· Stage 2 ECL did increase during the year as a result of net Stage 2 inflows from Stage 1, partly driven by PD model refinements throughout the year.
· The portfolio continued to experience cash recoveries after write-off, reported in other (P&L only items). This benefited the income statement without affecting ECL.
· Write-off occurs once recovery activity with the customer has been concluded and there are no further recoveries expected, but no later than five years after default.
UK PBB - commercial |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
At 1 January 2018 |
6,771 |
6 |
|
595 |
11 |
|
126 |
57 |
|
7,492 |
74 |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1 |
|
Inter-Group transfers |
(71) |
|
|
(1) |
|
|
(5) |
|
|
(77) |
|
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 |
(781) |
(2) |
|
781 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 |
389 |
6 |
|
(389) |
(6) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers to Stage 3 |
(16) |
|
|
(70) |
(1) |
|
86 |
1 |
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 3 |
1 |
|
|
25 |
|
|
(26) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer |
|
(4) |
|
|
10 |
|
|
19 |
|
|
25 |
Changes in risk parameters (model inputs) |
|
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4 |
Other changes in net exposure |
(886) |
(1) |
|
(123) |
(1) |
|
(62) |
(6) |
|
(1,071) |
(8) |
Other (P&L only items) |
|
(2) |
|
|
1 |
|
|
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income statement (releases)/charges |
|
(3) |
|
|
10 |
|
|
14 |
|
|
21 |
Amounts written-off |
|
|
|
|
|
|
(27) |
(27) |
|
(27) |
(27) |
Other movements |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(1) |
|
|
(1) |
At 31 December 2018 |
5,408 |
9 |
|
818 |
15 |
|
92 |
43 |
|
6,318 |
67 |
Net carrying amount |
5,399 |
|
|
803 |
|
|
49 |
|
|
6,251 |
|
Key point
· Overall ECL reduced slightly during the year, with some modest Stage 1 and Stage 2 ECL increases being more than offset by Stage 3 write-offs, which was the key driver of the overall income statement charge for 2018.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Flow statements (audited)
|
Stage 1 |
|
Stage 2 |
|
Stage 3 |
|
Total | ||||
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
Ulster Bank RoI - mortgages |
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m | |
At 1 January 2018 |
10,650 |
8 |
|
1,532 |
72 |
|
3,167 |
881 |
|
15,349 |
961 |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
94 |
|
|
12 |
1 |
|
15 |
3 |
|
121 |
4 |
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 |
(344) |
(1) |
|
344 |
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 |
414 |
7 |
|
(414) |
(7) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers to Stage 3 |
(32) |
|
|
(124) |
(8) |
|
156 |
8 |
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 3 |
4 |
|
|
245 |
36 |
|
(249) |
(36) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer |
|
(6) |
|
|
(4) |
|
|
11 |
|
|
1 |
Changes in risk parameters (model inputs) |
|
3 |
|
|
(1) |
|
|
(23) |
|
|
(21) |
Other changes in net exposure |
(4) |
|
|
(188) |
(2) |
|
(630) |
14 |
|
(822) |
12 |
Other (P&L only items) |
|
(2) |
|
|
2 |
|
|
28 |
|
|
28 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income statement (releases)/charges |
|
(5) |
|
|
(5) |
|
|
30 |
|
|
20 |
Amounts written-off |
|
|
|
(13) |
(13) |
|
(322) |
(322) |
|
(335) |
(335) |
Other movements |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(20) |
|
|
(20) |
At 31 December 2018 |
10,782 |
11 |
|
1,394 |
75 |
|
2,137 |
516 |
|
14,313 |
602 |
Net carrying amount |
10,771 |
|
|
1,319 |
|
|
1,621 |
|
|
13,711 |
|
Key points
· The overall ECL reduction was driven by reduced ECL in Stage 3, which was subject to significant debt sale activity in 2018 (approximately £0.9 billion of gross exposures were sold during the year).
· In addition to the debt sale activity, the reduction in ECL in Stage 3 reflected ongoing improvements in underlying portfolio performance.
· The reduction in Stage 2 exposures resulted from the portfolio debt sale and decreasing stock of exposures meeting the high-risk backstop criteria. This reflected ongoing improvements in the underlying portfolio performance.
· Write-off generally occurs once the repossessed property has been sold and there is a residual shortfall balance remaining outstanding which has been deemed irrecoverable.
Wholesale
Commercial Banking |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
At 1 January 2018 |
84,228 |
58 |
|
9,056 |
106 |
|
3,735 |
1,156 |
|
97,019 |
1,320 |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
367 |
|
|
47 |
(1) |
|
29 |
(4) |
|
443 |
(5) |
Inter-Group transfers |
(2,106) |
(1) |
|
(92) |
|
|
(375) |
(14) |
|
(2,573) |
(15) |
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 |
(8,224) |
(9) |
|
8,224 |
9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 |
5,911 |
52 |
|
(5,911) |
(52) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers to Stage 3 |
(881) |
|
|
(938) |
(13) |
|
1,819 |
13 |
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 3 |
1,056 |
11 |
|
937 |
89 |
|
(1,993) |
(100) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer |
|
(57) |
|
|
13 |
|
|
160 |
|
|
116 |
Changes in risk parameters (model inputs) |
|
46 |
|
|
8 |
|
|
41 |
|
|
95 |
Other changes in net exposure |
(4,274) |
(1) |
|
(2,748) |
(19) |
|
(489) |
(40) |
|
(7,511) |
(60) |
Other (P&L only items) |
|
|
|
|
1 |
|
|
(8) |
|
|
(7) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income statement (releases)/charges |
|
(12) |
|
|
3 |
|
|
153 |
|
|
144 |
Amounts written-off |
|
|
|
|
|
|
(460) |
(460) |
|
(460) |
(460) |
Other movements |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(10) |
|
|
(10) |
At 31 December 2018 |
76,077 |
99 |
|
8,575 |
140 |
|
2,266 |
742 |
|
86,918 |
981 |
Net carrying amount |
75,978 |
|
|
8,435 |
|
|
1,524 |
|
|
85,937 |
|
Key points
· ECL reduced over the course of 2018 as write-offs outweighed ECL charges.
· Stage 3 charges were mainly driven by a charge on new to default exposures where the ECL can increase significantly following an individual assessment.
· Stage 1 and Stage 2 changes to risk parameters largely reflected the increase in ECL for economic uncertainty and a change to the forward-looking modelling approach for point-in-time PDs, where PDs now revert to long-run average after one year rather than five years.
· Inter-Group transfers reflected the impact of transfers completed in preparation of ring-fencing. The reductions in net exposure were also related to ring-fencing changes, where short-term borrowing was renewed in other franchises.
· Release in Stage 1 was driven by a reduction in ECL for exposures transferring from Stage 2 and Stage 3, which previously had a lifetime ECL but are now assessed for 12 month ECL.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Flow statements (audited)
|
Stage 1 |
|
Stage 2 |
|
Stage 3 |
|
Total | ||||
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
NatWest Markets (1) |
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m | |
At 1 January 2018 |
9,089 |
2 |
|
1,276 |
42 |
|
456 |
190 |
|
10,821 |
234 |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
252 |
|
|
22 |
(2) |
|
3 |
3 |
|
277 |
1 |
Inter-Group transfers |
3,590 |
|
|
(4) |
1 |
|
374 |
14 |
|
3,960 |
15 |
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 |
(393) |
|
|
393 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 |
318 |
28 |
|
(318) |
(28) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers to Stage 3 |
|
|
|
(3) |
|
|
3 |
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 3 |
|
|
|
35 |
|
|
(35) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer |
|
(26) |
|
|
5 |
|
|
|
|
|
(21) |
Changes in risk parameters (model inputs) |
|
(5) |
|
|
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
(1) |
Other changes in net exposure |
19,902 |
8 |
|
(669) |
(8) |
|
(4) |
(6) |
|
19,229 |
(6) |
Other (P&L only items - primarily fortuitous recoveries) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(64) |
|
|
(64) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income statement (releases)/charges |
|
(23) |
|
|
1 |
|
|
(70) |
|
|
(92) |
Amounts written-off |
|
|
|
|
|
|
(89) |
(89) |
|
(89) |
(89) |
Other movements |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
At 31 December 2018 |
32,758 |
7 |
|
732 |
14 |
|
708 |
112 |
|
34,198 |
133 |
Net carrying amount |
32,751 |
|
|
718 |
|
|
596 |
|
|
34,065 |
|
Note:
(1) Reflects NatWest Markets segments and include NWM N.V..
Key points
· Stage 3 financial assets include £166 million (1 January 2018 £105 million) purchased or originated credit impaired (POCI) assets. No ECL impairment was held on these positions and a £61 million impairment recovery was recognised on these POCI assets during 2018 (included in other (P&L only items primarily fortuitous recoveries)).
· Stage 1 and Stage 2 changes to risk parameters largely reflected the increase in ECL for economic uncertainty, and a change to the forward-looking modelling approach for point-in-time PDs, where PDs now revert to long run average after one year rather than five years.
· The release in Stage 1 was driven by a reduction in ECL on exposures transferring from Stage 2, which previously had a lifetime ECL but are now assessed for 12 month ECL.
· The increase in Stage 1 exposure was due to a combination of transfers and short-term borrowing to governments and central banks which are now in NatWest Markets following changes in preparation for ring-fencing.
· The portfolio experienced fortuitous recoveries, reported in other (P&L only items primarily fortuitous recoveries). This benefited the income statement without affecting ECL.
Private Banking |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
At 1 January 2018 |
13,046 |
18 |
|
412 |
9 |
|
300 |
27 |
|
13,758 |
54 |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
12 |
|
|
1 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
13 |
2 |
Inter-Group transfers |
23 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
23 |
|
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 |
(270) |
(1) |
|
270 |
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 |
92 |
2 |
|
(92) |
(2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers to Stage 3 |
(60) |
|
|
(8) |
|
|
68 |
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 3 |
7 |
|
|
1 |
|
|
(8) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer |
|
(2) |
|
|
3 |
|
|
1 |
|
|
2 |
Changes in risk parameters (model inputs) |
|
(3) |
|
|
(2) |
|
|
1 |
|
|
(4) |
Other changes in net exposure |
1,100 |
|
|
(65) |
(1) |
|
(121) |
(2) |
|
914 |
(3) |
Other (P&L only items) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(1) |
|
|
(1) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income statement releases |
|
(5) |
|
|
|
|
|
(1) |
|
|
(6) |
Amounts written-off |
|
|
|
|
|
|
(7) |
(7) |
|
(7) |
(7) |
Other movements |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(1) |
|
|
(1) |
At 31 December 2018 |
13,950 |
14 |
|
519 |
10 |
|
232 |
19 |
|
14,701 |
43 |
Net carrying amount |
13,936 |
|
|
509 |
|
|
213 |
|
|
14,658 |
|
Key points
· ECL reduced due to a combination of write-offs and impairment releases.
· The majority of the release was in Stage 1, due to a reduction in loss rates for Retail exposures.
· Exposure increased in Stage 1 reflecting growth in the portfolio (primarily mortgages driven) with minimal ECL impact due to high credit quality.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Flow statements (audited)
|
Stage 1 |
|
Stage 2 |
|
Stage 3 |
|
Total | ||||
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
|
Financial |
|
RBS International |
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
|
assets |
ECL |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m | |
At 1 January 2018 |
8,652 |
5 |
|
385 |
5 |
|
118 |
28 |
|
9,155 |
38 |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
98 |
(2) |
|
|
2 |
|
|
(1) |
|
98 |
(1) |
Inter-Group transfers |
1,834 |
|
|
95 |
|
|
|
|
|
1,929 |
|
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 |
(299) |
|
|
299 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 |
340 |
5 |
|
(340) |
(5) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transfers to Stage 3 |
(14) |
|
|
(11) |
|
|
25 |
|
|
|
|
Transfers from Stage 3 |
190 |
|
|
4 |
|
|
(194) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer |
|
(4) |
|
|
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
(2) |
Changes in risk parameters (model inputs) |
|
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2 |
Other changes in net exposure |
15,948 |
|
|
(156) |
|
|
155 |
(1) |
|
15,947 |
(1) |
Other (P&L only items) |
|
(1) |
|
|
1 |
|
|
(1) |
|
|
(1) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income statement (releases)/charges |
|
(3) |
|
|
3 |
|
|
(2) |
|
|
(2) |
Amounts written-off |
|
|
|
|
|
|
(9) |
(9) |
|
(9) |
(9) |
Other movements |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
At 31 December 2018 |
26,749 |
6 |
|
276 |
4 |
|
95 |
17 |
|
27,120 |
27 |
Net carrying amount |
26,743 |
|
|
272 |
|
|
78 |
|
|
27,093 |
|
Key points
· The reduction in ECL was driven by write-offs and Stage 3 impairment releases, both of which are primarily in the Spanish mortgage portfolio.
· The increases in exposure were partly due to new lending, but mainly due to the establishment of a liquidity portfolio across central and correspondent banks and sovereign bond holdings. These exposures were in Stage 1 with very low credit risk and contribute minimal ECL.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Stage 2 decomposition arrears status and contributing factors
The tables below summarise Stage 2 decomposition for the Personal and Wholesale portfolios.
|
UK mortgages |
|
RoI mortgages |
|
Other mortgages |
|
Credit cards |
|
Other |
|
Total | ||||||
|
Loans |
ECL |
|
Loans |
ECL |
|
Loans |
ECL |
|
Loans |
ECL |
|
Loans |
ECL |
|
Loans |
ECL |
31 December 2018 |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
Personal |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Currently in arrears (>30 DPD) |
658 |
10 |
|
90 |
10 |
|
3 |
|
|
17 |
6 |
|
88 |
22 |
|
856 |
48 |
Currently up-to-date |
9,612 |
64 |
|
1,292 |
66 |
|
|
|
|
1,226 |
114 |
|
1,985 |
225 |
|
14,115 |
469 |
- PD deterioration |
3,855 |
54 |
|
680 |
44 |
|
|
|
|
778 |
85 |
|
1,255 |
176 |
|
6,568 |
359 |
- Up-to-date, PD persistence |
1,448 |
5 |
|
54 |
1 |
|
|
|
|
337 |
17 |
|
440 |
26 |
|
2,279 |
49 |
- Other driver (adverse credit, forbearance etc) |
4,309 |
5 |
|
558 |
21 |
|
|
|
|
111 |
12 |
|
290 |
23 |
|
5,268 |
61 |
Total Stage 2 |
10,270 |
74 |
|
1,382 |
76 |
|
3 |
|
|
1,243 |
120 |
|
2,073 |
247 |
|
14,971 |
517 |
Key point
· In Personal exposures, as expected, ECL coverage was higher on accounts that are more than 30 days past due. Also in line with expectations, accounts exhibiting PD deterioration have a higher ECL coverage than accounts in Stage 2 for other reasons.
|
Property |
|
Corporate |
|
FI |
|
Other |
|
Total | |||||
|
Loans |
ECL |
|
Loans |
ECL |
|
Loans |
ECL |
|
Loans |
ECL |
|
Loans |
ECL |
31 December 2018 |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
Wholesale |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Currently in arrears (>30 DPD) |
255 |
7 |
|
315 |
5 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
571 |
12 |
Currently up-to-date |
1,622 |
32 |
|
8,438 |
195 |
|
473 |
7 |
|
22 |
|
|
10,555 |
234 |
- PD deterioration |
924 |
23 |
|
5,564 |
138 |
|
281 |
6 |
|
8 |
|
|
6,777 |
167 |
- Up-to-date, PD persistence |
57 |
1 |
|
170 |
5 |
|
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
231 |
6 |
- Other driver (forbearance, RoCL etc.) |
641 |
8 |
|
2,704 |
52 |
|
188 |
1 |
|
14 |
|
|
3,547 |
61 |
Total Stage 2 |
1,877 |
39 |
|
8,753 |
200 |
|
474 |
7 |
|
22 |
|
|
11,126 |
246 |
Key point
· In Wholesale exposures, the ECL coverage was broadly consistent in total. Coverage can vary across categories or sectors reflecting the individual characteristics of the customer and exposure type.
Stage 2 decomposition by SICR trigger
|
UK mortgages |
|
RoI mortgages |
|
Other mortgages |
|
Credit cards |
|
Other |
|
Total | ||||||
31 December 2018 |
£m |
% |
|
£m |
% |
|
£m |
% |
|
£m |
% |
|
£m |
% |
|
£m |
% |
Personal trigger (1) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PD movement |
4,273 |
41.6 |
|
767 |
55.6 |
|
|
|
|
793 |
63.8 |
|
1,307 |
63.0 |
|
7,140 |
47.7 |
PD persistence |
1,450 |
14.1 |
|
54 |
3.9 |
|
|
|
|
338 |
27.2 |
|
440 |
21.2 |
|
2,282 |
15.2 |
Adverse credit bureau recorded with credit reference agency |
2,996 |
29.2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
61 |
4.9 |
|
101 |
4.9 |
|
3,158 |
21.1 |
Forbearance support provided |
206 |
2.0 |
|
2 |
0.1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
13 |
0.6 |
|
221 |
1.5 |
Customers in collections |
144 |
1.4 |
|
57 |
4.1 |
|
|
|
|
5 |
0.4 |
|
36 |
1.7 |
|
242 |
1.6 |
Other reasons (2) |
982 |
9.6 |
|
502 |
36.3 |
|
|
|
|
46 |
3.7 |
|
151 |
7.3 |
|
1,681 |
11.2 |
Days past due >30 |
219 |
2.1 |
|
|
|
|
3 |
100.0 |
|
|
|
|
25 |
1.2 |
|
247 |
1.6 |
|
10,270 |
100 |
|
1,382 |
100 |
|
3 |
100 |
|
1,243 |
100 |
|
2,073 |
100 |
|
14,971 |
100 |
Key point
· The primary driver of credit deterioration was PD, which including persistence, accounted for the majority of movements to Stage 2. High risk back-stops, for example, forbearance, adverse credit bureau, provide additional valuable discrimination particularly on mortgages.
|
Property |
|
Corporate |
|
FI |
|
Other |
|
Total | |||||
31 December 2018 |
£m |
% |
|
£m |
% |
|
£m |
% |
|
£m |
% |
|
£m |
% |
Wholesale trigger (1) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PD movement |
940 |
50.1 |
|
5,617 |
64.2 |
|
281 |
59.3 |
|
8 |
36.4 |
|
6,845 |
61.5 |
PD persistence |
57 |
3.0 |
|
171 |
2.0 |
|
4 |
0.8 |
|
|
|
|
232 |
2.1 |
Risk of Credit Loss |
321 |
17.1 |
|
1,964 |
22.4 |
|
103 |
21.7 |
|
|
|
|
2,388 |
21.5 |
Forbearance support provided |
65 |
3.5 |
|
209 |
2.4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
274 |
2.5 |
Customers in collections |
9 |
0.5 |
|
43 |
0.5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
52 |
0.5 |
Other reasons (3) |
251 |
13.4 |
|
525 |
6.0 |
|
85 |
17.9 |
|
14 |
63.6 |
|
875 |
7.9 |
Days past due >30 |
234 |
12.5 |
|
224 |
2.6 |
|
1 |
0.2 |
|
|
|
|
460 |
4.1 |
|
1,877 |
100 |
|
8,753 |
100 |
|
474 |
100 |
|
22 |
100 |
|
11,126 |
100 |
Notes:
(1) The data table is built on a hierarchical basis from top to bottom, for example, accounts with PD deterioration may also trigger backstop(s) but are only reported under PD deterioration.
(2) Includes customers who have accessed payday lending, interest only mortgages past end of term, a small number of mortgage customers on a highly flexible mortgage significantly behind their outline repayment plan and customers breaching risk appetite thresholds for new business acquisition. On the RoI mortgage portfolio, this reflected customers who remained in probation following the conclusion of forbearance support, exposures breaching risk appetite thresholds for new business acquisition and exposures classified as non-performing exposures under EBA requirements.
(3) Includes customers where a PD assessment cannot be undertaken due to missing PDs.
Key point
· The primary driver of credit deterioration was PD, which including persistence, accounted for 62% of Stage 2. The Risk of Credit Loss framework accounted for a further 21% highlighting the importance of expert judgement being used to identify deterioration.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Stage 3 vintage analysis
The table below provides estimated vintage analysis of the material Stage 3 portfolios totalling 87% of the Stage 3 loans of £7.7 billion.
|
UK PBB |
Ulster RoI |
|
2018 |
mortgages |
mortgages |
Wholesale |
Stage 3 loans (£bn) |
1.2 |
2.1 |
3.4 |
Vintage (time in default): |
|
|
|
<1 year |
26% |
7% |
22% |
1-3 years |
21% |
12% |
19% |
3-5 years |
14% |
14% |
9% |
5-10 years |
35% |
63% |
50% |
>10 years |
4% |
4% |
|
|
100% |
100% |
100% |
Key points
· Mortgages The proportion of the Stage 3 defaulted population who have been in default for over five years reflected RBSs support for customers in financial difficulty. When customers continue to engage constructively with RBS making regular payments, RBS continues to support them. RBSs provisioning approach retains customers in Stage 3 for a life-time loss provisioning calculation even when their arrears status reverts to below 90 days past due.
· Wholesale The value of Stage 3 loans that have been impaired for 5-10 years was mainly due to customers being in a protracted formal insolvency process or subject to litigation or a complaints process.
Asset quality (audited)
Asset quality analysis is based on internal asset quality ratings which have ranges for the probability of default. Customers are assigned credit grades, based on various credit grading models that reflect the key drivers of default for the customer type. All credit grades across RBS map to both an asset quality scale, used for external financial reporting, and a master grading scale for wholesale exposures used for internal management reporting across portfolios. The table that follows details the relationship between internal asset quality (AQ) bands and external ratings published by Standard & Poors (S&P), for illustrative purposes only. This relationship is established by observing S&Ps default study statistics, notably the one year default rates for each S&P rating grade. A degree of judgement is required to relate the probability of default ranges associated with the master grading scale to these default rates given that, for example, the S&P published default rates do not increase uniformly by grade and the historical default rate is nil for the highest rating categories.
Internal asset |
Probability of default range |
Indicative S&P rating |
AQ1 |
0% - 0.034% |
AAA to AA |
AQ2 |
0.034% - 0.048% |
AA to AA- |
AQ3 |
0.048% - 0.095% |
A+ to A |
AQ4 |
0.095% - 0.381% |
BBB+ to BBB- |
AQ5 |
0.381% - 1.076% |
BB+ to BB |
AQ6 |
1.076% - 2.153% |
BB- to B+ |
AQ7 |
2.153% - 6.089% |
B+ to B |
AQ8 |
6.089% - 17.222% |
B- to CCC+ |
AQ9 |
17.222% - 100% |
CCC to C |
AQ10 |
100% |
D |
The mapping to the S&P ratings is used by RBS as one of several benchmarks for its wholesale portfolios, depending on customer type and the purpose of the benchmark. The mapping is based on all issuer types rated by S&P. It should therefore be considered illustrative and does not, for instance, indicate that exposures reported against S&P ratings either have been or would be assigned those ratings if assessed by S&P. In addition, the relationship is not relevant for retail portfolios, smaller corporate exposures or specialist corporate segments given that S&P does not typically assign ratings to such entities.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Asset quality (audited)
The table below summarises asset quality bands of gross loans and ECL by stage for the Personal portfolio.
|
|
Gross loans |
|
ECL provisions |
|
ECL provisions coverage | |||||||||
|
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
Total |
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
Total |
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
Total |
2018 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
% |
% |
% |
% |
UK mortgages |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ1-AQ4 |
|
95,618 |
3,621 |
|
99,239 |
|
6 |
11 |
|
17 |
|
0.01 |
0.30 |
|
0.02 |
AQ5-AQ8 |
|
42,771 |
5,845 |
|
48,616 |
|
6 |
46 |
|
52 |
|
0.01 |
0.79 |
|
0.11 |
AQ9 |
|
32 |
804 |
|
836 |
|
|
17 |
|
17 |
|
|
2.11 |
|
2.03 |
AQ10 |
|
|
|
1,541 |
1,541 |
|
|
|
151 |
151 |
|
|
|
9.80 |
9.80 |
|
|
138,421 |
10,270 |
1,541 |
150,232 |
|
12 |
74 |
151 |
237 |
|
0.01 |
0.72 |
9.80 |
0.16 |
RoI mortgages |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ1-AQ4 |
|
5,164 |
226 |
|
5,390 |
|
4 |
5 |
|
9 |
|
0.08 |
2.21 |
|
0.17 |
AQ5-AQ8 |
|
5,668 |
717 |
|
6,385 |
|
7 |
32 |
|
39 |
|
0.12 |
4.46 |
|
0.61 |
AQ9 |
|
12 |
439 |
|
451 |
|
|
39 |
|
39 |
|
|
8.88 |
|
8.65 |
AQ10 (1) |
|
|
|
2,124 |
2,124 |
|
|
|
515 |
515 |
|
|
|
24.25 |
24.25 |
|
|
10,844 |
1,382 |
2,124 |
14,350 |
|
11 |
76 |
515 |
602 |
|
0.10 |
5.50 |
24.25 |
4.20 |
Other mortgages |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ1-AQ4 |
|
359 |
1 |
|
360 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ5-AQ8 |
|
136 |
2 |
|
138 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ10 |
|
|
|
1 |
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
495 |
3 |
1 |
499 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Credit cards |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ1-AQ4 |
|
34 |
1 |
|
35 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ5-AQ8 |
|
2,810 |
1,180 |
|
3,990 |
|
38 |
103 |
|
141 |
|
1.35 |
8.73 |
|
3.53 |
AQ9 |
|
7 |
62 |
|
69 |
|
|
17 |
|
17 |
|
|
27.42 |
|
24.64 |
AQ10 |
|
|
|
122 |
122 |
|
|
|
72 |
72 |
|
|
|
59.02 |
59.02 |
|
|
2,851 |
1,243 |
122 |
4,216 |
|
38 |
120 |
72 |
230 |
|
1.33 |
9.65 |
59.02 |
5.46 |
Other |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ1-AQ4 |
|
997 |
43 |
|
1,040 |
|
4 |
5 |
|
9 |
|
0.40 |
11.63 |
|
0.87 |
AQ5-AQ8 |
|
5,889 |
1,847 |
|
7,736 |
|
55 |
186 |
|
241 |
|
0.93 |
10.07 |
|
3.12 |
AQ9 |
|
56 |
183 |
|
239 |
|
2 |
56 |
|
58 |
|
3.57 |
30.60 |
|
24.27 |
AQ10 |
|
|
|
563 |
563 |
|
|
|
420 |
420 |
|
|
|
74.60 |
74.60 |
|
|
6,942 |
2,073 |
563 |
9,578 |
|
61 |
247 |
420 |
728 |
|
0.88 |
11.92 |
74.60 |
7.60 |
Total |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ1-AQ4 |
|
102,172 |
3,892 |
|
106,064 |
|
14 |
21 |
|
35 |
|
0.01 |
0.54 |
|
0.03 |
AQ5-AQ8 |
|
57,274 |
9,591 |
|
66,865 |
|
106 |
367 |
|
473 |
|
0.19 |
3.83 |
|
0.71 |
AQ9 |
|
107 |
1,488 |
|
1,595 |
|
2 |
129 |
|
131 |
|
1.87 |
8.67 |
|
8.21 |
AQ10 |
|
|
|
4,351 |
4,351 |
|
|
|
1,158 |
1,158 |
|
|
|
26.61 |
26.61 |
|
|
159,553 |
14,971 |
4,351 |
178,875 |
|
122 |
517 |
1,158 |
1,797 |
|
0.08 |
3.45 |
26.61 |
1.00 |
Note:
(1) At 31 December 2018, AQ10 includes £0.6 billion RoI mortgages which are not currently considered defaulted for capital calculation purposes for RoI but included in Stage 3.
Key points
· The majority of exposures were in AQ1-AQ4, with a significant proportion in AQ5-AQ8. As expected, mortgage exposures have a higher proportion in AQ1-AQ4 than unsecured borrowing.
· The relatively high level of Stage 3 impaired assets (AQ10) in RoI mortgages reflected their legacy mortgage portfolio and the residual effects from the financial crisis. In other personal, the relatively high level of exposures in AQ10 reflected the fact that impaired assets can be held on balance sheet with commensurate ECL provision for up to six years after default.
· ECL provisions coverage shows the expected trend with increased coverage in the poorer asset quality bands, and also by stage.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Banking activities continued
Asset quality (audited)
The table below summarises asset quality bands of gross loans and ECL by stage for the Wholesale portfolio.
|
|
Gross loans |
|
ECL provisions |
|
ECL provisions coverage | ||||||||||||
|
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
|
Total |
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
|
Total |
|
Stage 1 |
Stage 2 |
Stage 3 |
|
Total |
2018 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
|
% |
% |
% |
|
% |
Property |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ1-AQ4 |
|
15,740 |
393 |
|
|
16,133 |
|
8 |
9 |
|
|
17 |
|
0.05 |
2.29 |
|
|
0.11 |
AQ5-AQ8 |
|
17,397 |
1,418 |
|
|
18,815 |
|
35 |
26 |
|
|
61 |
|
0.20 |
1.83 |
|
|
0.32 |
AQ9 |
|
8 |
66 |
|
|
74 |
|
|
4 |
|
|
4 |
|
|
6.06 |
|
|
5.41 |
AQ10 |
|
|
|
1,685 |
|
1,685 |
|
|
|
506 |
|
506 |
|
|
|
30.03 |
|
30.03 |
|
|
33,145 |
1,877 |
1,685 |
|
36,707 |
|
43 |
39 |
506 |
|
588 |
|
0.13 |
2.08 |
30.03 |
|
1.60 |
Corporate |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ1-AQ4 |
|
21,814 |
773 |
|
|
22,587 |
|
13 |
14 |
|
|
27 |
|
0.06 |
1.81 |
|
|
0.12 |
AQ5-AQ8 |
|
40,004 |
7,647 |
|
|
47,651 |
|
93 |
171 |
|
|
264 |
|
0.23 |
2.24 |
|
|
0.55 |
AQ9 |
|
26 |
333 |
|
|
359 |
|
1 |
15 |
|
|
16 |
|
3.85 |
4.50 |
|
|
4.46 |
AQ10 |
|
|
|
1,643 |
|
1,643 |
|
|
|
634 |
|
634 |
|
|
|
38.59 |
|
38.59 |
|
|
61,844 |
8,753 |
1,643 |
|
72,240 |
|
107 |
200 |
634 |
|
941 |
|
0.17 |
2.28 |
38.59 |
|
1.30 |
Financial institutions |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
AQ1-AQ4 |
|
22,150 |
247 |
|
|
22,397 |
|
5 |
5 |
|
|
10 |
|
0.02 |
2.02 |
|
|
0.04 |
AQ5-AQ8 |
|
2,352 |
222 |
|
|
2,574 |
|
7 |
2 |
|
|
9 |
|
0.30 |
0.90 |
|
|
0.35 |
AQ9 |
|
|
5 |
|
|
5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ10 |
|
|
|
35 |
|
35 |
|
|
|
22 |
|
22 |
|
|
|
62.86 |
|
62.86 |
|
|
24,502 |
474 |
35 |
|
25,011 |
|
12 |
7 |
22 |
|
41 |
|
0.05 |
1.48 |
62.86 |
|
0.16 |
Sovereign |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ1-AQ4 |
|
6,780 |
22 |
|
|
6,802 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
1 |
|
0.01 |
|
|
|
0.01 |
AQ5-AQ8 |
|
161 |
|
|
|
161 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ10 |
|
|
|
4 |
|
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6,941 |
22 |
4 |
|
6,967 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
1 |
|
0.01 |
|
|
|
0.01 |
Total |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AQ1-AQ4 |
|
66,484 |
1,435 |
|
|
67,919 |
|
27 |
28 |
|
|
55 |
|
0.04 |
1.95 |
|
|
0.08 |
AQ5-AQ8 |
|
59,914 |
9,287 |
|
|
69,201 |
|
135 |
199 |
|
|
334 |
|
0.23 |
2.14 |
|
|
0.48 |
AQ9 |
|
34 |
404 |
|
|
438 |
|
1 |
19 |
|
|
20 |
|
2.94 |
4.70 |
|
|
4.57 |
AQ10 |
|
|
|
3,367 |
|
3,367 |
|
|
|
1,162 |
|
1,162 |
|
|
|
34.51 |
|
34.51 |
|
|
126,432 |
11,126 |
3,367 |
|
140,925 |
|
163 |
246 |
1,162 |
|
1,571 |
|
0.13 |
2.21 |
34.51 |
|
1.11 |
Key points
· Across the Wholesale portfolio, the asset quality band distribution differed reflecting the diverse nature of differing sectors. 48% of Wholesale lending exposure was in the AQ1-AQ4 band.
· The relatively low provision coverage for Stage 3 loans in the property sector reflected the secured nature of the exposures.
Credit risk Trading activities
This section covers the credit risk profile of RBSs trading activities. All disclosures are audited.
Security funding transactions and collateral (audited)
The table below captures securities funding transactions in NWM and Treasury. All transactions that are outside netting arrangements are in NWM.
|
Reverse repos |
|
Repos | ||||
|
|
|
Outside |
|
|
|
Outside |
|
|
Of which: |
netting |
|
|
Of which: |
netting |
|
Total |
can be offset |
arrangements |
|
Total |
can be offset |
arrangements |
2018 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Gross |
68,044 |
65,057 |
2,987 |
|
70,097 |
68,940 |
1,157 |
IFRS offset |
(39,737) |
(39,737) |
|
|
(39,737) |
(39,737) |
|
Carrying value |
28,307 |
25,320 |
2,987 |
|
30,360 |
29,203 |
1,157 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Master netting arrangements |
(762) |
(762) |
|
|
(762) |
(762) |
|
Securities collateral |
(24,548) |
(24,548) |
|
|
(28,441) |
(28,441) |
|
Potential for offset not recognised under IFRS |
(25,310) |
(25,310) |
|
|
(29,203) |
(29,203) |
|
Net |
2,997 |
10 |
2,987 |
|
1,157 |
|
1,157 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Gross |
84,706 |
78,991 |
5,715 |
|
82,395 |
80,088 |
2,307 |
IFRS offset |
(43,974) |
(43,974) |
|
|
(43,974) |
(43,974) |
|
Carrying value |
40,732 |
35,017 |
5,715 |
|
38,421 |
36,114 |
2,307 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Master netting arrangements |
(329) |
(329) |
|
|
(329) |
(329) |
|
Securities collateral |
(34,646) |
(34,646) |
|
|
(35,785) |
(35,785) |
|
Potential for offset not recognised under IFRS |
(34,975) |
(34,975) |
|
|
(36,114) |
(36,114) |
|
Net |
5,757 |
42 |
5,715 |
|
2,307 |
|
2,307 |
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Trading activities continued
Derivatives (audited)
The table below summarises derivatives by type of contract. The master netting agreements and collateral shown below do not result in a net presentation on the balance sheet under IFRS 9. A significant proportion (more than 90%) of the derivatives relate to trading activities in NatWest Markets, the table below also includes hedging derivatives in Treasury.
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||||
Notional |
|
|
|
|
|
| |||||
GBP |
USD |
Euro |
Other |
Total |
Assets |
Liabilities |
Notional |
Assets |
Liabilities | ||
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£m |
£m |
£bn |
£m |
£m | ||
Gross exposure |
|
|
|
|
|
138,390 |
135,673 |
|
|
177,931 |
172,063 |
IFRS offset |
|
|
|
|
|
(5,041) |
(6,776) |
|
|
(17,088) |
(17,557) |
Carrying value |
2,895 |
5,129 |
4,323 |
1,632 |
13,979 |
133,349 |
128,897 |
|
15,482 |
160,843 |
154,506 |
Of which: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest rate (1) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest rate swaps |
|
|
|
|
|
81,855 |
74,004 |
|
|
99,065 |
91,025 |
Options purchased |
|
|
|
|
|
14,481 |
|
|
|
21,733 |
|
Options written |
|
|
|
|
|
|
16,371 |
|
|
|
21,021 |
Futures and forwards |
|
|
|
|
|
74 |
69 |
|
|
147 |
114 |
Total |
2,521 |
3,589 |
3,686 |
740 |
10,536 |
96,410 |
90,444 |
|
12,016 |
120,945 |
112,160 |
Exchange rate |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Spot, forwards and futures |
|
|
|
|
|
17,904 |
18,610 |
|
|
19,283 |
19,172 |
Currency swaps |
|
|
|
|
|
11,322 |
12,062 |
|
|
11,163 |
13,534 |
Options purchased |
|
|
|
|
|
7,319 |
|
|
|
8,765 |
|
Options written |
|
|
|
|
|
|
7,558 |
|
|
|
8,975 |
Total |
373 |
1,532 |
629 |
892 |
3,426 |
36,545 |
38,230 |
|
3,425 |
39,211 |
41,681 |
Credit |
1 |
7 |
8 |
|
16 |
346 |
208 |
|
38 |
531 |
558 |
Equity and commodity |
|
1 |
|
|
1 |
48 |
15 |
|
3 |
156 |
107 |
Carrying value |
|
|
|
|
13,979 |
133,349 |
128,897 |
|
15,482 |
160,843 |
154,506 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Counterparty mark-to-market netting |
|
|
|
|
|
(106,762) |
(106,762) |
|
|
(128,287) |
(128,287) |
Cash collateral |
|
|
|
|
|
(17,937) |
(15,227) |
|
|
(20,311) |
(18,035) |
Securities collateral |
|
|
|
|
|
(4,469) |
(3,466) |
|
|
(5,850) |
(3,952) |
Net exposure |
|
|
|
|
|
4,181 |
3,442 |
|
|
6,395 |
4,232 |
Of which outside netting arrangements |
|
|
|
|
2,061 |
1,708 |
|
|
2,261 |
1,658 | |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Banks (2) |
|
|
|
|
|
362 |
443 |
|
|
461 |
466 |
Other financial institutions (3) |
|
|
|
|
|
1,054 |
1,144 |
|
|
1,608 |
1,625 |
Corporate (4) |
|
|
|
|
|
2,510 |
1,817 |
|
|
3,843 |
2,065 |
Government (5) |
|
|
|
|
|
255 |
38 |
|
|
483 |
76 |
Net exposure |
|
|
|
|
|
4,181 |
3,442 |
|
|
6,395 |
4,232 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
|
|
|
|
1,935 |
1,304 |
|
|
4,079 |
1,853 |
Europe |
|
|
|
|
|
1,308 |
1,465 |
|
|
1,643 |
1,777 |
US |
|
|
|
|
|
588 |
298 |
|
|
346 |
317 |
RoW |
|
|
|
|
|
350 |
375 |
|
|
327 |
285 |
Net exposure |
|
|
|
|
|
4,181 |
3,442 |
|
|
6,395 |
4,232 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Asset quality of uncollateralised derivative assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| ||
AQ1-AQ4 |
|
|
|
|
|
3,384 |
|
|
|
5,173 |
|
AQ5-AQ8 |
|
|
|
|
|
773 |
|
|
|
1,216 |
|
AQ9 |
|
|
|
|
|
3 |
|
|
|
3 |
|
AQ10 |
|
|
|
|
|
21 |
|
|
|
3 |
|
Net exposure |
|
|
|
|
|
4,181 |
|
|
|
6,395 |
|
Notes:
(1) The notional amount of interest rate derivatives include £5,952 billion (2017 £7,400 billion) in respect of contracts cleared through central clearing counterparties.
(2) Transactions with certain counterparties with whom RBS has netting arrangements but collateral is not posted on a daily basis; certain transactions with specific terms that may not fall within netting and collateral arrangements; derivative positions in certain jurisdictions for example China where the collateral agreements are not deemed to be legally enforceable.
(3) Transactions with securitisation vehicles and funds where collateral posting is contingent on RBSs external rating.
(4) Mainly large corporates with whom RBS may have netting arrangements in place, but operational capability does not support collateral posting.
(5) Sovereigns and supranational entities with one-way collateral agreements in their favour.
Capital and risk management
Credit risk Trading activities continued
Derivatives: settlement basis and central counterparties (audited)
The table below summarises the derivative notional and fair value by trading and settlement method.
|
Notional |
|
Asset |
|
Liability | |||||
|
|
Traded over the counter |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
Traded on |
Settled |
Not settled |
|
|
Traded on |
Traded |
|
Traded on |
Traded |
|
recognised |
by central |
by central |
|
|
recognised |
over the |
|
recognised |
over the |
|
exchanges |
counterparties |
counterparties |
Total |
|
exchanges |
counter |
|
exchanges |
counter |
2018 |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
|
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
Interest rate |
1,642 |
5,952 |
2,942 |
10,536 |
|
|
96,410 |
|
|
90,444 |
Exchange rate |
4 |
|
3,422 |
3,426 |
|
|
36,545 |
|
|
38,230 |
Credit |
|
|
16 |
16 |
|
|
346 |
|
|
208 |
Equity and commodity |
|
|
1 |
1 |
|
|
48 |
|
|
15 |
Total |
1,646 |
5,952 |
6,381 |
13,979 |
|
|
133,349 |
|
|
128,897 |
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest rate |
1,506 |
7,400 |
3,110 |
12,016 |
|
|
120,945 |
|
|
112,160 |
Exchange rate |
4 |
|
3,421 |
3,425 |
|
|
39,211 |
|
|
41,681 |
Credit |
|
|
38 |
38 |
|
|
531 |
|
|
558 |
Equity and commodity |
|
|
3 |
3 |
|
|
156 |
|
1 |
106 |
Total |
1,510 |
7,400 |
6,572 |
15,482 |
|
|
160,843 |
|
1 |
154,505 |
Debt securities (audited)
The table below summarises debt securities held at mandatory fair value through profit or loss by issuer as well as ratings based on the lowest of Standard & Poors, Moodys and Fitch. A significant proportion (more than 95%) of these positions are trading securities in NatWest Markets.
|
Central and local government |
Financial |
|
| ||
|
UK |
US |
Other |
institutions |
Corporate |
Total |
2018 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
AAA |
|
|
2,093 |
1,459 |
7 |
3,559 |
AA to AA+ |
6,834 |
4,689 |
3,161 |
773 |
120 |
15,577 |
A to AA- |
|
|
4,571 |
482 |
51 |
5,104 |
BBB- to A- |
|
|
3,592 |
802 |
285 |
4,679 |
Non-investment grade |
|
|
81 |
832 |
237 |
1,150 |
Unrated |
|
|
|
572 |
8 |
580 |
Total |
6,834 |
4,689 |
13,498 |
4,920 |
708 |
30,649 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Short positions |
(6,394) |
(2,008) |
(13,500) |
(1,724) |
(201) |
(23,827) |
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AAA |
|
|
1,474 |
1,576 |
21 |
3,071 |
AA to AA+ |
3,514 |
3,667 |
2,386 |
984 |
168 |
10,719 |
A to AA- |
|
|
7,224 |
427 |
78 |
7,729 |
BBB- to A- |
|
|
3,267 |
796 |
493 |
4,556 |
Non-investment grade |
|
|
385 |
552 |
171 |
1,108 |
Unrated |
|
|
|
255 |
43 |
298 |
Total |
3,514 |
3,667 |
14,736 |
4,590 |
974 |
27,481 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Short positions |
(3,490) |
(2,501) |
(20,390) |
(1,945) |
(201) |
(28,527) |
Credit risk Cross border exposure
Cross border exposures comprise both banking and trading activities, including reverse repurchase agreements. Exposures comprise loans and advances, including finance leases and instalment credit receivables, and other monetary assets, such as debt securities. The geographical breakdown is based on the country of domicile of the borrower or guarantor of ultimate risk. Cross border exposures include non-local currency claims of overseas offices on local residents but exclude exposures to local residents in local currencies. The table below sets out cross border exposures greater than 0.5% of RBSs total assets.
|
Government |
Banks |
Other |
Total |
Short positions |
Net of short positions |
2018 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Western Europe |
21,121 |
19,003 |
16,741 |
56,865 |
14,103 |
42,762 |
Of which: France |
3,396 |
10,209 |
1,579 |
15,184 |
1,626 |
13,558 |
Of which: Germany |
8,023 |
3,086 |
1,145 |
12,254 |
5,397 |
6,857 |
Of which: Netherlands |
1,142 |
675 |
3,739 |
5,556 |
985 |
4,571 |
United States |
13,558 |
5,458 |
8,379 |
27,395 |
2,103 |
25,292 |
Japan |
4,857 |
2,327 |
405 |
7,589 |
11 |
7,578 |
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
France |
4,721 |
11,739 |
2,320 |
18,780 |
3,324 |
15,456 |
Germany |
7,643 |
5,819 |
2,165 |
15,627 |
9,957 |
5,670 |
Netherlands |
1,897 |
798 |
5,395 |
8,090 |
986 |
7,104 |
United States |
8,697 |
4,494 |
8,048 |
21,239 |
2,607 |
18,632 |
Japan |
7,533 |
4,879 |
197 |
12,609 |
15 |
12,594 |
2016 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
France |
4,275 |
7,045 |
2,003 |
13,323 |
2,392 |
10,931 |
Germany |
8,868 |
4,836 |
2,138 |
15,842 |
4,207 |
11,635 |
Netherlands |
2,809 |
563 |
6,699 |
10,071 |
1,061 |
9,010 |
United States |
7,677 |
6,012 |
8,138 |
21,827 |
5,099 |
16,728 |
Japan |
8,291 |
5,441 |
375 |
14,107 |
1 |
14,106 |
Capital and risk management
Credit risk continued
Key IFRS 9 terms and differences to the prior IAS accounting standard and regulatory framework (audited)
Attribute |
IFRS 9 |
IAS 39 |
Regulatory (CRR) |
Default/credit impairment |
To determine the risk of a default occurring, management applies a default definition that is consistent with the Basel/regulatory definition of default.
Assets that are defaulted are shown as credit impaired. RBS uses 90 days past due as a consistent measure for default across all product classes. The population of credit impaired assets is broadly consistent with IAS 39, though measurement differs because of the application of MES. Assets that were categorised as potential problems with no impairment provision are now categorised as Stage 3. |
Default aligned to loss events, all financial assets where an impairment event had taken place 100% probability of default and an internal asset quality grade of AQ10 were classed as non-performing.
Impaired financial assets were those for which there was objective evidence that the amount or timing of future cash flows had been adversely impacted since initial recognition. |
A default shall be considered to have occurred with regard to a particular financial asset when either or both of the following have taken place:
|
Probability of default (PD) |
PD is the likelihood of default assessed on the prevailing economic conditions at the reporting date (point in time), adjusted to take into account estimates of future economic conditions that are likely to impact the risk of default; it will not equate to a long run average. |
Regulatory PDs adjusted to point in time metrics were used in the latent provision calculation. |
The likelihood that a customer will fail to make full and timely repayment of credit obligations over a one year time horizon.
For Wholesale, PD models reflect losses that would arise through-the-cycle; this represents a long run average view of default levels.
For Personal, the prevailing economic conditions at the reporting date (point-in-time) are used. |
Significant increase in credit risk (SICR) |
A framework incorporating both quantitative and qualitative measures aligned to the Groups current risk management framework has been established. Credit deterioration will be a management decision, subject to approval by governing bodies such as the Provisions Committee.
The staging assessment requires a definition of when a SICR has occurred; this moves the loss calculation for financial assets from a 12 month horizon to a lifetime horizon. Management has established an approach that is primarily informed by the increase in lifetime probability of default, with additional qualitative measures to account for assets where PD does not move, but a high risk factor is determined. |
Not applicable. |
Not applicable. |
Forward-looking and multiple scenarios |
The evaluation of future cash flows, the risk of default and impairment loss should take into account expectations of economic changes that are reasonable.
More than one outcome should be considered to ensure that the resulting estimation of impairment is not biased towards a particular expectation of economic growth. |
Financial asset carrying values based upon the expectation of future cash flows. |
Not applicable. |
Capital and risk management
Credit risk continued
Key IFRS 9 terms and differences to the prior IAS accounting standard and regulatory framework (audited)
Attribute |
IFRS 9 |
IAS 39 |
Regulatory (CRR) |
Loss given default (LGD) |
LGD is a current assessment of the amount that will be recovered in the event of default, taking account of future conditions. It may occasionally equate to the regulatory view albeit with conservatism and downturn assumptions generally removed. |
Regulatory LGD values were often used for calculating collective and latent provisions; bespoke LGDs were also used. |
An estimate of the amount that will not be recovered in the event of default, plus the cost of debt collection activities and the delay in cash recovery. LGD is a downturn based metric, representing a prudent view of recovery in adverse economic conditions. |
Exposure at default (EAD) |
Expected balance sheet exposure at default. It differs from the regulatory method as follows: It caps exposure at the contractual limit. |
Based on the current drawn balance plus future committed drawdowns. |
Models are used to provide estimates of credit facility utilisation at the time of a customer default, recognising that customers may make further drawings on unused credit facilities prior to default or that exposures may increase due to market movements. EAD cannot be lower than the reported balance sheet, but can be reduced by a legally enforceable netting agreement. |
Date of initial recognition |
The reference date used to assess a significant increase in credit risk is as follows. Term lending: the date the facility became available to the customer. Wholesale revolving products: the date of the last substantive credit review (typically annual) or, if later, the date facility became available to the customer. Retail Cards: the account opening date or, if later, the date the card was subject to a regular three year review or the date of any subsequent limit increases. Current accounts/overdrafts: the account opening date or, if later, the date of initial granting of overdraft facility or of limit increases. |
Not applicable for impairment but defined as the date when the entity becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. |
Not applicable. |
Modification |
A modification occurs when the contractual cash flows of a financial asset are renegotiated or otherwise modified and the renegotiation or modification does not result in derecognition. A modification requires immediate recognition in the income statement of any impact on the carrying value and effective interest rate (EIR) or examples of modification events include forbearance and distressed restructuring. The financial impact is recognised in the income statement as an impairment release/(loss). |
Modification was not separately defined but accounting impact arose as an EIR adjustment on changes that were not derecognition or impairment events. |
Not applicable. |
Capital and risk management
Market risk
RBS is exposed to non-traded market risk through its banking activities and to traded market risk through its trading activities. Non-traded and traded market risk exposures are managed separately. As a result, each type of market risk is discussed separately. The non-traded market risk section begins below. The traded market risk section begins on page 169.
Pension-related activities also give rise to market risk. Refer to page 172 for more information on risk related to pensions.
Non-traded market risk
Definition
Non-traded market risk is the risk to the value of assets or liabilities outside the trading book, or the risk to income, that arises from changes in market prices such as interest rates, foreign exchange rates and equity prices, or from changes in managed rates.
The following disclosures in this section are audited:
· Internal banking book VaR.
· Foreign exchange risk.
· Equity risk.
Sources of risk
RBSs non-traded market risk exposure is largely managed in line with the following key categories: interest rate risk; credit spread risk; foreign exchange risk; equity risk; and accounting volatility risk.
Interest rate risk
Non-traded interest rate risk (NTIRR) arises from the provision to customers of a range of banking products with differing interest rate characteristics. When aggregated, these products form portfolios of assets and liabilities with varying degrees of sensitivity to changes in market interest rates. Mismatches can give rise to volatility in net interest income as interest rates vary. NTIRR comprises three primary risk types: gap risk, basis risk and option risk.
Credit spread risk
Credit spread risk arises from the potential adverse economic impact of a change in the spread between bond yields and swap rates, where the bond portfolios are accounted at fair value through equity.
Foreign exchange risk
Non-traded foreign exchange risk arises from two main sources:
· Structural foreign exchange risk arises from the capital deployed in foreign subsidiaries, branches and joint arrangements and related currency funding where it differs from sterling.
· Non-trading book foreign exchange risk arises from customer transactions and profits and losses that are in a currency other than the functional currency of the transacting operation.
Equity risk
Non-traded equity risk is the potential variation in income and reserves arising from changes in the values of equity positions. Equity exposures may arise through strategic acquisitions, venture capital investments and certain restructuring arrangements.
Accounting volatility risk
Accounting volatility risk arises when an exposure is accounted for at amortised cost but economically hedged by a derivative that is accounted for at fair value. Although this is not an economic risk, the difference in accounting between the exposure and the hedge creates volatility in the income statement.
Key developments in 2018
· Interest rates rose in 2018 but remained low by historical standards. The UK base rate rose from 0.5% to 0.75% in August 2018. The five-year swap rate was 1.22% at 31 December 2018 compared to 0.98% at 31 December 2017.
· Sterling weakened against the US dollar and slightly against the euro over the year.
· The persistence of low interest rates and weaker sterling partly reflected uncertainty over Brexit.
· Compliance with ring-fencing regulations resulted in the split of non-traded market risk management responsibility for NatWest Holdings and its subsidiaries from non-ring-fenced companies.
· Changes in accounting treatment under IFRS 9, which took effect from 1 January 2018, had an impact on the way certain non-traded market risk exposures are calculated. Some structured loans were recognised at fair value through the profit and loss on transition to IFRS 9. However, this exposure had declined by the end of the year, mainly due to asset disposals.
Risk governance
Responsibility for identifying, measuring, monitoring and controlling market risk arising from non-trading activities lies with the relevant business. Oversight is provided by the independent Risk function.
Risk positions are reported monthly to the Executive Risk Committee and quarterly to the Board Risk Committee, as well as to the Asset & Liability Management Committee (monthly in the case of interest rate, credit spread and accounting volatility risks and quarterly in the case of foreign exchange and equity risks).
Market risk policy statements set out the governance and risk management framework.
Risk appetite
RBSs qualitative appetite is set out in the non-traded market risk appetite statement.
Its quantitative appetite is expressed in terms of value-at-risk (VaR), stressed value-at-risk (SVaR), sensitivity and stress limits, and earnings-at-risk limits. These limits comprise both board risk measures (which are approved by the RBS Board on the recommendation of the Board Risk Committee) and key risk measures, which are approved by the Asset & Liability Management Committee.
The limits are reviewed to reflect changes in risk appetite, business plans, portfolio composition and the market and economic environments.
To ensure approved limits are not breached and that RBS remains within its risk appetite, triggers at RBS and lower levels have been set and are actively managed.
For further information on risk appetite, refer to page 104.
Risk controls
For information on risk controls, refer to page 104.
Risk monitoring and mitigation
Interest rate risk
NTIRR factors are grouped into the following categories:
· Gap risk arises from the timing of rate changes in non-trading book instruments. The extent of gap risk depends on whether changes to the term structure of interest rates occur consistently across the yield curve (parallel risk) or differentially by period (non-parallel risk).
· Basis risk captures the impact of relative changes in interest rates for financial instruments that have similar tenors but are priced using different interest rate indices, or on the same interest rate indices but with different tenors.
· Option risk arises from option derivative positions or from optional elements embedded in assets, liabilities and/or off-balance sheet items, where RBS or its customer can alter the level and timing of their cash flows. Option risk also includes pipeline risk.
Due to the long-term nature of many retail and commercial portfolios and their varied interest rate repricing characteristics and maturities net interest income is likely to vary from period to period, even if interest rates remain the same. New business originated in any period will alter RBSs interest rate sensitivity if the resulting portfolio differs
Capital and risk management
Non-traded market risk continued
from portfolios originated in prior periods, depending on the extent to which exposure has been hedged. To manage exposures within appetite, RBS aggregates its interest rate positions and hedges these externally using cash and derivatives (primarily interest rate swaps).
Credit spread risk
RBSs bond portfolios primarily comprise high-quality securities maintained as a liquidity buffer to ensure RBS can continue to meet its obligations in the event that access to wholesale funding markets is restricted. Additionally other high-quality bond portfolios are held for collateral purposes and to support payment systems.
Credit spread risk is monitored daily through sensitivities and VaR measures. The dealing authorities in place for the bond portfolios further mitigate the risk by imposing constraints by duration, asset class and credit rating. Exposures and limit utilisations are reported to senior management on a daily basis.
Foreign exchange risk
The only material non-traded open currency positions are the structural foreign exchange exposures arising from investments in foreign subsidiaries, branches and associates and their related currency funding. These exposures are assessed and managed to predefined risk appetite levels under delegated authority from the Asset & Liability Management Committee. RBS seeks to limit the potential volatility impact on its CET1 ratio from exchange rate movements by maintaining a structural open currency position. Gains or losses arising from the retranslation of net investments in overseas operations are recognised in equity reserves and reduce the sensitivity of capital ratios to foreign exchange rate movements primarily arising from the retranslation of non-sterling-denominated RWAs. Sensitivity is minimised where, for a given currency, the ratio of the structural open position to RWAs equals the CET1 ratio.
The sensitivity of this ratio to exchange rates is monitored monthly and reported to the Asset & Liability Management Committee at least quarterly. Foreign exchange exposures arising from customer transactions are sold down by businesses on a regular basis in line with RBS policy.
Equity risk
Non-traded equity risk is the potential variation in the income and reserves arising from changes in equity valuations. Any such risk is identified prior to any investments and then mitigated through a framework of controls.
Investments, acquisitions or disposals of a strategic nature are referred to the Acquisitions & Disposals Committee. Once approved by the Acquisitions & Disposals Committee for execution, such transactions are referred for approval to the Board, the Executive Committee, the Chief Executive, the Chief Financial Officer or as otherwise required. Decisions to acquire or hold equity positions in the non-trading book that are not of a strategic nature, such as customer restructurings, are taken by authorised persons with delegated authority under the credit approval framework.
Accounting volatility risk
Accounting volatility can be mitigated through hedge accounting. The profit and loss impact of the derivatives can be mitigated by marking the exposure to market. However, volatility will remain in cases where accounting rules mean that hedge accounting is not an option. Accounting volatility risk is reported to the Asset & Liability Management Committee monthly and capitalised as part of the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process.
Risk measurement
The market risk exposures arising as a result of RBSs retail and commercial banking activities are measured using a combination of value-based metrics (VaR and sensitivities) and earnings-based metrics, as explained in greater detail for each of the exposure types discussed in this section. The following table presents one-day internal banking book VaR at a 99% confidence level, split by risk type.
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||
|
Average |
Maximum |
Minimum |
Period end |
|
Average |
Maximum |
Minimum |
Period end |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Interest rate |
14.4 |
28.2 |
7.3 |
11.6 |
|
9.1 |
15.3 |
5.6 |
5.6 |
Euro |
2.1 |
3.9 |
1.0 |
1.0 |
|
3.3 |
4.3 |
2.3 |
3.3 |
Sterling |
14.5 |
26.0 |
7.9 |
13.3 |
|
6.3 |
13.8 |
1.8 |
2.8 |
US dollar |
4.7 |
8.7 |
1.4 |
8.7 |
|
5.5 |
8.8 |
2.1 |
7.7 |
Other |
0.5 |
0.7 |
0.3 |
0.7 |
|
1.0 |
1.1 |
0.8 |
0.8 |
Credit spread |
59.7 |
77.8 |
49.4 |
77.8 |
|
60.6 |
82.4 |
47.4 |
49.7 |
Structural foreign exchange rate |
13.4 |
32.7 |
5.9 |
13.0 |
|
12.4 |
17.2 |
9.3 |
15.4 |
Pipeline risk (1) |
0.6 |
1.3 |
0.3 |
0.4 |
|
0.9 |
1.7 |
0.2 |
1.0 |
Diversification (2) |
(24.9) |
|
|
(20.5) |
|
(19.2) |
|
|
(17.3) |
Total |
63.0 |
82.3 |
54.9 |
82.3 |
|
63.8 |
83.1 |
54.4 |
54.4 |
Notes:
(1) Pipeline risk is the risk of loss arising from personal customers owning an option to draw down a loan typically a mortgage at a committed rate, where interest rate changes may result in greater or fewer customers than anticipated taking up the committed offer.
(2) RBS benefits from diversification across various financial instrument types, currencies and markets. The extent of the diversification benefit depends on the correlation between the assets and risk factors in the portfolio at a particular time. The diversification factor is the sum of the VaR on individual risk types less the total portfolio VaR.
Key points (audited)
· On average, non-traded VaR remained broadly unchanged year on year.
· The main component of the VaR is credit spread risk. VaR peaked at year-end, mainly driven by higher volatility in credit spreads due to economic uncertainty that affected the UK Gilts portfolio.
· Interest rate VaR peaked in January driven by the impact of transition to IFRS 9 on interest rate exposure in the structured loan portfolio. It subsequently declined, driven by additional hedging put in place during H1 2018 and asset disposals during H2 2018.
· Structural foreign exchange rate VaR peaked in H1 2018. The VaR measures the residual spot sensitivity of the CET1 ratio to exchange rate movements. CET1 ratio sensitivity to the sterling/US dollar exchange rate increased in May when foreign exchange rate options were exercised to hedge additional US dollar liabilities that were recognised when the agreement in principle with the US Department of Justice was reached.
Capital and risk management
Non-traded market risk continued
Structural hedging
RBS has the benefit of a significant pool of stable, non and low interest-bearing liabilities, principally comprising equity and money transmission accounts. These balances are usually hedged, either by investing directly in longer-term fixed-rate assets (such as fixed-rate mortgages or UK government Gilts) or by using interest rate swaps, which are generally booked as cash flow hedges of floating-rate assets, in order to provide a consistent and predictable revenue stream.
After hedging the net interest rate exposure externally, RBS allocates income to equity or products in structural hedges by reference to the relevant interest rate swap curve. Over time, this approach has provided a basis for stable income attribution to products and interest rate returns. The programme aims to track a time series of medium-term swap rates, but the yield will be affected by changes in product volumes and RBSs capital composition.
The table below presents the incremental income allocation (above three-month LIBOR), total income allocation (including three-month LIBOR), the period end and average notional balances and the total yield (including three-month LIBOR) associated with the structural hedges managed by RBS.
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||||
|
Incremental |
Total |
Period end |
Average |
Total |
|
Incremental |
Total |
Period end |
Average |
Total |
|
income |
income |
notional |
notional |
yield |
|
income |
income |
notional |
notional |
yield |
|
£m |
£m |
£bn |
£bn |
% |
|
£m |
£m |
£bn |
£bn |
% |
Equity structural hedging |
469 |
672 |
29 |
29 |
2.33 |
|
628 |
703 |
28 |
28 |
2.48 |
Product structural hedging |
368 |
1,104 |
110 |
108 |
1.02 |
|
680 |
1,027 |
107 |
101 |
1.02 |
Other structural hedges |
89 |
167 |
22 |
22 |
0.77 |
|
147 |
165 |
21 |
20 |
0.83 |
Total |
926 |
1,943 |
161 |
159 |
1.22 |
|
1,455 |
1,895 |
156 |
149 |
1.27 |
Equity structural hedges refer to income allocated primarily to equity and reserves. This includes NatWest Markets Plc and NatWest Holdings. Product structural hedges refer to income allocated to customer products, for example current accounts, in NatWest Holdings. Other structural hedges refer to hedges managed by the subsidiaries (Private Banking, Ulster Bank Limited, UBIDAC and RBSI). A significant proportion of Other structural hedges are euro-denominated.
The table below presents the incremental income associated with product structural hedges at segment level.
|
2018 |
2017 |
£m |
£m | |
UK Personal & Business Banking |
242 |
440 |
Commercial Banking |
124 |
235 |
Other |
2 |
5 |
Total |
368 |
680 |
Key points
· The incremental income from the structural hedge was lower than that in 2017 primarily due to the increase in three-month LIBOR during 2018. The overall yield of the hedge was relatively stable.
· Five-year and ten-year sterling swap rates at 31 December 2018 were 1.22% and 1.35%, respectively. Equity structural hedges amortise over ten years whilst product hedges amortise over five years. Other structural hedges also amortise over five years except a small proportion of RBSIs hedge which amortises over ten years.
· Compliance with ring-fencing regulations during H2 2018 resulted in a split of the equity structural hedge between NatWest Holdings and NatWest Markets. Approximately £6 billion of the equity hedge was allocated to NWM Plc in 2018.
· Additionally, as a result of ring-fencing legislation, RBSI is not able to hedge with NatWest Holdings. Instead of placing hedges with NatWest Holdings Treasury, RBSI now hedges its structural exposure with bonds, primarily UK government Gilts.
Capital and risk management
Non-traded market risk continued
Interest rate risk
NTIRR can be measured from either an economic value-based or earnings-based perspective, or a combination of the two. Value-based approaches measure the change in value of the balance sheet assets and liabilities over a longer timeframe, including all cash flows. Earnings-based approaches measure the potential short-term (generally one-year) impact on the income statement of changes in interest rates.
RBS uses VaR as its value-based approach and sensitivity of net interest income (NII) as its earnings-based approach.
These two approaches provide different yet complementary views of the impact of interest rate risk on the balance sheet at a point in time. The scenarios employed in the NII sensitivity approach incorporate business assumptions and simulated modifications in customer behaviour as interest rates change. In contrast, the VaR approach assumes static underlying positions and therefore does not provide a dynamic measurement of interest rate risk. In addition, while NII sensitivity calculations are measured to a 12-month horizon and thus provide a shorter-term view of the risks on the balance sheet, the VaR approach can identify risks not captured in the sensitivity analysis, in particular the impact of duration and repricing risk on earnings beyond 12 months.
Value-at-risk
VaR is a statistical estimate of the potential change in the market value of a portfolio (and, thus, the impact on the income statement) over a specified time horizon at a given confidence level.
RBSs standard VaR metrics which assume a time horizon of one trading day and a confidence level of 99% are based on interest rate repricing gaps at the reporting date. Daily rate moves are modelled using observations from the last 500 business days. These incorporate customer products plus associated funding and hedging transactions as well as non-financial assets and liabilities. Behavioural assumptions are applied as appropriate.
The non-traded interest rate risk VaR metrics for RBSs retail and commercial banking activities are included in the banking book VaR table on page 165. The VaR captures the risk resulting from mismatches in the repricing dates of assets and liabilities.
It includes any mismatch between structural hedges and stable non and low interest-bearing liabilities such as equity and money transmission accounts as regards their interest rate repricing behavioural profile.
Sensitivity of net interest earnings
Net interest earnings are sensitive to changes in the level of interest rates because changes to coupons on some customer products do not always match changes in market rates of interest or central bank policy rates.
Earnings sensitivity to rate movements is derived from a central forecast over a 12-month period. A simplified scenario is shown below based on the period-end balance sheet (assuming that non-interest rate variables remain constant). Market-implied forward rates are used to generate the base case earnings forecast, which is then subject to interest rate shocks. The variance between the central forecast and the shock gives an indication of underlying sensitivity to interest rate movements.
The sensitivity of net interest earnings table shows the expected impact, over 12 months, to an immediate upward or downward change of 25 and 100 basis points to all interest rates. Yield curves are expected to move in parallel though interest rates are assumed to floor at zero per cent or, for euro rates, at the current negative rate.
The main driver of earnings sensitivity relates to interest rate pass-through assumptions on customer products. The scenario also captures the impact of the reinvestment of maturing structural hedges at higher or lower rates than the base-case earnings sensitivity and mismatches in the repricing dates of loans and deposits.
However, reported sensitivities should not be considered a guide to future performance. They do not capture potential management action in response to sudden changes in the interest rate environment. Actions that could reduce NII sensitivity and mitigate adverse impacts are changes in pricing strategies on customer loans and deposits as well as hedging. Management action may also be targeted at stabilising total income taking into account non-interest income in addition to NII.
|
|
Parallel shifts in yield curve |
| ||||||
|
|
+25 basis points |
|
-25 basis points |
|
+100 basis points |
|
-100 basis points |
|
2018 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
Euro |
|
29 |
|
(3) |
|
114 |
|
(1) |
|
Sterling |
|
152 |
|
(201) |
|
651 |
|
(717) |
|
US dollar |
|
15 |
|
(8) |
|
63 |
|
(42) |
|
Other |
|
1 |
|
2 |
|
2 |
|
3 |
|
Total |
|
197 |
|
(210) |
|
830 |
|
(757) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Euro |
|
13 |
|
(8) |
|
53 |
|
(11) |
|
Sterling |
|
151 |
|
(218) |
|
664 |
|
(504) |
|
US dollar |
|
14 |
|
(13) |
|
58 |
|
(49) |
|
Other |
|
|
|
(4) |
|
|
|
(7) |
|
Total |
|
178 |
|
(243) |
|
775 |
|
(571) |
|
Key point
· Net interest earnings sensitivity to a 100-basis-point downward shift in yield curves rose in 2018 compared to 2017. In the shock scenarios, rates fell further at 31 December 2018 than at 31 December 2017 before hitting an assumed zero per cent floor on interest rates. This was mainly due to rises in short-term cash rates since December 2017, which increased the impact of the rate shock. This effect was not seen in the 25-basis-point downward shift as most rates remain above zero per cent after the interest rate shock.
Capital and risk management
Non-traded market risk continued
The tables below show the net interest earnings sensitivity on a one-year, two-year and three-year forward-looking basis to a parallel upward or downward shift in interest rates of 25 basis points. The projection is a simplified sensitivity in which the balance sheet is assumed to be constant, with no change in customer behaviour or margin management strategy as a result of rate changes. The benefit of structural hedges increases (or decreases) as maturing hedges are reinvested over the three-year period.
|
|
+25 basis points parallel upward shift |
|
-25 basis points parallel downward shift | ||||||||
|
|
Year 1 |
|
Year 2 (1) |
|
Year 3 (1) |
|
Year 1 |
|
Year 2 (1) |
|
Year 3 (1) |
2018 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Structural hedges |
|
32 |
|
98 |
|
170 |
|
(32) |
|
(98) |
|
(167) |
Managed margin (2) |
|
150 |
|
171 |
|
170 |
|
(177) |
|
(189) |
|
(163) |
Other |
|
15 |
|
|
|
|
|
(2) |
|
|
|
|
Total |
|
197 |
|
269 |
|
340 |
|
(210) |
|
(287) |
|
(330) |
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Structural hedges |
|
33 |
|
100 |
|
171 |
|
(33) |
|
(99) |
|
(171) |
Managed margin (2) |
|
153 |
|
170 |
|
178 |
|
(220) |
|
(137) |
|
(121) |
Other |
|
(8) |
|
|
|
|
|
10 |
|
|
|
|
Total |
|
178 |
|
270 |
|
349 |
|
(243) |
|
(236) |
|
(292) |
Notes:
(1) |
|
The projections for Year 2 and Year 3 consider only the main drivers of earnings sensitivity, namely structural hedging and margin management. |
(2) |
|
Primarily current accounts and savings accounts. |
Sensitivity of fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) and cash flow hedging reserves to interest rate movements.
RBS holds most of the bonds in its liquidity portfolio at fair value. Valuation changes that are not hedged (or not in effective hedge accounting relationships) are recognised in FVOCI reserves. This is a component of credit spread risk.
Interest rate swaps are used to implement the structural hedging programme and also hedging of some personal and commercial lending portfolios, primarily fixed rate mortgages. Generally these swaps are booked in hedge accounting relationships. Changes in the valuation of swaps that are in effective cash flow hedge accounting relationships are recognised in cash flow hedge reserves.
The table below shows the sensitivity of FVOCI reserves and cash flow hedge reserves to a parallel shift in all rates. In this analysis, interest rates have not been floored at zero. Hedges are assumed to be fully effective. Hedge ineffectiveness would be expected to result in a portion of the reserve gains or losses shown below being recognised in P&L instead of reserves. Hedge ineffectiveness P&L is monitored and the effectiveness of cash flow and fair value hedge relationships are regularly tested in accordance with IFRS requirements. Note that a movement in the FVOCI reserve would have an impact on CET1 capital but a movement in the cash flow hedge reserve would not be expected to do so. Volatility in both reserves affects tangible net asset value.
|
|
+25 basis points |
|
-25 basis points |
|
+100 basis points |
|
-100 basis points |
|
2018 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
FVOCI reserves |
|
(55) |
|
55 |
|
(220) |
|
216 |
|
Cash flow hedge reserves |
|
(318) |
|
323 |
|
(1,250) |
|
1,315 |
|
Total |
|
(373) |
|
378 |
|
(1,470) |
|
1,531 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
FVOCI reserves |
|
(41) |
|
42 |
|
(164) |
|
167 |
|
Cash flow hedge reserves |
|
(443) |
|
448 |
|
(1,744) |
|
1,819 |
|
Total |
|
(484) |
|
490 |
|
(1,908) |
|
1,986 |
|
Key points
· The sensitivity of the cash flow hedge reserve to interest rate movements fell in 2018. In part this reflected an increase in customer demand for longer fixed rates on mortgage products. Customers increasingly opted to fix mortgage rates for five years. This reduced the requirement for five-year interest rate swaps.
· The increase in FVOCI reserve sensitivity was driven by the increase in the bonds held in liquidity portfolios due to the establishment of the NatWest Markets Plc liquid asset buffer as a result of ring-fencing implementation.
Capital and risk management
Non-traded market risk continued
Foreign exchange risk (audited)
The table below shows structural foreign currency exposures.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net investments in |
|
Net |
|
Structural foreign |
|
|
|
Residual structural |
|
|
|
Net investments in |
|
Non-controlling |
|
foreign operations |
|
investment |
|
currency exposures |
|
Economic |
|
foreign currency |
|
|
|
foreign operations |
|
interests (NCI) (1) |
|
excluding NCI |
|
hedges |
|
pre-economic hedges |
|
hedges (2) |
|
exposures |
|
2018 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
US dollar |
|
553 |
|
|
|
553 |
|
(4) |
|
549 |
|
(549) |
|
|
|
Euro |
|
6,428 |
|
33 |
|
6,395 |
|
(853) |
|
5,542 |
|
|
|
5,542 |
|
Other non-sterling |
|
2,600 |
|
710 |
|
1,890 |
|
(1,249) |
|
641 |
|
(81) |
|
560 |
|
Total |
|
9,581 |
|
743 |
|
8,838 |
|
(2,106) |
|
6,732 |
|
(630) |
|
6,102 |
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
US dollar |
|
766 |
|
|
|
766 |
|
(14) |
|
752 |
|
(752) |
|
|
|
Euro |
|
7,160 |
|
61 |
|
7,099 |
|
(342) |
|
6,757 |
|
(2,224) |
|
4,533 |
|
Other non-sterling |
|
2,493 |
|
645 |
|
1,848 |
|
(930) |
|
918 |
|
(453) |
|
465 |
|
Total |
|
10,419 |
|
706 |
|
9,713 |
|
(1,286) |
|
8,427 |
|
(3,429) |
|
4,998 |
|
Notes:
(1) Non-controlling interests (NCI) represents the structural foreign exchange exposure not attributable to owners equity.
(2) Economic hedges of US dollar net investments in foreign operations represent US dollar equity securities that do not qualify as net investment hedges for accounting purposes. They provide an offset to structural foreign exchange exposures to the extent that there are net assets in overseas operations available. Economic hedges of other currency net investments in foreign operations represent monetary liabilities that are not booked as net investment hedges.
Key points
· The main driver of the reduction in structural foreign currency exposures was lower net investment in eurozone subsidiaries as a result of the 1.5 billion dividend paid by UBI DAC to NatWest Holdings Limited during Q1 2018. The reduction in US dollar exposures reflected the impact of the agreement with the US Department of Justice in relation to RMBS conduct fines.
· Euro economic hedges reduced as a result of the redemption of equity securities.
· Changes in exchange rates affect equity in proportion to structural foreign currency exposures. At 31 December 2018, a 5% strengthening in all foreign currencies against sterling results in a £0.4 billion increase in equity reserves, while a 5% weakening in all foreign currencies against sterling results in a £0.3 billion reduction in equity reserves.
Equity risk (audited)
Equity positions are carried at fair value on the balance sheet based on available market prices where possible. If market prices are not available, fair value is based on appropriate valuation techniques or management estimates.
The table below shows the balance sheet carrying value of non-traded book equity positions.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
Exchange-traded equity |
|
41 |
|
41 |
Private equity |
|
303 |
|
243 |
Other |
|
87 |
|
136 |
|
|
431 |
|
420 |
The exposures may take the form of (i) equity shares listed on a recognised exchange, (ii) private equity shares defined as unlisted equity shares with no observable market parameters or (iii) other unlisted equity shares.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
Net realised gains arising from disposals |
|
23 |
|
82 |
Unrealised gains included in Tier 1 or Tier 2 capital |
|
153 |
|
60 |
Note:
(1) Includes gains or losses on FVOCI instruments only.
Capital and risk management
Traded market risk
Definition
Traded market risk is the risk arising from changes in fair value on positions, assets, liabilities or commitments in trading portfolios as a result of fluctuations in market prices.
The following disclosures in this section are audited:
· Traded VaR (1-day 99%)
Sources of risk
Traded market risk mainly arises from RBSs trading activities. These activities provide a range of financing, risk management and investment services to clients including corporations and financial institutions around the world. From a market risk perspective, activities are focused on rates; currencies; securitised products; and traded credit. RBS undertakes transactions in financial instruments including debt securities, as well as securities financing and derivatives.
All material traded market risk resides in NatWest Markets. The key categories are interest rate risk, credit spread risk and foreign currency price risk.
Trading activities may also give rise to counterparty credit risk. For further detail refer to the Credit risk section on page 123.
Key developments in 2018
· Geopolitical risk resulted in periods of market volatility during the year. This mainly related to threats of a trade war between China and the US, elections in Italy and negotiations on a Brexit deal. European interest rates remained at low levels, although the Bank of England and US Federal Reserve continued raising rates.
· Traded VaR fluctuated throughout 2018, reflecting political developments and geopolitical risk, but remained broadly unchanged on an average basis compared to 2017.
Risk governance
Responsibility for identifying, measuring, monitoring and controlling market risk arising from trading activities lies with the relevant trading business. Oversight is provided by the Market Risk function. Traded market risk positions are reported monthly to the Executive Risk Committee and quarterly to the Board Risk Committee. Market risk policy statements set out the governance and risk management framework.
Risk appetite
RBSs qualitative appetite for traded market risk is set out in the traded market risk appetite statement. Quantitative appetite is expressed in terms of exposure limits. The limit framework at RBS level comprises value-at-risk (VaR) and stressed value-at-risk (SVaR). More details on these are provided on the following pages.
The limit framework at trading unit level also comprises additional metrics specific to the market risk exposures within its scope. These additional metrics aim to control various risk dimensions such as product type, exposure size, aged inventory, currency and tenor. For each trading business, a document known as a dealing authority compiles details of all applicable limits and trading restrictions.
The limits are reviewed to reflect changes in risk appetite, business plans, portfolio composition and the market and economic environments. To ensure approved limits are not breached and that RBS remains within its risk appetite, triggers at RBS and lower levels have been set such that if exposures exceed a specified level, action plans are developed by the relevant business and the Market Risk function and implemented.
For more detail on risk appetite, refer to page 104.
Risk controls
For information on risk controls, refer to page 104.
Risk monitoring and mitigation
Traded market risk is identified and assessed by gathering, analysing, monitoring and reporting market risk information at desk, business, franchise and RBS-wide levels. Industry expertise, continued system developments and techniques such as stress testing are also used to enhance the effectiveness of the identification and assessment of all material market risks.
Traded market risk exposures are monitored against limits and analysed daily by market risk reporting and control functions. A daily report summarising the position of exposures against limits at RBS, franchise, business and desk levels is provided to senior management and market risk managers across the function. Limit reporting is supplemented with regulatory capital and stress testing information as well as ad hoc reporting.
A risk review of trading businesses is undertaken weekly with senior risk and front office staff. This includes a review of profit and loss drivers, notable position concentrations and other positions of concern.
Business profit and loss performance is monitored automatically through loss triggers which, if breached, require a remedial action plan to be agreed between the Market Risk function and the business. The loss triggers are set using both a fall-from-peak approach and an absolute loss level. In addition, regular updates on traded market risk positions are provided to the Executive Risk Committee and Board Risk Committee.
Risk measurement (audited)
RBS uses VaR, SVaR and the incremental risk charge to measure traded market risk. Risks that are not adequately captured by VaR or SVaR are captured by the Risks Not In VaR (RNIV) framework to ensure that RBS is adequately capitalised for market risk. In addition, stress testing is used to identify any vulnerabilities and potential losses in excess of VaR and SVaR.
The key inputs into these measurement methods are market data and risk factor sensitivities. Sensitivities refer to the changes in trade or portfolio value that result from small changes in market parameters that are subject to the market risk limit framework. Revaluation ladders are used in place of sensitivities to capture the impact of large moves in risk factors or the joint impact of two risk factors.
These methods have been designed to capture correlation effects and allow RBS to form an aggregated view of its traded market risk across risk types, markets and business lines while also taking into account the characteristics of each risk type.
Value-at-risk
For internal risk management purposes, VaR assumes a time horizon of one trading day and a confidence level of 99%.
The internal VaR model which captures all trading book positions including those products approved by the regulator is based on a historical simulation, utilising market data from the previous 500 days on an equally-weighted basis.
The model also captures the potential impact of interest rate risk; credit spread risk; foreign currency price risk; equity price risk; and commodity price risk.
When simulating potential movements in such risk factors, a combination of absolute, relative and rescaled returns is used.
Testing of the performance and adequacy of the VaR model is done on a regular basis through the following processes:
· Back-testing Internal and regulatory back-testing is conducted on a daily basis. (For information on internal back-testing, refer to page 171.)
· Ongoing model validation VaR model performance is assessed both regularly and on an ad-hoc basis if market conditions or portfolio profile change significantly.
· Model Risk Management review As part of the model lifecycle, all risk models (including the VaR model) are independently reviewed to ensure the model is still fit for purpose given current market conditions and portfolio profile.
Capital and risk management
Traded market risk continued
One-day 99% traded internal VaR
Traded VaR (1-day 99%)
The table below shows one-day 99% internal VaR for RBSs trading portfolios, split by exposure type.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||||||||
|
|
Average |
|
Maximum |
|
Minimum |
|
Period end |
|
Average |
|
Maximum |
|
Minimum |
|
Period end |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Interest rate |
|
14.3 |
|
27.3 |
|
9.2 |
|
13.0 |
|
14.1 |
|
24.5 |
|
8.8 |
|
15.3 |
Credit spread |
|
11.0 |
|
24.2 |
|
6.9 |
|
8.2 |
|
12.1 |
|
19.4 |
|
8.8 |
|
16.7 |
Currency |
|
3.1 |
|
7.6 |
|
1.4 |
|
5.3 |
|
4.9 |
|
10.0 |
|
2.3 |
|
3.5 |
Equity |
|
0.8 |
|
1.6 |
|
0.3 |
|
0.8 |
|
1.2 |
|
2.1 |
|
0.4 |
|
0.4 |
Commodity |
|
0.3 |
|
1.0 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.1 |
|
0.4 |
|
1.3 |
|
|
|
0.2 |
Diversification (1) |
|
(10.5) |
|
|
|
|
|
(8.8) |
|
(12.8) |
|
|
|
|
|
(15.3) |
Total |
|
19.0 |
|
35.6 |
|
11.7 |
|
18.6 |
|
19.9 |
|
29.5 |
|
13.2 |
|
20.8 |
Note:
(1) RBS benefits from diversification since it reduces risk by allocating positions across various financial instrument types, currencies and markets. The extent of the diversification benefit depends on the correlation between the assets and risk factors in the portfolio at a particular time. The diversification factor is the sum of the VaR on individual risk types less the total portfolio VaR.
Key points
· Although traded VaR fluctuated throughout 2018 as explained earlier, it remained broadly unchanged year-on-year on both an average and period-end basis.
· The peaks in January, May and July were largely related to bond syndication activity and, in the case of January, long euro rates.
Capital and risk management
Traded market risk continued
VaR back-testing
The main approach employed to assess the VaR models ongoing performance is back-testing, which counts the number of days when a loss exceeds the corresponding daily VaR estimate, measured at a 99% confidence level.
Two types of profit and loss (P&L) are used in back-testing comparisons: Actual P&L and Hypothetical (Hypo) P&L.
The Actual P&L for a particular business day is the firms actual P&L in respect of trading activities, including intraday activities, adjusted by stripping out fees and commissions, brokerage, and additions to and releases from reserves not directly related to market risk.
The Hypo P&L reflects the firms Actual P&L excluding any intra-day activities.
A portfolio is said to produce a back-testing exception when the Actual or Hypo P&L exceeds the VaR level on a given day. Such an event may be caused by a large market movement or may highlight issues such as missing risk factors or inappropriate time series. Any such issues identified are analysed and addressed through appropriate remediation or development action. Both Actual and Hypo back-testing exceptions are monitored.
The table below shows internal back-testing exceptions for the 250-business-day period to 31 December 2018 for one-day 99% traded internal VaR compared with Actual and Hypo P&L for the major NatWest Markets businesses.
|
|
Back-testing exceptions |
| ||
|
|
Actual |
|
Hypo |
|
Rates |
|
4 |
|
8 |
|
Currencies |
|
|
|
4 |
|
Credit |
|
|
|
|
|
Key points
· Statistically RBS would expect to see back-testing exceptions 1% of the time over the 250-day period.
· The exceptions in the Rates business were mainly driven by the increased volatility connected with large market movements due to political uncertainty in Italy and Spain.
· The exceptions in the Currencies business were mainly due to market movements.
Stressed VaR (SVaR)
As with VaR, the SVaR methodology produces estimates of the potential change in the market value of a portfolio, over a specified time horizon, at a given confidence level. SVaR is a VaR-based measure using historical data from a one-year period of stressed market conditions.
A simulation of 99% VaR is run on the current portfolio for each 250-day period from 2005 to the current VaR date, moving forward one day at a time. The SVaR is the worst VaR outcome of the simulated results.
This is in contrast with VaR, which is based on a rolling 500-day historical data set. A time horizon of ten trading days is assumed with a confidence level of 99%.
The internal traded SVaR model captures all trading book positions.
|
|
Period-end 2018 |
|
Period-end 2017 |
|
10-day 99% traded internal SVaR |
|
161 |
|
172 |
|
Key point
· Traded SVaR remained broadly unchanged.
Risks not in VaR (RNIVs)
The RNIV framework is used to identify and quantify market risks that are not fully captured by the internal VaR and SVaR models.
RNIV calculations form an integral part of ongoing model and data improvement efforts to capture all market risks in scope for model approval in VaR and SVaR.
For quantitative disclosures on RNIVs, refer to the Market Risk section of the Pillar 3 Report.
Stress testing
For information on stress testing, refer to page 105.
Incremental risk charge (IRC)
The IRC model quantifies the impact of rating migration and default events on the market value of instruments with embedded credit risk (in particular, bonds and credit default swaps) held in the trading book. It further captures basis risk between different instruments, maturities and reference entities.
Model validation
RBS uses a variety of models to manage and measure market risk. These include pricing models (used for valuation of positions) and risk models (for risk measurement and capital calculation purposes). They are developed and approved in NatWest Markets, with material models subject to independent review by Model Risk Management. For further detail on the independent model validation carried out by Model Risk Management refer to page 105. Information relating to pricing and market risk models is presented below.
Pricing models
Pricing models are developed by a dedicated first line team, in conjunction with the trading desk. The models are used to value positions for which prices are not directly observable as well as for the risk management of the portfolio. Any pricing models that are used as the basis for valuing portfolios and records are subject to approval and oversight by asset-level modelled product review committees. These committees comprise representatives of the trading, finance, market risk, model development and model review functions. Approval requires review and approval by these stakeholders as well as Model Risk Management.
The review process includes the following steps:
· The committees prioritise models for review by Model Risk Management, considering the materiality of the risk booked against the model and an assessment of the degree of model risk, which is the valuation uncertainty arising from the choice of modelling assumptions.
· Model Risk Management quantifies the model risk, which may include comparing the model outputs with those of alternative models developed by Model Risk Management.
· The sensitivities derived from the pricing models are validated.
· The conclusions of the review are used to inform risk limits and by the Finance function to inform model reserves.
Risk models
All model changes are approved through model governance committees at franchise level. Changes to existing models are subject to Model Risk Management review. RBS follows regulatory guidance for assessing the materiality of extensions and changes to the internal model approach for market risk. In addition to Model Risk Managements independent oversight which provides additional assurance that RBS holds appropriate capital for the market risk to which it is exposed the model testing team monitors the model performance for market risk through back-testing and other processes.
Capital and risk management
Pension risk
Definition
Pension obligation risk is the risk to RBS caused by its contractual or other liabilities to, or with respect to, a pension scheme (whether established for its employees or those of a related company or otherwise). It is also the risk that RBS will make payments or other contributions to, or with respect to, a pension scheme because of a moral obligation or because RBS considers that it needs to do so for some other reason.
Sources of risk
RBS has exposure to pension risk through its defined benefit schemes worldwide. The Main section of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund (the Main section) is the largest source of pension risk with £43.8 billion of assets and £35.5 of liabilities at 31 December 2018 (2017 £44.7 billion assets and £37.9 billion liabilities). Further detail on RBSs pension obligations, including sensitivities to the main risk factors, can be found in Note 5 on the consolidated accounts.
Pension scheme liabilities vary with changes in long-term interest rates and inflation as well as with pensionable salaries, the longevity of scheme members and legislation. Pension scheme assets vary with changes in interest rates, inflation expectations, credit spreads, exchange rates, and equity and property prices. RBS is exposed to the risk that the schemes assets, together with future returns and additional future contributions, are insufficient to meet liabilities as they fall due. In such circumstances, RBS could be obliged (or might choose) to make additional contributions to the schemes, or be required to hold additional capital to mitigate this risk.
Key developments in 2018
· A Memorandum of Understanding between RBS and the Trustee of the Main section was reached in April 2018, which enabled RBS to bring the pension scheme into alignment with ring-fencing rules and reduce exposure to pension risk.
· RBS made a £2 billion contribution to the Main section in H2 2018 and it was agreed this could be followed by up to a further £1.5 billion of dividend linked contributions to be paid from 2020, capped at £500 million per year.
· The contribution to the scheme facilitated a reduction in the risk profile of the fund, principally the sale of approximately £6 billion of quoted equity exposure and the purchase of further interest rate and inflation hedging.
Risk governance
The Pension Committee is chaired by the RBS Chief Financial Officer. It receives its authority from the Group Executive Committee and formulates RBSs view of pension risk. The Pension Committee is a key component of RBSs approach to managing pension risk and it reviews and monitors risk management, asset strategy and financing issues on behalf of RBS. It also considers investment strategy proposals from the Trustee.
For further information on Risk governance, refer to page 103.
Risk appetite
RBS maintains an independent view of the risk inherent in its pension funds. RBS has an annually reviewed pension risk appetite statement incorporating defined metrics against which risk is measured. RBS undertakes regular pension risk monitoring and reporting to the Board, the Board Risk Committee and the Pension Committee on the material pension schemes that RBS has an obligation to support.
Risk controls
A pension risk management framework is in place to provide formal controls for pension risk reporting, modelling, governance and stress testing. A pension risk policy, which sits within the RBS policy framework, is also in place and is subject to associated framework controls.
Risk monitoring and measurement
Pension risk reports are submitted to the Executive Risk Committee and the Board Risk Committee four times a year in the Risk Management Quarterly Report.
RBS also undertakes stress tests and scenario analyses on its material defined benefit pension schemes each year. These tests are also used to satisfy the requests of regulatory bodies such as the Bank of England. The stress testing framework includes pension risk capital calculations for the purposes of the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process as well as additional stress tests for a number of internal management purposes.
The results of the stress tests and their consequential impact on RBSs balance sheet, income statement and capital position are incorporated into the overall RBS stress test results.
Risk mitigation
The trustee has taken measures to mitigate inflation and interest rate risks, both by investing in suitable financial assets and by entering into inflation and interest rate swaps. The Main section also uses derivatives to manage the allocation of the portfolio to different asset classes and to manage risk within asset classes. The contribution made to the Main section also facilitated a £6 billion reduction in quoted equity exposure and an increase in interest rates and inflation hedging in 2018.
Compliance & conduct risk
Definition
Compliance risk is the risk that the behaviour of RBS towards customers fails to comply with laws, regulations, rules, standards and codes of conduct. Such a failure may lead to breaches of regulatory requirements, organisational standards or customer expectations and could result in legal or regulatory sanctions, material financial loss or reputational damage.
Conduct risk is the risk that the conduct of RBS and its subsidiaries and its staff towards customers or in the markets in which it operates leads to unfair or inappropriate customer outcomes and results in reputational damage, financial loss or both.
Sources of risk
Compliance and conduct risks exist across all stages of RBSs relationships with its customers and arise from a variety of activities including product design, marketing and sales, complaint handling, staff training, and handling of confidential insider information. As set out in Note 27 on the consolidated accounts, RBS and certain members of staff are party to legal proceedings and are subject to investigation and other regulatory action in the UK, the US and other jurisdictions.
Key developments in 2018
· An enhanced compliance and conduct risk framework was developed, setting minimum standards for the management and measurement of compliance and conduct risks across RBS.
· Enhanced product monitoring and reporting was introduced.
· Controls, systems and processes were revised to ensure compliance with the UKs ring-fencing rules.
· PPI remediation continued in advance of the FCAs August 2019 deadline for claims (refer to Note 20 on the consolidated accounts).
· Work to address legacy GRG complaints continued. The process closed to new complaints in the UK on 22 October 2018.
· Product and pricing continued to be simplified for new and existing customers.
Risk governance
RBS defines appropriate standards of compliance and conduct and ensures adherence to those standards through its risk management framework.
Capital and risk management
Compliance & conduct risk continued
Risk appetite
Risk appetite for compliance and conduct risks is set at Board level. RBS Risk appetite statements articulate the levels of risk that legal entities, franchises and functions work within when pursuing their strategic objectives and business plans.
Risk controls
RBS operates a range of controls to ensure its business is conducted in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements, as well as delivering good customer outcomes. A suite of policies addressing compliance and conduct risks set appropriate standards across RBS. Examples of these include the Complaints Management Policy, Client Assets & Money Policy, and Product Lifecycle Policy as well as policies relating to customers in vulnerable situations, cross-border activities and market abuse. Continuous monitoring and targeted assurance is undertaken, as appropriate.
Risk monitoring and measurement
Compliance and conduct risks are measured and managed through continuous assessment and reporting to RBSs senior risk committees and at Board level.
The compliance and conduct risk framework facilitates the consistent monitoring and measurement of compliance with laws and regulations and the delivery of consistently good customer outcomes.
The first line of defence is responsible for effective risk identification, reporting and monitoring, with oversight, challenge and review by the second line. Compliance and conduct risk management is also integrated into RBSs strategic planning cycle.
Risk mitigation
Activity to mitigate the most-material compliance and conduct risks is carried out across RBS with specific areas of focus in the customer-facing franchises and legal entities. Examples of mitigation include consideration of customer needs in business and product planning, targeted training, complaints management, as well as independent assurance activity. Internal policies help support a strong customer focus across RBS. Independent assessments of compliance with applicable regulations are also carried out at a legal entity level.
Financial crime
Definition
Financial crime risk is the risk presented by criminal activity in the form of money laundering, terrorist financing, bribery and corruption, sanctions and tax evasion. It does not include fraud risk management.
Sources of risk
Financial crime risk may be presented if RBSs employees, customers or third parties undertake or facilitate financial crime, or if RBSs products or services are used to facilitate such crime. Financial crime risk is an inherent risk across all of RBSs lines of business.
Key developments in 2018
· In March 2018, the Federal Reserve Board terminated a Cease & Desist Order originally imposed in July 2011 for financial crime compliance weaknesses identified across RBSs US businesses and concerns about the level of oversight that the RBS Board of Directors had over large and complex US operations. The termination of the Order followed a multi-year programme of work to establish an enhanced governance and oversight framework, risk management programme and compliance programme.
· In October 2018, the Federal Reserve Board terminated a Cease & Desist Order originally imposed in December 2013. The Order, which related to RBS Group and RBS plcs historical compliance with Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) economic sanctions regulations, was terminated following a multi-year programme of work to establish a robust, sustainable OFAC Sanctions compliance framework.
· While the financial crime governance framework was strengthened during 2018 along with the introduction of enhanced control effectiveness assurance processes, enhancements to existing risk assessment models, the introduction of a new Anti-Tax Evasion risk assessment; and improved monitoring controls and enhanced investigation processes the journey of improvement continues.
Risk governance
Financial crime risk is principally governed through the Financial Crime Risk Executive Committee, which is chaired by the Chief Financial Crime Officer. The committee reviews and, where appropriate, escalates material risks and issues to the Group Executive Risk Committee and the Group Board Risk Committee.
Risk appetite
RBS has no appetite to operate in an environment where systems and controls do not enable RBS to identify, assess, monitor, manage and mitigate financial crime risk. RBSs systems and controls must be comprehensive and proportionate to the nature, scale and complexity of its businesses. RBS has no tolerance to systematically or repeatedly breach relevant financial crime regulations and laws.
Risk controls
RBS operates a framework of preventative and detective controls designed to ensure RBS mitigates the risk that it could facilitate financial crime. These controls are supported by a suite of policies, procedures and detailed instructions to ensure they operate effectively.
Risk monitoring and measurement
Financial crime risks are identified and reported through continuous risk management and regular monthly reporting to RBSs senior risk committees and the Board. Quantitative and qualitative data is reviewed and assessed to measure whether financial crime risk is within the Groups risk appetite.
Risk mitigation
Through the financial crime framework, RBS employs relevant policies, systems, processes and controls to mitigate financial crime risk. This would include the use of dedicated screening and monitoring controls to identify people, organisations, transactions and behaviours which might require further investigation or other actions. RBS ensures that centralised expertise is available to detect and disrupt threats to the Group and its customers. Intelligence is shared with law enforcement, regulators and government bodies to strengthen national and international defences against those who would misuse the financial system for criminal motives.
Operational risk
Definition
Operational risk is the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or external events. It arises from day-to-day operations and is relevant to every aspect of the business.
Sources of risk
Operational risk may arise from a failure to manage operations, systems, transactions and assets appropriately. This can take the form of human error, an inability to deliver change adequately or on time, the non-availability of technology services, or the loss of customer data. Fraud and theft as well as the increasing threat of cyber attacks are sources of operational risk, as is the impact of natural and man-made disasters. Operational risk can also arise from a failure to account for changes in law or regulations or to take appropriate measures to protect assets.
Capital and risk management
Operational risk continued
Key developments in 2018
· Risk provided oversight of several bank-wide programmes including the Transformation portfolio, structural reform, European Commission (EC) State Aid obligations and Brexit preparations.
· Key corporate structural reform milestones were delivered, including the implementation of the Financial Services Markets Act Part VII and migration activities to separate the ring-fence bank from the non ring-fenced bank.
· RBS is well positioned to deliver the activities required to support the Business Banking Switch Scheme that is due to commence in 2019, as part of the Groups final EC State Aid obligation.
· RBS has established an Innovation Risk Oversight team to provide bank-wide oversight of its innovation portfolio to help deliver safely and at pace.
· RBS continued to review its well established incident management and coordination procedures to manage the persistent and evolving nature of information and cyber security risks.
· Internal security improvement programmes and controls were developed and strengthened to protect RBS and its customers. RBS uses proactive threat management and intelligence processes to identify, manage and mitigate credible threats.
· RBS continued to reduce and simplify its technology estate through strategic investment and Technology transformation initiatives to limit opportunities for hackers and fraudsters. Improvements in capability were also made to the Security Operations Centre, strengthening controls to prevent data leakage, enhance malware defences and management of user access to key systems.
· The number of critical customer impacting incidents that RBS experiences continues to reduce year-on-year. There were 17 such incidents in 2018 compared to 20 in 2017.
· Internal training programmes ensure all employees are aware of the threats facing RBS and remain vigilant to unauthorised attempts to access systems and data.
Risk governance
A strong operational risk management function is vital to support RBSs ambitions to serve its customers better. Improved management of operational risk against defined appetite directly supports the strategic risk objective of improving stakeholder confidence and is vital for stability and reputational integrity.
The Operational Risk function, which is the second line of defence, delivers a robust operational risk management framework and culture across RBS.
The Operational Risk function is responsible for the execution and continuous improvement of the operational risk management framework.
The Operational Risk Executive Committee (OREC) is responsible for reviewing operational risk exposure; identifying and assessing both current and emerging material operational risks; reviewing and monitoring the operational risk profile; and reviewing and approving material operational risk policy changes.
Risk appetite
Operational risk appetite supports effective management of material operational risks. It expresses the level and types of operational risk RBS is willing to accept to achieve its strategic objectives and business plans.
The Group-wide operational risk appetite statement encompasses the full range of operational risks faced by its legal entities, franchises and functions. A subset of the most material risk appetite measures are defined as board risk measures, which are those that, should the limit be breached, would impact on the ability to achieve business plans and threaten stakeholder confidence.
Risk controls
The Control Environment Certification (CEC) process is a half yearly self-assessment by the CEOs of RBSs franchises and business units, as well as the heads of the support and control functions, providing a view on the adequacy and effectiveness of the internal control environment in a consistent and comparable manner. In line with ring-fencing requirements, from H2 2018 certificates were also produced for the following legal entities: NatWest Holdings Limited; NatWest Markets Plc; The Royal Bank of Scotland International Limited; Ulster Bank Ireland DAC; and Coutts and Co.
CEC covers material risks and the underlying key controls, including financial, operational and compliance controls, as well as supporting risk management frameworks. The CEC outcomes, including forward-looking assessments for the next two half-yearly cycles and progress on control environment improvements, are reported to the Board, Group Audit Committee and Board Risk Committee. They are also shared with external auditors.
The CEC process helps to ensure compliance with the RBS Policy Framework, Sarbanes-Oxley 404 requirements concerning internal control over financial reporting (as referenced in the Compliance report on page 95), and certain requirements of the UK Corporate Governance Code.
Risk monitoring and measurement
Risk and control assessments are used across all business areas and support functions to identify and assess material operational and conduct risks and key controls. All risks and controls are mapped to RBSs Risk Directory. Risk assessments are refreshed at least annually to ensure they remain relevant and capture any emerging risks, with associated trigger processes to ensure risks are reassessed at key periods of change.
The process is designed to confirm that risks are effectively managed and prioritised in line with risk appetite. Controls are tested at the appropriate frequency to verify that they remain fit-for-purpose and operate effectively.
RBS uses the standardised approach to calculate its Pillar 1 operational risk capital requirement. This is based on multiplying three years average historical gross income by coefficients set by the regulator based on business line. As part of the wider Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process an operational risk economic capital model is used to assess Pillar 2A, which is a risk-sensitive add-on to Pillar 1.The model uses historical loss data (internal and external) and forward-looking scenario analysis that is provided by Operational Risk to provide a risk-sensitive view of RBSs P2A capital requirement.
Scenario analysis is used to assess how extreme but plausible operational risks will affect RBS. It provides a forward-looking basis for evaluating and managing operational risk exposures.
Refer to the Capital, liquidity and funding risk section for operational risk capital requirement figures.
Event and loss data management
The operational risk event and loss data management process ensures RBS captures and records operational risk financial and non financial events that meet defined criteria. Loss data is used for regulatory and industry reporting and is included in capital modelling when calculating economic capital for operational risk. The most serious events are escalated in a simple, standardised process to all senior management, by way of a Group Notifiable Event Process.
Capital and risk management
Operational risk continued
All financial impacts associated with an operational risk event are reported against the date they were recorded in RBSs financial accounts. A single event can result in multiple losses (or recoveries) that may take time to crystallise. Losses and recoveries with a financial accounting date in 2018 may relate to events that occurred, or were identified in, prior years. RBS purchases insurance against specific losses and to comply with statutory or contractual requirements.
Percentage and value of events
At 31 December 2018, events aligned to the clients, products and business practices event category accounted for 98% of RBSs operational risk losses (compared to 93% in 2017). The increase reflected new or additional conduct-related provisions recorded during 2018, most notably the US Department of Justice mortgage-backed securities-related settlement.
|
|
Value of events |
|
Volume of events (1) | ||||||||
|
|
£m |
|
Proportion |
|
Proportion | ||||||
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
Fraud |
|
19 |
|
28 |
|
1% |
|
2% |
|
74% |
|
74% |
Clients, products and business practices (2) |
|
1,552 |
|
1,264 |
|
98% |
|
93% |
|
15% |
|
12% |
Execution, delivery and process management |
|
12 |
|
58 |
|
1% |
|
4% |
|
10% |
|
9% |
Employment practices and workplace safety |
|
1 |
|
5 |
|
|
|
1% |
|
1% |
|
5% |
|
|
1,584 |
|
1,355 |
|
100% |
|
100% |
|
100% |
|
100% |
Notes:
(1) The calculation in the table above is based on the volume and value of events (the proportion and cost of operational risk events to RBS) where the associated loss is more than or equal to £10,000.
(2) 2017 losses have been restated from £732 million following finalisation of material MBS-related settlements.
Operational resilience
RBS manages and monitors operational resilience through its risk and control assessments methodology. As challenges to operational resilience become more demanding, given a hostile cyber environment and a greater focus on serving customers through digital platforms, RBS is working with supervisory authorities in the UK to ensure the provision of its products and services can be maintained regardless of the cause of disruption.
This is underpinned by setting, monitoring and testing tolerances for key business services, which define the amount of disruption that could be tolerated.
Risk mitigation
Risks are mitigated by applying key preventative and detective controls, an integral step in the risk assessment methodology which determines residual risk exposure. Control owners are accountable for the design, execution, performance and maintenance of key controls. Key controls are regularly assessed for adequacy and tested for effectiveness. The results are monitored and, where a material change in performance is identified, the associated risk is re-evaluated.
Business risk
Definition
Business risk is the risk that RBS does not have a strategy that is sufficiently well defined to provide clarity on its long-term ambitions to key internal and external stakeholders, or that it is not able to execute upon its chosen strategy as communicated to the market, regulators and other key stakeholders. The risk is that RBS does not deliver its expected business performance which could give rise to a deterioration in stakeholder trust and confidence and/or a breach of regulatory thresholds. RBS may not be able to execute its chosen strategy if there are material changes to RBSs internal or external operating environment.
Sources of risk
Business risk arises as a result of RBSs exposure to the macro-economy (including economic and political factors), the competitive environment, regulatory and technological changes. In addition, internal factors such as the ability to deliver complex change, volatility in sales volumes, input costs, and other operational risks affect RBSs ability to execute its chosen strategic business plan as intended and thus contribute to business risk.
Key developments in 2018
· As part of its requirement by UK law to separate its everyday banking services from its investment banking by 1 January 2019 known as ring-fencing RBS made a number of changes to the way its business was structured. Certain Personal & Business Banking businesses and Commercial Banking businesses of The Royal Bank of Scotland plc transferred to Adam & Company PLC and National Westminster Bank Plc. The role of issuer under the covered bond programme transferred to National Westminster Bank Plc. Adam & Company PLC was renamed The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, and The Royal Bank of Scotland plc was renamed NatWest Markets Plc. The Royal Bank of Scotland plc superseded the prior issuer (former RBS plc) in respect of banknotes.
· RBS also restructured the NatWest Markets Plc (former RBS plc) capital structure. The shares in NatWest Holdings Limited, which owns the ring-fenced sub-group, were distributed to RBS. This separated the ring-fenced sub-group from the non-ring-fenced entities, as required by ring-fencing legislation. RBS also transferred the customer interest rate and foreign exchange derivatives business of National Westminster Bank Plc to NatWest Markets Plc.
· RBS reached a civil settlement in principle with the US Department of Justice in relation its investigation into RBSs issuance and underwriting of US Residential Mortgage Backed Securities (RMBS) between 2005 and 2007, resulting in a £1.0 billion additional provision.
· UK Government Investments Limited announced the successful completion of the disposal of part of HM Treasurys shareholding in The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc, representing approximately 7.7% of the ordinary share capital of the Group. HM Treasurys shareholding in RBS now represents 62.3% of the Groups ordinary share capital.
· On 17 April 2018 RBS agreed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with the Trustees of the RBS Group Pension Fund in connection with the requirements of ring-fencing. NatWest Markets Plc cannot continue to be a participant in the Main section and separate arrangements are required for its employees. Under the MoU NatWest Bank made a contribution of £2 billion on 9 October 2018 to strengthen funding of the Main section in recognition of the changes in covenant.
Capital and risk management
Business risk continued
· RBS declared an interim ordinary dividend of 2 pence per share the first since September 2008.
Risk governance
The Board has ultimate responsibility for business risk and for approving strategic plans, initiatives and changes to strategic direction.
RBSs strategic planning process is managed by Strategy and Corporate Development. The Risk and Finance functions are key contributors to strategic planning.
Responsibility for the day-to-day management of business risk lies primarily with the franchises, with oversight by the Finance function. The franchises are responsible for delivery of their business plans and the management of such factors as pricing, sales volumes, marketing expenditure and other factors that can introduce volatility into earnings.
Risk appetite
Risk Appetite defines the level and types of risk it is willing to accept in order to achieve its strategic objectives and business plans. RBS articulates its appetite for business risk through the implementation of qualitative risk appetite statements and quantitative risk measures at franchise and function level. These statements and measures help determine the level and types of business risk RBS is willing to accept.
Risk controls
For information on risk controls, refer to page 104.
Risk monitoring and measurement
Business risk is identified and managed at the product and transaction level. Estimated revenue, costs and capital are key considerations in the design of any new product or in any new investment decision. Business risk is reported, assessed and challenged at every governance level within the organisation. Each franchise monitors its financial performance relative to plans and reports this on a regular basis to the finance directors of each franchise.
Risk mitigation
RBS operates a monthly rolling forecasting process to identify projected changes in, or risks to, key financial metrics, and ensures appropriate actions are taken.
Reputational risk
Definition
Reputational risk is the risk to RBSs public image from a failure to meet stakeholders expectations in relation to performance, conduct or business profile. Stakeholders include customers, investors, employees, suppliers, government, regulators, special interest and consumer groups, media and the general public.
Sources of risk
Reputational risk can arise from the conduct of employees; customer activities and the sectors and countries in which they operate; provision of products and transactions; as well as operations and infrastructure.
Key developments in 2018
· Metrics were reviewed and enhanced to help measure reputational risk across the Group.
· Risk appetite positions for countries and sectors identified as presenting heightened reputational risk continued to be reviewed and strengthened.
Risk governance
A reputational risk policy supports reputational risk management across RBS. Reputational risk committees in PBB, CPB, RBSI, Ulster Bank RoI and NatWest Markets review relevant issues at an individual franchise or entity level, while the Group Reputational Risk Committee which has delegated authority from the Executive Risk Committee opines on cases, issues, sectors and themes that represent a material reputational risk to the Group. The Board Risk Committee oversees the identification and reporting of reputational risk. The Sustainable Banking Committee has a specific focus on environmental, social and ethical issues.
Risk appetite
RBS manages and articulates its appetite for reputational risk through a qualitative reputational risk appetite statement and quantitative measures. RBS seeks a continued improvement in the identification, assessment and management of customers, transactions, products and issues that present a material reputational risk.
Risk controls
For information on risk controls, refer to page 104.
Risk monitoring and measurement
Primary reputational risk measures are in place to assess internal activity relating to the management of reputational risk, including training. A number of secondary risk measures including measures also used in the management of operational, conduct and financial risks are used to assess relevant external factors. Quarterly reports on performance against these measures are provided to the Executive Risk Committee and Board Risk Committee.
Risk mitigation
Reputational risk is mitigated through the policy and governance framework, with ongoing staff training to ensure early identification, assessment and escalation of material issues.
The most material threats to RBSs reputation continued to originate from historical and more recent conduct issues. As a result, RBS has been the subject of investigations and reviews by a number of regulators and governmental authorities, some of which have resulted in fines, settlements and public censure. Refer to the Litigation, investigations and reviews section of Note 27 on the consolidated accounts.
Financial statements
|
Page | |
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm |
178 | |
Consolidated income statement |
180 | |
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income |
181 | |
Consolidated balance sheet |
182 | |
Consolidated statement of changes in equity |
183 | |
Consolidated cash flow statement |
185 | |
Accounting policies |
186 | |
Notes on the consolidated accounts |
| |
1 |
Net interest income |
191 |
2 |
Non-interest income |
191 |
3 |
Operating expenses |
192 |
4 |
Segmental analysis |
195 |
5 |
Pensions |
199 |
6 |
Auditors remuneration |
203 |
7 |
Tax |
204 |
8 |
Earnings per share |
206 |
9 |
Trading assets and liabilities |
206 |
10 |
Derivatives |
207 |
11 |
Financial instruments - classification |
209 |
12 |
Financial instruments - valuation |
211 |
13 |
Financial instruments - maturity analysis |
218 |
14 |
Loan impairment provisions |
221 |
15 |
Other financial assets |
222 |
16 |
Intangible assets |
223 |
17 |
Other assets |
224 |
18 |
Other financial liabilities |
224 |
19 |
Subordinated liabilities |
224 |
20 |
Other liabilities |
226 |
21 |
Non-controlling interests |
227 |
22 |
Share capital and other equity |
227 |
23 |
Leases |
229 |
24 |
Structured entities |
230 |
25 |
Asset transfers |
231 |
26 |
Capital resources |
232 |
27 |
Memorandum items |
233 |
28 |
Analysis of the net investment in business interests and intangible assets |
239 |
29 |
Analysis of changes in financing during the year |
239 |
30 |
Analysis of cash and cash equivalents |
240 |
31 |
Directors and key management remuneration |
240 |
32 |
Transactions with directors and key management |
240 |
33 |
Adoption of IFRS 9 |
241 |
34 |
Related parties |
242 |
35 |
Post balance sheet events |
242 |
36 |
Consolidating financial information |
243 |
Financial statements
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
To the Shareholders and the Board of Directors of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
Opinion on the Financial Statements
We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (the Group) as of 31 December 2018 and 2017, and the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, changes in equity and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2018, the related Accounting policies and Notes 1 to 36, and the information identified as audited in the Annual Report on Remuneration in the Directors Remuneration Report and in the Capital and risk management section (collectively referred to as the financial statements). In our opinion, the financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of the Group at 31 December 2018 and 2017 and the consolidated results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2018, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adopted for use in the European Union and IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.
We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the Groups internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2018, based on criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (2013 framework), and our report dated 14 February 2019 expressed an unqualified opinion thereon.
Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standard 9 Financial Instruments
As discussed in section 1. Presentation of accounts of the Accounting policies to the financial statements, the Group changed its method of accounting for the classification, measurement and impairment of financial instruments in 2018 due to the adoption of IFRS 9 Financial Instruments.
Basis for Opinion
These financial statements are the responsibility of the Groups management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Groups financial statements based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Group in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.
We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
/s/ Ernst & Young LLP
We have served as the Groups auditors since 2016.
London, United Kingdom
14 February 2019
Financial statements
To the Shareholders and the Board of Directors of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
Opinion on Internal Control over Financial Reporting
We have audited The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plcs (the Group) internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2018, based on criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (2013 framework) (the COSO criteria). In our opinion, the Group maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2018, based on the COSO criteria.
We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the consolidated balance sheets of the Group as of 31 December 2018 and 2017, and the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, changes in equity and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2018, the related Accounting policies and Notes 1 to 36, and the information identified as audited in the Annual Report on Remuneration in the Directors Remuneration Report and in the Capital and risk management section and our report dated 14 February 2019 expressed an unqualified opinion thereon.
Basis for Opinion
The Groups management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting included in the accompanying Managements Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Groups internal control over financial reporting based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Group in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.
We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects.
Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.
Definition and Limitations of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting
A companys internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A companys internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorisations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use, or disposition of the companys assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.
Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.
/s/ Ernst & Young LLP
London, United Kingdom
14 February 2019
Consolidated income statement for the year ended 31 December 2018
|
Note |
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
£m |
£m |
£m | ||
Interest receivable |
|
11,049 |
11,034 |
11,258 |
Interest payable |
|
(2,393) |
(2,047) |
(2,550) |
Net interest income |
1 |
8,656 |
8,987 |
8,708 |
Fees and commissions receivable |
|
3,218 |
3,338 |
3,340 |
Fees and commissions payable |
|
(861) |
(883) |
(805) |
Income from trading activities |
|
1,507 |
634 |
974 |
Loss on redemption of own debt |
|
|
(7) |
(126) |
Other operating income |
|
882 |
1,064 |
499 |
Non-interest income |
2 |
4,746 |
4,146 |
3,882 |
Total income |
|
13,402 |
13,133 |
12,590 |
Staff costs |
|
(4,122) |
(4,676) |
(5,124) |
Premises and equipment |
|
(1,383) |
(1,565) |
(1,388) |
Other administrative expenses |
|
(3,372) |
(3,323) |
(8,745) |
Depreciation and amortisation |
|
(731) |
(808) |
(778) |
Write down of goodwill and other intangible assets |
|
(37) |
(29) |
(159) |
Operating expenses |
3 |
(9,645) |
(10,401) |
(16,194) |
Profit/(loss) before impairment losses |
|
3,757 |
2,732 |
(3,604) |
Impairment losses |
14 |
(398) |
(493) |
(478) |
Operating profit/(loss) before tax |
|
3,359 |
2,239 |
(4,082) |
Tax charge |
7 |
(1,275) |
(824) |
(1,166) |
Profit/(loss) for the year |
|
2,084 |
1,415 |
(5,248) |
|
|
|
|
|
Attributable to: |
|
|
|
|
Ordinary shareholders |
|
1,622 |
752 |
(6,955) |
Preference shareholders |
|
182 |
234 |
260 |
Dividend access share |
|
|
|
1,193 |
Paid-in equity holders |
|
288 |
394 |
244 |
Non-controlling interests |
|
(8) |
35 |
10 |
|
|
2,084 |
1,415 |
(5,248) |
|
|
|
|
|
Earnings/(loss) per ordinary share |
8 |
13.5p |
6.3p |
(59.5p) |
Earnings/(loss) per ordinary share - fully diluted |
8 |
13.4p |
6.3p |
(59.5p) |
The accompanying notes on pages 191 to 249, the accounting policies on pages 186 to 190 and the audited sections of the Business review: Capital and risk management on pages 101 to 176 form an integral part of these financial statements.
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2018
|
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
Note |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Profit/(loss) for the year |
|
2,084 |
1,415 |
(5,248) |
Items that do not qualify for reclassification |
|
|
|
|
Remeasurement of retirement benefit schemes |
5 |
|
|
|
- contributions in preparation for ring-fencing (1) |
|
(2,053) |
|
|
- other movements |
|
86 |
90 |
(1,049) |
Profit/(loss) on fair value of credit in financial liabilities designated at fair value |
|
|
|
|
through profit or loss due to own credit risk |
|
200 |
(126) |
|
Fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) financial assets (2) |
|
48 |
|
|
Tax |
|
502 |
(10) |
288 |
|
|
(1,217) |
(46) |
(761) |
Items that do qualify for reclassification |
|
|
|
|
Fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) financial assets (2) |
|
7 |
26 |
(94) |
Cash flow hedges |
|
(581) |
(1,069) |
765 |
Currency translation |
|
310 |
100 |
1,263 |
Tax |
|
189 |
256 |
(106) |
|
|
(75) |
(687) |
1,828 |
Other comprehensive (loss)/income after tax |
|
(1,292) |
(733) |
1,067 |
Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year |
|
792 |
682 |
(4,181) |
Attributable to: |
|
|
|
|
Ordinary shareholders |
|
305 |
2 |
(5,999) |
Preference shareholders |
|
182 |
234 |
260 |
Dividend access share |
|
|
|
1,193 |
Paid-in equity holders |
|
288 |
394 |
244 |
Non-controlling interests |
|
17 |
52 |
121 |
|
|
792 |
682 |
(4,181) |
Notes:
(1) |
On 17 April 2018 RBS agreed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with the Trustees of the RBS Group Pension Fund in connection with the requirements of ring-fencing. NatWest Markets Plc cannot continue to be a participant in the Main section and separate arrangements are required for its employees. Under the MoU NatWest Bank made a contribution of £2 billion on 9 October 2018 to strengthen funding of the Main section in recognition of the changes in covenant. Also under the MoU, NatWest Markets Plc is required to make a £53 million contribution to the NWM section in Q1 2019. |
(2) |
Refer to Note 33 for further information on the impact of IFRS 9 on classification and basis of preparation, year ended 31 December 2018 prepared under IFRS 9 and prior years under IAS 39. |
The accompanying notes on pages 191 to 249, the accounting policies on pages 186 to 190 and the audited sections of the Business review: Capital and risk management on pages 101 to 176 form an integral part of these financial statements.
Consolidated balance sheet as at 31 December 2018
|
Note |
2018 |
2017 |
£m |
£m | ||
Assets |
|
|
|
Cash and balances at central banks |
11 |
88,897 |
98,337 |
Trading assets |
9 |
75,119 |
85,991 |
Derivatives |
10 |
133,349 |
160,843 |
Settlement balances |
|
2,928 |
2,517 |
Loans to banks - amortised cost |
11 |
12,947 |
11,517 |
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
11 |
305,089 |
310,116 |
Securities subject to repurchase agreements |
|
9,890 |
13,717 |
Other financial assets excluding securities subject to repurchase agreements |
|
49,595 |
38,212 |
Other financial assets |
15 |
59,485 |
51,929 |
Intangible assets |
16 |
6,616 |
6,543 |
Other assets |
17 |
9,805 |
10,263 |
Total assets |
|
694,235 |
738,056 |
|
|
|
|
Liabilities |
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
11 |
23,297 |
30,396 |
Customer deposits |
11 |
360,914 |
361,316 |
Settlement balances |
|
3,066 |
2,844 |
Trading liabilities |
9 |
72,350 |
81,982 |
Derivatives |
10 |
128,897 |
154,506 |
Other financial liabilities |
18 |
39,732 |
30,326 |
Subordinated liabilities |
19 |
10,535 |
12,722 |
Other liabilities |
20 |
8,954 |
14,871 |
Total liabilities |
|
647,745 |
688,963 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Ordinary shareholders interests |
|
41,182 |
41,707 |
Other owners interests |
|
4,554 |
6,623 |
Owners equity |
22 |
45,736 |
48,330 |
Non-controlling interests |
21 |
754 |
763 |
Total equity |
|
46,490 |
49,093 |
Total liabilities and equity |
|
694,235 |
738,056 |
The accompanying notes on pages 191 to 249, the accounting policies on pages 186 to 190 and the audited sections of the Business review: Capital and risk management on pages 101 to 176 form an integral part of these financial statements.
The accounts were approved by the Board of directors on 14 February 2019 and signed on its behalf by:
Howard Davies |
Ross McEwan |
Katie Murray |
The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
Registered No. SC45551
Consolidated statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 2018
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Called-up share capital - at 1 January |
11,965 |
11,823 |
11,625 |
Ordinary shares issued |
84 |
142 |
198 |
At 31 December |
12,049 |
11,965 |
11,823 |
|
|
|
|
Paid-in equity - at 1 January |
4,058 |
4,582 |
2,646 |
Redeemed/reclassified (1) |
|
(524) |
(110) |
Securities issued during the year (2) |
|
|
2,046 |
At 31 December |
4,058 |
4,058 |
4,582 |
|
|
|
|
Share premium account - at 1 January |
887 |
25,693 |
25,425 |
Ordinary shares issued |
140 |
235 |
268 |
Redemption of debt preference shares (3) |
|
748 |
|
Capital reduction (4) |
|
(25,789) |
|
At 31 December |
1,027 |
887 |
25,693 |
|
|
|
|
Merger reserve - at 1 January and 31 December |
10,881 |
10,881 |
10,881 |
|
|
|
|
FVOCI reserve at 1 January (5) |
255 |
238 |
307 |
Implementation of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018 |
34 |
|
|
Unrealised gains |
97 |
202 |
282 |
Realised gains |
(42) |
(176) |
(376) |
Tax |
(1) |
(9) |
25 |
At 31 December |
343 |
255 |
238 |
|
|
|
|
Cash flow hedging reserve - at 1 January |
227 |
1,030 |
458 |
Amount recognised in equity (6) |
(63) |
(277) |
1,867 |
Amount transferred from equity to earnings (7) |
(518) |
(792) |
(1,102) |
Tax |
163 |
266 |
(193) |
At 31 December (8) |
(191) |
227 |
1,030 |
|
|
|
|
Foreign exchange reserve - at 1 January |
2,970 |
2,888 |
1,674 |
Retranslation of net assets |
195 |
111 |
1,470 |
Foreign currency losses on hedges of net assets |
(33) |
(6) |
(278) |
Tax |
23 |
(1) |
62 |
Recycled to profit or loss on disposal of businesses (9) |
123 |
(22) |
(40) |
At 31 December (8) |
3,278 |
2,970 |
2,888 |
|
|
|
|
Capital redemption reserve - at 1 January |
|
4,542 |
4,542 |
Capital reduction (4) |
|
(4,542) |
|
At 31 December |
|
|
4,542 |
Retained earnings - at 1 January |
17,130 |
(12,936) |
(4,020) |
Implementation of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018 (5) |
(105) |
|
|
Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary shareholders and other equity owners |
2,092 |
1,380 |
(5,258) |
Equity preference dividends paid |
(182) |
(234) |
(260) |
Paid-in equity dividends paid, net of tax |
(288) |
(394) |
(244) |
Ordinary dividends paid |
(241) |
|
|
Capital reduction (4) |
|
30,331 |
|
Dividend access share dividend |
|
|
(1,193) |
Redemption of debt preference shares (3) |
|
(748) |
|
Redemption of equity preference shares (10) |
(2,805) |
|
(1,160) |
Redemption/reclassification of paid-in equity |
|
(196) |
(21) |
Realised gains in period on FVOCI equity shares, net of tax |
6 |
|
|
Remeasurement of the retirement benefit schemes |
|
|
|
- contributions in preparation for ring-fencing (11) |
(2,053) |
|
|
- other movements |
86 |
90 |
(1,049) |
- tax |
539 |
(28) |
288 |
Changes in fair value of credit in financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss |
|
|
|
- gross |
200 |
(126) |
|
- tax |
(33) |
18 |
|
Shares issued under employee share schemes |
(2) |
(5) |
(10) |
Share-based payments |
(32) |
(22) |
(9) |
At 31 December |
14,312 |
17,130 |
(12,936) |
|
|
|
|
Own shares held - at 1 January |
(43) |
(132) |
(107) |
Shares issued under employee share schemes |
87 |
161 |
41 |
Own shares acquired |
(65) |
(72) |
(66) |
At 31 December |
(21) |
(43) |
(132) |
|
|
|
|
Owners equity at 31 December |
45,736 |
48,330 |
48,609 |
Consolidated statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 2018
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Non-controlling interests (see Note 21) - at 1 January |
763 |
795 |
716 |
Currency translation adjustments and other movements |
25 |
17 |
111 |
(Loss)/profit attributable to non-controlling interests |
(8) |
35 |
10 |
Dividends paid |
(5) |
(25) |
|
Equity withdrawn and disposals |
(21) |
(59) |
(42) |
At 31 December |
754 |
763 |
795 |
|
|
|
|
Total equity at 31 December |
46,490 |
49,093 |
49,404 |
|
|
|
|
Total equity is attributable to: |
|
|
|
Ordinary shareholders |
41,182 |
41,707 |
41,462 |
Preference shareholders |
496 |
2,565 |
2,565 |
Paid-in equity holders |
4,058 |
4,058 |
4,582 |
Non-controlling interests |
754 |
763 |
795 |
|
46,490 |
49,093 |
49,404 |
Notes:
(1) |
Paid-in equity reclassified to liabilities as a result of the call of US$564 million and CAD321 million EMTN notes in August 2017 (redeemed in October 2017), the call of RBS Capital Trust D in March 2017 (redeemed in June 2017), the call of RBS Capital Trust C in May 2016 (redeemed in July 2016). |
(2) |
AT1 capital notes totalling £2.0 billion issued in August 2016. |
(3) |
During 2017, non-cumulative US dollar preference shares were redeemed at their original issue price of US$1.1 billion. The nominal value of £0.3 million was credited to the capital redemption reserve; share premium increased by £0.7 billion in respect of the premium received on issue, with a corresponding decrease in retained earnings. During 2016, non-cumulative US dollar preference shares were redeemed at their original issue price of US$1.5 billion. The nominal value of £0.3 million was transferred from share capital to capital redemption reserve and ordinary owners equity was reduced by £0.4 billion in respect of the movement in exchange rates since issue. |
(4) |
On 15 June 2017, the Court of Session approved a reduction of RBSG plc capital so that the amounts which stood to the credit of share premium, account and capital redemption reserve were transferred to retained earnings. |
(5) |
Refer to Note 33 for further information on the impact of IFRS 9 on classification and basis of preparation, year ended 31 December 2018 prepared under IFRS 9 prior years under IAS 39. |
(6) |
The amount debited direct to the cash flow hedging reserve comprised £166 million in relation to interest rate hedges less a credit of £103 million in relation to foreign exchange hedges. |
(7) |
The cash flow hedging reserve was reduced by £25 million in relation to foreign exchange hedges and £493 million in relation to interest rate hedges which were credited in aggregate to net interest income. |
(8) |
The hedging element of the cash flow hedging reserve and foreign exchange reserve relate mainly to de-designated hedges. |
(9) |
No tax impact. |
(10) |
During 2018, non-cumulative US dollar, Euro and Sterling preference shares were redeemed. |
(11) |
On 17 April 2018 RBS agreed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with the Trustees of the RBS Group Pension Fund in connection with the requirements of ring-fencing. NatWest Markets Plc cannot continue to be a participant in the Main section and separate arrangements are required for its employees. Under the MoU NatWest Bank made a contribution of £2 billion on 9 October 2018 to strengthen funding of the Main section in recognition of the changes in covenant Also under the MoU, NatWest Markets Plc is required to make a £53 million contribution to the NWM section in Q1 2019. |
The accompanying notes on pages 191 to 249, the accounting policies on pages 186 to 190 and the audited sections of the Business review: Capital and risk management on pages 101 to 176 form an integral part of these financial statements.
Consolidated cash flow statement for the year ended 31 December 2018
|
|
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
Note |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Cash flows from operating activities |
|
|
|
|
|
Operating profit/(loss) before tax |
|
|
3,359 |
2,239 |
(4,082) |
Interest on subordinated liabilities |
|
|
461 |
572 |
845 |
Impairment releases on loans to banks and customers |
|
|
(1,197) |
(647) |
(3,221) |
Profit on sale of subsidiaries and associates |
|
|
|
(155) |
(22) |
Profit on sale of securities |
|
|
(34) |
(226) |
(71) |
Defined benefit pension schemes |
|
|
(2,055) |
(252) |
(4,518) |
Provisions: expenditure in excess of charges |
|
|
(5,016) |
(4,546) |
4,517 |
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment of property, plant, equipment, goodwill and intangibles |
|
|
718 |
762 |
919 |
Loss on redemption of own debt |
|
|
|
7 |
126 |
Elimination of foreign exchange differences |
|
|
(160) |
(426) |
(6,518) |
Other non-cash items |
|
|
767 |
(214) |
133 |
Net cash outflow from trading activities |
|
|
(3,157) |
(2,886) |
(11,892) |
Decrease/(increase) in net loans to banks and customers |
|
|
2,627 |
2,466 |
(12,960) |
(Increase)/decrease in securities |
|
|
(47) |
(1,319) |
16,741 |
Decrease/(increase) in other assets |
|
|
258 |
(221) |
1,195 |
Increase in trading assets and liabilities |
|
|
(2,087) |
|
|
Decrease/(increase) in derivative assets and liabilities |
|
|
1,885 |
4,169 |
(2,696) |
(Decrease)/increase in settlement balance assets and liabilities and short positions |
|
|
(189) |
8,658 |
104 |
(Decrease)/increase in banks and customers deposits |
|
|
(8,164) |
25,449 |
10,418 |
Increase/(decrease) in debt securities in issue |
|
|
10,068 |
3,326 |
(3,967) |
Decrease in other liabilities |
|
|
(956) |
(381) |
(422) |
Changes in operating assets and liabilities |
|
|
3,395 |
42,147 |
8,413 |
Income taxes paid |
|
|
(466) |
(520) |
(171) |
Net cash flows from operating activities (1) |
|
|
(228) |
38,741 |
(3,650) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities |
|
|
|
|
|
Sale and maturity of securities |
|
|
9,062 |
11,656 |
8,599 |
Purchase of securities |
|
|
(16,181) |
(17,212) |
(11,607) |
Sale of property, plant and equipment |
|
|
264 |
405 |
447 |
Purchase of property, plant and equipment |
|
|
(619) |
(1,132) |
(912) |
Net investment in business interests and intangible assets |
28 |
|
(481) |
(199) |
(886) |
Net cash flows from investing activities |
|
|
(7,955) |
(6,482) |
(4,359) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities |
|
|
|
|
|
Issue of ordinary shares |
|
|
144 |
306 |
300 |
Issue of other equity instruments: Additional Tier 1 capital notes |
|
|
|
|
2,046 |
Redemption of other equity instruments |
|
|
(2,826) |
(779) |
(1,312) |
Redemption of debt preference shares |
|
|
|
(748) |
|
Own shares disposed/(acquired) |
|
|
22 |
89 |
(25) |
Redemption of subordinated liabilities |
|
|
(2,258) |
(5,747) |
(3,606) |
Service cost of other equity instruments |
|
|
(803) |
(612) |
(1,697) |
Interest on subordinated liabilities |
|
|
(566) |
(717) |
(813) |
Net cash flows from financing activities |
|
|
(6,287) |
(8,208) |
(5,107) |
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents |
|
|
676 |
(16) |
8,094 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents |
|
|
(13,794) |
24,035 |
(5,022) |
Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January |
|
|
122,605 |
98,570 |
103,592 |
Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December |
30 |
|
108,811 |
122,605 |
98,570 |
Note:
(1) |
Includes interest received of £10,927 million (2017 - £10,946 million, 2016 - £11,321 million) and interest paid of £2,511 million (2017 - £2,300 million, 2016 - £2,638 million). |
The accompanying notes on pages 191 to 249, the accounting policies on pages 186 to 190 and the audited sections of the Business review: Capital and risk management on pages 101 to 176 form an integral part of these financial statements.
Accounting policies
1. Presentation of accounts
The accounts, set out on pages 180 to 249 including these accounting policies on pages 186 to 190 and the audited sections of the Financial review: Capital and risk management on pages 101 to 176, are prepared on a going concern basis (see the Report of the directors, page 98) and in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and interpretations as issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee of the IASB and adopted by the European Union (EU) (together IFRS). ).
The company is incorporated in the UK and registered in Scotland. Its accounts are presented in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.
With the exception of investment property and certain financial instruments as described in Accounting policies 8, 13, and 21, the accounts are presented on an historical cost basis.
Adoption of IFRS 9
Refer to Note 33 for details of the adoption of IFRS 9.
Other amendments to IFRS
IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers has been adopted with effect from 1 January 2018. The Accounting policy is updated to reflect the terminology in the new standard but it has had no effect on financial information reported in the current or comparative periods. Interest income and expense continues to be recognised using the effective interest rate method for financial instruments measured at historical cost. There has been no restatement of profit or loss for comparative periods.
Other amendments to IFRS effective for 2018, including IFRS 2 Share-based payments and IAS 40 Investment Property have not had a material effect on the Groups financial statements.
2. Basis of consolidation
The consolidated accounts incorporate the financial statements of the company and entities (including certain structured entities) that are controlled by the Group. The Group controls another entity (a subsidiary) when it is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with that entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the other entity; power generally arises from holding a majority of voting rights. On acquisition of a subsidiary, its identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities are included in the consolidated accounts at their fair value. A subsidiary is included in the consolidated financial statements from the date it is controlled by the Group until the date the Group ceases to control it through a sale or a significant change in circumstances.
Changes in the Groups interest in a subsidiary that do not result in the Group ceasing to control that subsidiary are accounted for as equity transactions. All intergroup balances, transactions, income and expenses are eliminated on consolidation. The consolidated accounts are prepared under uniform accounting policies.
3. Revenue recognition
Interest income or expense on financial instruments that are measured at amortised cost and fair value through comprehensive income is determined using the effective interest rate method. The effective interest rate allocates the interest income or interest expense over the expected life of the asset or liability at the rate that exactly discounts all estimated future cash flows to equal the instruments initial carrying amount. Calculation of the effective interest rate takes into account fees payable or receivable that are an integral part of the instruments yield, premiums or discounts on acquisition or issue, early redemption fees and transaction costs. All contractual terms of a financial instrument are considered when estimating future cash flows. Negative effective interest accruing to financial assets is presented in interest payable.
Net interest income in the income statement only relates to financial instruments measured at amortised cost; the interest on debt instruments classified as fair value through OCI; and the effective part of any related accounting hedging instruments. Other interest relating to financial instruments measured at fair value is recognised as part of the movement in fair value.
Fees in respect of services are recognised as the right to consideration accrues through the performance of each distinct service obligation to the customer. The arrangements are generally contractual and the cost of providing the service is incurred as each service is performed. The price is usually fixed and always determinable.
4. Assets held for sale and discontinued operations
A non-current asset (or disposal group) is classified as held for sale if the Group will recover its carrying amount principally through a sale transaction rather than through continuing use. A non-current asset (or disposal group) classified as held for sale is measured at the lower of its carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell.
5. Employee benefits
Short-term employee benefits, such as salaries, paid absences, and other benefits are accounted for on an accruals basis over the period in which the employees provide the related services. Employees may receive variable compensation satisfied by cash, by debt instruments issued by the Group or by RBSG shares. The treatment of share-based compensation is set out in Accounting policy 23. Variable compensation that is settled in cash or debt instruments is charged to profit or loss over the period from the start of the year to which the variable compensation relates to the expected settlement date taking account of forfeiture and clawback criteria.
Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes are recognised in profit or loss when payable.
For defined benefit schemes, the defined benefit obligation is measured on an actuarial basis using the projected unit credit method and discounted at a rate determined by reference to market yields at the end of the reporting period on high quality corporate bonds of equivalent term and currency to the scheme liabilities. Scheme assets are measured at their fair value. The difference between scheme assets and scheme liabilities, the net defined benefit asset or liability, is recognised in the balance sheet. A defined benefit asset is limited to the present value of any economic benefits available to the Group in the form of refunds from the plan or reduced contributions to it.
The charge to profit or loss for pension costs (recorded in operating expenses) comprises:
· the current service cost
· interest, computed at the rate used to discount scheme liabilities, on the net defined benefit liability or asset
· past service cost resulting from a scheme amendment or curtailment
· gains or losses on settlement.
A curtailment occurs when the Group significantly reduces the number of employees covered by a plan. A plan amendment occurs when the Group introduces, or withdraws, a defined benefit plan or changes the benefits payable under an existing defined benefit plan. Past service cost may be either positive (when benefits are introduced or changed so that the present value of the defined benefit obligation increases) or negative (when benefits are withdrawn or changed so that the present value of the defined benefit obligation decreases). A settlement is a transaction that eliminates all further obligation for part or all of the benefits.
Actuarial gains and losses (i.e. gains or and losses on re-measuring the net defined benefit asset or liability) are recognised in other comprehensive income in full in the period in which they arise.
6. Intangible assets and goodwill
Intangible assets acquired by the Group are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses. Amortisation is charged to profit or loss over the assets estimated economic lives using methods that best reflect the pattern of economic benefits and is included in Depreciation and amortisation. These estimated useful economic lives are:
Computer software |
3 to 12 years |
Other acquired intangibles |
5 to 10 years |
Expenditure on internally generated goodwill and brands is written-off as incurred. Direct costs relating to the development of internal-use computer software are capitalised once technical feasibility and economic viability have been established. These costs include payroll, the costs of materials and services, and directly attributable overheads. Capitalisation of costs ceases when the software is capable of operating as intended. During and after development, accumulated costs are reviewed for impairment against the benefits that the software is expected to generate. Costs incurred prior to the establishment of technical feasibility and
Accounting policies
economic viability are expensed as incurred as are all training costs and general overheads. The costs of licences to use computer software that are expected to generate economic benefits beyond one year are also capitalised.
Intangible assets include goodwill arising on the acquisition of subsidiaries and joint ventures. Goodwill on the acquisition of a subsidiary is the excess of the fair value of the consideration transferred, the fair value of any existing interest in the subsidiary and the amount of any non-controlling interest measured either at fair value or at its share of the subsidiarys net assets over net fair value of the subsidiarys identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities.
Goodwill arises on the acquisition of a joint venture when the cost of investment exceeds the Groups share of the net fair value of the joint ventures identifiable assets and liabilities. Goodwill is measured at initial cost less any subsequent impairment losses. Goodwill arising on the acquisition of associates is included within their carrying amounts. The gain or loss on the disposal of a subsidiary, associate or joint venture includes the carrying value of any related goodwill.
7. Impairment of intangible assets and property, plant and equipment
At each balance sheet date, the Group assesses whether there is any indication that its intangible assets, or property, plant and equipment are impaired. If any such indication exists, the Group estimates the recoverable amount of the asset and the impairment loss if any. Goodwill is tested for impairment annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that it might be impaired.
If an asset does not generate cash flows that are independent from those of other assets or groups of assets, the recoverable amount is determined for the cash-generating unit to which the asset belongs. A cash-generating unit is the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets. For the purposes of impairment testing, goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated to each of the Groups cash-generating units or groups of cash-generating units expected to benefit from the combination. The recoverable amount of an asset or cash-generating unit is the higher of its fair value less cost to sell and its value in use. Value in use is the present value of future cash flows from the asset or cash-generating unit discounted at a rate that reflects market interest rates adjusted for risks specific to the asset or cash-generating unit that have not been taken into account in estimating future cash flows. If the recoverable amount of an intangible or tangible asset is less than its carrying value, an impairment loss is recognised immediately in profit or loss and the carrying value of the asset reduced by the amount of the loss. A reversal of an impairment loss on intangible assets (excluding goodwill) or property, plant and equipment can be recognised when an increase in service potential arises provided the increased carrying value is not greater than it would have been had no impairment loss been recognised. Impairment losses on goodwill are not reversed.
8. Investment property
Investment property comprises freehold and leasehold properties that are held to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both. Investment property is not depreciated but is stated at fair value. Fair value is based on current prices for similar properties in the same location and condition. Any gain or loss arising from a change in fair value is recognised in profit or loss. Rental income from investment property is recognised on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease in Other operating income. Lease incentives granted are recognised as an integral part of the total rental income.
9. Foreign currencies
The Groups consolidated financial statements are presented in sterling which is the functional currency of the company.
Transactions in foreign currencies are recorded in the functional currency at the foreign exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into the relevant functional currency at the foreign exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. Foreign exchange differences arising on the settlement of foreign currency transactions and from the translation of monetary assets and liabilities are reported in income from trading activities except for differences arising on cash flow hedges and hedges of net investments in foreign operations (see Accounting policy 21).
Non-monetary items denominated in foreign currencies that are stated at fair value are translated into the relevant functional currency at the foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates the values are determined. Translation differences arising on non-monetary items measured at fair value are recognised in profit or loss except for differences arising on non-monetary financial assets classified as available for sale, for example equity shares, which are recognised in other comprehensive income unless the asset is the hedged item in a fair value hedge.
Assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on acquisition, are translated into sterling at foreign exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. Income and expenses of foreign operations are translated into sterling at average exchange rates unless these do not approximate to the foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange differences arising on the translation of a foreign operation are recognised in other comprehensive income. The amount accumulated in equity is reclassified from equity to profit or loss on disposal of a foreign operation.
10. Leases
As lessor
Contracts with customers to lease assets are classified as finance leases if they transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the asset to the customer; all other contracts with customers to lease assets are classified as operating leases.
Finance lease receivables are included in the balance sheet, within net loans to customers, at the amount of the net investment in the lease being the minimum lease payments and any unguaranteed residual value discounted at the interest rate implicit in the lease. Finance lease income is allocated to accounting periods so as to give a constant periodic rate of return before tax on the net investment and included in Interest receivable. Unguaranteed residual values are subject to regular review; if there is a reduction in their value, income allocation is revised and any reduction in respect of amounts accrued is recognised immediately.
Rental income from operating leases is recognised in income on a straight-line basis over the lease term unless another systematic basis better represents the time pattern of the assets use. Operating lease assets are included within Property, plant and equipment and depreciated over their useful lives. Operating lease rentals receivable are included in Other operating income.
As lessee
The Groups contracts to lease assets are principally operating leases. Operating lease rental expense is included in Premises and equipment costs and recognised as an expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term unless another systematic basis better represents the benefit to the Group.
11. Provisions
The Group recognises a provision for a present obligation resulting from a past event when it is more likely than not that it will be required to transfer economic benefits to settle the obligation and the amount of the obligation can be estimated reliably.
Provision is made for restructuring costs, including the costs of redundancy, when the Group has a constructive obligation to restructure. An obligation exists when the Group has a detailed formal plan for the restructuring and has raised a valid expectation in those affected by starting to implement the plan or by announcing its main features.
If the Group has a contract that is onerous, it recognises the present obligation under the contract as a provision. An onerous contract is one where the unavoidable costs of meeting the Groups contractual obligations exceed the expected economic benefits. When the Group vacates a leasehold property, a provision is recognised for the costs under the lease less any expected economic benefits (such as rental income).
Contingent liabilities are possible obligations arising from past events, whose existence will be confirmed only by uncertain future events, or present obligations arising from past events that are not recognised because either an outflow of economic benefits is not probable or the amount of the obligation cannot be reliably measured. Contingent liabilities are not recognised but information about them is disclosed unless the possibility of any outflow of economic benefits in settlement is remote.
Accounting policies
12. Tax
Income tax expense or income, comprising current tax and deferred tax, is recorded in the income statement except income tax on items recognised outside profit or loss which is credited or charged to other comprehensive income or to equity as appropriate.
Current tax is income tax payable or recoverable in respect of the taxable profit or loss for the year arising in profit or loss, other comprehensive income or equity. Provision is made for current tax at rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.
Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable in respect of temporary differences between the carrying amount of an asset or liability for accounting purposes and its carrying amount for tax purposes. Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences and deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that the asset will be recovered.
Deferred tax is not recognised on temporary differences that arise from initial recognition of an asset or a liability in a transaction (other than a business combination) that at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss. Deferred tax is calculated using tax rates expected to apply in the periods when the assets will be realised or the liabilities settled, based on tax rates and laws enacted, or substantively enacted, at the balance sheet date.
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset where the Group has a legally enforceable right to offset and where they relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority either on an individual Group company or on Group companies in the same tax group that intend, in future periods, to settle current tax liabilities and assets on a net basis or on a gross basis simultaneously.
13. Financial instruments
On initial recognition, financial instruments are measured at fair value. Subsequently they are classified as follows: designated at fair value through profit or loss; amortised cost, the default class for liabilities; fair value through profit or loss, the default class for assets; or financial assets may be designated as at fair value through other comprehensive income. Regular way purchases of financial assets classified as amortised cost are recognised on the settlement date; all other regular way transactions in financial assets are recognised on the trade date.
Designated as at fair value through profit or loss a financial instrument may be designated as at fair value through profit or loss only if such designation (a) eliminates or significantly reduces a measurement or recognition inconsistency; or (b) applies to a group of financial assets, financial liabilities or both, that the Group manages and evaluates on a fair value basis; or (c) relates to a financial liability that contains an embedded derivative which is not evidently closely related to the host contract. Financial assets that the Group designates on initial recognition as being at fair value through profit or loss are recognised at fair value, with transaction costs being recognised in profit or loss, and are subsequently measured at fair value. Gains and losses are recognised in profit or loss as they arise.
Amortised cost assets have to meet both the following criteria:
(a) the asset is held within a business model whose objective is solely to hold assets to collect contractual cash flows; and
(b) the contractual terms of the financial asset are solely payments of principal and interest on the outstanding balance.
Amortised cost liabilities all liabilities that are not subsequently measured at fair value are measured at amortised cost.
Assets designated at fair value through other comprehensive income An equity instrument may be designated irrevocably at fair value through other comprehensive income. Other assets have to meet both the following criteria:
(a) the asset is held within a business model whose objective is both to hold assets to collect contractual cash flows and selling financial assets; and
(b) the contractual terms of the financial asset are solely payments of principal and interest on the outstanding balance.
Fair value through profit or loss - a financial liability is measured at fair value if it arises from: a financial guarantee contract; a commitment to lend at below market rates; an obligation arising from the failed sale of an asset; or a contingent consideration for a business acquisition. Fair value through profit or loss is the default classification for a financial asset.
Reclassifications financial liabilities cannot be reclassified. Financial assets are only reclassified where there has been a change in the business model.
Fair value the fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.
Business model assessment business models are assessed at portfolio level, being the level at which they are managed. This is expected to result in the most consistent classification of assets because it aligns with the stated objectives of the portfolio, its risk management, managers remuneration and the ability to monitor sales of assets from a portfolio. The criteria for classifying cash flows as solely principal and interest are assessed against the contractual terms of a facility, with attention to leverage features; prepayment and extension terms; and triggers that might reset the effective rate of interest.
14. Impairments
At each balance sheet date each financial asset or portfolio of loans measured at amortised cost or at fair value through other comprehensive income, issued financial guarantee and loan commitment is assessed for impairment. Loss allowances are forward-looking, based on 12 month expected credit losses where there has not been a significant increase in credit risk rating, otherwise allowances are based on lifetime expected losses. Loss allowances for lease receivables are always made on a lifetime basis.
Expected credit losses are a probability-weighted estimate of credit losses. The probability is determined by the risk of default which is applied to the cash flow estimates. In the absence of a change in credit rating, allowances are recognised when there is reduction in the net present value of expected cash flows. On a significant increase in credit risk, allowances are recognised without a change in the expected cash flows, although typically expected cash flows do also change; and expected credit losses are rebased from 12 month to lifetime expectations.
On restructuring a financial asset without causing derecognition of the original asset the revised cash flows are used in re-estimating the credit loss. Where restructuring causes derecognition of the original financial asset, the fair value of the replacement asset is used as the closing cash flow of the original asset.
Where, in the course of the orderly realisation of a loan, it is exchanged for equity shares or property, the exchange is accounted for as the sale of the loan and the acquisition of equity securities or investment property. Where the Groups interest in equity shares following the exchange is such that the Group controls an entity, that entity is consolidated.
The costs of loss allowances on assets held at amortised cost are presented as impairments in the income statement. Allowances in respect financial guarantees and loan commitments are presented in administrative expenses.
Impaired loans and receivables are written off, when the Group concludes that there is no longer any realistic prospect of recovery of part or all of the loan. For loans that are individually assessed for impairment, the timing of write off is determined on a case-by-case basis. Such loans are reviewed regularly and write off will be prompted by bankruptcy, insolvency, renegotiation and similar events.
The typical time frames from initial impairment to write off for the Groups collectively-assessed portfolios are:
· Retail mortgages: write off usually occurs within five years, or when an account is closed if earlier.
· Credit cards: the irrecoverable amount is written off after 12 months; three years later any remaining amounts outstanding are written off. Overdrafts and other unsecured loans: write off occurs within six years.
· Overdrafts and other unsecured loans: write off occurs within six years
· Commercial loans: write offs are determined in the light of individual circumstances; the period does not exceed five years.
· Business loans are generally written off within five years.
15. Financial guarantee contracts
Under a financial guarantee contract, the Group, in return for a fee, undertakes to meet a customers obligations under the terms of a debt instrument if the customer fails to do so.
Accounting policies
A financial guarantee is recognised as a liability; initially at fair value and, if not designated as at fair value through profit or loss, subsequently at the higher of its initial value less cumulative amortisation and any provision under the contract measured in accordance with Accounting policy 13. Amortisation is calculated so as to recognise fees receivable in profit or loss over the period of the guarantee.
16. Loan commitments
Provision is made for expected credit loss on loan commitments, other than those classified as held-for-trading. Syndicated loan commitments in excess of the level of lending under the commitment approved for retention by the Group are classified as held-for-trading and measured at fair value.
17. Derecognition
A financial asset is derecognised when the contractual right to receive cash flows from the asset has expired or when it has been transferred and the transfer qualifies for derecognition. A transfer requires that the Group either (a) transfers the contractual rights to receive the assets cash flows; or (b) retains the right to the assets cash flows but assumes a contractual obligation to pay those cash flows to a third party. After a transfer, the Group assesses the extent to which it has retained the risks and rewards of ownership of the transferred asset. The asset remains on the balance sheet if substantially all the risks and rewards have been retained. It is derecognised if substantially all the risks and rewards have been transferred.
If substantially all the risks and rewards have been neither retained nor transferred, the Group assesses whether or not it has retained control of the asset. If the Group has retained control of the asset, it continues to recognise the asset to the extent of its continuing involvement; if the Group has not retained control of the asset, it is derecognised.
A financial liability is removed from the balance sheet when the obligation is discharged, or is cancelled, or expires. On the redemption or settlement of debt securities (including subordinated liabilities) issued by the Group, the Group derecognises the debt instrument and records a gain or loss being the difference between the debts carrying amount and the cost of redemption or settlement. The same treatment applies where the debt is exchanged for a new debt issue that has terms substantially different from those of the existing debt. The assessment of whether the terms of the new debt instrument are substantially different takes into account qualitative and quantitative characteristics including a comparison of the present value of the cash flows under the new terms with the present value of the remaining cash flows of the original debt issue discounted at the effective interest rate of the original debt issue.
18. Sale and repurchase transactions
Securities subject to a sale and repurchase agreement under which substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are retained by the Group continue to be shown on the balance sheet and the sale proceeds recorded as a financial liability. Securities acquired in a reverse sale and repurchase transaction under which the Group is not exposed to substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are not recognised on the balance sheet and the consideration paid is recorded as a financial asset.
Securities borrowing and lending transactions are usually secured by cash or securities advanced by the borrower. Borrowed securities are not recognised on the balance sheet or lent securities derecognised. Cash collateral given or received is treated as a loan or deposit; collateral in the form of securities is not recognised. However, where securities borrowed are transferred to third parties, a liability for the obligation to return the securities to the stock lending counterparty is recorded.
19. Netting
Financial assets and financial liabilities are offset and the net amount presented in the balance sheet when, and only when, the Group currently has a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and it intends either to settle on a net basis or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. The Group is party to a number of arrangements, including master netting agreements, that give it the right to offset financial assets and financial liabilities, but where it does not intend to settle the amounts net or simultaneously, the assets and liabilities concerned are presented gross.
20. Capital instruments
The Group classifies a financial instrument that it issues as a liability if it is a contractual obligation to deliver cash or another financial asset, or to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities on potentially unfavourable terms and as equity if it evidences a residual interest in the assets of the Group after the deduction of liabilities. The components of a compound financial instrument issued by the Group are classified and accounted for separately as financial assets, financial liabilities or equity as appropriate. Incremental costs and related tax that are directly attributable to an equity transaction are deducted from equity.
The consideration for any ordinary shares of the company purchased by the Group (treasury shares) is deducted from equity. On the cancellation of treasury shares their nominal value is removed from equity and any excess of consideration over nominal value is treated in accordance with the capital maintenance provisions of the Companies Act. On the sale or reissue of treasury shares the consideration received and related tax are credited to equity, net of any directly attributable incremental costs.
21. Derivatives and hedging
In accordance with IAS 39 hedge relationships, derivative financial instruments are initially recognised, and subsequently measured, at fair value.
A derivative embedded in a contract is accounted for as a stand-alone derivative if its economic characteristics are not closely related to the economic characteristics of the host contract; unless the host is a financial asset or the entire contract is measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in profit or loss.
Gains and losses arising from changes in the fair value of derivatives that are not the hedging instrument in a qualifying hedge are recognised as they arise in profit or loss. Gains and losses are recorded in Income from ordinary activities except for gains and losses on those derivatives that are managed together with financial instruments designated at fair value; these gains and losses are included in Other operating income. The Group enters into three types of hedge relationship: hedges of changes in the fair value of a recognised asset or liability or unrecognised firm commitment (fair value hedges); hedges of the variability in cash flows from a recognised asset or liability or a highly probable forecast transaction (cash flow hedges); and hedges of the net investment in a foreign operation.
Hedge relationships are formally designated and documented at inception. The documentation identifies the hedged item and the hedging instrument and details the risk that is being hedged and the way in which effectiveness will be assessed at inception and during the period of the hedge. If the hedge is not highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows attributable to the hedged risk, consistent with the documented risk management strategy, hedge accounting is discontinued. Hedge accounting is also discontinued if the Group revokes the designation of a hedge relationship.
Fair value hedge - in a fair value hedge, the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in profit or loss. The gain or loss on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk is recognised in profit or loss and, where the hedged item is measured at amortised cost, adjusts the carrying amount of the hedged item. Hedge accounting is discontinued if the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting; or if the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised; or if hedge designation is revoked. If the hedged item is one for which the effective interest rate method is used, any cumulative adjustment is amortised to profit or loss over the life of the hedged item using a recalculated effective interest rate.
Cash flow hedge - in a cash flow hedge, the effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in other comprehensive income and the ineffective portion in profit or loss. When the forecast transaction results in the recognition of a financial asset or financial liability, the cumulative gain or loss is reclassified from equity to profit or loss in the same periods in which the hedged forecast cash flows affect profit or loss. Otherwise the cumulative gain or loss is removed from equity and recognised in profit or loss at the same time as the hedged transaction. Hedge accounting is discontinued if the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting; if the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised; if the forecast transaction is no
Accounting policies
longer expected to occur; or if hedge designation is revoked. On the discontinuance of hedge accounting (except where a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur), the cumulative unrealised gain or loss is reclassified from equity to profit or loss when the hedged cash flows occur or, if the forecast transaction results in the recognition of a financial asset or financial liability, when the hedged forecast cash flows affect profit or loss. Where a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative unrealised gain or loss is reclassified from equity to profit or loss immediately.
Hedge of net investment in a foreign operation - in the hedge of a net investment in a foreign operation, the portion of foreign exchange differences arising on the hedging instrument determined to be an effective hedge is recognised in other comprehensive income. Any ineffective portion is recognised in profit or loss. Non-derivative financial liabilities as well as derivatives may be the hedging instrument in a net investment hedge. On disposal or partial disposal of a foreign operation, the amount accumulated in equity is reclassified from equity to profit or loss.
22. Associates and joint ventures
An associate is an entity over which the Group has significant influence. A joint venture is one which it controls jointly with other parties. Investments in associates and interests in joint ventures are recognised using the equity method. They are stated initially at cost, including attributable goodwill, and subsequently adjusted for post-acquisition changes in the Groups share of net assets.
23. Share-based compensation
The Group operates a number of share-based compensation schemes under which it awards RBSG shares and share options to its employees. Such awards are generally subject to vesting conditions: conditions that vary the amount of cash or shares to which an employee is entitled. Vesting conditions include service conditions (requiring the employee to complete a specified period of service) and performance conditions (requiring the employee to complete a specified period of service and specified performance targets to be met). Other conditions to which an award is subject are non-vesting conditions (such as a requirement to save throughout the vesting period).
The cost of employee services received in exchange for an award of shares or share options is measured by reference to the fair value of the shares or share options on the date the award is and takes into account non-vesting conditions and market performance conditions (conditions related to the market price of RBSG shares): an award is treated as vesting irrespective of whether any market performance condition or non-vesting condition is met. The fair value of options is estimated using valuation techniques which incorporate exercise price, term, risk-free interest rates, the current share price and its expected volatility. The cost is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period (the period during which all the specified vesting conditions must be satisfied) with a corresponding increase in equity in an equity-settled award, or a corresponding liability in a cash-settled award. The cost is adjusted for vesting conditions (other than market performance conditions) so as to reflect the number of shares or share options that actually vest.
If an award is modified, the original cost continues to be recognised as if there had been no modification. Where modification increases the fair value of the award, this increase is recognised as an expense over the modified vesting period. A new award of shares or share options is treated as the modification of a cancelled award if, on the date the new award is, the Group identifies them as replacing the cancelled award. The cancellation of an award through failure to meet non-vesting conditions triggers an immediate expense for any unrecognised element of the cost of an award.
24. Cash and cash equivalents
In the cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents comprises cash and deposits with banks with an original maturity of less than three months together with short-term highly liquid investments that are readily convertible to known amounts of cash and subject to insignificant risk of change in value.
Critical accounting policies and key sources of estimation uncertainty
The reported results of the Group are sensitive to the accounting policies, assumptions and estimates that underlie the preparation of its financial statements. UK company law and IFRS require the directors, in preparing the Groups financial statements, to select suitable accounting policies, apply them consistently and make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent. In the absence of an applicable standard or interpretation, IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, requires management to develop and apply an accounting policy that results in relevant and reliable information in the light of the requirements and guidance in IFRS dealing with similar and related issues and the IASBs Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting. The judgements and assumptions involved in the Groups accounting policies that are considered by the Board to be the most important to the portrayal of its financial condition are discussed below. The use of estimates, assumptions or models that differ from those adopted by the Group would affect its reported results
Critical accounting policy |
|
Note |
Deferred tax |
|
204 |
Fair value: financial instruments |
|
209 |
Loan impairment provisions |
|
221 |
Goodwill |
|
223 |
Provisions for liabilities and charges |
|
226 |
Accounting Developments
International Financial Reporting Standards
A number of IFRSs and amendments to IFRS were in issue at 31 December 2018 that would affect the Group from 1 January 2019 or later
Effective 1 January 2019
IFRS 16 Leases was issued in January 2016 to replace IAS 17 Leases. The Group will apply the standard with effect from 1 January 2019. Lessees will capitalise operating leases through the recognition of assets representing the contractual rights of use. The present value of contractual payments will be recognised as lease liabilities.
The Group has new models and processes to implement IFRS 16. The most significant impact from initially applying IFRS 16 will be to recognise rights of use assets in respect of branches and office properties leased by the Group under contracts classified as operating leases under IAS 17. The present value of other contracts is immaterial. The Group will apply IFRS 16 on a modified retrospective basis without restating prior years and electing for the following exemptions on transition at 1 January 2019. The Group will
· apply IFRS 16 to contracts previously identified as leases by IAS 17
· use the incremental borrowing rate as the discount rate
· not apply IFRS 16 to operating leases with a remaining lease term of less than 12 months or low value leases (non property leases)
· rely on the assessment of whether the lease contract is onerous under IAS 37 at 31 December 2018 as an alternative to performing an impairment review of the right of use assets created on 1 January 2019 Where this is the case the carrying amount of the assets will be adjusted by the onerous lease provision.
· exclude initial direct costs from the measurement of the right of use asset
The opening balance sheet at 1 January 2019 will be adjusted to create a right of use asset of approximately £1.3 billion. A lease liability will also be recognised of £1.9 billion. Retained earnings will decrease by £0.2 billion after tax. This will have an estimated impact of 21 basis points on the CET 1 ratio. Application of IFRS 16 by the Group is not expected to have a significant impact on lessor accounting or for finance lease accounting by lessees.
Effective after 2019
IFRS 17 Insurance contracts was issued in May 2017 to replace IFRS 4 and to establish a comprehensive standard for inceptors of insurance policies. The effective date is 1 January 2021, subject to IASBs approval of a deferral until 1 January 2022.
In February 2018 the IASB amended IAS 19 Employee Benefits to clarify the need to update assumptions whenever there is a plan amendment, curtailment or settlement.
The Group is assessing the effect of adopting these standards on its financial statements.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
1 Net interest income |
|
|
|
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Loans to banks - amortised cost |
522 |
277 |
246 |
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
9,993 |
10,409 |
10,706 |
Other financial assets |
534 |
348 |
306 |
Interest receivable (1) |
11,049 |
11,034 |
11,258 |
|
|
|
|
Balances with banks |
250 |
175 |
97 |
Customer deposits: demand |
223 |
99 |
433 |
Customer deposits: savings |
510 |
445 |
432 |
Customer deposits: other time |
116 |
179 |
190 |
Other financial liabilities |
791 |
554 |
557 |
Subordinated liabilities |
461 |
572 |
845 |
Internal funding of trading businesses |
42 |
23 |
(4) |
Interest payable (1) |
2,393 |
2,047 |
2,550 |
|
|
|
|
Net interest income |
8,656 |
8,987 |
8,708 |
Note:
(1) Negative interest on loans is classed as interest payable and on customer deposits is classed as interest receivable.
2 Non-interest income |
|
|
|
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Net fees and commissions |
2,357 |
2,455 |
2,535 |
|
|
|
|
Loss on redemption of own debt |
|
(7) |
(126) |
|
|
|
|
Income from trading activities |
|
|
|
Foreign exchange |
643 |
525 |
989 |
Interest rate |
695 |
(50) |
(480) |
Credit |
45 |
197 |
336 |
Changes in fair value of own debt and derivative liabilities attributable to own credit |
|
|
|
- debt securities in issue |
72 |
12 |
87 |
- derivative liabilities |
20 |
(81) |
67 |
Equities, commodities and other |
32 |
31 |
(25) |
|
1,507 |
634 |
974 |
Other operating income |
|
|
|
Operating lease and other rental income |
256 |
276 |
287 |
Changes in the fair value of financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss |
(26) |
60 |
(13) |
Changes in the fair value of own debt designated as at fair value through profit or loss |
|
|
|
attributable to own credit risk |
|
|
|
- debt securities in issue |
|
|
41 |
- subordinated liabilities |
|
|
(15) |
Changes in fair value of other financial assets fair value through profit or loss |
18 |
|
|
Hedge ineffectiveness |
(65) |
39 |
|
Profit/(loss) on disposal of amortised cost assets |
44 |
(35) |
(277) |
Profit on disposal of fair value through other comprehensive income assets |
34 |
226 |
71 |
Profit on sale of property, plant and equipment |
50 |
75 |
18 |
Share of profits of associated entities |
83 |
104 |
59 |
(Loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries and associates |
(72) |
245 |
273 |
Other income (1) |
560 |
74 |
55 |
|
882 |
1,064 |
499 |
|
|
|
|
Non-interest income |
4,746 |
4,146 |
3,882 |
Note:
(1) Includes income from activities other than banking. 2018 includes insurance recoveries of £357 million.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
3 Operating expenses |
|
|
|
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Salaries |
3,002 |
3,180 |
3,771 |
Variable compensation |
225 |
298 |
281 |
Social security costs |
307 |
318 |
388 |
Pension costs |
401 |
467 |
357 |
Other |
187 |
413 |
327 |
Staff costs |
4,122 |
4,676 |
5,124 |
|
|
|
|
Premises and equipment |
1,383 |
1,565 |
1,388 |
UK bank levy |
179 |
215 |
190 |
Depreciation and amortisation |
731 |
808 |
778 |
Other administrative expenses (1) |
3,193 |
3,108 |
8,555 |
Administrative expenses |
5,486 |
5,696 |
10,911 |
Write down of goodwill and other intangible assets |
37 |
29 |
159 |
|
9,645 |
10,401 |
16,194 |
Note:
(1) Includes litigation and conduct costs, net of amounts recovered. Refer to Notes 20 and 27 for further details.
The average number of persons employed, rounded to the nearest hundred, during the year, excluding temporary staff, was 67,600 (2017 - 73,400; 2016 - 82,400). The average number of temporary employees during 2018 was 4,000 (2017 - 5,000; 2016 - 6,700). The number of persons employed at 31 December, excluding temporary staff, by reportable segment, was as follows:
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
UK Personal & Business Banking |
25,800 |
21,900 |
25,100 |
Ulster Bank RoI |
2,900 |
2,600 |
3,000 |
Personal & Business Banking |
28,700 |
24,500 |
28,100 |
Commercial Banking |
7,800 |
4,500 |
5,600 |
Private Banking |
1,900 |
1,500 |
1,700 |
Commercial & Private Banking |
9,700 |
6,000 |
7,300 |
RBS International |
1,600 |
1,600 |
800 |
NatWest Markets |
4,500 |
5,300 |
1,500 |
Central items & other |
20,900 |
32,300 |
39,300 |
Total |
65,400 |
69,700 |
77,000 |
|
|
|
|
UK |
46,600 |
51,200 |
57,300 |
USA |
500 |
500 |
700 |
Europe |
4,100 |
4,200 |
5,200 |
Rest of the World |
14,200 |
13,800 |
13,800 |
Total |
65,400 |
69,700 |
77,000 |
During 2018 the reporting lines of central and support staff directly supporting a reportable Group segment were realigned to that segment.
Share-based payments
As described in the Remuneration report, the Group grants share-based awards to employees principally on the following bases:
Award plan |
Eligible employees |
Nature of award |
Vesting conditions (1) |
Settlement |
Sharesave |
UK, Republic of Ireland, Channel Islands, Gibraltar and Isle of Man |
Option to buy shares under employee savings plan |
Continuing employment or leavers in certain circumstances |
2019 to 2023 |
Deferred performance awards |
All |
Awards of ordinary shares |
Continuing employment or leavers in certain circumstances |
2019 to 2025 |
Long-term incentives (2) |
Senior employees |
Awards of conditional shares or share options |
Continuing employment or leavers in certain circumstances and/or achievement of performance conditions |
2019 to 2025 |
Notes:
(1) All awards have vesting conditions and therefore some may not vest.
(2) Long-term incentives include the Executive Share Option Plan, the Long-Term Incentive Plan and the Employee Share Plan.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
3 Operating expenses continued
The fair value of options granted in 2018 was determined using a pricing model that included: expected volatility of shares determined at the grant date based on historical volatility over a period of up to five years; expected option lives that equal the vesting period; no dividends on equity shares; and risk-free interest rates determined from UK gilts with terms matching the expected lives of the options.
The strike price of options and the fair value on granting awards of fully paid shares is the average market price over the five trading days (three trading days for Sharesave) preceding grant date.
Sharesave |
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 | |||
|
Average |
Shares |
|
Average |
Shares |
|
Average |
Shares |
|
exercise price |
under option |
|
exercise price |
under option |
|
exercise price |
under option |
|
£ |
(million) |
|
£ |
(million) |
|
£ |
(million) |
At 1 January |
2.38 |
60 |
|
2.46 |
56 |
|
2.87 |
56 |
Granted |
1.89 |
28 |
|
2.27 |
21 |
|
1.68 |
17 |
Exercised |
2.44 |
(4) |
|
2.46 |
(3) |
|
2.37 |
|
Cancelled |
2.46 |
(9) |
|
2.49 |
(14) |
|
3.02 |
(17) |
At 31 December |
2.18 |
75 |
|
2.38 |
60 |
|
2.46 |
56 |
Options are exercisable within six months of vesting; 4.9 million options were exercisable at 31 December 2018 (2017 3.7 million; 2016 8.1 million). The weighted average share price at the date of exercise of options was £2.13 (2017 - £2.77; 2016 - £1.78). At 31 December 2018, exercise prices ranged from £1.68 to £3.43 (2017 - £1.68 to £4.34; 2016 - £1.68 to £4.34) and the remaining average contractual life was 2.9 years (2017 - 2.9 years; 2016 2.9 years). The fair value of options granted in 2018 was £21 million (2017 - £21 million; 2016 - £18 million).
Deferred performance awards |
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 | |||
|
Value at |
Shares |
|
Value at |
Shares |
|
Value at |
Shares |
|
grant |
awarded |
|
grant |
awarded |
|
grant |
awarded |
|
£m |
(million) |
|
£m |
(million) |
|
£m |
(million) |
At 1 January |
264 |
101 |
|
296 |
102 |
|
276 |
80 |
Granted |
156 |
59 |
|
152 |
63 |
|
170 |
75 |
Forfeited |
(21) |
(8) |
|
(11) |
(4) |
|
(19) |
(7) |
Vested |
(166) |
(60) |
|
(173) |
(60) |
|
(131) |
(46) |
At 31 December |
233 |
92 |
|
264 |
101 |
|
296 |
102 |
The awards granted in 2018 vest in equal tranches on their anniversaries, predominantly over three years.
Long-term incentives |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 | ||||||
|
Value |
Shares |
Options |
|
Value at |
Shares |
Options |
|
Value at |
Shares |
Options |
|
at grant |
awarded |
over shares |
|
grant |
awarded |
over shares |
|
grant |
awarded |
over shares |
|
£m |
(million) |
(million) |
|
£m |
(million) |
(million) |
|
£m |
(million) |
(million) |
At 1 January |
102 |
37 |
2 |
|
119 |
38 |
4 |
|
153 |
44 |
5 |
Granted |
12 |
5 |
|
|
35 |
15 |
|
|
37 |
16 |
|
Vested/exercised |
(5) |
(2) |
|
|
(22) |
(7) |
|
|
(39) |
(12) |
|
Lapsed |
(24) |
(8) |
|
|
(30) |
(9) |
(2) |
|
(32) |
(10) |
(1) |
At 31 December |
85 |
32 |
2 |
|
102 |
37 |
2 |
|
119 |
38 |
4 |
The market value of awards vested/exercised in 2018 was £5 million (2017 - £22 million; 2016 - £40 million). There are vested options of 2 million shares exercisable up to 2020 (2017 - 2 million; 2016 - 4 million).
Notes on the consolidated accounts
3 Operating expenses continued
Variable compensation awards |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following tables analyse the Groups variable compensation awards for 2018. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2018 |
2017 |
Change |
|
£m |
£m |
% |
Non-deferred cash awards (1) |
37 |
51 |
(27) |
Total non-deferred variable compensation |
37 |
51 |
(27) |
Deferred bond awards |
191 |
134 |
43 |
Deferred share awards |
107 |
157 |
(32) |
Total deferred variable compensation |
298 |
291 |
2 |
Total variable compensation (2) |
335 |
342 |
(2) |
|
|
|
|
Variable compensation as a % of operating profit before tax (3) |
9% |
13% |
|
Proportion of variable compensation that is deferred |
89% |
85% |
|
of which |
|
|
|
- deferred bond awards |
64% |
46% |
|
- deferred share awards |
36% |
54% |
|
Reconciliation of variable compensation awards to income statement charge |
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Variable compensation awarded |
335 |
342 |
343 |
Less: deferral of charge for amounts awarded for current year |
(130) |
(133) |
(103) |
Income statement charge for amounts awarded in current year |
205 |
209 |
240 |
|
|
|
|
Add: current year charge for amounts deferred from prior years |
86 |
96 |
147 |
Less: forfeiture of amounts deferred from prior years |
(66) |
(7) |
(106) |
Income statement charge for amounts deferred from prior years |
20 |
89 |
41 |
|
|
|
|
Income statement charge for variable compensation (2) |
225 |
298 |
281 |
|
Actual |
|
Expected | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Year in which income statement charge is expected to be taken for |
|
|
|
|
|
2020 |
2016 |
2017 |
2018 |
|
2019 |
and beyond | |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m | |
Variable compensation deferred from 2016 and earlier |
147 |
96 |
5 |
|
9 |
4 |
Variable compensation deferred from 2017 |
|
|
81 |
|
22 |
15 |
Less: forfeiture of amounts deferred from prior years |
(106) |
(7) |
(66) |
|
|
|
Variable compensation for 2018 deferred |
|
|
|
|
89 |
41 |
|
41 |
89 |
20 |
|
120 |
60 |
Notes:
(1) Cash awards are limited to £2,000 for all employees.
(2) Excludes other performance related compensation.
(3) Operating profit before tax and variable compensation expense. This was previously measured against adjusted operating profit before variable compensation expense (2017: 7%).
Notes on the consolidated accounts
4 Segmental analysis
Reportable segments
The directors manage RBS primarily by class of business and present the segmental analysis on that basis. This includes the review of net interest income for each class of business. Interest receivable and payable for all reportable segments is therefore presented net. Segments charge market prices for services rendered between each other; funding charges between segments are determined by RBS Treasury, having regard to commercial demands. The segment performance measure is operating profit/(loss).
Reportable operating segments
The reportable operating segments are as follows:
Personal & Business Banking (PBB) comprises two reportable segments: UK Personal & Business Banking (UK PBB) and Ulster Bank RoI. UK PBB serves individuals and mass affluent customers in the UK, together with small businesses (generally up to £2 million turnover). UK PBB includes Ulster Bank customers in Northern Ireland. Ulster Bank RoI serves individuals and businesses in the Republic of Ireland (RoI).
Commercial & Private Banking (CPB) comprises two reportable segments: Commercial Banking and Private Banking. Commercial Banking serves commercial and corporate customers in the UK. Private Banking serves UK high net worth individuals and their business interests.
RBS International (RBSI) serves retail, commercial, corporate and financial institution customers in Jersey, Guernsey, Isle of Man and Gibraltar and financial institution customers in Luxembourg and London.
NatWest Markets helps global financial institutions and corporates manage their financial risks and achieve their short and long-term financial goals while navigating changing markets and regulation. NatWest Markets does this by providing global market access, financing, risk management and trading solutions from trading hubs in London, Singapore and Stamford with sales offices across key locations in the UK, EU, US and Asia.
Central items & other includes corporate functions, such as RBS Treasury, finance, risk management, compliance, legal, communications and human resources. Central functions manages RBS capital resources and RBS-wide regulatory projects and provides services to the reportable segments. Balances in relation to legacy litigation issues and the international private banking business are included in Central items in the relevant periods.
Allocation of central balance sheet items
RBS allocates all central costs relating to Services and Functions to the business using appropriate drivers, these are reported as indirect costs in the segmental income statements. Assets (and risk-weighted assets) held centrally, mainly relating to RBS Treasury, are allocated to the business using appropriate drivers.
|
Net |
Net fees |
Other |
|
|
Depreciation |
Impairment |
|
|
interest |
and |
non-interest |
Total |
Operating |
and |
(losses)/ |
Operating |
|
income |
commissions |
income |
income |
expenses |
amortisation |
releases |
profit/(loss) |
2018 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
UK Personal & Business Banking |
5,098 |
1,078 |
106 |
6,282 |
(3,482) |
|
(342) |
2,458 |
Ulster Bank RoI |
444 |
91 |
75 |
610 |
(583) |
|
(15) |
12 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Personal & Business Banking |
5,542 |
1,169 |
181 |
6,892 |
(4,065) |
|
(357) |
2,470 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commercial Banking |
2,040 |
897 |
437 |
3,374 |
(1,747) |
(125) |
(144) |
1,358 |
Private Banking |
518 |
228 |
29 |
775 |
(476) |
(2) |
6 |
303 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commercial & Private Banking |
2,558 |
1,125 |
466 |
4,149 |
(2,223) |
(127) |
(138) |
1,661 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RBS International |
466 |
101 |
27 |
594 |
(254) |
(6) |
2 |
336 |
NatWest Markets |
112 |
(33) |
1,363 |
1,442 |
(1,589) |
(15) |
92 |
(70) |
Central items & other |
(22) |
(5) |
352 |
325 |
(783) |
(583) |
3 |
(1,038) |
Total |
8,656 |
2,357 |
2,389 |
13,402 |
(8,914) |
(731) |
(398) |
3,359 |
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK Personal & Business Banking |
5,130 |
1,099 |
248 |
6,477 |
(3,829) |
|
(235) |
2,413 |
Ulster Bank RoI |
421 |
94 |
89 |
604 |
(676) |
|
(60) |
(132) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Personal & Business Banking |
5,551 |
1,193 |
337 |
7,081 |
(4,505) |
|
(295) |
2,281 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commercial Banking |
2,286 |
1,030 |
168 |
3,484 |
(1,870) |
(144) |
(362) |
1,108 |
Private Banking |
464 |
179 |
35 |
678 |
(529) |
|
(6) |
143 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commercial & Private Banking |
2,750 |
1,209 |
203 |
4,162 |
(2,399) |
(144) |
(368) |
1,251 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RBS International |
325 |
42 |
22 |
389 |
(217) |
(2) |
(3) |
167 |
NatWest Markets |
203 |
24 |
823 |
1,050 |
(2,250) |
49 |
174 |
(977) |
Central items & other |
158 |
(13) |
306 |
451 |
(222) |
(711) |
(1) |
(483) |
Total |
8,987 |
2,455 |
1,691 |
13,133 |
(9,593) |
(808) |
(493) |
2,239 |
2016 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK Personal & Business Banking |
4,945 |
1,147 |
35 |
6,127 |
(4,278) |
2 |
(125) |
1,726 |
Ulster Bank RoI |
409 |
82 |
85 |
576 |
(669) |
|
113 |
20 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Personal & Business Banking |
5,354 |
1,229 |
120 |
6,703 |
(4,947) |
2 |
(12) |
1,746 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commercial Banking |
2,143 |
1,031 |
241 |
3,415 |
(2,324) |
(143) |
(206) |
742 |
Private Banking |
449 |
181 |
27 |
657 |
(549) |
|
3 |
111 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commercial & Private Banking |
2,592 |
1,212 |
268 |
4,072 |
(2,873) |
(143) |
(203) |
853 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RBS International |
303 |
50 |
21 |
374 |
(174) |
|
(10) |
190 |
NatWest Markets |
343 |
55 |
814 |
1,212 |
(2,810) |
(14) |
(253) |
(1,865) |
Central items & other |
116 |
(11) |
124 |
229 |
(4,612) |
(623) |
|
(5,006) |
Total |
8,708 |
2,535 |
1,347 |
12,590 |
(15,416) |
(778) |
(478) |
(4,082) |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
4 Segmental analysis continued
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 | ||||||
Total revenue |
|
Inter |
|
|
|
Inter |
|
|
|
Inter |
|
External |
segment |
Total |
|
External |
segment |
Total |
|
External |
segment |
Total | |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m | |
UK Personal & Business Banking |
7,153 |
68 |
7,221 |
|
7,348 |
44 |
7,392 |
|
7,197 |
52 |
7,249 |
Ulster Bank RoI |
668 |
|
668 |
|
676 |
(4) |
672 |
|
660 |
1 |
661 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Personal & Business Banking |
7,821 |
68 |
7,889 |
|
8,024 |
40 |
8,064 |
|
7,857 |
53 |
7,910 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commercial Banking |
3,611 |
84 |
3,695 |
|
3,590 |
74 |
3,664 |
|
3,638 |
68 |
3,706 |
Private Banking |
681 |
195 |
876 |
|
585 |
143 |
728 |
|
567 |
172 |
739 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commercial & Private Banking |
4,292 |
279 |
4,571 |
|
4,175 |
217 |
4,392 |
|
4,205 |
240 |
4,445 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RBS International |
506 |
148 |
654 |
|
309 |
119 |
428 |
|
313 |
156 |
469 |
NatWest Markets |
1,882 |
916 |
2,798 |
|
1,408 |
809 |
2,217 |
|
1,708 |
1,539 |
3,247 |
Central items & other |
2,155 |
(1,411) |
744 |
|
2,147 |
(1,185) |
962 |
|
1,862 |
(1,988) |
(126) |
Total |
16,656 |
|
16,656 |
|
16,063 |
|
16,063 |
|
15,945 |
|
15,945 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total income |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK Personal & Business Banking |
6,260 |
22 |
6,282 |
|
6,465 |
12 |
6,477 |
|
6,115 |
12 |
6,127 |
Ulster Bank RoI |
613 |
(3) |
610 |
|
609 |
(5) |
604 |
|
584 |
(8) |
576 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Personal & Business Banking |
6,873 |
19 |
6,892 |
|
7,074 |
7 |
7,081 |
|
6,699 |
4 |
6,703 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commercial Banking |
3,840 |
(466) |
3,374 |
|
3,851 |
(367) |
3,484 |
|
3,787 |
(372) |
3,415 |
Private Banking |
655 |
120 |
775 |
|
594 |
84 |
678 |
|
554 |
103 |
657 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commercial & Private Banking |
4,495 |
(346) |
4,149 |
|
4,445 |
(283) |
4,162 |
|
4,341 |
(269) |
4,072 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RBS International |
469 |
125 |
594 |
|
281 |
108 |
389 |
|
239 |
135 |
374 |
NatWest Markets |
1,510 |
(68) |
1,442 |
|
1,077 |
(27) |
1,050 |
|
1,296 |
(84) |
1,212 |
Central items & other |
55 |
270 |
325 |
|
256 |
195 |
451 |
|
15 |
214 |
229 |
Total |
13,402 |
|
13,402 |
|
13,133 |
|
13,133 |
|
12,590 |
|
12,590 |
Analysis of net fees and commissions |
UK |
Ulster |
Commercial |
Private |
RBS |
NatWest |
Central items |
|
PBB |
Bank RoI |
Banking |
Banking |
International |
Markets |
& other |
Total | |
2018 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fees and commissions receivable |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Payment services |
470 |
34 |
313 |
33 |
25 |
3 |
|
878 |
- Credit and debit card fees |
474 |
22 |
103 |
13 |
|
|
|
612 |
- Lending (credit facilities) |
465 |
29 |
358 |
2 |
29 |
88 |
|
971 |
- Brokerage |
62 |
6 |
|
5 |
|
85 |
|
158 |
- Investment management, trustee and fiduciary services |
49 |
4 |
|
191 |
42 |
|
|
286 |
- Trade finance |
1 |
2 |
121 |
1 |
4 |
3 |
|
132 |
- Underwriting fees |
27 |
|
3 |
|
|
144 |
|
174 |
- Other |
8 |
1 |
54 |
16 |
2 |
67 |
(141) |
7 |
Total |
1,556 |
98 |
952 |
261 |
102 |
390 |
(141) |
3,218 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fees and commissions payable |
(478) |
(7) |
(55) |
(33) |
(1) |
(423) |
136 |
(861) |
Net fees and commissions |
1,078 |
91 |
897 |
228 |
101 |
(33) |
(5) |
2,357 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fees and commissions receivable |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Payment services |
435 |
30 |
302 |
37 |
24 |
1 |
|
829 |
- Credit and debit card fees |
527 |
27 |
99 |
12 |
|
|
|
665 |
- Lending (credit facilities) |
495 |
30 |
438 |
2 |
10 |
83 |
2 |
1,060 |
- Brokerage |
69 |
10 |
|
6 |
|
63 |
|
148 |
- Investment management, trustee and fiduciary services |
72 |
4 |
35 |
133 |
4 |
1 |
|
249 |
- Trade finance |
1 |
2 |
163 |
1 |
3 |
3 |
|
173 |
- Underwriting fees |
|
|
|
|
|
157 |
|
157 |
- Other |
6 |
|
46 |
15 |
2 |
132 |
(144) |
57 |
Total |
1,605 |
103 |
1,083 |
206 |
43 |
440 |
(142) |
3,338 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fees and commissions payable |
(506) |
(9) |
(53) |
(27) |
(1) |
(416) |
129 |
(883) |
Net fees and commissions |
1,099 |
94 |
1,030 |
179 |
42 |
24 |
(13) |
2,455 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
4 Segmental analysis continued
|
|
UK |
|
Ulster |
|
Commercial |
|
Private |
|
RBS |
|
NatWest |
|
Central items |
|
|
|
|
PBB |
|
Bank RoI |
|
Banking |
|
Banking |
|
International |
|
Markets |
|
& other |
|
Total |
2016 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fees and commissions receivable |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Payment services |
|
429 |
|
27 |
|
320 |
|
32 |
|
24 |
|
24 |
|
|
|
856 |
- Credit and debit card fees |
|
507 |
|
25 |
|
93 |
|
18 |
|
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
645 |
- Lending (credit facilities) |
|
500 |
|
30 |
|
406 |
|
2 |
|
11 |
|
95 |
|
|
|
1,044 |
- Brokerage |
|
63 |
|
7 |
|
1 |
|
7 |
|
1 |
|
71 |
|
4 |
|
154 |
- Investment management, trustee and fiduciary services |
|
84 |
|
3 |
|
37 |
|
118 |
|
(3) |
|
|
|
11 |
|
250 |
- Trade finance |
|
1 |
|
2 |
|
157 |
|
1 |
|
5 |
|
30 |
|
|
|
196 |
- Underwriting fees |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
83 |
|
|
|
83 |
- Other |
|
7 |
|
|
|
65 |
|
28 |
|
21 |
|
202 |
|
(211) |
|
112 |
Total |
|
1,591 |
|
94 |
|
1,079 |
|
206 |
|
61 |
|
505 |
|
(196) |
|
3,340 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fees and commissions payable |
|
(444) |
|
(12) |
|
(48) |
|
(25) |
|
(11) |
|
(450) |
|
185 |
|
(805) |
Net fees and commissions |
|
1,147 |
|
82 |
|
1,031 |
|
181 |
|
50 |
|
55 |
|
(11) |
|
2,535 |
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 | ||||||
|
|
Assets |
|
Liabilities |
|
Assets |
|
Liabilities |
|
Assets |
|
Liabilities |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
UK Personal & Business Banking |
|
194,247 |
|
187,678 |
|
190,636 |
|
183,410 |
|
181,357 |
|
173,040 |
Ulster Bank RoI |
|
25,193 |
|
21,189 |
|
24,564 |
|
19,853 |
|
24,111 |
|
19,299 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Personal & Business Banking |
|
219,440 |
|
208,867 |
|
215,200 |
|
203,263 |
|
205,468 |
|
192,339 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commercial Banking |
|
143,242 |
|
100,918 |
|
149,545 |
|
105,144 |
|
150,453 |
|
104,441 |
Private Banking |
|
21,983 |
|
28,554 |
|
20,290 |
|
27,049 |
|
18,578 |
|
26,673 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commercial & Private Banking |
|
165,225 |
|
129,472 |
|
169,835 |
|
132,193 |
|
169,031 |
|
131,114 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RBS International |
|
28,398 |
|
27,663 |
|
25,867 |
|
29,077 |
|
23,420 |
|
25,280 |
NatWest Markets |
|
244,531 |
|
227,399 |
|
277,886 |
|
248,553 |
|
372,496 |
|
340,471 |
Central items & other |
|
36,641 |
|
54,344 |
|
49,268 |
|
75,877 |
|
28,241 |
|
60,048 |
Total |
|
694,235 |
|
647,745 |
|
738,056 |
|
688,963 |
|
798,656 |
|
749,252 |
Segmental analysis of goodwill is as follows:
|
|
UK Personal |
|
Commercial & |
|
|
|
|
|
|
& Business |
|
Private |
|
RBS |
|
|
|
|
Banking |
|
Banking |
|
International |
|
Total |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
At 1 January 2017 and 31 December 2017 |
|
3,351 |
|
1,907 |
|
300 |
|
5,558 |
Acquisitions |
|
48 |
|
|
|
|
|
48 |
Inter-segment transfers |
|
(9) |
|
9 |
|
|
|
|
At 31 December 2018 |
|
3,390 |
|
1,916 |
|
300 |
|
5,606 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
4 Segmental analysis continued
Geographical segments
The geographical analysis in the tables below has been compiled on the basis of location of office where the transactions are recorded.
|
|
UK |
|
USA |
|
Europe |
|
RoW |
|
Total |
2018 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Total revenue |
|
15,351 |
|
300 |
|
838 |
|
167 |
|
16,656 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net interest income |
|
8,223 |
|
|
|
404 |
|
29 |
|
8,656 |
Net fees and commissions |
|
2,183 |
|
12 |
|
102 |
|
60 |
|
2,357 |
Income from trading activities |
|
1,308 |
|
124 |
|
68 |
|
7 |
|
1,507 |
Other operating income |
|
467 |
|
119 |
|
229 |
|
67 |
|
882 |
Total income |
|
12,181 |
|
255 |
|
803 |
|
163 |
|
13,402 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Operating profit/(loss) before tax |
|
3,805 |
|
(718) |
|
150 |
|
122 |
|
3,359 |
Total assets |
|
624,228 |
|
32,573 |
|
34,441 |
|
2,993 |
|
694,235 |
Total liabilities |
|
588,185 |
|
31,329 |
|
27,183 |
|
1,048 |
|
647,745 |
Net assets attributable to equity owners and non-controlling interests |
|
36,043 |
|
1,244 |
|
7,258 |
|
1,945 |
|
46,490 |
Contingent liabilities and commitments |
|
121,267 |
|
|
|
5,408 |
|
208 |
|
126,883 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total revenue |
|
15,011 |
|
192 |
|
655 |
|
205 |
|
16,063 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net interest income |
|
8,611 |
|
(4) |
|
346 |
|
34 |
|
8,987 |
Net fees and commissions |
|
2,192 |
|
97 |
|
113 |
|
53 |
|
2,455 |
Income from trading activities |
|
570 |
|
83 |
|
(24) |
|
5 |
|
634 |
Other operating income |
|
806 |
|
22 |
|
121 |
|
108 |
|
1,057 |
Total income |
|
12,179 |
|
198 |
|
556 |
|
200 |
|
13,133 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Operating profit/(loss) before tax |
|
3,230 |
|
(580) |
|
(485) |
|
74 |
|
2,239 |
Total assets |
|
662,314 |
|
38,485 |
|
34,280 |
|
2,977 |
|
738,056 |
Total liabilities |
|
626,103 |
|
36,564 |
|
25,171 |
|
1,125 |
|
688,963 |
Net assets attributable to equity owners and non-controlling interests |
|
36,211 |
|
1,921 |
|
9,109 |
|
1,852 |
|
49,093 |
Contingent liabilities and commitments |
|
128,127 |
|
78 |
|
7,823 |
|
22 |
|
136,050 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2016 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total revenue |
|
14,606 |
|
264 |
|
738 |
|
337 |
|
15,945 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net interest income |
|
8,243 |
|
82 |
|
302 |
|
81 |
|
8,708 |
Net fees and commissions |
|
2,287 |
|
9 |
|
175 |
|
64 |
|
2,535 |
Income from trading activities |
|
790 |
|
159 |
|
18 |
|
7 |
|
974 |
Other operating income |
|
261 |
|
(40) |
|
9 |
|
143 |
|
373 |
Total income |
|
11,581 |
|
210 |
|
504 |
|
295 |
|
12,590 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Operating (loss)/profit before tax |
|
(2,214) |
|
(1,652) |
|
(266) |
|
50 |
|
(4,082) |
Total assets |
|
715,685 |
|
44,447 |
|
32,142 |
|
6,382 |
|
798,656 |
Total liabilities |
|
675,089 |
|
44,513 |
|
26,311 |
|
3,339 |
|
749,252 |
Net assets attributable to equity owners and non-controlling interests |
|
40,596 |
|
(66) |
|
5,831 |
|
3,043 |
|
49,404 |
Contingent liabilities and commitments |
|
141,963 |
|
639 |
|
8,038 |
|
51 |
|
150,691 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
5 Pensions
Defined contribution schemes
The Group sponsors a number of defined contribution pension schemes in different territories, which new employees are offered the opportunity to join.
Defined benefit schemes
The Group sponsors a number of pension schemes in the UK and overseas, including the Main section of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund (the Main section) which operates under UK trust law and is managed and administered on behalf of its members in accordance with the terms of the trust deed, the scheme rules and UK legislation.
Pension fund trustees are appointed to operate each fund and ensure benefits are paid in accordance with the scheme rules and national law. The trustees are the legal owner of a schemes assets, and have a duty to act in the best interests of all scheme members.
The schemes generally provide a pension of one-sixtieth of final pensionable salary for each year of service prior to retirement up to a maximum of 40 years and are contributory for current members. These have been closed to new entrants for over ten years, although current members continue to build up additional pension benefits, currently subject to 2% maximum annual salary inflation, while they remain employed by the Group.
The Main section corporate trustee is RBS Pension Trustee Limited (the Trustee), a wholly owned subsidiary of National Westminster Bank Plc, Principal Employer of the Main section. The Board of the Trustee comprises four member trustee directors selected from eligible active staff, deferred and pensioner members who apply and six appointed by the Group. Under UK legislation a defined benefit pension scheme is required to meet the statutory funding objective of having sufficient and appropriate assets to cover its liabilities (the pensions that have been promised to members).
Similar governance principles apply to the Groups other pension schemes.
Investment strategy
The assets of the Main section, which is typical of other group schemes, represent 90% of plan assets at 31 December 2018 (2017 - 90%) and are invested in a diversified portfolio as shown below.
The Main section employs derivative instruments to achieve a desired asset class exposure and to reduce the sections interest rate, inflation and currency risk. This means that the net funding position is considerably less sensitive to changes in market conditions than the value of the assets or liabilities in isolation.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||||
Major classes of plan assets as a percentage of |
|
Quoted |
|
Unquoted |
|
Total |
|
Quoted |
|
Unquoted |
|
Total |
total plan assets of the Main section |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
Equities |
|
3.7% |
|
5.2% |
|
8.9% |
|
21.9% |
|
4.0% |
|
25.9% |
Index linked bonds |
|
40.1% |
|
|
|
40.1% |
|
30.6% |
|
|
|
30.6% |
Government bonds |
|
12.9% |
|
|
|
12.9% |
|
9.2% |
|
|
|
9.2% |
Corporate and other bonds |
|
12.2% |
|
5.2% |
|
17.4% |
|
15.8% |
|
1.0% |
|
16.8% |
Real estate |
|
|
|
5.5% |
|
5.5% |
|
|
|
5.2% |
|
5.2% |
Derivatives |
|
|
|
6.1% |
|
6.1% |
|
|
|
8.1% |
|
8.1% |
Cash and other assets |
|
|
|
9.1% |
|
9.1% |
|
|
|
4.2% |
|
4.2% |
|
|
68.9% |
|
31.1% |
|
100.0% |
|
77.5% |
|
22.5% |
|
100.0% |
The Main sections holdings of derivative instruments are summarised in the table below:
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||||
|
|
Notional |
|
Fair value |
|
Notional |
|
Fair value | ||||
|
|
amounts |
|
Assets |
|
Liabilities |
|
amounts |
|
Assets |
|
Liabilities |
|
|
£bn |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£bn |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Inflation rate swaps |
|
13 |
|
347 |
|
502 |
|
11 |
|
310 |
|
555 |
Interest rate swaps |
|
55 |
|
8,132 |
|
5,362 |
|
44 |
|
8,161 |
|
4,779 |
Currency forwards |
|
10 |
|
22 |
|
164 |
|
12 |
|
160 |
|
34 |
Equity and bond call options |
|
1 |
|
277 |
|
|
|
2 |
|
428 |
|
|
Equity and bond put options |
|
4 |
|
3 |
|
1 |
|
3 |
|
3 |
|
1 |
Other |
|
4 |
|
1,027 |
|
1,092 |
|
4 |
|
327 |
|
444 |
Swaps have been executed at prevailing market rates and within standard market bid/offer spreads with a number of counterparty banks, including NatWest Markets Plc.
At 31 December 2018, the gross notional value of the swaps was £72 billion (2017 - £57 billion) and had a net positive fair value of £2,557 million (2017 - £3,045 million) against which the banks had posted approximately 103% collateral.
The schemes do not invest directly in the Group but can have exposure to the Group. The trustees of the respective UK schemes are responsible for ensuring that indirect investments in the Group do not exceed the 5% regulatory limit.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
5 Pensions continued
|
|
Main section |
|
All schemes | ||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
Present |
|
Asset |
|
Net |
|
|
|
Present |
|
Asset |
|
Net |
|
|
Fair |
|
of defined |
|
ceiling/ |
|
pension |
|
Fair |
|
of defined |
|
ceiling/ |
|
pension |
|
|
value of |
|
benefit |
|
minimum |
|
liability/ |
|
value of |
|
benefit |
|
minimum |
|
liability/ |
|
|
plan assets |
|
obligation |
|
funding (1) |
|
(asset) |
|
plan assets |
|
obligation |
|
funding (1) |
|
(asset) |
Changes in value of net pension liability/(asset) |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
At 1 January 2017 |
|
43,824 |
|
38,851 |
|
4,973 |
|
|
|
49,229 |
|
43,990 |
|
5,326 |
|
87 |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
46 |
|
46 |
|
3 |
|
3 |
Income statement |
|
1,155 |
|
1,266 |
|
134 |
|
245 |
|
1,285 |
|
1,518 |
|
142 |
|
375 |
Statement of comprehensive income |
|
1,580 |
|
(9) |
|
1,608 |
|
19 |
|
1,728 |
|
4 |
|
1,634 |
|
(90) |
Contributions by employer |
|
264 |
|
|
|
|
|
(264) |
|
627 |
|
|
|
|
|
(627) |
Contributions by plan participants and other scheme members |
|
4 |
|
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
10 |
|
10 |
|
|
|
|
Liabilities extinguished upon settlement |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(744) |
|
(755) |
|
|
|
(11) |
Benefits paid |
|
(2,175) |
|
(2,175) |
|
|
|
|
|
(2,435) |
|
(2,435) |
|
|
|
|
At 1 January 2018 |
|
44,652 |
|
37,937 |
|
6,715 |
|
|
|
49,746 |
|
42,378 |
|
7,105 |
|
(263) |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
20 |
|
17 |
|
(1) |
|
(4) |
Income statement |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net interest expense |
|
1,123 |
|
939 |
|
171 |
|
(13) |
|
1,242 |
|
1,043 |
|
179 |
|
(20) |
Current service cost |
|
|
|
190 |
|
|
|
190 |
|
|
|
240 |
|
|
|
240 |
Past service cost |
|
|
|
14 |
|
|
|
14 |
|
|
|
14 |
|
|
|
14 |
Loss on curtailments or settlements |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
74 |
|
|
|
74 |
|
|
1,123 |
|
1,143 |
|
171 |
|
191 |
|
1,242 |
|
1,371 |
|
179 |
|
308 |
Statement of comprehensive income |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Return on plan assets excluding recognised interest income |
|
(1,891) |
|
|
|
|
|
1,891 |
|
(2,090) |
|
|
|
|
|
2,090 |
Experience gains and losses |
|
|
|
122 |
|
|
|
122 |
|
|
|
81 |
|
|
|
81 |
Effect of changes in actuarial financial assumptions |
|
|
|
(2,338) |
|
|
|
(2,338) |
|
|
|
(2,537) |
|
|
|
(2,537) |
Effect of changes in actuarial demographic assumptions |
|
|
|
820 |
|
|
|
820 |
|
|
|
826 |
|
|
|
826 |
Asset ceiling adjustments: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Attributable to contributions required by ring fencing |
|
|
|
|
|
2,000 |
|
2,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
2,053 |
|
2,053 |
Other movements in the year |
|
|
|
|
|
(468) |
|
(468) |
|
|
|
|
|
(546) |
|
(546) |
|
|
(1,891) |
|
(1,396) |
|
1,532 |
|
2,027 |
|
(2,090) |
|
(1,630) |
|
1,507 |
|
1,967 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Contributions by employer |
|
2,218 |
|
|
|
|
|
(2,218) |
|
2,363 |
|
|
|
|
|
(2,363) |
Contributions by plan participants and other scheme members |
|
7 |
|
7 |
|
|
|
|
|
12 |
|
12 |
|
|
|
|
Liabilities extinguished upon settlement |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(259) |
|
(259) |
|
|
|
|
Transfer of pension assets and liabilities from Main section (2) |
|
(276) |
|
(198) |
|
(78) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Benefits paid |
|
(2,027) |
|
(2,027) |
|
|
|
|
|
(2,282) |
|
(2,282) |
|
|
|
|
At 31 December 2018 |
|
43,806 |
|
35,466 |
|
8,340 |
|
|
|
48,752 |
|
39,607 |
|
8,790 |
|
(355) |
Notes:
(1) The group recognises the net pension scheme surplus or deficit as a net asset or liability. In doing so, the funded status is adjusted to reflect any schemes with a surplus that the Group may not be able to access, as well as any minimum funding requirement to pay in additional contributions. This is most relevant to the Main section, where the surplus is not recognised.
(2) Includes adjustment for assets of £276 million and liabilities of £198 million transferred at no consideration to establish two separate sections of the RBS Group Pension Fund because ring-fencing rules do not allow employees outside the ring-fenced group to be members of the Main section.
(3) The Group expects to make contributions to the Main section of £218 million in 2019.
|
|
All schemes | ||
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
Amounts recognised on the balance sheet |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Fund assets at fair value |
|
48,752 |
|
49,746 |
Present value of fund liabilities |
|
39,607 |
|
42,378 |
Funded status |
|
9,145 |
|
7,368 |
Asset ceiling/minimum funding |
|
8,790 |
|
7,105 |
|
|
355 |
|
263 |
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
Net pension asset/(liability) comprises |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Net assets of schemes in surplus (included in Other assets, Note 17) |
|
520 |
|
392 |
Net liabilities of schemes in deficit (included in Other liabilities, Note 20) |
|
(165) |
|
(129) |
|
|
355 |
|
263 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
5 Pensions continued
Funding and contributions by the Group
In the UK, the trustees of defined benefit pension schemes are required to perform funding valuations every three years. The trustees and the sponsor, with the support of the Scheme Actuary, agree the assumptions used to value the liabilities and a Schedule of Contributions required to eliminate any funding deficit. The funding assumptions incorporate a margin for prudence over and above the expected cost of providing the benefits promised to members, taking into account the sponsors covenant and the investment strategy of the scheme. Similar arrangements apply in the other territories where the Group sponsors defined benefit pension schemes. The last funding valuation of the Main section was at 31 December 2017 and next funding valuation is due at 31 December 2020, to be agreed by 31 March 2022.
The triennial funding valuation of the Main section as at 31 December 2017 determined the funding level to be 96%, pension liabilities to be £47 billion and the deficit to be £2 billion, which was eliminated by a £2 billion cash payment in October 2018. The average cost of the future service of current members is 44% of basic salary before administrative expenses and contributions from those members.
In October 2018 the Court ruled on the requirement to and method for equalising guaranteed minimum pension benefits arising between 1990 and 1997 between men and women. In 2017 the Group considered that equalisation would change the Main sections defined benefit obligation by 0.2%.The estimate was updated following the clarity provided by the Court ruling and the impact of any future conversion exercise to rectify the position. The £102 million cost on revision of the previous estimate of the financial assumptions in respect of equalisation is recognised in equity.
Assumptions
Placing a value on the Groups defined benefit pension schemes liabilities requires the Groups management to make a number of assumptions, with the support of independent actuaries. The ultimate cost of the defined benefit obligations depends upon actual future events and the assumptions made are unlikely to be exactly borne out in practice, meaning the final cost may be higher or lower than expected.
The most significant assumptions used for the Main section are shown below:
|
Principal IAS 19 actuarial |
Principal assumptions of 2017 triennial valuation | |
|
assumptions |
| |
|
2018 |
2017 |
2017 |
|
% |
% |
|
Discount rate |
2.9 |
2.6 |
Fixed interest swap yield curve plus 0.8% per annum |
Inflation assumption (RPI) |
3.2 |
3.1 |
RPI swap yield curve |
Rate of increase in salaries |
1.8 |
1.8 |
|
Rate of increase in deferred pensions |
3.1 |
3.0 |
|
Rate of increase in pensions in payment |
2.9 |
2.9 |
Modelled allowance for relevant caps and floors |
Lump sum conversion rate at retirement |
20 |
21 |
18% |
Longevity at age 60: |
years |
years |
|
Current pensioners |
|
|
|
Males |
27.2 |
27.2 |
28.1 |
Females |
29.0 |
28.7 |
29.7 |
Future pensioners, currently aged 40 |
|
|
|
Males |
28.4 |
28.6 |
29.3 |
Females |
30.5 |
30.4 |
31.5 |
Discount rate
The IAS 19 valuation uses a single discount rate by reference to the yield on a basket of high quality sterling corporate bonds. For the triennial valuation discounting is by reference to a yield curve.
The weighted average duration of the Main sections defined benefit obligation at 31 December 2018 is 20 years (2017 21 years).
Significant judgement is required when setting the criteria for bonds to be included in IAS 19s basket of bonds that is used to determine the discount rate used in the valuations. The criteria include issue size, quality of pricing and the exclusion of outliers. Judgement is also required in determining the shape of the yield curve at long durations: a constant credit spread relative to gilts is assumed. Sensitivity to the main assumptions is presented below.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
5 Pensions continued
The chart below shows the projected benefit payment pattern for the Main section in nominal terms. These cashflows are based on the most recent formal actuarial valuation, effective 31 December 2017.
The larger outflow in the first four years represents the expected level of transfers out to 31 December 2021.
The table below shows how the present value of the defined benefit obligation of the Main section would change if the key assumptions used were changed independently. In practice the variables are somewhat correlated and do not move completely in isolation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Increase in |
|
|
(Decrease)/increase |
|
(Decrease)/increase |
|
net pension assets/ |
|
|
in value of assets |
|
in value of liabilities |
|
(obligations) |
2018 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
0.25% increase in interest rates/discount rate |
|
(2,214) |
|
(1,644) |
|
(570) |
0.25% increase in inflation |
|
1,487 |
|
1,199 |
|
288 |
0.25% increase in credit spreads |
|
(5) |
|
(1,644) |
|
1,639 |
Longevity increase of one year |
|
|
|
1,414 |
|
(1,414) |
0.25% additional rate of increase in pensions in payment |
|
|
|
1,215 |
|
(1,215) |
Increase in equity values of 10% (1) |
|
419 |
|
|
|
419 |
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
0.25% increase in interest rates/discount rate |
|
(2,218) |
|
(1,964) |
|
(254) |
0.25% increase in inflation |
|
1,289 |
|
1,329 |
|
(40) |
0.25% increase in credit spreads |
|
(7) |
|
(1,964) |
|
1,957 |
Longevity increase of one year |
|
|
|
1,478 |
|
(1,478) |
0.25% additional rate of increase in pensions in payment |
|
|
|
1,328 |
|
(1,328) |
Increase in equity values of 10% (1) |
|
909 |
|
|
|
909 |
Note:
(1) Includes both quoted and private equity.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
5 Pensions continued
The defined benefit obligation of the Main section is attributable to the different classes of scheme members in the following proportions:
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
Membership category |
|
% |
|
% |
Active members |
|
12.9 |
|
16.2 |
Deferred members |
|
48.6 |
|
47.3 |
Pensioners and dependants |
|
38.5 |
|
36.5 |
|
|
100.0 |
|
100.0 |
The experience history of Group schemes is shown below:
|
|
Main section |
|
All schemes | ||||||||||||||||
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
2015 |
|
2014 |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
2015 |
|
2014 |
History of defined benefit schemes |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Fair value of plan assets |
|
43,806 |
|
44,652 |
|
43,824 |
|
30,703 |
|
30,077 |
|
48,752 |
|
49,746 |
|
49,229 |
|
34,708 |
|
34,359 |
Present value of plan obligations |
|
35,466 |
|
37,937 |
|
38,851 |
|
30,966 |
|
31,776 |
|
39,607 |
|
42,378 |
|
43,990 |
|
35,152 |
|
36,643 |
Net surplus/(deficit) |
|
8,340 |
|
6,715 |
|
4,973 |
|
(263 |
) |
(1,699 |
) |
9,145 |
|
7,368 |
|
5,239 |
|
(444 |
) |
(2,284) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Experience (losses)/gains on plan liabilities |
|
(122 |
) |
(107 |
) |
658 |
|
233 |
|
3 |
|
(81 |
) |
(93 |
) |
794 |
|
258 |
|
18 |
Experience (losses)/gains on plan assets |
|
(1,891 |
) |
1,580 |
|
8,562 |
|
(415 |
) |
4,629 |
|
(2,090 |
) |
1,728 |
|
9,254 |
|
(458 |
) |
5,171 |
Actual return on plan assets |
|
(768 |
) |
2,735 |
|
9,872 |
|
703 |
|
5,766 |
|
(848 |
) |
3,013 |
|
10,708 |
|
749 |
|
6,485 |
Actual return on plan assets - % |
|
(1.7% |
) |
6.2% |
|
32.2% |
|
2.3% |
|
23.8% |
|
(1.7% |
) |
6.1% |
|
30.9% |
|
2.2% |
|
22.8% |
6 Auditors remuneration
Amounts paid to the Groups auditors for statutory audit and other services are set out below. All audit-related and other services are approved by the Group Audit Committee and are subject to strict controls to ensure the external auditors independence is unaffected by the provision of other services. The Group Audit Committee recognises that for certain assignments the auditors are best placed to perform the work economically; for other work the Group selects the supplier best placed to meet its requirements. The Groups auditors are permitted to tender for such work in competition with other firms where the work is permissible under audit independence rules.
Amounts paid to the Groups auditors for statutory audit and other services are set out below:
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Fees payable for the audit of the Groups annual accounts (1) |
|
3.5 |
|
4.0 |
|
4.0 |
- the audit of the companys subsidiaries (1) |
|
27.5 |
|
22.9 |
|
20.7 |
- audit-related assurance services (1,2) |
|
2.9 |
|
4.3 |
|
4.0 |
Total audit and audit-related assurance services fees |
|
33.9 |
|
31.2 |
|
28.7 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other assurance services |
|
1.3 |
|
1.7 |
|
3.4 |
Corporate finance services (3) |
|
0.2 |
|
0.2 |
|
0.2 |
Non-audit services |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total other services |
|
1.5 |
|
1.9 |
|
3.6 |
Notes:
(1) The 2018 audit fee was approved by the Group Audit Committee. At 31 December 2018, £16 million has been billed in and paid in respect of 2018 Group audit fees.
(2) Comprises fees of £1.1 million (2017 - £1.1 million) in relation to reviews of interim financial information, £1.1 million (2017 - £2.5 million) in respect of reports to the Groups regulators in the UK and overseas, £0.7 million (2017 - £0.7 million) in relation to non-statutory audit opinions.
(3) Comprises fees of £0.2 million (FY 2017 - £0.2 million) in respect of work performed by the auditors as reporting accountants on debt and equity issuances undertaken by the Group.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
7 Tax |
|
|
|
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Current tax: |
|
|
|
Charge for the year |
(1,092) |
(1,018) |
(1,126) |
Over provision in respect of prior years |
125 |
227 |
186 |
|
(967) |
(791) |
(940) |
Deferred tax: |
|
|
|
(Charge)/credit for the year |
(280) |
108 |
246 |
Increase/(reduction) in the carrying value of deferred tax assets |
7 |
(30) |
(317) |
Under provision in respect of prior years |
(35) |
(111) |
(155) |
Tax charge for the year |
(1,275) |
(824) |
(1,166) |
The actual tax charge differs from the expected tax (charge)/credit computed by applying the standard rate of UK corporation tax of 19% (2017 19.25%; 2016 20.00%) as follows:
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Expected tax (charge)/credit |
(638) |
(431) |
816 |
Losses and temporary differences in year where no deferred tax asset recognised |
(55) |
(303) |
(742) |
Foreign profits taxed at other rates |
(8) |
104 |
340 |
UK tax rate change impact (1) |
|
(7) |
6 |
Items not allowed for tax: |
|
|
|
- losses on disposals and write-downs |
(44) |
(69) |
(45) |
- UK bank levy |
(38) |
(45) |
(41) |
- regulatory and legal actions |
(203) |
(56) |
(952) |
- other disallowable items |
(63) |
(110) |
(141) |
Non-taxable items |
47 |
134 |
136 |
Taxable foreign exchange movements |
(27) |
27 |
(57) |
Losses brought forward and utilised |
14 |
11 |
10 |
Increase/(reduction) in carrying value of deferred tax asset in respect of: |
|
|
|
- UK losses |
7 |
(30) |
(317) |
Banking surcharge |
(357) |
(165) |
(210) |
Adjustments in respect of prior years (2) |
90 |
116 |
31 |
Actual tax charge |
(1,275) |
(824) |
(1,166) |
Notes:
(1) In recent years, the UK government has steadily reduced the rate of UK corporation tax, with the latest enacted rates standing at 19% from 1 April 2017 and 17% from 1 April 2020.
(2) Prior year tax adjustments incorporate refinements to tax computations made on submission and agreement with the tax authorities. Current taxation balances include provisions in respect of uncertain tax positions, in particular in relation to restructuring and other costs where the taxation treatment remains subject to agreement with the relevant tax authorities.
Judgment: Tax contingencies
The Groups income tax charge and its provisions for income taxes necessarily involve a degree of estimation and judgement. The tax treatment of some transactions is uncertain and tax computations are yet to be agreed with the tax authorities in a number of jurisdictions. The Group recognises anticipated tax liabilities based on all available evidence and, where appropriate, in the light of external advice. Any difference between the final outcome and the amounts provided will affect current and deferred income tax charges in the period when the matter is resolved.
Deferred tax |
|
|
|
2018 |
2017 |
£m |
£m | |
Deferred tax asset |
(1,412) |
(1,740) |
Deferred tax liability |
454 |
583 |
Net deferred tax asset |
(958) |
(1,157) |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
7 Tax continued
Net deferred tax asset comprised:
|
|
|
|
|
Tax |
|
|
|
|
Accelerated |
|
|
losses |
|
|
|
|
capital |
Expense |
Financial |
carried |
|
|
|
Pension |
allowances |
provisions |
instruments |
forward |
Other |
Total |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
At 1 January 2017 |
(662) |
361 |
(322) |
395 |
(1,050) |
137 |
(1,141) |
Acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries |
|
(29) |
|
|
|
|
(29) |
Charge/(credit) to income statement |
3 |
(126) |
55 |
46 |
121 |
(66) |
33 |
Charge/(credit) to other comprehensive income |
266 |
|
|
(243) |
|
(19) |
4 |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
|
(14) |
1 |
|
(10) |
(1) |
(24) |
At 1 January 2018 |
(393) |
192 |
(266) |
198 |
(939) |
51 |
(1,157) |
Implementation of IFRS9 on 1 January 2018 |
|
|
|
16 |
|
|
16 |
(Credit)/charge to income statement |
(40) |
22 |
121 |
154 |
5 |
46 |
308 |
(Credit)/charge to other comprehensive income |
(95) |
1 |
|
(23) |
|
33 |
(84) |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
|
5 |
(14) |
4 |
(2) |
(34) |
(41) |
At 31 December 2018 |
(528) |
220 |
(159) |
349 |
(936) |
96 |
(958) |
Deferred tax assets in respect of unused tax losses are recognised if the losses can be used to offset probable future taxable profits after taking into account the expected reversal of other temporary differences. Recognised deferred tax assets in respect of tax losses are analysed further below.
|
2018 |
2017 |
£m |
£m | |
UK tax losses carried forward |
|
|
- NatWest Markets Plc |
151 |
125 |
- National Westminster Bank Plc |
505 |
541 |
- Ulster Bank Limited |
19 |
14 |
Total |
675 |
680 |
Overseas tax losses carried forward |
|
|
- Ulster Bank Ireland DAC |
261 |
259 |
|
936 |
939 |
Critical accounting policy: Deferred Tax
The deferred tax assets of £1,412 million at 31 December 2018 (2017 - £1,740 million) principally comprise losses that arose in the UK, and temporary differences. These deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that there will be future taxable profits to recover them.
Judgment - The Group has considered the carrying value of deferred tax assets and concluded that, based on managements estimates, sufficient taxable profits will be generated in future years to recover recognised deferred tax assets.
Estimate -These estimates are partly based on forecast performance beyond the horizon for managements detailed plans. They have regard to inherent uncertainties, such as Brexit and climate change.
UK tax losses - Under UK tax rules, tax losses can be carried forward indefinitely. As the recognised tax losses in the Group arose prior to 1 April 2015, credit in future periods is given against 25% of profits at the main rate of UK corporation tax, excluding the Banking Surcharge 8% rate introduced by The Finance (No. 2) Act 2015. Deferred tax assets and liabilities at 31 December 2018 take into account the reduced rates in respect of tax losses and temporary differences and where appropriate, the banking surcharge inclusive rate in respect of other banking temporary differences.
NatWest Markets Plc NatWest Markets Plc expects that the balance of recognised deferred tax asset at 31 December 2018 of £151 million in respect of tax losses amounting to approximately £800 million will be recovered by the end of 2024. Since 2012 NatWest Markets Plc has reported mixed levels of taxable profits and losses because core banking profitability was offset by a series of restructuring plans as the group reshaped to meet commercial and regulatory demands. In total, £10.2 billion of losses have not been recognised in the deferred tax balance at 31 December 2018; such losses will be available to offset 25% of future taxable profits in excess of those forecast in the closing deferred tax asset.
National Westminster Bank Plc A deferred tax asset of £505 million has been recognised in respect of total losses of £2,936 million. The losses arose principally as a result of significant impairment and conduct charges between 2009 and 2012 during challenging economic conditions in the UK banking sector. National Westminster Bank plc returned to tax profitability during 2015 and expects the deferred tax asset to be consumed by future taxable profits by the end of 2023.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
7 Tax continued
Overseas tax losses
Ulster Bank Ireland DAC A deferred tax asset of £261 million has been recognised in respect of losses of £2,089 million of total losses of £8,855 million carried forward at 31 December 2018. The losses arose principally as a result of significant impairment charges between 2008 and 2013 during challenging economic conditions in the Republic of Ireland. Subsequent movements reflect the £: exchange differences. As UBIDAC continues to operate in a small open economy subject to short term volatility and extended non-performing loan realisation periods the company expects, in assessing its deferred tax asset on tax losses, that they will be consumed by future taxable profits by the end of 2027.
Unrecognised deferred tax
Deferred tax assets of £5,118 million (2017 - £6,356 million; 2016 - £7,940, million) have not been recognised in respect of tax losses and other temporary differences carried forward of £25,597 million (2017 - £30,049 million; 2016 - £33,376 million) in jurisdictions where doubt exists over the availability of future taxable profits. Of these losses and other temporary differences, £939 million expire within five years and £5,992 million thereafter. The balance of tax losses and other temporary differences carried forward has no expiry date.
Deferred tax liabilities of £257 million (2017 - £255 million; 2016 - £258 million) have not been recognised in respect of retained earnings of overseas subsidiaries and held-over gains on the incorporation of overseas branches. Retained earnings of overseas subsidiaries are expected to be reinvested indefinitely or remitted to the UK free from further taxation. No taxation is expected to arise in the foreseeable future in respect of held-over gains. Changes to UK tax legislation largely exempts from UK tax, overseas dividends received on or after 1 July 2009.
8 Earnings per share
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Earnings |
|
|
|
Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary shareholders |
1,622 |
752 |
(6,955) |
|
|
|
|
Weighted average number of shares (millions) |
|
|
|
Weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the year |
12,009 |
11,867 |
11,692 |
Effect of dilutive share options and convertible securities |
52 |
69 |
51 |
Diluted weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the year |
12,061 |
11,936 |
11,743 |
|
|
|
|
9 Trading assets and liabilities |
|
| |
|
|
| |
Trading assets and liabilities comprise assets and liabilities held at fair value in trading portfolios. |
|
| |
|
2018 |
2017 | |
Assets |
£m |
£m | |
Loans |
|
| |
Reverse repos |
24,759 |
36,272 | |
Collateral given |
19,036 |
21,558 | |
Other loans |
1,308 |
651 | |
Total loans |
45,103 |
58,481 | |
Securities |
|
| |
Central and local government |
|
| |
- UK |
6,834 |
3,514 | |
- US |
4,689 |
3,667 | |
- other |
13,498 |
14,736 | |
Other securities |
4,995 |
5,593 | |
Total securities |
30,016 |
27,510 | |
Total |
75,119 |
85,991 | |
Liabilities |
|
| |
Deposits |
|
| |
Repos |
25,645 |
28,363 | |
Collateral received |
20,187 |
22,683 | |
Other deposits |
1,788 |
1,302 | |
Total deposits |
47,620 |
52,348 | |
Debt securities in issue |
903 |
1,107 | |
Short positions |
23,827 |
28,527 | |
Total |
72,350 |
81,982 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
10 Derivatives
Companies within RBS transact derivatives as principal either as a trading activity or to manage balance sheet foreign exchange, interest rate and credit risk.
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||
|
Notional |
|
|
|
Notional |
|
|
|
amount |
Assets |
Liabilities |
|
amount |
Assets |
Liabilities |
|
£bn |
£m |
£m |
|
£bn |
£m |
£m |
Exchange rate contracts |
3,426 |
36,545 |
38,230 |
|
3,425 |
39,211 |
41,681 |
Interest rate contracts |
10,536 |
96,410 |
90,444 |
|
12,016 |
120,945 |
112,160 |
Credit derivatives |
16 |
346 |
208 |
|
38 |
531 |
558 |
Equity and commodity contracts |
1 |
48 |
15 |
|
3 |
156 |
107 |
|
|
133,349 |
128,897 |
|
|
160,843 |
154,506 |
RBS enters into fair value hedges, cash flow hedges and hedges of net investments in foreign operations. The majority of RBSs interest rate hedges relate to the management of RBSs non-trading interest rate risk. RBS manages this risk within approved limits. Residual risk positions are hedged with derivatives principally interest rate swaps. Suitable larger financial instruments are fair value hedged; the remaining exposure, where possible, is hedged by derivatives documented as cash flow hedges.
The majority of RBSs fair value hedges involve interest rate swaps hedging the fixed interest rate risk in recognised financial assets and financial liabilities. Cash flow hedges relate to exposures to the variability in future interest payments and receipts due to the movement of benchmark interest rates or foreign exchange rates on forecast transactions and on recognised financial assets and financial liabilities. This variability in cash flows is hedged by interest rate swaps and forward foreign exchange contracts. RBS hedges its net investments in foreign operations with currency borrowings and forward foreign exchange contracts.
For cash flow hedge relationships of interest rate risk, the hedged items are actual and forecast variable interest rate cash flows arising from financial assets and financial liabilities with interest rates linked to the relevant benchmark rate LIBOR, EURIBOR or the Bank of England Official Bank Rate. The financial assets are loans to banks and customer and the financial liabilities are bank and customer deposits and LIBOR linked medium-term notes and other issued securities. The variability in cash flows due to movements in the relevant benchmark rate is hedged; this risk component is identified using the risk management systems of RBS. This risk component comprises the majority of cash flow variability risk.
For cash flow hedging relationships RBS determines that there is an economic relationship between the hedged item and hedging instrument via assessing the initial and ongoing effectiveness by comparing movements in the fair value of the expected highly probable forecast interest cash flows with movements in the fair value of the expected changes in cash flows from the hedging interest rate swap. Hedge effectiveness is measured on a cumulative basis over a time period management determines to be appropriate. The method of calculating hedge ineffectiveness is the hypothetical derivative method. RBS uses the actual ratio between the hedged item and hedging instrument to establish the hedge ratio for hedge accounting. For fair value hedge relationships of interest rate risk, the hedged items are typically large corporate fixed-rate loans, government securities, fixed rate finance leases, fixed rate medium-term notes or preference shares classified as debt. The hedged risk is the risk of changes in the hedged items fair value attributable to changes in the benchmark interest rate embedded in the hedged item. This risk component is identified using the risk management systems of RBS. This risk component comprises the majority of the hedged items fair value risk.
For fair value hedge relationships RBS determines that there is an economic relationship between the hedged items and hedging instrument via assessing the initial and ongoing effectiveness by comparing movements in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk with movements in the fair value of the expected changes in cash flows from the hedging interest rate swap. Hedge effectiveness is measured on a cumulative basis over a time period management determines to be appropriate. RBS uses either the actual ratio between the hedged item and hedging instrument(s) or one that minimises hedge ineffectiveness to establish the hedge ratio for hedge accounting. RBS hedges the currency risk of its net investment in foreign currency denominated operations with currency borrowings and forward foreign exchange contracts. RBS reviews the value of the investments net assets, executing hedges where appropriate to reduce the sensitivity of capital ratios to foreign exchange rate movement.
The Group hedges currency risk in respect of its net investment in foreign currency denominated operations with currency borrowings and forward foreign exchange contracts. The Group reviews the value of the investments net assets, executing hedges where appropriate, to reduce the sensitivity of capital ratios to foreign exchange movements.
Included in the table above are derivatives held for hedging purposes as follows:
|
|
2018 |
|
|
2017 | |
|
Notional |
Assets |
Liabilities |
|
Assets |
Liabilities |
|
£bn |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
Fair value hedging |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest rate contracts |
60.0 |
965 |
2,061 |
|
904 |
2,211 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash flow hedging |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest rate contracts |
149.7 |
1,148 |
872 |
|
1,989 |
1,295 |
Exchange rate contacts |
12.5 |
106 |
|
|
63 |
37 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net investment hedging |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Exchange rate contracts |
2.0 |
32 |
10 |
|
11 |
28 |
|
224.2 |
2,251 |
2,943 |
|
2,967 |
3,571 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
10 Derivatives continued
The following table shows the period in which the hedging contract ends: |
|
| ||||||
|
0-3 months |
3-12 months |
1-3 years |
3-5 years |
5-10 years |
10-20 years |
20+ years |
Total |
Fair value hedging |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hedging assets - Interest rate risk (£bn) |
1.0 |
1.8 |
11.0 |
4.9 |
7.8 |
3.7 |
3.8 |
34.0 |
Hedging liabilities - Interest rate risk (£bn) |
|
2.0 |
7.5 |
10.0 |
4.6 |
1.9 |
|
26.0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash flow hedging |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hedging assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest rate risk (£bn) |
3.9 |
10.9 |
47.8 |
8.7 |
10.5 |
|
|
81.8 |
Average fixed interest rate |
1.87 |
1.44 |
1.13 |
2.00 |
1.43 |
|
|
1.33 |
Hedging liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest rate risk (£bn) |
8.6 |
18.9 |
34.1 |
5.1 |
0.4 |
0.8 |
|
67.9 |
Average fixed interest rate |
0.54 |
0.56 |
1.07 |
1.34 |
3.96 |
4.31 |
|
0.94 |
Exchange rate risk (£bn) |
|
|
5.8 |
4.7 |
2.0 |
|
|
12.5 |
Average USD - £ rate |
|
|
1.32 |
1.37 |
1.50 |
|
|
1.37 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net investment hedging |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Exchange rate risk (£bn) |
1.2 |
0.6 |
0.2 |
|
|
|
|
2.0 |
Principal currency hedges |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Average SAR - £ rate |
4.80 |
4.83 |
4.82 |
|
|
|
|
4.81 |
Average CHF - £ rate |
1.22 |
1.23 |
1.18 |
|
|
|
|
1.21 |
The table below analyses assets and liabilities subject to hedging derivatives. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Impact on hedged |
|
Carrying value |
Impact on |
items ceased to be |
|
(CV) of hedged |
hedged items |
adjusted for hedging |
|
assets and liabilities |
included in CV |
gains or losses |
2018 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Fair value hedging - interest rate |
|
|
|
Loans to banks and customers - amortised cost |
6,197 |
875 |
91 |
Other financial assets - securities |
31,879 |
362 |
10 |
Total |
38,076 |
1,237 |
101 |
|
|
|
|
Other financial liabilities - debt securities in issue |
23,289 |
(19) |
|
Subordinated liabilities |
2,359 |
22 |
|
Total |
25,648 |
3 |
|
|
|
|
|
Fair value hedging - exchange rate |
|
|
|
Other financial assets - securities |
3 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash flow hedging - interest rate |
|
|
|
Loans to banks and customers - amortised cost |
81,880 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bank and customer deposits |
67,854 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash flow hedging - exchange rate |
|
|
|
Other financial liabilities - debt securities in issue |
5,590 |
|
|
Subordinates liabilities |
6,902 |
|
|
Total |
12,492 |
|
|
Notes on the consolidated accounts
10 Derivatives continued
Hedge ineffectiveness recognised in other operating income comprised: |
|
| |
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Fair value hedging |
|
|
|
Gains/(losses) on the hedged items attributable to the hedged risk |
54 |
(48) |
1,146 |
(Losses)/gains on the hedging instruments |
(7) |
78 |
(1,117) |
Fair value hedging ineffectiveness |
47 |
30 |
29 |
Cash flow hedging ineffectiveness |
(112) |
9 |
(29) |
Total |
(65) |
39 |
|
The main sources of ineffectiveness for interest rate risk hedge accounting relationships are:
· The effect of the counterparty credit risk on the fair value of the interest rate swap, which is not reflected in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the change in interest rate (fair value hedge).
· Differences in the repricing basis between the hedging instrument and hedged cash flows (cash flow hedge); and
· Upfront present values on the hedging derivatives where hedge accounting relationships have been designated after the trade date (cash flow hedge and fair value hedge).
Additional information on cash flow hedging and hedging of net assets can be found in the Statement of Changes in Equity.
11 Financial instruments classification
The following tables analyse financial assets and liabilities in accordance with the categories of financial instruments on an IFRS 9 basis at 31 December 2018 and on an IAS39 basis at 31 December 2017. Assets and liabilities outside the scope of IFRS 9/IAS 39 are shown within other assets and other liabilities.
Assets |
|
|
|
Hedging |
|
Amortised |
Other |
|
|
MFVTPL (1) |
DFV(2) |
derivatives |
FVOCI |
cost |
assets |
Total | |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Cash and balances at central banks |
|
|
|
|
|
88,897 |
|
88,897 |
Trading assets |
|
75,119 |
|
|
|
|
|
75,119 |
Derivatives |
|
131,098 |
|
2,251 |
|
|
|
133,349 |
Settlement balances |
|
|
|
|
|
2,928 |
|
2,928 |
Loans to banks - amortised cost (3) |
|
|
|
|
|
12,947 |
|
12,947 |
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
|
|
|
|
|
305,089 |
|
305,089 |
Other financial assets |
|
1,638 |
|
|
46,077 |
11,770 |
|
59,485 |
Intangible assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
6,616 |
6,616 |
Other assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
9,805 |
9,805 |
31 December 2018 |
|
207,855 |
|
2,251 |
46,077 |
421,631 |
16,421 |
694,235 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Held-for- |
|
Hedging |
Available- |
Loans and |
Held-to- |
Other |
|
|
trading |
DFV(2) |
derivatives |
for-sale |
receivables |
maturity |
assets |
Total |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Cash and balances at central banks |
|
|
|
|
98,337 |
|
|
98,337 |
Trading assets |
85,991 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
85,991 |
Derivatives |
157,876 |
|
2,967 |
|
|
|
|
160,843 |
Settlement balances |
|
|
|
|
2,517 |
|
|
2,517 |
Loans to banks - amortised cost (3) |
|
|
|
|
11,517 |
|
|
11,517 |
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
|
|
|
|
310,116 |
|
|
310,116 |
Other financial assets |
|
190 |
|
43,968 |
3,643 |
4,128 |
|
51,929 |
Intangible assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
6,543 |
6,543 |
Other assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
10,263 |
10,263 |
31 December 2017 |
243,867 |
190 |
2,967 |
43,968 |
426,130 |
4,128 |
16,806 |
738,056 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes:
(1) Mandatory fair value through profit or loss.
(2) Designated as at fair value through profit or loss.
(3) Includes items in the course of collection from other banks of £484 million (2017 - £1,017 million).
Notes on the consolidated accounts
11 Financial instruments - classification continued
|
Held-for- |
|
Hedging |
|
Other |
|
Liabilities |
trading |
DFV (1) |
derivatives |
Amortised cost |
liabilities | |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Bank deposits (2) |
|
|
|
23,297 |
|
23,297 |
Customer deposits (3) |
|
|
|
360,914 |
|
360,914 |
Settlement balances |
|
|
|
3,066 |
|
3,066 |
Trading liabilities |
72,350 |
|
|
|
|
72,350 |
Derivatives |
125,954 |
|
2,943 |
|
|
128,897 |
Other financial liabilities |
|
2,840 |
|
36,892 |
|
39,732 |
Subordinated liabilities |
|
867 |
|
9,668 |
|
10,535 |
Other liabilities |
|
|
|
2,218 |
6,736 |
8,954 |
31 December 2018 |
198,304 |
3,707 |
2,943 |
436,055 |
6,736 |
647,745 |
Bank deposits (2) |
|
|
|
30,396 |
|
30,396 |
Customer deposits (3) |
|
|
|
361,316 |
|
361,316 |
Settlement balances |
|
|
|
2,844 |
|
2,844 |
Trading liabilities |
81,982 |
|
|
|
|
81,982 |
Derivatives |
150,935 |
|
3,571 |
|
|
154,506 |
Other financial liabilities |
|
4,277 |
|
26,049 |
|
30,326 |
Subordinated liabilities |
|
939 |
|
11,783 |
|
12,722 |
Other liabilities |
|
|
|
2,181 |
12,690 |
14,871 |
31 December 2017 |
232,917 |
5,216 |
3,571 |
434,569 |
12,690 |
688,963 |
Notes:
(1) Designated as at fair value through profit or loss.
(2) Includes items in the course of transmission to other banks of £125 million (2017 - £214 million).
(3) The carrying amount of other customer accounts designated as at fair value through profit or loss is £26 million (2017 - £114 million) higher than the principal amount.
The Groups financial assets and liabilities include: |
2018 |
2017 | |
|
£m |
£m | |
Reverse repos |
|
| |
Loans to banks - amortised cost |
3,539 |
2,152 | |
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
9 |
2,308 | |
Trading assets |
24,759 |
36,272 | |
|
|
| |
Repos |
|
| |
Bank deposits |
941 |
3,839 | |
Customer deposits |
3,774 |
6,669 | |
Trading liabilities |
25,645 |
28,363 | |
|
|
|
|
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
Amounts included in operating profit/(loss) before tax: |
£m |
£m |
£m |
(Losses)/Gains on financial assets/liabilities designated as at fair value through profit or loss |
(26) |
60 |
(13) |
The tables below present information on financial assets and financial liabilities that are offset on the balance sheet under IFRS or subject to enforceable master netting agreements together with financial collateral received or given.
|
Instruments which can be offset |
|
Potential for offset not recognised by IFRS |
|
|
| |||||
|
|
|
|
|
Effect of |
|
|
Net amount after |
|
Instruments |
|
2018 |
|
|
|
|
master netting |
|
Other |
the effect of netting |
|
outside |
|
|
IFRS |
Balance |
|
and similar |
Cash |
financial |
arrangements and |
|
netting |
Balance | |
Gross |
offset |
sheet |
|
agreements |
collateral |
collateral |
related collateral |
|
arrangements |
sheet total | |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m | |
Derivative assets |
136,329 |
(5,041) |
131,288 |
|
(106,762) |
(17,937) |
(4,469) |
2,120 |
|
2,061 |
133,349 |
Derivative liabilities |
133,965 |
(6,776) |
127,189 |
|
(106,762) |
(15,227) |
(3,466) |
1,734 |
|
1,708 |
128,897 |
Net position (1) |
2,364 |
1,735 |
4,099 |
|
|
(2,710) |
(1,003) |
386 |
|
353 |
4,452 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Trading reverse repos |
53,148 |
(31,376) |
21,772 |
|
(762) |
|
(21,000) |
10 |
|
2,987 |
24,759 |
Trading repos |
55,864 |
(31,376) |
24,488 |
|
(762) |
|
(23,726) |
|
|
1,157 |
25,645 |
Net position |
(2,716) |
|
(2,716) |
|
|
|
2,726 |
10 |
|
1,830 |
(886) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Derivative assets |
175,670 |
(17,088) |
158,582 |
|
(128,287) |
(20,311) |
(5,850) |
4,134 |
|
2,261 |
160,843 |
Derivative liabilities |
170,405 |
(17,557) |
152,848 |
|
(128,287) |
(18,035) |
(3,952) |
2,574 |
|
1,658 |
154,506 |
Net position (1) |
5,265 |
469 |
5,734 |
|
|
(2,276) |
(1,898) |
1,560 |
|
603 |
6,337 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Trading reverse repos |
65,508 |
(32,639) |
32,869 |
|
(329) |
|
(32,498) |
42 |
|
3,403 |
36,272 |
Trading repos |
58,695 |
(32,639) |
26,056 |
|
(329) |
|
(25,727) |
|
|
2,307 |
28,363 |
Net position |
6,813 |
|
6,813 |
|
|
|
(6,771) |
42 |
|
1,096 |
7,909 |
Note:
(1) The net IFRS offset balance of £1,735 million (2017 - £469 million) relates to variation margin netting reflected on other balance sheet lines.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
12 Financial instruments - valuation
Critical accounting policy: Fair value - financial instruments
In accordance with Accounting policies 13 and 21, financial instruments classified as mandatory fair value through profit or loss, held-for-trading or designated as at fair value through profit or loss and financial assets classified as fair value through other comprehensive income are recognised in the financial statements at fair value. All derivatives are measured at fair value.
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. A fair value measurement takes into account the characteristics of the asset or liability if market participants would take those characteristics into account when pricing the asset or liability at the measurement date. It also uses the assumptions that market participants would use when pricing the asset or liability. In determining fair value the Group maximises the use of relevant observable inputs and minimises the use of unobservable inputs.
Modelled approaches may be used to measure instruments classed as Level 2 or 3. Estimation expertise is required in the selection, implementation and calibration of appropriate models. The resulting modelled valuations are considered for accuracy and reliability. Portfolio level adjustments consistent with IFRS 13 are raised to incorporate counterparty credit risk, funding and margining risks. Expert judgement is used in the initial measurement of modelled products by control teams.
Where the Group manages a group of financial assets and financial liabilities on the basis of its net exposure to either market risks or credit risk, it measures the fair value of a group of financial assets and financial liabilities on the basis of the price that it would receive to sell a net long position (i.e. an asset) for a particular risk exposure or to transfer a net short position (i.e. a liability) for a particular risk exposure in an orderly transaction at the measurement date under current market conditions. Credit valuation adjustments are made when valuing derivative financial assets to incorporate counterparty credit risk. Adjustments are also made when valuing financial liabilities measured at fair value to reflect the Groups own credit standing.
Where the market for a financial instrument is not active, fair value is established using a valuation technique. These valuation techniques involve a degree of estimation, the extent of which depends on the instruments complexity and the availability of market-based data. Further details about the valuation methodologies and the sensitivity to reasonably possible alternative assumptions of the fair value of financial instruments valued using techniques where at least one significant input is unobservable are given below.
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||
|
Level 1 |
Level 2 |
Level 3 |
|
Level 1 |
Level 2 |
Level 3 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Trading assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans |
|
44,983 |
120 |
|
|
58,331 |
150 |
Securities |
22,003 |
7,312 |
701 |
|
19,648 |
7,009 |
853 |
Derivatives |
|
131,513 |
1,836 |
|
10 |
159,109 |
1,724 |
Other financial assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans |
|
768 |
136 |
|
|
|
56 |
Securities |
40,132 |
6,172 |
507 |
|
37,147 |
6,450 |
505 |
Total financial assets held at fair value |
62,135 |
190,748 |
3,300 |
|
56,805 |
230,899 |
3,288 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Trading liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Deposits |
|
47,243 |
377 |
|
|
52,109 |
239 |
Debt securities in issue |
|
791 |
112 |
|
|
1,057 |
50 |
Short positions |
18,941 |
4,886 |
|
|
23,715 |
4,796 |
16 |
Derivatives |
|
127,709 |
1,188 |
|
2 |
152,886 |
1,618 |
Other financial liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Debt securities in issue |
|
2,348 |
280 |
|
|
3,141 |
262 |
Other deposits |
|
212 |
|
|
|
874 |
|
Subordinated liabilities |
|
867 |
|
|
|
939 |
|
Total financial liabilities held at fair value |
18,941 |
184,056 |
1,957 |
|
23,717 |
215,802 |
2,185 |
Notes:
(1) Transfers between levels are deemed to have occurred at the beginning of the quarter in which the instruments were transferred.
(2) For an analysis of debt securities, by issuer, measurement classification and analysis of asset backed securities, and derivatives, by type and contract, refer to Capital and Risk management Credit risk.
(3) The determination of an instruments level cannot be made at a global product level as a single product type can be in more than one level. For example, a single name corporate credit default swap could be in level 2 or level 3 depending on whether the reference counterpartys obligations are liquid or illiquid.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
12 Financial instruments - valuation continued
Fair value hierarchy
Financial Instruments carried at fair value have been classified under the IFRS fair value hierarchy as follows.
Level 1 Instruments valued using unadjusted quoted prices in active and liquid markets, for identical financial instruments. Examples include government bonds, listed equity shares and certain exchange-traded derivatives.
Level 2 - instruments valued using valuation techniques that have observable inputs., Examples include most government agency securities, investment-grade corporate bonds, certain mortgage products, including CLOs, most bank loans, repos and reverse repos, less liquid listed equities, state and municipal obligations, most notes issued, and certain money market securities and loan commitments and most OTC derivatives.
Level 3 - instruments valued using a valuation technique where at least one input which could have a significant effect on the instruments valuation, is not based on observable market data. Examples include cash instruments which trade infrequently, certain syndicated and commercial mortgage loans, certain emerging markets and derivatives with unobservable model inputs.
Valuation techniques
RBS derives fair value of its instruments differently depending on whether the instrument is a non-modelled or a modelled product.
Non-modelled products are valued directly from a price input typically on a position by position basis and include cash, equities and most debt securities.
Modelled products valued using a pricing model range in complexity from comparatively vanilla products such as interest rate swaps and options (e.g. interest rate caps and floors) through to more complex derivatives. The valuation of modelled products requires an appropriate model and inputs into this model. Sometimes models are also used to derive inputs (e.g. to construct volatility surfaces). RBS uses a number of modelling methodologies.
Inputs to valuation models
Values between and beyond available data points are obtained by interpolation and extrapolation. When utilising valuation techniques, the fair value can be significantly affected by the choice of valuation model and by underlying assumptions concerning factors such as the amounts and timing of cash flows, discount rates and credit risk. The principal inputs to these valuation techniques are as follows:
Bond prices - quoted prices are generally available for government bonds, certain corporate securities and some mortgage-related products.
Credit spreads - where available, these are derived from prices of credit default swaps or other credit based instruments, such as debt securities. For others, credit spreads are obtained from third-party benchmarking services. For counterparty credit spreads, adjustments are made to market prices (or parameters) when the creditworthiness of the counterparty differs from that of the assumed counterparty in the market price (or parameters).
Interest rates - these are principally benchmark interest rates such as the London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR), Overnight Index Swaps (OIS) rate and other quoted interest rates in the swap, bond and futures markets.
Foreign currency exchange rates - there are observable prices both for spot and forward contracts and futures in the worlds major currencies.
Equity and equity index prices - quoted prices are generally readily available for equity shares listed on the worlds major stock exchanges and for major indices on such shares.
Commodity prices - many commodities are actively traded in spot and forward contracts and futures on exchanges in London, New York and other commercial centres.
Price volatilities and correlations - volatility is a measure of the tendency of a price to change with time.
Correlation measures the degree which two or more prices or other variables are observed to move together.
Prepayment rates - the fair value of a financial instrument that can be prepaid by the issuer or borrower differs from that of an instrument that cannot be prepaid. In valuing prepayable instruments that are not quoted in active markets, RBS considers the value of the prepayment option.
Recovery rates/loss given default - these are used as an input to valuation models and reserves for asset-backed securities and other credit products as an indicator of severity of losses on default. Recovery rates are primarily sourced from market data providers or inferred from observable credit spreads.
Valuation control
RBSs control environment for the determination of the fair value of financial instruments includes formalised protocols for the review and validation of fair values independent of the businesses entering into the transactions.
Independent price verification (IPV) is a key element of the control environment. Valuations are first performed by the business which entered into the transaction. Such valuations may be directly from available prices, or may be derived using a model and variable model inputs. These valuations are reviewed, and if necessary amended, by a team independent of those trading the financial instruments, in the light of available pricing evidence.
Where measurement differences are identified through the IPV process these are grouped by fair value level and quality of data. If the size of the difference exceeds defined thresholds adjustment to independent levels are made.
IPV takes place at least each monthly, for all fair value positions. The IPV control includes formalised reporting and escalation of any valuation differences in breach of established thresholds.
The Modelled Product Review Committee sets the policy for model documentation, testing and review, and prioritises models with significant exposure being reviewed by the RBS Model Risk team. Valuation Committees are made up of valuation specialists and senior business representatives from various functions and oversees pricing, reserving and valuations issues. These committees meet monthly to review and ratify any methodology changes. The Executive Valuation Committee meets quarterly to address key material and subjective valuation issues, to review items escalated by Valuation Committees and to discuss other relevant matters of including prudential valuation.
Initial classification of a financial instrument is carried out by the Product Control team following the principles in IFRS 13. They base their judgment on information gathered during the IPV process for instruments which include the sourcing of independent prices and model inputs. The quality and completeness of the information gathered in the IPV process gives an indication as to the liquidity and valuation uncertainty of an instrument. These initial classifications are subject to senior management review. Particular attention is paid to instruments crossing from one level to another, new instrument classes or products, instruments that are generating significant profit and loss and instruments where valuation uncertainty is high.
RBS uses consensus prices for the IPV of some instruments. The consensus service encompasses the equity, interest rate, currency, commodity, credit, property, fund and bond markets, providing comprehensive matrices of vanilla prices and a wide selection of exotic products.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
12 Financial instruments - valuation continued
RBS contributes to consensus pricing services where there is a significant interest either from a positional point of view or to test models for future business use. Data sourced from consensus pricing services are used for a combination of control processes including direct price testing, evidence of observability and model testing. In practice this means that RBS submits prices for all material positions for which a service is available. Data from consensus services are subject to the same level of quality review as other inputs used for IPV process.
In order to determine a reliable fair value, where appropriate, management applies valuation adjustments to the pricing information gathered from the above sources. The sources of independent data are reviewed for quality and are applied in the IPV processes using a formalised input quality hierarchy. These adjustments reflect RBSs assessment of factors that market participants would consider in setting a price.
Where unobservable inputs are used, RBS may determine a range of possible valuations derived from differing stress scenarios to determine the sensitivity associated with the valuation. When establishing the fair value of a financial instrument using a valuation technique, RBS considers adjustments to the modelled price which market participants would make when pricing that instrument. Such adjustments include the credit quality of the counterparty and adjustments to compensate for model limitations.
When valuing financial instruments in the trading book, adjustments are made to mid-market valuations to cover bid-offer spread, funding and credit risk. These adjustments are presented in the table below:
Adjustment |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
Funding FVA |
|
250 |
|
440 |
Credit CVA |
|
419 |
|
346 |
Bid Offer |
|
238 |
|
285 |
Product and deal specific |
|
327 |
|
1,033 |
|
|
1,234 |
|
2,104 |
The reduction in valuation reserves was primarily driven by a combination of trade close-out activity and a reallocation of product and deal specific reserves that are now included within the discount rate applied to the derivative cash flows. There was a net increase in CVA due to the extension of the CVA reserve to include margin period of risk on collateralised counterparties and a reclassification of product and deal specific reserves to CVA.
Funding valuation adjustment (FVA)
FVA represents an estimate of the adjustment that a market participant would make to incorporate funding costs and benefits that arise in relation to derivative exposures. FVA is calculated as a portfolio level adjustment.
Funding levels are applied to estimated potential future exposures. For uncollateralised derivatives, the modelling of the exposure is consistent with the approach used in the calculation of CVA, and the counterparty contingent nature of the exposure is reflected in the calculation. For collateralised derivatives, the exposure reflects initial margin posting requirements.
Credit valuation adjustments (CVA)
CVA represents an estimate of the adjustment to fair value that a market participant would make to incorporate the counterparty credit risk inherent in derivative exposures. CVA is actively managed by a credit and market risk hedging process, and therefore movements in CVA are partially offset by trading revenue on the hedges.
The CVA is calculated on a portfolio basis reflecting an estimate of the amount a third party would charge to assume the credit risk.
Collateral held under a credit support agreement is factored into the CVA calculation. In such cases where RBS holds collateral against counterparty exposures, CVA is held to the extent that residual risk remains.
Bid-offer
Fair value positions are adjusted to bid (long positions) or offer (short positions) levels, by marking individual cash positions directly to bid or offer or by taking bid-offer reserves calculated on a portfolio basis for derivatives exposures. The bid-offer approach is based on current market spreads and standard market bucketing of risk.
Bid-offer spreads vary by maturity and risk type to reflect different spreads in the market. For positions where there is no observable quote, the bid-offer spreads are widened in comparison to proxies to reflect reduced liquidity or observability. Bid-offer methodologies may also incorporate liquidity triggers whereby wider spreads are applied to risks above pre-defined thresholds.
As permitted by IFRS 13, netting is applied on a portfolio basis to reflect the value at which RBS believes it could exit the portfolio, rather than the sum of exit costs for each of the portfolios individual trades. This is applied where the asset and liability positions are managed as a portfolio for risk and reporting purposes.
The discount rates applied to derivative cash flows in determining fair value reflect any underlying collateral agreements. Collateralised derivatives are generally discounted at the relevant OIS-related rates at an individual trade level. Reserves are held to the extent that the discount rates applied do not reflect all of the terms of the collateral agreements.
Product and deal specific
On initial recognition of financial assets and liabilities valued using valuation techniques incorporating information other than observable market data, any difference between the transaction price and that derived from the valuation technique is deferred. Such amounts are recognised in profit or loss over the life of the transaction; when market data becomes observable; or when the transaction matures or is closed out as appropriate. At 31 December 2018, net gains of £59 million (2017 - £56 million) were carried forward. During the year, net gains of £151 million (2017 - £64 million) were deferred and £148 million (2017 - £80 million) were recognised in the income statement.
Where system generated valuations do not accurately recover market prices, manuals valuation adjustments are applied either at a position or portfolio level. Manual adjustments are subject to the scrutiny of independent control teams and are subject to monthly review by senior management.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
12 Financial instruments valuation: Level 3 ranges of unobservable inputs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||
Financial instrument |
|
Valuation Technique |
|
Unobservable inputs |
|
Units |
|
Low |
|
High |
|
Low |
|
High |
Trading assets and Other financial assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| ||||
Loans |
|
Price-based |
|
Price |
|
% |
|
0 |
|
132 |
|
0 |
|
101 |
Debt securities |
|
Price-based |
|
Price |
|
GBP |
|
0 |
|
154 |
|
0 |
|
370 |
Equity Shares |
|
Price-based |
|
Price |
|
GBP |
|
0 |
|
24,181 |
|
0 |
|
585,066 |
|
|
Valuation |
|
Discount factor |
|
% |
|
8 |
|
11 |
|
9 |
|
13 |
|
|
Valuation |
|
Fund NAV |
|
% |
|
80 |
|
120 |
|
80 |
|
120 |
Trading liabilities and Other financial liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| ||||
Customer accounts |
|
DCF based on recoveries |
|
Correlation |
|
% |
|
(45) |
|
99 |
|
(29) |
|
86 |
|
|
|
|
Interest rate |
|
% |
|
(0.36) |
|
1.74 |
|
(0.38) |
|
2.61 |
Debt securities in issue |
|
Price-based |
|
Price |
|
CCY |
|
21 JPY |
|
136 EUR |
|
56 JPY |
|
149 EUR |
|
|
Valuation |
|
Fund NAV |
|
GBP |
|
0 |
|
622 |
|
0 |
|
977 |
Derivative assets and liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| ||||
Credit derivatives |
|
DCF based on recoveries |
|
Credit spreads |
|
bps |
|
18 |
|
500 |
|
0 |
|
500 |
|
|
Option pricing |
|
Correlation |
|
% |
|
(50) |
|
80 |
|
(50) |
|
80 |
|
|
|
|
Volatility |
|
% |
|
47 |
|
80 |
|
38 |
|
80 |
|
|
|
|
Upfront points |
|
% |
|
0 |
|
100 |
|
0 |
|
99 |
|
|
|
|
Recovery rate |
|
% |
|
10 |
|
40 |
|
10 |
|
40 |
|
|
Price-based |
|
Price |
|
% |
|
90 |
|
110 |
|
|
|
|
Interest rate & FX derivatives |
|
Option pricing |
|
Correlation |
|
% |
|
(45) |
|
99 |
|
(75) |
|
100 |
|
|
|
Volatility |
|
% |
|
1 |
|
76 |
|
0 |
|
292 | |
Equity derivatives |
|
Option pricing |
|
Correlation |
|
% |
|
(57) |
|
92 |
|
(57) |
|
95 |
|
|
|
|
Forward |
|
Points |
|
864 |
|
7,106 |
|
146 |
|
189 |
|
|
|
|
Volatility |
|
% |
|
1 |
|
49 |
|
7 |
|
11 |
Notes:
(1) The table above presents the range of values for significant inputs used in the valuation of level 3 assets and liabilities. The range represents the highest and lowest values of the input parameters and therefore is not a measure of parameter uncertainty. Movements in the underlying input may have a favourable or unfavourable impact on the valuation depending on the particular terms of the contract and the exposure. For example, an increase in the credit spread of a bond would be favourable for the issuer but unfavourable for the note holder. Whilst RBS indicates where it considers that there are significant relationships between the inputs, their inter-relationships will be affected by macro economic factors including interest rates, foreign exchange rates or equity index levels.
(2) Credit spreads and discount margins: credit spreads and margins express the return required over a benchmark rate or index to compensate for the credit risk associated with a cash instrument. A higher credit spread would indicate that the underlying instrument has more credit risk associated with it. Consequently, investors require a higher yield to compensate for the higher risk.
(3) Price and yield: There may be a range of prices used to value an instrument that may be a direct comparison of one instrument or portfolio with another or, movements in a more liquid instrument may be used to indicate the movement in the value of a less liquid instrument. The comparison may also be indirect in that adjustments are made to the price to reflect differences between the pricing source and the instrument being valued.
(4) Recovery rate: reflects market expectations about the return of principal for a debt instrument or other obligations after a credit event or on liquidation. Recovery rates tend to move conversely to credit spreads.
(5) Valuation: for private equity investments, values may be estimated by looking at past prices of similar stocks and from valuation statements where valuations are usually derived from earnings measures such as EBITDA or net asset value (NAV). Similarly for equity or bond fund investments, prices may be estimated from valuation or credit statements using NAV or similar measures.
(6) Correlation: measures the degree by which two prices or other variables are observed to move together. If they move in the same direction there is positive correlation; if they move in opposite directions there is negative correlation. Correlations typically include relationships between: default probabilities of assets in a basket (a group of separate assets), exchange rates, interest rates and other financial variables.
(7) Volatility: a measure of the tendency of a price to change with time.
(8) Interest rate delta: these ranges represent the low/high marks on the relevant discounting curve.
(9) Upfront points: where CDS contracts are standardised, the inherent spread of the trade may exceed the standard premium paid or received under the contract. Upfront points will compensate for the difference between the standard premium and the actual premium at the start of the contract.
(10) RBS does not have any material liabilities measured at fair value that are issued with an inseparable third party credit enhancement.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
12 Financial instruments valuation: areas of judgment
Whilst the business has simplified, the diverse range of products historically traded by RBS results in a wide range of instruments that are classified into Level 3 of the hierarchy. Whilst the majority of these instruments naturally fall into a particular level, for some products an element of judgment is required. The majority of RBS financial instruments carried at fair value are classified as Level 2. IFRS requires extra disclosures in respect of level 3 instruments.
Active and inactive markets
A key input in the decision making process for the allocation of assets to a particular level is market activity. In general, the degree of valuation uncertainty depends on the degree of liquidity of an input.
Where markets are liquid, little judgment is required. However, when the information regarding the liquidity in a particular market is not clear, a judgment may need to be made. This can be more difficult as assessing the liquidity of a market is not always straightforward. For an equity traded on an exchange, daily volumes of trading can be seen, but for an over-the-counter (OTC) derivative assessing the liquidity of the market with no central exchange is more difficult.
A key related matter is where a market moves from liquid to illiquid or vice versa. Where this change is considered to be temporary, the classification is not changed. For example, if there is little market trading in a product on a reporting date but at the previous reporting date and during the intervening period the market has been considered to be liquid, the instrument will continue to be classified in the same level in the hierarchy. This is to provide consistency so that transfers between levels are driven by genuine changes in market liquidity and do not reflect short term or seasonal effects. Material movements between levels are reviewed quarterly.
The breadth and depth of the IPV data allows for a rules based quality assessment to be made of market activity, liquidity and pricing uncertainty, which assists with the process of allocation to an appropriate level. Where suitable independent pricing information is not readily available, the quality assessment will result in the instrument being assessed as Level 3.
Modelled products
For modelled products the market convention is to quote these trades through the model inputs or parameters as opposed to a cash price equivalent. A mark-to-market is derived from the use of the independent market inputs calculated using RBSs model.
The decision to classify a modelled instrument as Level 2 or 3 will be dependent upon the product/model combination, the currency, the maturity, the observability and quality of input parameters and other factors. All these must be assessed to classify the asset. If an input fails the observability or quality tests then the instrument is considered to be in Level 3 unless the input can be shown to have an insignificant effect on the overall valuation of the product.
The majority of derivative instruments for example vanilla interest rate swaps, foreign exchange swaps and liquid single name credit derivatives are classified as Level 2 as they are vanilla products valued using observable inputs. The valuation uncertainty on these is considered to be low and both input and output testing may be available.
Non-modelled products
Non-modelled products are generally quoted on a price basis and can therefore be considered for each of the three levels. This is determined by the market activity, liquidity and valuation uncertainty of the instruments which is in turn measured from the availability of independent data used by the IPV process to allocate positions to IPV quality levels.
The availability and quality of independent pricing information are considered during the classification process. An assessment is made regarding the quality of the independent information. For example, where consensus prices are used for non-modelled products, a key assessment of the quality of a price is the depth of the number of prices used to provide the consensus price. If the depth of contributors falls below a set hurdle rate, the instrument is considered to be Level 3. This hurdle rate is that used in the IPV process to determine the IPV quality rating. However, where an instrument is generally considered to be illiquid, but regular quotes from market participants exist, these instruments may be classified as Level 2 depending on frequency of quotes, other available pricing and whether the quotes are used as part of the IPV process or not.
For some instruments with a wide number of available price sources, there may be differing quality of available information and there may be a wide range of prices from different sources. In these situations the highest quality source is used to determine the classification of the asset. For example, a tradable quote would be considered a better source than a consensus price.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||||
|
|
Level 3 |
|
Favourable |
|
Unfavourable |
|
Level 3 |
|
Favourable |
|
Unfavourable |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Trading assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans |
|
120 |
|
10 |
|
(10) |
|
150 |
|
|
|
|
Securities |
|
701 |
|
20 |
|
(10) |
|
853 |
|
30 |
|
(10) |
Derivatives |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest rate |
|
1,487 |
|
120 |
|
(120) |
|
1,340 |
|
140 |
|
(140) |
Foreign exchange |
|
130 |
|
10 |
|
(10) |
|
148 |
|
10 |
|
(10) |
Other |
|
219 |
|
10 |
|
(20) |
|
236 |
|
10 |
|
(20) |
Other financial assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans |
|
136 |
|
10 |
|
(20) |
|
56 |
|
|
|
|
Securities |
|
507 |
|
50 |
|
(30) |
|
505 |
|
20 |
|
(30) |
|
|
3,300 |
|
230 |
|
(220) |
|
3,288 |
|
210 |
|
(210) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Trading liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Deposits |
|
377 |
|
40 |
|
(40) |
|
239 |
|
20 |
|
(20) |
Debt securities in issue |
|
112 |
|
10 |
|
(10) |
|
50 |
|
|
|
|
Short positions |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
16 |
|
|
|
|
Derivatives |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest rate |
|
808 |
|
70 |
|
(70) |
|
1,104 |
|
120 |
|
(120) |
Foreign exchange |
|
279 |
|
10 |
|
(10) |
|
358 |
|
10 |
|
(10) |
Other |
|
101 |
|
|
|
(10) |
|
156 |
|
10 |
|
(10) |
Other financial liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Debt securities in issue |
|
280 |
|
10 |
|
(10) |
|
262 |
|
10 |
|
(10) |
|
|
1,957 |
|
140 |
|
(150) |
|
2,185 |
|
170 |
|
(170) |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
12 Financial instruments valuation: level 3 sensitivities
The Level 3 sensitivities presented above are calculated at a trade or low level portfolio basis. They are not calculated on an overall portfolio basis and therefore do not reflect the likely potential uncertainty on the portfolio as a whole. The figures are aggregated and do not reflect the correlated nature of some of the sensitivities. In particular, for some of the portfolios the sensitivities may be negatively correlated where a downwards movement in one asset would produce an upwards movement in another, but due to the additive presentation of the above figures this correlation cannot be displayed. The actual potential downside sensitivity of the total portfolio may be less than the non-correlated sum of the additive figures as shown in the above table.
Reasonably plausible alternative assumptions of unobservable inputs are determined based on a specified target level of certainty of 90%. The assessments recognise different favourable and unfavourable valuation movements where appropriate. Each unobservable input within a product is considered separately and sensitivity is reported on an additive basis.
Alternative assumptions are determined with reference to all available evidence including consideration of the following: quality of independent pricing information taking into account consistency between different sources, variation over time, perceived tradability or otherwise of available quotes; consensus service dispersion ranges; volume of trading activity and market bias (e.g. one-way inventory); day 1 profit or loss arising on new trades; number and nature of market participants; market conditions; modelling consistency in the market; size and nature of risk; length of holding of position; and market intelligence.
Other considerations
Whilst certain inputs used to calculate CVA, FVA and own credit adjustments are not based on observable market data, the uncertainty of the inputs is not considered to have a significant effect on the net valuation of the related derivative portfolios and issued debt. The classification of the derivative portfolios and issued debt is not determined by the observability of these inputs and any related sensitivity does not form part of the Level 3 sensitivities presented.
Level 3
The following table shows the movement in level 3 assets and liabilities in the year.
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||
|
Trading |
Other financial |
Total |
Total |
|
Trading |
Other financial |
Total |
Total |
|
assets (3) |
assets (4) |
assets |
liabilities |
|
assets (3) |
assets (4) |
assets |
liabilities |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
At 1 January (1) |
2,692 |
530 |
3,222 |
2,187 |
|
3,933 |
604 |
4,537 |
2,997 |
Amounts recorded in the income statement (2) |
(147) |
178 |
31 |
(344) |
|
(593) |
21 |
(572) |
(341) |
Amounts recorded in the statement of comprehensive income |
|
23 |
23 |
|
|
|
2 |
2 |
|
Level 3 transfers in |
1,307 |
19 |
1,326 |
419 |
|
679 |
315 |
994 |
530 |
Level 3 transfers out |
(624) |
(1) |
(625) |
(231) |
|
(1,015) |
(3) |
(1,018) |
(672) |
Issuances |
|
|
|
47 |
|
371 |
|
371 |
|
Purchases |
871 |
16 |
887 |
401 |
|
1,788 |
20 |
1,808 |
412 |
Settlements |
(512) |
(3) |
(515) |
(204) |
|
(161) |
|
(161) |
(423) |
Sales |
(930) |
(125) |
(1,055) |
(316) |
|
(2,286) |
(369) |
(2,655) |
(323) |
Foreign exchange and other adjustments |
|
6 |
6 |
(2) |
|
11 |
(29) |
(18) |
5 |
At 31 December |
2,657 |
643 |
3,300 |
1,957 |
|
2,727 |
561 |
3,288 |
2,185 |
Amounts recorded in the income statement in respect of balances held at year end |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- unrealised |
(134) |
158 |
24 |
(330) |
|
(59) |
(21) |
(80) |
595 |
- realised |
(2) |
6 |
4 |
|
|
271 |
5 |
276 |
(100) |
Notes:
(1) Refer to Note 33 for further information on the impact of IFRS9 on classification and basis of preparation, year ended 31 December 2018 prepared under IFRS9 and prior years under IAS39.
(2) There were £185 million net losses on trading assets and liabilities (2017 - £240 million HFT) recorded in income from trading activities. Net losses on other instruments of £190 million (2017 - £9 million gains) were recorded in other operating income and interest income as appropriate.
(3) Trading assets comprise assets held at fair value in trading portfolios.
(4) Other financial assets comprise fair value through other comprehensive income (2017 - available-for-sale), designated at fair value through profit or loss and other fair value through profit or loss.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
12 Financial instruments: fair value of financial instruments not carried at fair value
The following table shows the carrying value and fair value of financial instruments carried at amortised cost on the balance sheet.
|
|
Items where fair value |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
approximates |
|
Carrying |
|
|
Fair value hierarchy level | ||||
|
|
carrying value |
|
value |
|
Fair value |
Level 1 |
|
Level 2 |
|
Level 3 |
2018 |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
£bn |
|
£bn |
|
£bn |
Financial assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and balances at central banks |
|
88.9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Settlement balances |
|
2.9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans to banks |
|
0.5 |
|
12.4 |
|
12.4 |
|
|
9.2 |
|
3.2 |
Loans to customers |
|
|
|
305.1 |
|
301.7 |
|
|
0.5 |
|
301.2 |
Other financial assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Securities |
|
|
|
11.8 |
|
11.8 |
7.3 |
|
3.0 |
|
1.5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Financial liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
|
4.2 |
|
19.1 |
|
18.5 |
|
|
13.9 |
|
4.6 |
Customer deposits |
|
307.1 |
|
53.8 |
|
54.6 |
|
|
10.4 |
|
44.2 |
Settlement balances |
|
3.1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other financial liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Debt securities in issue |
|
|
|
36.9 |
|
38.6 |
|
|
36.9 |
|
1.7 |
Subordinated liabilities |
|
|
|
9.7 |
|
10.0 |
|
|
9.9 |
|
0.1 |
Other liabilities - notes in circulation |
|
2.2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Financial assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and balances at central banks |
|
98.3 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Settlement balances |
|
2.5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans to banks |
|
1.0 |
|
10.5 |
|
10.5 |
|
|
9.1 |
|
1.4 |
Loans to customers |
|
|
|
310.1 |
|
306.8 |
|
|
1.3 |
|
305.5 |
Other financial assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Securities |
|
|
|
7.8 |
|
7.9 |
4.3 |
|
1.5 |
|
2.1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Financial liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
|
4.5 |
|
25.9 |
|
26.0 |
|
|
22.4 |
|
3.6 |
Customer deposits |
|
321.5 |
|
39.8 |
|
39.9 |
|
|
12.9 |
|
27.0 |
Settlement balances |
|
2.8 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other financial liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Debt securities in issue |
|
|
|
26.0 |
|
27.3 |
|
|
22.2 |
|
5.1 |
Subordinated liabilities |
|
|
|
11.8 |
|
12.6 |
|
|
12.5 |
|
0.1 |
Other liabilities - notes in circulation |
|
2.2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes on the consolidated accounts
12 Financial instruments: fair value of financial instruments not carried at fair value continued
The fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Quoted market values are used where available; otherwise, fair values have been estimated based on discounted expected future cash flows and other valuation techniques. These techniques involve uncertainties and require assumptions and judgments covering prepayments, credit risk and discount rates. Furthermore there is a wide range of potential valuation techniques. Changes in these assumptions would significantly affect estimated fair values. The fair values reported would not necessarily be realised in an immediate sale or settlement.
The assumptions and methodologies underlying the calculation of fair values of financial instruments at the balance sheet date are as follows:
Short-term financial instruments
For certain short-term financial instruments: cash and balances at central banks, items in the course of collection from other banks, settlement balances, items in the course of transmission to other banks, customer demand deposits and notes in circulation, carrying value is a reasonable approximation of fair value.
Loans to banks and customers
In estimating the fair value of net loans to customers and banks measured at amortised cost, RBSs loans are segregated into appropriate portfolios reflecting the characteristics of the constituent loans. Two principal methods are used to estimate fair value:
(a) Contractual cash flows are discounted using a market discount rate that incorporates the current spread for the borrower or where this is not observable, the spread for borrowers of a similar credit standing. This method is used for portfolios where counterparties have external ratings: institutional and corporate lending in NatWest Markets.
(b) Expected cash flows (unadjusted for credit losses) are discounted at the current offer rate for the same or similar products. This approach is adopted for lending portfolios in UK PBB, Ulster Bank RoI, Commercial Banking (SME loans) and Private Banking in order to reflect the homogeneous nature of these portfolios.
For certain portfolios where there are very few or no recent transactions, a bespoke approach is used.
Debt securities
The majority of debt securities are valued using quoted prices in active markets, or using quoted prices for similar assets in active markets. Fair values of the rest are determined using discounted cash flow valuation techniques.
Deposits by banks and customer accounts
Fair values of deposits are estimated using discounted cash flow valuation techniques.
Debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities
Fair values are determined using quoted prices for similar liabilities where available or by reference to valuation techniques, adjusting for own credit spreads where appropriate.
13 Financial instruments - maturity analysis
Remaining maturity
The following table shows the residual maturity of financial instruments, based on contractual date of maturity.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||||
|
|
Less than |
|
More than |
|
|
|
Less than |
|
More than |
|
|
|
|
12 months |
|
12 months |
|
Total |
|
12 months |
|
12 months |
|
Total |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and balances at central banks |
|
88,897 |
|
|
|
88,897 |
|
98,337 |
|
|
|
98,337 |
Trading assets |
|
49,094 |
|
26,025 |
|
75,119 |
|
66,315 |
|
19,676 |
|
85,991 |
Derivatives |
|
28,503 |
|
104,846 |
|
133,349 |
|
32,372 |
|
128,471 |
|
160,843 |
Settlement balances |
|
2,928 |
|
|
|
2,928 |
|
2,517 |
|
|
|
2,517 |
Loans to banks - amortised cost |
|
12,833 |
|
114 |
|
12,947 |
|
11,424 |
|
93 |
|
11,517 |
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
|
67,354 |
|
237,735 |
|
305,089 |
|
69,832 |
|
240,284 |
|
310,116 |
Other financial assets |
|
11,681 |
|
47,804 |
|
59,485 |
|
8,776 |
|
43,153 |
|
51,929 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
|
7,438 |
|
15,859 |
|
23,297 |
|
10,813 |
|
19,583 |
|
30,396 |
Customer deposits |
|
359,148 |
|
1,766 |
|
360,914 |
|
358,857 |
|
2,459 |
|
361,316 |
Settlement balances |
|
3,066 |
|
|
|
3,066 |
|
2,844 |
|
|
|
2,844 |
Trading liabilities |
|
50,668 |
|
21,682 |
|
72,350 |
|
53,787 |
|
28,195 |
|
81,982 |
Derivatives |
|
29,028 |
|
99,869 |
|
128,897 |
|
32,212 |
|
122,294 |
|
154,506 |
Other financial liabilities |
|
8,240 |
|
31,492 |
|
39,732 |
|
8,467 |
|
21,859 |
|
30,326 |
Subordinated liabilities |
|
299 |
|
10,236 |
|
10,535 |
|
2,383 |
|
10,339 |
|
12,722 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
13 Financial instruments maturity analysis continued
Assets and liabilities by contractual cash flow maturity
The tables below show the contractual undiscounted cash flows receivable and payable, up to a period of 20 years, including future receipts and payments of interest of financial assets and liabilities by contractual maturity. The balances in the following tables do not agree directly with the consolidated balance sheet, as the tables include all cash flows relating to principal and future coupon payments, presented on an undiscounted basis. The tables have been prepared on the following basis:
Financial assets have been reflected in the time band of the latest date on which they could be repaid, unless earlier repayment can be demanded by RBS. Financial liabilities are included at the earliest date on which the counterparty can require repayment, regardless of whether or not such early repayment results in a penalty. If the repayment of a financial instrument is triggered by, or is subject to, specific criteria such as market price hurdles being reached, the asset is included in the time band that contains the latest date on which it can be repaid, regardless of early repayment.
The liability is included in the time band that contains the earliest possible date on which the conditions could be fulfilled, without considering the probability of the conditions being met.
For example, if a structured note is automatically prepaid when an equity index exceeds a certain level, the cash outflow will be included in the less than three months period, whatever the level of the index at the year end. The settlement date of debt securities in issue, issued by certain securitisation vehicles consolidated by RBS, depends on when cash flows are received from the securitised assets. Where these assets are prepayable, the timing of the cash outflow relating to securities assumes that each asset will be prepaid at the earliest possible date. As the repayments of assets and liabilities are linked, the repayment of assets in securitisations is shown on the earliest date that the asset can be prepaid, as this is the basis used for liabilities.
The principal amounts of financial assets and liabilities that are repayable after 20 years or where the counterparty has no right to repayment of the principal are excluded from the table, as are interest payments after 20 years.
MFVTPL assets of £207.9 billion (2017 - £243.9 billion) and HFT liabilities of £198.3 billion (2017 - £232.9 billion) have been excluded from the following tables.
|
|
0-3 months |
|
3-12 months |
|
1-3 years |
|
3-5 years |
|
5-10 years |
|
10-20 years |
2018 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Assets by contractual maturity |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and balances at central banks |
|
88,897 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Settlement balances |
|
2,928 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans to banks - amortised cost |
|
11,920 |
|
925 |
|
106 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other financial assets (1) |
|
4,451 |
|
7,397 |
|
14,138 |
|
11,279 |
|
11,826 |
|
2,744 |
Total maturing assets |
|
108,196 |
|
8,322 |
|
14,244 |
|
11,279 |
|
11,826 |
|
2,744 |
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
|
43,096 |
|
32,087 |
|
66,441 |
|
51,839 |
|
66,978 |
|
79,543 |
Derivatives held for hedging |
|
224 |
|
529 |
|
995 |
|
345 |
|
152 |
|
130 |
|
|
151,516 |
|
40,938 |
|
81,680 |
|
63,463 |
|
78,956 |
|
82,417 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liabilities by contractual maturity |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
|
7,417 |
|
21 |
|
13,785 |
|
2,003 |
|
|
|
59 |
Settlement balance |
|
3,066 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other financial liabilities |
|
1,736 |
|
7,226 |
|
10,724 |
|
11,658 |
|
9,316 |
|
2,029 |
Subordinated liabilities |
|
131 |
|
637 |
|
1,476 |
|
7,532 |
|
1,737 |
|
1,422 |
Other liabilities (2) |
|
2,152 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total maturing liabilities |
|
14,502 |
|
7,884 |
|
25,985 |
|
21,193 |
|
11,053 |
|
3,510 |
Customer deposits |
|
351,054 |
|
8,114 |
|
1,727 |
|
14 |
|
6 |
|
26 |
Derivatives held for hedging |
|
181 |
|
306 |
|
1,062 |
|
416 |
|
637 |
|
531 |
|
|
365,737 |
|
16,304 |
|
28,774 |
|
21,623 |
|
11,696 |
|
4,067 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Guarantees and commitments notional amount |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Guarantees (3) |
|
3,952 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Commitments (4) |
|
116,843 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
120,795 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For notes to the above table refer to the following page.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
13 Financial instruments maturity analysis continued
|
0-3 months |
3-12 months |
1-3 years |
3-5 years |
5-10 years |
10-20 years |
2017 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Assets by contractual maturity |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and balances at central banks |
98,337 |
|
|
|
|
|
Settlement balances |
2,517 |
|
|
|
|
|
Loans to banks - amortised cost |
10,792 |
633 |
94 |
|
|
|
Other financial assets (1) |
3,675 |
5,889 |
11,960 |
11,312 |
12,813 |
3,638 |
Total maturing assets |
115,321 |
6,522 |
12,054 |
11,312 |
12,813 |
3,638 |
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
45,898 |
32,031 |
65,077 |
52,016 |
68,500 |
81,995 |
Derivatives held for hedging |
281 |
832 |
1,336 |
334 |
166 |
111 |
|
161,500 |
39,385 |
78,467 |
63,662 |
81,479 |
85,744 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liabilities by contractual maturity |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
9,180 |
1,740 |
3,614 |
16,023 |
61 |
71 |
Settlement balances |
2,844 |
|
|
|
|
|
Other financial liabilities |
4,360 |
4,777 |
10,640 |
3,731 |
9,762 |
49 |
Subordinated liabilities |
87 |
2,645 |
1,515 |
1,620 |
7,746 |
2,582 |
Other liabilities (2) |
2,186 |
|
|
|
|
|
Total maturing liabilities |
18,657 |
9,162 |
15,769 |
21,374 |
17,569 |
2,702 |
Customer deposits |
356,340 |
3,843 |
1,052 |
77 |
20 |
28 |
Derivatives held for hedging |
212 |
289 |
1,188 |
526 |
813 |
738 |
|
375,209 |
13,294 |
18,009 |
21,977 |
18,402 |
3,468 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Guarantees and commitments notional amount |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Guarantees (3) |
7,718 |
|
|
|
|
|
Commitments (4) |
121,229 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
128,947 |
|
|
|
|
|
Notes: | |
(1) |
Other financial assets excludes equity shares. |
(2) |
Other liabilities include notes in circulation. |
(3) |
RBS is only called upon to satisfy a guarantee when the guaranteed party fails to meet its obligations. RBS expects most guarantees it provides to expire unused. |
(4) |
RBS has given commitments to provide funds to customers under undrawn formal facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend subject to certain conditions being met by the counterparty. RBS does not expect all facilities to be drawn, and some may lapse before drawdown. |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
14 Loan impairment provisions
Loan exposure and impairment metrics
The table below summarises loans and related credit impairment measures on an IFRS 9 basis at 31 December 2018 and 1 January 2018 and on an IAS 39 basis at 31 December 2017.
|
31 December |
1 January |
31 December |
|
2018 (1) |
2018 (1) |
2017 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
Loans - amortised cost |
|
|
|
Stage 1 |
285,985 |
333,929 |
|
Stage 2 |
26,097 |
26,972 |
|
Stage 3 |
7,718 |
11,283 |
|
|
319,800 |
372,184 |
321,633 |
ECL provisions (2) |
|
|
|
- Stage 1 |
285 |
261 |
|
- Stage 2 |
763 |
621 |
|
- Stage 3 |
2,320 |
3,565 |
|
|
3,368 |
4,447 |
3,814 |
ECL provision coverage (3) |
|
|
|
- Stage 1 % |
0.10 |
0.1 |
|
- Stage 2 % |
2.92 |
2.3 |
|
- Stage 3 % |
30.06 |
31.6 |
|
|
1.05 |
1.2 |
1.20 |
Impairment losses |
|
|
|
ECL charge (4) |
398 |
|
530 |
ECL loss rate - annualised (basis points) |
12.45 |
|
16.48 |
Amounts written off |
1,494 |
|
1,210 |
Notes: | |
(1) |
The analysis tables as at 31 December 2018 include all loans within IFRS 9 ECL scope and exclude debt securities. The comparative table at 1 January 2018 includes loans and debt securities of £50.4 billion, of which £42.7 billion related to debt securities classified as FVOCI. ECL on these debt securities at 1 January 2018 was £28 million, of which £4 million related to those classified as FVOCI. |
(2) |
ECL provisions in the above table are provisions on loan assets only. Other ECL provisions not included, relate to cash, debt securities and contingent liabilities and amount to £28 million, of which £5 million was FVOCI. |
(3) |
ECL provisions coverage is ECL provisions divided by loans - amortised cost. |
(4) |
ECL charge balances in the above table included a £3 million charge relating to other financial assets, of which a £1 million charge related to assets at FVOCI; and a £31 million release related to contingent liabilities. |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
14 Loan impairment provisions continued
Critical accounting policy: Loan impairment provisions
The Groups 2017 loan impairment provisions were established in accordance with IAS 39 in respect of incurred losses. They comprised individual and collective components as more fully explained in the 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F. In 2018 the loan impairment provisions have been established in accordance with IFRS 9. Accounting policy 14 sets out how the expected loss approach is applied. At 31 December 2018, customer loan impairment provisions amounted to £3,368 million (2017 - £3,814 million). A loan is impaired when there is objective evidence that the cash flows will not occur in the manner expected when the loan was advanced. Such evidence includes changes in the credit rating of a borrower, the failure to make payments in accordance with the loan agreement; significant reduction in the value of any security; breach of limits or covenants; and observable data about relevant macroeconomic measures.
The impairment loss is the difference between the carrying value of the loan and the present value of estimated future cash flows at the loans original effective interest rate.
The measurement of credit impairment under the IFRS expected loss model depends on managements assessment of any potential deterioration in the creditworthiness of the borrower, its modelling of expected performance and the application of economic forecasts. All three elements require judgments that are potentially significant to the estimate of impairment losses. Further information and sensitivity analyses are on Page 119.
IFRS 9 ECL model design principles
To meet IFRS 9 requirements for ECL estimation, PD, LGD and EAD used in the calculations must be:
· Unbiased - material regulatory conservatism has been removed to produce unbiased model estimates;
· Point-in-time - recognise current economic conditions;
· Forward-looking - incorporated into PD estimates and, where appropriate, EAD and LGD estimates; and
· For the life of the loan - all models produce a term structure to allow a lifetime calculation for assets in Stage 2 and Stage 3.
IFRS 9 requires that at each reporting date, an entity shall assess whether the credit risk on an account has increased significantly since initial recognition. Part of this assessment requires a comparison to be made between the current lifetime PD (i.e. the current probability of default over the remaining lifetime) with the equivalent lifetime PD as determined at the date of initial recognition.
The general approach for the IFRS 9 LGD models has been to leverage the Basel LGD models with bespoke IFRS 9 adjustments to ensure unbiased estimates, i.e. use of effective interest rate as the discount rate and the removal of: downturn calibration, indirect costs, other conservatism and regulatory floors.
For Wholesale, while conversion ratios in the historical data show temporal variations, these cannot (unlike in the case of PD and some LGD models) be sufficiently explained by the CCI measure and are presumed to be driven to a larger extent by exposure management practices. Therefore point-in-time best estimates measures for EAD are derived by estimating the regulatory model specification on a rolling five year window.
Approach for multiple economic scenarios (MES)
The base scenario plays a greater part in the calculation of ECL than the approach to MES.
15 Other financial assets
|
Debt securities |
|
|
|
|
|
| |||||||||
|
Central and local government |
|
Other |
|
|
|
Equity |
|
Other |
|
| |||||
|
|
UK |
|
US |
|
Other |
|
debt |
|
Total |
|
shares |
|
loans |
|
Total |
2018 |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Mandatory fair value through profit or loss |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
669 |
|
669 |
|
65 |
|
904 |
|
1,638 |
Fair value through other comprehensive income |
|
17,192 |
|
11,767 |
|
11,329 |
|
5,306 |
|
45,594 |
|
483 |
|
|
|
46,077 |
Amortised cost |
|
6,928 |
|
264 |
|
120 |
|
4,458 |
|
11,770 |
|
|
|
|
|
11,770 |
Total |
|
24,120 |
|
12,031 |
|
11,449 |
|
10,433 |
|
58,033 |
|
548 |
|
904 |
|
59,485 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Designated as at fair value through profit or loss |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
134 |
|
56 |
|
190 |
Available-for-sale |
|
17,656 |
|
8,461 |
|
11,454 |
|
6,110 |
|
43,681 |
|
287 |
|
|
|
43,968 |
Loans and receivables |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3,643 |
|
3,643 |
|
|
|
|
|
3,643 |
Held-to-maturity |
|
4,128 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4,128 |
|
|
|
|
|
4,128 |
Total |
|
21,784 |
|
8,461 |
|
11,454 |
|
9,753 |
|
51,452 |
|
421 |
|
56 |
|
51,929 |
Equity shares classified as fair value through other comprehensive income include the following entities and 2018 dividend income received; VISA Inc. £98 million (dividend of £1 million) and Tradeweb Markets LLC £89 million (dividend of £4 million).
Notes on the consolidated accounts
16 Intangible assets
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||
|
Goodwill |
Other (1) |
Total |
Goodwill |
Other (1) |
Total | |
Cost |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
At 1 January |
18,039 |
2,259 |
20,298 |
17,756 |
2,095 |
19,851 | |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
77 |
9 |
86 |
283 |
(3) |
280 | |
Acquisition of subsidiaries |
48 |
2 |
50 |
|
|
| |
Additions |
|
364 |
364 |
|
384 |
384 | |
Disposals and write-off of fully amortised assets |
|
(610) |
(610) |
|
(217) |
(217) | |
At 31 December |
18,164 |
2,024 |
20,188 |
18,039 |
2,259 |
20,298 | |
Accumulated amortisation and impairment |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
At 1 January |
12,481 |
1,274 |
13,755 |
12,198 |
1,173 |
13,371 | |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
77 |
5 |
82 |
283 |
(5) |
278 | |
Disposals and write-off of fully amortised assets |
|
(573) |
(573) |
|
(145) |
(145) | |
Charge for the year |
|
271 |
271 |
|
222 |
222 | |
Write down of goodwill and other intangible assets |
|
37 |
37 |
|
29 |
29 | |
At 31 December |
12,558 |
1,014 |
13,572 |
12,481 |
1,274 |
13,755 | |
Net book value at 31 December |
5,606 |
1,010 |
6,616 |
5,558 |
985 |
6,543 | |
Note: | |
(1) |
Principally internally generated software. |
Intangible assets other than goodwill are reviewed for indicators of impairment. In 2018 £37 million (2017 - £29 million) of previously capitalised software was impaired primarily as a result of software which is no longer expected to yield future economic benefit.
The Groups goodwill acquired in business combinations analysed by reportable segment in Note 4, Segmental analysis. It is reviewed annually at 31 December for impairment. No impairment was indicated at 31 December 2018 or 2017.
Impairment testing involves the comparison of the carrying value of each cash-generating unit (CGU) with its recoverable amount. The carrying values of the segments reflect the equity allocations made by management which are consistent with the Groups capital targets. In 2018, the methodology was enhanced to reflect legal entity changes in the group. Consequently certain corporate assets, represented primarily by bonds and liquidity assets in Treasury are no longer considered to be directly attributable or directly available to the CGUs. These assets are, therefore, not included in the carrying value of the CGUs, resulting in an increase in the available headroom for some CGUs. Recoverable amount is the higher of fair value and value in use. Value in use is the present value of expected future cash flows from the CGU. Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset in an orderly transaction between market participants. The recoverable amounts for all CGUs at 31 December 2018 were based on value in use, using managements latest five-year revenue and cost forecasts. The long-term growth rates have been based on expected nominal growth of the CGUs. The pre-tax risk discount rates are based on those observed to be applied to businesses regarded as peers of the CGUs.
Critical accounting policy: Goodwill
Critical estimates
Impairment testing involves a number of judgemental areas: the preparation of cash flow forecasts for periods that are beyond the normal requirements of management reporting; the assessment of discount rates appropriate to each business; estimation of the fair value of the CGUs; and the valuation of separable assets of each business whose goodwill is reviewed.
The sensitivity to the more significant variables in each assessment is presented below.
|
|
|
|
|
Consequential impact of 1% |
Consequential impact of 5% |
Break | ||
|
|
Assumptions |
Recoverable |
adverse movement in |
adverse movement |
even | |||
|
|
Terminal |
Pre-tax |
amount exceeded |
Discount |
Terminal |
Forecast |
Forecast |
discount |
|
Goodwill |
growth rate |
discount rate |
carrying value |
rate |
growth rate |
Income |
cost |
rate |
31 December 2018 |
£bn |
% |
% |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
£bn |
% |
UK Personal & Business Banking |
3.4 |
1.8 |
13.1 |
14.4 |
(2.2) |
(1.4) |
(4.0) |
(1.7) |
27.7 |
Commercial & Private Banking |
1.9 |
1.8 |
13.0 |
4.5 |
(1.2) |
(0.8) |
(2.3) |
(1.0) |
17.6 |
RBS International |
0.3 |
1.8 |
12.9 |
0.7 |
(0.2) |
(0.2) |
(0.4) |
(0.1) |
18.5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
31 December 2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK Personal & Business Banking |
3.4 |
2.0 |
13.1 |
9.7 |
(1.8) |
(1.2) |
(4.0) |
(1.7) |
21.6 |
Commercial & Private Banking |
1.9 |
2.0 |
12.9 |
1.3 |
(1.2) |
(0.8) |
(2.4) |
(1.0) |
13.9 |
RBS International |
0.3 |
2.0 |
11.0 |
0.6 |
(0.4) |
(0.3) |
(0.4) |
(0.1) |
12.8 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
17 Other assets
|
2018 |
2017 |
|
£m |
£m |
Property, plant and equipment |
4,351 |
4,602 |
Deferred tax (Note 7) |
1,412 |
1,740 |
Assets of disposal groups (1) |
1,404 |
195 |
Prepayments |
435 |
392 |
Accrued income |
317 |
378 |
Interests in associates (2) |
404 |
1,410 |
Pension schemes in net surplus (Note 5) |
520 |
392 |
Tax recoverable |
37 |
27 |
Other assets |
925 |
1,127 |
|
9,805 |
10,263 |
Notes: | |
(1) |
Includes interest in Alawwal Bank £1,179 million (2017 - nil). |
(2) |
Includes interest in Business Growth Fund £387 million (2017 - £316 million). |
18 Other financial liabilities
|
2018 |
2017 |
|
£m |
£m |
Customer deposits |
|
|
- designated as at fair value through profit or loss |
212 |
874 |
Debt securities in issue |
|
|
- designated as at fair value through profit or loss |
2,628 |
3,403 |
- amortised cost |
36,892 |
26,049 |
Total |
39,732 |
30,326 |
19 Subordinated liabilities
|
2018 |
2017 |
|
£m |
£m |
Dated loan capital |
8,262 |
10,394 |
Undated loan capital |
2,127 |
2,169 |
Preference shares |
146 |
159 |
|
10,535 |
12,722 |
Certain preference shares issued by the company are classified as liabilities; these securities remain subject to the capital maintenance rules of the Companies Act 2006.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
19 Subordinated liabilities continued
|
|
Capital |
|
|
|
|
|
|
treatment |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
Redemptions |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc |
|
|
|
|
|
|
US$350 million 4.70% dated notes 2018 |
|
Ineligible |
|
267 |
|
|
£200 million 7.387% Series 1 non-cumulative convertible £0.01 preference shares |
|
|
|
|
|
|
(partial redemption) |
|
Ineligible |
|
|
|
15 |
US$1,000 million 9.118% Series 1 non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$0.01 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
(partial redemption) |
|
Ineligible |
|
|
|
48 |
$156 million 7.65% Series F non-cumulative preference shares (callable) |
|
Ineligible |
|
|
|
120 |
$242 million 7.25% Series H non-cumulative preference shares (callable) |
|
Ineligible |
|
|
|
186 |
$751 million 5.75% Series L non cumulative preference shares (callable) |
|
Ineligible |
|
|
|
577 |
US$750 million 6.8% dated notes 2042 (partial redemption) |
|
Ineligible |
|
|
|
360 |
|
|
|
|
267 |
|
1,306 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NatWest Markets Plc |
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,000 million 6.934% dated notes 2018 |
|
Tier 2 |
|
1,743 |
|
|
£103 million 9.5% undated subordinated bonds 2018 (callable August 2018) |
|
Ineligible |
|
103 |
|
|
750 million 4.35% subordinated notes 2017 |
|
Tier 2 |
|
|
|
645 |
CHF124 million 9.375% subordinated notes 2022 |
|
Tier 2 |
|
|
|
101 |
CAD420 million 10.50% subordinated notes 2022 |
|
Tier 2 |
|
|
|
255 |
£564 million 10.50% subordinated notes 2022 |
|
Tier 2 |
|
|
|
489 |
AU$880 million 13.125% subordinated notes 2022 |
|
Tier 2 |
|
|
|
548 |
US$2,132 million 9.50% subordinated notes 2022 |
|
Tier 2 |
|
|
|
1,724 |
100 million floating rate subordinated notes 2017 |
|
Tier 2 |
|
|
|
90 |
£51 million 2.35% + 5 year UK Gilts yield undated subordinated notes (callable December 2012) |
|
Ineligible |
|
|
|
51 |
|
|
|
|
1,846 |
|
3,903 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NatWest Plc |
|
|
|
|
|
|
US$300 million 8.6250% non-cumulative preference shares (callable) |
|
Tier 1 |
|
|
|
178 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
178 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NWM N.V. and subsidiaries |
|
|
|
|
|
|
US$500 million 4.65% dated notes 2018 |
|
Tier 2 |
|
141 |
|
|
US$16 million floating rate notes 2019 (partial redemption) |
|
Tier 2 |
|
2 |
|
|
15 million floating rate notes 2022 (partial redemption) |
|
Tier 2 |
|
|
|
2 |
250 million 4.70% notes 2019 (partial redemption) |
|
Tier 2 |
|
|
|
80 |
US$500 million 4.65% notes 2018 (partial redemption) |
|
Tier 2 |
|
|
|
244 |
|
|
|
|
143 |
|
326 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NatWest Holdings Limited |
|
|
|
|
|
|
£20 million 11.75% perpetual Tier 2 capital (partial redemption) |
|
Tier 2 |
|
|
|
9 |
38 million 11.375% perpetual Tier 2 capital (partial redemption) |
|
Tier 2 |
|
|
|
6 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
15 |
There were no issuances in 2018 or 2017.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
20 Other liabilities
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
Retirement benefit liabilities (Note 5) |
|
165 |
|
129 |
Deferred tax (Note 7) |
|
454 |
|
583 |
Liabilities of disposal groups |
|
1 |
|
10 |
Notes in circulation |
|
2,152 |
|
2,186 |
Current tax |
|
100 |
|
227 |
Accruals |
|
1,047 |
|
1,074 |
Deferred income |
|
451 |
|
469 |
Other liabilities |
|
1,580 |
|
2,436 |
Provisions for liabilities and charges |
|
3,004 |
|
7,757 |
|
|
8,954 |
|
14,871 |
|
|
Payment |
|
Other |
|
|
|
Litigation |
|
|
|
|
|
|
protection |
|
customer |
|
|
|
and other |
|
|
|
|
Provisions for liabilities and charges |
|
insurance |
|
redress |
|
DoJ (2) |
|
regulatory |
|
Other (3) |
|
Total |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m | |
At 1 January 2018 |
|
1,053 |
|
870 |
|
3,243 |
|
641 |
|
1,950 |
|
7,757 |
Implementation of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
85 |
|
85 |
ECL impairment charge |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(18) |
|
(18) |
RMBS transfer |
|
|
|
|
|
(683) |
|
683 |
|
|
|
|
Transfer from accruals and other liabilities |
|
|
|
(4) |
|
|
|
(4) |
|
15 |
|
7 |
Currency translation and other movements |
|
|
|
8 |
|
161 |
|
21 |
|
(1) |
|
189 |
Charge to income statement |
|
200 |
|
245 |
|
1,040 |
|
181 |
|
429 |
|
2,095 |
Releases to income statement |
|
|
|
(134) |
|
|
|
(325) |
|
(304) |
|
(763) |
Provisions utilised |
|
(558) |
|
(449) |
|
(3,761) |
|
(414) |
|
(1,166) |
|
(6,348) |
At 31 December 2018 |
|
695 |
|
536 |
|
|
|
783 |
|
990 |
|
3,004 |
Notes:
(1) Refer to Note 33 for further details on the impact of IFRS 9 on classification and basis of preparation.
(2) The RMBS provision has been redesignated DoJ and the remaining RMBS litigation matters transferred to Litigation and other regulatory as of 1 January 2018 to reflect progress on resolution.
(3) Materially comprises provisions relating to property closures and restructuring costs. At 1 January 2018 Other provisions for liabilities and charges included £800 million in respect of a package of remedies that would conclude its State Aid commitments which were paid during 2018.
Payment protection insurance
To reflect the increased volume of complaints following the FCAs introduction of an August 2019 PPI timebar as outlined in FCA announcement CP17/3 and the introduction of new Plevin (unfair commission) complaint handling rules, RBS increased its provision for PPI by £200 million in 2018 (2017 - £175 million, 2016 - £601 million, 2015 - £600 million) bringing the cumulative charge to £5.3 billion, of which £4.2 billion (79%) in redress and £0.4 billion in administrative expenses had been paid by 31 December 2018. Of the £5.3 billion cumulative charge, £4.8 billion relates to redress and £0.5 billion to administrative expenses.
The principal assumptions underlying the Groups provision in respect of PPI sales are: assessment of the total number of complaints that the Group will receive; the proportion of these that will result in redress; and the average cost of such redress. The number of complaints has been estimated from an analysis of the Groups portfolio of PPI policies sold by vintage and by product. Estimates of the percentage of policyholders that will lodge complaints (the take up rate) and of the number of these that will be upheld (the uphold rate) have been established based on recent experience, guidance in FCA policy statements and the expected rate of responses from proactive customer contact. The average redress assumption is based on recent experience and FCA calculation rules. The table below shows the sensitivity of the provision to changes in the principal assumptions (all other assumptions remaining the same).
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sensitivity | ||
Assumptions |
|
Actual to |
|
Future |
|
Change in assumption |
|
Consequential change in |
Customer initiated complaints (1) |
|
2,779k |
|
260k |
|
+/- 5 |
|
+/- 18 |
Uphold rate (2) |
|
89% |
|
90% |
|
+/- 1 |
|
+/- 4 |
Average redress (3) |
|
£1,664 |
|
£1,512 |
|
+/- 5 |
|
+/- 18 |
Processing costs per claim (4) |
|
£152 |
|
£151 |
|
+/- 20k claims |
|
+/- 3 |
Notes:
(1) Claims received directly by RBS to date, including those received via CMCs and Plevin (commission) only. Excluding those for proactive mailings and where no PPI policy exists.
(2) Average uphold rate per customer initiated claims received directly by RBS including those received via CMCs, to end of timebar for both PPI (mis-sale) and Plevin (commission), excluding those for which no PPI policy exists.
(3) Average redress for PPI (mis-sale) and Plevin (commission) pay-outs.
(4) Processing costs per claim on a valid complaints basis, includes direct staff costs and associated overhead - excluding FOS fees.
Background information for all material provisions is given in Note 27
Critical accounting policy: Provisions for liabilities
Judgment is involved in determining whether an obligation exists, and in estimating the probability, timing and amount of any outflows. Where the Group can look to another party such as an insurer to pay some or all of the expenditure required to settle a provision, any reimbursement is recognised when, and only when, it is virtually certain that it will be received.
Estimates - Provisions are liabilities of uncertain timing or amount, and are recognised when there is a present obligation as a result of a past event, the outflow of economic benefit is probable and the outflow can be estimated reliably. Any difference between the final outcome and the amounts provided will affect the reported results in the period when the matter is resolved.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
21 Non-controlling interests
|
|
|
|
Other |
|
|
|
|
NWM N.V. |
|
interests |
|
Total |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
At 1 January 2017 |
|
733 |
|
62 |
|
795 |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
|
22 |
|
(5) |
|
17 |
Profit attributable to non-controlling interests |
|
30 |
|
5 |
|
35 |
Dividends paid |
|
(20) |
|
(5) |
|
(25) |
Equity withdrawn and disposals |
|
(59) |
|
|
|
(59) |
At 1 January 2018 |
|
706 |
|
57 |
|
763 |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
|
24 |
|
1 |
|
25 |
Profit/(loss) attributable to non-controlling interests |
|
13 |
|
(21) |
|
(8) |
Dividends paid |
|
|
|
(5) |
|
(5) |
Equity withdrawn and disposals |
|
|
|
(21) |
|
(21) |
At 31 December 2018 |
|
743 |
|
11 |
|
754 |
22 Share capital and other equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Number of shares |
| ||
Allotted, called up and fully paid |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
000s |
|
000s |
| |
Ordinary shares of £1 |
|
12,049 |
|
11,965 |
|
12,048,605 |
|
11,964,565 |
|
Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 (1) |
|
|
|
|
|
10 |
|
26,459 |
|
Non-cumulative preference shares of 0.01 (2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,044 |
|
Non-cumulative preference shares of £1 (3) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
54 |
|
Cumulative preference shares of £1 |
|
1 |
|
1 |
|
900 |
|
900 |
|
Notes:
(1) 26 million shares with a total nominal value of £0.2 million were redeemed in December 2018. (2017 46 million shares with a total nominal value of £0.3 million were redeemed).
(2) 2 million shares, with a nominal value of 20 thousand, were redeemed in December 2018.
(3) 54,442 shares, with a nominal value of £54 thousand, were redeemed in December 2018.
Movement in allotted, called up and fully paid ordinary shares |
|
|
|
Number of |
|
£m |
|
shares - 000s | |
At 1 January 2017 |
|
11,823 |
|
11,823,163 |
Shares issued |
|
142 |
|
141,402 |
At 1 January 2018 |
|
11,965 |
|
11,964,565 |
Shares issued |
|
84 |
|
84,040 |
At 31 December 2018 |
|
12,049 |
|
12,048,605 |
Ordinary shares
There is no authorised share capital under the companys constitution. At 31 December 2018, the directors had authority granted at the 2018 Annual General Meeting to issue up to £600 million nominal of ordinary shares other than by pre-emption to existing shareholders.
On 6 February 2019 RBS held a General Meeting and shareholders approved a special resolution to give authority for the Company to make off-market purchases of ordinary shares from HM Treasury (or its nominee) at such times as the Directors may determine is appropriate. Full details of the proposal are set out in the Circular and Notice of General Meeting.
During 2018, the company allotted and issued the following new ordinary shares of £1 each. The shares were allotted to UBS AG at the subscription prices determined by reference to the average market prices during the sale periods set out below:
Month |
|
Number |
|
Subscription |
|
Sale period |
|
Gross |
|
Share price |
April |
|
32 million |
|
261.7265p |
|
23 Feb17 Apr |
|
£85.0m |
|
268.4p |
July |
|
20 million |
|
253.5641p |
|
27 Apr16 Jul |
|
£50.7m |
|
243.7p |
In the three years to 31 December 2018, the percentage increase in issued share capital due to non pre-emptive issuance (excluding employee share schemes) for cash was 2.6%. In addition, the company issued 32 million ordinary shares of £1 each in connection with employee share plans.
In 2018 RBS paid an interim dividend of £241 million, or 2.0p per ordinary share. In addition, the company announced that the directors have recommended a final dividend of 3.5p per ordinary share, and a further special dividend of 7.5p per ordinary share, which are both subject to shareholders approval at the Annual General Meeting on 25 April 2019.
If approved, payment will be made on 30 April 2019 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 22 March 2019. The ex-dividend date will be 21 March 2019. No dividend was paid in 2017.
Other securities
Additional Tier 1 Notes issued by RBS having the legal form of debt are classified as equity under IFRS. Capital recognised for regulatory purposes cannot be redeemed without Prudential Regulation Authority consent. This includes ordinary shares, preference shares and additional Tier 1 Notes.
These securities entitle the holders to interest which may be deferred at the sole discretion of the company. Repayment of the securities is at the sole discretion of the company on giving between 30 and 60 days notice.
Non-cumulative preference shares
Non-cumulative preference shares entitle their holders to periodic non-cumulative cash dividends at specified fixed rates for each Series payable out of distributable profits of the company.
The company may redeem some or all of the non-cumulative preference shares from time to time at the rates detailed in the table below plus dividends otherwise payable for the then current dividend period to the date of redemption.
In December 2018, the company redeemed in whole the Series S non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01, Series 1,2 and 3 non-cumulative preference shares of 0.01 and Series 1 non-cumulative preference shares of £1. In December 2017, the company redeemed in whole the Series F, H, L and 1 non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 and Series 1 non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.01.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
22 Share capital and other equity continued
Non-cumulative preference shares classified as equity |
|
Number of shares |
|
|
|
Redemption |
|
Redemption |
|
in issue |
|
Interest rate |
|
date on or after |
|
price per share | |
Shares of US$0.01 - Series U |
|
10,130 |
|
floating |
|
29 September 2017 |
|
US$100,000 |
Note:
(1) Those preference shares where distributions are discretionary are classified as equity.
In the event that the non-cumulative convertible preference shares are not redeemed on or before the redemption date, the holder may convert them into ordinary shares in the company at the prevailing market price.
On a winding-up or liquidation of the company, the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares are entitled to receive, out of any surplus assets available for distribution to the companys shareholders (after payment of arrears of dividends on the cumulative preference shares up to the date of repayment) pari passu with the cumulative preference shares and all other shares of the company ranking pari passu with the non-cumulative preference shares as regards participation in the surplus assets of the company, a liquidation distribution per share equal to the applicable redemption price detailed in the table above, together with an amount equal to dividends for the then current dividend period accrued to the date of payment, before any distribution or payment may be made to holders of the ordinary shares as regards participation in the surplus assets of the company.
Except as described above, the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares have no right to participate in the surplus assets of the company.
Holders of the non-cumulative preference shares are not entitled to receive notice of or attend general meetings of the company except if any resolution is proposed for adoption by the shareholders of the company to vary or abrogate any of the rights attaching to the non-cumulative preference shares or proposing the winding-up or liquidation of the company. In any such case, they are entitled to receive notice of and to attend the general meeting of shareholders at which such resolution is to be proposed and are entitled to speak and vote on such resolution (but not on any other resolution). In addition, in the event that, prior to any general meeting of shareholders, the company has failed to pay in full the most recent dividend payment due on the Series U non-cumulative dollar preference shares, the holders shall be entitled to receive notice of, attend, speak and vote at such meeting on all matters together with the holders of the ordinary shares. In these circumstances only, the rights of the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares so to vote shall continue until the company shall have resumed the payment in full of the dividends in arrears.
Paid-in equity - comprises equity instruments issued by the company other than those legally constituted as shares.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Additional Tier 1 notes (1) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
US$2.0 billion 7.5% notes callable August 2020 (2) |
|
1,278 |
|
1,278 |
|
1,278 |
US$1.15 billion 8% notes callable August 2025 (2) |
|
734 |
|
734 |
|
734 |
US$2.65 billion 8.625% notes callable |
|
2,046 |
|
2,046 |
|
2,046 |
EMTN notes |
|
|
|
|
|
|
US$564 million 6.99% capital securities |
|
- |
|
- |
|
275 |
CAD321 million 6.666% notes |
|
- |
|
- |
|
156 |
Trust preferred issues: subordinated notes (4) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
£93 million 5.6457% 2047 |
|
- |
|
- |
|
93 |
|
|
4,058 |
|
4,058 |
|
4,582 |
Notes:
(1) The coupons on these notes are non-cumulative and payable at the companys discretion. In the event the Groups CET1 ratio falls below 7% any outstanding notes will be converted into ordinary shares at a fixed price. While taking the legal form of debt these notes are classified as equity under IFRS.
(2) Issued in August 2015. In the event of conversion, converted into ordinary shares at a price of $3.606 nominal per £1 share.
(3) Issued in August 2016. In the event of conversion, converted into ordinary shares at a price of $2.284 nominal per £1 share.
(4) Subordinated notes issued to limited partnerships that have in turn issued partnership preferred securities to RBS Capital Trust D that issued trust preferred securities to investors.
(5) Preferred securities in issue - £93 million RBS Capital Trust D, fixed/floating rate non-cumulative trust preferred securities.
Merger reserve - the merger reserve comprises the premium on shares issued to acquire NatWest, less goodwill amortisation charged under previous GAAP.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
22 Share capital and other equity continued
Capital redemption reserve - under UK companies legislation, when shares are redeemed or purchased wholly or partly out of the companys profits, the amount by which the companys issued share capital is diminished must be transferred to the capital redemption reserve. The capital maintenance provisions of UK companies legislation apply to the capital redemption reserve as if it were part of the companys paid up share capital. On 15 June 2017, the Court of Session approved a reduction of RBSG plc capital so that the amounts which stood to the credit of the capital redemption reserve were transferred to retained earnings.
Own shares held - at 31 December 2018, 8 million ordinary shares of £1 each of the company (2017 - 16 million) were held by employee share trusts in respect of share awards and options granted to employees. During the year, the employee share trusts purchased 25 million ordinary shares and delivered 33 million ordinary shares in satisfaction of the exercise of options and the vesting of share awards under the employee share plans.
RBS optimises capital efficiency by maintaining reserves in subsidiaries, including regulated entities. Certain preference shares and subordinated debt are also included within regulatory capital. The remittance of reserves to the company or the redemption of shares or subordinated capital by regulated entities may be subject to maintaining the capital resources required by the relevant regulator.
UK law prescribes that only the reserves of the company are taken into account for the purpose of making distributions and in determining permissible applications of the share premium account.
23 Leases
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Operating lease |
|
|
Finance lease contracts and hire purchase agreements |
|
assets: | ||||||||
|
|
Gross |
|
Present value |
|
Other |
|
Future |
|
Present |
|
future minimum |
Year in which receipt will occur |
|
amounts |
|
adjustments |
|
movements |
|
drawdowns |
|
value |
|
lease rentals |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m | |
2018 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Within 1 year |
|
3,237 |
|
(208) |
|
(123) |
|
(70) |
|
2,836 |
|
139 |
After 1 year but within 5 years |
|
4,566 |
|
(370) |
|
(100) |
|
|
|
4,096 |
|
325 |
After 5 years |
|
1,935 |
|
(710) |
|
(38) |
|
|
|
1,187 |
|
49 |
Total |
|
9,738 |
|
(1,288) |
|
(261) |
|
(70) |
|
8,119 |
|
513 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Within 1 year |
|
3,164 |
|
(212) |
|
(125) |
|
(70) |
|
2,757 |
|
129 |
After 1 year but within 5 years |
|
4,686 |
|
(444) |
|
(94) |
|
|
|
4,148 |
|
257 |
After 5 years |
|
2,062 |
|
(742) |
|
(27) |
|
|
|
1,293 |
|
21 |
Total |
|
9,912 |
|
(1,398) |
|
(246) |
|
(70) |
|
8,198 |
|
407 |
Nature of operating lease assets on the balance sheet |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
£m |
|
£m | |
Transportation |
|
313 |
|
283 |
Cars and light commercial vehicles |
|
11 |
|
45 |
Other |
|
285 |
|
271 |
|
|
609 |
|
599 |
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Amounts recognised as income and expense |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Finance leases - contingent rental rebate |
|
(44) |
|
(34) |
|
(76) |
Operating leases - minimum rentals payable |
|
233 |
|
221 |
|
239 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Finance lease contracts and hire purchase agreements |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accumulated allowance for uncollectable minimum receivables |
|
62 |
|
63 |
|
54 |
Residual value exposures
The table below gives details of the unguaranteed residual values included in the carrying value of finance lease receivables and operating lease assets.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||||||||||||
|
|
Year in which residual value will be recovered |
|
Year in which residual value will be recovered | ||||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
After 1 year |
|
After 2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
After 1 year |
|
After 2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Within 1 |
|
but within |
|
but within |
|
After 5 |
|
|
|
Within 1 |
|
but within |
|
but within |
|
After 5 |
|
|
|
|
year |
|
2 years |
|
5 years |
|
years |
|
Total |
|
year |
|
2 years |
|
5 years |
|
years |
|
Total |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Operating leases |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- transportation |
|
25 |
|
15 |
|
94 |
|
14 |
|
148 |
|
29 |
|
22 |
|
69 |
|
17 |
|
137 |
- cars and light commercial vehicles |
|
1 |
|
1 |
|
2 |
|
|
|
4 |
|
5 |
|
7 |
|
7 |
|
|
|
19 |
- other |
|
26 |
|
19 |
|
37 |
|
10 |
|
92 |
|
21 |
|
24 |
|
30 |
|
9 |
|
84 |
Finance lease contracts |
|
68 |
|
32 |
|
67 |
|
38 |
|
205 |
|
88 |
|
20 |
|
72 |
|
27 |
|
207 |
Hire purchase agreements |
|
55 |
|
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
57 |
|
38 |
|
2 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
41 |
|
|
175 |
|
69 |
|
200 |
|
62 |
|
506 |
|
181 |
|
75 |
|
179 |
|
53 |
|
488 |
Acting as a lessor, RBS provides asset finance to its customers. It purchases plant, equipment and intellectual property, renting them to customers under lease arrangements that, depending on their terms, qualify as either operating or finance leases.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
24 Structured entities
A structured entity (SE) is an entity that has been designed such that voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding who controls the entity, for example, when any voting rights relate to administrative tasks only and the relevant activities are directed by means of contractual arrangements. SEs are usually established for a specific, limited purpose. They do not carry out a business or trade and typically have no employees. They take a variety of legal forms - trusts, partnerships and companies - and fulfil many different functions. As well as being a key element of securitisations, SEs are also used in fund management activities in order to segregate custodial duties from the provision of fund management advice.
Consolidated structured entities
Securitisations
In a securitisation, assets, or interests in a pool of assets, are transferred generally to an SE which then issues liabilities to third party investors. The majority of securitisations are supported through liquidity facilities or other credit enhancements.
RBS arranges securitisations to facilitate client transactions and undertakes own asset securitisations to sell or to fund portfolios of financial assets. RBS also acts as an underwriter and depositor in securitisation transactions in both client and proprietary transactions.
RBS involvement in client securitisations takes a number of forms. It may: sponsor or administer a securitisation programme; provide liquidity facilities or programme-wide credit enhancement; and purchase securities issued by the vehicle.
Own asset securitisations
In own-asset securitisations, the pool of assets held by the SE is either originated by RBS, or (in the case of whole loan programmes) purchased from third parties.
The table below analyses the asset categories for those own-asset securitisations where the transferred assets continue to be recorded on RBS balance sheet.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
| ||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
Debt securities in issue |
|
|
|
Debt securities in issue |
| ||||||||
|
|
|
|
Held by third |
|
Held by |
|
|
|
|
|
Held by third |
|
Held by |
|
|
|
|
|
Assets |
|
parties |
|
RBS (1) |
|
Total |
|
Assets |
|
parties |
|
RBS (1) |
|
Total |
|
Asset type |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
Mortgages - RoI |
|
2,817 |
|
778 |
|
2,239 |
|
3,017 |
|
4,073 |
|
|
|
4,688 |
|
4,688 |
|
Cash deposits |
|
221 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
518 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3,038 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4,591 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note:
(1) Debt securities retained by RBS may be pledged with central banks.
Other credit risk transfer securitisations
RBS also transfers credit risk on originated loans and mortgages without the transfer of assets to an SE. As part of this, RBS enters into credit derivative and financial guarantee contracts with consolidated SEs. At 31 December 2018, debt securities in issue by such SEs (and held by third parties) were £596 million (2017 - £398 million). The associated loans and mortgages at 31 December 2018 were £8,402 million (2017 - £6,092 million).
Covered debt programme
Group companies have assigned loans to customers and debt investments to bankruptcy remote limited liability partnerships to provide security for issues of debt securities. RBS retains all of the risks and rewards of these assets and continues to recognise them. The partnerships are consolidated by RBS and the related covered bonds included within other financial liabilities. At 31 December 2018, £9,446 million (2017 - £8,915) of loans to customers and £478 million (2017 - £76 million) of debt investments provided security for debt securities in issue and other borrowing of £6,627 million (2017 - £6,307 million).
Notes on the consolidated accounts
24 Structured entities continued
Unconsolidated structured entities
RBSs interests in unconsolidated structured entities are analysed below
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 | ||||||||
|
|
Asset backed |
|
Investment |
|
|
|
Asset backed |
|
Investment |
|
|
|
|
securitisation |
|
funds |
|
|
|
securitisation |
|
funds |
|
|
|
|
vehicles |
|
and other |
|
Total |
|
vehicles |
|
and other |
|
Total |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Trading assets and derivatives |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Trading assets |
|
590 |
|
164 |
|
754 |
|
884 |
|
131 |
|
1,015 |
Derivative assets |
|
495 |
|
325 |
|
820 |
|
660 |
|
117 |
|
777 |
Derivative liabilities |
|
(223) |
|
(332) |
|
(555) |
|
(561) |
|
(131) |
|
(692) |
Total |
|
862 |
|
157 |
|
1,019 |
|
983 |
|
117 |
|
1,100 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Non trading assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans to customers |
|
1,636 |
|
544 |
|
2,180 |
|
1,243 |
|
120 |
|
1,363 |
Other financial assets |
|
4,461 |
|
|
|
4,461 |
|
3,888 |
|
141 |
|
4,029 |
Total |
|
6,097 |
|
544 |
|
6,641 |
|
5,131 |
|
261 |
|
5,392 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liquidity facilities/loan commitments |
|
2,138 |
|
213 |
|
2,351 |
|
2,117 |
|
455 |
|
2,572 |
Guarantees |
|
3 |
|
10 |
|
13 |
|
229 |
|
5 |
|
234 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Maximum exposure |
|
9,100 |
|
924 |
|
10,024 |
|
8,460 |
|
838 |
|
9,298 |
25 Asset transfers
Transfers that do not qualify for derecognition
RBS enters into securities repurchase, lending and total return transactions in accordance with normal market practice which includes the provision of additional collateral if necessary. Under standard terms in the UK and US markets, the recipient has an unrestricted right to sell or repledge collateral, subject to returning equivalent securities on settlement of the transaction.
Securities sold under repurchase transactions and transactions with the substance of securities repurchase agreements are not derecognised if RBS retains substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership. The fair value (and carrying value) of securities transferred under such transactions included on the balance sheet, are set out below. All of these securities could be sold or repledged by the holder.
The following assets have failed derecognition (1) |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
£m |
|
£m | |
Trading assets |
|
14,020 |
|
10,463 |
Other financial assets |
|
9,890 |
|
13,717 |
|
|
23,910 |
|
24,180 |
Note:
(1) Associated liabilities were £23,222 million (2017 - £23,692 million).
Assets pledged as collateral
The Group pledges collateral with its counterparties in respect of derivative liabilities and bank and other borrowings.
Assets pledged against liabilities |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
£m |
|
£m | |
Trading assets |
|
35,571 |
|
36,631 |
Loans to banks - amortised cost |
|
1,050 |
|
738 |
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
|
25,930 |
|
31,312 |
Other financial assets |
|
713 |
|
3,397 |
|
|
63,264 |
|
72,078 |
|
|
|
|
|
Liabilities secured by assets |
|
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
|
16,326 |
|
20,226 |
Derivatives |
|
21,884 |
|
22,956 |
|
|
38,210 |
|
43,182 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
26 Capital resources
Under Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR), regulators within the European Union monitor capital on a legal entity basis, with local transitional arrangements on the phasing in of end-point CRR.
The capital resources based on the PRA transitional basis for Bank are set out below.
|
|
PRA transitional basis | ||
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
Shareholders equity (excluding non-controlling interests) |
|
|
|
|
Shareholders equity |
|
45,736 |
|
48,330 |
Preference shares - equity |
|
(496) |
|
(2,565) |
Other equity instruments |
|
(4,058) |
|
(4,058) |
|
|
41,182 |
|
41,707 |
|
|
|
|
|
Regulatory adjustments and deductions |
|
|
|
|
Own credit |
|
(405) |
|
(90) |
Defined benefit pension fund adjustment |
|
(394) |
|
(287) |
Cash flow hedging reserve |
|
191 |
|
(227) |
Deferred tax assets |
|
(740) |
|
(849) |
Prudential valuation adjustments |
|
(494) |
|
(496) |
Goodwill and other intangible assets |
|
(6,616) |
|
(6,543) |
Expected losses less impairments |
|
(654) |
|
(1,286) |
Foreseeable ordinary and special dividends |
|
(1,326) |
|
|
Other regulatory adjustments |
|
(105) |
|
28 |
|
|
(10,543) |
|
(9,750) |
|
|
|
|
|
CET1 capital |
|
30,639 |
|
31,957 |
|
|
|
|
|
Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital |
|
|
|
|
Qualifying instruments and related share premium |
|
4,051 |
|
4,041 |
Qualifying instruments and related share premium subject to phase out |
|
1,393 |
|
3,416 |
Qualifying instruments issued by subsidiaries and held by third parties subject to phase out |
|
140 |
|
140 |
AT1 capital |
|
5,584 |
|
7,597 |
|
|
|
|
|
Tier 1 capital |
|
36,223 |
|
39,554 |
|
|
|
|
|
Qualifying Tier 2 capital |
|
|
|
|
Qualifying instruments and related share premium |
|
6,386 |
|
6,501 |
Qualifying instruments issued by subsidiaries and held by third parties |
|
1,565 |
|
1,876 |
Tier 2 capital |
|
7,951 |
|
8,377 |
|
|
|
|
|
Total regulatory capital |
|
44,174 |
|
47,931 |
It is RBS policy to maintain a strong capital base, to expand it as appropriate and to utilise it efficiently throughout its activities to optimise the return to shareholders while maintaining a prudent relationship between the capital base and the underlying risks of the business. In carrying out this policy, RBS has regard to the supervisory requirements of the PRA. The PRA uses capital ratios as a measure of capital adequacy in the UK banking sector, comparing a banks capital resources with its risk-weighted assets (the assets and off-balance sheet exposures are weighted to reflect the inherent credit and other risks); by international agreement, the Pillar 1 capital ratios should be not less than 8% with a Common Equity Tier 1 component of not less than 4.5%. RBS has complied with the PRAs capital requirements throughout the year.
A number of subsidiaries and sub-groups within RBS, principally banking entities, are subject to various individual regulatory capital requirements in the UK and overseas. Furthermore, the payment of dividends by subsidiaries and the ability of members of RBS to lend money to other members of RBS may be subject to restrictions such as local regulatory or legal requirements, the availability of reserves and financial and operating performance.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
27 Memorandum items
Contingent liabilities and commitments
The amounts shown in the table below are intended only to provide an indication of the volume of business outstanding at 31 December 2018. Although RBS is exposed to credit risk in the event of a customers failure to meet its obligations, the amounts shown do not, and are not intended to, provide any indication of RBSs expectation of future losses.
|
|
|
|
More than |
|
More than |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1 year but |
|
3 years but |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less than |
|
less than |
|
less than |
|
Over |
|
|
|
|
|
|
1 year |
|
3 years |
|
5 years |
|
5 years |
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Guarantees and assets pledged as collateral security |
|
1,296 |
|
414 |
|
250 |
|
1,992 |
|
3,952 |
|
7,718 |
Other contingent liabilities |
|
1,111 |
|
582 |
|
211 |
|
1,148 |
|
3,052 |
|
3,391 |
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments |
|
61,105 |
|
20,934 |
|
32,535 |
|
5,305 |
|
119,879 |
|
124,941 |
Contingent liabilities and commitments |
|
63,512 |
|
21,930 |
|
32,996 |
|
8,445 |
|
126,883 |
|
136,050 |
Banking commitments and contingent obligations, which have been entered into on behalf of customers and for which there are corresponding obligations from customers, are not included in assets and liabilities. RBSs maximum exposure to credit loss, in the event of its obligation crystallising and all counterclaims, collateral or security proving valueless, is represented by the contractual nominal amount of these instruments included in the table above. These commitments and contingent obligations are subject to RBSs normal credit approval processes.
Guarantees - RBS gives guarantees on behalf of customers. A financial guarantee represents an irrevocable undertaking that RBS will meet a customers specified obligations to third party if the customer fails to do so. The maximum amount that RBS could be required to pay under a guarantee is its principal amount as in the table above. RBS expects most guarantees to expire unused.
Other contingent liabilities - these include standby letters of credit, supporting customer debt issues and contingent liabilities relating to customer trading activities such as those arising from performance and customs bonds, warranties and indemnities.
Standby facilities and credit lines - under a loan commitment, RBS agrees to make funds available to a customer in the future. Loan commitments, which are usually for a specified term, may be unconditionally cancellable or may persist, provided all conditions in the loan facility are satisfied or waived. Commitments to lend include commercial standby facilities and credit lines, liquidity facilities to commercial paper conduits and unutilised overdraft facilities.
Other commitments - these include documentary credits, which are commercial letters of credit providing for payment by RBS to a named beneficiary against presentation of specified documents, forward asset purchases, forward deposits placed and undrawn note issuance and revolving underwriting facilities, and other short-term trade related transactions.
Contractual obligations for future expenditure not provided for in the accounts
The following table shows contractual obligations for future expenditure not provided for in the accounts at the year end.
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
Operating leases |
|
|
|
|
Minimum rentals payable under non-cancellable leases (1) |
|
|
|
|
- within 1 year |
|
232 |
|
220 |
- after 1 year but within 5 years |
|
736 |
|
696 |
- after 5 years |
|
1,721 |
|
1,676 |
|
|
2,689 |
|
2,592 |
Capital expenditure on property, plant and equipment |
|
17 |
|
18 |
Contracts to purchase goods or services (2) |
|
541 |
|
682 |
|
|
3,247 |
|
3,292 |
Notes:
(1) Predominantly property leases.
(2) Of which due within 1 year: £253 million (2017 - £276 million).
Notes on the consolidated accounts
27 Memorandum items continued
Trustee and other fiduciary activities
In its capacity as trustee or other fiduciary role, the Group may hold or place assets on behalf of individuals, trusts, companies, pension schemes and others. The assets and their income are not included in the Groups financial statements. The Group earned fee income of £257 million (2017 - £244 million; 2016 - £251 million) from these activities.
The Financial Services Compensation Scheme
The Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS), the UKs statutory fund of last resort for customers of authorised financial services firms, pays compensation if a firm is unable to meet its obligations. The FSCS funds compensation for customers by raising management expenses levies and compensation levies on the industry. In relation to protected deposits, each deposit-taking institution contributes towards these levies in proportion to their share of total protected deposits on 31 December of the year preceding the scheme year (which runs from 1 April to 31 March), subject to annual maxima set by the Prudential Regulation Authority. In addition, the FSCS has the power to raise levies on a firm that has ceased to participate in the scheme and is in the process of ceasing to be authorised for the costs that it would have been liable to pay had the FSCS made a levy in the financial year it ceased to be a participant in the scheme.
The FSC had borrowed from HM Treasury to fund compensation costs associated with the failure of Bradford & Bingley, Heritable Bank, Kaupthing Singer & Friedlander, Landsbanki Icesave and London Scottish Bank plc. The industry has now repaid all outstanding loans with the final £4.7 billion being repaid in June 2018. The loan was interest bearing with the reference rate being the higher of 12 month LIBOR plus 111 basis points or the relevant gilt rate for the equivalent cost of borrowing from HMT.
RBS Group has accrued £1.8 million for its share of estimated FSCS levies.
Litigation, investigations and reviews
The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (the company or RBSG) and certain members of the Group are party to legal proceedings and the subject of investigation and other regulatory and governmental action (Matters) in the United Kingdom (UK), the United States (US), the European Union (EU) and other jurisdictions.
RBS recognises a provision for a liability in relation to these Matters when it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle an obligation resulting from past events, and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.
In many proceedings and investigations, it is not possible to determine whether any loss is probable or to estimate reliably the amount of any loss, either as a direct consequence of the relevant proceedings and investigations or as a result of adverse impacts or restrictions on RBSs reputation, businesses and operations. Numerous legal and factual issues may need to be resolved, including through potentially lengthy discovery and document production exercises and determination of important factual matters, and by addressing novel or unsettled legal questions relevant to the proceedings in question, before a liability can reasonably be estimated for any claim. RBS cannot predict if, how, or when such claims will be resolved or what the eventual settlement, damages, fine, penalty or other relief, if any, may be, particularly for claims that are at an early stage in their development or where claimants seek substantial or indeterminate damages.
There are situations where RBS may pursue an approach that in some instances leads to a settlement agreement. This may occur in order to avoid the expense, management distraction or reputational implications of continuing to contest liability, or in order to take account of the risks inherent in defending claims or investigations, even for those Matters for which RBS believes it has credible defences and should prevail on the merits. The uncertainties inherent in all such Matters affect the amount and timing of any potential outflows for both Matters with respect to which provisions have been established and other contingent liabilities.
The future outflow of resources in respect of any Matter may ultimately prove to be substantially greater than or less than the aggregate provision that RBS has recognised. Where (and as far as) liability cannot be reasonably estimated, no provision has been recognised.
Other than those discussed below, no member of the Group is or has been involved in governmental, legal or regulatory proceedings (including those which are pending or threatened) that are expected to be material, individually or in aggregate. RBS expects that in future periods, additional provisions, settlement amounts and customer redress payments will be necessary, in amounts that are expected to be substantial in some instances.
For a discussion of certain risks associated with the Groups litigation, investigations and reviews, see the Risk Factor relating to legal, regulatory and governmental actions and investigations set out on page 274.
Litigation
Residential mortgage-backed securities (RMBS) litigation in the US
RBS companies continue to defend RMBS-related claims in the US in which plaintiffs allege that certain disclosures made in connection with the relevant offerings of RMBS contained materially false or misleading statements and/or omissions regarding the underwriting standards pursuant to which the mortgage loans underlying the RMBS were issued. The remaining RMBS lawsuits against RBS companies consist of cases filed by the Federal Home Loan Banks of Boston and Seattle and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation that together involve the issuance of less than US$1 billion of RMBS issued primarily from 2005 to 2007. In addition, NatWest Markets Securities Inc. previously agreed to settle a purported RMBS class action entitled New Jersey Carpenters Health Fund v. Novastar Mortgage Inc. et al. for US$55.3 million, which has been paid into escrow pending court approval of the settlement.
London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR) and other rates litigation
NatWest Markets Plc and certain other members of the Group, including RBSG, are defendants in a number of class actions and individual claims pending in the US (primarily in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York (SDNY)) with respect to the setting of LIBOR and certain other benchmark interest rates. The complaints allege that certain members of the Group and other panel banks violated various federal laws, including the US commodities and antitrust laws, and state statutory and common law, as well as contracts, by manipulating LIBOR and prices of LIBOR-based derivatives in various markets through various means.
Several class actions relating to USD LIBOR, as well as more than two dozen non-class actions concerning USD LIBOR, are part of a coordinated proceeding in the SDNY. In December 2016, the SDNY held that it lacks personal jurisdiction over NatWest Markets Plc with respect to certain claims. As a result of that decision, all Group companies have been dismissed from each of the USD LIBOR-related class actions (including class actions on behalf of over-the-counter plaintiffs, exchanged-based purchaser plaintiffs, bondholder plaintiffs, and lender plaintiffs), but six non-class cases in the coordinated proceeding remain pending against Group defendants. The dismissal of Group companies for lack of personal jurisdiction is the subject of a pending appeal to the United States Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit.
Among the non-class claims dismissed by the SDNY in December 2016 were claims that the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) had asserted on behalf of certain failed US banks. On 10 July 2017, the FDIC, on behalf of 39 failed US banks, commenced substantially similar claims against RBS companies and others in the High Court of Justice of England and Wales. The action alleges that the defendants breached
Notes on the consolidated accounts
27 Memorandum items continued
Litigation, investigations and reviews
English and European competition law as well as asserting common law claims of fraud under US law.
In addition, there are two class actions relating to JPY LIBOR and Euroyen TIBOR, both pending before the same judge in the SDNY. In the first class action, which relates to Euroyen TIBOR futures contracts, the court dismissed the plaintiffs antitrust claims in March 2014, but declined to dismiss their claims under the Commodity Exchange Act for price manipulation, and the case is proceeding in the discovery phase. The second class action relates to other derivatives allegedly tied to JPY LIBOR and Euroyen TIBOR. The court dismissed that case on 10 March 2017 on the ground that the plaintiffs lack standing. The plaintiffs have commenced an appeal of that decision.
There is also a class action relating to the Singapore Interbank Offered Rate and Singapore Swap Offer Rate pending in the SDNY. In that case, the court denied defendants motion to dismiss on 5 October 2018. The courts ruling would permit certain antitrust claims to proceed against NatWest Markets Plc and other non-RBS defendants, however, in November 2018, the defendants filed another motion to dismiss plaintiffs claims.
Four other class action complaints were filed against RBS companies in the SDNY, each relating to a different reference rate. In the case relating to Pound Sterling LIBOR, the court dismissed all claims against RBS companies, for various reasons, on 21 December 2018, and plaintiffs are seeking reconsideration of that decision. In the case relating to the Australian Bank Bill Swap Reference Rate, the court dismissed all claims against RBS companies for lack of personal jurisdiction on 26 November 2018, but plaintiffs have filed an amended complaint, which will be the subject of a further motion to dismiss. In the case relating to Euribor, the court dismissed all claims against RBS companies for lack of personal jurisdiction on 21 February 2017. In the case relating to Swiss Franc LIBOR, the court dismissed all claims against all defendants on various grounds on 25 September 2017, but held that it has personal jurisdiction over NatWest Markets Plc and allowed the plaintiffs to replead their complaint. Defendants renewed motion to dismiss the amended complaint relating to Swiss Franc LIBOR remains pending.
NatWest Markets Plc has also been named as a defendant in a motion to certify a class action relating to LIBOR in the Tel Aviv District Court in Israel.
NatWest Markets Plc is defending a claim in the High Court in London brought by London Bridge Holdings Ltd and others, in which the claimants allege LIBOR manipulation in connection with the sale of interest rate hedging products. The sum claimed in that case is £446.7 million.
On 4 February 2019, a claim was issued against NatWest Markets Plc by London Borough of Newham, in respect of certain lender option borrower option (LOBO) loans.
Details of UK litigation claims in relation to the alleged mis-sale of interest rate hedging products (IRHPs) involving LIBOR-related allegations are set out under Interest rate hedging products litigation on page 236.
In January 2019, a class action antitrust complaint was filed in the SDNY alleging that the defendants (USD ICE LIBOR panel banks and affiliates) have conspired to suppress USD ICE LIBOR from 2014 to the present by submitting incorrect information to ICE about their borrowing costs. The RBS defendants are RBSG, NatWest Markets Plc, NatWest Markets Securities Inc., and NatWest Plc.
FX antitrust litigation
NatWest Markets Plc and certain other members of the Group, including RBSG, are defendants in several cases relating to NatWest Markets Plcs foreign exchange (FX) business, each of which is pending before the same federal judge in the SDNY.
In 2015, RBS companies paid US$255 million to settle the consolidated antitrust class action on behalf of persons who entered into over-the-counter FX transactions with defendants or who traded FX instruments on exchanges. That settlement received final court approval in August 2018. On 7 November 2018, some members of the settlement class who opted out of the settlement filed their own non-class complaint in the SDNY asserting antitrust claims against RBS companies and others. On 31 December 2018, some of the same claimants, as well as others, filed proceedings in the High Court in London, asserting competition claims against NatWest Markets Plc and several other banks.
Two other FX-related class actions remain pending. First, there is a class action on behalf of consumers and end-user businesses, which is proceeding in the discovery phase following the SDNYs denial of the defendants motions to dismiss in March 2018. Second, there is a class action on behalf of indirect purchasers of FX instruments (which plaintiffs define as persons who transacted FX instruments with retail foreign exchange dealers that transacted directly with defendant banks). That case is also proceeding in discovery following the SDNYs denial of defendants motion to dismiss on 25 October 2018.
RBS companies have also been named as defendants in two motions to certify FX-related class actions in the Tel Aviv District Court in Israel.
Certain other foreign exchange transaction related claims have been or may be threatened against RBS companies. RBS cannot predict whether any of these claims will be pursued, but expects that some may.
US Treasury securities antitrust litigation
NatWest Markets Securities Inc. is a defendant in a consolidated antitrust class action pending in the SDNY on behalf of persons who transacted in US Treasury securities or derivatives based on such instruments, including futures and options. The plaintiffs allege that defendants rigged the US Treasury securities auction bidding process to deflate prices at which they bought such securities and colluded to increase the prices at which they sold such securities to plaintiffs. The defendants motion to dismiss this matter remains pending.
Swaps antitrust litigation
NatWest Markets Plc and other members of the Group, including RBSG, as well as a number of other interest rate swap dealers, are defendants in several cases pending in the SDNY alleging violations of the US antitrust laws in the market for interest rate swaps. There is a consolidated class action complaint on behalf of persons who entered into interest rate swaps with the defendants, as well as non-class action claims by three swap execution facilities (TeraExchange, Javelin, and trueEx). The plaintiffs allege that the swap execution facilities would have successfully established exchange-like trading of interest rate swaps if the defendants had not unlawfully conspired to prevent that from happening through boycotts and other means. Discovery in these cases is ongoing.
In addition, on 8 June 2017, TeraExchange filed a complaint against RBS companies, including RBSG, as well as a number of other credit default swap dealers, in the SDNY. TeraExchange alleges it would have established exchange-like trading of credit default swaps if the defendant dealers had not engaged in an unlawful antitrust conspiracy. On 1 October 2018, the court dismissed all claims against RBS companies.
Madoff
NatWest Markets N.V. (NWM N.V.) is a defendant in two actions filed by Irving Picard, as trustee for the bankruptcy estates of Bernard L. Madoff and Bernard L. Madoff Investment Securities LLC, in bankruptcy court in New York. In both cases, the trustee alleges that certain transfers received by NatWest Markets N.V. amounted to fraudulent conveyances that should be clawed back for the benefit of the Madoff estate.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
27 Memorandum items continued
Litigation, investigations and reviews
In the primary action, filed in December 2010, the trustee originally sought to recover US$75.8 million in redemptions that NWM N.V. allegedly received from certain Madoff feeder funds and US$162.1 million that NWM N.V. allegedly received from certain swap counterparties. In August 2018, the trustee voluntarily dismissed a portion of this claim (relating to US$74.6 million received from certain swap counterparties) without prejudice to-refiling at a later date. Otherwise this action remains pending before the bankruptcy court, where it will in due course be the subject of a motion to dismiss. In the second action, filed in October 2011, the trustee seeks to recover an additional US$21.8 million. In November 2016, the bankruptcy court dismissed this case on international comity grounds, and that decision is currently on appeal to the United States Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit.
Thornburg adversary proceeding
Certain RBS companies were defendants in an adversary proceeding filed in the US bankruptcy court in Maryland by the trustee for TMST, Inc. (formerly known as Thornburg Mortgage, Inc.). The trustee sought recovery of transfers made under certain restructuring agreements as avoidable fraudulent and preferential transfers. On 26 October 2018, the bankruptcy court approved a US$23.5 million settlement of this matter. RBS companies have paid this settlement amount, which was covered by a provision existing as of 30 September 2018.
Interest rate hedging products and similar litigation
RBS is dealing with a number of active litigation claims in the UK in relation to the alleged mis-selling of interest rate hedging products (IRHPs). In general claimants allege that the relevant IRHPs were mis-sold to them, with some also alleging that misrepresentations were made in relation to LIBOR. Claims have been brought by customers who were considered under the UK Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) redress programme for IRHPs, as well as customers who were outside of the scope of that programme, which was closed to new entrants on 31 March 2015. RBS remains exposed to potential claims from customers who were either ineligible to be considered for redress or who are dissatisfied with their redress offers.
Property Alliance Group (PAG) v NatWest Markets Plc was the leading case before the English High Court involving both IRHP mis-selling and LIBOR misconduct allegations. The amount claimed was £34.8 million and the trial ended in October 2016. In December 2016 the Court dismissed all of PAGs claims. PAG appealed that decision, and the Court of Appeals judgment dismissing the appeal was handed down on 2 March 2018. On 24 July 2018 the Supreme Court declined the request from PAG for permission to appeal an aspect of the judgment relating to implied representations of Sterling LIBOR rates. The Court of Appeals decision may impact other IRHP and LIBOR-related cases currently pending in the English courts, some of which involve substantial amounts.
Separately, NatWest Markets Plc is defending claims filed in France by five French local authorities relating to structured interest rate swaps. The plaintiffs allege, among other things, that the swaps are void for being illegal transactions, that they were mis-sold, and that information / advisory duties were breached. One of the claims is now at an end following the Court of Appeals dismissal of the claim, and is not being appealed to the Supreme Court. Three of the claims were also dismissed but are subject to appeal to the Supreme Court. The fifth claim remains to be heard before the lower courts.
Tax dispute
HMRC issued a tax assessment in 2012 against NatWest Markets Plc for approximately £86 million regarding a value-added-tax (VAT) matter in relation to the trading of European Union Allowances (EUAs) by an RBS joint venture subsidiary in 2009. RBS has lodged an appeal, which is still to be heard, before the First-tier Tribunal (Tax), a specialist tax tribunal, challenging the assessment (the Tax Dispute). In the event that the assessment is upheld, interest and costs would be payable, and a penalty of up to 100 per cent of the VAT held to have been legitimately denied by HMRC could also be levied. Separately, RBS is a named defendant in civil proceedings before the High Court brought in 2015 by ten companies (all in liquidation) (the Liquidated Companies) and their respective liquidators (together, the Claimants). The Liquidated Companies previously traded in EUAs in 2009 and are alleged to be defaulting traders within (or otherwise connected to) the EUA supply chains forming the subject of the Tax Dispute. The Claimants claim approximately £71.4 million plus interest and costs and allege that NatWest Markets Plc dishonestly assisted the directors of the Liquidated Companies in the breach of their statutory duties and/or knowingly participated in the carrying on of the business of the Liquidated Companies with intent to defraud creditors. The trial in that matter concluded on 20 July 2018 and judgment is awaited.
US Anti-Terrorism Act litigation
NatWest Plc is defending lawsuits filed in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of New York by a number of US nationals (or their estates, survivors, or heirs) who were victims of terrorist attacks in Israel. The plaintiffs allege that NatWest Plc is liable for damages arising from those attacks pursuant to the US Anti-Terrorism Act because NatWest Plc previously maintained bank accounts and transferred funds for the Palestine Relief & Development Fund, an organisation which plaintiffs allege solicited funds for Hamas, the alleged perpetrator of the attacks.
In October 2017, the trial court dismissed claims against NatWest Plc with respect to two of the 18 terrorist attacks at issue. On 14 March 2018, the trial court granted a request by NatWest Plc for leave to file a renewed summary judgment motion in respect of the remaining claims, which has now been filed. No trial date has been set.
NatWest Markets N.V. and certain other financial institutions, are defendants in several actions pending in the United States District Courts for the Eastern and Southern Districts of New York, filed by a number of US nationals (or their estates, survivors, or heirs), most of whom are or were US military personnel, who were killed or injured in attacks in Iraq between 2003 and 2011. NatWest Markets Plc is also a defendant in some of these cases.
The attacks at issue in the cases were allegedly perpetrated by Hezbollah and certain Iraqi terror cells allegedly funded by the Islamic Republic of Iran. According to the plaintiffs allegations, the defendants are liable for damages arising from the attacks because they allegedly conspired with Iran and certain Iranian banks to assist Iran in transferring money to Hezbollah and the Iraqi terror cells, in violation of the US Anti-Terrorism Act, by agreeing to engage in stripping of transactions initiated by the Iranian banks so that the Iranian nexus to the transactions would not be detected. The first of these actions was filed in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of New York in November 2014. On 27 July 2018, the magistrate judge in that case issued a report to the district court recommending that the district court deny the defendants pending motion to dismiss. NatWest Markets N.V. has requested that the district court grant the motion to dismiss notwithstanding the magistrates recommendation. The other actions are either subject to a pending motion to dismiss, or will be the subject of such a motion in due course.
Securities underwriting litigation
NatWest Markets Securities Inc. is an underwriter defendant in several securities class actions in the US in which plaintiffs generally allege that an issuer of public debt or equity securities, as well as the underwriters of the securities (including NatWest Markets Securities Inc.), are liable to purchasers for misrepresentations and omissions made in connection with the offering of such securities.
Investigations and reviews
RBSs businesses and financial condition can be affected by the actions
Notes on the consolidated accounts
27 Memorandum items continued
Litigation, investigations and reviews
of various governmental and regulatory authorities in the UK, the US, the EU and elsewhere. RBS has engaged, and will continue to engage, in discussions with relevant governmental and regulatory authorities, including in the UK, the US, the EU and elsewhere, on an ongoing and regular basis, and in response to informal and formal inquiries or investigations, regarding operational, systems and control evaluations and issues including those related to compliance with applicable laws and regulations, including consumer protection, business conduct, competition/anti-trust, anti-bribery, anti-money laundering and sanctions regimes.
The NatWest Markets business in particular has been providing, and continues to provide, information regarding a variety of matters, including, for example, the setting of benchmark rates and related derivatives trading, conduct in the foreign exchange market, and various issues relating to the issuance, underwriting, and sales and trading of fixed-income securities, including structured products and government securities, some of which have resulted, and others of which may result, in investigations or proceedings.
Any matters discussed or identified during such discussions and inquiries may result in, among other things, further inquiry or investigation, other action being taken by governmental and regulatory authorities, increased costs being incurred by RBS, remediation of systems and controls, public or private censure, restriction of RBSs business activities and/or fines. Any of the events or circumstances mentioned in this paragraph or below could have a material adverse effect on RBS, its business, authorisations and licences, reputation, results of operations or the price of securities issued by it.
RBS is co-operating fully with the investigations and reviews described below.
RMBS and other securitised products investigations
In the US, RBS companies have in recent years been involved in investigations relating to, among other things, issuance, underwriting and trading in RMBS and other mortgage-backed securities and collateralised debt obligations (CDOs).
Investigations by the US Department of Justice (DoJ) and certain state attorneys general relating to the issuance and underwriting of RMBS were resolved in 2018. Certain other state attorneys general have sought information regarding similar issues, and RBS is aware that at least one such investigation is ongoing.
In October 2017, NatWest Markets Securities Inc. entered into a non-prosecution agreement (NPA) with the United States Attorney for the District of Connecticut (USAO) in connection with alleged misrepresentations to counterparties relating to secondary trading in various forms of asset-backed securities. As part of the NPA, the USAO agreed not to file criminal charges relating to certain conduct and information described in the NPA if NatWest Markets Securities Inc. complies with the terms of the NPA. In October 2018, NatWest Markets Securities Inc. agreed to a six-month extension of the NPA while the USAO reviews the circumstances of an unrelated matter reported during the course of the NPA.
US mortgages - loan repurchase matters
RBSs NatWest Markets business in North America was a purchaser of non-agency residential mortgages in the secondary market, and an issuer and underwriter of non-agency RMBS, and, in some circumstances, made certain representations and warranties regarding the characteristics of the underlying loans. As a result, NatWest Markets may be, or may have been, contractually required to repurchase such loans or indemnify certain parties against losses for certain breaches of such representations and warranties. Depending on the extent to which such loan repurchase related claims are pursued against and not rebutted by NatWest Markets on timeliness or other grounds, the aggregate potential impact on RBS, if any, may be material.
Foreign exchange related investigations
In 2014 and 2015, NatWest Markets Plc paid significant penalties to resolve investigations into its FX business by the FCA, the CFTC, the DoJ, and the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Federal Reserve). As part of its plea agreement with the DoJ, NatWest Markets Plc pled guilty to a one-count information charging an antitrust conspiracy occurring between as early as December 2007 to at least April 2010. NatWest Markets Plc admitted that it knowingly, through one of its euro/US dollar currency traders, joined and participated in a conspiracy to eliminate competition in the purchase and sale of the euro/US dollar currency pair exchanged in the FX spot market. On 5 January 2017, the United States District Court for the District of Connecticut imposed a sentence on NatWest Markets Plc consisting of a US$395 million fine and a three-year probation, which among other things, prohibits NatWest Markets Plc from committing another crime in violation of US law or engaging in the FX trading practices that form the basis for the charged crime and requires NatWest Markets Plc to implement a compliance program designed to prevent and detect the unlawful conduct at issue and to strengthen its compliance and internal controls as required by other regulators (including the FCA and the CFTC). A violation of the terms of probation could lead to the imposition of additional penalties.
As part of the settlement with the Federal Reserve, NatWest Markets Plc and NatWest Markets Securities Inc. entered into a cease and desist order (the FX Order). In the FX Order, which is publicly available and will remain in effect until terminated by the Federal Reserve, NatWest Markets Plc and NatWest Markets Securities Inc. agreed to take certain remedial actions with respect to FX activities and certain other designated market activities, including the creation of an enhanced written internal controls and compliance program, an improved compliance risk management program, and an enhanced internal audit program. NatWest Markets Plc and NatWest Markets Securities Inc. are obligated to implement and comply with these programs as approved by the Federal Reserve, and are also required to conduct, on an annual basis, a review of applicable compliance policies and procedures and a risk-focused sampling of key controls.
NatWest Markets Plc is co-operating with investigations and responding to inquiries from other governmental and regulatory (including competition) authorities on similar issues relating to failings in its FX business. The timing and amount of financial penalties with respect to any further settlements and related litigation risks and collateral consequences remain uncertain and may well be material.
FCA review of RBSs treatment of SMEs
In 2014, the FCA appointed an independent Skilled Person under section 166 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to review RBSs treatment of SME customers whose relationship was managed by RBSs Global Restructuring Group (GRG) in the period 1 January 2008 to 31 December 2013.
The Skilled Person delivered its final report to the FCA during September 2016, and the FCA published an update in November 2016. In response, RBS announced redress steps for SME customers in the UK and the Republic of Ireland that were in GRG between 2008 and 2013. These steps were (i) an automatic refund of certain complex fees; and (ii) a new complaints process, overseen by an independent third party. The complaints process closed on 22 October 2018 for new complaints in the UK and, with the exception of a small cohort of potential complainants for whom there is an extended deadline, on 31 December 2018 for new complaints in the Republic of Ireland.
RBS made a provision of £400 million in 2016, in respect of the above redress steps, of which £270 million had been utilised by 31 December 2018. An additional provision of £50 million was taken at 31 December 2018 reflecting the increased costs of the complaints process.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
27 Memorandum items continued
Litigation, investigations and reviews
The FCA published a summary of the Skilled Persons report in November 2017. The UK House of Commons Treasury Select Committee, seeking to rely on Parliamentary powers, published the full version of the Skilled Persons report on 20 February 2018. On 31 July 2018, the FCA confirmed that it had concluded its investigation and that it does not intend to take disciplinary or prohibitory action against any person in relation to these matters. It has subsequently indicated that it will shortly publish a final summary of its investigative work.
Investment advice review
As a result of an FSA review in 2013, the FCA required RBS to carry out a past business review and customer contact exercise on a sample of historic customers who received investment advice on certain lump sum products, during the period from March 2012 until December 2012. The review was conducted by an independent Skilled Person under section 166 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000. Redress was paid to certain customers in that sample group.
RBS later agreed with the FCA that it would carry out a wider review/remediation exercise relating to certain investment, insurance and pension sales from 1 January 2011 to 1 April 2015. That exercise is materially complete. Phase 2 (covering sales in 2010) started in April 2018 and was targeted for completion by the end of 2018, however the deadline has now been extended to April 2019.
In addition, RBS agreed with the FCA that it would carry out a remediation exercise, for a specific customer segment who were sold a particular structured product. Redress was paid to certain customers who took out the structured product.
RBS provisions in relation to these matters totalled £206 million as at 31 December 2018, of which £144 million had been utilised by that date.
Packaged accounts
RBS has had dedicated resources in place since 2013 to investigate and resolve packaged account complaints on an individual basis. RBS provisions for this matter totalled £444 million as at 31 December 2018. The FCA conducted a thematic review of packaged bank accounts across the UK from October 2014 to April 2016, the results of which were published in October 2016. RBS made amendments to its sales process and complaints procedures to address the findings from that review.
FCA investigation into RBSs compliance with the Money Laundering Regulations 2007
On 21 July 2017, the FCA notified RBS that it was undertaking an investigation into RBSs compliance with the Money Laundering Regulations 2007 in relation to certain customers. Following amendment to the scope of the investigation, there are currently two areas under review: (1) compliance with Money Laundering Regulations in respect of Money Service Business customers; and (2) the Suspicious Transactions regime in relation to the events surrounding particular customers. The investigations in both areas are assessing both criminal and civil culpability. RBS is cooperating with the investigations, including responding to several information requests from the FCA.
Systematic Anti-Money Laundering Programme assessment
In December 2018, the FCA commenced a Systematic Anti-Money Laundering Programme assessment of RBS. RBS is responding to requests for information from the FCA.
Payment Protection Insurance (PPI)
Since 2011, RBS has been implementing the FCAs policy statement for the handling of complaints about the mis-selling of PPI (Policy Statement 10/12). In August 2017, the FCAs new rules and guidance on PPI complaints handling (Policy Statement 17/3) came into force. The Policy Statement introduced new so called Plevin rules, under which customers may be eligible for redress if the bank earned a high level of commission from the sale of PPI, but did not disclose this detail at the point of sale. The Policy Statement also introduced a two year PPI deadline, due to expire in August 2019, before which new PPI complaints must be made. RBS is implementing the Policy Statement.
RBS has made provisions totalling £5.3 billion to date for PPI claims, including an additional provision of £200 million taken at Q3 2018, reflecting greater than predicted complaints volumes. Of the £5.3 billion cumulative provision, £4.7 billion had been utilised by 31 December 2018.
FCA mortgages market study
In December 2016, the FCA launched a market study into the provision of mortgages. On 4 May 2018 the interim report was published. This found that competition was working well for many customers but also proposed remedies to help customers shop around more easily for mortgages. Following a period of consultation, the final report is due to be published in Q1 2019.
FCA strategic review of retail banking models
On 11 May 2017 the FCA announced a strategic review of retail banking models. The FCA used the review to understand how these models operate, including how free if in credit banking is paid for and the impact of changes such as increased use of digital channels and reduced branch usage.
On 18 December 2018, the FCA published its final report containing a number of findings, including that personal current accounts are an important source of competitive advantage for major banks. Following the review, the FCA is to continue to monitor retail banking models, analyse new payments business models and undertake exploratory work to understand certain aspects of SME banking.
US/Swiss tax programme
In December 2015, Coutts & Co Ltd., a member of the Group incorporated in Switzerland, entered into a non-prosecution agreement (the NPA) with the DoJ. This was entered into as part of the DoJs programme for Swiss banks, related to its investigations of the role that Swiss banks played in concealing the assets of US tax payers in offshore accounts (US related accounts). Coutts & Co Ltd. paid a US$78.5 million penalty and acknowledged responsibility for certain conduct set forth in a statement of facts accompanying the agreement. Under the NPA, which has a term of four years, Coutts & Co Ltd. is required, among other things, to provide certain information, cooperate with the DoJs investigations, and commit no U.S. federal offences. If Coutts & Co Ltd. abides by the NPA, the DoJ will not prosecute it for certain tax-related and monetary transaction offences in connection with US related accounts.
Since the signing of the NPA in 2015, Coutts & Co Ltd has identified and disclosed to the DoJ a number of US related accounts that were not included in its original submission supporting the NPA. Coutts & Co Ltd is in discussions with the DoJ regarding these additional accounts and has agreed with the DoJ to undertake additional review work, which is ongoing.
Enforcement proceedings and investigations in relation to Coutts & Co Ltd
In February 2017, the Swiss Financial Market Supervisory Authority (FINMA) took enforcement action against Coutts & Co Ltd with regard to failures of money laundering checks and controls on certain client accounts that were connected with the Malaysian sovereign wealth fund, 1MDB, and were held with Coutts & Co Ltd. FINMA accordingly required Coutts & Co Ltd to disgorge profits of CHF 6.5 million. There are two administrative criminal proceedings pending before the Swiss Finance Department against two former employees of Coutts & Co Ltd. In addition, the Monetary Authority of Singapore (MAS)s supervisory examination of Coutts & Co Ltds Singapore branch revealed breaches of anti-money laundering requirements. MAS imposed on Coutts & Co Ltd financial penalties amounting to SGD 2.4 million in December 2016.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
27 Memorandum items continued
Litigation, investigations and reviews
In addition, Coutts & Co Ltd continues to assist with investigations and enquiries from authorities where requested to do so.
Regulator requests concerning certain historic Russian transactions
Media coverage in 2017 highlighted an alleged money laundering scheme involving Russian entities between 2010 and 2014. Allegedly certain European banks, including RBS and 16 other UK based financial institutions, and certain US banks, were involved in processing certain transactions associated with this scheme. RBS has responded to requests for information from the FCA, PRA and regulators in other jurisdictions.
Review and investigation of treatment of tracker mortgage customers in Ulster Bank Ireland DAC
In December 2015, the Central Bank of Ireland (CBI) announced that it had written to a number of lenders requiring them to put in place a robust plan and framework to review the treatment of customers who have been sold mortgages with a tracker interest rate or with a tracker interest rate entitlement. The CBI stated that the intended purpose of the review was to identify any cases where customers contractual rights under the terms of their mortgage agreements were not fully honoured, or where lenders did not fully comply with various regulatory requirements and standards regarding disclosure and transparency for customers. The CBI has required Ulster Bank Ireland DAC (UBI DAC), a member of the Group incorporated in the Republic of Ireland, to participate in this review and UBI DAC is co-operating with the CBI in this regard. UBI DAC submitted its phase 2 report to the CBI in March 2017, identifying impacted customers. The redress and compensation phase (phase 3) commenced in Q4 2017 and is ongoing.
RBS has made provisions totalling 297 million (£266 million) to date for this matter. Of the 297 million (£266 million) cumulative provision, 211million (£189 million) had been utilised by 31 December 2018.
Separately, in April 2016, the CBI notified UBI DAC that it was also commencing an investigation under its Administrative Sanctions Procedure into suspected breaches of the Consumer Protection Code 2006 during the period 4 August 2006 to 30 June 2008 in relation to certain customers who switched from tracker mortgages to fixed rate mortgages. This investigation is ongoing and UBI DAC continues to co-operate with the CBI.
As part of an internal review of the wider retail and commercial loan portfolios extending from the tracker mortgage examination programme, UBI DAC identified further legacy business issues. A programme is ongoing to identify and remediate impacted customers. RBS has made provisions totalling 167 million (£150 million) based on expected remediation and project costs of which 41 million (£37 million) had been utilised by 31 December 2018.
28 Analysis of the net investment in business interests and intangible assets
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
Acquisitions and disposals |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Fair value given for businesses acquired (1) |
(113) |
(131) |
(87) |
Additional investment in associates |
(9) |
|
|
Net outflow of cash in respect of acquisitions |
(122) |
(131) |
(87) |
Net assets/(liabilities) sold |
|
177 |
(400) |
Non-cash consideration |
|
(15) |
(5) |
Profit on disposal |
|
155 |
22 |
Net cash and cash equivalents disposed |
|
|
55 |
Net inflow/(outflow) of cash in respect of disposals |
|
317 |
(328) |
Dividends received from associates |
5 |
(1) |
9 |
Cash expenditure on intangible assets |
(364) |
(384) |
(480) |
Net (outflow)/inflow |
(481) |
(199) |
(886) |
Note:
(1) 2018 includes the purchase of Free agent.
29 Analysis of changes in financing during the year |
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
Share capital, share premium, |
|
|
| |||
|
paid-in equity and merger reserve |
|
Subordinated liabilities | ||||
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
At 1 January |
27,791 |
52,979 |
50,577 |
|
12,722 |
19,419 |
19,847 |
Issue of ordinary shares |
144 |
306 |
300 |
|
|
|
|
Issue of Additional Tier 1 capital notes |
|
|
2,046 |
|
|
|
|
Redemption of paid-in equity |
|
(720) |
(110) |
|
|
|
|
Redemption of subordinated liabilities |
|
|
|
|
(2,258) |
(5,747) |
(3,606) |
Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing |
144 |
(414) |
2,236 |
|
(2,258) |
(5,747) |
(3,606) |
Transfer to retained earnings |
|
(25,789) |
|
|
|
|
|
Ordinary shares issued in respect of employee share schemes |
80 |
71 |
166 |
|
|
|
|
Redemption of debt preference shares |
|
748 |
|
|
|
|
|
Other adjustments including foreign exchange |
|
196 |
|
|
71 |
(950) |
3,178 |
At 31 December |
28,015 |
27,791 |
52,979 |
|
10,535 |
12,722 |
19,419 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
30 Analysis of cash and cash equivalents |
|
|
|
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
At 1 January |
|
|
|
- cash |
98,337 |
88,414 |
94,832 |
- cash equivalents |
24,268 |
10,156 |
8,760 |
|
122,605 |
98,570 |
103,592 |
Net cash outflow |
(13,794) |
24,035 |
(5,022) |
At 31 December |
108,811 |
122,605 |
98,570 |
|
|
|
|
Comprising: |
|
|
|
Cash and balances at central banks |
88,897 |
98,337 |
74,250 |
Treasury bills and debt securities |
83 |
427 |
387 |
Net loans to banks |
19,831 |
23,841 |
23,933 |
Cash and cash equivalents |
108,811 |
122,605 |
98,570 |
Note:
(1) Includes cash collateral posted with bank counterparties in respect of derivative liabilities of £7,302 million (2017 - £6,883 million; 2016 - £6,661 million).
Certain members of RBS are required by law or regulation to maintain balances with the central banks in the jurisdictions in which they operate. These balances are set out below.
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
Bank of England |
£0.9bn |
£0.6bn |
£0.5bn |
De Nederlandsche Bank |
0.1bn |
0.1bn |
0.4bn |
31 Directors and key management remuneration
|
2018 |
2017 |
Directors remuneration |
£000 |
£000 |
Non Executive Directors |
2,001 |
1,747 |
Chairman and executive directors |
|
|
-emoluments |
4,657 |
5,299 |
|
6,658 |
7,046 |
Amounts receivable under long-term incentive plans and share option plans |
|
1,225 |
Total |
6,658 |
8,271 |
No directors accrued benefits under defined benefit schemes or money purchase schemes during 2018 and 2017.
The executive directors may participate in the companys long-term incentive plans, executive share option and sharesave schemes and details of their interests in the companys shares arising from their participation are given in the Directors remuneration report. Details of the remuneration received by each director are also given in the Directors remuneration report.
Compensation of key management
The aggregate remuneration of directors and other members of key management during the year was as follows:
|
2018 |
2017 |
|
£000 |
£000 |
Short-term benefits |
20,316 |
19,019 |
Post-employment benefits |
82 |
434 |
Share-based payments |
|
3,558 |
|
20,398 |
23,011 |
A new board and committee operating model was introduced in 2018 in order to align with UK ring-fencing requirements. The definition of key management has been revised and now comprises members of the RBSG and NWH Ltd Boards, members of the RBSG and NWH Ltd Executive Committees, and the Chief Executives of NatWest Markets Plc and RBS International. This is on the basis that these individuals have been identified as Persons Discharging Managerial Responsibilities (PDMRs) of RBSG under the new governance structure.
32 Transactions with directors and key management
At 31 December 2018, amounts outstanding in relation to transactions, arrangements and agreements entered into by authorised institutions in the Group, as defined in UK legislation, were £9,660 in respect of loans to five persons who were directors of the company at any time during the financial period.
For the purposes of IAS 24 Related Party Disclosures, key management comprise directors of the company and Persons Discharging Managerial Responsibilities (PDMRs) of RBSG under the new governance structure. The captions in the Groups primary financial statements include the following amounts attributable, in aggregate, to key management:
|
2018 |
2017 |
Loans to customers |
1,544 |
3,942 |
Customer deposits |
31,361 |
23,619 |
Key management have banking relationships with Group entities which are entered into in the normal course of business and on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and security, as for comparable transactions with other persons of a similar standing or, where applicable, with other employees. These transactions did not involve more than the normal risk of repayment or present other unfavourable features.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
33 Adoption of IFRS 9
The Groups accounting policies have significantly changed on the adoption of IFRS 9 Financial Instruments with effect from 1 January 2018. Prior years are re-presented but there has been no restatement of prior year data.
IFRS 9 changed the classification categories of financial assets from IAS 39. Held-for-trading assets were classified to mandatory fair value through profit or loss; loans and receivables were classified to amortised cost; and available-for-sale assets were classified as fair value through other comprehensive income unless they were deemed to be in a fair value business model or failed the contractual cash flow requirements under IFRS 9. There were no changes in the classification and measurement of financial liabilities.
Loans to customers of £2.1 billion were reclassified from loans and receivables under IAS 39 to fair value through profit or loss under IFRS 9. As a result, their carrying value increased by £583 million.
The net increase to loan impairments under IAS 39 was £616 million under the expected credit loss requirements of IFRS 9, including £85 million under provisions for contingent liabilities and commitments. This includes discontinued activities which is shown below on other assets and other liabilities
The impact on the Groups balance sheet at 1 January 2018 and the key movements in relation to the impact on classification and measurement, expected credit losses and tax are as follow:
|
|
Changes to presentation |
|
IFRS 9 impact |
| |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Held-for-trading |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
31 December |
exported to |
|
30 December |
Classification |
Expected |
|
1 January |
|
2017 |
trading |
New |
2017 |
& |
credit |
|
2018 |
|
(IAS 39) |
assets/liabilities |
presentation |
re-presented |
measurement |
losses |
Tax |
(IFRS 9) |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and balances at central banks |
98,337 |
|
|
98,337 |
|
(1) |
|
98,336 |
Trading assets |
|
85,991 |
|
85,991 |
|
|
|
85,991 |
Derivatives |
|
|
160,843 |
160,843 |
|
|
|
160,843 |
Settlement balances |
|
|
2,517 |
2,517 |
|
|
|
2,517 |
Loans and advances to banks |
30,251 |
(18,734) |
(11,517) |
|
|
|
|
|
Loans to banks - amortised cost |
|
|
11,517 |
11,517 |
|
(3) |
|
11,514 |
Loans and advances to customers |
349,919 |
(39,747) |
(310,172) |
|
|
|
|
|
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
|
|
310,116 |
310,116 |
(2,191) |
(524) |
|
307,401 |
Debt securities |
78,933 |
(27,481) |
(51,452) |
|
|
|
|
|
Equity shares |
450 |
(29) |
(421) |
|
|
|
|
|
Other financial assets |
|
|
51,929 |
51,929 |
2,752 |
(3) |
|
54,678 |
Settlement balances |
2,517 |
|
(2,517) |
|
|
|
|
|
Derivatives |
160,843 |
|
(160,843) |
|
|
|
|
|
Intangible assets |
6,543 |
|
|
6,543 |
|
|
|
6,543 |
Property, plant and equipment |
4,602 |
|
(4,602) |
|
|
|
|
|
Deferred tax |
1,740 |
|
(1,740) |
|
|
|
|
|
Assets of disposal groups |
195 |
|
(195) |
|
|
|
|
|
Other assets |
3,726 |
|
6,537 |
10,263 |
|
|
25 |
10,288 |
Total assets |
738,056 |
|
|
738,056 |
561 |
(531) |
25 |
738,111 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Deposits by banks |
46,898 |
(16,502) |
(30,396) |
|
|
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
|
|
30,396 |
30,396 |
|
|
|
30,396 |
Customer accounts |
398,036 |
(36,720) |
(361,316) |
|
|
|
|
|
Customer deposits |
|
|
361,316 |
361,316 |
|
|
|
361,316 |
Debt securities in issue |
30,559 |
(233) |
(30,326) |
|
|
|
|
|
Settlement balances |
2,844 |
|
|
2,844 |
|
|
|
2,844 |
Trading liabilities |
|
81,982 |
|
81,982 |
|
|
|
81,982 |
Short positions |
28,527 |
(28,527) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Derivatives |
154,506 |
|
|
154,506 |
|
|
|
154,506 |
Other financial liabilities |
|
|
30,326 |
30,326 |
|
|
|
30,326 |
Subordinated liabilities |
12,722 |
|
|
12,722 |
|
|
|
12,722 |
Other liabilities |
14,871 |
|
|
14,871 |
|
85 |
41 |
14,997 |
Total liabilities |
688,963 |
|
|
688,963 |
|
85 |
41 |
689,089 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total equity |
49,093 |
|
|
49,093 |
561 |
(616) |
(16) |
49,022 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total liabilities and equity |
738,056 |
|
|
738,056 |
561 |
(531) |
25 |
738,111 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
33 Adoption of IFRS 9 continued
The table below reflects the impact of IFRS 9 on total equity:
|
Total £m |
At 31 December 2017 - under IAS 39 |
49,093 |
Classification & measurement |
561 |
- Mandatory fair value through profit or loss assets - adjustments following business model reviews (SPPI) (1) |
579 |
- Equity shares held at cost under IAS 39 - fair value adjustments through FVOCI reserve |
48 |
- Additional write-down of amortised cost assets |
(66) |
Expected credit losses |
(616) |
- Amortised cost assets |
(531) |
- Contingent liabilities and commitments |
(85) |
Tax |
(16) |
At 1 January 2018 - under IFRS on transition to IFRS 9 |
49,022 |
Note:
(1) Includes £583 million credit in relation to loans to customers and £4 million debit in relation to debt securities.
34 Related parties
UK Government
On 1 December 2008, the UK Government through HM Treasury became the ultimate controlling party of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc. The UK Governments shareholding is managed by UK Government Investments Limited, a company wholly owned by the UK Government. As a result, the UK Government and UK Government controlled bodies became related parties of the Group.
The Group enters into transactions with many of these bodies on an arms length basis. Transactions include the payment of: taxes principally UK corporation tax (Note 7) and value added tax; national insurance contributions; local authority rates; and regulatory fees and levies (including the bank levy (Note 3) and FSCS levies (Note 27) together with banking transactions such as loans and deposits undertaken in the normal course of banker-customer relationships.
Bank of England facilities
The Group may participate in a number of schemes operated by the Bank of England in the normal course of business.
Members of the Group that are UK authorised institutions are required to maintain non-interest bearing (cash ratio) deposits with the Bank of England amounting to 0.296% of their average eligible liabilities in excess of £600 million. They also have access to Bank of England reserve accounts: sterling current accounts that earn interest at the Bank of England Rate.
Other related parties
(a) In their roles as providers of finance, RBS companies provide development and other types of capital support to businesses. These investments are made in the normal course of business and on arms length terms. In some instances, the investment may extend to ownership or control over 20% or more of the voting rights of the investee company. However, these investments are not considered to give rise to transactions of a materiality requiring disclosure under IAS 24.
(b) RBS recharges The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund with the cost of administration services incurred by it. The amounts involved are not material to the Group.
(c) In accordance with IAS 24, transactions or balances between RBS entities that have been eliminated on consolidation are not reported.
(d) The captions in the primary financial statements of the parent company include amounts attributable to subsidiaries. These amounts have been disclosed in aggregate in the relevant notes to the financial statements.
35 Post balance sheet events
On 6 February 2019, a General Meeting of shareholders authorised the directors to agree buy-backs by the company of ordinary shares from HM Treasury. The authority is subject to renewal at the companys forthcoming Annual General Meeting.
Other than this there have been no other significant events between 31 December 2018 and the date of approval of these accounts which would require a change to or additional disclosure in the accounts.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
36 Consolidating financial information
NatWest Markets Plc (NWM Plc) (formerly RBS plc, renamed in 2018) is a wholly owned subsidiary of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (RBSG plc) and was able to offer and sell certain securities in the US from time to time pursuant to a registration statement on Form F-3 filed with the SEC with a full and unconditional guarantee from RBSG plc.
NWM Plc utilises an exception provided in Rule 3-10 of Regulation S-X, and therefore does not file its financial statements with the SEC. In accordance with the requirements to qualify for the exception, presented below is condensed consolidating financial information for:
· RBSG plc on a stand-alone basis as guarantor;
· NWM Plc on a stand-alone basis as issuer;
· Non-guarantor Subsidiaries of RBSG plc and NWM Plc on a combined basis (Subsidiaries);
· Consolidation adjustments; and
· RBSG plc consolidated amounts (RBS Group).
Under IAS 27, RBSG plc and NWM Plc account for investments in their subsidiary undertakings at cost less impairment. Rule 3-10 of Regulation S-X requires a company to account for its investments in subsidiary undertakings using the equity method, which would decrease the results for the period of RBSG plc and increase the results for the period of NWM Plc in the information below by £811 million and £1,546 million respectively for the year ended 31 December 2018 (increase by £92 million and £934 million respectively for the year ended 31 December 2017; increase by £142 million and decrease by £1,316 million respectively for the year ended 31 December 2016).
The net assets of RBSG plc would be decreased and NWM Plc increased in the information below by £8,651 million and £165 million respectively at 31 December 2018 (decreased £6,631 million and £9,319 million respectively at 31 December 2017).
NWM Plc Disposal groups and discontinued operations
NatWest Holdings Limited (NatWest Holdings)
The transfer of the NWM Plc Personal & Business Banking (PBB), Commercial & Private Banking (CPB) and certain parts of Central items and NatWest Markets, included in the ring-fenced bank, to subsidiaries of NatWest Holdings, was completed in 2018. It was followed by the transfer of NatWest Holdings to RBSG plc. Accordingly, all of the NWM Plc activities now undertaken by NatWest Holdings and its subsidiaries were classified as disposal groups in the NWM Plc accounts at 31 December 2017 and presented as discontinued operations until business transferred in 2018, with comparatives re-presented.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
36 Consolidating financial information continued
Income statement
|
|
|
|
Consolidation |
|
For the year ended 31 December 2018 |
RBSG plc |
NWM Plc |
Subsidiaries |
adjustments |
RBS Group |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Net interest income |
(368) |
(239) |
8,028 |
1,235 |
8,656 |
Non-interest income |
2,794 |
1,002 |
3,740 |
(2,790) |
4,746 |
Total income |
2,426 |
763 |
11,768 |
(1,555) |
13,402 |
Operating expenses |
(85) |
(1,262) |
(6,855) |
(1,443) |
(9,645) |
Impairment releases/(losses) |
1 |
89 |
(429) |
(59) |
(398) |
Operating profit/(loss) before tax |
2,342 |
(410) |
4,484 |
(3,057) |
3,359 |
Tax |
82 |
51 |
(1,322) |
(86) |
(1,275) |
Profit/(loss) from continuing operations |
2,424 |
(359) |
3,162 |
(3,143) |
2,084 |
Profit/(loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax |
|
54 |
|
(54) |
|
Profit/(loss) for the year |
2,424 |
(305) |
3,162 |
(3,197) |
2,084 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Attributable to: |
|
|
|
|
|
Non-controlling interests |
|
|
(38) |
30 |
(8) |
Preference shareholders |
182 |
|
|
|
182 |
Paid-in equity holders |
288 |
|
|
|
288 |
Ordinary shareholders |
1,954 |
(305) |
3,200 |
(3,227) |
1,622 |
|
2,424 |
(305) |
3,162 |
(3,197) |
2,084 |
Statement of comprehensive income
|
|
|
|
Consolidation |
|
For the year ended 31 December 2018 |
RBSG plc |
NWM Plc |
Subsidiaries |
adjustments |
RBS Group |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Profit/(loss) for the year |
2,424 |
(305) |
3,162 |
(3,197) |
2,084 |
Items that do not qualify for reclassification |
|
|
|
|
|
Remeasurement of retirement benefit schemes |
|
|
|
|
|
- contributions in preparation for ring-fencing (1) |
|
(53) |
(2,000) |
|
(2,053) |
- other movements |
|
(9) |
95 |
|
86 |
Profit on fair value of credit in financial liabilities designated at |
|
|
|
|
|
fair value through profit or loss due to own credit risk |
|
121 |
79 |
|
200 |
Fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) |
|
|
|
|
|
financial assets |
|
22 |
28 |
(2) |
48 |
Tax |
|
(24) |
526 |
|
502 |
|
|
57 |
(1,272) |
(2) |
(1,217) |
Items that do qualify for reclassification |
|
|
|
|
|
Fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) |
|
|
|
|
|
financial assets |
|
(339) |
808 |
(462) |
7 |
Cash flow hedges |
78 |
223 |
(550) |
(332) |
(581) |
Currency translation |
|
168 |
(2,488) |
2,630 |
310 |
Tax |
(15) |
36 |
40 |
128 |
189 |
|
63 |
88 |
(2,190) |
1,964 |
(75) |
Other comprehensive income/(loss) after tax |
63 |
145 |
(3,462) |
1,962 |
(1,292) |
Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year |
2,487 |
(160) |
(300) |
(1,235) |
792 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total comprehensive income/(loss) is attributable to: |
|
|
|
|
|
Non-controlling interests |
|
|
(103) |
120 |
17 |
Preference shareholders |
182 |
|
|
|
182 |
Paid-in equity holders |
288 |
|
|
|
288 |
Ordinary shareholders |
2,017 |
(160) |
(197) |
(1,355) |
305 |
|
2,487 |
(160) |
(300) |
(1,235) |
792 |
Note:
(1) On 17 April 2018 RBS agreed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with the Trustees of the RBS Group Pension Fund in connection with the requirements of ring-fencing. NatWest Markets Plc cannot continue to be a participant in the Main section and separate arrangements are required for its employees. Under the MoU NatWest Bank made a contribution of £2 billion on 9 October 2018 to strengthen funding of the Main section in recognition of the changes in convenant. Also under the MoU, NatWest Markets Plc is required to make a £53 million contribution to the NWM section in Q1 2019.
Notes on the consolidated accounts
36 Consolidating financial information continued
Income statement
|
|
|
|
Consolidation |
|
For the year ended 31 December 2017 |
RBSG plc |
NWM Plc |
Subsidiaries |
adjustments |
RBS Group |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Net interest income |
203 |
(26) |
6,157 |
2,653 |
8,987 |
Non-interest income |
1,390 |
909 |
(674) |
2,521 |
4,146 |
Total income |
1,593 |
883 |
5,483 |
5,174 |
13,133 |
Operating expenses |
(122) |
(1,601) |
(3,946) |
(4,732) |
(10,401) |
Impairment releases/(losses) |
|
77 |
(370) |
(200) |
(493) |
Operating profit/(loss) before tax |
1,471 |
(641) |
1,167 |
242 |
2,239 |
Tax |
(187) |
168 |
(853) |
48 |
(824) |
Profit/(loss) from continuing operations |
1,284 |
(473) |
314 |
290 |
1,415 |
(Loss)/profit from discontinued operations, net of tax |
|
(510) |
|
510 |
|
Profit/(loss) for the year |
1,284 |
(983) |
314 |
800 |
1,415 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Attributable to: |
|
|
|
|
|
Non-controlling interests |
|
|
5 |
30 |
35 |
Preference shareholders |
234 |
|
|
|
234 |
Paid-in equity holders |
390 |
|
|
4 |
394 |
Ordinary shareholders |
660 |
(983) |
309 |
766 |
752 |
|
1,284 |
(983) |
314 |
800 |
1,415 |
Statement of comprehensive income
|
|
|
|
Consolidation |
|
For the year ended 31 December 2017 |
RBSG plc |
NWM Plc |
Subsidiaries |
adjustments |
RBS Group |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Profit/(loss)for the year |
1,284 |
(983) |
314 |
800 |
1,415 |
Items that do not qualify for reclassification |
|
|
|
|
|
Profit on remeasurement of retirement benefit schemes |
|
4 |
86 |
|
90 |
Loss on fair value of credit in financial liabilities designated at |
|
|
|
|
|
fair value through profit or loss due to own credit risk |
|
(68) |
(58) |
|
(126) |
Tax |
|
(18) |
8 |
|
(10) |
|
|
(82) |
36 |
|
(46) |
Items that do qualify for reclassification |
|
|
|
|
|
Available-for-sale financial assets |
|
52 |
(341) |
315 |
26 |
Cash flow hedges |
(204) |
(424) |
(24) |
(417) |
(1,069) |
Currency translation |
|
(22) |
495 |
(373) |
100 |
Tax |
38 |
93 |
20 |
105 |
256 |
|
(166) |
(301) |
150 |
(370) |
(687) |
Other comprehensive (loss)/income after tax |
(166) |
(383) |
186 |
(370) |
(733) |
Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year |
1,118 |
(1,366) |
500 |
430 |
682 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total comprehensive income/(loss) is attributable to: |
|
|
|
|
|
Non-controlling interests |
|
|
|
52 |
52 |
Preference shareholders |
234 |
|
|
|
234 |
Paid-in equity holders |
390 |
|
|
4 |
394 |
Ordinary shareholders |
494 |
(1,366) |
500 |
374 |
2 |
|
1,118 |
(1,366) |
500 |
430 |
682 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
36 Consolidating financial information continued
Income statement
|
|
|
|
Consolidation |
|
For the year ended 31 December 2016 |
RBSG plc |
NWM Plc |
Subsidiaries |
adjustments |
RBS Group |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Net interest income |
267 |
4 |
6,050 |
2,387 |
8,708 |
Non-interest income |
(4,945) |
1,066 |
(5,099) |
12,860 |
3,882 |
Total income |
(4,678) |
1,070 |
951 |
15,247 |
12,590 |
Operating expenses |
(738) |
(3,864) |
(5,911) |
(5,681) |
(16,194) |
Impairment releases/(losses) |
|
73 |
(4) |
(547) |
(478) |
Operating (loss)/profit before tax |
(5,416) |
(2,721) |
(4,964) |
9,019 |
(4,082) |
Tax |
7 |
(199) |
(827) |
(147) |
(1,166) |
(Loss)/profit from continuing operations |
(5,409) |
(2,920) |
(5,791) |
8,872 |
(5,248) |
(Loss)/profit from discontinued operations, net of tax |
|
(531) |
|
531 |
|
(Loss)/profit for the year |
(5,409) |
(3,451) |
(5,791) |
9,403 |
(5,248) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Attributable to: |
|
|
|
|
|
Non-controlling interests |
|
|
5 |
5 |
10 |
Preference shareholders |
260 |
23 |
|
(23) |
260 |
Paid-in equity holders |
235 |
|
|
9 |
244 |
Dividend access share |
1,193 |
|
|
|
1,193 |
Ordinary shareholders |
(7,097) |
(3,474) |
(5,796) |
9,412 |
(6,955) |
|
(5,409) |
(3,451) |
(5,791) |
9,403 |
(5,248) |
Statement of comprehensive income
|
|
|
|
Consolidation |
|
For the year ended 31 December 2016 |
RBSG plc |
NWM Plc |
Subsidiaries |
adjustments |
RBS Group |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
(Loss)/profit for the year |
(5,409) |
(3,451) |
(5,791) |
9,403 |
(5,248) |
Items that do not qualify for reclassification |
|
|
|
|
|
Profit/(loss) on remeasurement of retirement benefit schemes |
|
63 |
(1,112) |
|
(1,049) |
Tax |
|
(21) |
309 |
|
288 |
|
|
42 |
(803) |
|
(761) |
Items that do qualify for reclassification |
|
|
|
|
|
Available-for-sale financial assets |
|
(61) |
293 |
(326) |
(94) |
Cash flow hedges |
189 |
(40) |
1 |
615 |
765 |
Currency translation |
|
(90) |
709 |
644 |
1,263 |
Tax |
(35) |
28 |
50 |
(149) |
(106) |
|
154 |
(163) |
1,053 |
784 |
1,828 |
Other comprehensive income/(loss) after tax |
154 |
(121) |
250 |
784 |
1,067 |
Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year |
(5,255) |
(3,572) |
(5,541) |
10,187 |
(4,181) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total comprehensive (loss)/income is attributable to: |
|
|
|
|
|
Non-controlling interests |
|
|
87 |
34 |
121 |
Preference shareholders |
260 |
23 |
|
(23) |
260 |
Paid-in equity holders |
235 |
|
|
9 |
244 |
Dividend access share |
1,193 |
|
|
|
1,193 |
Ordinary shareholders |
(6,943) |
(3,595) |
(5,628) |
10,167 |
(5,999) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(5,255) |
(3,572) |
(5,541) |
10,187 |
(4,181) |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
36 Consolidating financial information continued
Balance sheet
|
|
|
|
Consolidation |
|
At 31 December 2018 |
RBSG plc |
NWM Plc |
Subsidiaries |
adjustments |
RBS Group |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Assets |
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and balances at central banks |
|
11,095 |
77,802 |
|
88,897 |
Trading assets |
|
61,990 |
13,228 |
(99) |
75,119 |
Derivatives |
543 |
134,291 |
3,710 |
(5,195) |
133,349 |
Settlement balances |
|
1,421 |
1,507 |
|
2,928 |
Loans to banks - amortised cost |
|
454 |
12,527 |
(34) |
12,947 |
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
|
7,908 |
297,200 |
(19) |
305,089 |
Amount due from holding company and fellow subsidiaries |
22,791 |
11,800 |
70,638 |
(105,229) |
|
Other financial assets |
241 |
10,995 |
48,481 |
(232) |
59,485 |
Intangible assets |
|
|
6,314 |
302 |
6,616 |
Other assets |
56,773 |
2,087 |
10,968 |
(60,023) |
9,805 |
Total assets |
80,348 |
242,041 |
542,375 |
(170,529) |
694,235 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
|
2,777 |
20,596 |
(76) |
23,297 |
Customer deposits |
|
2,390 |
358,531 |
(7) |
360,914 |
Amount due to holding company and fellow subsidiaries |
635 |
23,505 |
80,933 |
(105,073) |
|
Settlement balances |
|
1,977 |
1,089 |
|
3,066 |
Trading liabilities |
|
54,540 |
17,909 |
(99) |
72,350 |
Derivatives |
445 |
129,974 |
3,655 |
(5,177) |
128,897 |
Other financial liabilities |
16,821 |
16,279 |
6,625 |
7 |
39,732 |
Subordinated liabilities |
7,941 |
659 |
2,058 |
(123) |
10,535 |
Other liabilities |
119 |
1,018 |
8,552 |
(735) |
8,954 |
Total liabilities |
25,961 |
233,119 |
499,948 |
(111,283) |
647,745 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Owners equity |
54,387 |
8,922 |
42,416 |
(59,989) |
45,736 |
Non-controlling interests |
|
|
11 |
743 |
754 |
Total equity |
54,387 |
8,922 |
42,427 |
(59,246) |
46,490 |
Total liabilities and equity |
80,348 |
242,041 |
542,375 |
(170,529) |
694,235 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
36 Consolidating financial information continued
Balance sheet
|
|
|
|
Consolidation |
|
At 31 December 2017 |
RBSG plc |
NWM Plc |
Subsidiaries |
adjustments |
RBS Group |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Assets |
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and balances at central banks |
|
93 |
36,707 |
61,537 |
98,337 |
Trading assets |
|
73,011 |
13,051 |
(71) |
85,991 |
Derivatives |
163 |
162,005 |
3,101 |
(4,426) |
160,843 |
Settlement balances |
|
1,614 |
899 |
4 |
2,517 |
Loans to banks - amortised cost |
|
195 |
5,181 |
6,141 |
11,517 |
Loans to customers - amortised cost |
|
9,133 |
223,755 |
77,228 |
310,116 |
Amounts due from holding company and fellow subsidiaries |
24,987 |
6,470 |
14,352 |
(45,809) |
|
Other financial assets |
107 |
3,079 |
4,350 |
44,393 |
51,929 |
Intangible assets |
|
|
531 |
6,012 |
6,543 |
Other assets |
47,605 |
270,289 |
(33,032) |
(274,599) |
10,263 |
Total assets |
72,862 |
525,889 |
268,895 |
(129,590) |
738,056 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
|
527 |
22,367 |
7,502 |
30,396 |
Customer deposits |
|
3,063 |
274,847 |
83,406 |
361,316 |
Amounts due to holding company and fellow subsidiaries |
163 |
14,994 |
30,652 |
(45,809) |
|
Settlement balances |
|
1,372 |
1,472 |
|
2,844 |
Trading liabilities |
|
64,182 |
17,913 |
(113) |
81,982 |
Derivatives |
284 |
155,098 |
3,289 |
(4,165) |
154,506 |
Other financial liabilities |
9,202 |
11,255 |
1,243 |
8,626 |
30,326 |
Subordinated liabilities |
7,864 |
|
2,197 |
2,661 |
12,722 |
Other liabilities |
388 |
230,876 |
(110,598) |
(105,795) |
14,871 |
Total liabilities |
17,901 |
481,367 |
243,382 |
(53,687) |
688,963 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Owners equity |
54,961 |
44,522 |
25,382 |
(76,535) |
48,330 |
Non-controlling interests |
|
|
131 |
632 |
763 |
Total equity |
54,961 |
44,522 |
25,513 |
(75,903) |
49,093 |
Total liabilities and equity |
72,862 |
525,889 |
268,895 |
(129,590) |
738,056 |
Notes on the consolidated accounts
36 Consolidating financial information continued
Cash flow statement
|
|
|
|
Consolidation |
|
For the year ended 31 December 2018 |
RBSG plc |
NWM Plc |
Subsidiaries |
adjustments |
RBS Group |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Net cash flows from operating activities |
13,711 |
(1,308) |
(81,109) |
68,478 |
(228) |
Net cash flows from investing activities |
(9,481) |
18,288 |
(32,446) |
15,684 |
(7,955) |
Net cash flows from financing activities |
(4,169) |
(5,795) |
7,988 |
(4,311) |
(6,287) |
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents |
1 |
332 |
565 |
(222) |
676 |
Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents |
62 |
11,517 |
(105,002) |
79,629 |
(13,794) |
Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January 2018 |
245 |
13,058 |
196,214 |
(86,912) |
122,605 |
Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 2018 |
307 |
24,575 |
91,212 |
(7,283) |
108,811 |
|
|
|
|
Consolidation |
|
For the year ended 31 December 2017 |
RBSG plc |
NWM Plc |
Subsidiaries |
adjustments |
RBS Group |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Net cash flows from operating activities |
4,973 |
(74,357) |
105,401 |
2,724 |
38,741 |
Net cash flows from investing activities |
(2,078) |
(2,077) |
1,911 |
(4,238) |
(6,482) |
Net cash flows from financing activities |
(3,831) |
(9,668) |
573 |
4,718 |
(8,208) |
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents |
(14) |
87 |
(1,102) |
1,013 |
(16) |
Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents |
(950) |
(86,015) |
106,783 |
4,217 |
24,035 |
Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January 2017 |
1,195 |
99,073 |
89,431 |
(91,129) |
98,570 |
Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 2017 |
245 |
13,058 |
196,214 |
(86,912) |
122,605 |
|
|
|
|
Consolidation |
|
For the year ended 31 December 2016 |
RBSG plc |
NWM Plc |
Subsidiaries |
adjustments |
RBS Group |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m | |
Net cash flows from operating activities |
(3,026) |
3,098 |
(6,823) |
3,101 |
(3,650) |
Net cash flows from investing activities |
2,538 |
(4,495) |
(1,919) |
(483) |
(4,359) |
Net cash flows from financing activities |
(1,445) |
(13,459) |
(1,490) |
11,287 |
(5,107) |
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents |
122 |
7,316 |
4,260 |
(3,604) |
8,094 |
Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents |
(1,811) |
(7,540) |
(5,972) |
10,301 |
(5,022) |
Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January 2016 |
3,006 |
106,613 |
95,403 |
(101,430) |
103,592 |
Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 2016 |
1,195 |
99,073 |
89,431 |
(91,129) |
98,570 |
Trust preferred securities
The Group has issued trust preferred securities through trusts 100% owned by the Group (through partnership interests held by RBSG Capital Corporation and RBS) which meet the definition of a finance subsidiary in Regulation S-X, Rule 3-10. The securities represent undivided beneficial interests in the assets of the trusts, which consist of partnership preferred securities representing non-cumulative perpetual preferred limited partnership interests issued by Delaware limited partnerships. The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc has provided subordinated guarantees for the benefit of the holders of the trust preferred securities and the partnership preferred securities. Under the terms of the guarantees, the Group has fully and unconditionally guaranteed on a subordinated basis, payments on such trust preferred securities and partnership preferred securities, to the extent they are due to be paid and have not been paid by, or on behalf of, the trusts and the partnerships, as the case may be. Following implementation of IFRS 10 the trusts are no longer consolidated by the Group. For those securities that were classified as subordinated liabilities, the Groups outstanding instruments with the trusts are classified as subordinated liabilities.
Additional information
|
|
Page |
Adoption of IFRS 9 |
|
251 |
Financial summary |
|
251 |
Exchange rates |
|
263 |
Risk factors |
|
265 |
Description of property and equipment |
|
276 |
Major shareholders |
|
276 |
Our code of conduct |
|
276 |
Iran sanctions and related disclosures |
|
277 |
Supervision |
|
277 |
Material contracts |
|
279 |
Additional information
Adoption of IFRS9
Following the adoption of IFRS 9, certain disclosures in this section cover comparative periods only. Comparatives are presented on an IAS 39 basis. For current year disclosures in relation to loans and credit metrics refer to the Capital and risk management Credit risk section.
Financial summary
The geographic analysis, including the average balance sheet and interest rates, changes in net interest income and average interest rates, yields, spreads and margins in this report have generally been compiled on the basis of location of office - UK and overseas - unless indicated otherwise. UK in this context includes transactions conducted through the offices in the UK which service international banking transactions.
Analysis of loans and advances to customers
The following table analyses gross loans to customers by remaining maturity, geographical area (location of office) and type of customer.
|
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
2015 |
|
2014 |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
UK |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Central and local government |
|
4,609 |
|
6,004 |
|
6,166 |
|
7,665 |
Finance |
|
30,191 |
|
32,026 |
|
29,748 |
|
31,762 |
Residential mortgages |
|
147,399 |
|
137,427 |
|
123,653 |
|
113,521 |
Personal lending |
|
14,145 |
|
14,198 |
|
14,348 |
|
15,923 |
Property |
|
32,327 |
|
33,881 |
|
34,100 |
|
37,547 |
Construction |
|
3,658 |
|
4,061 |
|
3,906 |
|
4,098 |
Manufacturing |
|
8,333 |
|
9,101 |
|
8,071 |
|
9,332 |
Service industries and business activities |
|
49,132 |
|
53,018 |
|
51,257 |
|
50,621 |
Agriculture, forestry and fishing |
|
3,428 |
|
3,445 |
|
3,471 |
|
3,211 |
Finance leases and instalment credit |
|
11,670 |
|
11,967 |
|
11,134 |
|
10,933 |
Accrued interest |
|
291 |
|
272 |
|
346 |
|
258 |
Total UK |
|
305,183 |
|
305,400 |
|
286,200 |
|
284,871 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Overseas |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
US |
|
497 |
|
1,171 |
|
2,331 |
|
9,308 |
Rest of the World |
|
21,318 |
|
20,907 |
|
24,921 |
|
57,532 |
Total overseas |
|
21,815 |
|
22,078 |
|
27,252 |
|
66,840 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reverse repos |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
20,906 |
|
21,407 |
|
18,000 |
|
29,228 |
US |
|
5,797 |
|
7,476 |
|
9,532 |
|
8,216 |
Rest of the World |
|
32 |
|
44 |
|
26 |
|
6,543 |
Total reverse repos |
|
26,735 |
|
28,927 |
|
27,558 |
|
43,987 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans to customers - gross |
|
353,733 |
|
356,405 |
|
341,010 |
|
395,698 |
Loan impairment provisions |
|
(3,814 |
) |
(4,455 |
) |
(7,118 |
) |
(17,460) |
Loans to customers - net |
|
349,919 |
|
351,950 |
|
333,892 |
|
378,238 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed rate |
|
132,174 |
|
118,316 |
|
118,300 |
|
114,664 |
Variable rate |
|
194,824 |
|
209,162 |
|
195,152 |
|
237,047 |
Reverse repos |
|
26,735 |
|
28,927 |
|
27,558 |
|
43,987 |
Loans to customers - gross |
|
353,733 |
|
356,405 |
|
341,010 |
|
395,698 |
RBS provides credit facilities at variable rates to its corporate and retail customers. Variable rate credit extended to RBSs corporate and commercial customers includes bullet and instalment loans, finance lease agreements and overdrafts; interest is generally charged at a margin over a benchmark rate such as LIBOR or base rate. Interest on variable rate retail loans may also be based on LIBOR or base rate; other variable rate retail lending is charged at variable interest rates set by RBS such as its mortgage standard variable rate in the UK.
Additional information
|
|
2018 |
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
Yields, spreads and margins of the banking business |
|
% |
|
% |
|
% |
Gross yield on interest-earning assets of the banking business (1) |
|
2.49 |
|
2.57 |
|
2.80 |
Cost of interest-bearing liabilities of the banking business |
|
(0.79) |
|
(0.70) |
|
(0.95) |
Interest spread of the banking business (2) |
|
1.70 |
|
1.87 |
|
1.85 |
Benefit from interest-free funds |
|
0.28 |
|
0.26 |
|
0.33 |
Net interest margin of the banking business (3) |
|
1.98 |
|
2.13 |
|
2.18 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Gross yield (1,4) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Group |
|
2.49 |
|
2.57 |
|
2.80 |
- UK |
|
2.71 |
|
2.79 |
|
3.12 |
- Overseas |
|
0.88 |
|
0.92 |
|
1.08 |
Interest spread (2,4) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Group |
|
1.70 |
|
1.87 |
|
1.85 |
- UK |
|
1.87 |
|
2.08 |
|
2.17 |
- Overseas |
|
0.64 |
|
0.42 |
|
0.03 |
Net interest margin (3,4) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Group |
|
1.98 |
|
2.13 |
|
2.18 |
- UK |
|
2.14 |
|
2.32 |
|
2.45 |
- Overseas |
|
0.78 |
|
0.75 |
|
0.73 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Royal Bank of Scotland plc base rate (average) |
|
0.60 |
|
0.29 |
|
0.40 |
London inter-bank three month offered rates (average) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Sterling |
|
0.66 |
|
0.36 |
|
0.50 |
- Eurodollar |
|
2.19 |
|
1.26 |
|
0.69 |
- Euro |
|
(0.33) |
|
(0.33) |
|
(0.26) |
Notes:
(1) Gross yield is the interest earned on average interest-earning assets of the banking book.
(2) Interest spread is the difference between the gross yield and the interest rate paid on average interest-bearing liabilities of the banking business.
(3) Net interest margin is net interest income of the banking business as a percentage of interest-earning assets (IEA) of the banking business.
(4) The analysis into UK and overseas has been compiled on the basis of location of office.
Additional information
Average balance sheet and related interest
|
|
|
|
Statutory 2018 |
|
Statutory 2017 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
Average balance £m |
|
Interest £m |
|
Rate % |
|
Average balance £m |
|
Interest £m |
|
Rate % |
Assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans to banks |
|
- UK |
|
65,638 |
|
516 |
|
0.79 |
|
51,150 |
|
257 |
|
0.50 |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
26,707 |
|
(88) |
|
(0.33) |
|
24,894 |
|
(76) |
|
(0.31) |
Loans to customers |
|
- UK |
|
271,773 |
|
9,416 |
|
3.46 |
|
275,895 |
|
9,807 |
|
3.55 |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
20,830 |
|
513 |
|
2.46 |
|
21,697 |
|
516 |
|
2.38 |
Debt securities |
|
- UK |
|
48,471 |
|
509 |
|
1.05 |
|
44,768 |
|
322 |
|
0.72 |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
3,538 |
|
25 |
|
0.71 |
|
3,932 |
|
26 |
|
0.66 |
Interest-earning assets |
|
- UK |
|
385,882 |
|
10,441 |
|
2.71 |
|
371,813 |
|
10,386 |
|
2.79 |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
51,075 |
|
450 |
|
0.88 |
|
50,523 |
|
466 |
|
0.92 |
Total interest-earning assets |
|
- banking business (1,2,4) |
|
436,957 |
|
10,891 |
|
2.49 |
|
422,336 |
|
10,852 |
|
2.57 |
|
|
- trading business (3) |
|
101,387 |
|
|
|
|
|
109,094 |
|
|
|
|
Interest-earning assets |
|
|
|
538,344 |
|
|
|
|
|
531,430 |
|
|
|
|
Non-interest-earning assets |
|
|
|
139,143 |
|
|
|
|
|
164,935 |
|
|
|
|
Total assets |
|
|
|
677,487 |
|
|
|
|
|
696,365 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Percentage of assets applicable to overseas operations |
|
10.9% |
|
|
|
|
|
8.2% |
|
|
|
| ||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
|
- UK |
|
22,973 |
|
159 |
|
0.69 |
|
16,647 |
|
66 |
|
0.40 |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
1,721 |
|
(3) |
|
(0.17) |
|
1,737 |
|
13 |
|
0.75 |
Customer accounts: demand deposits |
|
- UK |
|
132,244 |
|
249 |
|
0.19 |
|
140,514 |
|
96 |
|
0.07 |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
5,575 |
|
5 |
|
0.09 |
|
5,718 |
|
3 |
|
0.05 |
Customer accounts: savings deposits |
|
- UK |
|
75,553 |
|
415 |
|
0.55 |
|
65,506 |
|
358 |
|
0.55 |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
1,501 |
|
- |
|
- |
|
1,429 |
|
1 |
|
0.07 |
Customer accounts: other time deposits |
|
- UK |
|
8,579 |
|
107 |
|
1.25 |
|
8,256 |
|
159 |
|
1.93 |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
3,331 |
|
9 |
|
0.27 |
|
3,556 |
|
20 |
|
0.56 |
Debt securities in issue |
|
- UK |
|
30,088 |
|
779 |
|
2.59 |
|
23,081 |
|
545 |
|
2.36 |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
483 |
|
12 |
|
2.48 |
|
433 |
|
9 |
|
2.08 |
Subordinated liabilities |
|
- UK |
|
9,635 |
|
438 |
|
4.55 |
|
13,365 |
|
543 |
|
4.06 |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
237 |
|
23 |
|
9.70 |
|
432 |
|
29 |
|
6.72 |
Internal funding of trading business |
|
- UK |
|
(18,208) |
|
35 |
|
(0.19) |
|
(18,739) |
|
8 |
|
(0.04) |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
9,576 |
|
7 |
|
0.07 |
|
4,324 |
|
15 |
|
0.35 |
Interest-bearing liabilities |
|
- UK |
|
260,864 |
|
2,182 |
|
0.84 |
|
248,630 |
|
1,775 |
|
0.71 |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
22,424 |
|
53 |
|
0.24 |
|
17,629 |
|
90 |
|
0.50 |
Total interest-bearing liabilities |
|
- banking business (1) |
|
283,288 |
|
2,235 |
|
0.79 |
|
266,259 |
|
1,865 |
|
0.70 |
|
|
- trading business (3) |
|
116,809 |
|
|
|
|
|
118,618 |
|
|
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities |
|
|
|
400,097 |
|
|
|
|
|
384,877 |
|
|
|
|
Non-interest-bearing liabilities: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Demand deposits |
|
- UK |
|
105,524 |
|
|
|
|
|
101,527 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Overseas |
|
6,333 |
|
|
|
|
|
6,490 |
|
|
|
|
Other liabilities |
|
|
|
117,048 |
|
|
|
|
|
154,378 |
|
|
|
|
Total equity |
|
|
|
48,485 |
|
|
|
|
|
49,093 |
|
|
|
|
Total liabilities and equity |
|
|
|
677,487 |
|
|
|
|
|
696,365 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Percentage of liabilities applicable to overseas operations |
|
11.9% |
|
|
|
|
|
11.8% |
|
|
|
|
For the notes to this table refer to the following page.
Additional information
|
|
|
|
Statutory 2016 |
| |||||
|
|
|
|
Average |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
balance |
|
Interest |
|
Rate |
| |
|
|
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
% |
| |
Assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Loans to banks |
|
- UK |
|
27,986 |
|
159 |
|
0.57 |
| |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
31,555 |
|
11 |
|
0.03 |
| |
Loans to customers |
|
- UK |
|
267,142 |
|
10,098 |
|
3.78 |
| |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
26,583 |
|
608 |
|
2.29 |
| |
Debt securities |
|
- UK |
|
40,933 |
|
243 |
|
0.59 |
| |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
5,300 |
|
63 |
|
1.19 |
| |
Interest-earning assets |
|
- UK |
|
336,061 |
|
10,500 |
|
3.12 |
| |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
63,438 |
|
682 |
|
1.08 |
| |
Total interest-earning assets |
|
- banking business (1,2,4) |
|
399,499 |
|
11,182 |
|
2.80 |
| |
|
|
- trading business (3) |
|
132,027 |
|
|
|
|
| |
Interest-earning assets |
|
|
|
531,526 |
|
|
|
|
| |
Non-interest-earning assets |
|
|
|
338,753 |
|
|
|
|
| |
Total assets |
|
|
|
870,279 |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Percentage of assets applicable to overseas operations |
|
12.0% |
|
|
|
|
| |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Bank deposits |
|
- UK |
|
2,772 |
|
13 |
|
0.47 |
| |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
1,348 |
|
8 |
|
0.59 |
| |
Customer accounts: demand deposits |
|
- UK |
|
146,340 |
|
390 |
|
0.27 |
| |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
13,101 |
|
43 |
|
0.33 |
| |
Customer accounts: savings deposits |
|
- UK |
|
62,097 |
|
425 |
|
0.68 |
| |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
1,477 |
|
7 |
|
0.47 |
| |
Customer accounts: other time deposits |
|
- UK |
|
8,302 |
|
149 |
|
1.79 |
| |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
3,301 |
|
41 |
|
1.24 |
| |
Debt securities in issue |
|
- UK |
|
17,329 |
|
551 |
|
3.18 |
| |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
1,560 |
|
6 |
|
0.38 |
| |
Subordinated liabilities |
|
- UK |
|
16,908 |
|
733 |
|
4.34 |
| |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
1,598 |
|
112 |
|
7.01 |
| |
Internal funding of trading business |
|
- UK |
|
(15,302) |
|
(4) |
|
0.03 |
| |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
(1,706) |
|
- |
|
- |
| |
Interest-bearing liabilities |
|
- UK |
|
238,446 |
|
2,257 |
|
0.95 |
| |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
20,679 |
|
217 |
|
1.05 |
| |
Total interest-bearing liabilities |
|
- banking business (1) |
|
259,125 |
|
2,474 |
|
0.95 |
| |
|
|
- trading business (3) |
|
142,796 |
|
|
|
|
| |
Interest-bearing liabilities |
|
|
|
401,921 |
|
|
|
|
| |
Non-interest-bearing liabilities: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Demand deposits |
|
- UK |
|
78,480 |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
- Overseas |
|
10,278 |
|
|
|
|
| |
Other liabilities |
|
|
|
325,586 |
|
|
|
|
| |
Total equity |
|
|
|
54,014 |
|
|
|
|
| |
Total liabilities and equity |
|
|
|
870,279 |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Percentage of liabilities applicable to overseas operations |
|
14.4% |
|
|
|
|
| |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Notes:
(1) Interest receivable and interest payable have both been decreased by £158 million (2017 - £182 million; 2016 - £76 million) in respect of negative interest relating to financial assets that attracted negative interest.
(2) Interest receivable includes £201 million (2017 - £256 million; 2016 - £290 million) in respect of loan fees forming part of the effective interest rate of loans and receivables.
(3) Interest receivable and interest payable on trading assets and liabilities are included in income from trading activities.
(4) Interest receivable includes amounts (unwind of discount) recognised on impaired loans and receivables. The average balances of such loans are included in average loans to banks and loans to customers.
(5) The analysis into UK and overseas has been compiled on the basis of location of office.
Additional information
Analysis of change in net interest income - volume and rate analysis
Volume and rate variances have been calculated based on movements in average balances over the period and changes in interest rates on average interest-earning assets and average interest-bearing liabilities. Changes due to a combination of volume and rate are allocated pro rata to volume and rate movements.
|
|
2018 over 2017 - statutory |
|
2017 over 2016 - statutory | ||||||||
|
|
(Decrease)/increase due to changes in: |
|
Increase/(decrease) due to changes in: | ||||||||
|
|
Average |
|
Average |
|
Net |
|
Average |
|
Average |
|
Net |
|
|
volume |
|
rate |
|
change |
|
volume |
|
rate |
|
change |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Interest-earning assets |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans to banks |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
85 |
|
174 |
|
259 |
|
119 |
|
(21) |
|
98 |
Overseas |
|
(6) |
|
(6) |
|
(12) |
|
(2) |
|
(85) |
|
(87) |
Loans to customers |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
(145) |
|
(246) |
|
(391) |
|
328 |
|
(619) |
|
(291) |
Overseas |
|
(20) |
|
17 |
|
(3) |
|
(115) |
|
23 |
|
(92) |
Debt securities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
29 |
|
158 |
|
187 |
|
24 |
|
55 |
|
79 |
Overseas |
|
(3) |
|
2 |
|
(1) |
|
(14) |
|
(23) |
|
(37) |
Total interest receivable of the banking business |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
(31) |
|
86 |
|
55 |
|
471 |
|
(585) |
|
(114) |
Overseas |
|
(29) |
|
13 |
|
(16) |
|
(131) |
|
(85) |
|
(216) |
|
|
(60) |
|
99 |
|
39 |
|
340 |
|
(670) |
|
(330) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest-bearing liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bank deposits |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
(32) |
|
(61) |
|
(93) |
|
(55) |
|
2 |
|
(53) |
Overseas |
|
|
|
16 |
|
16 |
|
(3) |
|
(2) |
|
(5) |
Customer accounts: demand deposits |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
6 |
|
(159) |
|
(153) |
|
15 |
|
279 |
|
294 |
Overseas |
|
|
|
(2) |
|
(2) |
|
16 |
|
24 |
|
40 |
Customer accounts: savings deposits |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
(57) |
|
|
|
(57) |
|
(21) |
|
88 |
|
67 |
Overseas |
|
|
|
1 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
6 |
|
6 |
Customer accounts: other time deposits |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
(1) |
|
53 |
|
52 |
|
1 |
|
(11) |
|
(10) |
Overseas |
|
3 |
|
8 |
|
11 |
|
(3) |
|
24 |
|
21 |
Debt securities in issue |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
(153) |
|
(81) |
|
(234) |
|
(157) |
|
163 |
|
6 |
Overseas |
|
(1) |
|
(2) |
|
(3) |
|
7 |
|
(10) |
|
(3) |
Subordinated liabilities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
164 |
|
(59) |
|
105 |
|
145 |
|
45 |
|
190 |
Overseas |
|
8 |
|
(2) |
|
6 |
|
79 |
|
4 |
|
83 |
Internal funding of trading business |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
|
|
(27) |
|
(27) |
|
1 |
|
(13) |
|
(12) |
Overseas |
|
(10) |
|
18 |
|
8 |
|
|
|
(15) |
|
(15) |
Total interest payable of the banking business |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
(73) |
|
(334) |
|
(407) |
|
(71) |
|
553 |
|
482 |
Overseas |
|
|
|
37 |
|
37 |
|
96 |
|
31 |
|
127 |
|
|
(73) |
|
(297) |
|
(370) |
|
25 |
|
584 |
|
609 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Movement in net interest income |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
(104) |
|
(248) |
|
(352) |
|
400 |
|
(32) |
|
368 |
Overseas |
|
(29) |
|
50 |
|
21 |
|
(35) |
|
(54) |
|
(89) |
|
|
(133) |
|
(198) |
|
(331) |
|
365 |
|
(86) |
|
279 |
Additional information
Loan impairment provisions
For details of the factors considered in determining the amount of provisions, refer to the accounting policy on page 222 and Critical accounting policies and key sources of estimation uncertainty on page 190. The following table shows the movements in loan impairment provisions.
|
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
2015 |
|
2014 |
|
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
|
£m |
Provisions at the beginning of the year |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
3,150 |
|
4,037 |
|
8,185 |
|
11,005 |
Overseas |
|
1,305 |
|
3,082 |
|
9,315 |
|
14,211 |
|
|
4,455 |
|
7,119 |
|
17,500 |
|
25,216 |
Transfer to disposal groups |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Overseas |
|
|
|
|
|
(20) |
|
(553) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
(20) |
|
(553) |
Currency translation and other adjustments |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
(28) |
|
94 |
|
(27) |
|
929 |
Overseas |
|
2 |
|
406 |
|
(548) |
|
(1,596) |
|
|
(26) |
|
500 |
|
(575) |
|
(667) |
Disposals |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Overseas |
|
(5) |
|
(2) |
|
|
|
(6) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Amounts written-off |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
(1,070) |
|
(1,670) |
|
(4,142) |
|
(3,570) |
Overseas |
|
(140) |
|
(2,025) |
|
(4,822) |
|
(1,708) |
|
|
(1,210) |
|
(3,695) |
|
(8,964) |
|
(5,278) |
Recoveries of amounts previously written-off |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
142 |
|
80 |
|
130 |
|
77 |
Overseas |
|
14 |
|
29 |
|
45 |
|
128 |
|
|
156 |
|
109 |
|
175 |
|
205 |
Losses/(releases) to income statement - continuing operations (1) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
473 |
|
684 |
|
(11) |
|
(110) |
Overseas |
|
57 |
|
(147) |
|
(842) |
|
(1,254) |
|
|
530 |
|
537 |
|
(853) |
|
(1,364) |
Losses to income statement - discontinued operations |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Overseas |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
194 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unwind of discount (recognised in interest income) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
(61) |
|
(75) |
|
(98) |
|
(146) |
Overseas |
|
(25) |
|
(38) |
|
(46) |
|
(101) |
|
|
(86) |
|
(113) |
|
(144) |
|
(247) |
Provisions at the end of the year |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
2,606 |
|
3,150 |
|
4,037 |
|
8,185 |
Overseas |
|
1,208 |
|
1,305 |
|
3,082 |
|
9,315 |
|
|
3,814 |
|
4,455 |
|
7,119 |
|
17,500 |
Provisions at the end of the year comprise |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Customers |
|
3,814 |
|
4,455 |
|
7,118 |
|
17,460 |
Banks |
|
|
|
|
|
1 |
|
40 |
|
|
3,814 |
|
4,455 |
|
7,119 |
|
17,500 |
Gross loans to customers (2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
305,183 |
|
305,400 |
|
286,200 |
|
284,871 |
Overseas |
|
21,815 |
|
22,078 |
|
27,252 |
|
66,840 |
|
|
326,998 |
|
327,478 |
|
313,452 |
|
351,711 |
For the notes to this table refer to the following page. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additional information
|
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
2015 |
|
2014 |
Closing customer provisions as a % of gross loans to customers (2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
0.9% |
|
1.0% |
|
1.4% |
|
2.9% |
Overseas |
|
5.5% |
|
5.9% |
|
11.3% |
|
13.9% |
Total |
|
1.2% |
|
1.4% |
|
2.3% |
|
5.0% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Customer losses/(releases) to income statement as a % of gross loans to customers (2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UK |
|
0.2% |
|
0.2% |
|
|
|
|
Overseas |
|
0.3% |
|
(0.7%) |
|
(3.1%) |
|
(1.9%) |
Total |
|
0.2% |
|
0.2% |
|
(0.3%) |
|
(0.4%) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Average loans to customers - gross |
|
366,959 |
|
373,644 |
|
387,956 |
|
472,545 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As a % of average loans to customers during the year |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total customer provisions charged/(released) to income statement |
|
0.1% |
|
0.1% |
|
(0.2%) |
|
(0.3%) |
Amounts written-off (net of recoveries) - customers |
|
0.3% |
|
1.0% |
|
2.3% |
|
1.1% |
Notes:
(1) Includes nil relating to loans to banks (2016 - nil; 2015 - £4 million release; 2014 - £10 million release).
(2) Excludes reverse repos.
Analysis of closing customer loan impairment provisions
The following table analyses customer loan impairment provisions by geographical area and type of UK customer.
|
|
2017 |
|
2016 |
|
2015 |
|
2014 | ||||||||
|
|
Closing |
|
Total |
|
Closing |
|
Total |
|
Closing |
|
Total |
|
Closing |
|
Total |
|
|
provision |
|
loans |
|
provision |
|
loans |
|
provision |
|
loans |
|
provision |
|
loans |
|
|
£m |
|
% |
|
£m |
|
% |
|
£m |
|
% |
|
£m |
|
% |
UK |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Central and local government |
|
|
|
1.4 |
|
1 |
|
1.8 |
|
1 |
|
2.0 |
|
1 |
|
2.2 |
Manufacturing |
|
37 |
|
2.5 |
|
69 |
|
2.8 |
|
78 |
|
2.6 |
|
142 |
|
2.7 |
Construction |
|
317 |
|
1.1 |
|
172 |
|
1.2 |
|
234 |
|
1.2 |
|
365 |
|
1.2 |
Finance |
|
8 |
|
9.2 |
|
12 |
|
9.8 |
|
17 |
|
9.5 |
|
65 |
|
9.0 |
Service industries and business activities |
|
769 |
|
15.0 |
|
1,131 |
|
16.2 |
|
993 |
|
16.4 |
|
1,510 |
|
14.4 |
Agriculture, forestry and fishing |
|
15 |
|
1.0 |
|
17 |
|
1.1 |
|
24 |
|
1.1 |
|
33 |
|
0.9 |
Property |
|
211 |
|
9.9 |
|
365 |
|
10.3 |
|
1,048 |
|
10.9 |
|
3,671 |
|
10.7 |
Residential mortgages |
|
137 |
|
45.1 |
|
143 |
|
42.0 |
|
158 |
|
39.4 |
|
191 |
|
32.3 |
Personal lending |
|
721 |
|
4.3 |
|
853 |
|
4.3 |
|
1,086 |
|
4.6 |
|
1,453 |
|
4.5 |
Finance leases and instalment credit |
|
80 |
|
3.6 |
|
69 |
|
3.7 |
|
69 |
|
3.6 |
|
82 |
|
3.1 |
Accrued interest |
|
|
|
0.1 |
|
|
|
0.1 |
|
|
|
0.1 |
|
|
|
|
Total UK |
|
2,295 |
|
93.2 |
|
2,832 |
|
93.3 |
|
3,708 |
|
91.4 |
|
7,513 |
|
81.0 |
Overseas |
|
1,129 |
|
6.8 |
|
1,223 |
|
6.7 |
|
2,826 |
|
8.6 |
|
8,931 |
|
19.0 |
Impaired book provisions |
|
3,424 |
|
100 |
|
4,055 |
|
100 |
|
6,534 |
|
100 |
|
16,444 |
|
100 |
Latent book provisions |
|
390 |
|
|
|
400 |
|
|
|
584 |
|
|
|
1,016 |
|
|
Total provisions |
|
3,814 |
|
|
|
4,455 |
|
|
|
7,118 |
|
|
|
17,460 |
|
|
Additional information
Analysis of write-offs
The following table analyses amounts written-off by geographical area and type of UK customer.
|
2017 |
2016 |
2015 |
2014 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
UK |
|
|
|
|
Manufacturing |
16 |
26 |
61 |
48 |
Construction |
51 |
279 |
269 |
175 |
Finance |
7 |
5 |
94 |
28 |
Service industries and business activities |
460 |
580 |
646 |
719 |
Agriculture, forestry and fishing |
2 |
6 |
11 |
3 |
Property |
93 |
397 |
2,504 |
1,917 |
Residential mortgages |
20 |
3 |
36 |
76 |
Personal lending |
411 |
362 |
501 |
546 |
Finance leases and instalment credit |
10 |
12 |
20 |
58 |
Total UK |
1,070 |
1,670 |
4,142 |
3,570 |
Overseas |
140 |
2,025 |
4,822 |
1,708 |
Total write-offs (1) |
1,210 |
3,695 |
8,964 |
5,278 |
Note:
(1) Includes nil written-off in respect of loans to banks (2016 nil; 2015 - £33 million; 2014 - £8 million).
Analysis of recoveries
The following table analyses recoveries of amounts written-off by geographical area and type of UK customer.
|
2017 |
2016 |
2015 |
2014 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
UK |
|
|
|
|
Manufacturing |
1 |
1 |
|
2 |
Construction |
2 |
4 |
2 |
9 |
Finance |
|
1 |
3 |
|
Service industries and business activities |
16 |
28 |
32 |
11 |
Property |
7 |
17 |
40 |
29 |
Residential mortgages |
43 |
|
|
|
Personal lending |
72 |
28 |
42 |
26 |
Finance leases and instalment credit |
1 |
1 |
11 |
|
Total UK |
142 |
80 |
130 |
77 |
Overseas |
14 |
29 |
45 |
128 |
Total recoveries |
156 |
109 |
175 |
205 |
Additional information
Risk elements in lending
Risk elements in lending (REIL) comprises of impaired loans and accruing loans past due 90 days or more as to principal or interest.
Impaired loans are all loans (including loans subject to forbearance) for which an impairment provision has been established; for collectively assessed loans, impairment loss provisions are not allocated to individual loans and the entire portfolio is included in impaired loans.
Accruing loans past due 90 days or more comprises loans past due 90 days where no impairment loss is expected.
|
2017 |
2016 |
2015 |
2014 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Impaired loans (1) |
|
|
|
|
UK |
4,450 |
5,557 |
6,095 |
11,562 |
Overseas |
2,973 |
3,308 |
4,755 |
13,681 |
Total |
7,423 |
8,865 |
10,850 |
25,243 |
Accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days or more as to principal or interest |
|
|
|
|
UK |
1,087 |
1,122 |
1,262 |
1,536 |
Overseas |
394 |
323 |
25 |
105 |
Total |
1,481 |
1,445 |
1,287 |
1,641 |
Total REIL |
8,904 |
10,310 |
12,137 |
26,884 |
|
|
|
|
|
Closing provisions for impairment as a % of total REIL |
43% |
43% |
59% |
65% |
REIL as a % of gross lending to customers excluding reverse repos |
2.7% |
3.1% |
3.9% |
7.6% |
Notes:
(1) The write-off of impaired loans affects closing provisions for impairment as a % of total REIL (the coverage ratio). The coverage ratio reduces if the loan written-off carries a higher than average provision and increases if the loan written-off carries a lower than average provision.
(2) Impaired loans at 31 December 2017 include £1,324 million (2016 - £2,496 million; 2015 - £2,300 million) of loans subject to forbearance granted during the year.
|
2017 |
2016 |
2015 |
2014 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Gross income not recognised but which would have been recognised under the original terms of impaired loans |
|
|
|
|
UK |
227 |
243 |
311 |
404 |
Overseas |
80 |
122 |
125 |
165 |
|
307 |
365 |
436 |
569 |
|
|
|
|
|
Interest on impaired loans included in net interest income |
|
|
|
|
UK |
61 |
75 |
98 |
146 |
Overseas |
25 |
38 |
46 |
101 |
|
86 |
113 |
144 |
247 |
Potential problem loans
Potential problem loans (PPL) are loans for which an impairment event has taken place but no impairment loss is expected. This category is used for advances which are not past due 90 days or revolving credit facilities where identification as 90 days overdue is not feasible.
|
2017 |
2016 |
2015 |
2014 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Potential problem loans |
745 |
1,196 |
1,277 |
1,206 |
Both REIL and PPL are reported gross and take no account of the value of any security held which could reduce the eventual loss should it occur, nor of any provision marked. Therefore impaired assets which are highly collateralised, such as mortgages, will have a low coverage ratio of provisions held against the reported impaired balance.
Additional information
Forbearance
The table below shows loans granted forbearance during the year. These loans are unimpaired: either the loan was performing before and after the granting of forbearance or the loan was non-performing before but subsequently transferred to the performing book. Loans with impairment provisions subject to forbearance continue to be reported as impaired loans.
|
2017 |
2016 |
2015 |
2014 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Loans granted forbearance |
1,480 |
2,257 |
3,760 |
6,091 |
Notes:
(1) Wholesale loans subject to forbearance include only those arrangements above thresholds set individually by the segments, ranging from nil to £3 million.
(2) For 2017, wholesale loans subject to forbearance were £1,206 million (2016 - £1,807 million; 2015 - £2,258 million) and secured retail loans subject to forbearance were £274 million (2016 - £450 million; 2015 - £1,502 million). Unsecured retail loans subject to forbearance amounting to £31 million (2016 - £37 million; 2015 - £96 million) are not included.
Analysis of debt securities - fair value through other comprehensive income (2017 - available-for-sale)
The following table analyses available-for-sale debt securities and the related yield (based on weighted averages) by remaining maturity and issuer.
|
Within 1 year |
|
After 1 but within 5 years |
|
After 5 but within 10 years |
|
After 10 years |
|
Total | |||||
|
Amount |
Yield |
|
Amount |
Yield |
|
Amount |
Yield |
|
Amount |
Yield |
|
Amount |
Yield |
2018 |
£m |
% |
|
£m |
% |
|
£m |
% |
|
£m |
% |
|
£m |
% |
Central and local governments |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- UK |
1,432 |
3.2 |
|
6,449 |
2.1 |
|
5,214 |
2.4 |
|
4,097 |
2.8 |
|
17,192 |
2.4 |
- US |
2,275 |
1.8 |
|
5,701 |
2.0 |
|
1,989 |
2.3 |
|
1,802 |
3.0 |
|
11,767 |
2.1 |
- Other |
3,641 |
0.9 |
|
4,835 |
1.0 |
|
1,959 |
0.7 |
|
894 |
2.4 |
|
11,329 |
1.0 |
Other debt |
1,326 |
1.1 |
|
2,907 |
1.2 |
|
872 |
0.9 |
|
201 |
1.2 |
|
5,306 |
1.1 |
|
8,674 |
1.6 |
|
19,892 |
1.7 |
|
10,034 |
1.9 |
|
6,994 |
2.7 |
|
45,594 |
1.9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of which ABS (1) |
175 |
1.1 |
|
596 |
0.8 |
|
290 |
0.4 |
|
202 |
1.2 |
|
1,263 |
0.8 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Central and local governments |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- UK |
1,152 |
1.7 |
|
7,000 |
2.5 |
|
5,814 |
2.0 |
|
3,690 |
3.2 |
|
17,656 |
2.4 |
- US |
455 |
0.8 |
|
4,243 |
1.9 |
|
2,221 |
2.1 |
|
1,542 |
2.8 |
|
8,461 |
2.1 |
- Other |
4,716 |
0.7 |
|
3,405 |
1.5 |
|
2,230 |
1.1 |
|
1,103 |
2.6 |
|
11,454 |
1.2 |
Other debt |
1,632 |
1.0 |
|
3,333 |
1.1 |
|
822 |
0.8 |
|
323 |
0.4 |
|
6,110 |
1.0 |
|
7,955 |
0.9 |
|
17,981 |
1.9 |
|
11,087 |
1.7 |
|
6,658 |
2.9 |
|
43,681 |
1.8 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of which ABS (1) |
263 |
0.4 |
|
1,009 |
0.5 |
|
231 |
|
|
323 |
0.1 |
|
1,826 |
0.4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2016 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Central and local governments |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- UK |
1,722 |
0.9 |
|
2,900 |
5.2 |
|
3,318 |
3.5 |
|
2,641 |
3.0 |
|
10,581 |
3.4 |
- US |
41 |
1.9 |
|
2,797 |
1.9 |
|
2,799 |
2.1 |
|
1,316 |
3.0 |
|
6,953 |
2.2 |
- Other |
5,104 |
1.1 |
|
5,942 |
1.0 |
|
3,444 |
1.2 |
|
1,188 |
2.4 |
|
15,678 |
1.2 |
Other debt |
1,276 |
0.7 |
|
3,303 |
0.9 |
|
972 |
0.9 |
|
491 |
0.3 |
|
6,042 |
0.8 |
|
8,143 |
1.0 |
|
14,942 |
2.0 |
|
10,533 |
2.1 |
|
5,636 |
2.6 |
|
39,254 |
1.9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of which ABS (1) |
377 |
0.8 |
|
974 |
0.5 |
|
415 |
|
|
497 |
|
|
2,263 |
0.3 |
Note:
(1) Includes covered bonds.
Additional information
Analysis of deposits - product analysis
The following table analyses deposits excluding repos by geographical area (location of office) and type of deposit.
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
|
£m |
£m |
£m |
UK |
|
|
|
Deposits |
|
|
|
- interest-free |
121,332 |
118,997 |
108,433 |
- interest-bearing |
255,277 |
264,028 |
255,588 |
Total UK |
376,609 |
383,025 |
364,021 |
Overseas |
|
|
|
Deposits |
|
|
|
- interest-free |
7,958 |
6,875 |
6,286 |
- interest-bearing |
17,116 |
16,613 |
16,882 |
Total overseas |
25,074 |
23,488 |
23,168 |
Total deposits |
401,683 |
406,513 |
387,189 |
|
|
|
|
Overseas |
|
|
|
US |
183 |
165 |
310 |
Rest of the World |
24,891 |
23,323 |
22,858 |
Total overseas |
25,074 |
23,488 |
23,168 |
|
|
|
|
Repos |
|
|
|
UK |
12,078 |
18,235 |
15,351 |
US |
18,282 |
20,186 |
16,984 |
Total repos |
30,360 |
38,421 |
32,335 |
Certificates of deposit and other time deposits
The following table shows certificates of deposit and other time deposits over $100,000 or equivalent by remaining maturity.
|
|
|
|
Over |
|
|
0-3 months |
3-6 months |
6-12 months |
12 months |
Total |
2018 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
UK based companies and branches |
|
|
|
|
|
Certificates of deposit |
415 |
378 |
470 |
|
1,263 |
Other time deposits |
10,093 |
2,949 |
1,963 |
15,250 |
30,255 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Overseas based companies and branches |
|
|
|
|
|
Other time deposits |
1,660 |
953 |
392 |
1,988 |
4,993 |
|
12,168 |
4,280 |
2,825 |
17,238 |
36,511 |
Additional information
Short-term borrowings
Short-term borrowings comprise repurchase agreements, borrowings from financial institutions, commercial paper and certificates of deposit. Derivative collateral received from financial institutions is excluded from the table, as are certain long-term borrowings.
|
At the year end |
|
During the year | |||
|
|
Weighted |
|
|
|
Weighted |
|
|
average |
|
Maximum |
Average |
average |
|
Balance |
interest rate |
|
balance |
balance |
interest rate |
2018 |
£bn |
% |
|
£bn |
£bn |
% |
Repos |
30 |
2.9 |
|
61 |
44 |
1.8 |
Financial institutions (1) |
66 |
0.4 |
|
86 |
71 |
0.3 |
Commercial paper |
2 |
(0.1) |
|
3 |
2 |
(0.2) |
Certificates of deposits |
1 |
0.4 |
|
3 |
2 |
0.2 |
Total |
99 |
1.1 |
|
153 |
119 |
0.8 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Repos |
38 |
1.5 |
|
61 |
48 |
0.7 |
Financial institutions (1) |
77 |
0.2 |
|
89 |
71 |
0.2 |
Commercial paper |
2 |
(0.2) |
|
2 |
1 |
(0.1) |
Certificates of deposits |
3 |
0.2 |
|
4 |
3 |
0.2 |
Total |
120 |
0.6 |
|
156 |
123 |
0.4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2016 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Repos |
32 |
0.3 |
|
62 |
46 |
0.3 |
Financial institutions (1) |
63 |
0.2 |
|
71 |
55 |
0.3 |
Certificates of deposits |
3 |
0.2 |
|
3 |
1 |
0.8 |
Total |
98 |
0.2 |
|
136 |
102 |
0.3 |
Note:
(1) Excludes derivative cash collateral of £20 billion at 31 December 2018 (2017 - £23 billion; 2016 - £32 billion); and 2018 average of £21 billion (2017 - £26 billion; 2016 - £34 billion).
Balances are generally based on monthly data. Average interest rates during the year are computed by dividing total interest expense by the average amount borrowed. Weighted average interest rates at year end are for a single day and as such may reflect one-day market distortions, which may not be indicative of generally prevailing rates.
Other contractual cash obligations
The table below summarises other contractual cash obligations by payment date.
|
0-3 months |
3-12 months |
1-3 years |
3-5 years |
5-10 years |
10-20 years |
2018 |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
£m |
Operating leases |
61 |
169 |
415 |
320 |
587 |
1,133 |
Contractual obligations to purchase goods or services |
70 |
183 |
217 |
66 |
5 |
|
|
131 |
352 |
632 |
386 |
592 |
1,133 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Operating leases |
57 |
163 |
389 |
307 |
584 |
948 |
Contractual obligations to purchase goods or services |
74 |
202 |
332 |
67 |
7 |
|
|
131 |
365 |
721 |
374 |
591 |
948 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2016 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Operating leases |
68 |
192 |
450 |
382 |
726 |
1,154 |
Contractual obligations to purchase goods or services |
64 |
168 |
266 |
93 |
7 |
|
|
132 |
360 |
716 |
475 |
733 |
1,154 |
Undrawn formal facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend were £116,843 million (2017 - £121,229 million; 2016 - £134,324 million). While RBS has given commitments to provide these funds, some facilities may be subject to certain conditions being met by the counterparty. RBS does not expect all facilities to be drawn, and some may lapse before drawdown.
Additional information
Exchange rates
The following tables show the Noon Buying Rate in New York for cable transfers in sterling as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York.
|
January |
December |
November |
October |
September |
August |
US dollars per £1 |
2019 |
2018 |
2018 |
2018 |
2018 |
2018 |
Noon Buying Rate |
|
|
|
|
|
|
High |
1.3176 |
1.2777 |
1.3144 |
1.3210 |
1.3237 |
1.3120 |
Low |
1.2598 |
1.2524 |
1.2729 |
1.2731 |
1.2833 |
1.2685 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
2015 |
2014 |
Noon Buying Rate |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Period end rate |
|
1.2763 |
1.3529 |
1.2337 |
1.4746 |
1.5578 |
Average rate for the year (1) |
|
1.3309 |
1.3016 |
1.3444 |
1.5250 |
1.6461 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Consolidation rate (2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Period end rate |
|
1.2790 |
1.3513 |
1.2323 |
1.4830 |
1.5615 |
Average rate for the year |
|
1.3350 |
1.2887 |
1.3552 |
1.5284 |
1.6475 |
Notes:
(1) The average of the Noon Buying Rates on the last US business day of each month during the year.
(2) The rates used for translating US dollars into sterling in the preparation of the financial statements.
(3) On 22 February 2019, the Noon Buying Rate was £1.00 = US$1.3067.
Additional information
ADR payment information
Fees paid by ADR holders
The depositary collects its fees for delivery and surrender of ADSs directly from investors depositing shares or surrendering ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal or from intermediaries acting for them. The depositary collects fees for making distributions to investors by deducting those fees from the amounts distributed or by selling a portion of distributable property to pay the fees.
The depository may collect its annual fee for depository services by deductions from cash distributions or by directly billing investors or by changing the book-entry system accounts of participants acting for them. The depository may generally refuse to provide fee-attracting services until its fees for those services are paid.
Persons depositing or withdrawing shares must pay: |
|
For: |
$5.00 (or less) per 100 ADSs (or portion of 100 ADSs) |
|
Issuance of ADSs, including issuances resulting from a distribution of shares or rights or other property. |
|
|
|
|
|
Cancellation of ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal, including if the deposit agreement terminates. |
|
|
|
$0.02 (or less) per ADS |
|
Any cash distribution to ADS registered holders. |
|
|
|
A fee equivalent to the fee that would be payable if securities distributed to you had been shares and the shares had been deposited for issuance of ADSs |
|
Distribution of securities distributed to holders of securities of deposited securities to ADS registered holders. |
|
|
|
Registration or transfer fees |
|
Transfer and registration of shares on our share register to or from the name of the depository or its agent when you deposit or withdraw shares. |
|
|
|
Expenses of the depository |
|
Cable, telex and facsimile transmissions (when expressly provided in the deposit agreement). |
|
|
|
|
|
Converting foreign currency to U.S. dollars. |
|
|
|
Taxes and other governmental charges the depositary or the custodian have to pay on any ADS or share underlying an ADS, for example, stock transfer taxes, stamp duty or withholding taxes |
|
As necessary. |
|
|
|
Any charges incurred by the depository or its agents for servicing the deposited securities |
|
As necessary. |
Fees payable by the depository to the issuer
Fees incurred in past annual Period
From 1 January 2017 to 31 December 2017, the company received from the depository $300,000 for continuing annual stock exchange listing fees, standard out-of-pocket maintenance costs for the ADRs (consisting of the expenses of postage and envelopes for mailing annual and interim financial reports, printing and distributing dividend cheques, electronic filling of U.S. Federal tax information, mailing required tax forms, stationary, postage, facsimile, and telephone calls), any applicable performance indicators relating to the ADR facility, underwriting fees and legal fees.
Fees to be paid in the future
The Bank of New York Mellon, as depository, has agreed to reimburse the Company for expenses they incur that are related to establishment and maintenance expenses of the ADS program. The depository has agreed to reimburse the Company for its continuing annual stock exchange listing fees, the depository has also agreed to pay the standard out-of-pocket maintenance costs for the ADRs, which consist of the expenses of postage and envelopes for mailing annual and interim reports, printing and distributing dividend cheques, electronic filing of U.S. federal tax information, mailing required tax forms, stationary, postage, facsimile, and telephone calls. It has also agreed to reimburse the Company annually for certain investor relationship programs of special investor relations promotional activities. In certain instances, the depository has agreed to provide additional payments to the Company based on any applicable performance indicators relating to the ADR facility. There are limits on the amount of expenses for which the depository will reimburse the Company, but the amount of reimbursement available to the Company is not necessarily tied to the amount of fees the depository collects from investors.
Risk factors
Principal Risks and Uncertainties
Set out below are certain risk factors that could adversely affect the Groups future results, its financial condition and prospects and cause them to be materially different from what is forecast or expected and either directly or indirectly impact the value of its securities in issue. These risk factors are broadly categorised and should be read in conjunction with the forward looking statements section, strategic report and the capital and risk management section of this annual report on Form 20-F, and should not be regarded as a complete and comprehensive statement of all potential risks and uncertainties facing the Group.
Operational and IT resilience risk
The Group is subject to increasingly sophisticated and frequent cyberattacks.
The Group is experiencing continued cyberattacks across the entire Group, with an emerging trend of attacks against the Groups supply chain, re-enforcing the importance of due diligence and close working with the third parties on which the Group relies. The Group is reliant on technology, which is vulnerable to attacks, with cyberattacks increasing in terms of frequency, sophistication, impact and severity. As cyberattacks evolve and become more sophisticated, the Group will be required to invest additional resources to upgrade the security of its systems. In 2018, the Group was subjected to a small but increasing number of Distributed Denial of Service (DDOS) attacks, which are a pervasive and significant threat to the global financial services industry. The Group fully mitigated the impact of these attacks whilst sustaining full availability of services for its customers. Hostile attempts are made by third parties to gain access to and introduce malware (including ransomware) into the Groups IT systems, and to exploit vulnerabilities. The Group has information security controls in place, which are subject to review on a continuing basis, but there can be no assurance that such measures will prevent all DDOS attacks or other cyberattacks in the future. See also, The Groups operations are highly dependent on its IT systems.
Any failure in the Groups cybersecurity policies, procedures or controls, may result in significant financial losses, major business disruption, inability to deliver customer services, or loss of data or other sensitive information (including as a result of an outage) and may cause associated reputational damage. Any of these factors could increase costs (including costs relating to notification of, or compensation for customers, credit monitoring or card reissuance), result in regulatory investigations or sanctions being imposed or may affect the Groups ability to retain and attract customers. Regulators in the UK, US and Europe continue to recognise cybersecurity as an increasing systemic risk to the financial sector and have highlighted the need for financial institutions to improve their monitoring and control of, and resilience (particularly of critical services) to cyberattacks, and to provide timely notification of them, as appropriate.
Additionally, parties may also fraudulently attempt to induce employees, customers, third party providers or other users who have access to the Groups systems to disclose sensitive information in order to gain access to the Groups data or that of the Groups customers or employees. Cybersecurity and information security events can derive from human error, fraud or malice on the part of the Groups employees or third parties, including third party providers, or may result from accidental technological failure. Any such event could have a material adverse effect on the Groups business, reputation or financial condition.
In accordance with the EU General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), the Group is required to ensure it timely implements appropriate and effective organisational and technological safeguards against unauthorised or unlawful access to the data of the Group, its customers and its employees. In order to meet this requirement, the Group relies on the effectiveness of its internal policies, controls and procedures to protect the confidentiality, integrity and availability of information held on its IT systems, networks and devices as well as with third parties with whom the Group interacts and a failure to monitor and manage data in accordance with the GDPR requirements may result in financial losses, regulatory fines and investigations and associated reputational damage. In addition, whilst the Group takes appropriate measures to prevent, detect and minimise attacks, the Groups systems, and those of third party providers, are subject to frequent cyberattacks.
The Group expects greater regulatory engagement, supervision and enforcement in relation to its overall resilience to withstand IT and related disruption, either through a cyberattack or some other disruptive event. However, due to the Groups reliance on technology and the increasing sophistication, frequency and impact of cyberattacks, it is likely that such attacks could have a material adverse effect on the Groups results of operations, financial condition or future prospects.
Operational risks are inherent in the Groups businesses.
Operational risk is the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, procedures, people or systems, or from external events, including legal risks. The Group operates in many countries, offering a diverse range of products and services supported by 65,400 employees; it therefore has complex and diverse operations. As a result, operational risks or losses can arise from a number of internal or external factors. These risks are also present when the Group relies on outside suppliers or vendors to provide services to it or its customers, as is increasingly the case as the Group implements new technologies, innovates and responds to regulatory and market changes.
Operational risks continue to be heightened as a result of the Groups current cost-reduction measures and conditions affecting the financial services industry generally (including Brexit and other geo-political developments) as well as the legal and regulatory uncertainty resulting therefrom. This may place significant pressure on the Groups ability to maintain effective internal controls and governance frameworks. In particular, new governance frameworks have recently been put into place throughout the Group for certain Group entities, due to the implementation of the UK ring-fencing regime and the resulting legal entity structure. The effective management of operational risks is critical to meeting customer service expectations and retaining and attracting customer business. Although the Group has implemented risk controls and loss mitigation actions, and significant resources and planning have been devoted to mitigate operational risk, there is uncertainty as to whether such actions will be effective in controlling each of the operational risks faced by the Group. Ineffective management of such risks could have a material adverse effect on the Groups business, financial condition and results of operations.
The Groups operations are highly dependent on its IT systems.
The Groups operations are highly dependent on the ability to process a very large number of transactions efficiently and accurately while complying with applicable laws and regulations. The proper functioning of the Groups payment systems, financial and sanctions controls, risk management, credit analysis and reporting, accounting, customer service and other IT systems, as well as the communication networks between its branches and main data processing centres, are critical to the Groups operations.
Individually or collectively, any critical system failure, prolonged loss of service availability or material breach of data security could cause serious damage to the Groups ability to provide services to its customers, which could result in significant compensation costs or regulatory sanctions (including fines resulting from regulatory investigations) or a breach of applicable regulations. In particular, failures or breaches resulting in the loss or publication of confidential customer data could cause long-term damage to the Groups reputation and could affect its regulatory approvals, competitive position, business and brands, which could undermine its ability to attract and retain customers. This risk is heightened as the Group continues to innovate and offer new digital solutions to its customers as a result of the trend towards online and mobile banking.
In 2018, the Group upgraded its IT systems and technology and expects to continue to make considerable investments to further simplify, upgrade and improve its IT and technology capabilities (including migration to the Cloud) to make them more cost-effective, improve controls and procedures, strengthen cyber security, enhance digital services provided to its bank customers and improve its competitive position. Should such investment and rationalisation initiatives fail to achieve the expected results or prove to be insufficient due to cost-challenges or
Risk factors
otherwise, this could negatively affect the Groups operations, its reputation and ability to retain or grow its customer business or adversely impact its competitive position, thereby negatively impacting the Groups financial position.
The Group relies on attracting, retaining and developing senior management and skilled personnel, and is required to maintain good employee relations.
The Groups current and future success depends on its ability to attract, retain and develop highly skilled and qualified personnel, including senior management, directors and key employees, in a highly competitive labour market and under internal cost reduction pressures. This entails risk, particularly in light of heightened regulatory oversight of banks and the increasing scrutiny of, and (in some cases) restrictions placed upon, employee compensation arrangements, in particular those of banks in receipt of government support such as the Group, which may have an adverse effect on the Groups ability to hire, retain and engage well-qualified employees. The market for skilled personnel is increasingly competitive, especially for technology-focussed roles, thereby raising the cost of hiring, training and retaining skilled personnel. In addition, certain economic, market and regulatory conditions and political developments (including Brexit) may reduce the pool of candidates for key management and non-executive roles, including non-executive directors with the right skills, knowledge and experience, or increase the number of departures of existing employees. Any such failure to hire, retain or engage senior management and skilled personnel could have a material adverse impact on the Groups business, financial condition and results of operations.
Many of the Groups employees in the UK, Republic of Ireland and continental Europe are represented by employee representative bodies, including trade unions. Engagement with its employees and such bodies is important to the Group in maintaining good employee relations. Any failure to do so could impact the Groups ability to operate its business effectively. Any breakdown of these relationships could adversely affect the Groups business, reputation and results of operations.
A failure in the Groups risk management framework could adversely affect the Group, including its ability to achieve its strategic objectives.
Risk management is an integral part of all of the Groups activities and includes the definition and monitoring of the Groups risk appetite and reporting on the Groups risk exposure and the potential impact thereof on the Groups financial condition. Financial risk management is highly dependent on the use and effectiveness of internal stress tests and models and ineffective risk management may arise from a wide variety of factors, including lack of transparency or incomplete risk reporting, unidentified conflicts or misaligned incentives, lack of accountability control and governance, lack of consistency in risk monitoring and management or insufficient challenges or assurance processes. Failure to manage risks effectively could adversely impact the Groups reputation or its relationship with its customers, shareholders or other stakeholders.
The Groups operations are inherently exposed to conduct risks. These include business decisions, actions or incentives that are not responsive to or aligned with the Groups customers needs or do not reflect the Groups customer-focussed strategy, ineffective product management, unethical or inappropriate use of data, outsourcing of customer service and product delivery, the possibility of alleged mis-selling of financial products and mishandling of customer complaints. Some of these risks have materialised in the past and ineffective management and oversight of conduct risks may lead to further remediation and regulatory intervention or enforcement. The Groups businesses are also exposed to risks from employee misconduct including non-compliance with policies and regulations, negligence or fraud (including financial crimes), any of which could result in regulatory fines or sanctions and serious reputational or financial harm to the Group.
The Group is seeking to embed a strong risk culture across the organisation and has implemented policies and allocated new resources across all levels of the organisation to manage and mitigate conduct risk and expects to continue to invest in its risk management framework. However, such efforts may not insulate the Group from future instances of misconduct and no assurance can be given that the Groups strategy and control framework will be effective. Any failure in the Groups risk management framework could negatively affect the Group and its financial condition through reputational and financial harm and may result in the inability to achieve its strategic objectives for its customers, employees and wider stakeholders, any of which could have a material adverse effect on the Groups business, capital position and results of operations.
The Groups operations are subject to inherent reputational risk.
Reputational risk relates to stakeholder and public perceptions of the Group arising from an actual or perceived failure to meet stakeholder expectations due to any events, behaviour, action or inaction by the Group, its employees or those with whom the Group is associated. This includes brand damage, which may be detrimental to the Groups business, including its ability to build or sustain business relationships with customers, and may cause low employee morale, regulatory censure or reduced access to, or an increase in the cost of, funding. Reputational risk may arise whenever there is a material lapse in standards of integrity, compliance, customer or operating efficiency and may adversely affect the Groups ability attract and retain customers. In particular, the Groups ability to attract and retain customers (and, in particular, corporate and retail depositors) may be adversely affected by, amongst others: negative public opinion resulting from the actual or perceived manner in which the Group conducts or modifies its business activities and operations, media coverage (whether accurate or otherwise), employee misconduct, the Groups financial performance, IT failures or cyberattacks, the level of direct and indirect government support, or the actual or perceived practices in the banking and financial industry in general, or a wide variety of other factors.
Modern technologies, in particular online social networks and other broadcast tools which facilitate communication with large audiences in short time frames and with minimal costs, may also significantly enhance and accelerate the impact of damaging information and allegations.
Although the Group has implemented a Reputational Risk Policy to improve the identification, assessment and management of customers, transactions, products and issues which represent a reputational risk, the Group cannot be certain that it will be successful in avoiding damage to its business from reputational risk. This could result in a material adverse effect on the Groups business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects.
Economic and political risk
Uncertainties surrounding the UKs withdrawal from the European Union may adversely affect the Group.
Following the EU Referendum in June 2016, and pursuant to the exit process triggered under Article 50 of the Treaty on European Union in March 2017, the UK is scheduled to leave the EU on 29 March 2019. The terms of a Brexit withdrawal agreement negotiated by the UK Government were decisively voted against by Parliament on 15 January 2019. The UK Government and Parliament are currently actively engaged in seeking to determine the terms of this departure, including any transition period, and the resulting economic, trading and legal relationships with both the EU and other counterparties currently remain unclear and subject to significant uncertainty.
As it currently stands, EU membership and all associated treaties will cease to apply at 23:00 on 29 March 2019, unless some form of transitional arrangement encompassing those associated treaties is agreed or there is unanimous agreement amongst the UK, other EU member states and the European Commission to extend the negotiation period.
The direct and indirect effects of the UKs exit from the EU and the European Economic Area (EEA) are expected to affect many aspects of the Groups business and operating environment, including as described elsewhere in these risk factors, and may be material and/or cause a near-term impact on impairments. See also The Group faces increased political and economic risks and uncertainty in the UK and global markets.
Risk factors
The longer term effects of Brexit on the Groups operating environment are difficult to predict, and are subject to wider global macro-economic trends and events, but may significantly impact the Group and its customers and counterparties who are themselves dependent on trading with the EU or personnel from the EU and may result in, or be exacerbated by, periodic financial volatility and slower economic growth, in the UK in particular, but also in Republic of Ireland, Europe and potentially the global economy.
Significant uncertainty exists as to the respective legal and regulatory arrangements under which the Group and its subsidiaries will operate when the UK is no longer a member of the EU. See The Group is finalising the requisite regulatory permissions to implement its plans for continuity of business impacted by the UKs departure from the EU, on which it will rely going forward. The legal and political uncertainty and any actions taken as a result of this uncertainty, as well as new or amended rules, could have a significant impact on the Groups operations or legal entity structure, including attendant restructuring costs, level of impairments, capital requirements, regulatory environment and tax implications and as a result may adversely impact the Groups profitability, competitive position, viability, business model and product offering.
The Group is finalising the requisite regulatory permissions to implement its plans for continuity of business impacted by the UKs departure from the EU, on which it will rely going forward.
The Group is implementing plans designed to continue its ability to clear euro payments and minimise the impact on the Groups ability to serve non-UK EEA customers in the event that there is an immediate loss of access to the European Single Market on 29 March 2019 (or any alternative date) with no alternative arrangement for continuation of such activities under current rules (also known as Hard Brexit).
To ensure continued ability to clear Euro denominated payments, the Group is finalising a third-country licence for the Frankfurt branch of National Westminster Bank Plc (NWB) with the German regulator. In addition, the Group is working to satisfy the conditions of the Deutsche Bundesbank (DBB) for access to TARGET2 clearing and settlement mechanisms. Satisfying these DBB conditions, which include a country legal opinion, and accessing SEPA, Euro 1 and TARGET2 will allow the Group (through NWB Frankfurt branch) to continue to clear cross-border payments in euros. The capacity to process these euro payments is a fundamental requirement for the daily operations and customers of all Group franchises, including Ulster Bank. The value of such payments is typically in excess of 50 billion in any one day with more than 300,000 transactions. This capacity is also critical for management of the Groups euro-denominated central bank cash balances of around 23 billion. NatWest Markets Plc (NWM Plc) will use the NWB Frankfurt branch to clear its euro payments and has also applied for a third country license to maintain liquidity management and product settlement arrangements.
Once in place, the third country licence branch approvals will each become effective when the UK leaves the EU and the current passporting arrangements cease to apply. The Group expects to have received the requisite third country licenses and access to SEPA, Euro 1 and TARGET2 ahead of the UKs departure from the EU. However, given the quantum of affected payments and lack of short-term contingency arrangements, in the event that such euro clearing capabilities were not in place in time for a Hard Brexit or are not maintained as required in the future, it could have a material impact on the Group and its customers.
Additionally, to continue serving most of the Groups EEA customers, the Group has repurposed the banking licence of its Dutch subsidiary, NatWest Markets N.V. (NWM NV). As announced on 22 February 2019, the Group has obtained court permission for a FSMA transfer scheme to replicate the master trade documentation for NWM Plcs non-UK EEA customers and transfer certain existing transactions from NWM Plc to NWM NV. Other transactions are expected to be transferred to NWM NV during 2019 (for example certain transactions with Corporate and Sovereign customers and larger EEA customers from NWM Plc, and certain Western European corporate business from National Westminster Bank Plc). The volume and pace of business transfers to NWM NV will depend on the terms and circumstances of the UKs exit from the EU, as well as the specific contractual terms of the affected products.
These changes to the Groups operating model are costly and require further changes to its business operations and customer engagement. The regulatory permissions from the Dutch and German authorities are conditional in nature and will require on-going compliance with certain conditions, including maintaining minimum capital level and deposit balances as well as a defined local physical presence going forward; such conditions may be subject to change in the future. Maintaining these permissions and the Groups access to the euro payment infrastructure will be fundamental to its business going forward and further changes to the Groups business operations may be required. Any failure in obtaining or maintaining these permissions in the circumstances described above could have a material adverse effect on the Groups results of operations, financial condition or future prospects.
The Group faces increased political and economic risks and uncertainty in the UK and global markets.
In the UK, significant economic and political uncertainty surrounds the terms of and timing of Brexit. (See also, Uncertainties surrounding the UKs withdrawal from the European Union may adversely affect the Group.) In addition, were there to be a change of UK Government as a result of a general election, the Group may face new risks as a result of a change in government policy, including more direct intervention by the UK Government in financial markets, the regulation and ownership of public companies and the extent to which the government exercises its rights as a shareholder of the Group. This could affect, in particular, the structure, strategy and operations of the Group and may negatively impact the Groups operational performance and financial results.
The Group faces additional political uncertainty as to how the Scottish parliamentary process (including, as a result of any second Scottish independence referendum) may impact the Group. RBSG and a number of other Group entities (including NWM Plc) are headquartered and incorporated in Scotland. Any changes to Scotlands relationship with the UK or the EU (as an indirect result of Brexit or other developments) would impact the environment in which the Group and its subsidiaries operate, and may require further changes to the Groups structure, independently or in conjunction with other mandatory or strategic structural and organisational changes which could adversely impact the Group.
Actual or perceived difficult global economic conditions can create challenging economic and market conditions and a difficult operating environment for the Groups businesses and its customers and counterparties, thereby affecting its financial performance.
The outlook for the global economy over the medium-term remains uncertain due to a number of factors including: trade barriers and the increased possibility of trade wars, widespread political instability, an extended period of low inflation and low interest rates, and global regional variations in the impact and responses to these factors. Such conditions could be worsened by a number of factors including political uncertainty or macro-economic deterioration in the Eurozone, China or the US, increased instability in the global financial system and concerns relating to further financial shocks or contagion (for example, due to economic concerns in emerging markets), market volatility or fluctuations in the value of the pound sterling, new or extended economic sanctions, volatility in commodity prices or concerns regarding sovereign debt. This may be compounded by the ageing demographics of the populations in the markets that the Group serves, or rapid change to the economic environment due to the adoption of technology and artificial intelligence. Any of the above developments could impact the Group directly (for example, as a result of credit losses) or indirectly (for example, by impacting global economic growth and financial markets and the Groups customers and their banking needs).
In addition, the Group is exposed to risks arising out of geopolitical events or political developments, such as trade barriers, exchange controls, sanctions and other
Risk factors
measures taken by sovereign governments that may hinder economic or financial activity levels. Furthermore, unfavourable political, military or diplomatic events, including secession movements or the exit of other member states from the EU, armed conflict, pandemics and widespread public health crises, state and privately sponsored cyber and terrorist acts or threats, and the responses to them by governments and markets, could negatively affect the business and performance of the Group.
The value of the Groups financial instruments may be materially affected by market risk, including as a result of market fluctuations. Market volatility, illiquid market conditions and disruptions in the credit markets may make it extremely difficult to value certain of the Groups financial instruments, particularly during periods of market displacement which could cause a decline in the value of the Groups financial instruments, which may have an adverse effect on the Groups results of operations in future periods, or inaccurate carrying values for certain financial instruments.
In addition, financial markets are susceptible to severe events evidenced by rapid depreciation in asset values, which may be accompanied by a reduction in asset liquidity. Under these conditions, hedging and other risk management strategies may not be as effective at mitigating trading losses as they would be under more normal market conditions. Moreover, under these conditions, market participants are particularly exposed to trading strategies employed by many market participants simultaneously and on a large scale, increasing the Groups counterparty risk. The Groups risk management and monitoring processes seek to quantify and mitigate the Groups exposure to more extreme market moves. However, severe market events have historically been difficult to predict and the Group could realise significant losses if extreme market events were to occur.
The Group expects to face significant risks in connection with climate change and the transition to a low carbon economy.
The risks associated with climate change are subject to rapidly increasing prudential and regulatory, political and societal focus, both in the UK and internationally. Embedding climate risk into the Groups risk framework in line with expected regulatory expectations, and adapting the Groups operation and business strategy to address both the risks of climate change and the transition to a low carbon economy are likely to have a significant impact on the Groups business, results of operations and financial condition.
Multilateral and UK Government undertakings to limit increases in carbon emissions in the near and medium term will require widespread levels of adjustment across all sectors of the economy, with some sectors such as property, energy, infrastructure (including transport) and agriculture likely to be particularly impacted. The nature and timing of the far-reaching commercial, technological and regulatory changes that this transition will entail are currently uncertain but the impact of such changes may be disruptive, especially if such changes do not occur in an orderly or timely manner or are not effective in reducing emissions sufficiently. Furthermore, the nature and timing of the manifestation of the physical risks of climate change (which include more extreme specific weather events such as flooding and heat waves and longer term shifts in climate) are also uncertain, and their impact on the economy is predicted to be more acute if carbon emissions are not reduced on a timely basis or to the requisite extent. The potential impact on the economy includes, but is not limited to, lower GDP growth, significant changes in asset prices and profitability of industries, higher unemployment and the prevailing level of interest rates.
UK and international regulators that are actively seeking to develop new and existing regulations directly and indirectly focussed on climate change and the associated financial risks. Such new regulations are being developed in parallel with an increasing market focus on the risks associated with climate change. In October 2018, the Groups prudential regulator, the PRA, published a draft supervisory standard which sets forth an expectation that regulated entities adopt a Board-level strategic approach to managing and mitigating the financial risks of climate change and embed the management of them into their governance frameworks, subject to existing prudential regulatory supervisory tools (including stress testing and individual and systemic capital requirements). Climate risk is also subject to various legislative actions and proposals by, among others, the European Commissions Sustainable Finance initiative that focuses on incorporating climate risk into its financial policy frameworks, including proposals (e.g., through amendments to MiFID II) for institutional investors (including pension funds) to consider and disclose climate risk criteria as part of their investment decision, and also proposals to consider changes to RWA methodologies. Furthermore, credit ratings agencies are increasingly taking into account environmental, social and governance (ESG) factors, including climate risk, as part of the credit ratings analysis, as are investors in their investment decisions.
If the Group does not adequately embed climate risk into its risk framework to appropriately measure, manage and disclose the various financial and physical risks it faces associated with climate change, or fails to adapt its strategy and business model to the changing regulatory requirements and market expectations on a timely basis, it may have a material and adverse impact on the Groups level of business growth, its competitiveness, profitability, prudential capital requirements, credit ratings, cost of funding, results of operations and financial condition.
HM Treasury (or UKGI on its behalf) could exercise a significant degree of influence over the Group and further offers or sales of the Groups shares held by HM Treasury may affect the price of securities issued by the Group.
In its November 2018 Autumn Budget, the UK Government announced its intention to continue the process of privatisation of RBSG and to carry out a programme of sales of RBSG ordinary shares with the objective of selling all of its remaining shares in RBSG by 2023-2024. On 5 June 2018, the UK Government (via HM Treasury and UK Government Investments Limited (UKGI)) disposed of approximately 7.7% of its stake in RBSG. As at 31 December 2018, the UK Government held 62.3% of the issued ordinary share capital of RBSG. There can be no certainty as to the continuation of the sell-down process or the timing or extent of such sell-downs which could result in a period of prolonged period of increased price volatility on the Groups ordinary shares. On 6 February 2019, the Group obtained shareholder approval to participate in certain directed share buyback activities. Any offers or sale, or expectations relating to the timing thereof, of a substantial number of ordinary shares by HM Treasury, or any associated directed buyback activity by the Group, could affect the prevailing market price for the outstanding ordinary shares of RBSG, which would adversely affect the Groups capital position.
In addition, UKGI manages HM Treasurys shareholder relationship with RBSG and, although HM Treasury has indicated that it intends to respect the commercial decisions of the Group and that the Group will continue to have its own independent board of directors and management team determining its own strategy, its position as a majority shareholder (and UKGIs position as manager of this shareholding) means that HM Treasury or UKGI could exercise a significant degree of influence over, among other things, the election of directors and appointment of senior management, the Groups capital strategy, dividend policy, remuneration policy or the conduct of the Groups operations, and HM Treasurys approach depends on government policy, which could change, including as a result of a general election. The manner in which HM Treasury or UKGI exercises HM Treasurys rights as majority shareholder could give rise to conflicts between the interests of HM Treasury and the interests of other shareholders, including as a result of a change in government policy. Any such conflict could have a material adverse impact on the Groups reputation, business, capital and financial condition.
Continued low interest rates have significantly affected and will continue to affect the Groups business and results.
Interest rate risk is significant for the Group, as monetary policy has been accommodative in recent years, including as a result of certain policies implemented by the Bank of England and HM Treasury such as the Term Funding Scheme, which have helped to support demand at a time of pronounced fiscal tightening and balance sheet repair. However, there remains considerable uncertainty as to the direction of interest rates and pace of change, as set by the Bank of England and other major central banks.
Risk factors
Continued sustained low or negative interest rates could put pressure on the Groups interest margins and adversely affect the Groups profitability and prospects. In addition, a continued period of low interest rates and flat yield curves has affected and may continue to affect the Groups interest rate margin realised between lending and borrowing costs.
Conversely, while increases in interest rates may support Group income, sharp increases in interest rates could lead to generally weaker than expected growth, or even contracting GDP, reduced business confidence, higher levels of unemployment or underemployment, adverse changes to levels of inflation, and falling property prices in the markets in which the Group operates.
Changes in foreign currency exchange rates may affect the Groups results and financial position.
Although the Group is now principally a UK and ROI-focussed banking group, it is subject to foreign exchange risk from capital deployed in the Groups foreign subsidiaries, branches and joint arrangements, and non-trading foreign exchange risk, including customer transactions and profits and losses that are in a currency other than the functional currency of the transaction entity. The Group also relies on issuing securities in foreign currencies that assist in meeting the Groups minimum requirements for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL). The Group maintains policies and procedures designed to manage the impact of exposures to fluctuations in currency rates. Nevertheless, changes in currency rates, particularly in the sterling-US dollar and euro-sterling rates, can adversely affect the value of assets, liabilities (including the total amount of MREL eligible instruments), income, RWAs, capital base and expenses and the reported earnings of the Groups UK and non-UK subsidiaries and may affect the Groups reported consolidated financial condition or its income from foreign exchange dealing and may also require incremental MREL eligible instruments to be issued.
Decisions of major central banks (including by the Bank of England, the ECB and the US Federal Reserve) and political or market events (including Brexit), which are outside of the Groups control, may lead to sharp and sudden variations in foreign exchange rates. Such variations can materially affect the Groups results of operations, financial condition or prospects.
Financial resilience risk
The Group may not meet its targets and be in a position to make discretionary capital distributions to its shareholders.
As part of the Groups strategy, the Group has become a principally UK and ROI-focussed banking group and has set a number of financial, capital and operational targets for the Group including in respect of: cost:income ratios, cost reductions, CET1 ratio targets, leverage ratio targets, funding plans and requirements, reductions in RWAs and the timing thereof, employee engagement, diversity and inclusion as well as environmental, social and customer satisfaction targets and discretionary capital distributions to shareholders.
The Groups ability to meet its targets and to successfully meet its strategy is subject to various internal and external factors and risks. These include, but are not limited to, market, regulatory, macroeconomic and political uncertainties, operational risks and risks relating to the Groups business model and strategy (including emerging risks associated with ESG issues) and litigation, governmental actions, investigations and regulatory matters.
A number of factors may impact the Groups ability to maintain its current CET1 ratio target at circa 14% (over the medium term) and make discretionary capital distributions to shareholders, see also, The Group may not meet the prudential regulatory requirements for capital and MREL, or manage its capital effectively, which could trigger certain management actions or recovery options.
The Groups ability to meet its cost:income ratio target and the planned reductions in its annual underlying costs may vary considerably from year to year. Furthermore, the focus on meeting cost reduction targets may result in limited investment in other areas which could affect the Groups long-term product offering or competitive position and its ability to meet its other targets, including those related to customer satisfaction.
Any failure of the Group to meet its targets, successfully meet its strategy or make discretionary capital distributions could have a material adverse impact on the Groups business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects. There is no certainty that the Groups strategy will be successfully executed, that the Group will meet its targets and expectations or be in a position to distribute capital to its shareholders, or that the Group will be a viable, competitive or profitable banking business.
The Group operates in markets that are highly competitive, with increasing competitive pressures and technology disruption.
The markets for UK financial services, and the other markets within which the Group operates, are highly competitive, and the Group expects such competition to continue or intensify in response to customer behaviour, technological changes (including the growth of digital banking), competitor behaviour, new entrants to the market (including non-traditional financial services providers such as large retail or technology conglomerates), industry trends resulting in increased disaggregation or unbundling of financial services or conversely the re-intermediation of traditional banking services, and the impact of regulatory actions and other factors. In particular, developments in the financial sector resulting from new banking, lending and payment solutions offered by rapidly evolving incumbents, challengers and new entrants, notably with respect to payment services and products, and the introduction of disruptive technology may impede the Groups ability to grow or retain its market share and impact its revenues and profitability, particularly in its key UK retail banking segment. These trends may be catalysed by various regulatory and competition policy interventions, particularly as a result of the UK initiative on Open Banking and other remedies imposed by the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) which are designed to further promote competition within retail banking, as well as the competition-enhancing measures under the Groups Alternative Remedies Package (see also, The cost of implementing the Alternative Remedies Package could be more onerous than anticipated).
Increasingly many of the products and services offered by the Group are, and will become, technology intensive, for example Bό, Mettle, Esme, FreeAgent, APtimise and Path, some of the Groups recent fintech ventures. The Groups ability to develop digital solutions that comply with related regulatory changes has become increasingly important to retaining and growing the Groups customer business in the UK. There can be no certainty that the Groups innovation strategy (which includes investment in its IT capability intended to address the material increase in customer use of online and mobile technology for banking as well as selective acquisitions, which carry associated risks) will be successful or that it will allow the Group to continue to grow such services in the future. Certain of the Groups current or future competitors may be more successful in implementing innovative technologies for delivering products or services to their customers. The Group may also fail to identify future opportunities or derive benefits from disruptive technologies in the context of rapid technological innovation, changing customer behaviour and growing regulatory demands, including the UK initiative on Open Banking (PSD2), resulting in increased competition from both traditional banking businesses as well as new providers of financial services, including technology companies with strong brand recognition, that may be able to develop financial services at a lower cost base.
Furthermore, the Groups competitors may be better able to attract and retain customers and key employees and may have access to lower cost funding and/or be able to attract deposits on more favourable terms than the Group. Although the Group invests in new technologies and participates in industry and research led initiatives aimed at developing new technologies, such investments may be insufficient or ineffective, especially given the Groups focus on its cost savings targets, which may limit additional investment in areas such as financial innovation and therefore could affect the Groups offering of innovative products or technologies for delivering products or services to customers and its competitive position. Furthermore, the development of innovative products depends on the Groups ability to produce underlying high quality data, failing which its ability to
Risk factors
offer innovative products may be compromised.
If the Group is unable to offer competitive, attractive and innovative products that are also profitable, it will lose market share, incur losses on some or all of its activities and lose opportunities for growth. In this context, the Group is investing in the automation of certain solutions and interactions within its customer-facing businesses, including through artificial intelligence. Such initiatives may result in operational, reputational and conduct risks if the technology used is defective, or is not fully integrated into the Groups current solutions or does not deliver expected cost savings. The investment in automated processes will likely also result in increased short-term costs for the Group.
In addition, recent and future disposals and restructurings by the Group, cost-cutting measures, as well as employee remuneration constraints, may also have an impact on its ability to compete effectively and intensified competition from incumbents, challengers and new entrants in the Groups core markets could affect the Groups ability to maintain satisfactory returns. Furthermore, continued consolidation in certain sectors of the financial services industry could result in the Groups remaining competitors gaining greater capital and other resources, including the ability to offer a broader range of products and services and geographic diversity, or the emergence of new competitors. These and other changes in the Groups competitive environment could have a material adverse effect on the Groups business, margins, profitability, financial condition and prospects.
The Group has significant exposure to counterparty and borrower risk.
The Group has exposure to many different industries, customers and counterparties, and risks arising from actual or perceived changes in credit quality and the recoverability of monies due from borrowers and other counterparties are inherent in a wide range of the Groups businesses. The Group is exposed to credit risk if a customer, borrower or counterparty defaults, or under IFRS 9, suffers a sufficiently significant deterioration of credit quality under SICR (significant increases in credit risk) rules such that it moves to Stage 2 for impairment calculation purposes. The Groups lending strategy and associated processes may fail to identify or anticipate weaknesses or risks in a particular sector, market or borrower category, or fail to adequately value physical or financial collateral, which may result in an increase in default rates for loans, which may, in turn, impact the Groups profitability. See also, Capital and risk management Credit Risk.
The credit quality of the Groups borrowers and other counterparties is impacted by prevailing economic and market conditions and by the legal and regulatory landscape in the UK and any deterioration in such conditions or changes to legal or regulatory landscapes could worsen borrower and counterparty credit quality and consequently impact the Groups ability to enforce contractual security rights. See also, The Group faces increased political and economic risks and uncertainty in the UK and global markets. In particular, developments relating to Brexit, or the consequences thereof, may adversely impact credit quality in the UK, and the resulting negative economic outlook could drive an increased level of credit impairments reflecting the more forward-looking nature of IFRS 9.
Within the UK, the level of household indebtedness remains high although the pace of credit growth has slowed during 2018. The ability of such households to service their debts could be challenged by a period of high unemployment or increased interest rates. In particular, the Group may be affected by volatility in property prices both in the residential and commercial sectors (including as a result of Brexit) given that the Groups mortgage loan portfolio as at 31 December 2018, amounted to £165.1 billion, representing 52% of the Groups total customer loan exposure. If property prices were to weaken this could lead to higher impairment charges, particularly if default rates consequently increase. In addition, the Groups credit risk may be exacerbated if the collateral that it holds cannot be realised as a result of market conditions or regulatory intervention or if it is liquidated at prices not sufficient to recover the full amount of the loan or derivative exposure that is due to the Group. This is most likely to occur during periods of illiquidity or depressed asset valuations.
Concerns about, or a default by, a financial institution could lead to significant liquidity problems and losses or defaults by other financial institutions, since the commercial and financial soundness of many financial institutions is closely related and inter-dependent as a result of credit, trading, clearing and other relationships among these financial institutions. Any perceived lack of creditworthiness of a counterparty may lead to market-wide liquidity problems and losses for the Group. This systemic risk may also adversely affect financial intermediaries, such as clearing agencies, clearing houses, banks, securities firms and exchanges with which the Group interacts on a daily basis. See also, The Group may not be able to adequately access sources of liquidity and funding.
As a result, borrower and counterparty credit quality may cause accelerated impairment charges under IFRS 9, increased repurchase demands, higher costs, additional write-downs and losses for the Group and an inability to engage in routine funding transactions, which would have a material adverse effect on the Groups financial condition, results of operations and prospects.
The Group may not meet the prudential regulatory requirements for capital and MREL, or manage its capital effectively, which could trigger certain management actions or recovery options.
The Group is required by regulators in the UK, the EU and other jurisdictions in which it undertakes regulated activities to maintain adequate financial resources. Adequate capital also gives the Group financial flexibility in the face of turbulence and uncertainty in the global economy and specifically in its core UK and European markets, as well as permitting the Group to make discretionary capital distributions to shareholders.
As at 31 December 2018, the Groups CET1 ratio was 16.2% and the Group currently targets to maintain its CET1 ratio at circa 14% over the medium term. The Groups target capital ratio is based on a combination of its expected regulatory requirements and internal modelling, including stress scenarios and managements and/or the PRAs views on appropriate buffers above minimum operating levels.
The Groups current capital strategy is based on: the expected accumulation of additional capital through the accrual of profits over time; the planned reduction of its RWAs through disposals and natural attrition; capital management initiatives which focus on improving capital efficiency through improved data and releasing excess capital trapped in Group subsidiaries; and discretionary capital distributions.
A number of factors may impact the Groups ability to maintain its current CET1 ratio target and achieve its capital strategy. These include, amongst other things:
· a depletion of its capital resources through increased costs or liabilities, reduced profits or losses (including as a result of extreme one-off incidents such as cyber, fraud or conduct issues) or, sustained periods of low or lower interest rates, reduced asset values resulting in write-downs, impairments, changes in accounting policy, accounting charges or foreign exchange movements;
· a failure to reduce RWAs in accordance within the timeline contemplated by the Groups capital plan;
· an increase in the quantum of RWAs in excess of that expected, including due to regulatory changes;
· changes in prudential regulatory requirements including the Groups Total Capital Requirement set by the PRA, including Pillar 2 requirements and regulatory buffers, as well as any applicable scalars; and
· double leverage and reduced upstreaming of dividends from the Groups subsidiaries as a result of the Bank of Englands and/or the Groups evolving views on distribution of capital within groups and the financial performance and condition of the Groups subsidiaries.
A shortage of capital could in turn affect the Groups capital ratio, and/or ability to make capital distributions.
In addition to regulatory capital, RBSG is required to maintain a set quantum of MREL set as a percentage of its RWAs. MREL comprises loss-absorbing senior funding and regulatory capital instruments. The Bank of
Risk factors
England has identified single point-of-entry as the preferred resolution strategy for the Group. As a result, RBSG is the only Group entity that can externally issue securities that count towards the Groups MREL requirements, the proceeds of which can then be downstreamed to meet the internal MREL issuance requirements of its operating entities and intermediate holding companies as required. The inability of the Group to reduce its RWAs in line with assumptions in its funding plans could result in failure to meet its MREL requirements.
If the Group is unable to raise the requisite amount of regulatory capital or MREL, downstream the proceeds of MREL to subsidiaries, as required, in the form of internal MREL, or to otherwise meet its regulatory capital, MREL and leverage requirements, it may be exposed to increased regulatory supervision or sanctions, loss of investor confidence and constrained or more expensive funding and be unable to make dividend payments on its ordinary shares or maintain discretionary payments on capital instruments.
If, under a stress scenario, the level of capital or MREL falls outside of risk appetite, there are a range of recovery management actions (focussed on risk reduction and mitigation) that the Group could take to manage its capital levels, which may not be sufficient to restore adequate capital levels. Under the EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Framework (BRRD), as implemented in the UK, a breach of the Groups applicable capital or leverage requirements may trigger the application of the Groups recovery plan to remediate a deficient capital position. The Groups regulator may request that the Group carry out certain capital management actions or, if the Groups CET1 ratio falls below 7%, certain regulatory capital instruments issued by the Group will be written-down or converted into equity and there may be an issue of additional equity by the Group, which could result in the dilution of the Groups existing shareholders. The success of such issuances will also be dependent on favourable market conditions and the Group may not be able to raise the amount of capital required on acceptable terms or at all. Separately, the Group may address a shortage of capital by taking action to reduce leverage exposure and/or RWAs via asset or business disposals. Such actions may, in turn, affect, among other things, the Groups product offering, credit ratings, ability to operate its businesses, pursue its current strategies and pursue strategic opportunities, any of which may have a material adverse effect on the underlying profitability of the Group and future growth potential. See also, The Group may become subject to the application of UK statutory stabilisation or resolution powers which may result in, among other actions, the write-down or conversion of certain of the Groups securities, including its ordinary shares.
The Group may not be able to adequately access sources of liquidity and funding.
The Group is required to access sources of liquidity and funding through retail and wholesale deposits, as well as through the debt capital markets. As at 31 December 2018, the Group held £384 billion in deposits. The level of deposits may fluctuate due to factors outside the Groups control, such as a loss of confidence (including in individual Group entities), increasing competitive pressures for retail customer deposits or the reduction or cessation of deposits by foreign wholesale depositors, which could result in a significant outflow of deposits within a short period of time. See also, The Group has significant exposure to counterparty and borrower risk. An inability to grow, or any material decrease in, the Groups deposits could, particularly if accompanied by one of the other factors described above, materially affect the Groups ability to satisfy its liquidity needs.
As at 31 December 2018, the Groups liquidity coverage ratio was 158%. If its liquidity position were to come under stress, and if the Group is unable to raise funds through deposits or in the debt capital markets on acceptable terms or at all, its liquidity position could be adversely affected and it might be unable to meet deposit withdrawals on demand or at their contractual maturity, to repay borrowings as they mature, to meet its obligations under committed financing facilities, to comply with regulatory funding requirements, to undertake certain capital and/or debt management activities, or to fund new loans, investments and businesses. The Group may need to liquidate unencumbered assets to meet its liabilities, including disposals of assets not previously identified for disposal to reduce its funding commitments. In a time of reduced liquidity, the Group may be unable to sell some of its assets, or may need to sell assets at depressed prices, which in either case could have a material adverse effect on the Groups financial condition and results of operations.
Any reduction in the credit rating assigned to RBSG, any of its subsidiaries or any of its respective debt securities could adversely affect the availability of funding for the Group, reduce the Groups liquidity position and increase the cost of funding.
Rating agencies regularly review the RBSG and Group entity credit ratings, which could be negatively affected by a number of factors, including political and regulatory developments, changes in rating methodologies, changes in the relative size of the loss-absorbing buffers protecting bondholders and depositors, a challenging macroeconomic environment, the impact of Brexit, a potential second Scottish independence referendum, further reductions of the UKs sovereign credit rating, market uncertainty and the inability of the Group to produce sustained profits.
Any reductions in the credit ratings of RBSG or of certain Group entities (for example, NWM Plc), including in particular downgrades below investment grade, may affect the Groups access to money markets, reduce the size of its deposit base and trigger additional collateral or other requirements in derivatives contracts and other secured funding arrangements or the need to amend such arrangements which could adversely affect the Groups cost of funding, its access to capital markets and its capital instruments and could limit the range of counterparties willing to enter into transactions with the Group and therefore also adversely impact its competitive position, any of which could have a material adverse impact on the Groups earnings, cash flow and financial condition.
The Group may be adversely affected if it fails to meet the requirements of regulatory stress tests.
The Group is subject to annual stress tests by its regulator in the UK and is also subject to stress tests by European regulators with respect to RBSG, NWM N.V. and Ulster Bank Ireland DAC. Stress tests are designed to assess the resilience of banks to potential adverse economic or financial developments and ensure that they have robust, forward-looking capital planning processes that account for the risks associated with their business profile. If the stress tests reveal that a banks existing regulatory capital buffers are not sufficient to absorb the impact of the stress, then it is possible that the bank will need to take action to strengthen its capital position.
Failure by the Group to meet the quantitative and qualitative requirements of the stress tests carried out by its regulators in the UK and elsewhere may result in the Groups regulators requiring the Group to generate additional capital, reputational damage, increased supervision and/or regulatory sanctions, restrictions on capital distributions and loss of investor confidence, which may have a material adverse impact on the Groups financial condition, results of operations and prospects.
The Group could incur losses or be required to maintain higher levels of capital as a result of limitations or failure of various models.
Given the complexity of the Groups business, strategy and capital requirements, the Group relies on analytical models for a wide range of purposes, including to manage its business, assess the value of its assets and its risk exposure, as well as to anticipate capital and funding requirements (including to facilitate the Groups mandated stress testing). In addition, the Group utilises models for valuations, credit approvals, calculation of loan impairment charges on an IFRS 9 basis, financial reporting and for financial crime and fraud risk management. The Groups models, and the parameters and assumptions on which they are based, are periodically reviewed and updated to maximise their accuracy.
Such models are inherently designed to be predictive in nature. Failure of these models, including due to errors in model design or inputs, to accurately reflect changes in the micro and macroeconomic environment in which the Group operates, to capture risks and exposures at the subsidiary level, to be updated in line with the Groups current business model or operations, or findings of
Risk factors
deficiencies by the Groups regulators (including as part of the Groups mandated stress testing) may result in increased capital requirements or require management action. The Group may also face adverse consequences as a result of actions by management based on models that are poorly developed, implemented or used, models that are based on inaccurate or compromised data or as a result of the modelled outcome being misunderstood, or by such information being used for purposes for which it was not designed. Risks arising from the use of models could have a material adverse effect on the Groups business, financial condition and results of operations, minimum capital requirements and reputation.
The Groups financial statements are sensitive to the underlying accounting policies, judgements, estimates and assumptions.
The preparation of financial statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income, expenses, exposures and RWAs. Due to the inherent uncertainty in making estimates (particularly those involving the use of complex models), future results may differ from those estimates. Estimates, judgements, assumptions and models take into account historical experience and other factors, including market practice and expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances.
The accounting policies deemed critical to the Groups results and financial position, based upon materiality and significant judgements and estimates, which include loan impairment provisions, are set out in Critical accounting policies and key sources of estimation uncertainty on page 190. New accounting standards and interpretations that have been issued by the International Accounting Standards Board but which have not yet been adopted by the Group are discussed in Accounting developments on page 190. Changes resulting from such new accounting standards and interpretations could have a material adverse effect on the Groups earnings, financial condition and capital position.
Changes in accounting standards may materially impact the Groups financial results.
Changes in accounting standards or guidance by accounting bodies or in the timing of their implementation, whether immediate or foreseeable, could result in the Group having to recognise additional liabilities on its balance sheet, or in further write-downs or impairments and could also significantly impact the financial results, condition and prospects of the Group.
In January 2018, a new accounting standard for financial instruments (IFRS 9) became effective, which introduced impairment based on expected credit losses, rather than the incurred loss model previously applied under IAS 39. The Group expects IFRS 9 to create earnings and capital volatility, and the Group took a £101 million impairment charge at 30 September 2018, reflecting the more uncertain economic outlook.
The valuation of financial instruments, including derivatives, measured at fair value can be subjective, in particular where models are used which include unobservable inputs. Generally, to establish the fair value of these instruments, the Group relies on quoted market prices or, where the market for a financial instrument is not sufficiently credible, internal valuation models that utilise observable market data. In certain circumstances, the data for individual financial instruments or classes of financial instruments utilised by such valuation models may not be available or may become unavailable due to prevailing market conditions. In such circumstances, the Groups internal valuation models require the Group to make assumptions, judgements and estimates to establish fair value, which are complex and often relate to matters that are inherently uncertain.
The Group will adopt IFRS 16 Leases with effect from 1 January 2019 as disclosed in the Accounting Policies. This is expected to increase Other assets by £1.3 billion and Other liabilities by £1.9 billion. While adoption of this standard has no effect on the Groups cash flows, it will impact financial ratios which may influence investors perception of the financial condition of the Group.
The value or effectiveness of any credit protection that the Group has purchased depends on the value of the underlying assets and the financial condition of the insurers and counterparties.
The Group has some remaining credit exposure arising from over-the-counter derivative contracts, mainly credit default swaps (CDSs), and other credit derivatives, each of which are carried at fair value. The fair value of these CDSs, as well as the Groups exposure to the risk of default by the underlying counterparties, depends on the valuation and the perceived credit risk of the instrument against which protection has been bought. Many market counterparties have been adversely affected by their exposure to residential mortgage-linked and corporate credit products, whether synthetic or otherwise, and their actual and perceived creditworthiness may deteriorate rapidly. If the financial condition of these counterparties or their actual or perceived creditworthiness deteriorates, the Group may record further credit valuation adjustments on the credit protection bought from these counterparties under the CDSs. The Group also recognises any fluctuations in the fair value of other credit derivatives. Any such adjustments or fair value changes may have a material adverse effect on the Groups earnings, financial condition and capital position.
The Groups results could be adversely affected if an event triggers the recognition of a goodwill impairment.
The Group capitalises goodwill, which is calculated as the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the net fair value of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities acquired. Acquired goodwill is recognised at cost less any accumulated impairment losses. As required by IFRS, the Group tests goodwill for impairment at least annually, or more frequently when events or circumstances indicate that it might be impaired.
An impairment test compares the recoverable amount (the higher of the value in use and fair value less cost to sell) of an individual cash generating unit with its carrying value. At 31 December 2018, the Group carried goodwill of £5.6 billion on its balance sheet. The value in use and fair value of the Groups cash-generating units are affected by market conditions and the economies in which the Group operates.
Where the Group is required to recognise a goodwill impairment, it is recorded in the Groups income statement, but it has no effect on the Groups regulatory capital position. Further impairments of the Groups goodwill could have an adverse effect on the Groups results and financial condition.
The Group may become subject to the application of UK statutory stabilisation or resolution powers which may result in, among other actions, the write-down or conversion of certain of the Groups securities, including its ordinary shares.
The Banking Act 2009, as amended (Banking Act), implements the BRRD in the UK and creates a special resolution regime (SRR). Under the SRR, HM Treasury, the Bank of England and the PRA and FCA (together Authorities) are granted substantial powers to resolve and stabilise UK-incorporated financial institutions. Five stabilisation options exist under the current SRR: (i) transfer of all of the business of a relevant entity or the shares of the relevant entity to a private sector purchaser; (ii) transfer of all or part of the business of the relevant entity to a bridge bank wholly-owned by the Bank of England; (iii) transfer of part of the assets, rights or liabilities of the relevant entity to one or more asset management vehicles for management of the transferors assets, rights or liabilities; (iv) the write-down, conversion, transfer, modification, or suspension of the relevant entitys equity, capital instruments and liabilities; and (v) temporary public ownership of the relevant entity. These tools may be applied to RBSG as the parent company or an affiliate where certain conditions are met (such as, whether the firm is failing or likely to fail, or whether it is reasonably likely that action will be taken (outside of resolution) that will result in the firm no longer failing or being likely to fail). Moreover, the SRR provides for modified insolvency and administration procedures for relevant entities, and confers ancillary powers on the Authorities, including the power to modify or override certain contractual arrangements in certain circumstances. The Authorities are also empowered by order to amend the law for the purpose of enabling the powers under the SRR to be used effectively. Such orders may promulgate provisions with retrospective applicability.
Risk factors
Under the Banking Act, the Authorities are generally required to have regard to specified objectives in exercising the powers provided for by the Banking Act. One of the objectives (which is required to be balanced as appropriate with the other specified objectives) refers to the protection and enhancement of the stability of the financial system of the UK. Moreover, the no creditor worse off safeguard contained in the Banking Act may not apply in relation to an application of the separate write-down and conversion power relating to capital instruments under the Banking Act, in circumstances where a stabilisation power is not also used; holders of debt instruments which are subject to the power may, however, have ordinary shares transferred to or issued to them by way of compensation.
Uncertainty exists as to how the Authorities may exercise the powers granted to them under the Banking Act. In addition, the determination that ordinary shares, securities and other obligations issued by the Group may be subject to write-down, conversion or bail-in (as applicable) is unpredictable and may depend on factors outside of the Groups control. Moreover, the relevant provisions of the Banking Act remain untested in practice. However, if the Group is at or is approaching the point of non-viability such that regulatory intervention is required, any exercise of the resolution regime powers by the Authorities may adversely affect holders of RBSGs ordinary shares or other Group securities that fall within the scope of bail-in powers. This may result in various actions being undertaken in relation to the Group and any securities of the Group, including the write-down or conversion of certain of the Groups securities. There would also be a corresponding material adverse effect on the market price of such securities.
Legal, regulatory and conduct risk
The Groups businesses are subject to substantial regulation and oversight, which are constantly evolving and may adversely affect the Group.
The Group is subject to extensive laws, regulations, corporate governance practice and disclosure requirements, administrative actions and policies in each jurisdiction in which it operates. Many of these have been introduced or amended recently and are subject to further material changes, which may increase compliance and conduct risks. The Group expects government and regulatory intervention in the financial services industry to remain high for the foreseeable future.
In recent years, regulators and governments have focussed on reforming the prudential regulation of the financial services industry and the manner in which the business of financial services is conducted. Among others, measures have included: enhanced capital, liquidity and funding requirements, implementation of the UK ring-fencing regime, implementation and strengthening of the recovery and resolution framework applicable to financial institutions in the UK, the EU and the US, financial industry reforms (including in respect of MiFID II), enhanced data privacy and IT resilience requirements, enhanced regulations in respect of the provision of investment services and activities, and increased regulatory focus in certain areas, including conduct, consumer protection regimes, anti-money laundering, anti-bribery, anti-tax evasion, payment systems, sanctions and anti-terrorism laws and regulations. This has resulted in the Group facing greater regulation and scrutiny in the UK, the US and other countries in which it operates.
Recent regulatory changes, proposed or future developments and heightened levels of public and regulatory scrutiny in the UK, Europe and the US have resulted in increased capital, funding and liquidity requirements, changes in the competitive landscape, changes in other regulatory requirements and increased operating costs, and have impacted, and will continue to impact, product offerings and business models.
In particular, the Group is required to comply with regulatory requirements in respect of the implementation of the UK ring-fencing regime and to ensure operational continuity in resolution; the steps required to ensure such compliance entail significant costs, and also impose significant operational, legal and execution risk. Serious consequences could arise should the Group be found to be non-compliant with such regulatory requirements. Such changes may also result in an increased number of regulatory investigations and proceedings and have increased the risks relating to the Groups ability to comply with the applicable body of rules and regulations in the manner and within the time frames required.
Any of these developments (including any failure to comply with new rules and regulations) could have a significant impact on the Groups authorisations and licenses, the products and services that the Group may offer, its reputation and the value of its assets, the Groups operations or legal entity structure, and the manner in which the Group conducts its business. Areas in which, and examples of where, governmental policies, regulatory and accounting changes and increased public and regulatory scrutiny could have an adverse impact (some of which could be material) on the Group include, but are not limited to, those set out above as well as the following:
· general changes in government, central bank, regulatory or competition policy, or changes in regulatory regimes that may influence investor decisions in the markets in which the Group operates;
· amendments to the framework or requirements relating to the quality and quantity of regulatory capital to be held by the Group as well as liquidity and leverage requirements, either on a solo, consolidated or subgroup level;
· changes to the design and implementation of national or supranational mandated recovery, resolution or insolvency regimes or the implementation of additional or conflicting loss-absorption requirements, including those mandated under UK rules, the BRRD, MREL or by the Financial Stability Boards (FSB) recommendations on total loss-absorbing capacity (TLAC);
· additional rules and regulatory initiatives and review relating to customer protection and resolution of disputes and complaints, including increased focus by regulators (including the Financial Ombudsman Service) on how institutions conduct business, particularly with regard to the delivery of fair outcomes for customers and orderly/transparent markets;
· rules and regulations relating to, and enforcement of, anti-corruption, anti-bribery, anti-money laundering, anti-terrorism, sanctions, anti-tax evasion or other similar regimes;
· the imposition of additional restrictions on the Groups ability to compensate its senior management and other employees and increased responsibility and liability rules applicable to senior and key employees;
· rules relating to foreign ownership, expropriation, nationalisation and confiscation of assets;
· changes to corporate governance practice and disclosure requirements, senior manager responsibility, corporate structures and conduct of business rules;
· financial market infrastructure reforms establishing new rules applying to investment services, short selling, market abuse, derivatives markets and investment funds;
· increased attention to the protection and resilience of, and competition and innovation in, UK payment systems and developments relating to the UK initiative on Open Banking and the European directive on payment services;
· new or increased regulations relating to customer data and privacy protection as well as IT controls and resilience, including the GDPR;
· the introduction of, and changes to, taxes, levies or fees applicable to the Groups operations, such as the imposition of a financial transaction tax, changes in tax rates, changes in the scope and administration of the Bank Levy, increases in the bank corporation tax surcharge in the UK, restrictions on the tax deductibility of interest payments or further restrictions imposed on the treatment of carry-forward tax losses that reduce the value of deferred tax assets and require increased payments of tax;
· laws and regulations in respect of climate change and sustainable finance (including ESG) considerations; and
· other requirements or policies affecting the Group and its profitability or product offering, including through the imposition of increased compliance obligations or obligations which may lead to restrictions on business growth, product offerings, or pricing.
Risk factors
Changes in laws, rules or regulations, or in their interpretation or enforcement, or the implementation of new laws, rules or regulations, including contradictory or conflicting laws, rules or regulations by key regulators or policymakers in different jurisdictions, or failure by the Group to comply with such laws, rules and regulations, may have a material adverse effect on the Groups business, financial condition and results of operations. In addition, uncertainty and insufficient international regulatory coordination as enhanced supervisory standards are developed and implemented may adversely affect the Groups ability to engage in effective business, capital and risk management planning.
The Group is subject to a number of legal, regulatory and governmental actions and investigations including conduct-related reviews and redress projects, the outcomes of which are inherently difficult to predict, and which could have an adverse effect on the Group.
The Groups operations are diverse and complex and it operates in legal and regulatory environments that expose it to potentially significant legal proceedings, and civil and criminal regulatory and governmental actions. The Group has settled a number of legal and regulatory actions over the past several years but continues to be, and may in the future be, involved in such actions in the US, the UK, Europe and other jurisdictions.
The legal and regulatory actions specifically referred to below are, in the Groups view, the most significant legal and regulatory actions to which the Group is currently exposed. However, the Group is also subject to a number of ongoing reviews, investigations and proceedings (both formal and informal) by governmental law enforcement and other agencies and litigation proceedings, the adverse resolution of which may have a material adverse impact on the Group. These relate to, among other matters, the offering of securities, conduct in the foreign exchange market, the setting of benchmark rates such as LIBOR and related derivatives trading, the issuance, underwriting, and sales and trading of fixed-income securities (including government securities), product mis-selling, customer mistreatment, anti-money laundering, antitrust and various other compliance issues. Legal and regulatory actions are subject to many uncertainties, and their outcomes, including the timing, amount of fines or settlements or the form of any settlements, which may be material and in excess of any related provisions, are often difficult to predict, particularly in the early stages of a case or investigation, and the Groups expectation for resolution may change.
In particular, the Group has for a number of years been involved in conduct-related reviews and redress projects, including a review of certain historic customer connections in its former Global Restructuring Group (GRG), management of claims arising from historic sales of payment protection insurance, and a review of tracker mortgage products in the Republic of Ireland. In relation to the GRG review, the Group established a complaints process in November 2016, overseen by an independent third party. The complaints process closed on 22 October 2018 for new complaints in the UK and, with the exception of a small cohort of potential complainants for whom there is an extended deadline, on 31 December 2018 for new complaints in the Republic of Ireland. An additional provision of £50 million was taken in Q4 2018, reflecting greater than predicted complaints volumes in the week leading up to the closure of the complaints process. In addition, the Group continues to handle claims in relation to historic sales of payment protection insurance and took additional provisions of £200 million in Q3 2018, reflecting increased complaint volumes as the complaint deadline of 31 August 2019 approaches. In the Republic of Ireland, UBI DAC, remains engaged in a review of the treatment of customers who have been sold mortgages with a tracker interest rate or with a tracker interest rate entitlement. A redress and compensation exercise is ongoing in respect of this matter. See also, Litigation, investigations and reviews of Note 27 on the consolidated accounts for details of these matters. The Group has dedicated resources in place to manage claims and complaints relating to the above and other conduct-related matters. Provisions taken in respect of such matters include the costs involved in administering the various complaints processes. Any failure to administer such processes adequately, or to handle individual complaints fairly or appropriately, could result in further claims as well as the imposition of additional measures or limitations on the Groups operations, additional supervision by the Groups regulators, and loss of investor confidence.
Adverse outcomes or resolution of current or future legal or regulatory actions, including conduct-related reviews or redress projects, could result in restrictions or limitations on the Groups operations, and could adversely impact the Groups capital position or its ability to meet regulatory capital adequacy requirements. Failure to comply with undertakings made by the Group to its regulators may result in additional measures or penalties being taken against the Group.
The Group may not effectively manage the transition of LIBOR and other IBOR rates to alternative risk free rates.
UK and international regulators are driving a transition from the use of interbank offer rates (IBORs), including LIBOR, to alternative risk free rates (RFRs). In the UK, the FCA has asserted that they will not compel LIBOR submissions beyond 2021, thereby jeopardising its continued availability, and have strongly urged market participants to transition to RFRs, as has the CFTC and other regulators in the United States. The Group has significant exposure to IBORs primarily on its derivatives, commercial lending and legacy securities. Until there is market acceptance on the form of alternative RFRs for different products, the legal mechanisms to effect transition cannot be confirmed, and the impact cannot be determined nor any associated costs accounted for. The transition and uncertainties around the timing and manner of transition to RFRs represent a number of risks for the Group, its customers and the financial services industry more widely. These include risks related to: legal risks (as changes may be required to documentation for new or existing transactions); financial risks (which may arise from any changes in valuation of financial instruments linked to benchmarks rates and may impact the Groups cost of funds and its risk management related financial models); pricing risks (such as changes to benchmark rates could impact pricing mechanisms on certain instruments); operational risks (due to the potential requirement to adapt IT systems, trade reporting infrastructure and operational processes); and conduct risks (which may relate to communication regarding the potential impact on customers, and engagement with customers during the transition period).
It is therefore currently difficult to determine to what extent the changes will affect the Group, or the costs of implementing any relevant remedial action. Uncertainty as to the nature of such potential changes, alternative reference rates or other reforms and as to the continuation of LIBOR or EURIBOR may adversely affect financial instruments using LIBOR or EURIBOR as benchmarks. The implementation of any alternative RFRs may be impossible or impracticable under the existing terms of such financial instruments and could have an adverse effect on the value of, return on and trading market for such financial instruments
The Group operates in markets that are subject to intense scrutiny by the competition authorities.
There is significant oversight by competition authorities of the markets which the Group operates in. The competitive landscape for banks and other financial institutions in the UK, the rest of Europe and the US is rapidly changing. Recent regulatory and legal changes have and may continue to result in new market participants and changed competitive dynamics in certain key areas, such as in retail and SME banking in the UK where the introduction of new entrants is being actively encouraged by the UK Government.
The UK retail banking sector has been subjected to intense scrutiny by the UK competition authorities and by other bodies, including the FCA and the Financial Ombudsman Service, in recent years, including with a number of reviews/inquiries being carried out, including market reviews conducted by the CMA and its predecessor the Office of Fair Trading regarding SME banking and personal banking products and services, the Independent Commission on Banking and the Parliamentary Commission on Banking Standards.
These reviews raised significant concerns about the effectiveness of competition in the retail banking sector. The CMAs Retail Banking Market Order 2017 imposes remedies primarily intended to make it easier for consumers and businesses to compare
Risk factors
personal current account (PCA) and SME bank products, increase the transparency of price comparison between banks and amend PCA overdraft charging. These remedies impose additional compliance requirements on the Group and could, in aggregate, adversely impact the Groups competitive position, product offering and revenues.
Adverse findings resulting from current or future competition investigations may result in the imposition of reforms or remedies which may impact the competitive landscape in which the Group operates or result in restrictions on mergers and consolidations within the financial sector, resulting in a material adverse effect on the Groups business, margins, profitability, financial condition and prospects.
The cost of implementing the Alternative Remedies Package could be more onerous than anticipated.
In connection with the implementation of the Alternative Remedies Package (regarding the business previously described as Williams & Glyn), an independent body (Independent Body) has been established to administer the Alternative Remedies Package. The implementation of the Alternative Remedies Package has involved costs for the Group, including but not limited to the funding commitments of £425 million for the Capability and Innovation Fund and £350 million for the incentivised switching scheme, both being administered by the Independent Body. Implementation of the Alternative Remedies Package may involve additional costs for the Group and may also divert resources from the Groups operations and jeopardise the delivery and implementation of other significant plans and initiatives. In addition, under the terms of the Alternative Remedies Package, the Independent Body may require the Group to modify certain aspects of the Groups execution of the incentivised switching scheme, which could increase the cost of implementation. Furthermore, should the uptake within the incentivised switching scheme not be sufficient, the Independent Body has the ability to extend the duration of the scheme by up to twelve months, impose penalties of up to £50 million, and can compel the Group to extend the customer base to which the scheme applies which may result in prolonged periods of disruption to a wider portion of the Groups business.
As a direct consequence of the incentivised switching scheme (which comprises part of the Alternative Remedies Package), the Group will lose existing customers and deposits, which in turn will have adverse impacts on the Groups business and associated revenues and margins. Furthermore, the capability and innovation fund (which also comprises part of the Alternative Remedies Package) is intended to benefit eligible competitors and negatively impact the Groups competitive position. To support the incentivised switching initiative, upon request by an eligible bank, the Group has agreed to grant those customers which have switched to eligible banks under the incentivised switching scheme access to its branch network for cash and cheque handling services, which may impact customer service quality for the Groups own customers with consequent competitive, financial and reputational implications. The implementation of the incentivised switching scheme is also dependent on the engagement of the eligible banks with the incentivised switching scheme and the application of the eligible banks to and approval by the Independent Body. The incentivised transfer of SME customers to third party banks places reliance on those third parties to achieve satisfactory customer outcomes which could give rise to reputational damage to the Group if these are not forthcoming.
A failure to comply with the terms of the Alternative Remedies Package could result in the imposition of additional measures or limitations on the Groups operations, additional supervision by the Groups regulators, and loss of investor confidence, any of which could have a material adverse impact on the Group.
Changes in tax legislation or failure to generate future taxable profits may impact the recoverability of certain deferred tax assets recognised by the Group.
In accordance with IFRS, the Group has recognised deferred tax assets on losses available to relieve future profits from tax only to the extent it is probable that they will be recovered. The deferred tax assets are quantified on the basis of current tax legislation and accounting standards and are subject to change in respect of the future rates of tax or the rules for computing taxable profits and offsetting allowable losses.
Failure to generate sufficient future taxable profits or further changes in tax legislation (including with respect to rates of tax) or accounting standards may reduce the recoverable amount of the recognised tax loss deferred tax assets, amounting to £1.0 billion as at 31 December 2018. Changes to the treatment of certain deferred tax assets may have a material adverse impact on the Groups capital position. In addition, the Groups interpretation or application of relevant tax laws may differ from those of the relevant tax authorities and provisions are made for potential tax liabilities that may arise on the basis of the amounts expected to be paid to tax authorities. The amounts ultimately paid may differ materially from the amounts provided depending on the ultimate resolution of such matters.
Additional Information
Description of property and equipment
RBS operates from a number of locations worldwide, principally in the UK. At 31 December 2018 the Royal Bank and NatWest had 199 and 656 retail branches respectively, in the UK. Ulster Bank has a footprint of 132 branches and a network of business banking offices across Northern Ireland and the Republic of Ireland. A substantial majority of the UK branches are owned by the Royal Bank, NatWest and their subsidiaries or are held under leases with unexpired terms of over 50 years. RBSs principal properties include its headquarters at Gogarburn, Edinburgh, its principal offices in London is 280 Bishopsgate and the Drummond House administration centre located at South Gyle, Edinburgh.
Major shareholders
In December 2008, The Solicitor for the Affairs of Her Majestys Treasury (HMT) acquired 22,854 million ordinary shares of 25p and during 2009 acquired a further 16,791 million ordinary shares of 25p, representing 70.3 % of the companys issued ordinary share capital.
In December 2009, HMT acquired 51 billion B shares in the company, representing the entire issued B share capital. In 2015, HMT sold 630 million of the companys ordinary shares and converted its entire holding of B shares into 5.1 billion new ordinary shares of £1 each. In June 2018 HMT sold a further 925 million of the companys ordinary shares. At 31 December 2018, HMTs holding in the companys ordinary shares was 62.3%. As far as the company is aware, there have been no other significant changes in the percentage ownership of major shareholders of the companys ordinary shares or preference shares during the three years ended 15 February 2019.
Since 1 January 2017, the company has redeemed substantially all of the preference shares that were in issue (refer to Note 19 for further details). All shareholders within a class of the companys shares have the same voting rights.
As at 31 December 2018, almost all of the companys US$ denominated preference shares and American Depository Shares representing ordinary shares were held by shareholders registered in the US. All other shares were predominantly held by shareholders registered outside the US.
Our Code of conduct
The Groups Code of Conduct (Our Code) lets everyone know what to expect of each other, what to do when unsure of a decision, and where to go for advice when needed. It is available at rbs.com>about us>our values, or without charge, and upon request, by contacting Corporate Governance and Regulatory Affairs at the telephone number listed on page 293. In 2016 we incorporated five new standards of behaviour into Our Code: (1) You must act with integrity; (2) You must act with due skill, care and diligence; (3) You must be open and cooperative with the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA), the Prudential Regulatory Authority (PRA) and other regulators; (4) You must pay due regard to the interests of customers and treat them fairly; and (5) You must observe proper standards of market conduct. These conduct rules are part of the changes our UK banking regulators, the PRA and FCA, made to improve accountability across the financial sector as part of the Individual Accountability Regime. The rules are very much in keeping with the values and behaviours that we are already following across the Group.
Additional Information
Iran sanctions and related disclosures
Disclosure pursuant to section 13(r) of the Securities Exchange Act
Section 13(r) of the Securities Exchange Act, added by section 219 of the Iran Threat Reduction and Syria Human Rights Act of 2012, requires an issuer to disclose in its annual or quarterly reports, as applicable, whether, during the period covered by the report, it or any of its affiliates knowingly engaged in specified activities or transactions relating to Iran or with individuals or entities designated under Executive Order 13382 or 13224. Disclosure is required of certain activities conducted outside the United States by non-U.S. entities in compliance with local law, whether or not the activities are sanctionable under U.S. law.
In order to comply with this requirement, the following activities of RBS Groups affiliates are disclosed in response to section 13(r).
Transactions involving Iranian Government owned entities
During 2018 affiliates of RBS Group (RBSG) facilitated 9 payments which were remitted by Iranian Government owned entities and received by RBSG customers (non-designated and located in the United Kingdom) in relation to legal and professional fees).
In addition, there were two outward payments where the beneficiary was an Iranian Government owned entity. The transactions related to refund of an unfulfilled order by an RBSG customer and a payment connected to a UK oil and gas field located in the North Sea.
In 2018 RBSG affiliates also received 32 payments facilitated by entities designated under Executive Order 13599. These transactions were in relation to remittances involving non-Iranian entities.
All the payments described above were processed in full compliance with applicable sanctions and where relevant authorised under applicable licence.
Transactions involving Iranian Government owned entities totalled 43 and resulted in £21,000 of gross revenue to RBSG. Considering the processes in place to undertake such transactions, including enhanced due diligence processes, RBSG has not made any profit from these transactions. RBSG has a restrictive risk appetite in relation to transactions involving Iran. Accordingly, the number of transactions included in this disclosure is lower than included in the 2017 disclosure. RBSG intends to continue to engage in transactions similar to those described in this paragraph as long as such transactions are in compliance with applicable sanctions laws and within RBSGs risk appetite.
RBSG maintains one account for an Iranian Government entity located in the United Kingdom. The purpose of the account is to facilitate domestic transactions for employee salary, rent and operating costs such as UK taxes and utilities. No commercial activity is processed through the account.
Guarantees
Under applicable licenses granted by appropriate authorities, affiliates of RBSG hold three legacy guarantees entered into between 1998 and 2005, which support arrangements lawfully entered into by affiliates of RBSG customers with Iranian counterparties. These legacy guarantees are in favour of Iranian Government owned financial institutions. The affiliates of RBSG have made considerable efforts to exit and formally cancel the guarantees.
In 2018, one existing guarantee earned commission of EUR 96.00, and two additional existing guarantees received no revenue.
Iranian Petroleum Industry
Section 13(r) of the Securities Exchange Act (as amended) requires disclosure of any knowing engagement in activity described in section 5 (a) or (b) of the Iran Sanctions Act, including significant investments in or transactions that could develop the Iranian petroleum or petrochemical sectors. In full compliance with applicable laws an affiliate of RBSG maintained transactional banking facilities on behalf of a UK Company (Non-Iranian Party) in relation to its interest in a joint operating agreement with a company owned and controlled by the Government of Iran relating to a UK oil and gas field located in the North Sea.
Under authorisation from relevant sanctions authorities the Non-Iranian party was able to undertake all transactions and activities pertaining to the operation and production of the UK field, including the sale of gas, oil, condensate, natural gas liquids or other hydrocarbon products produced from the field.
During 2018, affiliates of RBSG also received a number of payments connected to the production, sale and transport of Iranian petroleum or related hydrocarbon products. None of these transactions directly involved Iranian Government owned entities or Iranian Government owned financial institutions. They were all processed on behalf of the Non-Iranian Party. All such payments were made in compliance with applicable sanctions and under license. These transactions form part of those disclosed in the paragraphs above. As already outlined the processes in place to undertake such transactions, including enhanced due diligence processes, means that RBSG has not made any profit from these transactions.
During the course of 2019 it is expected that most of the activity which RBSG currently facilitates connected to the UK oil and gas field located in the North Sea will cease.
Supervision
United Kingdom
The home supervisors for RBS are the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA). As with all significant banking institutions, the PRA is the consolidated supervisor of RBS. The FCAs overall objective is to ensure financial markets function well. This is supported by its operational objectives of: securing an appropriate degree of protection for consumers; protecting and enhancing the integrity of the UK financial system; and promoting effective competition in the interests of consumers.
As at 31 December 2018, 17 companies in RBS, spanning a range of financial services sectors, including banking and investment business, were authorised to conduct financial activities in the UK. The UK authorised banks in RBS are The Royal Bank of Scotland plc (formerly Adam & Company PLC, renamed in 2018) (RBS plc), National Westminster Bank Plc (NatWest Plc), NatWest Markets Plc (NWM Plc), Coutts & Company and Ulster Bank Limited (UBL). Wholesale activities, other than Treasury activities, are concentrated in NatWest Markets Plc. Retail banking activities in England, Scotland and Wales are managed by the Personal Banking and Commercial and Private Banking businesses of RBS plc, NatWest Plc, Coutts & Company and UBL. Note that, along with the other major UK banks, RBS was required by UK law to separate everyday banking from investment banking. This separation (ring-fencing) is designed to make banking safer and more resilient. It is a key component of the UK Governments legislative agenda to improve financial stability. It became law from 1 January 2019, and to prepare for it, RBS made changes to the way the Group is structured during 2018. The banking service in the Republic of Ireland is provided by Ulster Bank Ireland DAC, which is supervised by the Central Bank of Ireland and the European Central Bank under the Single Supervisory Mechanism.
Investment management business is principally undertaken by companies in the Commercial and Private Banking business, including Coutts & Company, Adam & Company Investment Management Limited and RBS Asset Management Limited.
Additional Information
RBS is subject to extensive regulations that impose obligations on financial institutions to maintain appropriate policies, procedures and controls to ensure compliance with the rules and regulations to which they are subject.
United States
RBS conducts business in the US through its investment bank, NatWest Markets (NWM). NWMs regulated entities in the US are: NatWest Markets Plc (NWM Plc); its broker-dealer affiliate, NatWest Markets Securities Inc. (NWMSI); NWMSIs Futures Commission Merchant (FCM); NWM Plcs non-US-based Swap Dealer; and NWM Plcs Connecticut Representative Office. NWM is subject to the supervision of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Federal Reserve) due to an outstanding enforcement action brought against RBS by the Federal Reserve, namely the 2015 FX Cease and Desist Consent Order (the 2011 and 2013 Cease and Desist Consent Orders were lifted earlier in 2018).
In addition, NWMSI is a Primary Dealer of the Federal Reserve, which makes it subject to the supervision of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York (FRB-NY).
NWMSI is subject to the regulations of a number of US securities regulators, mainly the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA), Options Clearing Corporation (OCC), Depository Trust & Clearing Corporation (DTCC), and various state regulators. NWMSIs FCM is mainly subject to the regulations of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC), National Futures Association (NFA), the Chicago Mercantile Exchange Group (CME), and the Intercontinental Exchange (ICE) Futures US.
NWM Plc is a non-FCM clearing member of the CME and is subject to the regulations of the CME and the CFTC. NWM Plc is also a non-US-based provisionally-registered swap dealer and as such it is subject to oversight by the US regulators the CFTC and the NFA.
The NWM Plc Connecticut Representative Office is supervised by the FRB-NY and the Connecticut Department of Banking.
The anti-money laundering, anti-terrorism and economic sanctions regulations are a major focus of the US government for financial institutions and are rigorously enforced by most of the regulators mentioned above and the Financial Crimes Enforcement Network (FinCEN) of US Department of the Treasury.
Other jurisdictions
RBS operates in a number of countries through a network of branches, local banks and non-bank subsidiaries and these activities are subject to supervision in most cases by a local regulator or central bank.
Material Contracts
The company and its subsidiaries are party to various contracts in the ordinary course of business. Material contracts include the following:
B Share Acquisition and Contingent Capital Agreement
On 26 November 2009, the company and HM Treasury entered into the Acquisition and Contingent Capital Agreement pursuant to which HM Treasury subscribed for the initial B shares and the Dividend Access Share (the Acquisitions) and agreed the terms of HM Treasurys contingent subscription (the Contingent Subscription) for an additional £8 billion in aggregate in the form of further B shares (the Contingent B shares), to be issued on the same terms as the initial B shares. The Acquisitions were subject to the satisfaction of various conditions, including the company having obtained the approval of its shareholders in relation to the Acquisitions.
On 16 December 2013, the company announced that, having received approval from the PRA, it had terminated the £8 billion Contingent Subscription. The company was able to cancel the Contingent Subscription as a result of the actions announced in the second half of 2013 to further strengthen its capital position.
On 9 October 2015, the company announced that on 8 October 2015, it had received a valid conversion notice from HM Treasury in respect of all outstanding B shares held by HM Treasury. The new ordinary shares issued on conversion of the B shares were admitted to the official list of the UK Listing Authority (UKLA), and to trading on the London Stock Exchange plc, on 14 October 2015. Following such conversion, HM Treasury no longer holds any B shares.
The company gave certain representations and warranties to HM Treasury on the date of the Acquisition and Contingent Capital Agreement, on the date the circular was posted to shareholders, on the first date on which all of the conditions precedent were satisfied, or waived, and on the date of the Acquisitions. The company also agreed to a number of undertakings.
The company agreed to reimburse HM Treasury for its expenses incurred in connection with the Acquisitions.
For as long as it is a substantial shareholder of the company (within the meaning of the UKLAs Listing Rules), HM Treasury has undertaken not to vote on related party transaction resolutions at general meetings and to direct that its affiliates do not so vote.
Directed Buyback Contract
On 7 February 2019, the company and HM Treasury entered into the Directed Buyback Contract to help facilitate the return of the company to full private ownership through the use of any excess capital to buy back the companys ordinary shares held by HM Treasury.
Under the terms of the Directed Buyback Contract, the company may agree with HM Treasury to make off-market purchases from time to time of its ordinary shares held by HM Treasury, including by way of one or more standalone purchases, through a non-discretionary, broker-managed directed trading programme, or in conjunction with any offer or sale by HM Treasury by way of an institutional placing. Neither the company nor HM Treasury would be under an obligation to agree to make such off-market purchases and would only do so subject to regulatory approval at the time.
The aggregate number of ordinary shares which the company may purchase from HM Treasury under the Directed Buyback Contract will not exceed 4.99 per cent. of the companys issued share capital and the aggregate consideration to be paid will not exceed 4.99 per cent. of the companys market capitalisation. The price to be paid for each ordinary share will be the market price at the time of purchase or, if the directed buyback is in conjunction with an institutional placing, the placing price.
Framework and State Aid Deed
As a result of the State Aid granted to the company, it was required to work with HM Treasury to submit a State Aid restructuring plan to the European Commission (EC), which was then approved by the EC under the State Aid rules on 14 December 2009. The company agreed a series of measures which supplemented the measures in the companys strategic plan.
The company entered into a State Aid Commitment Deed with HM Treasury at the time of the initial EC decision and, following the ECs approval of amendments to the restructuring plan in April 2014, the company entered into a revised State Aid Commitment Deed with HM Treasury. In September 2017, the revised State Aid Commitment Deed was amended by a Deed of Variation (as so amended, the Revised State Aid Commitment Deed) following the ECs approval of an alternative remedies package (the Alternative Remedies Package) to replace the companys final outstanding commitment under its State Aid obligations (to divest the business previously known as Williams & Glyn).
On 25 April 2018, the Revised State Aid Commitment Deed was replaced by the Framework and State Aid Deed between the company, HM Treasury and an independent body established to facilitate and oversee the delivery of the Alternative Remedies Package (the Independent Body). Under the Framework and State Aid Deed, the company agrees to do all acts and things necessary to ensure that HM Treasury is able to comply with its obligations under any EC decision approving State Aid to the company, including under the Alternative Remedies Package.
Pursuant to the Framework and State Aid Deed, the company has committed: (i) £425 million into a fund for eligible bodies in the UK banking and financial technology sectors to develop and improve their capability to compete with the company in the provision of banking services to small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) and develop and improve the financial products and services available to SMEs (the Capability and Innovation Fund); and (ii) £275 million to eligible bodies to help them incentivise SME banking customers within the division of the company previously known as Williams & Glyn to switch their business current accounts and loans to the eligible bodies (the Incentivised Switching Scheme). The company has also agreed to set aside up to a further £75 million in funding to cover certain costs customers may incur as a result of switching under the Incentivised Switching Scheme. In addition, under the terms of the Alternative Remedies Package, should the uptake within the Incentivised Switching Scheme not be sufficient, the company may be required to make a further contribution, capped at £50 million. The Independent Body will distribute funds from the Capability and Innovation Fund and implement the Incentivised Switching Scheme.
Under the Framework and State Aid Deed, the company also agreed to indemnify the Independent Body and HM Treasury, up to an amount of £320 million collectively to cover liabilities that may be incurred in implementing the Alternative Remedies Package. The provisions of the indemnity to the Independent Body are set out in the Framework and State Aid Deed and the provisions of the indemnity to HM Treasury are set out in a separate agreement between the company and HM Treasury, described under Deed of Indemnity below.
The Framework and State Aid Deed also provides that if the EC adopts a decision that the UK Government must recover any State Aid (a Repayment Decision) and the recovery order of the Repayment Decision has not been annulled or suspended by the General Court or the European Court of Justice, then the company must repay HM Treasury any aid ordered to be recovered under the Repayment Decision.
Deed of Indemnity
In the context of the Framework and State Aid Deed, the company entered into a Deed of Indemnity with HM Treasury on 25 April 2018, pursuant to which the company agreed to indemnify HM Treasury to cover liabilities that may be incurred in implementing the Alternative Remedies Package, as described under Framework and State Aid Deed above.
Trust Deed
In the context of the Framework and State Aid Deed, the company entered into a Trust Deed with the Independent Body on 25 April 2018, to set up a trust to administer the funds committed by the company under the Framework and State Aid Deed for the Alternative Remedies Package.
State Aid Costs Reimbursement Deed
Under the 2009 State Aid Costs Reimbursement Deed, the company has agreed to reimburse HM Treasury for fees, costs and expenses associated with the State Aid and State Aid approval.
HMT and UKFI Relationship Deed
On 7 November 2014, in order to comply with an amendment to the UK Listing Rules, the company entered into a Relationship Deed with HM Treasury and UK Financial Investments Limited in relation to the companys obligations under the UK Listing Rules to put in place an agreement with any controlling shareholder (as defined for these purposes in the Listing Rules). The Relationship Deed covers the three independence provisions mandated by the Listing Rules: (i) that contracts between the company and HM Treasury (or any of its subsidiaries) will be arms length and normal commercial arrangements, (ii) that neither HM Treasury nor any of its associates will take any action that would have the effect of preventing the company from complying with its obligations under the Listing Rules; and (iii) neither HM Treasury nor any of its associates will propose or procure the proposal of a shareholder resolution which is intended or appears to be intended to circumvent the proper application of the Listing Rules.
Memorandum of Understanding Relating to The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund
On 16 April 2018 the company entered into a Memorandum of Understanding (the MoU) with the trustee of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund (the Group Fund), which aimed to facilitate both the necessary changes to the Main Section of the Group Fund to align the employing entity structure with the requirements of the UK ring-fencing legislation and acceleration of the settlement framework for the 31 December 2017 triennial valuation of the Main Section of the Group Fund (brought forward from 31 December 2018).
In addition, the MoU also provided clarity on the additional related funding contributions required to be made by the company to the Main Section of the Group Fund as follows: (i) a pre-tax payment of £2 billion that was made in the second half of 2018 and (ii) from 1 January 2020, further pre-tax contributions of up to £1.5 billion in aggregate linked to the making of future distributions to RBS shareholders including ordinary and special dividends and/or share buy backs (subject to an annual cap on contributions of £500 million before tax).
On 28 September 2018, the implementation of the MoU was documented through a Framework Agreement entered into between the company and the trustee of the Group Fund.
Shareholder information
|
Page |
Financial calendar |
280 |
Shareholder enquiries |
280 |
Analysis of ordinary shareholders |
281 |
Trading market |
281 |
Dividend history |
282 |
Taxation for US holders |
283 |
Exchange controls |
285 |
Memorandum and Articles of Association |
285 |
Documents on display |
292 |
Incorporation and registration |
292 |
Important addresses |
293 |
Principal offices |
293 |
Financial calendar
Dividends
Payment dates |
|
Cumulative preference shares |
31 May and 31 December 2019 |
|
|
Non-cumulative preference shares |
29 March, 28 June, |
30 September and | |
|
31 December 2019 |
|
|
Ordinary shares |
30 April 2019 |
|
|
Ex-dividend date |
|
Cumulative preference shares |
2 May and 5 December 2019 |
|
|
Ordinary shares |
21 March 2019 |
|
|
Record date |
|
Cumulative preference shares
Ordinary shares
Annual General Meeting |
3 May and 6 December 2019
22 March 2019
25 April 2019 RBS Conference Centre RBS Gogarburn Edinburgh, EH12 1HQ |
|
|
Interim results |
2 August 2019 |
Shareholder enquiries
You can check your shareholdings in the company by visiting the Shareholder centre section of our website, www.rbs.com and clicking the Managing your shareholding tab. You will need the shareholder reference number printed on your share certificate or tax voucher to access this information.
You can use the website for shareholding and outstanding payment enquiries and to change your address or download forms. You can also sign up to E-Comms and choose to receive an email notification when shareholder communications become available instead of paper communications.
You can also check your shareholding by contacting our Registrar:
Computershare Investor Services PLC
The Pavilions
Bridgwater Road
Bristol BS99 6ZZ
Telephone: +44 (0)370 702 0135
Fax: +44 (0)370 703 6009
Website: www-uk.computershare.com/investor/contactus
Braille and audio Strategic report with additional information
Shareholders requiring a Braille or audio version of the Strategic report with additional information should contact the Registrar on +44 (0)370 702 0135.
ShareGift
The company is aware that shareholders who hold a small number of shares may be retaining these shares because dealing costs make it uneconomical to dispose of them. ShareGift, the charity share donation scheme, is a free service operated by The Orr Mackintosh Foundation (registered charity 1052686) to enable shareholders to donate shares to charity.
If you are a UK taxpayer, donating your shares in this way will not give rise to either a gain or a loss for UK capital gains tax purposes. You may be able to claim UK income tax relief on gifted shares and can do so in various ways. Further information can be obtained from HM Revenue & Customs.
Should you wish to donate your shares to charity please contact ShareGift for further information:
ShareGift, The Orr Mackintosh Foundation
4th Floor Rear, 67/68 Jermyn Street, London SW1Y 6NY
Telephone: +44 (0)20 7930 3737
Website: www.sharegift.org
Share and bond scams
Share and bond scams are often run from boiler rooms where fraudsters cold-call investors, after obtaining their phone number from publicly available shareholder lists, offering them worthless, overpriced or even non-existent shares or bonds.
They use increasingly sophisticated tactics to approach investors, offering to buy or sell shares, often pressuring investors to make a quick decision or miss out on the deal. Contact can also be in the form of email, post or word of mouth. Scams are sometimes advertised in newspapers, magazines or online as genuine investment opportunities and may offer free gifts or discounts on dealing charges.
Scammers will request money upfront, as a bond or other form of security, but victims are often left out of pocket, sometimes losing their savings or even their family home. Even seasoned investors have been caught out by scams.
Clone firms
A clone firm uses the name, firm registration number (FRN) and address of a firm or individual who is FCA authorised. The scammer may claim that the genuine firms contact details on the FCA Register (Register) are out of date and then use their own details, or copy the website of an authorised firm, making subtle changes such as the phone number. They may claim to be an overseas firm, which wont always have full contact and website details listed on the Register.
How to protect yourself
Always be wary if youre contacted out of the blue, pressured to invest quickly, or promised returns that sound too good to be true. FCA authorised firms are unlikely to contact you unexpectedly with an offer to buy or sell shares or bonds.
Check the Register to ensure the firm contacting you is authorised and also check the FCAs Warning List of firms to avoid.
Ask for their (FRN) and contact details and then contact them using the telephone number on the Register. Never use a link in an email or website from the firm offering you an investment.
It is strongly advised that you seek independent professional advice before making any investment.
Report a scam
If you suspect that you have been approached by fraudsters, or have any concerns about a potential scam, report this to the FCA by contacting their Consumer Helpline on 0800 111 6768 or by using their reporting form which can be found at www.fca.org.uk/consumers/report-scam-unauthorised-firm
If you have already invested in a scam, fraudsters are likely to target you again or sell your details to other criminals. The follow-up scam may be completely separate, or may be related to the previous scam in the form of an offer to get your money back or buy back the investment on payment of a fee.
Find out more at www.fca.org.uk/scamsmart
Shareholder information
Analysis of ordinary shareholders |
|
|
|
|
|
Number |
|
|
|
of shares |
|
At 31 December 2018 |
Shareholdings |
- millions |
% |
Individuals |
180,212 |
100.9 |
0.8 |
Banks and nominee companies |
5,103 |
11,899.8 |
98.8 |
Investment trusts |
54 |
1.1 |
- |
Insurance companies |
2 |
0.4 |
|
Other companies |
487 |
25.7 |
0.2 |
Pension trusts |
22 |
0.2 |
|
Other corporate bodies |
64 |
20.5 |
0.2 |
|
185,944 |
12,048.6 |
100.0 |
|
|
|
|
Range of shareholdings: |
|
|
|
1 - 1,000 |
160,931 |
39.2 |
0.3 |
1,001 - 10,000 |
23,294 |
53.0 |
0.5 |
10,001 - 100,000 |
967 |
28.4 |
0.2 |
100,001 - 1,000,000 |
473 |
172.3 |
1.4 |
1,000,001 - 10,000,000 |
214 |
735.9 |
6.1 |
10,000,001 and over |
65 |
11,019.8 |
91.5 |
|
185,944 |
12,048.6 |
100.0 |
Trading market
Non-cumulative dollar preference shares
The following series of American Depositary shares (ADSs) representing non-cumulative preference shares issued in the US were outstanding at 31 December 2018:
Date of issue |
Series of ADS |
Number of ADSs/non-cumulative preference shares in issue |
Number of registered holders |
4 October 2007 |
U |
10,130 |
1 |
The ADSs set out above represents the right to receive one corresponding preference share, and is evidenced by an American Depository Receipt (ADR) and is listed on the New York Stock Exchange, a subsidiary of NYSE Euronext (NYSE).
The ADRs evidencing the ADSs above were issued pursuant to Deposit Agreements, among the company, The Bank of New York, as depository, and all holders from time-to-time of ADRs issued thereunder. Currently, there is no non-United States trading market for any of the non-cumulative dollar preference shares. All of the non-cumulative dollar preference shares are held by the depository, as custodian, in registered form.
In December 2018, the company redeemed in whole the Series S non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01.
PROs
In August 2001, the company issued US$1.2 billion perpetual regulatory tier one securities (PROs) which are listed on the NYSE.
ADSs representing ordinary shares
In October 2007, the company listed ADSs, each representing one ordinary share nominal value 25p each (or a right to receive one ordinary share), and evidenced by an ADR or uncertificated securities, on the NYSE under the symbol RBS. With effect from 7 November 2008, the ratio of one ADS representing one ordinary share changed to one ADS representing 20 ordinary shares.
Following a sub-division and one-for-ten consolidation of RBSs ordinary shares in June 2012, the ratio of one ADS representing 20 ordinary shares was adjusted to one ADS representing two ordinary shares. As at 31 December 2018, 53.5 million ordinary ADSs were outstanding.
The ordinary ADSs were issued pursuant to a Deposit Agreement, among the company, The Bank of New York Mellon, as depository, and all owners and holders from time to time of ordinary ADSs issued thereunder. The ordinary shares of the company are listed and traded on the London Stock Exchange under the symbol RBS. All ordinary shares are deposited with the principal London office of The Bank of New York Mellon, as custodian for the depository.
Shareholder information
Dividend history |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Preference dividends |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2018 |
2018 |
2017 |
2016 |
2015 |
2014 |
Amount per share |
$ |
£ |
£ |
£ |
£ |
£ |
Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Series F (1) |
|
|
1.13 |
1.53 |
1.25 |
1.16 |
- Series H (1) |
|
|
0.97 |
1.34 |
1.19 |
1.10 |
- Series L (1) |
|
|
0.77 |
1.06 |
0.94 |
0.87 |
- Series M (2) |
|
|
|
|
0.60 |
0.97 |
- Series N (2) |
|
|
|
|
0.60 |
0.96 |
- Series P (2) |
|
|
|
|
0.59 |
0.95 |
- Series Q (2) |
|
|
|
|
0.63 |
1.02 |
- Series R (2) |
|
|
|
0.71 |
0.99 |
0.93 |
- Series S (2) |
1.50 |
1.14 |
1.28 |
1.22 |
1.06 |
1.00 |
- Series T (2) |
|
|
|
0.84 |
1.17 |
1.10 |
- Series U (2) |
4,566 |
3,475 |
6,741 |
5,637 |
4,912 |
4,637 |
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$0.01 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Series 1 (1) |
|
|
71.99 |
67.28 |
59.66 |
55.34 |
Non-cumulative preference shares of 0.01 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Series 1 (2) |
59.61 |
44.65 |
48.98 |
46.94 |
38.64 |
44.32 |
- Series 2 (2) |
87.02 |
65.18 |
44.72 |
40.00 |
37.27 |
42.31 |
- Series 3 (2) |
1,099 |
823 |
3,504 |
3,033 |
2,533 |
2,833 |
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.01 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Series 1 (1) |
|
|
73.87 |
73.87 |
73.87 |
73.87 |
Non-cumulative preference shares of £1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Series 1 (2) |
36.60 |
27.41 |
26.67 |
28.60 |
29.04 |
29.01 |
Notes:
(1) Classified as subordinated liabilities.
(2) Classified as equity.
On 26 November 2009, RBS entered into a State Aid Commitment Deed with HM Treasury containing commitments and undertakings that were designed to ensure that HM Treasury was able to comply with the commitments to be given by it to the European Commission for the purposes of obtaining approval for the State aid provided to RBS. As part of these commitments and undertakings, RBS agreed not to pay discretionary coupons and dividends on its existing hybrid capital instruments for a period of two years. This period commenced on 30 April 2010 for RBS Group instruments and ended on 30 April 2012; the two year deferral period for RBS Holdings N.V. instruments commenced on 1 April 2011 and ended on 1 April 2013. On 4 May 2012, RBS determined that it was in a position to recommence payments on RBS Group instruments. In June 2013 RBS Holdings N.V. resumed payments on its hybrid capital instruments. Future coupons and dividends on hybrid capital instruments will only be paid subject to, and in accordance with, the terms of the relevant instruments.
Ordinary dividends
In 2018 RBS paid an interim dividend of £241 million, or 2.0p per ordinary share. In addition, the company announced that the directors have recommended a final dividend of 3.5p per ordinary share, and a further special dividend of 7.5p per ordinary share.
The final and special dividends recommended by directors are subject to shareholders approval at the Annual General Meeting on 25 April 2019. If approved, payment will be made on 30 April 2019 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 22 March 2019. The ex-dividend date will be 21 March 2019. No dividend was paid in 2017.
Shareholder information
Taxation of US Holders
The following discussion summarises certain US federal and UK tax consequences of the ownership and disposition of ordinary shares, ADSs representing ordinary shares (ordinary ADSs), ADSs representing noncumulative dollar preference shares (preference ADSs) or PROs by a beneficial owner that is a citizen or resident of the United States or that otherwise will be subject to US federal income tax on a net income basis in respect of the ordinary shares, ordinary ADSs, preference ADSs or PROs (a US Holder). This summary assumes that a US Holder is holding ordinary shares, ordinary ADSs, preference ADSs or PROs, as applicable, as capital assets. This summary does not address the tax consequences to a US Holder (i) that is resident in the UK for UK tax purposes, (ii) that carries on a trade, profession or vocation through a branch, agency or permanent establishment in the UK in connection with which their ordinary shares, ordinary ADSs, preference ADSs or PROs are held, used or acquired, or (iii) generally, that is a corporation which alone or together with one or more associated companies, controls, directly or indirectly, 10% or more of the voting stock of the company, nor does this summary address all of the tax consequences that may be relevant to a US Holder in light of its particular circumstances, including alternative minimum tax and Medicare contribution tax consequences, as well as differing tax consequences that may apply to US Holders subject to special rules, such as certain financial institutions, dealers or traders in securities who use a mark-to-market method of tax accounting, persons holding ordinary shares, ordinary ADSs, preference ADSs or PROs as part of a hedging transaction, straddle, wash sale, conversion transaction or integrated transaction or persons entering into a constructive sale with respect to such securities, persons whose functional currency for US federal income tax purposes is not the US dollar, persons required for US federal income tax purposes to confirm the timing of income accruals to their financial statements under Section 451 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the Code), entities classified as partnerships for US federal income tax purposes, tax-exempt entities or persons that own or are deemed to own 10% or more of the stock of the company by vote or value.
The statements and practices set forth below regarding US and UK tax laws, including the US/UK double taxation convention relating to income and capital gains which entered into force on 31 March 2003 (the Treaty) and the US/UK double taxation convention relating to estate and gift taxes (the Estate Taxation Treaty), are based on those laws and practices as in force and as applied in practice on the date of this report. This summary is not exhaustive of all possible tax considerations and holders are advised to satisfy themselves as to the overall tax consequences, including specifically the consequences under US federal, state, local and other laws, and possible changes in taxation law, of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of ordinary shares, ordinary ADSs, preference ADSs or PROs by consulting their own tax advisers.
The following discussion assumes that the company was not a passive foreign investment company for the taxable year ended 31 December 2018 - see Passive Foreign Investment Company (PFIC) considerations on page 285.
Ordinary shares, ordinary ADSs and preference ADSs
Taxation of dividends
For the purposes of the Treaty, the Estate Taxation Treaty and the Code, US Holders of ordinary ADSs and preference ADSs should be treated as owners of the respective ordinary shares and the non-cumulative dollar preference shares underlying such ADSs.
The US Treasury has expressed concerns that parties to whom depositary receipts are released before shares are delivered to the depositary, or intermediaries in the chain of ownership between US holders and the issuer of the security underlying the depositary receipts, may be taking actions that are inconsistent with the claiming of foreign tax credits for US holders of depositary receipts. Such actions would also be inconsistent with the claiming of the favourable US tax rates applicable to dividends received by certain non-corporate US holders (described below). Accordingly, the availability of the favourable tax rates for dividends received by certain non-corporate US holders could be affected by actions taken by such parties or intermediaries.
The company is not required to withhold UK tax at source from dividend payments it makes or from any amount (including any amounts in respect of accrued dividends) distributed by the company. US Holders who are not resident in the UK and who do not carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a branch, agency or permanent establishment in connection with which their ordinary shares, ordinary ADSs or preference ADSs are held, used or acquired will not be subject to UK tax in respect of any dividends received on the relevant shares or ADSs.
Distributions by the company (other than certain pro-rata distributions of ordinary shares or rights to receive such shares) will constitute foreign source dividend income for US federal income tax purposes to the extent paid out of the current or accumulated earnings and profits of the company, as determined under US federal income tax principles. Because the company does not maintain calculations of its earnings and profits under US federal income tax principles, it is expected that distributions will be reported to US Holders as dividends. Payments will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction generally allowed to corporate US holders.
Subject to applicable limitations that vary depending upon a US Holders particular circumstances and the discussion above regarding concerns expressed by the US Treasury, dividends paid to certain non-corporate US Holders may be taxable at the favourable rates applicable to long-term capital gain. Non-corporate US Holders should consult their own tax advisers to determine whether they are subject to any special rules that limit their ability to be taxed at these favourable rates.
Dividends will be included in a US Holders income on the date of the US Holders (or in the case of ADSs, the depositarys) receipt of the dividend. The amount of any dividend paid in pounds sterling to be included in income by a US Holder will be the US dollar amount calculated by reference to the relevant exchange rate in effect on the date of such receipt regardless of whether the payment is in fact converted into US dollars. If the dividend is converted into US dollars on the date of receipt, the US Holder generally should not be required to recognise foreign currency gain or loss in respect of the dividend income. If the amount of such dividend is converted into US dollars after the date of receipt, the US Holder may have foreign currency gain or loss.
Taxation of Capital Gains
A US Holder that is not resident in the UK will not normally be liable for UK tax on capital gains realised on the disposition of an ordinary share, an ordinary ADS or a preference ADS unless at the time of the disposal, in the case of a corporate US Holder, such US Holder carries on a trade in the UK through a permanent establishment or, in the case of any other US Holder, such US Holder carries on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a branch or agency and, in each case, such ordinary share, ordinary ADS or preference ADS is or has been used, held or acquired by or for the purposes of such trade (or profession or vocation), carried on through such permanent establishment, branch or agency. Special rules apply to individuals who are temporarily not resident in the UK.
A US Holder will, upon the sale or other disposition of an ordinary share, an ordinary ADS or a preference ADS, or upon the redemption of preference ADS, generally recognise capital gain or loss for US federal income tax purposes (assuming that in the case of a redemption of a preference ADS, such US Holder does not own, and is not deemed to own, any ordinary shares or ordinary ADSs of the company) in an amount equal to the difference between the amount realised (excluding, in the case of preference ADSs, any amounts attributable to declared but unpaid dividends, which will generally be treated as dividends for U.S. federal income tax purposes and excluding, in the case of a redemption, any amount otherwise treated as a dividend for US federal income tax purposes) and the US Holders tax basis in
Shareholder information
such share or ADS. This capital gain or loss will be long-term capital gain or loss if the US Holder held the share or ADS so sold, disposed or redeemed for more than one year. The deductibility of capital losses is subject to limitations.
A US Holder who is liable for both UK and US tax on a gain recognised on the disposal of an ordinary share, an ordinary ADS or a preference ADS may be entitled, subject to certain limitations, to credit the UK tax against its US federal income tax liability in respect of such gain.
Estate and gift tax
Subject to the discussion of the Estate Tax Treaty in the following paragraph, ordinary shares, ordinary ADSs or preference ADSs beneficially owned by an individual may be subject to UK inheritance tax (subject to exemptions and reliefs) on the death of the individual or in certain circumstances, if such shares or ADSs are the subject of a gift (including a transfer at less than market value) by such individual. Inheritance tax is not generally chargeable on gifts to individuals made more than seven years before the death of the donor. Ordinary shares, ordinary ADSs or preference ADSs held by the trustees of a settlement may also be subject to UK inheritance tax. Special rules apply to such settlements.
An ordinary share, an ordinary ADS or a preference ADS beneficially owned by an individual, whose domicile is determined to be the United States for purposes of the Estate Tax Treaty and who is not a national of the UK, will not be subject to UK inheritance tax on the individuals death or on a lifetime transfer of such share or ADS, except in certain cases where the share or ADS (i) is comprised in a settlement (unless, at the time of the settlement, the settlor was domiciled in the United States and was not a national of the UK); (ii) is part of the business property of a UK permanent establishment of an enterprise; or (iii) pertains to a UK fixed base of an individual used for the performance of independent personal services.
The Estate Tax Treaty generally provides a credit against US federal estate or gift tax liability for the amount of any tax paid in the UK in a case where the ordinary share, ordinary ADS or preference ADS is subject to both UK inheritance tax and US federal estate or gift tax.
UK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax (SDRT)
The following is a summary of the UK stamp duty and SDRT consequences of transferring an ADS (otherwise than to the custodian on cancellation of the ADS) or of transferring an ordinary share. A transfer of an ADS executed and retained in the United States will not give rise to a liability to pay stamp duty and an agreement to transfer an ADS will not give rise to SDRT. Stamp duty or SDRT will normally be payable on or in respect of transfers of ordinary shares and accordingly any holder that acquires or intends to acquire ordinary shares is advised to consult its own tax adviser in relation to stamp duty and SDRT.
PROs
United States
Payments of interest on a PRO (including any UK withholding tax, as to which see below) will constitute foreign source dividend income for US federal income tax purposes to the extent paid out of the current or accumulated earnings and profits of the company, as determined under US federal income tax principles. Because the company does not maintain calculations of its earnings and profits under US federal income tax principles, it is expected that distributions will be reported to US Holders as dividends. Payments will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction generally allowed to corporate US holders.
A US Holder who is entitled under the Treaty to a refund of UK tax, if any, withheld on a payment will not be entitled to claim a foreign tax credit with respect to the refundable tax. Subject to applicable limitations that vary depending upon a US Holders particular circumstances, dividends paid to certain non-corporate US Holders may be taxable at the favourable rates applicable to long-term capital gain. Non-corporate US Holders should consult their own tax advisers to determine whether they are subject to any special rules that limit their ability to be taxed at these favourable rates. A US Holder will, upon the sale, exchange or redemption of a PRO, generally recognise capital gain or loss for US federal income tax purposes (assuming that in the case of a redemption, such US Holder does not own, and is not deemed to own, any ordinary shares or ordinary ADSs of the company) in an amount equal to the difference between the amount realised (excluding any amount in respect of mandatory interest and any missed payments which are to be satisfied on a missed payment satisfaction date, which would be treated as ordinary income) and the US Holders tax basis in the PRO. This capital gain or loss will be long-term capital gain or loss if the US Holder held the PRO so sold, disposed or redeemed for more than one year. The deductibility of capital losses is subject to limitations.
A US Holder who is liable for both UK and US tax on gain recognised on the disposal of PROs may be entitled, subject to certain limitations, to credit the UK tax against all or a portion of its US federal income tax liability in respect of such gain.
United Kingdom
Taxation of payments on the PROs
Payments on the PROs will constitute interest rather than dividends for UK withholding tax purposes. With effect from 1 January 2016, the PROs are expected to fall within the exemption from withholding tax provided for in the Taxation of Regulatory Capital Securities Regulations 2013 (as amended by the Taxation of Regulatory Capital Securities (Amendment) Regulations 2015). Further, payments of interest will not be subject to withholding or deduction for or on account of UK tax as long as the PROs continue to be listed on a recognised stock exchange within the meaning of section 1005 of the Income Tax Act 2007, such as the main market of the New York Stock Exchange. In all other cases, an amount must be withheld on account of UK income tax at the basic rate (currently 20%) subject to any direction to the contrary by HM Revenue & Customs under the Treaty and except that the withholding obligation does not apply to payments to persons who the company reasonably believes are within the charge to corporation tax or fall within various categories enjoying a special tax status (including charities and pension funds), or are partnerships consisting of such persons (unless HM Revenue & Customs directs otherwise). Where interest has been paid under deduction of UK withholding tax, US Holders may be able to recover the tax deducted under the Treaty.
HM Revenue & Customs have powers in certain circumstances to obtain information in relation to interest and payments derived from securities. HM Revenue & Customs may communicate this information to the tax authorities of other jurisdictions.
HM Revenue & Customs confirmed at around the time of the issue of the PROs that interest payments would not be treated as distributions for UK tax purposes by reason of (i) the fact that interest may be deferred under the terms of issue; or (ii) the undated nature of the PROs, provided that at the time an interest payment is made, the PROs are not held by a company which is associated with the company or by a funded company. A company will be associated with the company if, broadly speaking, it is part of the same group as the company.
A company will be a funded company for these purposes if there are arrangements involving that company being put in funds (directly or indirectly) by the company, or an entity associated with the company. In this respect, HM Revenue & Customs has confirmed that a company holding an interest in the PROs which incidentally has banking facilities with any company associated with the company will not be a funded company by virtue of such facilities.
Interest on the PROs constitutes UK source income for UK tax purposes and, as such, may be subject to income tax by direct assessment even where paid without withholding. However, interest with a UK source received without deduction or
Shareholder information
withholding on account of UK tax will not be chargeable to UK tax in the hands of a US Holder unless, in the case of a corporate US Holder, such US Holder carries on a trade in the UK through a UK permanent establishment or in the case of other US Holders, such persons carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a branch or agency in each case in connection with which the interest is received or to which the PROs are attributable. There are also exemptions for interest received by certain categories of agents (such as some brokers and investment managers).
Disposal (including redemption)
A disposal (including redemption) of PROs by a non-corporate US Holder will not give rise to any liability to UK tax on capital gains unless the US Holder carries on a trade (which for this purpose includes a profession or a vocation) in the UK through a branch or agency and the PROs are, or have been, held or acquired for the purposes of that trade, carried on through such branch or agency.
A transfer of PROs by a US Holder will not give rise to a charge to UK tax on accrued but unpaid interest payments, unless the US Holder is an individual or other non-corporate taxpayer and at any time in the relevant year of assessment or accounting period carries on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a branch or agency to which the PROs are attributable.
Annual tax charges
Corporate US Holders of PROs may be subject to UK tax charges (or tax relief) by reference to fluctuations in exchange rates and in respect of profits, gains and losses arising from the PROs (including on a disposal or redemption), but only if such corporate US Holders carry on a trade in the UK through a UK permanent establishment to which the PROs are attributable.
Inheritance tax
In relation to PROs held through Depository Trust Company (or any other clearing system), the UK inheritance tax position is not free from doubt in respect of a lifetime transfer, or death of, a US Holder who is not domiciled nor deemed to be domiciled in the UK for inheritance tax purposes; HM Revenue & Customs is known to consider that the situs of securities held in this manner is not necessarily determined by the place where the securities are registered. In appropriate circumstances, there may be a charge to UK inheritance tax as a result of a lifetime transfer at less than market value by, or on the death of, such US Holder. Inheritance tax is not generally chargeable on gifts to individuals made more than seven years before the death of the donor. However, exemption from, or a reduction of, any such UK tax liability may be available under the Estate Tax Treaty (see below). US Holders should consult their professional advisers in relation to such potential liability. PROs beneficially owned by an individual, whose domicile is determined to be the United States for the purposes of the Estate Tax Treaty and who is not a national of the UK, will not be subject to UK inheritance tax on the individuals death or on a lifetime transfer of the PRO, except in certain cases where the PRO (i) is comprised in a settlement (unless, at the time of the settlement, the settlor was domiciled in the United States and was not a national of the UK); (ii) is part of the business property of a UK permanent establishment of an enterprise; or (iii) pertains to a UK fixed base of an individual used for the performance of independent personal services.
The Estate Tax Treaty generally provides a credit against US federal estate or gift tax liability for the amount of any tax paid in the UK in a case where the PRO is subject to both UK inheritance tax and US federal estate or gift tax.
Stamp duty and SDRT
No stamp duty, SDRT or similar tax is imposed in the UK on the issue, transfer or redemption of the PROs.
Passive Foreign Investment Company (PFIC) considerations
In general, a foreign corporation will be a PFIC for any taxable year in which, after taking into account the income and assets of the corporation and certain subsidiaries pursuant to applicable look-through rules, either (i) at least 75% of its gross income is passive income or (ii) at least 50% of the average quarterly value of its assets is attributable to assets that produce passive income or are held for the production of passive income. The company does not believe that it was a PFIC for its 2018 taxable year. Although interest income is generally passive income, a special rule allows banks to treat their banking business income as non-passive. To qualify for this rule, a bank must satisfy certain requirements regarding its licensing and activities. The companys possible status as a PFIC is determined annually, however, and may be subject to change if the company fails to qualify under this special rule for any year in which a US Holder owned ordinary shares, ordinary ADSs, preference ADSs or PROs.
If the company were to be treated as a PFIC for any taxable year during which a US Holder owns ordinary shares, ordinary ADSs, preference ADSs or PROs, US Holders would generally be subject to adverse US federal income tax consequences and certain reporting obligations. Holders should consult their own tax advisers as to the potential application of the PFIC rules to the ownership and disposition of the companys ordinary shares, ordinary ADSs, preference ADSs or PROs.
Information reporting and backup withholding
Payments on, and proceeds from the sale of, ordinary shares, ordinary ADSs, preference ADSs or PROs that are made within the United States or through certain U.S-related financial intermediaries may be subject to information reporting and backup withholding unless (i) the US Holder is an exempt recipient or (ii) in the case of backup withholding, the US Holder provides a correct taxpayer identification number and certifies that it is not subject to backup withholding. The amount of any backup withholding from a payment to a US Holder will be allowed as a credit against the US Holders US federal income tax liability and may entitle it to a refund, provided that the required information is timely furnished to the Internal Revenue Service.
Foreign financial assets reporting
Certain US Holders who are individuals (and certain entities controlled by individuals) may be required to report information relating to the companys securities, subject to certain exceptions (including an exception for securities held in accounts maintained by US financial institutions). US Holders are urged to consult their tax advisers regarding the application of these rules in the US Holders particular circumstances.
Exchange controls
The company has been advised that there are currently no UK laws, decrees or regulations which would prevent the import or export of capital, including the availability of cash or cash equivalents for use by the Group, or the remittance of dividends, interest or other payments to non-UK resident holders of the companys securities.
There are no restrictions under the Articles of Association of the company or under UK law, as currently in effect, which limit the right of non-UK resident owners to hold or, when entitled to vote, freely to vote the companys securities.
Memorandum and Articles of Association
The companys Memorandum and Articles of Association as in effect at the date of this Annual Report are registered with the Registrar of Companies of Scotland.
The following information is a summary of certain terms of the companys Memorandum of Association (the Memorandum) and Articles of Association (the Articles) as in effect at the date of this Annual Report on Form 20-F and certain relevant provisions of the Companies Act 2006 (the 2006 Act) where appropriate and as relevant to the holders of any class of share. The current Articles were adopted on 28 April 2010. The Articles were updated primarily to reflect the coming into force of the remaining provisions of the 2006 Act and the implementation of the Shareholder Rights Directive in the UK.
Shareholder information
An amendment was made to the Articles at a General Meeting held on 28 April 2010 in relation to the price at which certain classes of preference shares may be purchased.
A further amendment was made to the Articles at the Annual General Meeting held on 19 April 2011 to the effect that subject to existing class rights of shareholders, new preference shares can be issued with such rights and restrictions as the directors may determine. A further amendment was made to the Articles at the Annual General Meeting held on 30 May 2012 to include a new sub-article specifying the rights attaching to the Deferred shares arising as a result of share subdivision and consolidation.
The following summary description is qualified in its entirety by reference to the terms and provisions of the Memorandum and Articles (and, in the case of the summary description of the non-cumulative preference shares, the B Shares and the Dividend Access Share, by reference to the terms of issue of those shares determined by the Directors pursuant to the Articles prior to allotment). The Memorandum and Articles are registered with the Registrar of Companies of Scotland. Holders of any class of share are encouraged to read the full Memorandum and Articles, which have been filed as an exhibit to this Annual Report on Form 20-F.
Incorporation and registration
The company was incorporated and registered in Scotland under the Companies Act 1948 as a limited company on 25 March 1968 under the name National and Commercial Banking Group Limited. On 3 September 1979 the name was changed to The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Limited and on 10 March 1982, it changed its name to its present name and was registered under the Companies Acts 1948 to 1980 as a public company with limited liability. The company is registered under Company No. SC 45551.
Purpose and objects
The 2006 Act greatly reduces the constitutional significance of a companys memorandum of association and provides that a memorandum of association will record only the names of the subscribers and the number of shares each subscriber has agreed to take in the company. The 2006 Act further states that, unless a companys articles provide otherwise, a companys objects are unrestricted and abolishes the need for companies to have objects clauses. The company removed its objects clause together with all other provisions of its memorandum of association which by virtue of the 2006 Act were treated as forming part of the companys articles. The articles of association contain an express statement regarding the limited liability of the shareholders.
Directors
At each annual general meeting of the company, any Director appointed since the last annual general meeting and any Directors who were not appointed at one of the preceding two annual general meetings shall retire from office and may offer themselves for re-election by the members. Directors may be appointed by the company by ordinary resolution or by the Board. A director appointed by the Board holds office only until the next annual general meeting, whereupon he will be eligible for re-election.
Unless and until otherwise determined by ordinary resolution, the directors (other than alternate directors) shall be not more than twenty five. There is no stipulation in the Articles regarding a minimum number of directors; under the 2006 Act, and in the absence of express provision, the minimum number is two.
Directors interests
A director shall not vote at a meeting of the Board or a Committee of the Board on any resolution of the Board concerning a matter in which he has an interest (otherwise than by virtue of his interest in shares, debentures or other securities of, or otherwise in or through, the company) which (together with any interest of any person connected with him) is, to his knowledge, material unless his interests arises only because the resolution relates to one or more of the following matters:
(i) the giving of any security or indemnity to him pursuant to the Articles or in respect of money lent, or obligations incurred, by him at the request of, or for the benefit of, the company or any of its subsidiary undertakings;
(ii) the giving of any security or indemnity to a third party in respect of a debt or obligation of the company or any of its subsidiary undertakings for which he has assumed responsibility (in whole or in part) under a guarantee or indemnity or by the giving of security;
(iii) a proposal concerning an offer of shares, debentures or other securities of the company, or any of its subsidiary undertakings, for subscription or purchase, in which offer he is, or may be, entitled to participate as a holder of securities or in the underwriting or sub-underwriting of which he is to participate;
(iv) any proposal concerning any other body corporate in which he is interested, directly or indirectly, whether as an officer or shareholder or otherwise, provided that he is not the holder of shares representing one per cent or more of any class of the equity share capital of such body corporate;
(v) any proposal concerning the adoption, modification or operation of a pension fund or retirement, death or disability benefits scheme or employees share scheme which relates both to directors and employees of the company or a subsidiary of the company and does not provide any privilege or advantage in respect of any director which it does not accord to the employees to which the fund or scheme relates;
(vi) a contract or arrangement for the benefit of the employees of the company or any of its subsidiary undertakings which does not accord him any privilege or advantage not generally accorded to the employees to whom the contract or arrangement relates; and
(vii) a proposal concerning any insurance which the company proposes to purchase and/or maintain for the benefit of any directors or for persons who include directors of the company.
Under the 2006 Act, a director must avoid a situation where he has, or can have, a direct or indirect interest that conflicts, or possibly may conflict, with the companys interests.
The 2006 Act allows directors of public companies, where appropriate, to authorise conflicts and potential conflicts where the articles of association contain a provision to this effect. The 2006 Act also allows the articles of association to contain other provisions for dealing with directors conflicts of interest to avoid a breach of duty.
Clause 92 of the Articles, gives the directors authority to authorise any matter which would or might otherwise constitute or give rise to a breach of the duty of a director under the 2006 Act to avoid a situation in which he has, or can have, a direct or indirect interest that conflicts, or possibly may conflict with the company.
Authorisation of any matter pursuant to Clause 92 must be approved in accordance with normal board procedures by directors who have no interest in the matter being considered. In taking the decision, the directors must act in a way they consider, in good faith, will be most likely to promote the companys success.
Any authorisation of a matter may be given on or subject to such conditions or limitations as the directors determine, whether at the time of authorisation or subsequently, including providing for the exclusion of the interested directors from the receipt of information or participation in discussion relating to the matter authorised by the directors and providing that interested directors in receipt of confidential information from a third party are not obliged to disclose such information to the company or use the information in relation to the companys affairs. Any authorisation may be terminated by the directors at any time.
A director is not, except as otherwise agreed by him, accountable to the company for any benefit which he, or a person connected with him, derives from any matter authorised by the directors and any contract, transaction or arrangement relating to such matter is not liable to be avoided on the grounds of such benefit.
Shareholder information
Directors power to allot securities
In line with market practice, the Articles provide that the authority to allot shares and the disapplication of pre-emption rights will not be set out in the Articles, but subject to resolutions passed at the companys annual general meeting to obtain these authorities on an annual basis.
Borrowing powers
The directors may exercise all the powers of the company to borrow money and to mortgage or charge its undertaking, property and uncalled capital and to issue debentures and other securities, whether outright or as collateral security for any debt, guarantee, liability or obligation of the company, or of any third party.
Qualifying shareholding
Directors are not required to hold any shares of the company by way of qualification.
Classes of shares
The company has issued and outstanding the following four general classes of shares, namely ordinary shares, preference shares, B Shares and a Dividend Access Share, to which the provisions set forth below apply. In addition, the company has as part of its share capital Additional Value Shares (AVSs). All of the issued AVSs were converted into non-voting deferred shares in December 2003. The terms of those AVSs are set out in Schedule 3 to the Articles. The terms of the issued B Shares (designated Series 1 Class B Shares) and the Dividend Access Share (designated a Series 1 Dividend Access Share) were determined by the directors pursuant to the Articles prior to the time of allotment, and apply as if they were set out in the Articles.
Dividends
General
Subject to the provisions of the 2006 Act and Clause 123 of the Articles, the company may, by ordinary resolution, declare dividends on ordinary shares save that no dividend shall be payable except out of profits available for distribution, or in excess of the amount recommended by the Board or in contravention of the special rights attaching to any share. Any dividend which has remained unclaimed for 12 years from the date of declaration shall be forfeited and shall revert to the company.
The company may cease sending dividend warrants and cheques by post or otherwise to a member if such instruments have been returned undelivered to, or left uncashed by, that member on at least two consecutive occasions, or, following one such occasion, reasonable enquiries have failed to establish any new address or account of the registered holder. The company may resume sending warrants and cheques if the holder requests such recommencement in writing.
Preference shares
Each cumulative preference share confers the right to a fixed cumulative preferential dividend payable half-yearly. Each non-cumulative preference share confers the right to a preferential dividend (not exceeding a specified amount) payable in the currency of the relevant share. The rate of such dividend and the date of payment thereof, together with the terms and conditions of the dividend, are as may be determined by the directors prior to allotment. Cumulative preference share dividends are paid in priority to any dividend on any other class of share.
The non-cumulative preference shares rank for dividend after the cumulative preference shares but rank pari passu with each other and any shares expressed to rank, in terms of participation in the profits of the company, in some or all respects pari passu therewith and otherwise in priority to dividends payable on the ordinary shares and any other share capital in the company.
The directors may resolve prior to the issue and allotment of any series of non-cumulative preference shares that full dividends in respect of a particular dividend payment date will not be declared and paid if, (i) in its sole and absolute discretion, the directors resolve prior to the relevant dividend payment date that such dividend (or part thereof) shall not be paid and/or (ii) in the opinion of the directors, payment of a dividend would cause a breach of the UK Financial Services Authoritys capital adequacy requirements applicable to the company or its subsidiaries, or subject to the next following paragraph, insufficient distributable profits of the company are available to cover the payment in full of all dividends after having paid any dividends payable on any of the cumulative preference shares.
If dividends will be paid but, in the opinion of the directors, insufficient distributable profits of the company are available to cover the payment in full of dividends after having paid any dividends payable on any of the cumulative preference shares, dividends will be declared by the directors, pro rata on the non-cumulative preference shares to the extent of the available distributable profits.
The non-cumulative preference shares will carry no further rights to participate in the profits of the company and if, and to the extent, any dividend or part of any dividend is on any occasion not paid for any of the reasons described above, holders of non-cumulative preference shares will have no claim in respect of such non-payment.
If any dividend is not payable for the reasons described in clause (ii) of the third paragraph of this subsection, the directors may pay a special dividend not exceeding US$0.01, £0.01 or 0.01 (depending on the currency of the relevant preference share) per share.
If the dividend payable on any series of non-cumulative preference shares on the most recent payment date is not paid in full, or if a sum is not set aside to provide for such payment in full, in either case for the reasons set forth in clause (ii) of the third paragraph of this subsection, no dividends may be declared on any other share capital of the company and no sum may be set aside for the payment of a dividend on any other share capital (in each case other than the cumulative preference shares), unless, on the date of declaration, an amount equal to the dividend payable in respect of the then current dividend period for such series of non-cumulative preference shares is set aside for payment in full on the next dividend payment date.
If any dividend payable on the non-cumulative preference shares is not paid in full or if a sum is not set aside to provide for such payment in full (in either case for the reasons set forth in clause (ii) of the third paragraph of this subsection), the company may not redeem or purchase or otherwise acquire any other share capital of the company and may not set aside any sum nor establish any sinking fund for its redemption, purchase or other such acquisition, until such time as dividends have been declared and paid in full in respect of successive dividend periods together aggregating not less than twelve months.
The non-payment of any dividend (in full or in part) by reason of the exercise of the directors discretion referred to in clause (i) of the third paragraph of this subsection, shall not prevent or restrict (a) the declaration and payment of dividends on any other series of non-cumulative preference shares or on any non-cumulative preference shares expressed to rank pari passu with the non-cumulative preference shares, (b) the setting aside of sums for the payment of such dividends, (c) except as set forth in the following paragraph, the redemption, purchase or other acquisition of shares in the company by the company, or (d) except as set forth in the following paragraph, the setting aside of sums, or the establishment of sinking funds, for any such redemption, purchase or other acquisition by the company.
If dividends are not declared and paid in full on any series of non-cumulative preference shares as a result of the directors discretion referred to in clause (i) of the third paragraph of this subsection, then the company may not redeem, purchase or otherwise acquire for any consideration any share capital ranking after such preference shares, and may not set aside any sum nor
Shareholder information
establish any sinking fund for the redemption, purchase or other acquisition thereof, until such time as the company has declared and paid in full dividends on such series of non-cumulative preference shares in respect of successive dividend periods together aggregating no less than twelve months. In addition, no dividend may be declared or paid on any of the companys share capital ranking after such preference shares until the dividend in respect of a particular dividend payment date payable on the preference shares to which the directors discretion in clause (i) of the third paragraph of this subsection applies has been declared and paid in full.
With effect from 19 April 2011, subject to existing class rights of shareholders, new preference shares can be issued with such rights and restrictions as the directors may determine.
Non-voting deferred shares
The holders of non-voting deferred shares are not entitled to the payment of any dividend or other distribution.
B Shares
Prior to the occurrence of a Trigger Event (as defined below) in respect of any Series 1 Class B Shares, those Series 1 Class B Shares rank equally with the holders of ordinary shares in respect of any cash dividends, and each Series 1 Class B Share will entitle its holder to the same cash dividend as is (or may, at the election of a holder of the ordinary share, be) payable to the holder of one ordinary share, as adjusted from time to time to reflect any consolidation, reclassification or subdivision in relation to the ordinary shares.
If a Trigger Event has occurred in respect of any Series 1 Class B Shares, the Series 1 Class B Shares in respect of which the Trigger Event has occurred will rank pari passu with the holders of the ordinary shares in respect of any dividends paid on the ordinary shares. Each Series 1 Class B Share will entitle its holder to the same dividend as is (or may, at the election of a holder of an ordinary share, be) payable to the holder of one (as adjusted from time to time) ordinary share.
If a bonus issue of fully paid ordinary shares is made to holders of ordinary shares in lieu of a dividend, a holder of a Series 1 Class B Share in respect of which the Trigger Event has occurred will be entitled to receive the same number of ordinary shares as is payable to the holder of one (as adjusted from time to time) ordinary share, save that if the issue of such ordinary share(s) to such holder would result in it holding directly or indirectly more than 75% of the total issued ordinary shares, then such holder will instead receive further Series 1 Class B Shares of the same value.
A Trigger Event occurs in relation to the Series 1 Class B Shares in issue at the relevant time, if the daily volume weighted average price of the companys ordinary shares on the London Stock Exchange equals or exceeds £0.65 per ordinary share (subject to adjustment) for 20 or more complete dealing days in any period of 30 consecutive dealing days.
In October 2015, HMT converted its entire holding of B shares into 5.1 billion new ordinary shares of £1 each.
Dividend Access Share
Subject to the discretions, limitations and qualifications described in this subsection, non-cumulative dividends on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share will be payable from 22 December 2009 up to and including the Stop Date (if any). No dividends will be payable on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share after the Stop Date (if any). Up to and including the Stop Date, the company will pay dividends on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share when, as and if declared by its board of directors or a duly authorised committee of such board of directors (the board of directors). Up to and including the Stop Date, subject to the discretions, limitations and qualifications described in this section, the Series 1 Dividend Access Share will entitle the holder to receive out of the distributable profits of the company a non-cumulative dividend at the rate described below (the Dividend Access Share Dividend), in priority to the payment of any dividend to the holders of any class of ordinary share or Class B Share and pari passu in such regard with the holder of any other dividend access share then in issue.
The board of directors may in its sole and absolute discretion resolve that no Dividend Access Share Dividend shall be paid on a Dividend Access Share Dividend payment date.
The board of directors will, by 31 October in each financial year of the company, decide whether or not to pay an interim dividend on the ordinary shares or make an interim Ordinary Share Bonus Issue in that financial year. If it is decided that an interim dividend on the ordinary shares or an interim Ordinary Share Bonus Issue is to be paid or made in any financial year, the corresponding semi-annual (hereinafter referred to as first semi-annual) Dividend Access Share Dividend or Bonus Issue on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share in the same financial year will be paid or made at the time set out below. The record date for any first semi-annual Dividend Access Share Dividend or Bonus Issue on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share will be the same as the record date for any interim dividend on the ordinary shares or interim Ordinary Share Bonus Issue in the relevant financial year or otherwise will be three business days before 31 October in each year.
If paid or made, the first semi-annual Dividend Access Share Dividend or Bonus Issue on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share in a financial year will be paid or made on the same date that the corresponding interim dividend on the ordinary shares is paid or interim Ordinary Share Bonus Issue is made. If it is decided that no such interim dividend on the ordinary shares or interim Ordinary Share Bonus Issue will be paid or made in a financial year, the first semi-annual Dividend Access Share Dividend or Bonus Issue on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share in such financial year will, if to be paid or made, be so paid or made on 31 October in such financial year (commencing in 2010).
The Board of directors will, by 31 May in each financial year of the company, decide whether or not to recommend a dividend on the ordinary shares or make an Ordinary Share Bonus Issue which is expressed to be a final dividend for the immediately preceding financial year. If it is decided that such a dividend on the ordinary shares or Ordinary Share Bonus Issue is to be recommended and is subsequently approved by shareholders, the corresponding semi-annual (hereinafter referred to as second semi-annual) Dividend Access Share Dividend or Bonus Issue on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share expressed to be for the corresponding period will be paid at the time set out below. The record date for any second semi-annual Dividend Access Share Dividend or Bonus Issue on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share will be the same as the record date for any final dividend on the ordinary shares or final Ordinary Share Bonus Issue for the relevant financial year or otherwise will be three business days before 31 May in each year. If paid or made, the second semi-annual Dividend Access Share Dividend or Bonus Issue on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share in a financial year will be paid or made on the same date that the corresponding final dividend on the ordinary shares is paid or final Ordinary Share Bonus Issue is made. If it is decided that no such final dividend on the ordinary shares or Ordinary Share Bonus Issue will be paid or made in any year (the current year) for the immediately preceding financial year, any second semi-annual Dividend Access Share Dividend or Bonus Issue on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share expressed to be for the corresponding period will, if to be paid or made, be so paid or made on 31 May in the current year (commencing in 2010).
Any first semi-annual Dividend Access Share Dividend or second semi-annual Dividend Access Share Dividend will only be paid if (to the extent legally required) profits are available for distribution and are permitted by law to be distributed.
If paid or made, the first semi-annual Dividend Access Share Dividend on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share will be equal to an amount which, before taking account of any withholding or deduction required to be made on account of tax from such
Shareholder information
dividend and when added to any other cash dividends previously paid by the Company on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share since the Issue Date (before taking account of any withholding or deduction required to be made on account of tax from such cash dividends) equals the DAS Retirement Dividend Amount.
If paid or made, any second semi-annual Dividend Access Share Dividend on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share will be equivalent to (a) the greater of (i) on an annual basis, 7 per cent. of the aggregate issue price of all B Shares issued to HM Treasury, and (ii) 25 per cent. (subject to adjustment) of any cash dividend paid per Ordinary Shares, multiplied by the number of B Shares issued to HM Treasury, less (b) the fair market value of the aggregate amount of any dividends or distributions paid or made on any B Shares and/or on any Ordinary Shares issued on conversion of the B Shares, provided that any second semi-annual Dividend Access Share Dividend will not in any event exceed a sum which, before taking account of any withholding or deduction required to be made on account of tax from such dividend and when added to any other cash dividends previously paid by the Company on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share since the Issue Date (before taking account of any withholding or deduction required to be made on account of tax from such cash dividends), would exceed the DAS Retirement Dividend Amount.
In the event of a change in the frequency of dividend payments on the ordinary shares such that they are not paid semi-annually consistent with the payment of Dividend Access Share Dividends on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share, the company will make such changes to the Dividend Access Share Dividend payment arrangements described above as, following consultation with the Independent Financial Adviser (acting as an expert), it determines are fair and reasonable to take account of such changed frequency.
Non-cumulative dividends on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share will be payable in respect of the period up to and including the Stop Date (if any). After the Stop Date (if any), the right of the holder of the Series 1 Dividend Access Share to any dividends (including any Dividend Access Share Dividends) shall cease and the Series 1 Dividend Access Share shall, without the need for any consent or approval from the holder of the Series 1 Dividend Access Share or any other action by the Company or the holder of the Series 1 Dividend Access Share, be re-designated as a Single Series 1 Class B Share on terms identical to all other Series 1 Class B Shares in issue at the Stop Date.
Any unpaid portion of the DAS Retirement Dividend Amount will be subject to an increase of 5 per cent per annum, calculated on a daily accrual basis from 1 January 2016, if such portion has not been paid before 1 January 2016 and an increase of 10 per cent. per annum calculated on a daily accruals basis from 1 January 2021, on any part of the balance that has not been paid before 1 January 2021.
Bonus Issue of Series 1 Class B Shares on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share
If the board of directors decides to pay a Dividend Access Share Dividend and either (i) no dividend has been paid on the ordinary shares and/or distribution made thereon in respect of the corresponding period, or (ii) a dividend has been paid and/or a distribution has been made on the ordinary shares otherwise than in cash in respect of the corresponding period, the board of directors may in its discretion determine that such Dividend Access Share Dividend will be paid in whole or in part by the company issuing Series 1 Class B Shares, credited as fully paid, to the holder of the Series 1 Dividend Access Share.
The number of such further Series 1 Class B Shares to be issued to the holder will be such number of Series 1 Class B Shares as is certified by an Independent Financial Adviser (acting as an expert) to be as nearly as possible equal to (but not greater than) the cash amount (disregarding any withholding or deduction required to be made on account of any tax and any associated tax credit) of such semi-annual Dividend Access Share Dividend or part thereof otherwise payable to such holder of the Series 1 Dividend Access Share, based on the fair market value of a Series 1 Class B Share at the time of such determination. A written opinion of such Independent Financial Adviser will be conclusive and binding on all parties, save in the case of manifest error. The additional Series 1 Class B Shares will rank pari passu in all respects with the fully paid Series 1 Class B Shares then in issue save only as regards participation in the relevant dividend.
Restrictions following non-payment of dividend
If any Dividend Access Share Dividend is not declared and paid in full in cash or otherwise, the company:
(i) may not, and will procure that no subsidiary undertaking of the company will, declare or pay dividends or other distributions on any Parity Securities (whether in cash or otherwise, and whether payable on the same date as the relevant Dividend Access Share Dividend or subsequently) or make any Ordinary Share Bonus Issue (whether to be made on the same date as the relevant Dividend Access Share Dividend or subsequently), and the company may not, and will procure that no subsidiary undertaking of the company shall, set aside any sum for the payment of these dividends or distributions; and
(ii) may not, and will procure that no subsidiary undertaking of the company will, redeem, purchase or otherwise acquire (whether on the same date as the relevant Dividend Access Share Dividend is payable or subsequently) for any consideration any of its Parity Securities or any depository or other receipts or certificates representing Parity Securities (other than any such purchases or acquisitions which are made in connection with any Employee Share Scheme (as defined in the terms of issue of the Series 1 Dividend Access Share) and (save as aforesaid) the company may not, and will procure that no subsidiary undertaking of the company shall, set aside any sum or establish any sinking fund (whether on the same date as the relevant Dividend Access Share Dividend is payable or subsequently) for the redemption, purchase or other acquisition of Parity Securities or any depositary or other receipts or certificates representing Parity Securities.
In each case until such time as Dividend Access Share Dividends are no longer payable (including as a result of the Stop Date occurring), or payment of Dividend Access Share Dividends in cash or otherwise has resumed in full, as the case may be.
Definitions in relation to this Dividend Access Share subsection
Bonus Issue means a bonus issue of Series 1 Class B Shares to the holder of the Series 1 Dividend Access Share.
DAS Retirement Dividend Amount means £1,500,000,000 (subject to increase).
Independent Financial Adviser means an independent financial institution appointed by the company and approved by HM Treasury.
Ordinary Share Bonus Issue means a bonus issue of fully paid ordinary shares to holders of ordinary shares in lieu of a dividend.
Parity Securities means ordinary shares, Series 1 Class B Shares and any other securities of the company or its subsidiary undertakings which rank pari passu with the ordinary shares, and/or Series 1 Class B Shares on a return of capital on a winding up, either issued by the company or issued by a subsidiary undertaking of the company with terms attached which benefit from a guarantee or support agreement entered into by the company which ranks pari passu with the ordinary shares, and/or Series 1 Class B Shares on a return of capital on a winding up.
Series 1 Class B Dividend Trigger Event means in relation to any Series 1 Class B Shares in issue at any time, the payment by the Company of total cash dividends on the Series 1 Dividend Access Share since the Issue Date in an aggregate amount (before taking account of any withholding or deduction required to be made on
Shareholder information
account of tax from such cash dividends) equal to the DAS Retirement Dividend Amount.
Stop Date means the date on which the Series 1 Class B Dividend Trigger Event occurs.
The final dividend payment on the Dividend Access Share (DAS) owned by HMT of £1.2 billion was paid in March 2016, effecting the immediate retirement of the DAS which was redesignated as a single B share and subsequently cancelled.
Distribution of assets on liquidation
Cumulative preference shares
In the event of a return of capital on a winding-up or otherwise, the holders of cumulative preference shares are entitled to receive out of t he surplus assets of the company available for distribution amongst the members (i) in priority to the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares and any other shares ranking pari passu therewith, the arrears of any fixed dividends including the amount of any dividend due for a payment after the date of commencement of any winding-up or liquidation but which is payable in respect of a half-year period ending on or before such date and (ii) pari passu with the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares and any other shares ranking pari passu therewith, the amount paid up or credited as paid up on such shares together with any premium.
Non-cumulative preference shares
Each non-cumulative preference share will confer on a winding up or liquidation (except (unless otherwise provided by the terms of issue) a redemption or purchase by the company of any shares in the capital of the company), the right to receive out of surplus assets of the company available for distribution amongst the members after payment of the arrears (if any) of the cumulative dividend on the cumulative preference shares and in priority to the holders of the ordinary shares, repayment of the amount paid up or credited as paid up on the non-cumulative preference shares together with any premium paid on issue pari passu with the holders of the cumulative preference shares and together with an amount equal to accrued and unpaid dividends.
Non-voting deferred shares
On a winding-up or other return of capital of the company, holders of non-voting deferred shares are entitled only to payment of the amounts paid up on the non-voting deferred shares, after repayment to the holders of ordinary shares of the nominal amount paid up on the ordinary shares held by them and payment of £100,000 on each ordinary share.
B Shares
On a winding-up, holders of the Series 1 Class B Shares will rank equally with the holders of the ordinary shares, the Series 1 Dividend Access Share and any other class of shares or securities of the company which rank equally with the Series 1 Class B Shares, the Series 1 Dividend Access Share or the ordinary shares on a winding-up or liquidation, and junior to all other shareholders and all creditors of the company. For these purposes, on a winding-up each holder of a Series 1 Class B Share will be deemed to hold one (as adjusted from time to time) ordinary share of the company for every Series 1 Class B Share held at the date of the commencement of such winding-up, and will be entitled to receive out of the surplus assets of the company remaining after payment of all prior-ranking claims, a sum equal to that payable to a holder of one (as adjusted) ordinary share in such event.
In October 2015, HMT converted its entire holding of B shares into 5.1 billion new ordinary shares of £1 each.
Dividend Access Share
On a winding-up, the holder of the Series 1 Dividend Access Share will rank equally with the holders of the ordinary shares, the Series 1 Class B Shares and any other class of shares or securities of the company which rank equally with the Series 1 Dividend Access Share, the Series 1 Class B Shares or the ordinary shares on a winding-up or liquidation, and junior to all other shareholders and all creditors of the company. For these purposes, on a winding-up the holder of the Series 1 Dividend Access Share will be deemed to hold one-tenth (as adjusted from time to time) of one ordinary share of the company, and will be entitled to receive out of the surplus assets of the company remaining after payment of all prior-ranking claims, a sum equal to that payable to a holder of one-tenth (as adjusted) of one ordinary share in such event.
The final dividend payment on the Dividend Access Share (DAS) owned by HMT of £1.2 billion was paid in March 2016, effecting the immediate retirement of the DAS which was redesignated as a single B share and subsequently cancelled.
General
On a winding-up of the company, the liquidator may, with the authority of any extraordinary resolution and any other sanction required by the Insolvency Act 1986 and subject to the rights attaching to any class of shares after payment of all liabilities, including the payment to holders of preference shares, divide amongst the members in specie or kind the whole or any part of the assets of the company or vest the whole or any part of the assets in trustees upon such trusts for the benefit of the members and may determine the scope and terms of those trusts. No member shall be compelled to accept any assets on which there is a liability.
Voting Rights
General
Subject to any rights or restrictions as to voting attaching to any shares or class of shares, on a show of hands every member who is present in person or by proxy at a general meeting shall have one vote (except that a proxy who is appointed by more than one member has one vote for and one vote against if the proxy has been instructed by one or more members to vote for the resolution and by one or more members to vote against the resolution) and on a poll every member present in person or by proxy shall have one vote for each 25 pence in nominal amount of shares held by him. No member shall, unless the directors otherwise determine, be entitled to vote at a general meeting or at a separate meeting of the holders of shares in the capital of the company, either in person or by proxy, in respect of any share held by him unless all monies presently payable by him in respect of that share have been paid. There is no obligation on the company to check and ensure that a proxy is voting at a general meeting in accordance with the voting directions provided by the appointing member. The chairman of a general meeting does not have a casting vote in the event of an equality of votes, as this is not permitted under the 2006 Act. The quorum required for a meeting of members is not less than five members present in person and entitled to vote.
If a meeting is adjourned because of the lack of a quorum, the members present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote will constitute a quorum at the adjourned meeting.
Meetings are convened upon written notice of not less than 21 days in respect of annual general meetings of members and not less than 14 days in respect of other meetings of members subject to certain conditions. An adjourned meeting may be called at shorter notice than applied to the original meeting, but where a meeting is adjourned for lack of quorum only if the adjourned meeting is held at least ten days after the original meeting and does not include any new business.
Cumulative preference shares
At a general meeting of the company, every holder of a cumulative preference share who is present in person or by proxy shall be entitled to one vote on a show of hands and, on a poll, every person who is present in person or by proxy shall have one vote for each 25 pence in nominal amount of shares held. No member shall be entitled to vote any share in person or by proxy unless all moneys owed in respect of that share have been paid.
Shareholder information
Non-cumulative preference shares
Holders of non-cumulative preference shares are not entitled to attend or vote at any general meeting unless the business of the meeting includes the consideration of a resolution for the winding-up of the company or any resolution directly varying or abrogating the rights attached to any such shares and then in such case only to speak to and vote upon any such resolution. However, holders have the right to vote in respect of any matter when the dividend payable on their shares has not been declared in full for such number of dividend periods as the directors shall determine prior to the allotment thereof.
Whenever a holder is entitled to vote at a general meeting, on a show of hands every shareholder who is present in person has one vote and, on a poll, every such holder who is present in person or by proxy shall have such number of votes as may be determined by the directors prior to allotment.
Non-voting deferred shares
The holders of non-voting deferred shares are not entitled to receive notice of or to attend or vote at any general meeting of the company or otherwise receive any shareholder communication.
B Shares
Holders of the Series 1 Class B Shares are not entitled to attend or vote at any general meeting unless the business of the meeting includes the consideration of a resolution for the winding-up of the company or any resolution varying or abrogating the rights attached to any such shares and then in such case only to speak to and vote upon any such resolution. If entitled to vote, each holder is entitled on a poll to two votes for each Series 1 Class B Share held.
In October 2015, HMT converted its entire holding of B shares into 5.1 billion new ordinary shares of £1 each.
Dividend Access Share
The holder of the Series 1 Dividend Access Share is not entitled to attend or vote at any general meeting unless the business of the meeting includes the consideration of a resolution for the winding-up of the company or any resolution varying or abrogating the rights attached to such share and then in such case only to speak to and vote upon any such resolution. If entitled to vote, the holder is entitled on a poll to one vote.
The final dividend payment on the Dividend Access Share (DAS) owned by HMT of £1.2 billion was paid in March 2016, effecting the immediate retirement of the DAS which was redesignated as a single B share and subsequently cancelled.
Redemption
Except as set forth in the following paragraph, unless the directors determine, prior to allotment of any particular series of non-cumulative preference shares, that such series shall be non-redeemable, the preference shares will be redeemable at the option of the company on any date which (subject to certain exceptions described in the terms of such shares) falls no earlier than such date (if any) as may be fixed by the directors, prior to allotment of such shares. On redemption, there shall be paid on each non-cumulative preference share the aggregate of its nominal amount together with any premium paid on issue, where applicable a redemption premium and accruals of dividend.
If the company wishes to issue redeemable shares, the Directors are authorised to determine the terms and manner of redemption.
Purchase
General
Under the 2006 Act a company requires shareholder authority to purchase its own shares, consolidate and sub-divide its shares and reduce its share capital.
Whenever non-cumulative preference shares are issued in the future the Articles have no restriction on the maximum purchase price payable by the company unless such restriction is expressly applied by the directors in relation to an issuance of non-cumulative preference shares.
Conversion rights
Convertible preference shares carry the right to convert into ordinary shares if they have not been the subject of a notice of redemption from the company, on or before a specified date determined by the directors. The right to convert will be exercisable by service of a conversion notice on the company within a specified period. The company will use reasonable endeavours to arrange the sale, on behalf of convertible preference shareholders who have submitted a conversion notice, of the ordinary shares which result from such conversion and to pay to them the proceeds of such sale so that they receive net proceeds equal to the nominal value of the convertible preference shares which were the subject of the conversion notice and any premium at which such shares were issued, provided that ordinary shares will not be sold at below a benchmark price (as determined prior to the issue of the relevant convertible preference shares by the directors).
B Shares
The B Shares are convertible into ordinary shares at HM Treasurys option at an initial conversion price of £0.50 per share, subject to adjustment.
In October 2015, HMT converted its entire holding of B shares into 5.1 billion new ordinary shares of £1 each.
Additional Value Shares
In December 2003, following the payment of aggregate dividends of £1 in respect of each AVS, all issued and outstanding AVSs were de-listed from the Official List and from trading on the London Stock Exchanges market for listed securities and converted into non-voting deferred shares of £0.01 each.
Changes in share capital and variation of rights
Subject to the provisions of the 2006 Act and without prejudice to any rights attached to any existing shares or class of shares, any share may be issued with such rights or restrictions as the company may by ordinary resolution determine or, subject to and in default of such determination, as the Board shall determine. Subject to the provisions of the 2006 Act, the company may issue shares which are, or at the option of the company or the holder are liable, to be redeemed. Subject to the provisions of the 2006 Act and the Articles, unissued shares are at the disposal of the Board.
The company may by ordinary resolution: increase its share capital; consolidate and divide all or any of its share capital into shares of larger amount than its existing shares; subject to the provisions of the 2006 Act, subdivide its shares, or any of them, into shares of smaller amount than is fixed by the Memorandum; or cancel any shares which have not been taken or agreed to be taken by any person and diminish the amount of its share capital by the amount of the shares so cancelled.
Subject to the provisions of the 2006 Act, if at any time the capital of the company is divided into different classes of shares, the rights attached to any class of shares may (unless further conditions are provided by the terms of issue of the shares of that class) be varied or abrogated, whether or not the company is being wound up, either with the consent in writing of the holders of three-quarters in-nominal value of the issued shares of the class or with the sanction of an extraordinary resolution passed at a separate general meeting of holders of the shares of the class (but not otherwise). To any such separate general meeting the provision of the Articles relating to general meeting s will apply, save that:
(i) if at any adjourned meeting of such holders a quorum as defined above is not present, two people who hold shares of the class, or their proxies, are a quorum; and
(ii) any such holder present in person or by proxy may demand a poll
The rights attaching to any class of shares having preferential rights are not, unless otherwise expressly provided by the terms of
Shareholder information
issue thereof, deemed to be varied by the creation or issue of further shares ranking, as regards participation in t he profits or assets of the company, pari passu therewith, but in no respect in priority thereto.
Disclosure of interests in shares
The 2006 Act gives the company the power to require persons who it believes to be, or have been within the previous three years, interested in its shares, to disclose prescribed particulars of those interests. Failure to supply the information or supplying a statement which is materially false may lead to the Board imposing restrictions upon the relevant shares. The restrictions available are the suspension of voting or other rights conferred by membership in relation to meetings of the company in respect of the relevant shares and, additionally, in the case of a shareholding representing at least 0.25 per cent of the class of shares concerned, the withholding of payment of dividends on, and the restriction of transfers of, the relevant shares.
Limitations on rights to own share
There are no limitations imposed by UK law or the Memorandum and Articles on the right of non-residents or foreign persons to hold or vote the companys shares other than the limitations that would generally apply to all of the companys shareholders.
Members resident abroad
Members with registered addresses outside the United Kingdom are not entitled to receive notices from the company unless they have given the company an address within the United Kingdom at which such notices may be served.
Sending notices and other documents to shareholders
The company may communicate with members by electronic and/or website communications. A member whose registered address is not within the United Kingdom shall not be entitled to receive any notice from the Company unless he gives the Company a postal address within the United Kingdom at which notices may be given to him.
Documents on display
Documents concerning the company may be inspected at 36 St Andrew Square, Edinburgh, EH2 2YB.
Executive directors service contracts and copies of directors indemnities granted by the company in terms of section 236 of the Companies Act 2006 may be inspected at the companys office at Gogarburn, Edinburgh, EH12 1HQ (telephone +44 (0)131 626 4114).
In addition, we file reports and other information with the SEC. You can read and copy these reports and other information at the SECs Public Reference Room at 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549. You can call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information on the Public Reference Room or contact the offices of The New York Stock Exchange, on which certain of our securities are listed, at 20 Broad Street, New York, New York 10005. The SEC also maintains a website at www.sec.gov which contains in electronic form each of the reports and other information that we have filed electronically with the SEC.
Incorporation and registration
The company was incorporated and registered in Scotland under the Companies Act 1948 as a limited company on 25 March 1968 under the name National and Commercial Banking Group Limited, and changed its name to The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Limited on 3 September 1979. On 10 March 1982 it was re-registered under the Companies Acts 1948 to 1980 as a public company with limited liability. The company is registered under Company No. SC45551
Shareholder information
Important addresses
Shareholder enquiries
Registrar
Computershare Investor Services PLC
The Pavilions
Bridgwater Road
Bristol BS99 6ZZ
Telephone: +44 (0)370 702 0135
Facsimile: +44 (0)370 703 6009
Website: www-uk.computershare.com/investor/contactus
ADR Depositary Bank
BNY Mellon Shareowner Services
PO Box 505000
Louisville, KY 40233-5000
Direct Mailing for overnight packages:
BNY Mellon Shareowner Services
462 South 4th Street
Suite 1600
Louisville KY 40202
Telephone: 1-888-269-2377 (US callers toll free)
Telephone: +1 201 680 6825 (International)
Email: shrrelations@cpushareownerservices.com
Website: www.mybnymdr.com
Corporate Governance and Regulatory Affairs
The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
PO Box 1000
Gogarburn Edinburgh EH12 1HQ
Telephone: +44 (0)131 556 8555
Investor Relations
280 Bishopsgate
London EC2M 4AA
Telephone: +44 (0)207 672 1758
Facsimile: +44 (0)207 672 1801
Email: investor.relations@rbs.com
Registered office
36 St Andrew Square
Edinburgh EH2 2YB
Telephone: +44 (0)131 556 8555
Registered in Scotland No. SC45551
Website
rbs.com
SEC website
More information is available on the SEC website at: sec.gov
Principal offices
The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
PO Box 1000, Gogarburn, Edinburgh EH12 1HQ
Telephone: +44 (0)131 626 0000
NatWest Markets Plc
250 Bishopsgate, London, EC2M 4AA
The Royal Bank of Scotland plc
PO Box 1000, Gogarburn, Edinburgh EH12 1HQ
250 Bishopsgate, London EC2M 4AA
National Westminster Bank Plc
250 Bishopsgate, London EC2M 4AA
Ulster Bank Limited
11-16 Donegall Square East,
Belfast BT1 5UB, Northern Ireland
Ulster Bank Ireland DAC
Ulster Bank Group Centre,
Georges Quay
Dublin 2, D02 VR98
Republic of Ireland
NatWest Markets Group Holdings Corp.
600 Washington Blvd
Stamford, CT 06901 USA
Coutts & Company
440 Strand, London WC2R 0QS
The Royal Bank of Scotland International Limited
Royal Bank House, 71 Bath Street
St Helier, Jersey, Channel Islands JE4 8PJ
Shareholder information
Exhibit Index
Shareholder information
4.18(1) |
|
|
4.19(2) |
|
|
4.20(2) |
|
|
4.21(2) |
|
|
4.22 |
|
|
4.23 |
|
|
8.1 |
|
Principal subsidiaries of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc |
12.1 |
|
|
12.2 |
|
|
13.1 |
|
|
15.1 |
|
Consent of independent registered public accounting firm (Ernst & Young LLP) |
101.INS |
|
XBRL Instance Document |
101.SCH |
|
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Scheme |
101.CAL |
|
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Scheme Calculation Linkbase |
101.DEF |
|
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Scheme Definition Linkbase |
101.LAB |
|
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Scheme Label Linkbase |
101.PRE |
|
XBRL Taxonomy Extension Scheme Presentation Linkbase |
Notes:
(1) |
|
Confidential treatment has been granted. |
|
|
|
(2) |
|
Confidential treatment has been requested. Confidential materials have been redacted and separately filed with the SEC. |
SIGNATURE
The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.
The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
Registrant
/s/ Katie Murray
Katie Murray
Chief Financial Officer
28 February 2019